JP7599668B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Gaming machines have been proposed in the past in which the winning probability and other settings can be set to one of a number of different states by a game center manager changing the settings (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 6-91049

However, conventional gaming machines have a problem in that they lack measures to prevent fraudulent activities.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the deterrent effect against fraudulent activities .

Effective solutions for achieving the above-mentioned objectives are shown below. The actions and other details will be explained as necessary. For ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and other details will be shown in the embodiments of the invention as appropriate, but are not intended to be limiting.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides
A gaming machine capable of holding a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and awarding a predetermined benefit based on the result of the lottery,
A specific mode generating means for generating a specific mode in which progress of a game is disabled;
A specific abnormality detection means for detecting a specific abnormality;
A specific abnormality notification means for performing a specific abnormality notification corresponding to the specific abnormality,
The specific mode can be canceled by a specific administrator operation,
The specific abnormality detection means is capable of detecting the specific abnormality not only during normal play but also during the specific mode,
The specific abnormality notification can be performed using a plurality of notification units,
the plurality of notification units include a specific notification unit provided at a position that is difficult or impossible for a player to see, and a special notification unit provided at a position that is easy for a player to see,
The specific abnormality notification performed during normal play can be recognized by both the specific notification unit and the special notification unit, but the specific abnormality notification performed during the specific mode cannot be recognized by the special notification unit and can be recognized by the specific notification unit,
A special light-emitting unit that can emit light in connection with the execution of the lottery and is provided at a position that is easily visible to a player but is different from the special notification unit;
The special light-emitting unit is composed of a plurality of special light-emitting bodies,
In the specific mode, all of the plurality of special light emitters in the special light emitter are turned off,
When the specific mode is cancelled by the specific administrator operation, the specific game information among the game information before the specific mode was generated is initialized, but the specific game information is not initialized and is retained, and the specific mode cannot be cancelled without initializing the specific game information.
In addition, the following means are disclosed for reference as an invention separate from the present invention.
Method 1:
In a gaming machine having a substrate on which a plurality of electronic components including fuses are mounted,
The mounting surface of the substrate is provided with:
a resist film of a dark color, such as green or black, is formed over substantially the entire area, and position specifying information for specifying a mounting area of the fuse is printed on the resist film;
the position specifying information is a color that is lighter than a color of the resist film;
a specific mounting area facing a glass tube of the fuse among the mounting areas of the fuse identified by the position identification information is configured so that the resist film is formed thereon and the specific mounting area is visually recognized in the dark color;
The signal wiring pattern of the substrate is formed without passing through the specific mounting area,
The overcurrent protection section, which is provided inside the glass tube of the fuse and can be melted when a current exceeding a predetermined current flows, is substantially silver in color;
The location-specific information is formed in white,
Furthermore, the gaming machine is provided with a special electronic component that is activated when a preset voltage is exceeded, and when the special electronic component is activated, the overcurrent protection unit can be melted down.
It is characterized by:

The gaming machine of the present invention can provide a greater deterrent against fraudulent activities than the conventional gaming machine .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front, disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front left. This is a cross-sectional view of the door frame cut in the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above. This is a cross-sectional view of the lower door frame unit cut in the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. (a) is an oblique view showing the state where the first movable part of the door frame performance device has been moved to the upper end, and (b) is an oblique view showing the state where the performance operation part has been moved to the upper end from the position of (a). 1A is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the lower front speaker unit, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged front view of FIG. 1A with the lower front speaker grill, grill decorative frame, and lattice decorative portion removed. 1A is an enlarged front view of the upper part of the door frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged front view of FIG. 1A with the grill decorative frame and lattice decorative portion removed. This is a plan view of the lower unit of the door frame showing game balls stored in the upper tray of the door frame. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the peripheral light area in the door frame. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic relationship between the door frame performance display device and the performance operation unit in the door frame performance device, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of decoration of the performance operation unit using the performance image of the door frame performance display device, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a collaborative performance using the performance image of the door frame performance display device and the movable performance of the performance operation unit. This is a front view of the main body frame with the game board removed. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front right with the game board removed. This is an oblique view of the main body frame with the game board removed, viewed from the front left. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. 1A is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main body frame. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed relative to the main body frame. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main frame seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit seen from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the dispensing unit seen from the rear. FIG. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the rear. This is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-to-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the fore-and-aft direction when the ball-removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). FIG. 11 is a rear view of the dispensing device to explain the rotational position of the dispensing blades. This is a rear view of the dispensing device to explain how to prevent balls from clogging and falling out. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. 1A is a perspective view of a board unit of a main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the rear. 1 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below and rear. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the front, disassembled into its main components. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. This is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. 1A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. 1A is a plan view of a main body frame, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. This is an enlarged view showing the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from behind. 1A is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled thereto, as viewed from above the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of FIG. 1A from below the front. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 42(a) as seen from the front. An explanatory diagram showing the area through which game balls that overflow from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame circulate. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls that have overflowed from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls into the bypass passage at the top of the main frame. 1 is an enlarged perspective view showing the main body frame from the rear of the hinge side, showing the tank rail and its surroundings. FIG. FIG. 40(b) is an enlarged view of a portion of the cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 40(a), and is a schematic diagram of a configuration for dealing with metal powder. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a configuration for dealing with metal powder according to a second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a configuration for dealing with metal powder according to a third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a configuration for dealing with metal powder according to a fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of the configuration for preventing metal powder with the game board removed. A front view of the main body frame with the game board attached. This is a front view of the main body frame with the game board removed. (A) is an oblique view of the main body frame with the game board removed, viewed from the lower right front, and (B) is an oblique view of the main body frame of a modified example with the game board removed, viewed from the lower right front. (A) is a diagram showing with a diagonal line the location where the upper decorative part of the door frame is located, corresponding to the location where the tank rail hangs down into the opening of the game board mounting part when viewed from the front when the game board is removed from the main frame, and (B) is a diagram showing a schematic side view of the pachinko machine from the left side. FIG. 2A is a plan view showing a schematic view of the tank rail as viewed from above, and FIG. 2B is a front view showing a schematic view of the tank rail as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2A is a plan view showing a schematic view of the tank rail as viewed from above, and FIG. 2B is a front view showing a schematic view of the tank rail as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine. (A) is a front view of the inside of the second rail cover, and (B) is an oblique view showing the inside of the second rail cover when the pachinko machine is tilted so that the side on which the ball guiding unit is installed is facing downwards. 1 is a front view of the rear side of a pachinko machine to explain areas A and B. FIG. 1 is a split perspective view of a pachinko machine equipped with a drawer connector. FIG. FIG. 13 is a side view of the main body frame to explain the position of the drawer connector when (A) the game board is not installed and (B) the game board is installed. This is a front view of the back side of a pachinko machine when an external terminal board is provided below the tank rail. A side view of the main body frame to explain the position of the external terminal board when the game board is installed. This is an oblique view of the main body frame when a protrusion is provided, as seen from the front left. FIG. 13 is a side view of the main body frame for illustrating the position of the protrusion when (A) the game board is not attached and (B) the game board is attached. This is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which the game panel and other parts are made opaque. FIG. 68 is an oblique view of the game board of FIG. 67 as seen from the front right. FIG. 68 is an oblique view of the game board of FIG. 67 as seen from the front left. This is an oblique view of the game board from behind. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from a function display unit on a main control board. FIG. This is an exploded oblique view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a front view of the game board with the game panel and other parts made transparent. FIG. 2A is a perspective view of the front components and game panel of a game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is a perspective view of the front components and game panel as viewed from the back. FIG. 2A is a perspective view of a front unit of a game board, and FIG. 2B is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board, seen from behind. This is a front view of the game board with the game panel made opaque and the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area where the game balls flow and the obstacle pins. FIG. 78 is an enlarged front view of the flow passage group in the upper right corner of FIG. 77. An enlarged front view of the attacca unit in the lower right corner of Figure 77. 78 and the like, and (b) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a circulation passage group of a center role object which is further different from (a). 80, and (b) is an enlarged view of a main portion showing an embodiment of the flow passage group of the center role object which is yet different from that of FIG. 80. FIG. This is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a flow passage group of a center part which is further different from those in Figures 80 and 81. This is an oblique view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front. This is an oblique view of the rear unit of the game board from behind. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit as viewed from the front, disassembled into its main components. FIG. This is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. (a) is an oblique view of the rear first performance unit of the rear unit seen from the front, and (b) is an oblique view of the rear first performance unit of the rear unit seen from the back. A front view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative substrate in the rear first performance unit. This is an oblique view of the rear second performance unit of the rear unit from the front. This is an oblique view of the rear second performance unit of the rear unit from behind. This is an exploded oblique view of the second rear performance unit, broken down mainly into its components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the rear second performance unit, mainly disassembled into its components. A front view showing the driving mechanism in the rear second performance unit. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams showing the movement of multiple rotating decorative objects in the back second performance unit. (e) to (g) are explanatory diagrams showing the movement of multiple rotating decorative objects in the second performance unit, continuing from Figure 94. A front view showing the arrangement of LEDs in the rear second performance unit. This is an oblique view of the rear third performance unit of the rear unit from the front. This is an oblique view of the rear third performance unit of the rear unit from behind. This is an exploded oblique view of the rear third performance unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the rear third performance unit, disassembled into its main components. This is a front view showing the drive mechanism and decorative board in the third rear performance unit when the left side ring decoration and the right side ring decoration have been moved to their appearance positions. This is a front view of the game board showing multiple rotating decorative objects in the rear second performance unit rotating clockwise and revolving 15 degrees from their normal state. This is a front view showing an enlarged view of the lower part of the game board with the special rotating decoration in the second rear performance unit moved to a specific position. This is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration and the lower vertical ring decoration in the rear third performance unit moved to their appearance positions. This is a front view of the game board showing the left and right ring decorations in the rear third performance unit moved to their appearance positions. This is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration, lower vertical ring decoration, left horizontal ring decoration, and right horizontal ring decoration in the rear third performance unit moved to their appearance positions. This is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration in the rear third performance unit moved halfway to their appearance positions. This is a front view of the game board showing an example of a presentation image on the presentation display device when a malfunction occurs in the rear upper third presentation unit. A front view of the game board showing an example of a shadow effect executed during a light-emitting effect in the rear unit. This is a front view of a pachinko machine showing the game board through a door window in the door frame. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of a pachinko machine. 1A is an enlarged view of a portion of the area where SMD-type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and FIG. 1B is a view of this enlarged view from the right side of the main control board. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of the front surface (mounting surface) of a substrate on which SMD-type electronic components replacing lead-type electronic components are aggregated in a specified area, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of a substrate which has been miniaturized by aggregating SMD-type electronic components replacing lead-type electronic components. This figure shows the back side (solder side) of the main control board in the enlarged view of Figure 112. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the main control board box of the main control unit. FIG. 3A shows the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board, FIG. 3B shows the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board, and FIG. 3C shows the lower portion of the left side view of the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board. Variant 1 (a) shows a lower portion of the left side view of the game board when the main control board box is attached to the game board, and variant 2 (b) shows a lower portion of the left side view of the game board when the main control board box is attached to the game board. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed when the main control side is powered on; This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 118. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a main control side timer interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting value confirmation display process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error display process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed when the dispensing control unit is powered on. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit in Figure 124. Following Figure 125, this is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing performed when the dispensing control unit is powered on. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a dispensing control unit timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process; 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric gimmick control processing executed by the main control MPU in the embodiment. A flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing processing executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a pre-determination process executed by a main control MPU in the embodiment; A flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing processing executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern process executed by the main control MPU in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern normal processing executed by the main control MPU in the embodiment. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot determination process executed by the main control MPU in this embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used in the lottery process for jackpots, and (B) is a pattern determination table used in the lottery process for the type of jackpot. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a first special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by a main control MPU in the embodiment. A flowchart showing the steps of the first variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of the first special pattern change processing executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a first special pattern stopping process executed by a main control MPU in the embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control processing executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of the process for opening and closing the large prize opening executed by the main control MPU in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a second receiving port opening/closing process executed by a main control MPU in the embodiment; 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric gimmick control processing executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a gate passage process executed by a main control MPU in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal processing of normal symbols executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. 1 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. 13 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the main control side power-on processing. 11 is a time chart showing modified examples of the behavior of the pachinko machine when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. 11 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine during a change of a setting value. 11 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine during confirmation display of the setting value. 1 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during confirmation display of the setting value. 11 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity during a change of a setting value. 13 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent acts during confirmation display of setting values. 1 is a time chart showing the timing of sending commands when the pachinko machine is turned on. 13 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the main control side power-on processing. 11 is a time chart showing the timing of transmitting game information commands when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. 13 is a time chart showing a case where a warning notification is extended and executed after the end of a change permission state or a confirmation display state. This is a time chart showing a case where the initial operation of the performance component is performed after the change permitted state or the confirmation display state ends. 13 is a time chart showing a modified example of the monitoring state for fraudulent activity during a change of a setting value or during confirmation of the display of the setting value. 13 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the first variation pattern setting process. This is a table showing the transition of the fluctuation pattern table after the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. A time chart showing the execution timing of various effects based on the fluctuation pattern, A variation pattern table C is used when the number of variations of the special symbols after the power supply of the pachinko machine is turned on is 500; This is a specific example of a roulette effect as suggestion effect A2. This is a table showing a modified example of the transition of the fluctuation pattern table after the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram illustrating an outline of a circuit configuration of a power supply board. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a power supply board. This is a view taken from the arrow B in Figure 172. This is silk screen printing of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of a power supply board (part 1). This is silk screen printing of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of a power supply board (part 2). FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components having the same shape, according to a layout method. These are examples (a) and (b) where it is difficult to use the melting confirmation area, examples (part 1) (c) and (d) where the melting confirmation area can be used, and examples (part 2) (e) and (f) where the melting confirmation area can be used. 1A and 1B show an example (part 1) in which the melting confirmation region can be used, and FIG. 1C and 1D show an example (part 2) in which the melting confirmation region can be used. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the fuse that is most likely to blow out of three fuses, based on a layout method. FIG. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
The overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 4. Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. Figure 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine. Figure 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and Figure 4 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, as viewed from the front.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player's side through the door frame 3, and has a game area 5a into which the player hits the game ball B. The combination of the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 is referred to as the front frame.

As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame portion 10 and a right outer frame portion 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, an upper outer frame portion 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame portion 10 and the right outer frame portion 20, a lower outer frame portion 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame portion 10 and the right outer frame portion 20, an upper outer frame hinge portion 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame portion 30, and a lower outer frame hinge portion 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame portion 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame portion 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge section 50 and the outer frame lower hinge section 60 support the main frame upper hinge section 510 and the main frame lower hinge section 520 of the main frame 4 so that they can rotate coaxially, and the main frame 4 is attached so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

The door frame 3 is equipped with a game window 201 that closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are dropped so that it can be seen from the front, an upper tray 130 and a lower tray 140 that store the game balls B to be dropped into the game area 5a, and a handle 111 that the player operates to drop the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 into the game area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1. The door frame 3 is attached to the front of the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed by the main body frame upper hinge part 510 and the main body frame lower hinge part 520 of the main body frame 4.

The main frame 4 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front. The main frame 4 includes a game board attachment section 301 that holds the game board 5 so that it can be attached and detached from the front, a main frame upper hinge section 510 provided at the upper end of the left side when viewed from the front, a main frame lower hinge section 520 provided at the lower end of the left side, a ball launcher 540 provided on the right side below the game board attachment section 301 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a payout device 580 for paying out game balls B to the upper tray 130 and the lower tray 140, and a locking unit 650 for locking the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

The main body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520 via the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable via the door frame upper hinge portion and the door frame lower hinge portion (not shown).

The game board 5 is detachably attached to the game board attachment portion 301 of the main frame 4. Although not shown, the game board 5 is equipped with a general prize opening, a first start opening, a gate portion, a second start opening, and a large prize opening that provide a player with a predetermined privilege (e.g., the payment of a predetermined number of game balls B) by receiving or passing a game ball B, as well as a performance display device 1600 that can display performance images.

[2. Outer Frame]
The outer frame of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 4. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in an amusement hall or the like on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises a left outer frame portion 10 and a right outer frame portion 20 that are spaced apart from each other laterally and extend vertically, an upper outer frame portion 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame portion 10 and the right outer frame portion 20, a lower outer frame portion 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame portion 10 and the right outer frame portion 20, an upper outer frame hinge portion 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame portion 30, and a lower outer frame hinge portion 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame portion 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame portion 40.

The outer frame 2 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge part 510 of the main body frame 4 with the outer frame upper hinge part 50. The outer frame 2 can coaxially support the main body frame upper hinge part 510 and the main body frame lower hinge part 520 of the main body frame 4 with the outer frame upper hinge part 50 and the outer frame lower hinge part 60, and the main body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

3. Door Frame
The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 5 to 10. Figure 5 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. Figure 6 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 7 is a right side view of the door frame. Figure 8 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front right, and Figure 9 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front left. Figure 10 is a cross-sectional view of the door frame cut in the vertical center and viewed from above.

The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a front view with approximately the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front side. The door frame 3 is equipped with a game window 201 that closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are dropped so that it can be seen from the front side, an upper tray 130 that stores the game balls B to be dropped into the game area 5a, and a handle 111 that the player operates to drop the game balls B in the upper tray 130 into the game area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1 and is equipped with various decorative parts. Some of these various decorative parts are not decorated at all, while others are decorated on the entire front and back. This decorative plating is a precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity, so electromagnetic noise may enter.

Therefore, in this embodiment, among the various decorative parts, those that have decorative plating applied to the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3 described below via wiring (not shown) (some of the various decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), while others are electrically connected by having a conductive member directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit). This makes it possible to transmit electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative parts to the metal door frame reinforcement unit, thereby preventing the various decorative boards provided on the various decorative parts from entering the board ground.

Incidentally, electromagnetic noise that penetrates into those decorative parts that have decorative plating on the entire front and back is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), then to the frame earth board 559 via the door frame metal earth wire described below, and then from the frame earth board 559 to the island equipment earth wire to the earth of the game hall's island equipment, and is removed from the pachinko machine 1. In other words, in this embodiment, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side.

The door frame 3 comprises a door frame base unit (not shown) that has a rectangular, frame-like shape when viewed from the front that extends vertically, a lower door frame unit 100 that is provided on the front surface of the door frame base unit and extends from the bottom end to a height of approximately 1/4 of the total height, an upper door frame unit 200 that is provided on the front surface of the door frame base unit above the lower door frame unit 100, and an upper door frame hinge part and a lower door frame hinge part (not shown) that are supported rotatably and detachably by the upper main frame hinge part 510 and the lower main frame hinge part 520 of the main frame 4.

The door frame base unit includes a door frame base (not shown) whose outer shape in front view is a square (rectangle) extending vertically and has a play window 201 that penetrates from front to back, a door frame main relay board (not shown) attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base near the right end as seen from the rear, a door frame sub-relay board (not shown) attached to the left of the door frame main relay board as seen from the rear, a handle rear relay board (not shown) attached to the left of the door frame sub-relay board as seen from the rear, a door frame relay board cover (not shown) that covers the door frame main relay board and part of the door frame sub-relay board from the rear, a handle rear relay board cover (not shown) that covers the handle rear relay board from the rear, and a cable cover (not shown) that covers the wiring cable (not shown).

The door frame base unit also includes a metal frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) attached to the rear side of the door frame base, a metal upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a metal lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit, and a metal cylinder lock 127 for opening and closing that is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit.

The door frame reinforcement unit is attached to the rear side of the door frame base to reinforce the door frame base and provide rigidity. The upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and the lower door frame hinge member 125 are used to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The cylinder lock 127 works in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and to lock and open the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

In addition to reinforcing the door frame base to provide rigidity, the door frame reinforcement unit also functions as a door frame metal earth and is electrically connected to the frame earth board 559 via a door frame metal earth wire (not shown). The frame earth board 559 is electrically connected to the earth of the island equipment of the amusement hall via an island equipment earth wire (not shown).

The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 is equipped with a handle 111 that can be operated by the player to shoot the game ball B into the play area 5a, a bulging portion 120 that bulges forward, an upper tray 130 that is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and stores the game ball B to be shot into the play area 5a, a lower tray 140 that is provided below the upper tray 130 and stores the game ball B, a door frame performance device 150 that is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion and presents a predetermined performance to the player, an upper tray ball removal button 124 that is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and releases the game ball B in the upper tray 130 to the lower tray, a ball lending button 125 and a return button 126 that are provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, a door frame sub-display unit 185 that is provided behind the ball lending button 125 and the return button 126, and a lower front speaker 191 that is provided on the front surface of the bulging portion 120.

The upper door frame unit 200 of the door frame 3 is equipped with an inverted U-shaped game window 201 whose inner periphery allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 to be viewed from the front, transparent closing glass 205 that closes the game window 201, an upper door frame interior decorative unit 210 that is provided along the inner periphery of the game window 201, an upper door frame exterior decorative unit 220 that is provided on the outside of the upper door frame interior decorative unit 210, an upper door frame exterior edge decorative unit 230 that covers the upper door frame interior decorative unit 210 and the upper door frame exterior decorative unit 220, and an upper speaker unit 240 that is provided on the upper front surface of the upper door frame exterior edge decorative unit 230.

The door frame 3 also includes a ball feeding unit (not shown) for feeding the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main frame 4. The ball feeding unit includes a ball feeding solenoid 105 (see FIG. 67) that is controlled by the launch control unit 372 of the payout control board 370.

[3-1. Door frame lower unit]
Next, the door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 5 to Fig. 13. Fig. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the door frame lower unit cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. Fig. 12(a) is a perspective view showing a state in which the first movable part of the door frame performance device has been moved to the upper end, and Fig. 12(b) is a perspective view showing a state in which the performance operation part has been moved to the upper end from the state of (a). Fig. 13(a) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the lower front speaker unit, and Fig. 13(b) is an enlarged front view showing a state in which the lower front speaker grill, the grill decoration frame, and the lattice decoration part have been removed from (a).

The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 is positioned below the game window 201 that closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main frame 4 so that it can be seen from the front. The door frame lower unit 100 is provided with a handle unit 110 that is located in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and that can be operated by the player to shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a, and a bulge portion 120 that bulges forward above and to the left of the handle unit 110 relative to the surface that closes the front of the main frame 4.

The door frame lower unit 100 also includes an upper tray 130 for storing game balls B, which is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 to surround the device placement section 123, a lower tray 140 for storing game balls B, which is provided below the upper tray 130 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction, a door frame presentation device 150 that is provided in the device placement section 123 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and can present a predetermined presentation to the player, a door frame sub-display section 185 that is provided in the upper right corner when viewed from the front, and a lower front speaker unit 190 that is provided on the front surface of the bulging portion 120.

[3-1a. Handle unit]
The handle unit 110 of the door frame lower unit 100 includes a handle 111 that a player can grasp and rotate, a handle cover 112 provided in front of the handle 111, and a handle base 113 that rotatably supports the handle 111. The handle unit 110 is provided within the handle base 113 and includes a handle rotation detection sensor 114 (see FIG. 67) that detects the rotation angle of the handle 111, a handle touch sensor 115 that detects that the player is touching the handle 111, a handle return spring (not shown) that biases the handle 111 in a counterclockwise direction, and a single button 116 that can be pressed by the player.

The handle unit 110 is inclined so that the rotation axis of the handle 111 moves to the right as it moves forward. This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 111 of the handle unit 110 and allows the player to rotate it without feeling uncomfortable. The handle unit 110 is also configured so that the handle base 113 can be extended and retracted in the direction in which the rotation axis of the handle 111 extends, and can be held in a desired extended and retracted position. This allows the position of the handle 111 to be adjusted in the front-to-rear direction, allowing the player to operate the handle 111 in a position that is easy for them to operate.

The handle 111 is supported by the handle base 113 so that it can rotate only within a specified angle range. The handle 111 has multiple protrusions (four in this case) that are spaced apart in the circumferential direction and protrude from the outer periphery. The handle cover 112 is translucent, and can be decorated with illumination in various colors using multiple full-color LEDs located at the rear.

The handle rotation detection sensor 114 of the handle unit 110 is a variable resistor whose internal resistance changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 111. The driving force of the launch solenoid 331 in the ball launcher 540 described below changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 114, which changes as the handle 111 is rotated, and the game ball B can be shot into the game area 5a with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 111.

The handle touch sensor of the handle unit 110 detects the electrostatic capacitance of the handle 111, etc. When a player touches the handle 111, etc., the electrostatic capacitance of the handle 111, etc. changes, and therefore, by detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the handle 111, etc. using the handle touch sensor, it is possible to detect whether or not the player is touching the handle 111. In this embodiment, when the handle touch sensor 115 detects the player's contact and the handle 111 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 114 is accepted, and the drive of the launch solenoid 331 is controlled with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 111, allowing the game ball B to be shot in.

In other words, even if a player tries to rotate the handle 111 in some way to shoot game ball B into the game area 5a without touching it, the handle touch sensor 115 does not detect the player's contact, so the launch solenoid 331 is not driven and game ball B cannot be shot into the game area 5a. This makes it possible to prevent players from playing by rotating the handle 111 in a way that is different from the intended way, and reduces the burden (stress) placed on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

When the player presses the single shot button 116 of the handle unit 110 while rotating the handle 111, the firing control unit 372 of the payout control board 370 stops the operation of the firing solenoid 331. This makes it possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B without returning the rotation of the handle 111. Then, by releasing the pressing of the single shot button 116, the game ball B can be shot again into the game area 5a with the same strength as before the single shot button 116 was operated.

[3-1b. bulging part]
The bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 is formed in a T-shape with a short axis extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed in a T-shape with a rear end side that is in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 when viewed from the top. The bulge 120 is formed in an isosceles trapezoid shape that narrows toward the front along the overall width (see FIG. 10, etc.). The upper surface of the bulging portion 120 is slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so as to be positioned lower as it approaches the front.

The bulging portion 120 bulges forward in the left-right direction over the entire height of the door frame 3 from the bottom end to the top surface at its central portion, which divides the entire width of the door frame 3 into thirds, and the remaining portions (portions on both the left and right sides) bulge forward over approximately one-third of the total height of the door frame 3 from the bottom end to the top surface. This gives the bulging portion 120 a T-shaped shape when viewed from the front. The bulging portion 120 has a speaker mounting opening 120a that opens in a square shape at the bottom center of the front surface. The lower front speaker unit 190 is attached to this speaker mounting opening 120a.

The bulge 120 has sound release slits 120b and heat release slits 120c extending vertically on both the left and right sides of the portion (where the speaker mounting port 120a is open) that extends vertically in a T-shape when viewed from the front. The sound release slits 120b are for releasing sound from the lower front speaker 191 (described below) to the outside. The heat release slits 120c are for releasing heat from the first lift drive motor 175b, the second lift drive motor 182, the lower front speaker 191, etc., in the door frame performance device 150 (described below) to the outside.

The bulge section 120 comprises an upper bulge decorative section 121 provided on the upper edge of the front surface, a lower bulge decorative section 122 provided on the lower edge of the front surface, a device placement section 123 provided on the top surface in the left-right center so as to protrude forward from the rear end side, an upper tray ball removal button 124 provided on the top surface for releasing game balls B in the upper tray 130 into the lower tray 140, and a ball loan button 125 and a return button 126 provided behind the upper tray ball removal button 124.

The bulge upper decorative part 121 and the bulge lower decorative part 122 are translucent milky white and formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The bulge upper decorative part 121 extends along the upper edge of the front surface of the bulge 120, and is provided to decorate the front upper edge of the upper plate 130 described above. The bulge upper decorative part 121 has multiple LEDs 121a inside (see Figure 16). The multiple LEDs 121a are arranged in a row in the direction in which the bulge upper decorative part 121 extends. These multiple LEDs 121a are full-color LEDs.

The distance between the two rear ends of the bulge upper decorative part 121, which are spaced apart in the left-right direction, matches the distance between the lower ends of the upper interior decorative part 212, which are spaced apart in the left-right direction, in the door frame upper interior decorative unit 210 of the door frame upper unit 200 described below. This bulge upper decorative part 121 is formed to match the upper interior decorative part 212 when assembled to the door frame 3, and forms a single continuous decoration together with the upper interior decorative part 212. This bulge upper decorative part 121, together with the upper interior decorative part 212, constitutes a first luminous area LA1 that illuminates and decorates the area around the game window 201.

The bulge upper decorative portion 121 also decorates the upper side above the top end of the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper tray 130, and raises the front wall (front peripheral wall 134) of the upper tray 130. This bulge upper decorative portion 121 is configured so that a portion of the light from the LED 121a is irradiated into the upper tray 130 (inside the storage area 131), and the game balls B stored in the storage area 131 can be irradiated with light to create an illuminated decoration.

The lower decorative portion 122 extends along the lower edge of the front surface of the bulge 120. The lower decorative portion 122 has multiple LEDs 122a inside (see FIG. 16). The multiple LEDs 122a are aligned in a row in the direction in which the lower decorative portion 122 extends. These multiple LEDs 122a are full-color LEDs.

The device placement section 123 has a shape in plan view that is a combination of a rectangle that is long from left to right and an isosceles trapezoid with the front side of the rectangle as its base. The left-right width of the rear end of the device placement section 123 is approximately half the overall width of the door frame 3. The device placement section 123 is open at the top on the upper surface of the bulge section 120 and is formed in the shape of a container that extends from the top into the interior of the bulge section 120.

The upper tray ball removal button 124 is located in the right corner of the top surface of the bulge portion 120, to the right of the upper tray 130. By pressing the upper tray ball removal button 124 downward, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be released from the discharge port 136 to the lower tray 140. This upper tray ball removal button 124 releases the game balls B in the upper tray 130 to the lower tray 140 only while it is pressed, and when the pressure is released, it moves upward to return to its original state and stops releasing them to the lower tray 140.

The upper tray ball removal button 124 has a square outer shape. The upper tray ball removal button 124 has an illuminating decorative part 124a that is illuminated by an LED located below. The illuminating decorative part 124a is arranged to surround the outer periphery of the upper tray ball removal button 124. By illuminating the illuminating decorative part 124a, the upper tray ball removal button 124 can be illuminated and decorated.

The ball lending button 125 is located behind the upper tray ball removal button 124 on the top surface of the bulging portion 120. The ball lending button 125 has a circular outer shape. The return button 126 is located to the right of the ball lending button 125 on the top surface of the bulging portion 120. The return button 126 has an equilateral triangular outer shape.

The ball lending button 125, when pressed after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) located adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, supplies a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper tray 130, lending the game balls B to the player. The return button 126, when pressed, returns the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine minus the amount of the lent game balls B. The remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed on the door frame sub-display unit 185.

[3-1c. Upper plate]
The upper tray 130 of the door frame 3 is recessed downward on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and has a storage area 131 in which the game balls B are stored. The storage area 131 is composed of a front area 131a (area surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 15) on the front side of the device placement section 123, and side areas 131b (areas surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 15) on both the left and right outer sides of the device placement section 123, which are connected to each other by the front area 131a.

The front region 131a has a roughly constant width in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction. The left side region 131b extends in the front-rear direction so that its width in the left-right direction narrows as it moves forward from the rear end side toward the front region 131a side. The right side region 131b extends in the front-rear direction so that its width in the left-right direction widens as it moves backward from the front region 131a side at the front end side until it is partway thereafter, and then extends in the front-rear direction so that its width narrows toward the rear end side. The upper tray 130 (storage region 131) is formed to surround the front side and both left and right outer sides of the device placement section 123.

The upper tray 130 includes a bottom wall 132 forming the bottom surface, a rear peripheral wall 133 rising upward from the rear end of the bottom wall 132, a front peripheral wall 134 rising upward from the front end of the bottom wall 132, a supply port 135 opening forward at the rear end of the left side region 131b, a delivery port 136 opening forward at the rear end of the right side region 131b, and an alignment section 137 provided near the delivery port 136 for aligning the game balls B toward the delivery port 136.

The bottom wall 132 of the upper tray 130 is inclined so that it becomes lower from the supply port 135 side toward the delivery port 136. The front peripheral wall 134 and the rear peripheral wall 133 rise almost vertically. The surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 are formed in a mirror-like shape. The bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper tray 130 form a storage area 131. The depth of the upper tray 130 (the height from the bottom wall 132 to the upper ends of the rear peripheral wall 133 and the front peripheral wall 134) is formed deeper than the diameter of the game ball B even at the shallowest part (near the supply port 135).

The supply port 135 is for supplying the game balls B dispensed from the payout device 580 of the main frame 4 into the storage area 131. The delivery port 136 is for delivering the game balls B stored in the storage area 131 from the storage area 131 to the ball launcher 540 or the lower tray 140. The alignment section 137 bends downward near the boundary between the rectangle and the isosceles trapezoid in the device arrangement section 123, which combines a rectangle and an isosceles trapezoid in a plan view, so that the bottom wall 132 becomes lower toward the delivery port 136.

The upper tray 130 also includes a storage light-emitting decoration section 138 having multiple LEDs 138a capable of emitting light into the storage area 131. The multiple LEDs 138a of the storage light-emitting decoration section 138 are provided on the rear peripheral wall 133, and are provided at a height that is above half the outer diameter of the game ball B from the bottom wall 132 and approximately parallel to the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133. These LEDs 138a are full-color LEDs. By illuminating the LEDs 138a of the storage light-emitting decoration section 138, the storage area 131 and the game balls B stored in the storage area 131 can be illuminated and decorated.

The upper tray 130 has a bulge upper decorative part 121 of the bulge 120 provided at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134, and the bulge upper decorative part 121 raises the front end side of the storage area 131, allowing more game balls B to be stored. In addition, the upper tray 130 is designed so that some of the light from the LED 121a of the bulge upper decorative part 121 is irradiated into the storage area 131, and the game balls B in the storage area 131 are illuminated and decorated by the light from the bulge upper decorative part 121 as well.

The upper tray 130 has a front area 131a in front of the device placement section 123 where the door frame presentation device 150 is placed, and side areas 131b on both the left and right outside. The front area 131a allows game balls B to be stored in front of the door frame presentation device 150, making it easier for players to see the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130. In addition, the two side areas 131b connected by the front area 131a on the upper tray 130 are areas that extend forward and backward, making it easier for players to see the game balls B stored in the side areas 131b in addition to the front area 131a.

Therefore, by making the game balls B in the upper tray 130 easier to see, the player can be made aware of the amount of game balls B stored. Even if the game balls B in the upper tray 130 are consumed as the game progresses and the amount of stored balls decreases, the player can be made to recognize the decrease in the amount of stored balls B easily and can have game balls B replenished in the upper tray 130. This prevents game balls B from disappearing from the upper tray 130 without the player realizing, prevents sudden interruptions to play, prevents the player from becoming discouraged due to an interruption in play, and suppresses a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the upper tray 130 allows the player to easily see the game balls B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b. By simply dropping the player's gaze from the game area 5a to the door frame effect device 150 below, the player can instantly recognize whether or not there is a game ball B in the front area 131a. This eliminates the need for the player to carefully check whether or not there is a game ball B in the upper tray 130, making it easier for the player to concentrate on the game, making the game more enjoyable and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, in the upper tray 130, game balls B supplied from the supply port 135 into the storage area 131 are sent out of the storage area 131 through the delivery port 136 via the front area 131a. Therefore, when game balls B in the upper tray 130 are consumed while playing the game, the game balls B flow in front of the player (front area 131a), making it easier for the player to recognize the consumption speed and amount of game balls B, and making it easier to achieve the above-mentioned action and effect.

The upper tray 130 is also provided with a storage light-emitting decoration section 138 that irradiates light into the storage area 131. The light from the storage light-emitting decoration section 138 (LED 138a) is reflected upward by the game balls B, so that the light from the storage light-emitting decoration section 138 makes the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 sparkle and shine, providing a light-emitting decoration. This allows the player to enjoy the light-emitting decoration of the game balls B, and also strongly draws the player's attention to the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130, allowing the player to check the amount of game balls B stored in the upper tray 130, achieving the same effect as described above.

In addition, the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, rear peripheral wall 133, and front peripheral wall 134 of the upper tray 130 are formed in a mirror-like shape, so that the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 are reflected on the peripheral walls of the upper tray 130, giving the player the illusion that game balls B are stored on the other side of the peripheral walls, making it appear as if a large number of game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130.

Furthermore, in the upper tray 130, an alignment section 137 is provided near the outlet 136 to align the game balls B, which prevents the game balls B from clogging near the outlet 136 and allows the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 to be smoothly sent out from the outlet 136 to the ball launcher 540 or the lower tray 140. This makes it possible to avoid interruptions to play due to clogging of the game balls B, allowing the player to enjoy the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the upper tray 130 has a delivery port 136 located in the right side area 131b that can be seen from the front, so that the player can see the game ball B being delivered from the delivery port 136, which was not possible to see in previous pachinko machines, surprising the player and strongly catching the player's attention, achieving the same effect as described above.

[3-1d. Lower plate]
The lower tray 140 is located below the upper tray 130, to the left of the central part of the bulging portion 120 that bulges forward, and is formed in the shape of a shallow tray that opens upward. A gap is provided between the lower tray 140 and the upper tray 130 (the underside of the left side part of the bulging portion 120) so that the player can insert his/her hand. The front surface of the lower tray 140 is formed in approximately the same shape as the front surface of the bulging portion 120 in a plan view.

The lower tray 140 is formed at the lowest part of the bottom wall and has an openable and closable lower tray ball removal hole 141 (see Figure 9), a lower tray ball removal button 142 for opening and closing the lower tray ball removal hole 141 to eject the game balls B in the lower tray 140 downward, and a full tank detection sensor 143 (see Figure 67) for detecting when the lower tray 140 is full of game balls B.

The lower tray 140 is supplied with game balls B in the upper tray 130 by operating the upper tray ball removal button 124. In addition, when the upper tray 130 is full of game balls B, the lower tray 140 is supplied with game balls B paid out from the payout device 580. When the lower tray 140 is full of game balls B, the full tank detection sensor 143 detects that the lower tray 140 is full, and when the full tank of the lower tray 140 is detected, the payout of game balls B by the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped. Thereafter, when the full tank in the lower tray 140 is resolved (the full tank detection sensor 143 is no longer detecting), the temporary suspension of payout is lifted.

The lower tray ball removal button 142 is provided on the front of the lower tray 140 and has a rectangular outer shape. When the lower tray ball removal button 142 is pressed backwards, the lower tray ball removal hole 141 opens and the lower tray ball removal button 142 is held in a pressed position. When the lower tray ball removal button 142 is pressed backwards further in this state, the lower tray ball removal hole 141 closes and the lower tray ball removal button 142 moves forward, returning to its original position.

The lower tray ball removal button 142 has a light-emitting decorative part 142a that emits light using an LED (not shown). The light-emitting decorative part 142a is arranged to surround both the left and right sides and the upper side of the lower tray ball removal button 142. By illuminating the light-emitting decorative part 142a, the lower tray ball removal button 142 can be illuminated and decorated. For example, during a "jackpot" game in which many game balls B are paid out, the light-emitting decorative part 142a can be used to illuminate and decorate the lower tray ball removal button 142, so that the player's attention can be directed to the lower tray 140, and the game balls B in the lower tray 140 can be discharged into a dollar box or the like below by operating the lower tray ball removal button 142, thereby preventing the lower tray 140 from becoming full and temporarily suspending the payout of game balls B.

[3-1e. Overall configuration of the door frame production device]
The door frame effect device 150 is disposed in a device placement section 123 provided on the upper surface of the bulging section 120. The door frame effect device 150 includes a transparent device cover 151 that closes the device placement section 123 that is open upward, a door frame effect display device 152 that is provided so as to be visible from the front through the device cover 151, a lower speaker unit 153 provided in front of the door frame effect display device 152, a first movable section 155 that is provided in front of the lower speaker unit 153 and has an upper surface that can be raised and lowered above the device cover 151, an effect operation section 160 that is provided in the first movable section 155 so as to be raised and lowered and that can be operated by a player by pressing it, a first lifting mechanism 170 that raises and lowers the first movable section 155, and a second lifting mechanism 180 that raises and lowers the effect operation section 160.

[3-1e-1. Device cover]
The device cover 151 is formed in a shape in plan view that is a combination of a rectangular shape long in the left-right direction, which is the same as the device arrangement section 123, and an isosceles trapezoid with the front side of the rectangular shape as the base. The device cover 151 has an opening 151a that is a large opening in the isosceles trapezoidal shape, an inclined surface section 151b that is bent and inclined so that the rear end side is upward near the center in the front-rear direction in the rectangular section, and a plurality of grill holes 151c that penetrate in a hexagonal shape near the front end of the rectangular section. The device cover 151 is inclined as a whole so that the front end side is lower. A first movable section 155 is inserted into the opening 151a of the device cover 151.

The upper end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151 coincides with the lower end of the door frame upper cover 232 of the door frame upper unit 200. The device cover 151 is also inclined so that the side in front of the inclined surface portion 151b is lower toward the front. This allows a game ball B to roll forward and be released into the upper tray 130 even if it is placed on the top surface of the device cover 151.

[3-1e-2. Door frame performance display device]
The door frame performance display device 152 has a display screen for displaying a performance image formed in a rectangular shape elongated from left to right, and the length in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than 1/2 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The door frame performance display device 152 is provided in an inclined state so that the lower side is located forward relative to the upper side. In other words, the door frame performance display device 152 is directed toward the vicinity of the head of the player seated in front of the present pachinko machine 1. The door frame performance display device 152 has an upper side located at a height near the upper end of the door frame lower unit 100, and a lower side located at a height below the bottom surface of the front area 131a of the upper tray 130. In addition, the door frame performance display device 152 has an upper side located near the rear end of the door frame lower unit 100 (device cover 151), and a lower side located near the front end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151. The door frame performance display device 152 is a liquid crystal display device with a screen ratio of 16:9.

[3-1e-3. Lower speaker unit]
The lower speaker unit 153 has a pair of lower speakers 153a spaced apart from each other on the left and right, a lower speaker base 153b to which the pair of lower speakers 153a are attached, and a lower speaker decorative part 153c attached to the lower speaker base 153b and used to decorate the outer periphery of the lower speakers 153a and the space between the lower speakers 153a. The pair of lower speakers 153a are tweeters that output high-pitched sounds.

The lower speaker base 153b has a front surface that is inclined so that the rear edge is positioned above the front edge, and a rear surface that extends downward perpendicularly from the rear edge of the front surface to the front surface, and is formed in a long container shape that is open downward. The lower speaker base 153b also has circular mounting holes formed on the front surface that are spaced apart on the left and right. The front surface of the lower speaker base 153b is inclined at an angle from the horizontal that is smaller than the angle from the horizontal of the door frame performance display device 152 (see FIG. 11, etc.).

The lower speaker decorative part 153c is attached to the front of the lower speaker base 153b, and is composed of a ring-shaped part arranged on the outer periphery of the lower speaker 153a, and multiple arc-shaped parts arranged between the pair of lower speakers 153a. The lower speaker decorative part 153c is translucent, and can be decorated with light by illuminating the LEDs mounted on the lower speaker decorative board (not shown).

The lower speaker unit 153 is attached inside the lower speaker base 153b so that the pair of lower speakers 153a face forward from the mounting holes of the lower speaker base 153b. This allows the pair of lower speakers 153a to be directed toward the head of a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The upper end of the lower speaker unit 153 is located at a height slightly lower than the vertical center of the door frame performance display device 152, and the lower end is located at a height slightly lower than the lower end of the door frame performance display device 152.

The lower speaker unit 153 has its front end located forward from the rear end of the opening 151a of the device cover 151 (slightly behind the performance operation unit 160), and its rear end located near the front end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151. The lower speaker unit 153 can be seen through the transparent device cover 151. The sound output from the pair of lower speakers 153a can be efficiently radiated to the outside (outside the pachinko machine 1) through the grill hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grill hole 156b of the first movable part main body 156.

In addition, the lower speaker unit 153 can illuminate and decorate the lower speaker decorative part 153c using the LEDs on the lower speaker decorative board (not shown), thereby illuminating and decorating the space between the lower speaker 153a and the speaker grill of the lower speaker 153a (the device cover 151 and the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156), allowing players to see the illuminated decoration inside the speaker, something that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines.

[3-1e-4. First movable part]
The first movable part 155 includes a transparent first movable part body 156 that is container-shaped and open at the rear and bottom, a first movable part base 157 that is attached to the underside of the first movable part body 156, and a second movable part base 157 that is attached to the underside of the first movable part body 156. The first movable part cover 158 is attached to the top surface of the first movable part body 156, and the first movable part decorative board 159 is attached to the inside of the side surface of the first movable part body 156 (FIG. 11). 12 ). The first movable part 155 is disposed in an opening 151 a of the device cover 151. The first movable part 155 is supported by a first lifting mechanism 170 so as to be capable of ascending and descending. It is raised and lowered by a lifting mechanism 170 .

The shape of the first movable part body 156 in a plan view is similar to the shape of the opening 151a of the device cover 151, and is formed in a shape that is a combination of a rectangle that is long from left to right and an isosceles trapezoid with the front side of the rectangle as its base. The first movable part body 156 is formed in the shape of a container that is open at the rear and bottom, with an upper wall shaped like a combination of a rectangle and an isosceles trapezoid, and side walls extending downward from the sides of the upper wall excluding the rear side. The upper wall (top surface) of the first movable part body 156 is inclined so that the front side is lower, and curved so that the center in the left-right direction is higher.

The first movable part body 156 has an opening 156a that penetrates the upper wall in a rectangular shape that is long from side to side near the front end, multiple grill holes 156b that penetrate the upper wall in a hexagonal shape in the area excluding the opening 156a, and multiple through holes 156c that are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction and penetrate the side wall in a rectangular shape. The lower end of the opening frame part 158a of the first movable part cover 158 is inserted into the opening 156a. The through hole 156c is formed in a size that allows the LED 159a mounted on the first movable part decorative board 159 to face outward.

The first movable part base 157 is formed in a flat plate shape that is long in the left-right direction. The first movable part base 157 is formed so that the width in the front-rear direction is shorter than the width in the front-rear direction at the opening 156a of the first movable part body 156. The first movable part base 157 is attached to the first movable part body 156 so that the front end is at approximately the same position in the front-rear direction as the front end of the opening 156a of the first movable part body 156. The first movable part base 157 is attached to the first movable part body 156 in a horizontal state. A pair of lifting sliders 172 of the first lifting mechanism 170 is attached to the lower surface of this first movable part base 157, and the second lifting base 181 of the second lifting mechanism 180 is attached to the upper surface.

The first movable part cover 158 has an outer shape and is formed to the same size as the upper wall of the first movable part body 156. The first movable part cover 158 has a horizontally elongated rectangular opening frame portion 158a that corresponds to the opening 156a of the first movable part body 156, and a plurality of louver portions 158b that extend left and right and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The first movable part cover 158 has a plating layer with a silver metallic luster on the surface. The opening frame portion 158a of the first movable part cover 158 has a lower end that protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the louver portions 158b, and is inserted into the opening 156a of the first movable part body 156. The performance operation unit 160 is inserted into the frame of the opening frame portion 158a.

The louver portion 158b of the first movable part cover 158 extends at a constant width except for both left and right ends, and is formed in a triangle shape with both left and right ends expanding diagonally forward. The multiple (here five) louver portions 158b are spaced apart in the front-to-rear direction at intervals slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. This allows the game ball B to be stored between the louver portions 158b. Incidentally, one game ball B can be stored between the first louver portions 158b from the front, two game balls B can be stored between the second louver portions 158b, and three game balls B can be stored between the third louver portions 158b (see Figure 15).

The first movable part decorative board 159 has multiple LEDs 159a mounted on the front surface. The multiple LEDs 159a are arranged in positions corresponding to the through holes 156c of the first movable part main body 156. The first movable part decorative board 159 is attached to the inside of the side wall of the first movable part main body 156, so that the multiple mounted LEDs 159a face outward from the through holes 156c in the side wall. The LEDs 159a of the first movable part decorative board 159 are full-color LEDs.

When the LED 159a of this first movable part decorative board 159 is illuminated with the first movable part 155 lowered (normal state), it can illuminate and decorate the upper part of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper tray 130 through the gap between the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper tray 130 and the side wall of the first movable part main body 156. In addition, when the LED 159a of the first movable part decorative board 159 is illuminated with the first movable part 155 raised, it can illuminate and decorate the side wall of the first movable part main body 156, and can irradiate light into the storage area 131 and forward (towards the player).

[3-1e-5. Performance operation section]
The performance operation unit 160 is provided so as to be movable up and down relative to the first movable unit 155, and is a so-called push button that can be operated by a player by pressing it. and is raised and lowered by a second lifting mechanism 180 (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

The performance operation unit 160 includes a translucent pressing operation unit 161 with the word "PUSH" formed on its upper surface, an operation unit decorative board 162 that is positioned below the pressing operation unit 161 and has a number of LEDs mounted on its upper surface, an operation unit movable base 163 on whose upper surface the pressing operation unit 161 and the operation unit decorative board 162 are attached, an operation unit base 164 that supports the operation unit movable base 163 so that it can be raised and lowered and whose lower surface is attached to the first movable unit 155 via a second lifting mechanism 180 (second lifting base 181), an operation unit spring that biases the operation unit movable base 163 upward, and a pressure detection sensor 165 (see FIG. 67) that detects the pressing operation unit 161 that has moved downward against the biasing force of the operation unit spring.

The push operation part 161 is a rectangle that is long from side to side, and the word "PUSH" is formed in relief on the top surface. The outer periphery of the push operation part 161 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inside of the frame of the opening frame part 158a of the first movable part cover 158.

The multiple LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the operation unit decorative board 162 are full-color LEDs. A first LED that emits light upward and a second LED that emits light outward along the upper surface of the operation unit decorative board 162 are mounted on the upper surface of the operation unit decorative board 162. By illuminating the first LED, the operation unit decorative board 162 can illuminate and decorate the pressing operation unit 161 (the letters "PUSH"). By illuminating the second LED, the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 can be illuminated and decorated, and when the performance operation unit 160 is at the lowered end, the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable part cover 158 can be illuminated and decorated.

The operation unit movable base 163 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open at the bottom. The operation unit movable base 163 is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer circumference of the pressing operation unit 161. The pressing operation unit 161 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit movable base 163 so as to sandwich the operation unit decorative board 162. The operation unit base 164 is inserted into the operation unit movable base 163 from below.

The operation unit base 164 is composed of a box-shaped portion that is long from side to side and open at the top, large enough to be inserted inside the operation unit movable base 163, and a flange-shaped portion that protrudes outward from the box-shaped portion to a position equal to the outer periphery of the operation unit movable base 163. The operation unit base 164 supports the operation unit movable base 163 so that it can be raised and lowered within a predetermined range. A second lifting mechanism 180 is attached to the underside of this operation unit base 164.

The upper end of the operation spring abuts against the underside of the upper wall of the operation unit movable base 163, and the lower end abuts against the upper surface of the lower wall of the operation unit base 164. The pressing detection sensor 165 is attached inside the operation unit base 164, and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 161 via the operation unit movable base 163 by detecting a detection piece (not shown) of the operation unit movable base 163.

[3-1e-6. First lifting mechanism]
11, the first lifting mechanism 170 is attached inside the bulging portion 120 and serves to lift and lower the first movable portion 155. The first lifting mechanism 170 includes a pair of lifting rails 171 attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 at a distance from each other on the left and right and extending vertically, a pair of lifting sliders 172 each guided in the vertical direction by the pair of lifting rails 171, a connecting portion 173 connecting the pair of lifting sliders 172 to each other, a pair of rod-shaped lifting arms 174 each having one end rotatably attached to the lifting slider 172 and the other end rotatably attached to the bulging portion 120, a first lifting drive mechanism 175 which rotates each of the pair of lifting arms 174, and a first lifting detection sensor 176 which detects the lifting position of the lifting slider 172 (first movable portion 155).

The pair of lift rails 171 are spaced apart laterally by an interval longer than the left-right length of the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). The pair of lift rails 171 are attached inside the bulge portion 120 so as to extend vertically. The pair of lift sliders 172 have their respective upper ends attached to the underside of the first movable portion base 157 of the first movable portion 155, and their respective lower ends attached to the connecting portion 173.

The front ends of the pair of lifting arms 174 are attached to the corresponding lifting sliders 172 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction, and are also attached so as to be slidable in the longitudinal direction of the lifting arms 174. The rear ends of the pair of lifting arms 174 are attached to the bulging portion 120 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction. Each of the pair of lifting arms 174 has a slit 174a extending in the longitudinal direction at a position closer to the front end than the center in the longitudinal direction.

The first lifting drive mechanism 175 is provided for each of the pair of lifting arms 174. In other words, a pair of first lifting drive mechanisms 175 are provided. The first lifting mechanism 170 can raise and lower the first movable unit 155 (performance operation unit 160) via a pair of lifting sliders 172 to which the tips of the pair of lifting arms 174 are respectively attached, by rotating each of the pair of lifting arms 174 by the first lifting drive mechanism 175 in a direction in which the front ends of each of the pair of lifting arms 174 move upward.

The first lifting drive mechanism 175 is slidably inserted into the slit 174a of the lifting arm 174 and has a first lifting pin 175a that revolves around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and a first lifting drive motor 175b that revolves the first lifting pin 175a. More specifically, the first lifting drive mechanism 175 has a flat drive base 175c that is attached inside the bulge 120 and extends in the front-rear and up-down directions, a spur gear-shaped lifting gear 175d that is rotatably attached to the drive base 175c around an axis extending in the left-right direction and has the first lifting pin 175a attached at a position eccentric to the rotation axis, and a drive gear 175e that meshes with the lifting gear 175d and is attached to the rotation axis of the first lifting drive motor 175b.

In this embodiment, two first lift drive motors 175b are attached to the drive base 175c, and the drive gears 175e attached to the rotation shafts of the first lift drive motors 175b are meshed with the lift gears 175d. In other words, one lift gear 175d is rotated by two first lift drive motors 175b.

When the drive gears 175e attached to the respective rotation shafts of the two first lift drive motors 175b of this first lift drive mechanism 175 are rotated in the same direction, the lift gears 175d meshing with the respective drive gears 175e rotate, and the first lift pin 175a revolves around the axis of the lift gear 175d. As the first lift pin 175a revolves, the first lift pin 175a slides within the slit 174a of the lift arm 174 and presses the inside of the slit 174a in the vertical direction, causing the lift arm 174 to rotate (pivot) around its rear end. As a result, the front end side of the lift arm 174 moves in the vertical direction, so that the first movable part 155 can be raised and lowered via the lift slider 172 to which the front end side of the lift arm 174 is attached.

The first lift detection sensor 176 is in a detection state when the pair of lift sliders 172 are positioned at the downward movement end (lowering end). In other words, the first lift detection sensor 176 detects, via the lift sliders 172, that the first movable part 155 is positioned at the lowering end.

[3-1e-7. Second lifting mechanism]
The second lifting mechanism 180 is attached to the upper surface of the first movable part base 157 of the first movable part 155 and comprises a second lifting base 181 that supports the operation unit base 164 of the performance operation unit 160 so that it can be raised and lowered, a second lifting drive motor 182 attached to the second lifting base 181, a second lifting pin 183 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the second lifting drive motor 182 and revolves at an eccentric position relative to the rotation shaft, a lifting transmission piece 184 that has a slit 184a extending in the front-to-rear direction into which the second lifting pin 183 is slidably inserted and has an upper part that is attached to the operation unit base 164, and a second lifting detection sensor 180a that detects the rise and fall of the second lifting base 181 (performance operation unit 160).

The second lifting base 181 of the second lifting mechanism 180 supports the operation unit base 164 so that it can be raised and lowered in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 161 (the direction of an inclined axis that moves forward as it goes upward).

When the second lifting mechanism 180 revolves the second lifting pin 183 by the second lifting drive motor 182, the second lifting pin 183 slides within the slit 184a of the lifting transmission piece 184 and presses the inner surface of the slit 184a in the vertical direction, causing the lifting transmission piece 184 to move in the vertical direction. Since the operation unit base 164 of the performance operation unit 160 is attached to this lifting transmission piece 184, the performance operation unit 160 can be raised and lowered via the lifting transmission piece 184.

When the second lifting mechanism 180 has the lifting transmission piece 184 (performance operation unit 160) positioned at the lower end, the second lifting pin 183 is located near the rear end of the slit 184a extending in the front-to-rear direction. In other words, the second lifting pin 183 is located at the bottom dead center. When lifting transmission piece 184 is to be raised from this state, the second lifting drive motor 182 causes the second lifting pin 183 to revolve so that it has a forward movement vector. As a result, the second lifting pin 183 slides forward within the slit 184a, and the second lifting pin 183 presses upward against the inner surface of the slit 184a, causing the lifting transmission piece 184 to move upward.

As the second lifting pin 183 continues to revolve, the line connecting the center of the second lifting pin 183 and the center of revolution passes the central axis of the slit 184a, and the second lifting pin 183 slides backward inside the slit 184a while pressing upward against the inner surface of the slit 184a. Then, when the second lifting pin 183 reaches near the rear end of the slit 184a, the drive of the second lifting drive motor 182 stops, and the revolution of the second lifting pin 183 stops. In this state, the second lifting pin 183 is located at the top dead center, and the lifting transmission piece 184 is located at the raised end.

When the lift transmission piece 184 (performance operation unit 160) is positioned at the upper end and a force is applied to move the lift transmission piece 184 downward, for example by pressing the performance operation unit 160, the second lift pin 183 is positioned at the top dead center, so no force acts in the forward/backward direction on the second lift pin 183. Therefore, the second lift pin 183 does not revolve, so the lift transmission piece 184 does not move downward.

In addition, when the performance operation unit 160 is pressed while the lift transmission piece 184 is positioned at the lift end, the player positioned in front of the performance operation unit 160 operates it, so a backward movement vector acts on the performance operation unit 160 in addition to a downward movement vector. In contrast, when the second lift pin 183 is positioned at the rear end of the slit 184a at the lift end, even if a backward movement vector acts on the second lift pin 183 through the slit 184a, the second lift pin 183 abuts against the rear end of the slit 184a, preventing the second lift pin 183 from revolving. The lift transmission piece 184 does not move downward, and the performance operation unit 160 can be maintained at the lift end position.

The second lifting/lowering detection sensor 180a is in a detection state when the second lifting/lowering base 181 is at the downward movement end (lowering end). In other words, the second lifting/lowering detection sensor 180a detects, via the second lifting/lowering base 181, that the performance operation unit 160 is at the lowering end.

[3-1f. Door frame sub-display section]
The door frame sub-display unit 185 is disposed to the right of the door frame performance display device 152 in the door frame performance device 150, behind the upper tray ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126. The door frame sub-display unit 185 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs lined up on the left and right. The door frame sub-display unit 185 is disposed in an inclined state so that the lower end side is positioned forward relative to the upper end side. The lower end of the door frame sub-display unit 185 is disposed at the same height as the upper surface of the bulge portion 120 from which the upper tray ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 protrude.

The door frame sub-display unit 185 is equipped with a frame-shaped sub-display unit decorative frame 186 that illuminates and decorates the outer periphery of three square 7-segment LEDs, and a transparent sub-display unit cover 187 that covers the three 7-segment LEDs and the sub-display unit decorative frame 186 and is inclined at the same angle as the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151 in the door frame performance device 150.

[3-1g. Lower front speaker unit]
As shown in Figures 11 and 13, the lower front speaker unit 190 comprises a lower front speaker 191 mounted behind the speaker mounting opening 120a of the bulge portion 120, a lower front speaker grill 192 having a plurality of grill holes passing through it and closing the speaker mounting opening 120a, a horizontal lattice-shaped grill decoration frame 193 disposed in front of the lower front speaker grill 192 and attached to the front of the bulge portion 120, rod-shaped lattice decoration portions 194 respectively disposed on the rear side of each lattice portion in the grill decoration frame 193, and lattice decoration LEDs 195 provided at both ends of each lattice decoration portion 194 to illuminate and decorate the lattice decoration portion 194.

The lower front speaker 191 is a woofer that outputs low-frequency sound. The lower front speaker grill 192 is attached to the inside of the bulge 120. The lower front speaker grill 192 is made of punched metal.

The grill decorative frame 193 has a plated layer with a silver metallic luster on the surface. The grill decorative frame 193 is composed of a rectangular frame that fits around the inner circumference of the speaker mounting opening 120a of the bulge 120, and multiple lattice sections that connect two sides extending vertically and are arranged at a distance from each other. The lattice sections extending to the left and right of the grill decorative frame 193 extend at a constant width in the area (general area) excluding both ends in the left and right direction, and are formed into a trapezoid shape in which both ends in the left and right direction expand diagonally downward toward the ends and then extend at a constant width.

The lattice decoration 194 is translucent and formed in a cylindrical shape that is long in the left-right direction. Both left-right ends of the lattice decoration 194 are located behind the trapezoidal portion of the lattice portion of the grill decoration frame 193, and the remaining portion is located below the general portion of the lattice portion. This allows the lattice decoration 194 to be viewed from the front, except for both ends. Multiple lattice decorations 194 are provided in front of the lower front speaker grill 192. The lattice decoration LED 195 is a full-color LED.

The lower front speaker unit 190 can output low-pitched (low-frequency) sounds from the lower front speaker 191. This lower front speaker unit 190 faces forward from the front of the bulging portion 120 that bulges forward, so it can apply sound pressure to the player seated in front of this pachinko machine 1. In addition, the lower front speaker unit 190 can illuminate the lattice decoration portion 194 by appropriately illuminating multiple lattice decoration LEDs 195, and can illuminate and decorate the inside of the grill decoration frame 193 (the front side of the lower front speaker grill 192) through the lattice decoration portion 194.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
Next, a brief description will be given of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame base unit. The cylinder lock 127 is attached to a cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650. The cylinder lock 127 includes a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) that extends forward and backward, a metal keyhole 128 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body, and a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is attached to the rear side of the cylinder body, is inserted into the keyhole 128, and rotates together with the rotation of a regular metal key.

The cylinder body of the cylinder lock 127 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcement unit from the rear and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear, and has a pair of notches cut from the rear end toward the front at positions opposite each other across the central axis. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, the metal transmission cylinder 654 of the metal locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches, so that the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted in the keyhole 128) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate it. When the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, if the rotation transmission member of the cylinder lock 127 in the door frame 3 is in contact with the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main frame 4, the cylinder lock 127 and the locking unit 650 are electrically connected.

When opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, or when opening the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 3, the cylinder lock 127 is operated by an attendant such as a game parlor clerk who inserts a genuine metal key into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127 and rotates it in a predetermined direction (either clockwise or counterclockwise, whichever is the corresponding direction). When an attendant such as a game parlor clerk inserts a genuine metal key into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127, the attendant becomes charged with static electricity and discharges it, causing electromagnetic noise that is transmitted to the cylinder lock 127 via the genuine metal key. Therefore, in this embodiment, various circuit boards (e.g., circuit boards having power supply lines and circuit board ground lines) are not placed near the cylinder lock 127 to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering.

[3-2. Door frame upper unit]
Next, the door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 5 to 10 and Fig. 14. Fig. 14(a) is an enlarged front view of the upper part of the door frame, and Fig. 14(b) is an enlarged front view of Fig. 14(a) with the grill decoration frame and the lattice decoration part removed. The door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 includes a game window 201 that allows the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main frame 4 to be viewed from the front when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4, a door frame upper unit base 202 that has an outer periphery that is long vertically and an inner periphery that becomes the game window 201 is formed in an inverted U-shape that is opened downward, and a transparent closing glass 205 that is provided on the door frame upper unit base 202 and closes the inverted U-shaped inner periphery (game window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202.

The upper door frame unit 200 also includes an upper door frame interior decorative unit 210 arranged in a strip shape along the inner circumference of the inverted U-shape of the play window 201 on the front surface of the upper door frame unit base 202, an upper door frame exterior decorative unit 220 arranged outside the upper door frame interior decorative unit 210 on the front surface of the upper door frame unit base 202, an upper door frame outer edge decorative unit 230 covering the upper door frame interior decorative unit 210 and the upper door frame exterior decorative unit 220, and an upper speaker unit 240 arranged on the upper front surface of the upper door frame unit base 202.

[3-2a. Door frame upper unit base]
The door frame upper unit base 202 forms the rear surface of the door frame upper unit 200 (see FIG. 10). The door frame upper unit base 202 is flat and formed in a gate shape that is open downward. When viewed from the front, the door frame upper unit base 202 has an outer periphery that is long vertically and a rectangular shape, and an inner periphery that is open downward and is formed in an inverted U shape. The size of the inner periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202 is formed larger than the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 located behind it.

[3-2b. Closing glass]
The closing glass 205 is detachably provided at the rear end of the door frame upper unit base 202 so as to close the inner periphery (the game window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202 (see FIG. 10). This closing glass 205 is for closing the front side of the game area 5a so that the game ball B does not fall forward from the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4. The closing glass 205 is transparent reinforced glass.

[3-2c. Door frame upper interior decoration unit]
The door frame upper interior decorative unit 210 comprises a wall-shaped upper interior base 211 that extends along the inner circumference of the door frame upper unit base 202 at a constant width and protrudes forward, a semi-cylindrical upper interior decorative part 212 that extends along the upper interior base 211 and is provided at the front end of the upper interior base 211, and an upper interior decorative substrate 213 that is provided behind the upper interior decorative part 212 and has multiple LEDs 213a mounted on its front surface.

The upper internal base 211 is formed into an inverted U-shape when viewed from the front. At the front end of the upper internal base 211, a pair of linearly extending portions of the inverted U-shape extend vertically in the up-down direction, and the semicircular arc-shaped portion of the inverted U-shape curves so as to protrude forward as it extends upward. This upper internal base 211 is formed to be opaque. The left-right spacing at the bottom end of the upper internal base 211 matches the spacing between the left and right rear ends of the bulge upper decorative portion 121 in the bulge portion 120 of the door frame lower unit 100.

The upper interior decorative part 212 is translucent milky white and formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The upper interior decorative board 213 is attached to the upper interior base 211, and multiple LEDs 213a mounted on the front are arranged in a row along the upper interior decorative part 212. The multiple LEDs 213a on the upper interior decorative board 213 are full-color LEDs. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 213a on the upper interior decorative board 213, the upper interior decorative part 212 can be illuminated and decorated.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper interior decorative unit 210 is formed so that the lower end of the upper interior decorative part 212 coincides with the rear end of the bulge upper decorative part 121 of the bulge 120, and the upper interior decorative part 212 and the bulge upper decorative part 121 form a single continuous decoration.

The upper interior decorative part 212 of this door frame upper interior decorative unit 210, together with the bulge upper decorative part 121, constitutes a first peripheral light area LA1 (area surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 16) that illuminates and decorates the area around the play window 201. In addition, since the upper interior decorative part 212 is formed in a milky white color, it is possible to reduce the light from the multiple LEDs 213a and radiate it outward, thereby preventing the inside of the play window 201 surrounded by the upper interior decorative part 212 from becoming difficult to see due to glare, and the play area 5a can be clearly seen from the front through the play window 201.

[3-2d. Door frame upper exterior decorative unit]
The door frame upper external decorative unit 220 has its rear end attached to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, and comprises a plurality of protruding bases 221 which protrude forward and are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, an upper external apex decorative portion 222 provided at the front end of the protruding base 221, upper external valley decorative portions 223 each arranged between the protruding bases 221, upper external apex LEDs 224 each arranged behind the upper external apex decorative portion 222, and upper external valley LEDs 225 arranged behind the upper external valley decorative portion 223.

The protruding base 221 is formed into an isosceles triangle shape when viewed from the side. The protruding base 221 extends in the left-right direction from the outer peripheral surface of the upper internal base 211 to the vicinity of the left and right side pieces of the door frame upper unit base 202, and is formed so as to extend outward from the upper internal base 211. The front end of the protruding base 221 protrudes forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the portion that is in contact with the upper internal base 211.

The upper outer apex decorative parts 222 are formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the left-right direction, with both left and right ends formed in a hemispherical shape. The upper outer apex decorative parts 222 are formed so that the outer diameter of the cylinder is approximately 1/3 the outer diameter of the upper inner decorative part 212. The upper outer apex decorative parts 222 are each formed to a length corresponding to the left-right length of the protruding base 221 provided thereon. These upper outer apex decorative parts 222 are translucent.

The upper outer valley decorative part 223 is composed of a portion (vertical surface portion) that extends parallel to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 between the protruding bases 221, and a portion (sloping surface portion) that extends diagonally from the upper and lower edges of the portion along the lower and upper surfaces of the protruding base 221 to near the front end of the protruding base 221. The upper outer valley decorative part 223 has a mirror-like plating layer on its surface (front surface). In addition, a square opening is formed in the upper outer valley decorative part 223 in the portion that extends parallel to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 so that the upper outer valley LED 225 located at the rear faces forward.

The upper outer apex LED 224 is a full color LED. The upper outer valley LED 225 is a high brightness full color LED.

The door frame upper exterior decorative unit 220 can illuminate and decorate the upper exterior apex decorative part 222 by appropriately illuminating the upper exterior apex LED 224. In addition, the door frame upper exterior decorative unit 220 can illuminate and decorate the upper exterior valley decorative part 223 by appropriately illuminating the upper exterior valley LED 225, and can brightly illuminate the space between the upper exterior apex decorative parts 222 that are spaced apart in the vertical direction.

The upper outer apex decorative portion 222 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 of the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220 form a second illuminating area LA2 (the area surrounded by a dotted line in Figure 16) that illuminates and decorates the outside of the first illuminating area LA1 around the game window 201. In addition, the front ends of the upper outer apex decorative part 222 and the upper outer valley decorative part 223 of the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220 are located further rearward than the front end of the upper inner decorative part 212 of the door frame upper inner decorative unit 210. Therefore, the light irradiated from the upper outer apex LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 toward the play window 201 is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decorative part 212. Even if the upper outer apex decorative part 222 and the upper outer valley decorative part 223 are illuminated, the inside of the play window 201 is prevented from being difficult to see due to glare, and the play area 5a can be clearly seen from the front through the play window 201.

[3-2e. Door frame upper outer edge decorative unit]
The door frame upper outer edge decorative unit 230 comprises a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged in a row along the outer peripheral edge (both left and right sides and the top side) of the door frame upper unit base 202, a door frame upper cover 232 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the door frame upper unit base 202 and covering the door frame upper inner decorative unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220, and an opaque decorative portion 233 provided on both the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232. The plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 are full color LEDs.

The door frame upper cover 232 is made up of a pair of side walls extending forward from the left and right ends of the door frame upper unit base 202, a top wall connecting the upper edges of the pair of side walls and extending forward from the upper end of the door frame upper unit base 202, and a front wall connecting the front edges of the pair of side walls and the front edge of the top wall, and is formed in a box shape that is open at the rear and bottom. The door frame upper cover 232 is entirely made transparent.

The door frame upper cover 232 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of the front end of the upper interior decorative part 212 so that the front end of the side wall is located slightly forward of the front end of the upper interior decorative part 212. In detail, the front end of the side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 extends vertically from the lower end to a height near the upper end of the inverted U-shaped linearly extending part of the play window 201, and then extends in an arc shape so that it is positioned forward as it goes upward to approximately the same height as the state of the door frame upper unit base 202. In addition, the front ends of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232 are curved in such a way that the parts that are curved in an arc shape toward the top are closer to each other as they go upward.

The door frame upper cover 232 has a pair of speaker mounting holes 232a formed in both left and right corners of the upper front wall, where the grill decorative frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 can be attached.

The opaque decorative portion 233 is provided on the outer surfaces of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232. The opaque decorative portion 233 has a slit 233a extending forward and backward formed at a position at the same height as the protruding base 221 of the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220. A part of the transparent side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 faces outward through the slit 233a of the opaque decorative portion 233.

The upper door frame outer edge decorative unit 230 covers the upper door frame inner decorative unit 210 and the upper door frame outer decorative unit 220 with the upper door frame cover 232 so that they can be seen from the front. In addition, the upper door frame outer edge decorative unit 230 can illuminate and decorate the outer edge of the upper door frame unit base 202 and the outer edge of the front wall of the upper door frame cover 232 (the front ends of the side walls and top wall) by appropriately illuminating the multiple upper outer edge LEDs 231.

In addition, the door frame upper outer edge decorative unit 230 has opaque decorative parts 233 on both the left and right outer sides, which prevents light from the upper outer apex LED 224 and upper outer valley LED 225 of the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220 from being irradiated onto other players seated in front of other pachinko machines placed adjacent to this pachinko machine 1.

The multiple upper outer edge LEDs 231 (the front outer edge of the door frame upper cover 232) of the door frame upper outer edge decorative unit 230 form a third circumferential area LA3 (the area surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 16) that illuminates and decorates the outside of the second circumferential area LA2 around the game window 201. In addition, the multiple upper outer edge LEDs 231 of the door frame upper outer edge decorative unit 230 are arranged on the front side of the door frame upper unit base 202, that is, behind the front end of the upper inner decorative part 212 of the door frame upper inner decorative unit 210. Therefore, the light irradiated from the upper outer edge LEDs 231 to the game window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decorative part 212, and even if the multiple upper outer edge LEDs 231 are illuminated, it is prevented that the inside of the game window 201 is difficult to see due to glare, and the game area 5a can be viewed in good condition from the front through the game window 201.

[3-2f. Upper speaker unit]
The upper speaker unit 240 comprises upper speakers 241 respectively mounted near both left and right corners at the upper front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, upper speaker grills (not shown) which close the speaker mounting openings 232a of the door frame upper cover 232 in front of each upper speaker 241, a horizontal lattice-shaped grill decoration frame 243 which is positioned in front of the upper speaker grill and attached to the front wall of the door frame upper cover 232, rod-shaped lattice decoration portions 244 which are positioned behind the upper speaker grill at approximately the same intervals as each lattice portion in the grill decoration frame 243, and lattice decoration LEDs 245 which are provided at the outer left and right ends of each lattice decoration portion 244 and illuminate and decorate the lattice decoration portion (see Figure 14).

The upper speakers 241 are each installed at an angle facing slightly downward in the left-right center of the door frame upper unit 200. The upper speakers 241 are installed further back than the adjacent upper outer apex decorative part 222 of the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220. The upper speakers 241 are full-range speakers that output a full range of sound from low to high tones. The upper speaker grill is installed on the inside (rear surface of the front wall) of the door frame upper cover 232. The upper speaker grill is made of punched metal.

The grill decorative frame 243 has a plated layer with a silver metallic luster on the surface. The grill decorative frame 243 is composed of a frame portion shaped along the inner circumference of the speaker mounting opening 232a of the door frame upper cover 232, and multiple lattice portions arranged vertically spaced apart by connecting two sides extending vertically of the frame portion. The lattice portions extending to the left and right of the grill decorative frame 243 extend at a constant width in the portion (general portion) excluding the ends on the left and right outer sides of the door frame 3, and are formed into a trapezoid shape in which the ends on the left and right outer sides spread diagonally downward toward the ends and then extend at a constant width.

The lattice decoration part 244 is translucent and formed into a cylindrical shape that is long from side to side. The lattice decoration part 244 can be seen from the front through the upper speaker grill. The lattice decoration LED 245 is a full-color LED.

The upper speaker unit 240 is located close to the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and can output high-quality stereo sound to the player. In addition, the upper speaker unit 240 can illuminate and decorate the lattice decoration section 244 by appropriately illuminating the multiple lattice decoration LEDs 245, and can also illuminate and decorate the inside of the grill decoration frame 243 (the rear side of the upper speaker grill) via the lattice decoration section 244.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the upper speaker unit 240 has the upper outer apex decorative part 222, which is arranged inside the upper speaker grill (grill decorative frame 243), located further forward than the upper speaker 241. In other words, the lattice decorative part 244 and upper outer apex decorative part 222, which can be illuminated, are arranged between the upper speaker 241 and the upper speaker grill. As a result, when the upper outer apex decorative part 222 and the lattice decorative part 244 are illuminated, the player can see an effect in which the inside of the speaker grill is illuminated and decorated, something that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines.

[3-3. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the overall configuration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 5 to 16. Fig. 15 is a plan view of the door frame lower unit showing a state in which game balls are stored in the upper tray of the door frame. Fig. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing the peripheral light area in the door frame. When the front of the main frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 allows most of the front of the game board 5 held by the main frame 4, including the game area 5a, to be visible from the front through the game window 201. In addition, the front side of the game board 5 (game area 5a) can be closed by the closing glass 205 of the game window 201.

As shown in FIG. 16, the door frame 3 has a ring-shaped connection between the bulge upper decorative part 121 and the upper inner decorative part 212, and the upper tray 130, the door frame performance device 150, and the game window 201 are arranged within the ring. In other words, the upper tray 130, the door frame performance device 150, and the game window 201 are surrounded by the bulge upper decorative part 121 and the upper inner decorative part 212 (first circumferential light area LA1). Furthermore, the outside of the upper inner decorative part 212 is surrounded by the upper outer apex decorative part 222 and the upper outer valley decorative part 223 (second circumferential light area LA2), and the upper outer edge LED 231 (third circumferential light area LA3). In other words, the game window 201 is triple-surrounded by the three circumferential light areas: the first circumferential light area LA1, the second circumferential light area LA2, and the third circumferential light area LA3.

The door frame 3 is formed so that the storage area 131 of the upper tray 130 surrounds the front and both left and right sides of the door frame performance device 150, and the game balls B supplied from the supply port 135 flow along the front edge of the bulge portion 120 and are sent out from the delivery port 136 to the outside (the lower tray 140 or the ball launching device 540).

In the normal state of the door frame 3, the first movable part 155 and the performance operation part 160 of the door frame performance device 150 are each positioned at the downward movement end (lowering end). In this state, the top surface of the first movable part 155 (first movable part main body 156) is positioned slightly above the top surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151a of the device cover 151. In addition, the pressing operation part 161 of the performance operation part 160 is positioned slightly above the top surface of the first movable part main body 156 through the opening 156a of the first movable part main body 156.

The door frame 3 has a bulging upper decorative part 121 provided over the entire length at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper tray 130. This bulging upper decorative part 121 raises the upper end of the wall that stores the game balls B in the upper tray 130. The upper end of the front side (front area 131a side) of the bulging upper decorative part 121 is higher than the front end of the upper surface of the door frame presentation device 150 (first movable part 155) in the normal state. This causes the game balls B to overflow onto the door frame presentation device 150 side when the upper tray 130 is filled with game balls B, making it easier for the player to recognize that the upper tray 130 is full of game balls B and preventing the game balls B from spilling forward from the upper tray 130.

The door frame 3 has the upper tray ball removal button 124, ball lending button 125, and return button 126 concentrated in the right corner on the top surface of the bulging portion 120, to the right of the upper tray 130. The surface on which the upper tray ball removal button 124, ball lending button 125, and return button 126 are provided is located higher than the upper tray 130 and lower than the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121, and is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the front. As a result, when a game ball B is placed on the surface on which the upper tray ball removal button 124, ball lending button 125, and return button 126 are provided, the game ball B can be rolled toward the upper tray 130 by the surface and the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121, and released into the upper tray 130.

In addition, the surfaces of the bottom wall 132, rear peripheral wall 133, and front peripheral wall 134 that constitute the upper tray 130 (i.e., the inner surfaces of the upper tray 130) of the door frame 3 are formed in a mirror-like shape, so that the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 are reflected on the inner surface of the upper tray 130, and the reflected game balls B are visible, creating the illusion that a large number of game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130 and making the volume of the upper tray 130 appear larger.

In the door frame 3, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 in the upper tray 130 first rolls forward in the left side area 131b, then enters the front area 131a and rolls to the right within the front area 131a. The game ball B can then be shown to the player as it enters the right side area 131b from the right end of the front area 131a, rolls backward within the right side area 131b, and is then sent out from the delivery port 136 (see FIG. 15). At this time, the game ball B flows through the front area 131a, which is closer to the player on the front side than the door frame effect device 150, so the game ball B in the front area 131a can be clearly seen, and the amount of game ball B stored in the upper tray 130 can be easily confirmed.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a sending outlet 136 at the rear end of the right side area 131b where the game ball B rolls backwards on the upper tray 130, so the sending outlet 136 can be seen from the player's side. This allows the player to see the game ball B being sent from the sending outlet 136 (upper tray 130) to the ball launcher 540, something that was not possible with previous pachinko machines.

Through the transparent device cover 151 and the upper wall of the first movable body 156, the pair of lower speakers 153a can be seen through the door frame 3, and the door frame performance display device 152 can be seen behind the lower speaker 153a. The upper end of the door frame performance display device 152 of the door frame 3 is close to the upper end of the door frame lower unit 100, that is, the lower end of the game window 201. This brings the door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600 of the game board 5 into close proximity, so that a performance image can be displayed in which the door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600 form a single screen.

The door frame 3 is arranged behind the performance operation unit 160, and the lower edge of the door frame performance display device 152 is positioned below the upper front end of the performance operation unit 160, and the upper edge is positioned above the upper front end of the performance operation unit 160, making the upper part of the door frame performance display device 152 higher than the performance operation unit 160. As a result, compared to when the entire door frame performance display device 152 is lower than the performance operation unit 160, the door frame performance display device 152 can be easily seen from the player side even if the door frame performance display device 152 is brought close to the performance operation unit 160. In addition, since the depth in the front-to-rear direction applied to the door frame performance display device 152 can be reduced, the amount of forward bulging of the bulging portion 120 can be suppressed, so that the bulging portion 120 can be prevented from giving the player a feeling of oppression, and the player can enjoy the game in a comfortable state and suppress a decrease in interest.

The door frame 3 also has a door frame performance display device 152 positioned diagonally behind the performance operation unit 160 so that the vertical projection range VP of the display screen (the range between the two dashed lines in FIG. 11) is close to the performance operation unit 160. Therefore, when the player looks at the door frame performance display device 152, the performance operation unit 160 is visible near the lower outer edge of the door frame performance display device 152. Therefore, by displaying a performance image on the door frame performance display device 152 that decorates the performance operation unit 160, the performance operation unit 160 can be decorated with the performance image, and by changing the performance image, the decoration of the performance operation unit 160 can be changed in various ways, making it less likely for the player to get bored.

Furthermore, since the display screen of the door frame performance display device 152 is visible near the performance operation unit 160, even if the image of the performance operation unit 160 is not displayed on the door frame performance display device 152, images of arrows or hands pointing towards the performance operation unit 160 can be displayed to encourage the player to operate the performance operation unit 160. This makes it possible to immediately direct the player's gaze towards the performance operation unit 160, making it less likely that the timing of operating the performance operation unit 160 will be delayed, allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation performance of operating the performance operation unit 160 and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the door frame 3 is designed so that under normal conditions, the lower front speaker 191 and the upper speaker 241 are difficult to see from the front (player side) due to the lower front speaker grill 192 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the upper speaker grill of the upper speaker unit 240.

[3-4. Electromagnetic noise countermeasures for door frames]
Next, a brief description will be given of noise countermeasures for the door frame 3. As described above, the door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit (not shown) that has a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. As described above, the door frame base unit includes a metal frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) that is attached to the rear side of a door frame base (not shown) that has a game window 201 that penetrates from front to back and is formed into a rectangular shape (rectangle) that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a metal cylinder lock 127 for opening and closing that is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit. As described above, the door frame reinforcement unit functions as a door frame metal earth in addition to the function of reinforcing the door frame base to provide rigidity, and is electrically connected to a frame earth board 559 provided on the main frame 4 via a door frame metal earth wire (not shown). That is, in this embodiment, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as a frame ground on the door frame side. The frame earth substrate 559 is capable of temporarily collecting electromagnetic noise generated at various locations and grounding (earthing) it to the island equipment of the amusement hall, and is electrically connected to the earth of the island equipment of the amusement hall via an island equipment earth wire not shown.

As described above, some of the various decorative parts on the door frame 3 are not plated at all, while others are plated on the entire front and back. This decorative plating is a precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and is conductive. Among the various decorative parts, those that are plated on the entire front and back are electrically connected to the door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown) or a metal conductive plate (not shown). For this reason, for example, when a player touches a decorative part with decorative plating, static electricity charged to the player is discharged and transmitted as electromagnetic noise from the player to the door frame reinforcement unit via this decorative part, and is then led from the door frame reinforcement unit to the door frame metal earth wire (not shown), the frame earth board 559, and the island equipment earth wire (not shown) to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall, where it is removed.

When the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, as described above, the rotation transmission member of the cylinder lock 127 in the door frame 3 and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 are in contact with each other and are electrically connected. Therefore, when an attendant such as a game parlor clerk opens the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 while the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, for example, an attendant such as a game parlor clerk or a person who possesses a setting key described later (which can change the setting value as well as check the current setting value, etc.) When a person (limited to a certain number of people) touches the locking unit 650 on the main frame 4, the static electricity that has been charged to the game hall staff or the person holding the setting key described later is discharged as electromagnetic noise, which is transmitted from the game hall staff or the person holding the setting key described later through the locking unit 650 to the door frame reinforcement unit, and is then guided from the door frame reinforcement unit through the door frame metal ground wire (not shown), the frame ground board 559, and the island equipment ground wire (not shown) to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall, where it is removed.

[3-5. Door frame lighting effects]
Next, the light-emitting effect by the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 surrounds the upper tray 130, the door frame effect device 150, and the game window 201, etc., with the bulging upper decorative part 121 and the upper inner decorative part 212 (first surrounding light area LA1), which are formed in a milky white cylindrical shape. The multiple LEDs 121a of the bulging upper decorative part 121 and the multiple LEDs 213a of the upper inner decorative part 212 are arranged in a row in the direction in which they each extend. This allows the multiple LEDs 121a and LEDs 213a to be appropriately illuminated to illuminate and decorate the area around the game window 201, etc. At this time, if the multiple LEDs 121a and LEDs 213a are illuminated in sequence, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light revolves around the game window 201.

In addition, the door frame 3 is equipped with an upper outer apex decorative part 222 and an upper outer valley decorative part 223 (second circumferential light area LA2) that are arranged outside the upper inner decorative part 212. Therefore, by lighting up and decorating the upper outer apex decorative part 222 and the upper outer valley decorative part 223 with the upper outer apex LEDs 224 and upper outer valley LEDs 225, the outside of the first circumferential light area LA1 can be illuminated and decorated, allowing the player to see a lighting effect that illuminates and decorates the outside of the game window 201 doubly.

Since the upper outer apex decorative parts 222 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, they can be illuminated sequentially from one side in the vertical direction to show the player a light-emitting effect like a level meter. For example, when an opportunity arises, the player can be shown the expected value for the game as a level meter, or a sound meter that matches the music being output.

In addition, because the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 is formed in a mirror-like shape, illuminating the upper outer valley LED 225 makes the space between the upper outer apex decorative portions 222 shine brighter than the upper inner decorative portion 212, allowing players to see a lighting effect that is likely to attract their attention.

This door frame 3 is equipped with multiple upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged in a row around the outer edge of the door frame upper unit base 202. By illuminating these upper outer edge LEDs 231, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which the outer edge (third peripheral area LA3) of the door frame 3 is illuminated, something that could not be seen in previous pachinko machines 1.

The door frame 3 has three peripheral light areas on the outside of the game window 201, the first peripheral light area LA1, the second peripheral light area LA2, and the third peripheral light area LA3. By appropriately illuminating each peripheral light area, the player can see a variety of light effects, such as a light effect that revolves around the game window 201, a light effect that comes from the outside towards the game window 201, and a light effect that comes from the game window 201 to the outside.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the lattice decoration LED 195 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the lattice decoration LED 245 of the upper speaker unit 240 can be appropriately illuminated to illuminate and decorate the lattice portion (lattice decoration portion 194) of the grill decoration frame 193 and the lattice portion (lattice decoration portion 244) of the grill decoration frame 243, allowing the player to see an illuminated effect that highlights the grill decoration frame 193 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the grill decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240.

Furthermore, in the door frame 3, the lower speaker decorative portion 153c of the lower speaker unit 153, the lattice decorative portion 244 of the upper speaker unit 240, and the upper outer apex LEDs 224 and upper outer valley LEDs 225 located behind the grill decorative frame 243 (upper speaker grill) of the upper speaker unit 240 in the multiple upper outer apex LEDs 224 and upper outer valley LEDs 225 can be illuminated to illuminate and decorate the space between the pair of lower speakers 153a and the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156, and the space between the upper speaker 241 and the upper speaker grill, allowing players to see an illuminated effect that could not be seen in previous pachinko machines, where the space between the speaker and the speaker grill is illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 138a of the storage light-emitting decoration section 138 on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper tray 130, so that the upper tray 130 and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating the plurality of LEDs 138a. For example, when there are no game balls B stored in the upper tray 130, the plurality of LEDs 138a can be illuminated, and since the inner surface of the upper tray 130 is formed like a mirror, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which the entire inside of the upper tray 130 is dazzlingly illuminated and decorated, and the dazzling light of the upper tray 130 of this pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the interest of a player who is selecting a pachinko machine to play.

This storage light-emitting decoration 138 is located above half the outer diameter of the game ball B from the bottom wall 132 of the upper tray 130, so that when game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130, the multiple LEDs 138a are illuminated, and the light is irradiated onto the upper half of the game ball B and reflected upward, allowing the player to see the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 sparkling and illuminating the display.

When the bulge upper decorative portion 121 is illuminated, some of the light is also irradiated into the upper tray 130, so the player can see the illumination effect of the bulge upper decorative portion 121 also illuminating the upper tray 130 and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130.

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with an illuminating decorative part 124a surrounding the upper tray ball removal button 124 and an illuminating decorative part 142a surrounding the lower tray ball removal button 142, so that the upper tray ball removal button 124 and the lower tray ball removal button 142 can be illuminated by illuminating the illuminating decorative part 124a of the upper tray ball removal button 124 and the illuminating decorative part 142a of the lower tray ball removal button 142. Therefore, by illuminating the upper tray ball removal button 124 and the lower tray ball removal button 142 when many game balls B are paid out, such as during a "jackpot" game, a light-emitting effect can be shown that encourages the player to operate the upper tray ball removal button 124 and the lower tray ball removal button 142 to prevent the upper tray 130 and the lower tray 140 from becoming full of game balls B.

In this way, the door frame 3 of this embodiment can show the player a variety of light-emitting effects, and by appropriately combining these, it is possible to present the player with a greater variety of effects, which can entertain the player and prevent the player from becoming bored.

[3-6. Door frame production device production]
Next, the performance by the door frame performance device 150 of the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 17. Fig. 17(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic relationship between the door frame performance display device and the performance operation unit in the door frame performance device, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of decoration of the performance operation unit by the performance image of the door frame performance display device, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of collaboration performance by the performance image of the door frame performance display device and the movable performance of the performance operation unit.

In the normal state of the door frame production device 150, the first movable part 155 and the production operation unit 160 are each located at the lower moving end (lowering end). In this state, the top surface of the first movable part 155 (first movable part main body 156) is located slightly above the top surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151a of the device cover 151. In addition, the production operation unit 160 has the pressing operation unit 161 located slightly above the top surface of the first movable part main body 156 through the opening 156a of the first movable part main body 156. Even in this normal state, the pressing operation unit 161 of the production operation unit 160 can be pressed.

When the first LED of the operation unit decorative board 162 is illuminated in the normal state, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which the top surface of the pressing operation unit 161 is illuminated and decorated. Also, when the second LED of the operation unit decorative board 162 is illuminated in the normal state, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable part cover 158 surrounding the outside of the pressing operation unit 161 is illuminated and decorated. These light-emitting effects can draw the player's attention to the pressing operation unit 161, encouraging the player to press the pressing operation unit 161 and making it easier for the player to participate in a player-participation type effect by operating the pressing operation unit 161.

In addition, when the multiple LEDs 159a of the first movable part decorative board 159 are illuminated in the normal state, the space between the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper tray 130 and the first movable part main body 156 can be illuminated and decorated through the side wall of the first movable part main body 156. In other words, the player can see a lighting effect in which the area near the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper tray 130 is illuminated and decorated.

In this normal state, when a specific sound is output from the pair of lower speakers 153a, the sound is emitted to the player through the grill hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grill hole 156b of the first movable part main body 156, allowing the player to hear an acoustic effect in which the sound comes from the direction of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). This makes it possible for the sound from the lower speaker 153a to draw the player's attention to the press operation unit 161, encouraging the player to press the press operation unit 161 and making it easier for the player to participate in a player-participation effect by operating the press operation unit 161.

In addition, under normal conditions, the door frame presentation device 150 allows the player to see the door frame presentation display device 152 in good condition through the device cover 151, and the player can be entertained by the presentation image displayed on the door frame presentation display device 152 (see FIG. 17(a) etc.).

In the normal state, the door frame effect device 150 revolves the first lifting pins 175a using the four first lifting drive motors 175b of the first lifting mechanism 170, and the player can see a moving effect in which the first movable part 155 moves to the upper moving end (rising end) together with the effect operation unit 160 via a pair of lifting arms 174 and lifting sliders 172. This causes the first movable part 155 to pop out upward together with the effect operation unit 160, surprising the player and strongly encouraging the player to press the pressing operation unit 161, and also makes the player think that something good is about to happen as the first movable part 155 rises, increasing the player's expectations for the game.

When the first movable part 155 is moved to the rising end, the side wall of the first movable part main body 156 becomes visible to the player, as shown in FIG. 12(a). In this state, when the multiple LEDs 159a of the first movable part decorative board 159 are illuminated, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which the side wall of the first movable part main body 156 is illuminated and decorated. Therefore, when the first movable part 155 is moved from the falling end to the rising end while the side wall of the first movable part main body 156 is illuminated and decorated, the player can see an effect in which the first movable part 155 appears to be rising out of the light, which can have a strong impact on the player.

In addition, when the first movable part 155 is moved to the raised end and the multiple LEDs 159a on the first movable part decorative board 159 are illuminated, some of the light is irradiated onto the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130, so that the player can see a light-emitting effect in which the multiple LEDs 159a also make the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 sparkle, thereby achieving the same effect as described above.

In addition, the first movable part 155 can be raised and lowered by the four first lifting drive motors 175b, and the first movable part 155 can be vibrated by repeatedly rotating the first lifting drive motors 175b forward and backward in short increments. This makes it possible to surprise the player by touching the first movable part 155 or the performance operation part 160 when the first movable part 155 is vibrating. In addition, by vibrating the first movable part 155 at the timing of pressing the performance operation part 160 (pressing operation part 161), the feeling of the pressing operation can be changed by making it heavier or lighter, entertaining the player.

Furthermore, when the first movable part 155 is moved from the lower end to the upper end, the multiple grill holes 156b formed in the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156 move upward, increasing the volume of the space between the multiple grill holes 156b and the pair of lower speakers 153a. This changes the volume between the lower speaker 153a and the grill holes 156b, changing the natural vibration of that area and changing the resonant frequency of the sound output from the lower speaker 153a, allowing the player to hear an acoustic effect in which the tone of the sound radiated toward the player through the multiple grill holes 156b changes.

In addition, when the first movable part 155 is moved from the lowering end to the rising end, it appears to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 that the upper part of the first movable part 155 covers the lower part of the display screen of the door frame performance display device 152. As a result, when the first movable part 155 is moved to the rising end, part of the performance image displayed on the door frame performance display device 152 is blocked by the first movable part 155, making it possible to make the player aware of the rise of the first movable part 155 and to achieve the same effect as described above.

At this time, the door frame effect display device 152 can display, for example, an effect image in which a specific character lifts the first movable part 155, or an effect image in which a specific character is lifted by the first movable part 155 rising, allowing the player to see a collaborative effect that combines the movement effect of the first movable part 155 and the effect image, providing great entertainment to the player.

In addition, when the second lifting pin 183 is revolved by the second lifting drive motor 182 of the second lifting mechanism 180 in the normal state, the door frame effect device 150 can show the player a moving effect in which the effect operation unit 160 moves to the upper moving end (rising end) via the lifting transmission piece 184. This causes the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 161 of the effect operation unit 160 to protrude upward more than the upper surface of the first movable part 155, so that the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the pressing operation unit 161, and the player can be strongly encouraged to press the pressing operation unit 161. In addition, the pressing operation unit 161 rising can make the player think that something good is about to happen, and can increase the player's expectations for the game.

When the performance operation unit 160 has been moved to the rising end, as shown in FIG. 12(b), the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 below the pressing operation unit 161 is exposed to the outside. In this state, when the second LED of the operation unit decorative board 162 is illuminated, the player can see a light-emitting performance in which the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 is illuminated and decorated. Therefore, when the performance operation unit 160 is moved from the falling end to the rising end while the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 of the performance operation unit 160 is illuminated and decorated, the player can see an effect in which the performance operation unit 160 appears to be rising from the light, which can have a strong impact on the player.

In addition, because the second lifting drive motor 182 can raise and lower the performance operation unit 160, the second lifting drive motor 182 can be rotated forward and backward in short increments to vibrate the performance operation unit 160. As a result, if a player touches the performance operation unit 160 while it is vibrating, the player can be surprised by the vibration. In addition, by vibrating the performance operation unit 160 at the timing when the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is pressed, the feeling of the press operation can be changed by making it heavier or lighter, entertaining the player.

In addition, when the performance operation unit 160 is moved from the lowering end to the rising end, it appears to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 that the upper part of the performance operation unit 160 covers the lower part of the display screen of the door frame performance display device 152. As a result, when the performance operation unit 160 is moved to the rising end, part of the performance image displayed on the door frame performance display device 152 is blocked by the performance operation unit 160, making it possible to make the player aware of the rising of the performance operation unit 160, and to achieve the same effect as described above.

At this time, by displaying on the door frame effect display device 152, for example, effect images that decorate the periphery of the effect operation unit 160 (see FIG. 17(b)), effect images that show a specific character lifting the effect operation unit 160, and effect images that show a specific character being lifted by the rise of the effect operation unit 160 (see FIG. 17(c)), the player can be shown a collaborative effect that combines the moving effect of the effect operation unit 160 and the effect images, which can be greatly entertaining to the player.

This presentation operation unit 160 can move the first movable part 155 to the rising end when the first movable part 155 is at the falling end, and can also raise the first movable part 155 when the first movable part 155 is at the rising end (the state of FIG. 12(b)). For example, by moving the first movable part 155 from the falling end to the rising end and then moving the presentation operation unit 160 from the falling end to the rising end, the player can be shown a moving presentation in which the presentation operation unit 160 rises in two stages. As a result, since the presentation operation unit 160 rises in two stages, the player can be strongly made to believe that a "jackpot" game will start when the presentation operation unit 160 is operated (the special lottery result is a "jackpot"), which can increase the player's expectations for the game, and can allow the player to operate the presentation operation unit 160 and enjoy a player-participation type presentation.

In this way, the door frame effect device 150 can present various effects to the player, such as light-emitting effects, moving effects, image effects, player participation effects, sound effects, etc., as described above, and by appropriately combining these, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, preventing the player from getting bored and allowing the player to enjoy the game.

[3-7. Characteristic Effects of the Present Embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper tray 130 having the storage area 131 for game balls B surrounding the device placement section 123 is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 provided in front of and below the game area 5a where the game is played, with the front area 131a on the front side of the device placement section 123 where the door frame effect device 150 is placed, and the side areas 131b on both the left and right sides. Therefore, the game balls B are stored in front of the door frame effect device 150 by the front area 131a, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be easily seen by the player. In addition, the two side areas 131b connected by the front area 131a are areas that extend forward and backward, so that the game balls B stored in the side areas 131b in addition to the front area 131a can be easily seen by the player.

Therefore, by making the game balls B in the upper tray 130 easier to see, the player can be made aware of the amount of game balls B stored. Even if the game balls B in the upper tray 130 are consumed as the game progresses and the amount of stored balls decreases, the player can be made to recognize the decrease in the amount of stored balls B easily and can have game balls B replenished in the upper tray 130. This prevents game balls B from disappearing from the upper tray 130 without the player realizing, prevents sudden interruptions to play, prevents the player from becoming discouraged due to an interruption in play, and suppresses a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as described above, the game ball B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b can be easily seen by the player, so that the player can instantly recognize whether or not there is a game ball B in the front area 131a simply by dropping his or her gaze from the game area 5a to the door frame presentation device 150 below. This eliminates the need for the player to carefully check whether or not there is a game ball B in the upper tray 130, making it easier for the player to concentrate on the game, making the game more enjoyable and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the supply port 135 is located on the left side of the two side areas 131b connected by the front area 131a and the discharge port 136 is located on the opposite right side, the front area 131a is provided midway from the supply port 135 to the discharge port 136, and the game balls B supplied from the supply port 135 into the storage area 131 are discharged from the discharge port 136 through the front area 131a to the outside of the storage area 131. Therefore, when the game balls B in the upper tray 130 are consumed by playing the game, the game balls B flow in front of the player (front area 131a), making it easier for the player to recognize the consumption speed and amount of the game balls B, and making it easier to achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, since the supply port 135 is located on the left side of the side area 131b on both the left and right sides of the device placement section 123 and the discharge port 136 is located on the right side, the distance between the supply port 135 and the discharge port 136 in the left-right direction can be increased, which presumably increases the left-right direction of the storage area 131 as well, thereby making it possible to increase the amount of game balls B that can be stored in the upper tray 130. Therefore, since a large number of game balls B can be stored in the upper tray 130, the player can play without worrying about the amount of game balls B stored, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and enjoy it more. In addition, the player can instantly recognize whether or not there are game balls B in the front area 131a simply by dropping his or her gaze from the game area 5a to the door frame presentation device 150 below, and the player does not need to carefully check whether or not there are game balls B in the upper tray 130, making it easier for the player to concentrate on the game, making the game more enjoyable and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, a storage light-emitting decoration part 138 is provided that irradiates light into the storage area 131 of the upper tray 130 above half the outer diameter of the game ball B from the bottom surface (bottom wall 132) of the upper tray 130. Since light from the LED 138a of the storage light-emitting decoration part 138 is irradiated to a portion above half of the game ball B stored in the storage area 131, the light from the storage light-emitting decoration part 138 can be reflected upward by the game ball B. Therefore, the light from the storage light-emitting decoration part 138 can make the game ball B stored in the upper tray 130 sparkle and illuminate, allowing the player to enjoy the illuminated decoration of the game ball B and strongly attracting the player's attention to the game ball B stored in the upper tray 130, allowing the player to confirm the amount of game ball B stored in the upper tray 130 and achieving the same effect as described above.

In addition, since the storage light-emitting decoration 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper tray 130, the LED 138a of the storage light-emitting decoration 138 is illuminated, and the player can see the light-emitting decoration that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines, in which the front-facing rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper tray 130 is illuminated, which can surprise the player and direct the player's attention to the upper tray 130 (storage area 131), allowing the player to check the amount of game balls B stored, thereby ensuring the above-mentioned effect. At this time, since the inner surface of the upper tray 130 is formed like a mirror, the light from the storage light-emitting decoration 138, or the light from the storage light-emitting decoration 138 reflected by the game balls B, is reflected on the inner surface of the upper tray 130, which further increases the sparkling feeling in the storage area 131 caused by the storage light-emitting decoration 138, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, an alignment section 137 is provided near the outlet 136 to align the game balls B, which prevents the game balls B from clogging near the outlet 136, and allows the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 to be smoothly sent out from the outlet 136 to the ball launcher 540 or the lower tray 140. This makes it possible to avoid interruptions to play due to clogging of the game balls B, allowing the player to enjoy the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the outlet 136 located in the side area 131b of the upper tray 130 can be seen from the front, so that the player can see the game ball B being released from the outlet 136, which was not possible to see in previous pachinko machines, surprising the player and strongly catching the player's attention, achieving the same effect as described above.

In addition, a front area 131a in the storage area 131 in which game balls B are stored is provided on the front side of the device placement section 123. Even if game ball B is placed on the door frame effect device 150 provided in the device placement section 123 and rolls forward, it will fall into the front area 131a, preventing game ball B from falling forward from the bulge section 120.

In addition, the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, rear peripheral wall 133, and front peripheral wall 134 of the upper tray 130 are formed in a mirror-like shape, so that the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 are reflected on the peripheral walls of the upper tray 130, giving the player the illusion that game balls B are stored on the other side of the peripheral walls, making it appear as if a large number of game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130.

In addition, since the storage area 131 is equipped with a storage light-emitting decorative part 138 that irradiates light, the light from the storage light-emitting decorative part 138, or the light from the storage light-emitting decorative part 138 reflected by the game ball B, is reflected on the inner surface of the upper tray 130, thereby further increasing the sparkling effect in the storage area 131 caused by the storage light-emitting decorative part 138, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the door frame effect device 150 is placed in the device placement section 123 of the bulge section 120, the player can be entertained by the effects produced by the door frame effect device 150, and a decline in the player's interest in the game can be prevented.

In the above embodiment, the storage area 131 in which the game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130 is shown to be composed of a front area 131a in front of the device placement section 123 (door frame performance device 150) and two side areas 131b on both the left and right sides of the device placement section 123, but this is not limited to this, and may be composed of a front area in front of the device placement section 123, one side area to the left of the device placement section 123, and a back area behind the device placement section 123. Alternatively, it may be composed of a front area 131a in front of the device placement section 123, two side areas 131b on both the left and right sides of the device placement section 123, and a back area behind the device placement section 123 (the device placement section 123 is provided in an island shape within the upper tray 130). The back area of the storage area 131 may be a tunnel shape in which the game balls B cannot be seen from the player's side. In addition, the back area of the storage area 131 may pass between the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect operation unit 160 in the door frame effect device 150.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the upper tray 130 has a mirror-like inner surface, but this is not limited to this, and the inner surface of the upper tray 130 may be non-mirror-like.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the storage and light-emitting decorative portion 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper tray 130, but this is not limited to this, and the storage and light-emitting decorative portion 138 may be provided on the front peripheral wall 134.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the first movable part 155 of the door frame presentation device 150 is shown to be capable of storing a certain number of game balls B on the upper surface of the first movable part 155 by the multiple louver parts 158b of the first movable part cover 158, but this is not limited to this, and the upper surface of the door frame presentation device 150 may be inclined so as to be lower toward the upper tray 130, and the game balls B placed on the upper surface of the door frame presentation device 150 may be rolled onto the upper tray 130 so that the game balls B are not stored (do not continue to be placed) on the upper surface of the door frame presentation device 150.

[4. Main body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to Figure 4 and Figures 18 to 39. The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side (the upper tray 130 of the door frame 3) and discharges the game balls B used in the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall).

[4-1. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is housed inside so as to be detachable from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side so as to be able to open and close, and a door frame 3 is attached so as to be able to open and close so as to close the open front side.

The main body frame 4 is provided with a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, a main body frame upper hinge portion 510 attached to the upper end of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge portion of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and a main body frame lower hinge portion 520 attached to the lower end of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge portion 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge portion of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached.

The main frame 4 also includes a metal main frame reinforcing frame 530 that is attached to the left side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front and reinforces the main frame base unit 500, a ball launching device 540 that is attached to the lower front side of the main frame base unit 500 and is used to shoot game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 that is attached along the upper and left sides of the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a payout unit 550 that is attached to the rear of the payout base unit 550 and is used to pay out game balls B to the player (upper tray 130 and lower tray 140). The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, which are attached to the lower side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the rear, a power supply board 630 equipped with a power switch 630a that can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501 (described later) and has multiple slits 641 that penetrate from front to back and extend up and down, and a metal locking unit 650 that is attached to the right side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front and locks the outer frame 2 and main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and main frame 4.

The main frame reinforcement frame 530 has two left position restriction members 531 attached to the rear of the part extending rightward from the front end, spaced apart vertically, to restrict the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board mounting portion 301 of the main frame base 501 (described later).

The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 (described later) of the main body frame base unit 500, and also prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side through the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The main frame base unit 500 of the main frame 4 is recessed backward from the top end to a height of approximately 3/4 of its total height when viewed from the front, and has a game board attachment section 301 into which the game board 5 is removably inserted from the front. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the front of the main frame base unit 500 at a position lower than the game board attachment section 301.

In addition, the main frame base unit 500 of the main frame 4 is provided with a door frame opening switch 4a for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, which is attached below the cylinder insertion port through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) relative to the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 4a is released from its pressure, allowing it to detect the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. In addition, the main frame base unit 500 of the main frame 4 is provided with a main frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, which is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is attached. When the main frame 4 is opened (opened) relative to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 4b is released from its pressure, allowing it to detect the opening of the main frame 4. The detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633.

The door frame opening switch 4a and the main frame opening switch 4b do not detect the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 and the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 due to the input of an electrical signal by the opening and closing operation of the locking unit 650, but detect the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 and the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, respectively, separately and independently of the opening and closing operation by the locking unit 650. In addition, the door frame opening switch 4a and the main frame opening switch 4b are not arranged in the vicinity of the cylinder lock 127, and the door frame opening switch 4a is arranged at a position below the cylinder insertion port through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the cylinder lock 127, and the main frame opening switch 4b is arranged at a position below the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is attached. In this way, even if electromagnetic noise penetrates the cylinder lock 127, the signal transmission lines from the door frame opening switch 4a and the main frame opening switch 4b are not affected by this electromagnetic noise.

The main frame base unit 500 includes a main frame base 501 that is formed into a vertically extending rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, a connection cable guide member 502 that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side, and a game board lock member 505 for removably holding the game board 5. The main frame base 501 is formed with a game board attachment portion 301 into which the game board 5 is removably inserted from the front side.

The dispensing base unit 550 comprises a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551, which is box-shaped and extends to the left and right and is open upward, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 as seen from the front and which extends to the left as seen from the front in the shape of a groove that is open upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a second rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced to the left of the first rail cover 554 as seen from the front. The tank rail 553 includes a second rail cover 555, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, an external terminal board 558 disposed above the tank rail 553 and attached to the payout base 551, and a frame earth board 559 housed in a board housing portion 551aa formed in the payout base 551 corresponding to the front of the external terminal board 558 (the front of the pachinko machine 1). The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side and can transmit various information to the hall computer. The frame earth board 559 can temporarily collect electromagnetic noise generated at various places and ground (earth) it to the island equipment of the gaming hall.

The dispensing base 551 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin and comprises a top plate portion 551a that extends left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-to-back direction, a left side plate portion 551b that extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front with a long distance that is substantially the same width as the top plate portion, a right side plate portion 551c that extends downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front with a short distance that is substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a, and a back plate upper portion 551b that extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the bottom side of the right side plate portion 551c. 1d, a back plate left portion 551e extending from a position closer to the front than the rear edge of the left side plate portion 551b to the right at a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right edge of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear edge of the left side plate portion 551b, a bottom plate portion 551g extending rightward from the front of the lower edge of the left side plate portion 551b to the same position as the right edge of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right edge of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower edge of the inner plate portion 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open to the front and inward of the L-shape. In addition, a visor portion 551da is formed in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d at a position spaced a predetermined length from the lower edge of the back plate.

The payout base 551 has a top plate 551a that extends left and right with a length approximately equal to the left-right width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main frame base 501, and a left side plate 551b that extends up and down with a length approximately equal to the up-down height of the game board insertion opening 501b. The front ends of the top plate 551a, left side plate 551b, and right side plate 551c of the payout base 551 are attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501.

The dispensing base 551 also has a shallow recessed portion that is open to the rear and extends vertically, and is formed by the left side plate portion 551b, the left back plate portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, to which the dispensing unit 560 is attached. The dispensing base 551 also has a rear cover attachment portion 551i that protrudes to the right at the top of the right side of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and to which the rear cover 640 is attached.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B guided by the single guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the right side of the power supply unit 620c when viewed from the front, and an interface unit 620e attached to the left side of the power supply unit 620c when viewed from the front.

The base unit 620b includes a front base 625 that is attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501, and a rear base 626 that is attached to the rear side of the front base 625 and has a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface.

The power supply unit 620c includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of a rear base 626 (not shown) of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630.

The payout control unit 620d includes a transparent payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the right side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c when viewed from the front, and a payout control board 633 that is housed in the payout control board box 632. The payout control board box 632 is composed of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body. The payout control board 633 is housed in the payout control board box 632 and is configured as a crimped case. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or the like, to pay out the specified number of game balls B to the player side (upper dish 201 or lower dish 202).

The dispensing control board box 632 is composed of a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The dispensing control board 633 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. In this way, the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, so that the state of the front side and the back side of the dispensing control board 633 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is installed) can be confirmed from the outside of the dispensing control board box 632. The dispensing control board box 632 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively, and when the dispensing control board box 632 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed in order to open the dispensing control board box 632, and traces of the opening and closing of the dispensing control board box 632 can be left. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the dispensing control board box 632 can be detected, enhancing the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts on the dispensing control board box 632.

The payout control board 633 also includes an error LED indicator (not shown) that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, as well as an RWM clear button 633z having a push operation portion that serves multiple functions. In this embodiment, a lead type RWM clear button 633z is used, and each lead of the RWM clear button 633z is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633. The push operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is exposed from an opening formed in the transparent cover body, and the push operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z can be pushed while the payout control board 633 is housed in the payout control board box 632.

The RWM clear button 633z has the following functions: a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built into the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided on the payout control board 633, and the RAM built into the main control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided on the main control board that controls the game content (game progress); a setting switch button for selecting and switching a setting value; and an error release switch for releasing an error displayed on the error LED indicator. In other words, in this embodiment, the setting change function related to the game specifications (function as a setting switch button for selecting and switching a setting value) is mounted on the payout control board 633, which is a board separate from the main control board that controls the game content (game progress). In addition, the separate board does not have to be the payout control board 633, and a board that is not stored in a board case, a board stored in a board case, or a board stored in a board case configured as a crimped case are possible. However, since the setting change function (function as a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values) is an important function for a gaming machine, high security is desirable, and boards stored in a board case have higher security than boards that are not stored in a board case, and boards with even higher security are boards stored in a board case configured as a crimped case. The payout control board 633 is a board stored in a board case configured as a crimped case, so it can be said to have high security. In addition, the main control board 1310 that controls the game content (game progress) is attached to the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 as described below, while the payout control board 633 is attached to the main frame 4, which also contributes to improved security.

The interface unit 620e includes a board base 634 attached to the left side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c when viewed from the front, an interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 so as to cover the rear side of the interface board 635.

One end of the connection cable from the main body frame 4 is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board that controls the game content (game progress), the peripheral control board that controls the progress of the presentation, etc., and is also connected to a CR unit (not shown) that is installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the interface board 635 when viewed from the front, so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d.

The rear cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5, which is inserted from the front and attached to the game board attachment portion 301 of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. The right side of the rear cover 640 in front view is attached to the right end of the rear surface of the main frame base 501 in front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and the left side of the rear cover in front view is attached to the rear cover attachment portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the rear cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600 so as to be freely opened and closed. A lock screw 642 is provided on the left side of the rear cover 640 in a portion corresponding to the rear cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600. The left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-ball path unit 600, and the locking screw 642 is screwed into the back cover mounting portion 601a to fix the back cover 640. The back cover 640 can be rotated approximately 180 degrees from a closed state that covers the rear side of the game board 5 to an open state that exposes the rear side of the game board 5.

The rear cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front, and is formed so that its rear surface is positioned on approximately the same plane as the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. The rear cover 640 has multiple slits 641 for heat dissipation that penetrate from front to back and extend vertically. In this embodiment, the rear cover 640 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the slits 641 are not formed at all in the area corresponding to the main control board box (described later) that is attached to the rear of the game board 5.

When game balls B flow from ball tank 552 into tank rail 553, metal powder falls off the game balls B due to wear caused by collisions and rubbing against each other. For this reason, when metal powder caused by wear of game balls B adheres to the inside of tank rail 553 on which game balls B roll downstream, the flow of game balls B in the downstream direction is impeded, making it difficult to smoothly supply game balls B downstream, and payout of game balls B by payout device 580 of payout unit 560 stops.

Therefore, in this embodiment, multiple cutout portions 553aa are formed on the underside of the tank rail 553 (the underside of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the front), so that metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the tank rail 553. As a result, for example, metal powder generated by wear of game ball B falls naturally from tank rail 553 to the outside through cutout 553aa, and the metal powder can be removed from tank rail 553; metal powder generated by wear of game ball B adhering to tank rail 553 due to the vibration of game ball B rolling inside tank rail 553 falls from tank rail 553 to the outside through cutout 553aa, and the metal powder can be removed from inside tank rail 553; a staff member such as an amusement hall employee can insert a cotton swab into cutout 553aa and remove the metal powder generated by wear of game ball B adhering to tank rail 553 from inside tank rail 553.

In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row in a back-to-back arrangement in the island equipment of the game hall, and the game balls B discharged from the pachinko machines 1 are polished by a ball polishing device and then supplied again to the ball tank 552 of the pachinko machines 1 by a ball lifting device, so that the temperature in the island equipment of the game hall is extremely high compared to the temperature inside the game hall. For this reason, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501 has multiple heat dissipation slits 641 that penetrate from front to back and extend vertically, as described above, in order to dissipate heat generated from the various boards, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, and light-emitting means such as various LEDs and various lamps provided on the game board 5 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, because the rear cover 640 has multiple slits 641 formed therein, it is difficult to completely prevent metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B that has fallen through the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 from penetrating the rear side of the game board 5, but it is possible to inhibit this metal powder from penetrating the rear side of the game board 5.

In addition, inside the island equipment of the game hall, multiple types of wiring are suspended from the top for electrically connecting to various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, and depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes unconnected wiring and is in a state of being suspended from the top inside the island equipment of the game hall. Since the pachinko machines 1 are installed in multiple rows facing each other on the island equipment of the game hall, if this unconnected wiring touches the various boards provided on the game board 5, the electrical drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, or the light-emitting means such as various LEDs and various lamps, a short circuit may occur and cause damage (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 has multiple slits 641 formed, many of the unconnected wires are bent at or near the ends, so the ends of the unconnected wires get caught in the slits 641 and are less likely to penetrate toward the back side of the game board 5, preventing short circuits.

Of the various boards provided on the game board 5, the boards adjacent to the rear cover 640 (excluding relay boards such as the panel relay board 1410 described below) are covered by a cover body molded from the non-conductive resin that constitutes the board box, and even if the tip of an unconnected wiring penetrates through the slit 641 to the rear side of the game board 5 and comes into contact with the cover body, there is no effect on the boards covered by the cover body. The relay boards such as the panel relay board 1410 described later are boards that relay one board and another board, and therefore are an assembly of various connectors, and the wiring pattern for electrically connecting the various connectors is formed not on the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board on which the various connectors are mounted, which is the surface facing the back cover 640, but on the back surface (solder surface) of the relay board, which is the opposite surface facing the back cover 640, and the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the relay board are solidly painted with a resist of a predetermined color (e.g., green, yellow, red, blue, black, etc.) except for through holes through which the pin terminals of the various connectors can be inserted and soldered, and the wiring pattern is covered with the resist of the predetermined color and is not exposed. In other words, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring penetrates the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641 and comes into contact with the relay board, it will not have any effect on the relay board.

In this way, the rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501 has the following functions: a protective cover function that can protect the rear side of the game board 5 by covering the rear side of the game board 5; a heat dissipation function that can release heat generated from the various boards, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, and light-emitting means such as various LEDs and various lamps provided on the game board 5 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the multiple slits 641 by covering the rear side of the game board 5; a metal powder intrusion prevention function that can prevent metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B that has fallen through the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 from invading the rear side of the game board 5; and a protective wall function that can prevent unconnected wiring suspended from inside the island equipment of the game hall from touching the various boards, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, and light-emitting means such as various LEDs and various lamps provided on the game board 5.

The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 39. Figure 39(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 650 includes a metal unit base 651 that is attached to the main frame base 501, multiple metal door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3, multiple metal outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2, a metal transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 up and down, a metal lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hooks 652 downward and the outer frame hooks 653 upward, and a metal outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hooks 653 downward.

The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view that is U-shaped with the right side open when viewed from the front, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed from an extruded metal profile.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main frame 4, the multiple (three) door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinder 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 protrude forward from the front surface of the main frame base 501. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 against the main frame 4, the front end engages with the rotation transmission member 133 of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated. In addition, the locking unit 650 has multiple (three) door frame hooks 652 that are hooked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and multiple (two) outer frame hooks 653 that are hooked to the upper hook member 24 and lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key that corresponds to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front, the multiple door frame hooks 652 move upward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the main frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the multiple outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4, sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the multiple outer frame hooks 653 to move downward, and the main frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. In this way, the lock between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, can be unlocked.

When locking between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the hooks for the door frame 652 and the hooks for the outer frame 653 are inclined so that the tips become thinner, so that when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, or the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the hooks for the door frame 652 and the hooks for the outer frame 653 move downward or upward to overcome the hooking member 116, the upper hooking member 24, and the lower hooking member 25, and then are locked by the biasing force of the locking spring 655.

The metallic main frame reinforcing frame 530 not only functions to reinforce the main frame base unit 500 and provide rigidity, but also functions as a main frame metal earth and is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame earth board 559 via a main frame metal earth wire (not shown). The frame earth board 559 is electrically connected to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall via an island equipment earth wire (not shown). The fact that the metallic main frame reinforcing frame 530 functions to reinforce the main frame base unit 500 and provide rigidity, and also functions as a main frame metal earth, will be explained later.

[4-3. Electromagnetic noise countermeasures for the main body frame]
Next, a brief explanation will be given of noise countermeasures for the main body frame 4. As described above, the main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides in front view at the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, a payout unit 560 for paying out game balls B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player side (upper tray 130 and lower tray 140), a power supply board 630 equipped with a power switch 630a for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and a board unit 620 having a payout control board 633.

As described above, the main body frame base unit 500 is formed of a metal extrusion material and includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base 501 when viewed from the front. As described above, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a main body frame metal earth in addition to reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500 to provide rigidity, and is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame earth board 559 provided on the main body frame 4 via a main body frame metal earth wire (not shown). In other words, in this embodiment, the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 serves as the frame ground on the main body frame side. In addition, the ball tank 552 has a metal plate (not shown) arranged on the entire bottom part, which is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame earth board 559 via a ball tank earth wire (not shown). In addition, the earth connection terminal (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame earth board 559 via an interface earth wire (not shown). In addition, the earth connection terminal (not shown) provided on the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame earth board 559 via a power supply earth wire (not shown). This frame earth board 559 is electrically connected to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall via an island equipment earth wire (not shown).

In this way, as a noise countermeasure for the main body frame 4, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the main body frame reinforcement frame 530, the ball tank 552, the interface board 635 in the board unit 620, and the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 is removed by being guided from the main body frame reinforcement frame 530, the ball tank 552, the interface board 635 in the board unit 620, and the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 to the corresponding various earth wires (not shown), the frame earth board 559, and the island equipment earth wire (not shown) to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall.

[4-4. Frame ground substrate]
Next, the frame earth board 559 will be briefly described. As described above, the frame earth board 559 is capable of collecting electromagnetic noise generated at various places and grounding (earthing) it to the island equipment of the game hall, and is provided with a plurality of earth terminals. The first earth terminal (interface earth terminal) is electrically connected as an interface earth to an earth connection terminal provided on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main frame 4 via an interface earth wire (not shown), the second earth terminal (island equipment earth terminal) is electrically connected as an island equipment earth to an earth connection terminal in the island equipment of the game hall via an island equipment earth wire (not shown), the third earth terminal (ball tank earth terminal) is a ball tank earth to which one end of a ball tank earth wire (not shown) is attached by a metal screw (not shown) to a metal plate (not shown) arranged over the entire bottom of the ball tank 552, and the other end of the ball tank earth wire is electrically connected, and the fourth earth terminal (main frame metal earth terminal) is electrically connected to the metal plate (not shown) arranged over the entire bottom of the ball tank 552 via an interface earth wire (not shown). The fifth earth terminal (power supply earth terminal) serves as a power supply earth and is electrically connected to an earth connection terminal provided on the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 via a power supply earth wire (not shown). The sixth earth terminal (door frame metal earth) serves as a door frame metal earth and is electrically connected to a metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit 500 of the door frame 3 via a metal screw (not shown). One end of the door frame metal earth wire (not shown) is attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit 500 of the door frame 4 by a metal screw (not shown), and the other end of the door frame metal earth wire is electrically connected.

In the circuit of the frame earth board 559, the third earth terminal (sphere tank earth terminal) as the sphere tank earth is electrically connected to one end of a first resistor (not shown), the other end of which is electrically connected to the fifth earth terminal (power supply earth terminal) as the power supply earth, the second earth terminal (island equipment earth terminal) as the island equipment earth, and the first earth terminal (interface earth terminal) as the interface earth, respectively, and the fourth earth terminal (main body frame metal earth terminal) as the main frame metal earth and the sixth earth terminal (door frame metal earth) as the door frame metal earth are electrically connected to one end of a second resistor (not shown), and the other end of this second resistor is electrically connected to the fifth earth terminal (power supply earth terminal) as the power supply earth, the second earth terminal (island equipment earth terminal) as the island equipment earth, and the first earth terminal (interface earth terminal) as the interface earth, respectively. In other words, the other end of the first resistor and the other end of the second resistor are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are used as the first resistor and the second resistor.

Electromagnetic noise flowing into the first earth terminal (interface earth terminal) as an interface earth is conducted via the second earth terminal (island equipment earth terminal) as an island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire to the earth of the island equipment of the amusement hall and is eliminated, electromagnetic noise flowing into the third earth terminal (ball tank earth terminal) as a ball tank earth is conducted via the second earth terminal (island equipment earth terminal) as an island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire to the earth of the island equipment of the amusement hall and is eliminated, and electromagnetic noise flowing into the fourth earth terminal (main frame metal earth terminal) as a main frame metal earth is conducted via the second earth terminal (island equipment earth terminal) as an island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire to the earth of the island equipment of the amusement hall and is eliminated. The electromagnetic noise flowing to the fifth earth terminal (power supply earth terminal) as the power supply earth is removed by being led to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall via the second earth terminal (island equipment earth terminal) as the island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire, and the electromagnetic noise flowing to the sixth earth terminal (door frame metal earth) as the door frame metal earth is removed by being led to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall via the second earth terminal (island equipment earth terminal) as the island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire.

The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 is fitted with a ball tank 552 and a payout unit 560. The ball tank 552 is supplied with game balls B from the island equipment of the game hall, and the ball tank 552 supplies the game balls B to the payout unit 560. The game balls B become charged and discharge static electricity as they are polished in the island equipment of the game hall and rub against each other as they circulate between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, emitting electromagnetic noise. For this reason, static electricity is likely to build up in the areas where the ball tank 552 and payout unit 560, which can store game balls B, and the surrounding areas are fitted.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a frame earth substrate 559 is placed near the ball tank 552 and payout unit 560, which are prone to static electricity accumulation, and for the ball tank 552 and the metal main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4, which are prone to static electricity accumulation and are therefore strongly affected by electromagnetic noise, the frame earth substrate 559 is designed to gradually attenuate electromagnetic noise through the first resistor and second resistor respectively to the third earth terminal (ball tank earth terminal) as the ball tank earth and the fourth earth terminal (main body frame metal earth terminal) as the main body frame metal earth, thereby suppressing instantaneous discharge of high voltage, and to lead the noise from the second earth terminal (island equipment earth terminal) as the island equipment earth to the earth of the island equipment of the amusement hall via the island equipment earth wire. In other words, electromagnetic noise that enters from the ball tank 552 and payout unit 560, which are prone to static electricity, can be removed by guiding it to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall from the frame ground board 559 via the ball tank 552 and the metal main frame reinforcement frame 530 as a frame ground called the frame ground, and then to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall. Thus, in this embodiment, the metal main frame reinforcement frame 530 functions as a main frame metal ground in addition to reinforcing the main frame base unit 500 and providing it with rigidity.

As described above, some of the various decorative parts provided on the door frame 3 are decoratively plated on the entire front and back sides. This decorative plating is a precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and is conductive. The decorative plated parts are electrically connected to the door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3 via wiring (not shown) or a metal conductive plate (not shown). For this reason, for example, when a player touches a decoratively plated decorative part, static electricity charged to the player is discharged and transmitted as electromagnetic noise from the player to the door frame reinforcement unit via the decorative part. In addition, when an attendant such as a game hall clerk or a person holding a setting key described later (a limited number of people who can change the setting values as well as check the current setting values) touches the locking unit 650 on the main frame 4, as described above, the static electricity charged on the game hall clerk or the person holding the setting key described later is discharged as electromagnetic noise and transmitted from the game hall clerk or the person holding the setting key described later to the door frame reinforcement unit via the locking unit 650.

Therefore, in this embodiment, for the door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3, in the frame earth board 559, the sixth earth terminal (door frame metal earth) as the door frame metal earth is connected via a second resistor to gradually flow and attenuate electromagnetic noise, thereby suppressing instantaneous discharge of high voltage, and can be led from the second earth terminal (island equipment earth terminal) as the island equipment earth to the earth of the island equipment of the amusement hall via an island equipment earth wire. In other words, electromagnetic noise from decorative parts with decorative plating, players, staff such as skill hall clerks, and those who possess the setting key described below (limited people who can change the setting value and check the current setting value, etc.) can be removed by directing it to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall through the door frame reinforcement unit from the frame ground board 559 as a frame ground called a frame ground.

[4-5. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 40 to 47. Figure 40(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line B-B in (a). Figure 41 is an enlarged view of the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from the rear. Figure 42(a) is a perspective view seen from the front and above in a state in which the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front and below. Figure 43 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of Figure 42(a). Figure 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the area through which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame flow. Figure 45 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. Figure 47 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view seen from the rear of the hinge side of the main body frame.

As described above, the main body frame 4 is made up of a frame-shaped main body frame base 501 whose rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and which is detachably and hinge-rotatably attached to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520, and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; an inverted L-shaped payout base 551 attached along the upper and left edges of the rear side of the main body frame base 501 when viewed from the front; a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551, which is box-shaped (container-shaped) and extends left and right, and is open upward; and a tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552, which is groove-shaped and opens upward, and extends leftward. It is equipped with a rail 553, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced from the first rail cover 554 to the left when viewed from the front, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 for paying out game balls B to the player.

The ball tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction in a plan view, a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front, a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward from the front and rear edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from both the left and right edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed like a container with an open top. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from island facilities such as an amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The spherical tank 552 also has an overflow section 552f that is cut out from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining upper outer periphery edge. This overflow section 552f is formed over a length of approximately 3/4 of the left-right length of the front wall 552b, from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b to the end side on the opposite side (the right side wall 552e side).

When viewed from the front, the right end (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide section 553a that extends from the upstream area to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. The main guide section 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower as it approaches the left side when viewed from the front. In addition, the main guide section 553a extends from the right end side to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in a plan view from the right end side to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it approaches the left, and is formed in a crank shape that extends from there to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction.

The tank rail 553 has a main guide section 553a in which a section extending parallel to an axis extending left-right from the left end to the right extends to the top end with the same width, and the top end of this section is closed by attaching a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, and a ball straightening member 556 to the top end. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) in the section where the top is closed, and at the downstream end it is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one game ball B to flow.

In addition, in the tank rail 553, three rectangular cutouts 553aa having a predetermined length (about 30 mm in this embodiment) in the left-right direction are formed at a predetermined interval (about 10 mm in this embodiment) on the bottom surface of the gutter-shaped main guide section 553a and on the rear wall of the main guide section 553a when viewed from the front, at a portion where the upper side is closed. The rectangular cutouts 553aa form a rectangular hole in the bottom surface of the main guide section 553a, which is about 7 mm in length in the left-right direction, which is the thickness of the rear wall of the main guide section 553a (about 2.5 mm in this embodiment) from the rear wall of the main guide section 553a toward the front, and a rectangular hole in the left-right direction, which is about 7 mm in height from the bottom surface of the main guide section 553a toward the top, which is the thickness of the bottom plate of the bottom surface of the main guide section 553a (about 2.5 mm in this embodiment), and a rectangular hole in the left-right direction, which is about 30 mm in length, is formed in the rear wall of the main guide section 553a, and these rectangular holes are connected to each other.

When game balls B flow from ball tank 552 into tank rail 553, metal powder falls off the game balls B due to wear caused by collisions and rubbing against each other. Therefore, when metal powder caused by wear of game balls B adheres to main guide section 553a, the flow of game balls B in the downstream direction is impeded, making it difficult to smoothly supply game balls B downstream, and payout of game balls B by payout device 580 stops.

Therefore, in this embodiment, multiple cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a so that metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. As a result, for example, metal powder generated by wear of game ball B falls naturally from main guide portion 553a to the outside through cutout portion 553aa, and the metal powder can be removed from main guide portion 553a. Metal powder generated by wear of game ball B adhering to main guide portion 553a due to the vibration of game ball B rolling around main guide portion 553a falls from main guide portion 553a to the outside through cutout portion 553aa, and the metal powder can be removed from main guide portion 553a by a staff member such as a game parlor staff member inserting a cotton swab into cutout portion 553aa and removing the metal powder generated by wear of game ball B adhering to main guide portion 553a.

The tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed above the main guide section 553a, and has a bulging section 553b that bulges out wider than the width of the main guide section 553a so that multiple game balls B are lined up in a width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls B, and narrows in width from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guide section 553a. This bulging section 553b allows multiple game balls B that were wide in the width direction on the upstream side to be aligned so that the width becomes the width of one game ball B as they move downstream. The bulging section 553b is also formed so that the width becomes narrower as it moves from the upper end side to the lower main guide section 553a. As a result, the tank rail 553 can align multiple game balls B flowing through the bulging section 553b in a line in the width direction as they move downstream and downward.

The bulge 553b of the tank rail 553 has a three-dimensional curved shape with the center of curvature located on the inner side. The center of curvature of the bulge 553b is located above the main guide section 553a, so that the tank rail 553 has a slightly chamfered corner at the boundary between the main guide section 553a and the bulge 553b. In addition, the bulge 553b is formed with a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge 553b side acts changes in various directions depending on the position of the bulge 553b that it abuts, and the occurrence of ball jamming in the bulge 553b can be suppressed. In more detail, if the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends in a constant direction, a reaction force always acts on the game ball B circulating inside the bulging portion 553b from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction, and the reaction force is difficult to disperse, so the game ball B inside is always pushed in a constant direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and making it easier for ball jamming to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, and the pushing direction of the multiple game balls B circulating inside is dispersed, making it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape and making it easier for ball jamming to occur.

The tank rail 553 is also molded from a transparent material (such as polycarbonate resin) and is configured so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if ball jamming occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location of the ball jam can be quickly identified. Therefore, ball jamming in the tank rail 553 can be quickly resolved, so that the interruption of play due to ball jamming can be shortened as much as possible, and the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of play can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 can be seen from the rear through the tank rail 553, so when a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit of the game board 5, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, and belts can be confirmed with the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4, and the same effect as the above-mentioned mutual effect can be achieved.

The main frame 4 is provided in front of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and extends outward (to the left) from the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side when viewed from the front). It is equipped with an overflow surface 501m whose rear end side is at the same height as the overflow section 552f and inclined so that the front end side is higher in order to return the game balls B that have overflowed forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, and a bypass passage 552g that extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface 501m to above the bulge section 553b whose upper side is open on the tank rail 553, inclined so that the rear end side is lower, and inclined so that the side away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction (left side) is lower, and guides some of the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface section 501m.

The main frame 4 is provided with a discharge section 551j, which is provided on the opposite side of the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, with a width in the left and right direction greater than the outer diameter of the game ball and a bottom surface lower than the upper open portion of the tank rail 553, an external terminal board 558, which is provided on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge section 551j and at a position lower than the overflow surface section 501m, and has multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and a terminal cover 551k which covers the upper side of the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558) and has an upper surface extending horizontally at a position higher than the overflow surface section 501m.

The overflow surface 501m is formed on the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m extends rearward in a flat plate shape from a position two to four times the outer diameter of the game ball B lower than the upper edge of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The overflow surface 501m is formed with a length in the left-right direction that is about 1/3 of the left-right length of the main frame base 501, and the left end when viewed from the front is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction from the left end of the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m is formed with a height from the front end to the rear end that is about 1/2 the outer diameter of the game ball B. When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface 501m and the outer frame upper member 30.

The main frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m, and has flat left and right step portions 501n and 501o that extend approximately horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m, and a plurality of ribs 501p that extend in the front-rear direction on both the left and right outer sides of the left and right step portions 501n and 501o with their upper ends higher than the left and right step portions 501n and 501o, and are arranged in a row in the left and right direction at intervals narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left step portion 501n is formed so that its left-right length is shorter than its front-rear length. In addition, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the rear right corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is formed so that its left-right length is longer than its front-rear length. Additionally, the right section 501o is inclined so that the rear left corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front.

The multiple ribs 501p of the main frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the gap between the outer frame 2 and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main frame base 501 is assembled to the main frame 4, in a front view, the right end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow section 552f of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction, the left end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned with the left end of the bypass passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step 501o is aligned with the right side wall 552e of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the spherical tank 552. In the following, the container-like area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g has a passage surface 552h that extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 in a flat plate shape, with the front end at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end inclined so as to be lower, and a weir portion that extends upward from the end edge of the passage surface 552h opposite the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end edge of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g in a front view extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the spherical tank 552, and extends obliquely so as to move forward from the left end side toward the right end side. Note that the left-right inclination of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may be horizontal.

When assembled to the main frame 4, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends along the front end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in a crank-like shape in the left-right direction and that extends diagonally to the left-right direction. In other words, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends diagonally to the left-right direction. As a result, the flow direction of the game ball B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the diagonal rear end to a direction perpendicular to the diagonal rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends approximately parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction approximately perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g can be received at the wide portion of the tank rail 553. In addition, the game balls B are supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction approximately perpendicular (perpendicular) to the flow direction of the game balls B, which makes it difficult for the game balls B from the bypass passage 552g to cause ball clogging in the tank rail 553.

The bypass passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so that its rear end moves rearward as it approaches the downstream side of the tank rail 553. Therefore, when the game ball B is released from the bypass passage 552g toward the tank rail 553, the rear end that extends diagonally allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side, where the tank rail 553 is wider, rather than the downstream side, where the tank rail 553 is narrower. By releasing the game ball B into the wider area, it is possible to prevent ball jamming inside the tank rail 553.

In addition, the portion of the tank rail 553 where the game balls B are guided by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the rear of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion of the rear wall 552c when viewed from the front. Game balls B that pass under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flow through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the bypass passage 552g on the tank rail 553, the height of multiple game balls B stacked up in the vertical direction does not exceed the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Therefore, a space (empty space) can be secured downstream of the ball tank 552 on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, allowing game balls B to be stacked upwards, so that game balls B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and game balls B will not spill rearward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat guide surface portion 552j that extends downward to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j is formed in such a shape that, in a front view, the right edge extends obliquely rearward from a position at about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position at about 1/9 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position at about 1/2 of the total length of the front-to-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, and from there extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position at about 1/3 of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-to-right direction.

The spherical tank 552 has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate the area surrounded by the right end edge of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape in a plan view and a straight line connecting the end of the right end edge on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The spherical tank 552 also has flat flange portions 552l extending outward in the left-right direction and in the up-down direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b at the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. The upper edge of the part of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are formed higher than the upper edges of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o of the main body frame base 501).

When the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end (the right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the spherical tank 552. In addition, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank shape in a plan view, and the portion extending straight left and right to the left of that portion are located (protruding) rearward from the spherical tank 552. The rear end edge of the left bypass passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank shape in a plan view.

The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge section 551j extends rearward from the rear side of the flange section 552l on the left side of the spherical tank 552 as viewed from the front to the tank rail 553, so that the discharge section 551j lowers in a stepped manner from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552, and then extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (a position near the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555), and then extends rearward.

The external terminal board 558 has a number of electric wire connection terminals 558a attached to the rear surface in a line in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal whose grip opens by operating a lever to grip the tip of an electric wire. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the external terminal board 558 is disposed in front of the area where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. 44, the overflow surface 501m, the left step 501n, the right step 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are inclined so that the rear ends of the overflow surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower, and the rear right corner of the left step 501n and the rear left corner of the right step 501o are lower. In addition, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide section 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end is lower when viewed from the front. In addition, the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side opposite the bottom wall 552a is lower.

And when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to supply from the island equipment, they can first flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552 over the overflow section 552f, which is the lowest part of the outer periphery upper edge, and the game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B that flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface section 501m (see Figure 45). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent any further increase in the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from pressing against each other strongly in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure), and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jamming) due to the game balls B interlocking with each other in the ball tank 552.

In addition, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 46, the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. This makes it possible to avoid the game balls B in the ball tank 552 from applying a strong backward pressure to the game balls B that have accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m, and prevents the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m from spilling outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a malfunction in which the game balls B that have spilled outside the main body frame 4 are pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, making it impossible to open or close the main body frame 4.

Furthermore, some of the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 onto the overflow surface 501m can be guided downstream of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position along the left side away from the ball tank 552. This allows the flow (pressure) of the game balls B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g to be directed downstream of the tank rail 553, preventing the game balls B from pushing against each other too strongly inside the tank rail 553 and preventing the game balls B from clogging.

In addition, at the outer periphery upper edge of the ball tank 552, the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow section 552f is made higher than the overflow section 552f, so that the upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the overflow section 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface section 501m. As a result, the game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 over the overflow section 552f and overflow into the overflow surface section 501m and flow from the overflow surface section 501m to the bypass passage 552g are blocked by the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls B from returning from the bypass passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the bypass passage 552g side from pressing against the game balls B in the ball tank 552 and causing clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g), so that the game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 into the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. This prevents the game ball B from flowing in from the side (ball tank 552) into the bypass passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g can be made to flow in a constant direction from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the tank rail 553 on the rear end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be in a constant direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and getting caught in the tank rail 553 due to the pressure being applied to the game balls B being in different directions, and it is possible to prevent the game balls B from becoming clogged.

In addition, the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide section 553a that extends to the downstream end, so that when the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide section 553a, they are lined up in a row in the left-right direction, so that the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the downstream payout device 580. In addition, the tank rail 553 has a wide bulge section 553b in which multiple game balls B can be lined up in the open upper portion, so that the game balls B released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion closed at the top, and narrows in width from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guide portion 553a, so that as the multiple game balls B move downstream in the bulging portion 553b, they can be aligned in a line in the width direction. In addition, the portion closed at the top of the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, so that the multiple game balls B that were stacked in multiple layers in the height direction on the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) can be aligned in a line by circulating them downstream through the portion closed at the top of the tank rail 553. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the multiple game balls B in a line by guiding them downstream.

Furthermore, since it is equipped with the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and since the tank rail 553 is equipped with the bulge portion 553b, the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, so that in combination with the ball tank 552, more game balls B can be stored.

In addition, on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge section 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 with multiple wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the multiple wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558). Therefore, the wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game balls B supplied from the island equipment bounce or are supplied with force at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface section 501m, it is difficult for them to reach (contact) the wire connection terminals 558a, etc., and there is no problem such as a short circuit or a disconnection of the electrical wiring due to the game balls B contacting them.

In addition, since the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a face rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface 501m, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult for it to land on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. Even if the game ball B does land on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it is difficult for it to fall from the rear side, making it easier to avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 45) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing downstream against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and makes it possible to prevent clogging of the game ball B in the ball tank 552.

In addition, even if the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island equipment bounces off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m and lands on the left step 501n or right step 501o on both sides of the overflow surface 501m, as shown in Figure 45, the slope of these parts can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface 501m or the bypass passage 552g, preventing problems caused by the game ball B spilling outside the main frame 4.

In addition, because the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j when they flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, the guide surface portion 552j can regulate the amount (height) of game balls B stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 so that it does not exceed the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, space (empty space) can be secured in which game balls B can be stacked on the upper side, and game balls B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are positioned in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B will not be received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B inside the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

In addition, the ball tank 552 is made of an electrical conductor (in this example, it is molded from a synthetic resin having electrical conductivity), whereas the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later are made of an insulator (in this example, it is molded from a synthetic resin having electrical conductivity). In this embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, they have the same polarity, so that when the metal powder of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 falls from the cutout portion 553aa, it adheres to the peripheral control board box of the same polarity as the tank rail 553. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B does not adhere to the ball tank 552, but moves to the tank rail 553, adheres to the tank rail 553, and remains inside the tank rail 553. Furthermore, when the metal powder of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 falls from the cutout portion 553aa, it adheres to the peripheral control board box of the same polarity as the tank rail 553 (for example, the upper surface of the peripheral board box).

[4-6. Configuration for preventing metal powder]
Next, with reference to Fig. 48, a description will be given of a configuration of a metal powder countermeasure that can avoid electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by metal powder of game balls B that have fallen to the outside from main guide portion 553a through multiple cutout portions 553aa formed in trough-shaped main guide portion 553a of tank rail 553. Fig. 48 is an enlarged schematic diagram showing a part of the cross section cut along line CC in Fig. 40(a), and shows an overview of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure.

As described above, if metal powder (foreign matter) from the game ball B that falls from the notches 553aa formed in the trough-shaped main guide section 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged below the tank rail 553, electrical trouble occurs, causing malfunctions or other problems in the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is equipped with ICs such as a peripheral control IC, ROM, and SDRAM, which will be described later, and the peripheral data ROM board is equipped with ICs such as a peripheral data ROM, which will be described later. The pin spacing of these ICs is becoming smaller, and the pin spacing of various connectors and special connectors equipped on the peripheral control board 1510 is becoming narrower, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 is increasing, which is narrowing the spacing between the various connectors and also narrowing the spacing between the connectors and the special connectors, so it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign matter that has fallen from the tank rail.

First, the multiple cutouts 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide section 553a of the tank rail 553 are offset rearward (in this embodiment, offset by a distance dimension of approximately half the diameter of the game ball B) from the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000), as shown in FIG. 48.

The cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is formed in a stepped shape with multiple bends downward from the front edge to the rear edge of the top plate 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate 551a) as described above. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 48, the first eaves 551da is formed so that the lower end of this top plate is approximately on the same plane as the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and extends to the rear of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, when the rear cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end of the rear cover 640 is in face-to-face contact with the rear surface of the first eaves 551da.

This allows the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guiding section 553a to the outside through the cutout section 553aa to be received and adhered to the first eaves section 551da of the top plate section 551a. In other words, the first eaves section 551da of the top plate section 551a prevents the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guiding section 553a to the outside through the cutout section 553aa from falling toward the cover body 1501 and base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and thus prevents the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guiding section 553a to the outside through the cutout section 553aa from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby preventing electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, furthermore, when assembled to the main frame 4, the rear cover 640 extends downward from the abutment with the first eaves portion 551da so as to cover at least a portion of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Therefore, when metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa and adhered to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a falls from the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, the metal powder is transferred to the rear side (rear unit 1100) of the game board 5. This prevents the game ball B from falling toward the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the set 3000) and the base body 1502, and also prevents metal powder from the game ball B that has fallen from the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby preventing electrical problems caused by metal powder from the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 and the rear cover 640 function as a canopy or cover that can prevent metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide section 553a to the outside through the multiple cutouts 553aa formed in the main guide section 553a from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000). Therefore, electrical problems caused by metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first eaves portion 551da is provided below the cutout portion 553aa, so that not only when the rear cover 640 is closed but also when the rear cover 640 is opened, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and adhered to the first eaves portion 551da, and the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa is prevented from falling toward the cover body 1501 and base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and thus the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa is prevented from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby preventing electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In the above example, when assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end of the rear cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first overhanging portion 551da, but the upper end of the rear cover 640 and the first overhanging portion 551da may be spaced apart. In other words, the arrangement of the rear cover 640 and the first overhanging portion 551da does not matter as long as the rear cover 640 and the first overhanging portion 551da cooperate to prevent metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500.

In addition, in this embodiment, the cutouts 553aa formed in the trough-shaped main guide section 553a of the tank rail 553 and the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000) are offset in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (in this embodiment, offset by a distance dimension of about half the diameter of the game ball B) (i.e., the structure is such that the peripheral control unit 1500 is not positioned directly below the cutouts 553aa), which is effective in preventing electrical trouble caused by metal powder from the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

In addition, the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface of the cover body 1501 (the flat cover plate described later), but are not provided on the cover side walls provided on the upper, left, lower, and right sides of the cover body 1501 (the flat cover plate described later). Therefore, even if metal powder from the game ball B adheres to the upper wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the flat cover plate described later), it is difficult for the powder to enter the inside of the cover body 1501.

In addition, among the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper, left, lower, and right sides of the cover plate of the cover body 1501, one or a combination of any of them may be formed, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501e provided on the right side, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side. Even with this configuration, it is possible to prevent foreign matter (e.g., metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B) generated by the game ball B from falling and entering the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. This makes it possible to prevent electrical trouble caused by foreign matter falling onto various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical trouble caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553. The reason why ventilation holes 1501az are not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if ventilation holes 1501az were formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, foreign matter generated by game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by wear of game ball B) would fall and enter the interior of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az, increasing the likelihood of electrical trouble occurring due to foreign matter falling onto the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505.

In addition, if no ventilation holes 1501 are provided on the top surface of the cover body 1501, the heat dissipation function may be compensated for by increasing the number of ventilation holes 1501 provided on other surfaces or by expanding the area of the ventilation holes 1501. This can contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505, and can suppress the occurrence of electrical problems such as thermal runaway.

In addition, the top surface of the cover body 1501 is approximately horizontal when attached to the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, when metal powder of the game ball B falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa and adheres to the top surface of the cover body 1501, the metal powder can be retained on the top surface of the cover body 1501. This makes it possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inside of the cover body 1501. Note that part or all of the top surface of the cover body 1501 may be inclined as long as it does not cause the metal powder of the game ball B to fall toward the ventilation hole 1501az formed in the cover body 1501.

The first eaves member 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 may also be attached to the top plate portion 551a as a separate member (separate structural component).

In addition, when the upper part or rear part of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is covered by the first eaves part 551da of the top plate part 551a and/or the rear cover 640, or when the notches 553aa formed in the trough-shaped main guide part 553a of the tank rail 553 and the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are arranged offset in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, and when the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide part 553a through the notches 553aa formed in the main guide part 553a is unlikely to head toward the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the ventilation holes 1501az may be provided in a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 when attached to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the corners of the cover body 1501, the majority of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 is closed but some of the ventilation holes 1501az are formed, etc.).

In addition, this technical idea is not limited to completely preventing metal powder of game ball B that has fallen from the main guide section 553a to the outside through the cutout section 553aa from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, but may be suppressed from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the cutout section 553aa in a manner that is more effective than conventional pachinko machines. For example, the provision of ventilation holes 1501az on a portion of the top surface of the cover body 1501 when attached to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a corner of the cover body 1501, or a portion of the top surface of the cover body 1501 where ventilation holes 1501az are formed, although most of the top surface is closed) also falls under this technical idea.

In addition, a plurality of slit holes are formed in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. In addition, along the lower side of the cover body 1501, seven connector holes and a volume adjustment hole are formed at positions corresponding to the seven connectors and the volume adjustment switch, which will be described later, provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, respectively, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board, which will be described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, gaps are formed between the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, and the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed from these seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole formed in the cover body 1501, and the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from this volume adjustment hole. In addition, when the liquid crystal output board described below is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, gaps are formed between the two connectors on the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, and the two connectors on the liquid crystal output board are exposed from these two connector holes.

The cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 takes in air from outside the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and also through the gaps mentioned above (the gaps formed between the seven connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, the gaps formed between the volume adjustment switch on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole formed in the cover body 1501, and the gaps formed between the two connectors on the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501).

Incidentally, when the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 takes in air from outside the peripheral control unit 1500, there is a high probability that the heavy metal powder of the game ball B will be sucked into the inner space of the cover body 1501 due to the influence of the air flow, and the sucked-in metal powder will cause electrical trouble (short circuit), resulting in malfunctions (failures) in the various electronic components mounted on various boards such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in order to prevent such electrical trouble (short circuit), a first eaves portion 551da is formed along the upper edge of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, so that the peripheral control unit 1500 can be configured to function as an eaves that prevents heavy powder, such as metal powder of the game ball B, from being sucked into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501. A detailed explanation of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be given later.

In the above-described embodiment, multiple cutouts 553aa were formed in the main guide section 553a in the tank rail 553 to allow metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B to be removed from the main guide section 553a, but a single cutout, hole, or groove similar to the cutout 553aa may be formed in the ball passage in which the game ball B rolls. Specifically, in the ball guide unit 570 shown in FIG. 33, which has a single guide passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a cutout, hole, or groove that allows metal powder of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a to be removed from the guide passage 570a to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 of the guide unit 570 shown in FIG. 28. As shown in Fig. 33, the payout device 580 and the board unit 620 are arranged below the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 has a board on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted, and the board unit 620 has a power board 630, a payout control board 633, an interface board 635, etc. shown in Fig. 34, and various boards are arranged. For this reason, when a cutout, hole, or groove is formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571, it is necessary to prevent metal powder of the game ball B that falls through the cutout, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 from adhering to various boards arranged below the induction unit 570. Therefore, a eaves-like member can be formed to protrude backward along the upper edge of the dispensing device rear cover 582 of the dispensing device 580 shown in FIG. 27, and the position of the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 and the position of various boards such as the board on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted in the dispensing device 580 can be shifted, or both can be used to configure. Also, a eaves-like member can be formed to protrude backward along the upper edges of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the dispensing control board box 632 of the dispensing control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, etc. shown in FIG. 34, and the position of the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 and the position of the power supply board cover 631, the dispensing control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be shifted, or both can be used to configure.

Next, another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as "configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the second to fifth embodiments") in which a countermeasure against metal powder is taken to avoid electrical trouble caused by metal powder of the game ball B will be described with reference to Figs. 49 to 51. Fig. 49 shows the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment. Fig. 50 shows the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment. Fig. 51 shows the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. In Figs. 49 to 51, the same reference numerals are used to denote members having the same functions as those in the embodiment shown in Fig. 48 (hereinafter, referred to as "configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment"), and the outer shape of the game board 5 is shown by solid lines, and only the parts of the game board 5 necessary for explanation are shown as cross-sectional views.

[Comparison between the configuration of measures against metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration of measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration for preventing metal powder in the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the fore-aft direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is, as described above, formed in a stepped shape with multiple downward bends as it moves from the front edge to the rear edge of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), and forms a first eaves portion 551da extended to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 so that the lower end of this top plate portion 551a is approximately on the same plane as the rear surface of the tank rail 553.

In contrast, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the cross-sectional shape in the front-to-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is formed in a stepped shape with multiple bends downward as it moves from the front edge to the rear edge of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), and the lower end of the top plate portion 551a forms a first overhang portion 551da that extends to the rear of the pachinko machine 1, but the first overhang portion 551da is not extended so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553, but only extends up to that point (to the front of the pachinko machine 1) (in the example shown in FIG. 48, up to just below the cutout portion 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553).

On the other hand, when assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end of the rear cover 640 bends toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the game board 5) and forms a second eaves portion 640a that extends to just below the notch portion 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553, and this second eaves portion 640a is in contact with the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. Also, the rear end surface of the rear cover 640 is arranged to be positioned further rearward of the pachinko machine 1 than the rear surface of the tank rail 553.

Thus, the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment differs in that the first overhanging portion 551da forms the overhanging portion alone, whereas the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment differs in that the first overhanging portion 551da and the second overhanging portion 640a are connected to jointly form the overhanging portion.

In addition, as long as the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a are connected to jointly form the eaves portion, the length of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a, i.e., the proportion of each in the eaves portion and the position where the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a abut are not limited to those described above. For example, the first eaves portion 640a may be extended to the vicinity of the front surface of the tank rail 553, and the second eaves portion 640a may be extended to the vicinity of the front surface of the tank rail 553 to abut the first eaves portion 640a (abutting on the same surface as the front surface of the tank rail 553), so that the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa is mainly received and adhered to the second eaves portion 640a.

The configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment can achieve the same effect as the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment. That is, metal powder of game ball B that falls from main guide portion 553a to the outside through multiple cutout portions 553aa formed in main guide portion 553a can be received and adhered to first eaves portion 551da arranged below tank rail 553, or received and adhered to second eaves portion 640a of rear cover 640. Furthermore, since the rear surface of the rear cover 640 is extended to cover at least a part of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 when assembled to the main frame 4, when metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa and adhered to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a or the second eaves portion 640a of the rear cover 640 falls from the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a or the second eaves portion 640a of the rear cover 640, the metal powder ... is guided to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear unit 30 This prevents the game ball B from falling toward the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the game ball B. This also prevents metal powder from the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide section 553a via the cutout section 553aa from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby preventing electrical problems caused by metal powder from the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

[Comparison between the configuration of measures against metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration of measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration for preventing metal powder in the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the fore-aft direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is, as described above, formed in a stepped shape with multiple downward bends as it moves from the front edge to the rear edge of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), and a first eave portion 551da is formed extending rearward from the pachinko machine 1 so that the lower end of this top plate portion 551a is approximately flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553, and a rear cover 640 is provided behind the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 without the top plate portion 551a.

In contrast, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the first eaves 551da is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear end of the top plate 551a is bent downward to form the upper back plate 551d. The lower end of this upper back plate 551d is in contact with the upper end of the rear cover 640. Note that the length of the upper back plate 551d is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 50, and it may be extended to a position covering the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, or it may be extended above the position covering the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 without extending to that position as shown in FIG. 50.

Thus, the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment differs in that the rear cover 640 alone covers at least a portion of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, whereas the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment differs in that the upper part of the back plate 551d and the rear cover 640 are connected to jointly cover at least a portion of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500.

The configuration for preventing metal powder according to the third embodiment can achieve the same effect as the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment. That is, metal powder of game ball B that falls from main guide portion 553a to the outside through multiple cutout portions 553aa formed in main guide portion 553a can be received and adhered to first eaves portion 551da arranged below tank rail 553, or received and adhered to second eaves portion 640a of rear cover 640. Furthermore, when assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper part 551d of the back plate and the rear surface of the rear cover 640 are connected to jointly cover at least a part of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Therefore, when metal powder of the game ball B falls to the outside from the main guide part 553a through the cutout part 553aa and adheres to the first eaves part 551da of the top plate part 551a or the second eaves part 640a of the rear cover 640, the metal powder falls from the first eaves part 551da of the top plate part 551a or the second eaves part 640a of the rear cover 640. This prevents the ball B from falling toward the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000, and the base body 1502, and also prevents metal powder from the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide section 553a via the cutout section 553aa from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby preventing electrical problems caused by metal powder from the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

[Comparison between the configuration of measures against metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration for preventing metal powder in the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the fore-aft direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is, as described above, formed in a stepped shape with multiple downward bends as it moves from the front edge to the rear edge of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), and forms a first eaves portion 551da extended to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 so that the lower end of this top plate portion 551a is approximately on the same plane as the rear surface of the tank rail 553.

In contrast, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the cross-sectional shape in the front-to-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is formed in a stepped shape with multiple downward bends as it moves from the front edge to the rear edge of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), but the rear edge of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the trough-shaped main guide portion 553a formed in the top plate portion 551a, and is formed with a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension that is approximately half the diameter of the game ball B) from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a downward. In other words, the end face of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged to protrude downward compared to the bottom of the main guide portion 553a.

In addition, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, when the rear cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the second overhanging portion 640a, which is formed by bending the upper edge of the rear cover 640 significantly forward, is arranged parallel to the front wall of the trough-shaped main guide portion 553a, and is in surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a, which is arranged to protrude downward compared to the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. In addition, the portion where the front surface of the second overhanging portion 640a and the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a abut is arranged significantly forward of the multiple cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a.

Thus, the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment differs in that the first overhanging portion 551da constitutes the overhanging portion alone, whereas the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment differs in that the first overhanging portion 551da is not provided and the second overhanging portion 640a constitutes the overhanging portion alone.

The configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment can achieve the same effect as the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment. That is, metal powder of the game ball B that falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the multiple cutouts 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a can be received and adhered to the upper surface of the second overhanging portion 640a, which is disposed below the tank rail 553 and is formed by bending the upper edge side of the back cover 640 significantly forward. Furthermore, since the rear surface of the rear cover 640 is extended to cover at least a part of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 when assembled to the main frame 4, when metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa and adhered to the second eaves portion 640a of the rear cover 640 falls from the second eaves portion 640a of the rear cover 640, the metal powder falls from the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000). This prevents the game ball B from falling toward the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear of the performance display device 1600 (which is attached to the rear of the performance display device 1600), and the base body 1502, and also prevents metal powder from the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide section 553a via the cutout section 553aa from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby preventing electrical problems caused by metal powder from the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the first eaves portion 551da is formed by the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, but this is not limited to this, and the first eaves portion 551da may be formed by any of the members attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, such as the upper wall 3010a of the rear box 3010 in the rear unit 3000, or any of the members attached to the main frame base unit 500.

[4-7-1. Checking for dust when removing and installing the game board 1]
As partially described above, in the past, foreign matter such as metal powder and dust could be dropped from the discharge hole 553aa provided in the tank rail to facilitate the flow of game balls down the tank rail, but there were problems with the dropped foreign matter adhering to the control board, etc., located below, causing problems with the game components, resulting in malfunctions and errors in the game machine, etc. Specifically, metal powder generated by the flow of game balls down the tank rail, etc., could fall from the discharge hole 553aa of the tank rail and adhere to a specific portion (connector portion, etc.) of the control board located below, causing electrical trouble in the control board and interfering with game progress on the game machine. In addition, there is also a problem that foreign objects fall downward from the discharge hole 553aa of the tank rail that is not the object of replacement due to vibrations generated during the work of replacing the game board with a new one (attaching and detaching the game board, etc.). For example, if foreign objects in the tank rail fall downward due to vibrations generated when a new game board is attached, there is a risk that the operation of the game machine with the new game board will be hindered. In order to deal with such a problem, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when attaching and detaching the game board 5, the presence of foreign objects such as metal powder and dust of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 (the accumulation of foreign objects on the underside of the tank rail 553, the adhesion of foreign objects to the side of the tank rail 553, etc.) can be easily confirmed, and countermeasures (removal of foreign objects, etc.) can be performed before a malfunction occurs. This example will be described with reference to the above-mentioned drawings, as well as Figures 19 to 22, 35, and Figures 19 to 22, 35, and Figures 52 to 56. Figure 52 is an overview diagram showing an outline of the configuration for preventing metal powder when the game board 5 of this example is removed, Figure 53 is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example attached, Figure 54 is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example removed, Figure 55 (A) is an oblique view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example removed, viewed from the lower front right, Figure 56 (A) is a diagram showing with a diagonal line the location where the upper decorative part X of the door frame 3 is located, corresponding to the location where the tank rail 553 hangs down into the opening (above the opening) of the game board mounting part 301 when viewed from the front when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, and Figure 56 (B) is a schematic diagram showing a side view of the pachinko machine 1 as viewed from the left side.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached to the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 are provided with transparent parts. Specifically, the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 are entirely made of transparent synthetic resin (colorless and transparent synthetic resin in this embodiment), and the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 are entirely made of transparent synthetic resin (colorless and transparent synthetic resin in this embodiment), so that the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 are entirely made of transparent synthetic resin (colorless and transparent synthetic resin in this embodiment), so that the ball guide unit 570 having a single guide passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner is entirely (or partially) made of transparent synthetic resin (colorless and transparent synthetic resin in this embodiment), so that the guide passage 570a is entirely (or partially) made of transparent synthetic resin. In addition, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the ball straightening member 556, and the entire ball tank 552 are made of opaque synthetic resin (black synthetic resin in this embodiment) and are configured to be opaque.

In addition, in the tank rail 553 of this example, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the payout base 551, there are provided a portion (a portion directly supported) that overlaps with the payout base 551 in the front-rear direction from the side where the payout base 551 is located (the front side of the pachinko machine 1), and a portion (a portion that is not directly supported and is arranged in a hollow state) that does not overlap with the payout base 551 in the front-rear direction from the side where the payout base 551 is located (the front side of the pachinko machine 1) (see FIG. 54). In this example, these portions of the tank rail 553 are visible through the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 that is formed when the game board 5 that is detachably attached from the front side to the main body frame 4 is removed, making it possible to check the presence of metal powder and dust inside the tank rail 553, and preventing problems with game operation after replacement with a new game board 5.

The following describes in detail how to check for the presence of foreign matter such as metal powder and dust inside the tank rail 553 by looking up at the upper inside of the opening of the game board attachment part 301 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5, which is detachably attached from the front side of the main body frame 4, removed.

As described above, Fig. 53 is a front view of the main frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example attached, and Fig. 54 is a front view of the main frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example removed. In Fig. 55(A), as is clear from comparison with Fig. 53, an opening is formed in the game board attachment portion 301 formed in a state in which the game board 5, which is detachably attached from the front side to the main frame 4, is removed, and the tank rail 553 is arranged so that at least a part of it is located within the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board attachment portion 301 in a front view. That is, in this example, the tank rail 553 is arranged so that the tank rail 553 hangs down within the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board attachment portion 301 in a front view. However, if the entire tank rail 553 were to face inside the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the area of the tank rail 553 that would be visible through the opening would become larger, and the inspector would notice areas that are not necessary for checking the presence of foreign objects. Therefore, in this example, in order to speed up the checking of the presence of foreign objects, not the entire tank rail 553, but only specific areas of the tank rail 553 where it is necessary to focus on checking the presence of foreign objects (in this example, the bottom and side surfaces of the tank rail 553 near the area where the release hole 553aa through which foreign objects are dropped is formed) are positioned so that they hang down over the top of the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 when viewed from the front.

The right side of the tank rail 553, which hangs down inside the opening (above the opening) of the game board mounting part 301 in Figures 54 and 55 (A), is a part that does not overlap the aforementioned payout base 551 in the front-to-rear direction (a part that is not directly supported and is arranged in a hollow state), and when the opening of the game board mounting part 301 is viewed from the front, the tank rail 553 made of transparent synthetic resin can be directly seen, and the inner side (the inside of the bottom and side) of the tank rail 553 can be confirmed. Also, the left side is a part where the aforementioned tank rail 553 and the payout base 551 overlap in the front-to-rear direction (a part that is directly supported), and when the opening of the game board mounting part 301 is viewed from the front, the tank rail 553 made of transparent synthetic resin can be seen through the payout base 551 made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inner side (the inside of the bottom and side) of the tank rail 553 can be confirmed. In this example, not only the tank rail 553 but even the area to which the tank rail 553 is attached is made of transparent synthetic resin, so that the area in which the presence or absence of foreign objects inside the tank rail 553 can be confirmed is not restricted.

In addition, in this example, when the game board 5 is attached as shown in FIG. 53, the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 is completely closed for decorative purposes, making it impossible to check the presence of foreign objects in the tank rail 553 from the front of the pachinko machine 1. However, by making the entire payout base 551 and tank rail 553 out of a transparent synthetic resin, it is possible to check the presence of foreign objects in the tank rail 553 from the rear of the pachinko machine 1, or from the side when the main body frame 4 is opened and closed forward centered on the left side when viewed from the front, even when the game board 5 is attached.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 (vertically above the tank rail 553), the first rail cover 554, the ball straightening member 556, and the bypass passage 552g in the ball tank 552 are formed from opaque synthetic resin, so that when looking up toward the upper inside of the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the second rail cover 555 located at the back of the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the ball straightening member 556, and the bypass passage 552g can be seen through the payout base 551 and tank rail 553 which are formed from transparent resin. In this way, by looking up at the upper inside of the opening of the game board attachment part 301 at a position where the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, the ball straightening member 556, and the bypass passage 552g are visible on the back of the tank rail 553, the presence of foreign objects accumulated in the tank rail 553 becomes clear due to the members made of opaque resin, and the presence of foreign objects can be easily confirmed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 and the need for removal work can be determined, thereby preventing any disruption to game operation after replacement with a new game board 5.

In the above example, the dispensing base 551 and the tank rail 553 are entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin, but other configurations are also possible as long as the inside of the tank rail 553 can be confirmed. For example, the dispensing base 551 may be made of an opaque resin, while the tank rail 553 may be entirely made of a transparent resin, and an opening may be provided in a portion of the dispensing base 551 made of an opaque resin, through which the inside of the tank rail 553 can be confirmed.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball tank 552 is formed from a transparent resin, but in this example, the ball tank 552 is further composed of an "electrically conductive material." Specifically, in this example, the entire ball tank 552 is molded from a synthetic resin that is conductive. Meanwhile, the tank rail 553, which is formed from a transparent resin, is composed of an insulator that is not conductive (in this example, it is molded from a non-conductive synthetic resin). In addition, the ball tank 552 is electrically connected to the frame earth substrate 559, and electromagnetic noise that enters the ball tank 552 is guided to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall and removed. This removes the static electricity from the game ball B inside the ball tank 552 (de-electrifies it), allowing foreign matter such as metal powder adhering to the game ball B to fall off, and also makes it difficult for foreign matter such as metal powder that falls from the game ball B to adhere to the ball tank 552, so that foreign matter such as metal powder can be moved from inside the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 as the game ball B flows down.

As described above, tank rail 553 has multiple cutouts 553aa formed therein, allowing foreign matter such as metal powder that falls from game ball B to fall to the outside. However, because tank rail 553 is made of an insulator, foreign matter such as metal powder that falls from game ball B adheres to tank rail 553 and remains inside tank rail 553. In this way, because the tank rail 553 is made of an insulator, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B can be attached and retained inside the tank rail 553. In addition to making it easier to check the presence of metal powder and dust as described above, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B is prevented from falling toward the cover body 1501 and base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and thus foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B is prevented from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby preventing electrical trouble caused by foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to the tank rail 553, the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640 provided below the tank rail 553 are also made of an insulator (polycarbonate resin, etc.). In other words, when the tank rail 553, the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a), and the back cover 640 are charged, they have the same polarity. Therefore, when a foreign object such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B falls through the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, the foreign object such as metal powder adheres to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640, which have the same polarity as the tank rail 553, due to electrostatic force.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the tank rail 553 is made of an insulator (in this example, molded from a non-conductive synthetic resin) so that foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game balls B in the ball tank 552 or tank rail 553 is attached and retained on the tank rail 553 by electrostatic force. In addition, even if foreign matter such as metal powder attached to the tank rail 553 falls from the cutout portion 553aa, the fallen foreign matter such as metal powder can be attached and retained on the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) made of an insulator (in this example, molded from a non-conductive synthetic resin) or the upper surface of the rear cover 640 by electrostatic force, thereby preventing the foreign matter from scattering to the outside. This not only makes it easier to check the presence of metal powder and dust as described above, but also double prevents foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from game ball B from falling toward the cover body 1501 and base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, preventing foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from game ball B from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and ultimately preventing electrical problems caused by foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from game ball B from adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, in this example, the tank rail 553 is made of an insulating material (molded from a non-conductive resin in this example), but as another example, a transparent insulating sheet may be provided inside the tank rail 553, and foreign matter such as metal powder that falls from the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or tank rail 553 may be attached and retained on the tank rail 553 by electrostatic force.

In the above example, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the ball straightening member 556, and the bypass passage 552g in the ball tank 552 are formed from opaque resin, and the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, and the ball straightening member 556, which are formed from opaque resin, can be seen through the tank rail 553, which is formed from transparent resin. However, at least any of the members visible through the tank rail 553, which is formed from transparent resin, may be formed from opaque resin or metal, or an opaque sticker may be affixed to the surface, or paint may be applied to make the back of the member difficult to see (including making it unclear). That is, since most of the foreign matter such as metal powder and dust accumulates on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, when the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is checked from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board attachment portion 301, a member made of opaque resin or metal may be provided at a position that can be seen through the transparent bottom surface of the tank rail 553, for example, on the outside of the side wall portion on the left side of the tank rail 553 in FIG. 52 (the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1), or the side wall portion on the left side of the tank rail 553 in FIG. 52 (the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) itself may be made of a separate member made of opaque resin or metal.

In addition, when the above-mentioned eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) is provided below the tank rail 553, a part or all of these eaves portions (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) may be formed from a transparent synthetic resin. This makes it possible to see metal powder and dust inside the tank rail 553 through the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) formed from a transparent synthetic resin when the game board 5 is removed. In addition, the entire back cover 640 may be formed from a transparent synthetic resin, or only a part of the back cover 640 including the portion constituting the second eaves portion 640a may be formed from a transparent synthetic resin.

In addition, in this example of the pachinko machine 1, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 as shown in Figure 53, it is possible to remove the game board 5 from the front side of the main body frame 4 with the rear cover 640 closed. In addition, when the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4 shown in Figures 52 and 54, if the first eaves portion 551da is made of a member attached to the main frame base unit 500, the eaves portion (the first eaves portion 551da in the example shown in Figure 52, but the second eaves portion 640a or the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a in the other embodiments described above) remains below the tank rail 553 even when the game board 5 is removed, so that the eaves portion (the first eaves portion 551da and/or the second eaves portion 640a) can catch metal powder and dust falling from inside the tank rail 553 and prevent them from falling on and adhering to game devices such as connectors located below, and this can prevent problems with game operation from occurring after the game board 5 is replaced with a new one.

Furthermore, when the game board 5, which is detachably attached from the front side to the main frame 4 as shown in FIG. 52, is removed and the tank rail 553 is checked from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening in the game board mounting portion 301, it is possible to see both the metal powder and dust adhering to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) formed from transparent synthetic resin and the metal powder and dust inside the tank rail 553, which is also formed from transparent synthetic resin, so that the presence of these metal powders and dust can be checked all at once. In addition, the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, the ball straightening member 556, and other components formed of opaque synthetic resin can be seen through the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) formed of transparent synthetic resin and the tank rail 553 formed of transparent synthetic resin. Therefore, the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, and the ball straightening member 556 formed of opaque synthetic resin clearly show the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) and the metal powder and dust accumulated in the tank rail 553. This makes it easier to check the presence of metal powder and dust, and prevents problems with game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one.

The tank rail 553 formed from a transparent synthetic resin and the member formed from an opaque synthetic resin need only have a positional relationship such that at least a portion of the tank rail 553 overlaps and is visible when the tank rail 553 is viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening in the game board mounting portion 301 with the game board 5, which is detachably attached from the front to the main frame 4, removed; this positional relationship will change depending on the person checking the presence of metal powder and dust, such as a staff member of the game shop. That is, if a store employee sticks his head into the opening of the game board attachment 301 and looks up from a position directly below the tank rail 553, the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, and the ball straightening member 556, which are located directly above the tank rail 553, will be the members that overlap with the tank rail 553, and if the employee looks up at the tank rail 553 from outside the opening of the game board attachment 301, the members located directly behind the tank rail 553 (behind the pachinko machine 1) or at the top of the rear side (behind the pachinko machine 1) will be the members that overlap with the tank rail 553. In this way, a person checking the presence of metal powder and dust can see the opaque member overlapping the tank rail 553 by appropriately changing the position from which they look, making the presence of metal powder and dust clear and making it easier to check the presence of metal powder and dust.

When the game board 5, which is detachably attached from the front side of the main frame 4 as described above, is removed and one looks up at the upper inside of the opening of the game board attachment portion 301, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 located at the back of the tank rail 553 can be seen through the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553, which are made of transparent resin. As shown in FIG. 45, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 each have a locking portion 555a with a locking hole, and are detachably attached to the tank rail 553 by pressing the locking protrusion 553c formed on the outside of the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 into the locking hole formed in the locking portion 555a.

When the game board 5, which is detachably attached from the front side to the main frame 4, is removed and one looks up at the inside above the opening of the game board attachment portion 301, one can see through the payout base 551, which is made of transparent resin, and the tank rail 553, and the locking portions 555a (which may be all of the locking portions 555a visible, or only some of the multiple locking portions 555a visible) formed on the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556, and the locking protrusions 553c (which may be all of the locking protrusions 553c visible, or only some of the multiple locking protrusions 553c visible) formed on the tank rail 553. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the mounting status of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556, i.e., the engagement status between the locking portion 555a and the locking protrusion 553c, can be confirmed through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 that is formed when the game board 5 is removed, making it possible to prevent abnormalities from occurring in the ball flow path inside the tank rail 553.

When a game ball B is present in the tank rail 553, the rear of the game ball B is prevented from being seen, but the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 are attached to the tank rail 553 in a state in which their respective locking portions 555a sandwich the passage of the tank rail 553 by forming locking protrusions 553c on the outer side of the side wall portion of the tank rail 553. In other words, when the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 are attached to the tank rail 553, at least a part of the locking portion 555a formed on the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 and at least a part of the locking protrusion 553c formed on the tank rail 553 are provided in a position where visibility is not prevented by the game ball B located in the tank rail 553. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 are attached to the tank rail 553, the locking portion 555a provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 from the tank rail 553 (which may be all or a part of the locking portion 555a provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 from the tank rail 553) and the locking protrusion 553c provided on the outside of the front side wall portion of the pachinko machine 1 on the tank rail 553 (which may be all or a part of the locking protrusion 553c provided on the outside of the front side wall portion of the pachinko machine 1 on the tank rail 553) are not obstructed by the game ball B located inside the tank rail 553.

In addition, when there are no game balls B in the tank rail 553, the inside (vertical lower surface) of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 can be seen through the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553, which are made of transparent resin, and the adhesion status of foreign matter such as metal powder and dust to the inside surfaces (vertical lower surface) of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 can be confirmed. This makes it possible to easily check the condition of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 when replacing the game board 5 with a new one, and to determine the need for removal work, thereby preventing abnormalities from occurring in the ball flow path in the tank rail 553.

Also, as described above, if the tank rail 553 is arranged so that it hangs down inside the opening (top of the opening) of the game board attachment part 301 when viewed from the front when the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4, the tank rail 553 can be seen inside the opening (top of the opening) of the game board attachment part 301 even when the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4 under circumstances other than checking for the presence of metal powder or dust. This means that there is a risk that the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1 will be lost when there is an opportunity to display only the main frame 4 before changing the game board 5 or when announcing a new model. To avoid this, the tank rail 553 may be arranged so that it hangs down inside the opening (top of the opening) of the game board attachment part 301 when viewed from the front when the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4, but the door frame 3 may cover the part where the tank rail 553 hangs down.

Specifically, an upper decorative part X is provided on the upper part of the door frame upper unit 200 provided on the front surface of the door frame base unit of the door frame 3, for example, on the upper part of the glass window of the door frame 3, and the front end side of the upper decorative part X is provided so as to hang down more than the rear end side of the upper decorative part X, so that the hanging part on the front end side of the upper decorative part X covers all or part of the area where the tank rail 553 hangs down and faces the opening (top of the opening) of the game board attachment part 301 in a front view. Figure 56 (A) is a diagram showing the location where the upper decorative part X of the door frame 3 is located by a shaded area, corresponding to the location where the tank rail 553 hangs down and faces the opening (top of the opening) of the game board attachment part 301 in a front view when the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4. As a result, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4 under circumstances other than to check for the presence of metal powder or dust, closing the door frame 3 makes it difficult to see the tank rail 553 inside the opening (above the opening) of the game board attachment part 301 when viewed from the front, and prevents the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1 from being lost on occasions when only the main frame 4 is displayed before the game board 5 is changed or when the model is announced, etc.

Furthermore, although the upper decorative part X is arranged so that the hanging portion on the front end side protrudes into the opening of the game board mounting part 301, in other words into the opening of the game window 201, as shown in Figure 56 (B), the rear end side of the upper decorative part X is arranged so that its lower end is located outside the game window 201 and has a predetermined width dimension in the fore-and-aft direction of the pachinko machine 1, and the front end side of the upper decorative part X hangs down at a position away from the game window 201 to the front of the pachinko machine 1 by the width dimension of the rear end side of the upper decorative part X.As a result, when the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting part 301 and played as a normal pachinko machine 1, a player seated facing the game window 201 can see the entire game area 5a of the game board 5 between the upper decorative part X and the game window 201. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the game board attachment portion 301 and played as a pachinko machine 1, the hanging portion on the front end side does not obstruct the player's view of the play area 5a of the game board 5 on the upper decorative part X when seated facing the game window 201, and when the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4, the hanging portion on the front end side of the upper decorative part X covers all or part of the tank rail 553, preventing the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1 from being lost.

[4-7-2. Checking for dust when removing and installing the game board 2]
In the above example, the dispensing base 551 and the tank rail 553 are formed from a transparent synthetic resin and configured so that the presence of metal powder and dust inside the tank rail 553 can be confirmed, but as another example, a configuration will be illustrated that allows for focused confirmation of the presence of metal powder and dust that has fallen from the tank rail 553 and adhered to the upper surface of the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a), rather than within the tank rail 553.

That is, in this example, the tank rail 553 in FIG. 52, FIG. 54, and FIG. 55(B) is made of opaque synthetic resin (black resin in this example), while the eaves portion located below it (first eaves portion 551da in the example shown in FIG. 52, but second eaves portion 640a or first eaves portion 551da and second eaves portion 640a in the other embodiments described above) is made of transparent synthetic resin. The rear cover 640 may be entirely made of transparent synthetic resin, or only a part of the rear cover 640 including the part constituting the second eaves portion 640a may be made of transparent synthetic resin. In addition, in order to make the tank rail 553 opaque, the tank rail 553 is not limited to being made of opaque synthetic resin, and other configurations may be adopted as long as the tank rail 553 is made of opaque metal or the like, an opaque sticker is attached to the surface or inner surface of the tank rail 553, or paint is applied to make it opaque (including making it unclear).

In this example, the portion of the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da in the example shown in FIG. 52, but corresponding to second eaves portion 640a or first eaves portion 551da and second eaves portion 640a in the other embodiments described above) located below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is made visible through the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 that is formed when the game board 5 that is detachably attached from the front side to the main body frame 4 is removed, making it possible to check the presence of metal powder and dust that has fallen from the tank rail 553 onto the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) and adhered thereto, thereby preventing any problems with game operation after replacement with a new game board 5.

The following describes in detail how to check for the presence of foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that has fallen from the tank rail 553 onto and adhered to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) by looking up from the front of the pachinko machine 1 toward the upper inside of the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 with the game board 5, which is detachably attached from the front side of the main body frame 4, removed.

Figure 55 (B) is an oblique view of the main body frame of another example with the game board removed, viewed from the lower right front. As described above, in this example, the tank rail 553 is made of opaque synthetic resin, and is positioned so that it hangs down and faces inside the opening of the game board mounting part 301 (top of the opening) when viewed from the front. In addition, the payout base 551 to which the tank rail 553 is attached is made of transparent synthetic resin, and like the tank rail 553, a part of it, particularly the lower end of the payout base 551 constituting the first eaves part 551da, is positioned so that it hangs down and faces inside the opening of the game board mounting part 301 (top of the opening) when viewed from the front.

The tank rail 553 is also formed with multiple cutouts 553aa, allowing metal powder, dust, etc., inside the tank rail 553 to fall onto the first eaves 551da of the payout base 551, which is made of a transparent synthetic resin and provided below the tank rail 553. When the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 is viewed from the front, the top surface of the payout base 551, which is made of a transparent synthetic resin, can be seen, making it possible to check the presence of metal powder, dust, etc., adhering to the portion of the first eaves 551da below the cutouts 553aa.

When the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the tank rail 553 can be seen through the payout base 551, which is made of a transparent synthetic resin. Since the tank rail 553 is made of an opaque synthetic resin, when looking up at the upper inside of the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the first eaves portion 551da becomes clear due to the tank rail 553, which is made of an opaque synthetic resin and located behind the payout base 551, making it easier to check for the presence of foreign matter and preventing problems with game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one.

In the above example, all of the tank rails 553 are formed so that their rear portions are difficult to see (including being unclear), but the present invention is not limited to this and may be modified so that at least the portion facing the first eaves portion 551da located below is formed from an opaque synthetic resin or metal, or an opaque sticker is affixed to the surface of the portion facing the first eaves portion 551da, or paint is applied thereto, thereby making the rear portion difficult to see (including being unclear). For example, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 or the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the left side in FIG. 52 (the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) may be formed from an opaque synthetic resin or metal, or an opaque sticker may be affixed to the surface of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 or the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the left side in FIG. 52 (the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) or the like, or paint may be applied to make the back of the tank rail 553 difficult to see (including making it unclear).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 53, the game board 5 can be removed from the front side of the main body frame 4 with the rear cover 640 closed. Even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 52 and FIG. 54, the first eaves portion 551da remains below the tank rail 553, so that metal powder and dust falling from inside the tank rail 553 can be received by the first eaves portion 551da and prevented from falling on and adhering to game devices such as connectors located below, and thus it is possible to prevent problems with game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are made of opaque resin, but in this example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are further made of "electrically conductive material."

Specifically, in this example, the entire ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are molded from conductive resin. In addition, the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are electrically connected to the frame earth substrate 559, so that electromagnetic noise that enters the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 is guided to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall and removed. This not only makes it easier to check the presence of metal powder and dust as described above, but also removes (neutralizes) the static electricity from the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553, allowing foreign matter such as metal powder attached to the game ball B to fall off the game ball B, and makes it difficult for foreign matter such as metal powder that falls from the game ball B to adhere to the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553. As the game ball B flows down from inside the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, foreign matter such as metal powder moves, and foreign matter such as metal powder in the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 can be actively dropped from the cutout portion 553aa.

On the other hand, in this example, the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) and the rear cover 640 provided below the tank rail 553 are made of an insulator made of transparent synthetic resin, which not only makes it easier to check the presence of the above-mentioned metal powder and dust, but also allows foreign matter such as metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 to be attached and retained by electrostatic force to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) or the upper surface of the rear cover 640, etc., thereby preventing the foreign matter from scattering to the outside.

In other words, foreign matter such as metal powder from game ball B is actively removed from the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553, while foreign matter such as metal powder from game ball B that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is retained by adhering to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) or the upper surface of the rear cover 640, thereby preventing foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from game ball B from falling toward the cover body 1501 and base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and thus preventing foreign matter such as metal powder from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and thus preventing electrical trouble caused by foreign matter such as metal powder adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In the above example, the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are molded from conductive synthetic resin, but as long as they are made of an electrical conductor, they are not limited to synthetic resin, and metal, conductive rubber, etc. may be used. When metal is used for part or all of the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553, the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553 can be de-electrified in an extremely short time. On the other hand, when conductive synthetic resin or conductive rubber is used for part or all of the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553, it takes a longer time than when metal is used, and the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are gradually de-electrified. In this way, when conductive synthetic resin or conductive rubber is used for part or all of the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553, the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553 can be gradually de-electrified, making it difficult for discharge to occur and preventing any effect on electronic components mounted on various boards, etc.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the tank rail 553 has a cutout 553aa, whereas the ball tank 552 does not have a cutout. In addition, as will be described later in detail, the board housed in the board case is arranged below the tank rail 553 where the cutout 553aa is formed, and furthermore, no ventilation holes are formed on the upper surface of this board case. On the other hand, not only the board housed in the board case but also the board not housed in the board case are arranged below the ball tank 552 where no cutout is formed. In other words, by arranging the board not housed in the board case below the ball tank 552 where no cutout is formed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B falling toward and adhering to the board, and further the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the board not housed in the board case. Note that the board case housing the board arranged below the ball tank 552 where no cutout is formed may have a ventilation hole formed on the upper surface of the board case, or may not have a ventilation hole formed on the upper surface of the board case.

In addition, in this example, a visor portion (first visor portion 551da and/or second visor portion 640a) and a back cover 640 are provided below the ball tank 552 where no cutout portion is formed, and the board that is not housed in the board case is placed inside the space formed by the visor portion (first visor portion 551da and/or second visor portion 640a) and the back cover 640. Therefore, even if a small amount of metal powder falls downward from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the bottom of the ball tank 552, it can be attached and retained by the visor portion (first visor portion 551da and/or second visor portion 640a) and the back cover 640 made of an insulator, so that the metal powder of the game ball B is prevented from adhering to the board that is not housed in the board case, and the occurrence of electrical trouble can be prevented.

In addition, a visor portion (first visor portion 551da and/or second visor portion 640a) and a rear cover 640 are also provided below the tank rail 553 where the cutout portion 553aa is formed, and the board housed in the board case is placed inside the space formed by the visor portion (first visor portion 551da and/or second visor portion 640a) and the rear cover 640. Metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 adheres to and remains on the visor portion (first visor portion 551da and/or second visor portion 640a) and the rear cover 640 made of an insulator, so that the metal powder of the game ball B is prevented from entering the board case, and furthermore, the occurrence of electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

In addition, since no ventilation holes are formed on the top surface of the board case that houses the board placed below the tank rail 553 on which the cutout portion 553aa is formed, even if the metal powder of the game ball B that falls from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 falls below the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) without adhering to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a), the metal powder of the game ball B can be received on the top surface of the board case, and adhesion to the board can be suppressed. In addition, the board case that houses the board placed below the tank rail 553 on which the cutout portion 553aa is formed may be made of an insulator, and in this case, the metal powder of the game ball B can be attached and retained on the top surface of the board case, so that the entry of the metal powder of the game ball B into the board case can be suppressed, and electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the board can be suppressed.

In this way, the tank rail 553 is configured to actively allow metal powder from game ball B to fall from the cutout portion 553aa, and the substrate below the tank rail 553 is arranged in a state housed in a substrate case. Furthermore, the upper and rear of this substrate case (rear of the pachinko machine 1) are covered by a eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) and rear cover 640 made of an insulator, so that metal powder from game ball B can be doubly prevented from entering the substrate case of the substrate placed below the tank rail 553, and electrical problems caused by metal powder from game ball B adhering to the substrate can be suppressed.

In the above example, the third embodiment shown in FIG. 50 has been described, but the first embodiment in which the eaves portion is composed only of the first eaves portion 551da, as in the third embodiment, also provides the same action and effect. The second embodiment in which the eaves portion is composed of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a, and the fourth embodiment in which the eaves portion is composed only of the second eaves portion 640 also provide the same action and effect.

Specifically, in the second embodiment in which the eaves portion is composed of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a, as shown in FIG. 49, the eaves portion is composed of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a. In this example, the dispensing base 551 constituting the first eaves portion 551da and the back cover 640 constituting the second eaves portion 640a are made of transparent synthetic resin. In addition, metal powder, dust, etc. inside the tank rail 553 are dropped from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 onto the eaves portion composed of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a, which are made of transparent synthetic resin and are provided below the tank rail 553.

When the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 is viewed from the front, the upper surface of the eaves portion, which is composed of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, can be seen, and the presence of metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the portion below the cutout portion 553aa of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a can be confirmed.

When the opening of the game board mounting part 301 is viewed from the front, the tank rail 553 can be seen through the payout base 551, which is made of a transparent synthetic resin, or the back cover 640, which is also made of a transparent synthetic resin. Since the tank rail 553 is made of an opaque synthetic resin, when looking up at the upper inside of the opening of the game board mounting part 301, the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the upper surface of the first eaves part 551da and the second eaves part 640a becomes clear due to the tank rail 553, which is made of an opaque synthetic resin located behind the payout base 551 and the back cover 640, making it easier to check the presence of foreign matter and preventing problems with game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one.

In the above example, all of the tank rails 553 are formed so that their rear portions are difficult to see (including being unclear), but this is not limiting and at least the portions facing the first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a located below them may be formed from an opaque synthetic resin, metal, etc., or an opaque sticker may be affixed to the surface of the portions facing the first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a, or paint may be applied thereto to make the rear portions difficult to see (including being unclear). For example, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 or the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the left side in FIG. 49 (the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) may be formed from an opaque synthetic resin or metal, or an opaque sticker may be affixed to the surface of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 or the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the left side in FIG. 49 (the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) or the like, or paint may be applied to make the back of the tank rail 553 difficult to see (including making it unclear).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 49, the game board 5 can be removed from the front side of the main body frame 4 with the rear cover 640 closed. Even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 54, the first eaves 551da and the second eaves 640a remain below the tank rail 553, so that metal powder and dust falling from inside the tank rail 553 can be received by the first eaves 551da and/or the second eaves 640 and prevented from falling on and adhering to game devices such as connectors located below, and thus it is possible to prevent problems with game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one.

In addition, in the above example, the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a that constitute the eaves portion are all formed from a transparent synthetic resin, but if it is possible to confirm the presence of metal powder or dust that has fallen from within the tank rail 553 onto the eaves portion and adhered to the upper surface of the eaves portion, one of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a may be formed from a transparent synthetic resin and the other from an opaque synthetic resin, or a part of the first eaves portion 551da or a part of the second eaves portion 640a may be formed from a transparent synthetic resin and the remainder from an opaque synthetic resin. For example, the payout base 551 (all or a part of the payout base 551, with at least the first eaves 551da made of transparent synthetic resin) constituting the first eaves 551da, which is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 relative to the tank rail 553, may be made of transparent synthetic resin, and the back cover 640 (all or a part of the back cover 640, with at least the second eaves 640a made of opaque synthetic resin) constituting the second eaves 640a may be made of opaque synthetic resin. In this case, when the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 is viewed from the front, the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the upper surfaces of the first eaves 551da and the second eaves 640a can be confirmed through the payout base 551, which is made of transparent synthetic resin.

In the fourth embodiment, in which the eaves portion is composed only of the second eaves portion 640a, as shown in FIG. 51, the eaves portion is composed only of the second eaves portion 640a. In this example, the dispensing base 551 and the rear cover 640 constituting the second eaves portion 640a are formed from a transparent synthetic resin. Metal powder, dust, etc. inside the tank rail 553 are dropped from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 onto the eaves portion composed of the second eaves portion 640a, which is formed from a transparent synthetic resin and is provided below the tank rail 553.

When the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 is viewed from the front, the upper surface of the eaves portion, which is composed of the second eaves portion 640a formed from a transparent synthetic resin, can be seen, making it possible to check the presence of metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the portion of the second eaves portion 640a below the cutout portion 553aa.

When the opening of the game board attachment part 301 is viewed from the front, the tank rail 553 can be seen through the payout base 551, which is made of a transparent synthetic resin, or the back cover 640, which is also made of a transparent synthetic resin. Since the tank rail 553 is made of an opaque synthetic resin, when looking up at the upper inside of the opening of the game board attachment part 301, the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the second eaves part 640a is clearly visible due to the tank rail 553, which is made of an opaque synthetic resin and located behind the back cover 640, making it easier to check for the presence of foreign matter and preventing problems with game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one.

In the above example, all of the tank rails 553 are formed so that their rear portions are difficult to see (including being unclear), but this is not limiting and at least the portion facing the second eaves portion 640a located below may be formed from an opaque synthetic resin or metal, or an opaque sticker may be affixed to the surface of the portion facing the second eaves portion 640a, or paint may be applied to make the rear portion difficult to see (including being unclear). For example, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 or the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the left side in FIG. 51 (the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) may be made of opaque synthetic resin, metal, or the like, or an opaque sticker may be affixed to the surface of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 or the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the left side in FIG. 51 (the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) or the like, or paint may be applied to make the back of the tank rail 553 difficult to see (including making it unclear).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 51, the game board 5 can be removed from the front side of the main body frame 4 with the rear cover 640 closed. Even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 54, the second eaves portion 640a remains below the tank rail 553, so that metal powder and dust falling from inside the tank rail 553 can be received by the second eaves portion 640 and prevented from falling on and adhering to game devices such as connectors located below, and thus it is possible to prevent problems with game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one.

In addition, in the above example, the dispensing base 551 and the second eaves portion 640a constituting the eaves portion are all formed from a transparent synthetic resin, but if it is possible to confirm the presence of metal powder or dust that has fallen from within the tank rail 553 onto the eaves portion and adhered to the upper surface of the eaves portion, one of the dispensing base 551 and the second eaves portion 640a may be formed from a transparent synthetic resin and the other from an opaque synthetic resin, or a part of the dispensing base 551 or a part of the second eaves portion 640a may be formed from a transparent synthetic resin and the remainder from an opaque synthetic resin. For example, the portion of the payout base 551 that is located further forward of the pachinko machine 1 than the tank rail 553 and the portion facing the cutout portion 553aa of the back cover 640 that constitutes the second eaves portion 640a may be made of transparent synthetic resin, and the remaining portions may be made of opaque synthetic resin. In this case, when the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 is viewed from the front, the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the upper surface of the second eaves portion 640a can be confirmed through the portion of the payout base 551 that is made of transparent synthetic resin.

[4-8-1. Acceleration of metal powder fall 1]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the shape of the tank rail 553 and the position where the cutout portion 553aa is formed are characterized so that metal powder, dust, etc. of the game ball B are actively dropped from the cutout portion 553aa. A detailed explanation will be given below with reference to Figures 40 to 45 and Figure 57. Figure 57(A) is a plan view showing the tank rail 553 as seen from above, and Figure 57(B) is a front view showing the tank rail 553 as seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in Fig. 57(A), the tank rail 553 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a first bent portion 553da and a second bent portion 553db. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 57, the tank rail 553 extends from the right end side (upstream side, the right end side shown in Fig. 57(A)) in a front view of the pachinko machine 1 to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction from the right end, and then the first bent portion 553da is formed, which moves backward as it moves to the left, and the second bent portion 553db is formed, which moves in a direction parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the first bent portion 553da, and then extends diagonally from the first bent portion 553da to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction, and then extends from the second bent portion 553db to the left end in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. This causes the game ball guided from the ball tank 552 to roll in a crank shape inside the tank rail 553.

As described above, the tank rail 553 has multiple cutouts 553aa. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, six rectangular cutouts 553aa having a predetermined length in the left-right direction (approximately 30 mm in this embodiment) are formed at predetermined intervals (approximately 10 mm in this embodiment).

Specifically, the cutouts 553aa are formed in the first bend 553da at the rear side of the main guide section 553a as viewed from the front (in this example, the bottom surface and rear wall of the main guide section 553a), and in the second bend 553db at the rear side of the main guide section 553a as viewed from the front (in this example, the bottom surface and rear wall of the main guide section 553a) and the front side as viewed from the front (in this example, the bottom surface and front wall of the main guide section 553a), and at the rear side of the main guide section 553a as viewed from the front (in this example, the bottom surface and rear wall of the main guide section 553a). In addition, the cutouts 553aa are formed only in the inner part of the bent passage in the first bend 553da, whereas the cutouts 553aa are formed in two places, the inner part and the outer part of the bent passage in the second bend 553db.

As described above, the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 enter the tank rail 553 from the opening 552k formed on the downstream side. In addition, the opening 552k is opened widely on the rear side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front. That is, the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 flow down toward the tank rail 553 toward the left rear side when viewed from the front. In addition, as the game balls B flow down, foreign matter such as metal powder in the ball tank 552 also moves toward the left rear direction when viewed from the front, that is, near the first bend 553da. In this way, metal powder, dust, etc. gather near the first bend 553da, and in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, foreign matter such as metal powder gathered near the first bend 553da is dropped from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the first bend 553da and removed outside the tank rail 553.

In addition, foreign matter such as metal powder that did not fall from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the first bend portion 553da and foreign matter such as metal powder generated within the tank rail 553 move toward the left rear direction as viewed from the front together with the game ball B flowing down the tank rail 553 toward the downstream side of the first bend portion 553da. In addition, the game ball B flowing down the tank rail 553 contacts the inner wall of the tank rail 553 at the second bend portion 553da and changes the direction of rolling along the inner wall of the tank rail 553. In addition, the game ball B rolling within the tank rail 553 moves straight until it contacts the inner wall of the tank rail 553 at the second bend portion 553da, so that the reaction force acting from the inner wall of the tank rail 553 increases due to the contact with the inner wall of the tank rail 553.

Then, game ball B comes into contact with the inner wall of tank rail 553 at second bend 553da, and rolls along the inner wall of tank rail 553 while receiving a large reaction force from the inner wall of tank rail 553. As game ball B rubs against the inner wall of tank rail 553, metal powder, dust, and the like adhering to the surface of game ball B are peeled off.

In this way, at the second bend 553da of the tank rail 553, the game ball B rubs against the inner wall of the tank rail 553, causing metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the game ball B to peel off. In addition, metal powder, dust, etc. that is not adhering to the game ball B inside the tank rail 553 moves in the direction of the second bend 553da along with the game ball B rolling in the direction of the second bend 553da. In other words, metal powder, dust, etc. are arranged to collect near the second bend 553da of the tank rail 553.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to forming the tank rail 553 into a bent shape so that metal powder, dust, etc. gather at the second bend 553da, a cutout portion 553aa is formed to sandwich the bottom surface of the main guide portion 553a at the second bend 553da, so that the metal powder, dust, etc. that gather at the second bend 553da falls outside the tank rail 553. Therefore, metal powder, dust, etc. that adheres to the game ball B rolling inside the tank rail 553, and metal powder, dust, etc. that exists inside the tank rail 553 without adhering to the game ball B, can be actively dropped outside the tank rail 553 and removed from inside the tank rail 553. In addition, in the second bend 553da, it is sufficient that the cutout 553aa is formed at least on the outer side of the passage (rear side when viewed from the front), and foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that accumulate on the inner wall of the tank rail 553 on the rear side when viewed from the front in the second bend 553da may be discharged from the cutout 553aa.

In the above example, the cutouts 553aa are formed in the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db, but the cutouts 553aa may be formed in at least one of the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db. Even if the cutouts 553aa are not formed in either the first bent portion 553da or the second bent portion 553db, the cutouts 553aa may be formed downstream of the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db so that foreign matter such as metal powder and dust is collected in the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db and then discharged from the cutouts 553aa formed downstream. That is, by forming the cutout portion 553aa downstream of the first bend portion 553da and the second bend portion 553db, foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that has fallen off the surface of the game ball B at the first bend portion 553da and the second bend portion 553db can be allowed to fall to the outside of the tank rail 553 from the cutout portion 553aa formed downstream of the first bend portion 553da and the second bend portion 553db. In this case, too, the intrusion of metal powder, dust, etc. into the ball guiding unit 570 provided downstream of the tank rail 553 can be prevented, preventing interference with game operation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the tank rail 553 is made of an insulator, but the tank rail 553 may be made of an electrically conductive material such as a conductive synthetic resin and electrically connected to the frame earth board 559, so that electromagnetic noise that has entered the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 can be removed by guiding it to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall. In this case, since it becomes easier to peel off the metal powder adhering to the surface of the game ball B, the metal powder adhering to the surface of the game ball B at the first bend 553da or the second bend 553db of the tank rail 553 can be reliably peeled off and dropped outside the tank rail 553 from the cutout 553aa, thereby suppressing the entry of metal powder, dust, etc. into the guide passage 570a and preventing interference with game operation.

As described above, the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a) and back cover 640 are formed of a transparent material below the tank rail 553. If the tank rail 553 is made of an electrically conductive material such as a conductive synthetic resin, the tank rail 553 will be opaque. When the game board 5, which is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front, is removed and the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a) is checked from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board attachment part 301, the presence of the metal powder and dust can be clearly seen, making it easier to check the presence of the metal powder and dust.

In addition, as described above, since the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640 are made of an insulator (polycarbonate resin, etc.), the metal powder of the game ball B that falls from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 can be attached to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) or the upper surface of the back cover 640, etc., and retained. This makes it possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from falling toward the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the base body 1502, and thus prevents the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and thus prevents the occurrence of electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, in the ball guide unit 570 provided downstream of the tank rail 553 shown in FIG. 33, the guide passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner may be molded from a transparent material (such as polycarbonate resin). In this case, it is possible to check metal powder, dust, etc. that has entered the guide passage 570a without being discharged from the cutout portion 553d of the tank rail 553. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 to which the payout unit 560 (ball guide unit 570) is attached is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, so that metal powder, dust, etc. that has entered the guide passage 570a from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 can be checked with the game board 5 detachably attached from the front side to the main body frame 4 removed.

In addition, a member made of opaque synthetic resin may be placed on part or all of the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, or an opaque sticker may be attached to part or all of the guide passage 570a on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, or paint may be applied to make the back of the passage difficult to see (including making it unclear).In this case, when checking for metal powder, dust, etc. that has entered the guide passage 570a from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board attachment part 301 with the game board 5 that is detachably attached from the front side of the main body frame 4 removed, the presence of metal powder or dust that has entered the guide passage 570a becomes clear, making it easier to check for metal powder, dust, etc. that has entered the guide passage 570a, and preventing problems with game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one.

In addition, instead of placing a member made of opaque synthetic resin on part or all of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 of the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570, or attaching an opaque sticker or applying paint to part or all of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 of the guide passage 570a, making the back difficult to see (including making it unclear), the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 to which the payout unit 560 (ball guide unit 570) is attached may be made of opaque synthetic resin. In this case, when the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of metal powder and dust present in the guide passage 570a becomes clear, making it easier to check for metal powder and dust entering the guide passage 570a, and preventing interference with game operation.

[4-8-2. Acceleration of metal powder fall 2]
Next, a first modified example of a mode in which metal powder, dust, etc. of the game ball B are actively dropped from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 will be described. A detailed description will be given below with reference to Figs. 40 to 45 and Figs. 58(A) and (B). Fig. 58(A) is a plan view showing the tank rail 553 as viewed from above, and Fig. 58(B) is a front view showing the tank rail 553 as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. The first modified example described below may be combined with the mode in which metal powder, dust, etc. of the game ball B are actively dropped by the shape of the tank rail 553 and the position where the cutout portion 553aa is formed, or may be performed alone.

As shown in Figure 58 (A), in this example of the pachinko machine 1, a first rail cover 554, a ball straightening member 556, and a second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in that order from the upstream side. Also, as shown in Figure 58 (B), the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the first rail cover 554, the ball straightening member 556, and the second rail cover 555 are attached, and at the downstream end, it is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one game ball B to flow.

The ball straightening member 556 is formed with a ball holding portion 556a that protrudes downward (towards the bottom surface of the tank rail 553). The ball holding portion 556a protrudes to a position where the distance from the bottom surface of the tank rail 556 is slightly shorter than the outer dimensions of two game balls B, so that game balls B that pass under the ball straightening member 556 in an overlapping state always come into contact with the ball holding portion 556a. Furthermore, when the upper game ball B of the two layers of overlapping game balls B comes into contact with the ball holding portion 556a, the game ball B in the upper layer cannot flow downstream.

On the other hand, the lower layer game balls B of the two-layered game balls B can flow downstream even when the upper layer game balls B are in contact with the ball retaining portion 556a, and the upper layer game balls B flow downstream while in contact with the ball retaining portion 556a, causing the upper layer game balls B to fall toward the bottom of the tank rail 553. The impact of this fall causes metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the game balls B to peel off. In other words, the upper layer game balls B of the upper layer of the game balls B passing through the tank rail 553 in a two-layered state come into contact with the ball retaining portion 556a of the ball straightening member 556 and fall toward the bottom of the tank rail 553, causing metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface to peel off. In addition, at this time, foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that peel off from the game balls B falls to the bottom of the tank rail 553.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), a cutout portion 553aa is formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball straightening member 556, and the game ball B passing under the ball straightening member 556 abuts against the ball holding portion 556a and falls toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, so that foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that has fallen off the game ball B can be dropped from the cutout portion 553aa. Also, the game ball B that abuts against the ball holding portion 556a falls to the upstream side of the tank rail 553 as shown in FIG. 58(B). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the cutout portion 553aa on the upstream side of the ball holding portion 556a is formed larger than the cutout portion 553aa provided on the downstream side of the ball holding portion 556a. This allows foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that breaks off from the game ball B that falls after coming into contact with the ball holding portion 556a to fall through the cutout portion 553aa on the upstream side of the holding portion 556a.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game ball B passes under the ball straightening member 556, it abuts against the ball holding portion 556a and falls toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, thereby peeling off foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the surface of the game ball B, and the metal powder and dust are dropped from the cutout portion 553aa formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball straightening member 556. In other words, by peeling off the metal powder and dust adhering to the surface of the game ball B passing under the ball straightening member 556 and immediately dropping it from the cutout portion 553aa formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball straightening member 556, the metal powder and dust can be actively removed from the tank rail 553. This prevents the metal powder and dust from entering the ball guiding unit 570 provided downstream of the tank rail 553, and prevents interference with game operation.

In addition, after metal powder, dust, etc. are peeled off from the game ball B passing under the ball straightening member 556, the peeled off metal powder, dust, etc. can be immediately dropped from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball straightening member 556, thereby preventing the metal powder, dust, etc. from re-adhering to the game ball B.

The game balls B flowing from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 are stacked in multiple layers. The game balls B stacked in three or more layers are designed to abut against the first rail cover 554 provided on the upstream side of the ball straightening member 556, and by abutting against the first rail cover 554, the game balls B in three or more layers fall and become stacked in two layers. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), a cutout portion 553aa is also formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the first rail cover 554, and when foreign matter such as metal powder or dust falls off from the game balls B that have abutted against the first rail cover 554 and changed to a state of being stacked in two layers, the metal powder, dust, etc. are allowed to fall from the cutout portion 553aa.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game balls B stacked in multiple layers are gradually broken down into a single layer. Also, when breaking down the game balls B stacked in multiple layers to make the layers thinner, foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that falls off is dropped from the cutout portion 553aa and removed from the tank rail 553, thereby preventing foreign matter such as metal powder and dust from entering the ball guide unit 570 provided downstream of the tank rail 553, and preventing interference with game operation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 58 (A), recesses 554a, 555b, and 556b are formed on the upper surfaces of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. If foreign matter such as metal powder or dust moves from the game ball B abutting the upstream ends of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 to the upper surfaces of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556, the foreign matter is received and retained in the recesses 554a, 555b, and 556b. As a result, when foreign matter such as metal powder or dust moves from inside the tank rail 553 to the upper surface of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 outside the tank rail 553, these foreign matter can be retained on the upper surface of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 and prevented from falling. In other words, foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that has moved from inside the tank rail 553 to the upper surface of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 outside the tank rail 553 is prevented from falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and further from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby preventing electrical trouble caused by foreign matter such as metal powder or dust adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

The tank rail 553 may be made of an electrically conductive material such as a conductive synthetic resin and electrically connected to the frame earth substrate 559, so that electromagnetic noise that has entered the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 can be removed by guiding it to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall. In this case, since it becomes easier to peel off the metal powder adhering to the surface of the game ball B, the metal powder adhering to the surface of the game ball B passing under the ball straightening member 556 can be reliably peeled off and dropped outside the tank rail 553 from the cutout portion 553aa, which can suppress the entry of metal powder, dust, etc. into the induction passage 570a and prevent interference with game operation. In addition, since the static electricity of the game ball B in contact with the tank rail 553 can be removed, the re-adhesion of the metal powder that has peeled off from the surface of the game ball B to the game ball B can be suppressed.

In addition, if the tank rail 553 is made of an electrical conductor such as an opaque synthetic resin having electrical conductivity, when the game board 5, which is detachably attached from the front side to the main body frame 4, is removed and the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) is checked from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board attachment portion 301, the presence of the metal powder and dust can be made clear, making it easier to check the presence of the metal powder and dust.

In addition, by constructing the ball straightening member 556 (which may be all or a part (at least the ball holding portion 556a)) from an electrical conductor such as an opaque synthetic resin having electrical conductivity and electrically connecting it to the frame earth substrate 559, the electromagnetic noise of the ball straightening member 556 (which may be all or a part (at least the ball holding portion 556a)) can be guided to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall and removed, in which case it is possible to suppress the adhesion of metal powder, dust, etc. peeled off from the game ball B to the ball holding portion 556a.

As described above, the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640 are made of an insulator (transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin), so that metal powder, dust, etc. that peels off from the game ball B passing under the ball straightening member 556 and falls from the cutout portion 553aa can be attached to the top surface of the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640, etc., and retained. This makes it possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from falling toward the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the base body 1502, and the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and thus the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

In addition, in the ball guide unit 570 provided downstream of the tank rail 553 shown in FIG. 33, the guide passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner may be molded from a transparent material (such as polycarbonate resin) so that metal powder, dust, etc. that has entered the guide passage 570a without being discharged from the cutout portion 553d of the tank rail 553 can be confirmed. In this case, with the game board 5 that is detachably attached from the front side to the main body frame 4 removed, metal powder, dust, etc. that has entered the guide passage 570a can be confirmed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 through the payout base 551 molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and can also be confirmed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-8-3. Acceleration of metal powder fall 3]
Next, a second modified example of the mode in which metal powder, dust, etc. of the game ball B are actively dropped from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 will be described. Hereinafter, a detailed description will be given with reference to Figs. 40 to 45 and Figs. 57(A) and (B). As described above, Fig. 57(A) is a plan view showing the tank rail 553 as viewed from above, and Fig. 57(B) is a front view showing the tank rail 553 as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. The second modified example described below may be performed in combination with one or both of the mode in which metal powder, dust, etc. of the game ball B are actively dropped by the shape of the tank rail 553 and the position where the notch portion 553aa is formed, and the first modified example, or may be performed alone.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a tank internal step portion 552m is formed in the ball tank 552, and a tank rail internal step portion 553m is formed in the tank rail 553. Specifically, as shown in Figures 57(A) and (B), a tank internal step portion 552m is formed along the edge of the opening 552k of the ball tank 552, and a tank rail internal step portion 553m is formed in the upstream portion of the first bend portion 553da of the tank rail 553. The tank internal step portion 552m and the tank rail internal step portion 553m are inclined at an angle greater than the inclination angle of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Specifically, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined at an angle X, the tank rail internal step 553m is inclined at an angle Y, and the tank internal step 552m is inclined at an angle Z, and the inclination angle Y of the tank rail internal step 553m and the inclination angle Z of the tank internal step 552m are larger than the inclination angle X of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the inclination angle Z of the tank internal step 552m is larger than the inclination angle Y of the tank rail internal step 553m. Note that the inclination angle Y of the tank rail internal step 553m may be configured to be larger than the inclination angle Z of the tank internal step 552m, or the inclination angle Y of the tank rail internal step 553m and the inclination angle Z of the tank internal step 552m may be configured to be the same angle.

When game ball B flows from ball tank 552 into tank rail 553, the step portion 552 inside the tank increases the flow rate, and the game ball B falls to the bottom surface of tank rail 553. The impact at this time causes foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the surface of game ball B to peel off and fall to the bottom surface of tank rail 553. The foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that fell to the bottom surface of tank rail 553 at step portion 552 inside the tank then moves downstream inside tank rail 553 as game ball B flows down.

In addition, a step portion 553m inside the tank rail is formed downstream of the step portion 552 inside the tank. The game ball B flowing down inside the tank rail 553 increases its rolling speed at the step portion, and due to the impact when it falls to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the game ball B are peeled off and fall to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. As described above, the step portion 553m inside the tank rail is formed upstream of the first bend portion 553da. And, the first bend portion 553da has a cutout portion 553aa formed therein as described above.

That is, foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that falls onto the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 at the tank internal step 552 and collects at the first bend 553da, and foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that falls onto the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 at the tank internal step 553m, falls from the cutout 553aa formed in the first bend 553da.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a tank internal step portion 552m is provided in the ball tank 552, and a tank rail internal step portion 553m is provided in the tank rail 553, so that when the game ball B passes through the step portion, the impact causes foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the surface of the game ball B to be peeled off and dropped to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, and the dropped foreign matter such as metal powder and dust is collected in the first bend portion 553da and dropped from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the first bend portion 553da. That is, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are formed so that when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 into the tank rail 553, it always passes through the tank interior step 552m and the tank rail interior step 553m, and foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the game ball B is peeled off and dropped from the cutout 553aa formed in the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, thereby actively removing the metal powder and dust from the tank rail 553. This prevents the metal powder and dust from entering the ball guide unit 570 provided downstream of the tank rail 553, and prevents interference with game operation.

In addition, in the above example, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 into the tank rail 553 is configured to fall over two steps, the step part 552m inside the tank and the step part 553m inside the tank rail, so that foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the game ball B can be removed with a high degree of accuracy.

In the above example, the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are each configured to have a step portion, but multiple step portions may be provided on only one of the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553, or only one step portion may be provided on only one of the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 may also be made of an electrically conductive material such as a synthetic resin having electrical conductivity and electrically connected to the frame earth substrate 559 so that electromagnetic noise that has entered the tank rail 553 can be guided to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall and removed. By configuring it in this way, the effect of peeling off metal powder, dust, etc. attached to the game ball B described above can be enhanced. That is, the game ball B flows into the tank rail 553, and the static electricity is removed, weakening the attraction of metal powder, dust, etc., and in this state, it passes through the step portion 553m inside the tank rail, so that the metal powder, dust, etc. attached to the surface of the game ball B are easily peeled off due to the impact when passing through the step portion 553m inside the tank rail. This increases the probability that metal powder, dust, etc. will peel off from the game ball B and can be dropped outside the tank rail 553 from the cutout portion 553aa, suppressing the entry of metal powder, dust, etc. into the induction passage 570a and preventing interference with game operation. In addition, since the static electricity of the game ball B that is in contact with the tank rail 553 can be removed, it is possible to prevent metal powder that has fallen off the surface of the game ball B from re-adhering to the game ball B.

In addition, in this example, by constructing the tank rail 553 from an electrical conductor such as an opaque synthetic resin having electrical conductivity, when the game board 5, which is detachably attached from the front side to the main body frame 4, is removed and the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) is checked from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board attachment portion 301, it is possible to clearly see the presence of the metal powder and dust, making it easier to check the presence of the metal powder and dust.

In addition, metal powder, dust, etc. that falls from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the first bend portion 553da to the outside of the tank rail 553 can be attached and retained on the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) and the upper surface of the rear cover 640, which are made of an insulator (transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin), so that metal powder of game ball B can be prevented from falling toward the cover body 1501 and base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of game ball B can be prevented from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and thus the occurrence of electrical trouble caused by metal powder of game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

The guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 may be molded from a transparent material (such as polycarbonate resin), in which case it is possible to check metal powder, dust, etc. that has entered the guide passage 570a without being discharged from the cutout portion 553d of the tank rail 553. Metal powder, dust, etc. that has entered the guide passage 570a can be checked from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 through the payout base 551 molded from a transparent synthetic resin with the game board 5, which is detachably attached from the front side to the main body frame 4, removed, or from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-9. Suppression of metal powder movement when gaming machine is tilted]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the movement of metal powder is suppressed when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted. The following description will be given with reference to Figures 35, 42 to 45, and 59. Figure 59(A) is a front view of the inside of the second rail cover 555, and Figure 59(B) is a perspective view showing the inside of the second rail cover 555 in a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side on which the ball guiding unit 570 is provided faces downward.

As shown in Figure 35, in this example of the pachinko machine 1, the tank rail 553 is connected to the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 at its most downstream portion (the lower right end portion in Figure 35), and game balls passing through the tank rail 553 are guided to the ball guide unit 570.

The tank rail 553 also has a groove shape that opens upward, and forms a flow path that slopes downward to the right as shown in the figure toward the most downstream part, and near the most downstream part, the flow path changes from left-right to up-down.

The second rail cover 555 provided at the upper end of the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 has a curved inner wall on the downstream side (lower right side in the figure), and is arranged so that the inner wall on the downstream side of the second rail cover 555 and the inner wall on the downstream side (right end in the figure) of the tank rail 553 are continuous, forming the wall part on the downstream side (right end in the figure) of the tank rail 553. In other words, the curved upstream part of the second rail cover 555 serves as the ceiling of the tank rail 553, and the curved downstream part serves as the side wall of the vertical passage which is the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553.

As described above, the second rail cover 555 is detachable from the tank rail 553. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, the second rail cover 555 is formed with a locking portion 555a having a locking hole facing the side wall portion of the second rail cover 555, and the outside of the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 is formed with locking projections 553c corresponding to the locking portions 555a of the second rail cover 555. Then, as shown in FIG. 44, the second rail cover 555 is placed over the tank rail 553 from above so that the tank rail 553 is inserted between the side wall portions of the second rail cover 555, and the locking projections 553c of the tank rail 553 are pressed into the locking holes formed in the locking portions 555a of the second rail cover 555, thereby locking the second rail cover 555 to the tank rail 553.

When the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 are in an engaged state, if a load of a predetermined value or more acts on the side wall of the second rail cover 555 in a direction away from the groove of the tank rail 553, the side wall of the second rail cover 555 deforms and the engaged state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 is released. Note that the above-mentioned manner of engaging the second rail cover 555 with the tank rail 553 is one example, and is not limited to this as long as the second rail cover 555 can be detachably attached to the tank rail 553. For example, the second rail cover 555 may be screwed to the tank rail 553.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side where the ball guiding unit 570 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35) is facing downward, the second rail cover 555 forms a wall portion on an extension of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side where the ball guiding unit 570 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35) is facing downward, foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that has accumulated on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 moves inside the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream portion and abuts against the inner wall side of the second rail cover 555 provided at the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a removable second rail cover 555 is provided at the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 to form the wall part of the tank rail 553, and by tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the side part (the right side in FIG. 35) where the ball guiding unit 570 is provided is downward, metal powder, dust, etc. that has accumulated on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 are received by the second rail cover 555. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side part (the right side in FIG. 35) where the ball guiding unit 570 is provided is downward, metal powder and dust that move from the ball tank 552 or tank rail 553 toward the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 can be received by the second rail cover 555, and can be prevented from entering the guidance passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570.

In addition, a recess 555c is formed on the inner wall of the second rail cover 555. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(A), a bottomed recess 555c is formed in the portion that serves as the side wall of the vertical passage at the end (right end in the figure) of the second rail cover 555 and in the portion that serves as the ceiling of the tank rail 553. Then, when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side portion (right side portion in FIG. 35) where the ball guide unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided is downward, the portion that serves as the side wall of the vertical passage of the second rail cover 555 becomes the lower surface as shown in FIG. 59, and foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that has moved inside the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream portion enters the recess 555c formed on the inner wall of the portion that serves as the side wall of the vertical passage of the second rail cover 555. That is, by tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the side where the ball guiding unit 570 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35) is facing downward, foreign matter such as metal powder and dust moving toward the downstream side inside the tank rail 553 is received and retained in the recess 555c formed in the part that serves as the side wall of the vertical passage of the second rail cover 555. This makes it possible to prevent metal powder and dust moving from inside the ball tank 552 or tank rail 553 toward the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 from entering the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570.

In this example, a bottomed recess 555c is formed in the second rail cover 555, but a through hole can also have the same effect. That is, through holes can be formed in the part that serves as the side wall of the vertical passage at the end (right end in the figure) of the second rail cover 555 and the part that serves as the ceiling of the tank rail 553, and when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side (right side in FIG. 35) where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided is downward, foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that has moved inside the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream part can be released to the outside of the tank rail 553 from the through hole formed in the inner wall of the second rail cover 555, thereby preventing metal powder and dust moving from the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 from entering the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570.

In addition, since the second rail cover 555 is detachably attached to the tank rail 553, the second rail cover 555 can be released from the engagement between the tank rail 553 and the second rail cover 555 by tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the side on which the ball guiding unit 570 is attached (the right side in FIG. 35) is facing downward, and the second rail cover 555 can be removed. This makes it possible to remove metal powder and dust that has been received by the second rail cover 555 and that has adhered to the second rail cover 555 from inside the tank rail 553, and prevents the metal powder and dust received by the second rail cover 555 from entering the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 when the pachinko machine 1 is normally erected.

The second rail cover 555 can be reused by disposing of the metal powder and dust adhering thereto and cleaning it. In this way, the metal powder, dust, and the like inside the tank rail 553 can be easily removed from inside the tank rail 553 by removing the second rail cover 555.

In other words, when removing the pachinko machine 1 from the island equipment of the amusement parlor, the second rail cover 555 is released from the engagement with the tank rail 553, the second rail cover 555 is removed, and the wall portion at the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 is missing. The pachinko machine 1 is then tilted so that this wall portion (the side portion on which the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side portion in FIG. 35)) faces downward, and metal powder and dust moving from the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 toward the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 can be released from the missing portion of the wall portion of the second rail cover 555.

When the pachinko machine 1 is removed from the island equipment of the amusement parlor and moved, the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the wall part of the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 on which the second rail cover 555 is provided (the side part on which the ball guide unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side part in FIG. 35)) faces downward, whereby the second rail cover 555 can receive metal powder and dust moving from the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 toward the most downstream part of the tank rail 553. In this state, the engagement between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 is released and the second rail cover 555 is removed, whereby the metal powder and dust received by the second rail cover 555 and adhering to the second rail cover 555 can be removed from inside the tank rail 553.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the second rail cover 555 is released from the engaged state with the tank rail 553, and the second rail cover 555 is removed, and the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side of the pachinko machine 1 on which the ball guiding unit 570 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35)) faces downward, allowing metal powder, dust, and the like that has moved inside the tank rail 553 to be easily removed from inside the tank rail 553. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is normally erected, the metal powder and dust received by the second rail cover 555 can be prevented from entering the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570.

In the above example, the second rail cover 555 is provided so that the inner wall on the downstream side of the second rail cover 555 and the inner wall on the downstream side of the tank rail are continuous, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a step may be provided between the inner wall on the downstream side of the second rail cover 555 and the inner wall on the downstream side of the tank rail 553. In particular, if a step is provided such that the inner wall of the second rail cover 555 is located outside the inner wall of the tank rail 553, when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the wall part of the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 on which the second rail cover 555 is provided (the side part on which the ball guide unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side part in FIG. 35)) is downward, the inner wall of the second rail cover 555 will be in contact with the tank rail 553. Because it is recessed downward compared to the inner wall of the rail 553, the metal powder and dust moving from inside the spherical tank 552 and tank rail 553 toward the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 can be received and retained by the inner wall of the second rail cover 555, and by releasing the engagement between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 and removing the second rail cover 555, the metal powder and dust received by the second rail cover 555 and adhering to the second rail cover 555 can be removed from inside the tank rail 553.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the wall portion of the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 on which the second rail cover 555 is provided (the side portion (the right side portion in FIG. 35) on which the ball guide unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided) faces downward, various boards, connectors, etc. are not positioned below the second rail cover 555. Specifically, in FIG. 35, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an external terminal plate 558 is provided above the tank rail 553 and the second rail cover 555 at a predetermined distance, and a payout control board box 632 that houses a payout control board 633, an interface board 635, etc. are provided below the tank rail 553 and the second rail cover 555 at a predetermined distance.

In this way, when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the wall part of the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 on which the second rail cover 555 is provided (the side part on which the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side part in FIG. 35)) faces downward, various boards, connectors, etc. are not positioned below the second rail cover 555. In this way, the engagement between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 is released, and the second rail cover 555 is removed, and the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the wall part of the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 (the side part on which the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side part in FIG. 35)) faces downward. When the second rail cover 555 is released from the engagement between the tank rail 553 and the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 and the second rail cover 555 is removed while the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the wall part of the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 (the side part where the ball guide unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side part in FIG. 35)) is downward, the metal powder and dust moving from the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 are prevented from falling toward and adhering to various boards and connectors, and electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by metal powder can be avoided. In particular, when metal powder and dust fall toward the interface board 635 that is not housed in the board case, the metal powder and dust adhere to the interface board 635, which is likely to cause electrical trouble (short circuit), so the above configuration is effective in avoiding electrical trouble (short circuit).

[4-10. Positional relationship between the cutouts of the tank rail and various boards]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a plurality of cutouts 553aa are formed on the underside of the tank rail 553 (the underside of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front) so that foreign matter such as metal powder generated by wear of the game balls B can be removed from the tank rail 553, and further, for some of the multiple boards arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the board installation mode on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is uniquely configured so that the back side of the game board 5 is less susceptible to the influence of foreign matter such as metal powder that falls from the tank rail 553. The following will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the pachinko machine 1 of this example is viewed from the back side, the tank rail 553 is located on the upper right side of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (upper right side of the back side of the main body frame 4). The underside of this tank rail 553 (the underside of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front) has multiple cutouts 553aa formed therein, which are configured to remove foreign matter such as metal powder generated by wear of the game balls B from the tank rail 553, allowing the game balls B to flow smoothly down the tank rail 553.

60 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 of this example from the back side, in which an imaginary line is drawn in the vertical direction to the left of the leftmost cutout 553aa among the cutouts 553aa provided in the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front from the back side, and the imaginary line divides the back side of the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction, with the area to the right of the imaginary line as area A and the area to the left of the imaginary line as area B. In this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front from the back side, there is a tank rail 553 with a cutout 553aa above area A, so area A is an area susceptible to foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the cutout 553aa of the tank rail 553 (area with high possibility of foreign object falling). In contrast, above region B, there is no tank rail 553 with the notch 553aa, and only the ball tank 552 without the notch 553aa, so region B is less susceptible to foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 than region A (region with low possibility of foreign object falling). In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the opening and closing axis of the main body frame 4 (the upper hinge part 510 of the main body frame and the lower hinge part 520 of the main body frame) is provided at the right end of region A. As a result, region B, which is farther from the opening and closing axis of the main body frame 4 than region A (region B closer to the open end side than region A), is easier to access from the outside than region A when the main body frame 4 is in the open state. In addition, region A, which is closer to the opening and closing axis of the main body frame 4 than region B (region A farther from the open end side than region B), is harder to access from the outside than region B when the main body frame 4 is in the open state.

In each of areas A and B, a plurality of boards are arranged on the back side of the game board 5 (behind the game panel 1100) in such a manner that the mounting surface of the electronic components can be seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Of these, the panel relay board 1700A is arranged in area A, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are arranged in area B. As will be described in detail later, the panel relay board 1700A is mounted in such a way that each of the connectors is exposed to the outside, and therefore it is necessary to provide it in area B, which is less susceptible to the influence of foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. The panel relay board 1700A mainly electrically connects the peripheral control board 1510 to various sensor bodies and movable bodies (such as various sensors, drive motors, and speakers provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and is connected to each component by wiring (such as a harness), but by being provided in the area B which is easily accessible from the outside, there is an advantage that the wiring can be easily connected and disconnected. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are provided in the area A which is easily affected by foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, with the panel relay board 1700A being provided in the area B as a priority. However, although area A is susceptible to foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout 553aa of the tank rail 553, it is an area that is difficult to access from the outside. Therefore, by locating the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in area A, it is possible to prevent tampering with these boards.

First, on the back side of the game board 5 (behind the game panel 1100), the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are arranged in order from the top so that the mounting surface of the electronic components can be seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Then, these boards arranged in area A are each stored in a board box (a box-shaped box consisting of a box body and a cover body molded from a non-conductive resin that constitutes the board box). Therefore, while maintaining the difficulty of access from the outside, in area A, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is prevented from directly adhering to boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 by the board box, thereby reducing the risk of failure of the board, which is important for controlling the game. Although multiple tiny ventilation holes are formed in each of the board boxes that house the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, these ventilation holes are not provided on the top surface of the board box when each board box is attached to the pachinko machine 1, and this also prevents foreign matter such as metal powder from entering through the ventilation holes.

In addition, in area A, of the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the back side of the game board 5 (behind the game panel 1100), the main control board 1310 is provided at a position farthest from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. In addition, between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 having the peripheral control board 1510 and the drive board unit 1700 having the panel drive board 1720 are provided. For this reason, foreign matter such as metal powder that falls from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is less likely to adhere to the main control board 1310 than other boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, and the risk of failure of the main control board 1310, which is the most important for controlling the game, can be reduced.

In addition, the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 described above are arranged so that not only are they located in area A but also a part of them is located in area B, taking into consideration the ease of checking from the outside. However, even if the board is provided across area A and area B in this way, it is desirable to increase safety by arranging the electronic components of higher importance (such as the main control MPU and the peripheral control MPU) among the electronic components mounted on the board in area B. Also, as long as even a part of the board is located in area A, it is preferable to store the entire board in a board box to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 from adhering to the board. In this embodiment, the main control board 1310 is checked more frequently than boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, so the area spanning from area A to area B is larger than that of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is disposed across area A and area B, but the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 is disposed in area A, which is difficult to access from the outside when the main body frame 4 is in the open state, in order to make unauthorized setting changes difficult. However, as described above, area A is more susceptible to the influence of foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 than area B. Therefore, in this embodiment, in addition to housing the main control board 1310 in a board box, it is preferable to dispose the setting key cylinder on the main control board 1310 so that the setting key cylinder in area A is located in a position that avoids being directly below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. Specifically, in this embodiment, the tank rail 553 has multiple cutouts 553aa spaced apart at a predetermined interval in the left-right direction, and it is preferable that the distance between the cutouts 553aa is greater than the diameter of the setting key cylinder, and that the setting key cylinder is disposed on the main control board 1310 so that the setting key cylinder is located directly below a portion of the tank rail 553 where no cutouts 553aa are provided. This makes it difficult to commit fraud against the setting key cylinder, while also avoiding the risk of foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutouts 553aa of the tank rail 553 into the setting key cylinder and causing an abnormality.

In addition, if the setting key is left inserted in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a located in area A due to carelessness by the hall manager, etc., foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen may adhere to the setting key, causing some kind of abnormality. In order to prevent such a risk, in this embodiment, in addition to the arrangement of the setting key cylinder described above, the setting key can be inserted and removed (inserted and removed) from the setting key cylinder only when both sides of the gripping part of the setting key (the part other than the insertion part inserted into the setting key cylinder) face left and right relative to the main control board 1310 (a position parallel to the up and down direction of the pachinko machine 1). As a result, at least when the work related to changing the settings or the work related to checking the settings is completed, both sides of the gripping part of the setting key face left and right, and even if the setting key is left inserted in the setting key cylinder due to carelessness by the hall manager, etc., the possibility of falling foreign matter such as metal powder accumulating on the setting key can be reduced.

In area B, on the back side of the game board 5 (behind the game panel 1100), the panel relay board 1710A is provided so that the mounting surface of the electronic components can be seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. The panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment does not have a CPU like the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, and mainly serves to electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 to various sensor bodies and movable bodies (for example, various sensors, drive motors, speakers, etc. provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. By consolidating the electrical connections of the performances on this panel relay board 1710A, productivity during the manufacture of the game machine is improved, and when any abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, it is easy to identify the cause part and electrically disconnect it, and the convenience of the pachinko machine 1 in terms of manufacture and inspection is improved. In addition, since panel relay board 1710A is connected to each component by wiring (harness, etc.), multiple connectors, which are connection terminals for connecting these wiring, are mounted corresponding to the number of wirings to be connected to each board. Each of these connectors is preferably mounted in a form exposed to the outside, taking into account the convenience mentioned above, and for this reason, panel relay board 1710A is not stored in a box-shaped board box like main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510, and is a board with a higher exposed portion (degree of exposure) to the outside compared to the other boards.

In addition, as described above, the panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment is preferably mounted in a form exposed to the outside in consideration of convenience, and in consideration of the increased cost due to changes in the connection mode (such as changes in the number of connectors mounted) when designing the gaming machine, it is not stored in a box-shaped board box like the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510, and the mounting surface of the electronic components on the back cover 640 is covered. In other words, when the back cover 640 is opened, the mounting surface of the electronic components is configured to be exposed in its entirety to the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Note that, if the increased cost due to changes in the connection mode (such as changes in the number of connectors mounted) when designing the gaming machine is not taken into consideration, the panel relay board 1710A may be covered with a simple cover body with openings for each connector part, and only each connector part may be exposed in consideration of the above-mentioned convenience only.

As described above, compared to area A, area B is less susceptible to the influence of foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. In this embodiment, the panel relay board 1710A is provided in area B. Specifically, boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are positioned across areas A and B, but the panel relay board 1710A in this embodiment is arranged so that its entirety fits within the area B side. In this way, even if the panel relay board 1710A has a higher exposed portion (degree of exposure) to the outside compared to other boards, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 from adhering to the panel relay board 1710A, thereby reducing the risk of failure of the panel relay board 1710A.

As described above, the panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment is arranged so that its entirety fits within the area B side, but the side end of the panel relay board 1710A is arranged as far away from the area A as possible. That is, the panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment is arranged so that its entirety fits reliably within the area B side and is a predetermined distance away from the area A, with the longitudinal sides (long side portions) of the approximately rectangular panel relay board 1710A facing up and down. This ensures that the panel relay board 1710A is a predetermined distance away from the area A, and prevents foreign matter such as metal powder from falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and adhering to the exposed portion of the panel relay board 1710A.

In this embodiment, in order to give priority to removing foreign objects from the tank rail 553, a virtual line is set slightly to the left of approximately the center in the left-right direction on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front from the back surface, and the area of area A is configured to be larger than the area of area B. However, if a virtual line is drawn in the vertical direction to pass to the left of the leftmost cutout portion 553aa of the cutout portions 553aa provided in the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front from the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, the virtual line may be set so that the area of area A is smaller than the area of area B, or the virtual line may be set so that the areas of area A and area B are approximately the same, and areas A and B may be set. Furthermore, if notches that play a role similar to that of notch 553aa are provided not only on tank rail 553 but also on ball tank 522, areas A and B may be set by drawing an imaginary line in the vertical direction that passes to the left of the leftmost notch provided in ball tank 522 when pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front from the back side.

In addition, in this embodiment, the multiple wirings connected to the panel relay board 1710A are arranged to be as close to the area B as possible (so that the bent portions do not enter area A). Specifically, more wiring fixing portions (members such as hooks) for fixing the various wirings connected to the panel relay board 1710A are provided on the area B side of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 than on the area A side, so that as many wirings as possible are arranged to be fixed as close to the area B side as possible. This makes the multiple wirings connected to the panel relay board 1710A less susceptible to the effects of foreign matter such as metal powder that falls from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553.

As described above in detail, the first eaves portion 551da is provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, and the first eaves portion 551da extends to the left of the back side of the game board 5 (the rear side of the game panel 1100) and below the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553. In other words, in area A, the first eaves portion 551da is located between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, whereas in area B, the first eaves portion 551da is located between the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553 and the panel relay board 1710A. In this way, in the area A, the first eaves portion 551da is located between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, so that not only when the rear cover 640 is closed but also when the rear cover 640 is opened, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and attached by the first eaves portion 551da, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be prevented from falling toward the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 located below. As a result, the adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder to the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the area A can be prevented not only by the board box that stores those boards, but also by the first eaves portion 551da.

On the other hand, in area B, the first eaves 551da provided below the cutout 553aa of the tank rail 553 is extended to below the ball tank 552 and is located above the panel relay board 1710A, so that foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the cutout 553aa can be received and attached by the first eaves 551da not only when the rear cover 640 is closed but also when the rear cover 640 is opened, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the cutout 553aa can be prevented from falling toward the panel relay board 1710A located to the lower left. As a result, although the panel relay board 1710A provided in area B is not stored in the board box, the first eaves 551da can prevent the adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder.

In the above, the first embodiment has been described as a configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder, in which the first overhanging portion 551da forms the overhanging portion. However, the configuration may be such that the first overhanging portion 551da and the second overhanging portion 640a are connected to jointly form the overhanging portion, as in the configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder, in the second embodiment, in which the first overhanging portion 551da forms the overhanging portion, as in the configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder, in the third embodiment, in which the first overhanging portion 551da forms the overhanging portion, or in which the second overhanging portion 640a forms the overhanging portion alone, without the first overhanging portion 551da, as in the configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder, in the fourth embodiment. That is, in the region B, the eaves portion provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is extended to below the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553 and is configured to be located above the panel relay board 1710A, and at least when the rear cover 640 is closed, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and attached by the eaves portion, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be prevented from falling toward the panel relay board 1710A located to the lower left. As a result, although the panel relay board 1710A provided in the region B is not stored in the board box, the eaves portion can prevent the adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder.

In the above, the eaves portion of region A provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is configured to extend to below the ball tank 552 in region B, but instead of providing an eaves portion below the ball tank 552 in region B, a movement prevention portion may be provided to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the eaves portion of region A through the cutout portion 553aa from moving to the side of region B. For example, the eaves portion of region A provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be configured to be bent upward at the boundary between region A and region B. Even with this configuration, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the eaves portion of region A through the cutout portion 553aa does not move to the side of region B, and can be prevented from falling toward the panel relay board 1710A located on the side of region B. As a result, although the panel relay board 1710A installed in area B is not stored in the board box, the eaves of area A and the movement prevention part that prevents it from moving to the side of area B can prevent the adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder.

In addition, in this embodiment, on the back side of the gaming board 5 (rear side of the gaming panel 1100), the board color of the mounting surface side of the panel relay board 1710A provided in area B is painted in a color different from the board color of the mounting surface sides of the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 provided in area A. Specifically, the color of the resist and the color of the silk screen applied to the board surface of the panel relay board 1710A are made different from the color of the resist and the color of the silk screen applied to the board surfaces of the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510. As a result, it is possible to easily determine from the outside that the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B is a board that should collect wiring for electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and various sensor bodies and movable bodies (for example, various sensors, drive motors, speakers, etc. provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and that it is located in the area B where foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main induction part 553a through the cutout part 553aa is unlikely to adhere. In addition, since the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the area A are located in the area A where foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main induction part 553a through the cutout part 553aa is likely to adhere, it is preferable to configure them to be painted in a color that makes it easy to determine whether or not foreign matter such as metal powder has adhered, such as a deep color (green or black). However, the panel relay board 1710A provided in area B is also located in area B where foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide section 553a to the outside via the cutout section 553aa is unlikely to adhere, but like the board provided in area A, it may be configured to be painted in a color (such as green or black) that makes it easy to determine whether or not foreign matter such as metal powder has adhered.

As described above, a method for easily identifying the presence of region B, to which foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa is unlikely to adhere, from the outside may be used, not limited to a difference in the board color on the mounting surface side of the board, but may also be used to provide some marking on the part of the back cover 640 that covers region A and the part that covers region B in the closed state, to make it easier to identify the presence of regions A and B from the outside. Specifically, a specific marking B may be provided on the part of the back cover 640 that covers region B, and such specific marking B may not be provided in region A. Examples of specific marking B include, for example, a sticker or print with specific information indicating that it is region B (text information or symbol information such as "high safety" or "relay board side"), or specific information indicating that it is region B (text information or symbol information such as "high safety" or "relay board side") formed and processed on the back cover 640 itself. Separately from this, a specific marking A may be provided on the portion of the back cover 640 that covers the area A, and such specific marking A may not be provided on the area B. In this case, the specific marking A may be, for example, a sticker or print with specific information indicating that it is the area A (text information or symbol information such as "low safety" or "main control board side"), or specific information indicating that it is the area A (text information or symbol information such as "low safety" or "main control board side") may be formed and processed on the back cover 640 itself. Also, specific markings A and B may be provided on the portion of the back cover 640 that covers the area A and the portion that covers the area B, respectively.

The panel relay board 1710A provided in area B on the back side of the game board 5 (rear side of the game panel 1100) is provided directly below the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, but this is not limited thereto, and the panel relay board 1710A may be configured to be provided at a position a predetermined distance away from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the side. In other words, the panel relay board 1710A may be configured to be provided at a position a predetermined distance away from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 in addition to being in area B away from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. In such a case, the panel relay board 1710A is positioned a predetermined distance away from the cutout 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, which prevents foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout 553aa of the tank rail 553 from adhering to the panel relay board 1710A, thereby reducing the risk of failure of the panel relay board 1710A.

In addition, when the panel relay board 1710A is located at a predetermined distance from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the side, the panel relay board 1710A may be located in area B so that the ball tank 522 itself, which does not have the cutout portion 553aa, is located directly above like a canopy. This prevents foreign objects from adhering to the panel relay board 1710A even if foreign objects fall from above the pachinko machine 1, including island equipment, instead of from the cutout portion 553aa, and reduces the risk of failure of the panel relay board 1710A.

The panel relay board 1710A may be provided in multiple boards instead of one board. When the panel relay board 1710A is provided in multiple boards, all boards may be provided in area B, or they may be arranged in areas A and B. For example, when the panel relay board 1710A is provided in multiple boards, divided into panel relay boards 1710A1 and 1710A2, each with a different board area, the board with a large board area and a high possibility of foreign matter adhesion (e.g., panel relay board 1710A1) may be arranged in the safe area B, and the board with a small board area and a low possibility of foreign matter adhesion (e.g., panel relay board 1710A2) may be arranged in a location on the area A side sufficiently away from the notch 553aa (e.g., the lower right end of the rear side of the game panel 1100, etc.).

[4-11. Positional relationship between the tank rail cutout and the drawer connector]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are electrically connected via a predetermined relay board, but as such a relay board, a drawer connector DCN may be provided that can directly electrically connect the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 without requiring a separate wiring operation, simply by mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4. The following description will be given with reference to Figures 60 to 62.

As shown in FIG. 61, when the main frame 4 is viewed from the front, a main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is provided on the lower right side of the front surface of the main frame 4 (lower left side when the main frame 4 is viewed from the back side) so that each terminal faces the front side of the main frame 4. Also, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, a game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 is provided on the lower right side of the rear surface of the game board 5 (lower left side when the game board 5 is viewed from the back side) so that each terminal faces the back side of the game board 5. Then, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 is guided to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4, and each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 and each terminal of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 are electrically connected.

Two sets of drawer connectors are provided, each consisting of a main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and a game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2. With one of the drawer connectors DCN, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 is connected to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4, forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals from the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4. With the other drawer connector DCN, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 is connected to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4, forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals and detection signals from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and the various decorative boards, various sensors, and various speakers provided on the door frame 3.

60, the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are not stored in a board box like the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and are provided in area B, which is the area on the side where the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553 is provided, like the panel relay board 1710A described above. In other words, the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are provided in area B, which is less susceptible to the influence of foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, rather than in area A, which is susceptible to the influence of foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. More specifically, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are provided in a position within the main body frame 4, in region B which is farthest from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. In this way, by providing the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 in area B instead of area A, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is prevented from adhering to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, reducing the risk of failure of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5.

In particular, as shown in Figure 62 (A), when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the game board attachment portion 301, which is the portion of the main body frame 4 where the game board 5 should be attached, is open, and no member is provided between the tank rail 553 and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4. In addition, when removing the game board 5 from the main body frame 4, foreign matter such as metal powder that has accumulated in the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is likely to fall out due to the impact of the removal. In this regard, by providing the main body frame 4's main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 in area B rather than area A, although each terminal is exposed when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout 553aa of the tank rail 553 is prevented from adhering to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, thereby reducing the risk of failure of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4.

As shown in Figure 62 (B), when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, the performance display device 1600, peripheral control unit 1500, drive board unit 1700, and main control unit 1300 provided on the game board 5 are provided directly below the tank rail 553, while the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are provided at a position a predetermined distance P1 away from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the front of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided on the lower rear side of the tank rail 553 in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are not only in area B away from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, but are also provided at a position a predetermined distance P1 away from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are positioned to be a predetermined distance P1 away from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. This prevents foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 from adhering to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached, thereby reducing the risk of failure of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5.

In this example, the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are provided at a position a predetermined distance P1 away from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the front of the pachinko machine 1, but they may also be configured to be provided at a position a predetermined distance P1' away from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the rear instead of the front (for example, a position where the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are not present directly above the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2). Even with this configuration, the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are positioned a predetermined distance P1' away from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, thereby achieving the same effect as described above. Furthermore, when the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are located at a position a predetermined distance P1' away from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the ball tank 552 will no longer be directly above the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2, which prevents not only foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, but also game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 and fall from hitting the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type), thereby further reducing the risk of failure of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5. Furthermore, in consideration of the new risks (such as foreign objects falling from the outside) that arise when neither the ball tank 552 nor the tank rail 553 are located directly above the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 nor the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2, it is preferable to provide a means (such as a back cover 640) separate from the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 to cover the area directly above the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 to prevent foreign objects from falling from the outside.

Furthermore, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 is arranged in a box-shaped main body having a rectangular opening, with the opening facing the front side of the main body frame 4, but more specifically, the opening of the box-shaped main body faces slightly to the left when the main body frame 4 is viewed from the back side. In other words, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 is arranged in area B such that the opening of the box-shaped main body does not face area A, but faces the opposite side to area A. In this way, the opening of the box-shaped body of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 is provided so that it does not face area A, which is susceptible to foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. This makes it difficult for foreign objects such as metal powder that fall from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 to enter through the opening of the box-shaped body of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached, thereby reducing the risk of failure of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4.

Furthermore, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 is arranged so that the box-shaped main body having a rectangular opening has a vertically elongated shape (the vertical direction is the long direction). In other words, in region B, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 can reduce the area of the top surface of the box-shaped main body by having a vertically elongated shape (the vertical direction is the long direction) compared to when the box-shaped main body has a horizontally elongated shape (the left-right direction is the long direction). In this way, the main body frame 4's main body side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is provided so that the top surface of the box-shaped main body, which is susceptible to foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout 553aa of the tank rail 553, is reduced. This makes it difficult for foreign matter such as metal powder that falls from the cutout 553aa of the tank rail 553 to adhere to the main body frame 4's main body side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached, thereby reducing the risk of failure of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4.

In addition, in area B, the first eaves portion 551da provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 extends below the ball tank 552 and is located above the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5. This means that not only when the rear cover 640 is closed but also when the rear cover 640 is opened, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa can be received and attached by the first eaves portion 551da, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa can be prevented from falling toward the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, which are located to the lower left. In addition, since the first eaves portion 551da is provided on the main frame 4, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and attached by the first eaves portion 551da not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be prevented from falling toward the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 located to the lower left. As a result, the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 provided in area B can be prevented from adhering to foreign matter such as metal powder, even though they are not stored in the board box.

In the above, the first embodiment has been described as a configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder, in which the first overhanging portion 551da forms the overhanging portion. However, the configuration may be such that the first overhanging portion 551da and the second overhanging portion 640a are connected to jointly form the overhanging portion, as in the configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder, in the second embodiment, in which the first overhanging portion 551da forms the overhanging portion, as in the configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder, in the third embodiment, in which the first overhanging portion 551da forms the overhanging portion, or in which the second overhanging portion 640a forms the overhanging portion alone, without the first overhanging portion 551da, as in the configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder, in the fourth embodiment. That is, in area B, the eaves portion provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is extended to below the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553, and is configured to be located above the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, so that at least when the rear cover 640 is closed, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa can be received and adhered to the eaves portion, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa can be prevented from falling toward the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, which are located below and to the left. As a result, the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, which are provided in area B, are not stored in the circuit board box, but the eaves prevent the adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder.

In the above, the eaves portion of region A provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is configured to extend to below the spherical tank 552 in region B, but instead of providing an eaves portion below the spherical tank 552 in region B, a movement prevention portion may be provided to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the eaves portion of region A via the cutout portion 553aa from moving toward region B. For example, the eaves portion of region A provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be configured to bend upward at the boundary between region A and region B. Even with this configuration, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide section 553a to the eaves section of area A through the cutout section 553aa does not move to the side of area B, and can be prevented from falling toward the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 located on the side of area B. As a result, although the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 provided in area B are not stored in the board box, the movement prevention section that prevents them from moving to the eaves section of area A and area B can prevent the adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder.

When the game board 5 is not attached to the main frame 4, the game board attachment portion 301, which is the portion of the main frame 4 where the game board 5 should be attached, is open, and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main frame 4 becomes visible, but a specified area around the installation of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is painted black. This makes it possible to clearly see whether or not there is any foreign matter such as metal powder adhering to the installation periphery of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 before the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and by removing any foreign matter such as metal powder adhering to the installation periphery, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from adhering to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and to reduce the risk of failure of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1.

The main frame 4 is provided with a game board placement section 501c on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower edge of the game board insertion opening 501b. The main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is located behind the game board placement section 501c, but between the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board placement section 501c, as shown in FIG. 62(A), a protrusion 501z is provided as a step so that the installation position of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is higher than the game board placement section 501c. When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the lower surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is attached so as to move from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the game board placement section 501c. Therefore, if there is a foreign object such as metal powder on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the foreign object will be pushed from the front to the rear on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, but the pushed-out foreign object can be prevented from moving toward the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 located behind the game board mounting portion 501c. As a result, although the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is located behind the game board mounting portion 501c, the difference in level with the game board mounting portion 501c can prevent foreign objects from adhering to it.

[4-12. Positional relationship between the cutout part of the tank rail and the external terminal board]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an external terminal board 558 that is electrically connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side is provided above the tank rail 553, but the position at which the external terminal board 558 is provided may be below the tank rail 553. The following description will be given with reference to Figures 63 and 64.

As shown in FIG. 63, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, an external terminal board 558 is provided below the tank rail 553 with each terminal facing the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side by connecting it to wiring from the gaming hall side. The hall computer monitors the player's play by obtaining the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc.

In addition, the external terminal board 558 is provided in area A, which is the area on the side where the tank rail 553 is provided, similar to the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. In other words, the external terminal board 558 is provided in area A which is susceptible to the influence of foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, rather than area B which is less susceptible to the influence of foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. Additionally, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 provided in area A, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are each stored in a board box, whereas the external terminal board 558 is not stored in the board box because it needs to be connected to wiring from the gaming hall, and the wiring connection terminal is exposed.

In this regard, in area A, on the back side of the game board 5 (behind the game panel 1100), from top to bottom, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the external terminal board 558, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are provided. In other words, the peripheral control unit 1500 having the peripheral control board 1510 is provided between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558. The external terminal board 558 is formed so that its width is smaller than the board box that stores the peripheral control board 1510, and is provided below the peripheral control unit 1500 so as not to protrude in the left-right direction from the width of the board box that stores the peripheral control board 1510. In this way, for boards such as external terminal board 558 that require wiring connection work and are difficult to store in a board box, the wiring connection terminals are exposed, but by providing them directly below peripheral control unit 1500 that has peripheral control board 1510, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from cutout portion 553aa of tank rail 553 is prevented from adhering to external terminal board 558, thereby reducing the risk of failure of external terminal board 558.

As described above, the peripheral control unit 1500 having the peripheral control board 1510 is provided between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558, so the peripheral control board 1510 is located closer to the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 than the external terminal board 558. For this reason, for example, if foreign matter such as metal powder continues to fall from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, the foreign matter such as metal powder is more likely to adhere to the peripheral control board 1510 than to the external terminal board 558, and there is a high possibility that an electrical problem will occur in the peripheral control board 1510 before an electrical problem occurs in the external terminal board 558.

The board provided between the cutout 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558 may be a board other than the peripheral control board 1510, as long as it is other than the main control board 1310 that affects the progress of the game itself. For example, a dummy movable body that performs a predetermined operation when a predetermined condition is met (for example, a certain amount of time has passed) may be provided in the door frame 3, and a dummy board that relays the application of a driving force to the dummy movable body between the peripheral control board 1510 may be provided between the cutout 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558, so that the possibility of an electrical trouble occurring in the dummy board is high before an electrical trouble occurs in the external terminal board 558. When an electrical trouble occurs in such a dummy board, the dummy movable body stops moving, and it is possible to transmit to the outside that there is a high possibility that an electrical trouble will occur in the external terminal board 558 after that. Furthermore, the substrate provided between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558 is not limited to one substrate, but may be multiple substrates.

Here, the external terminal board 558 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side, and the hall computer monitors the player's play by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. However, if an electrical problem occurs on the external terminal board 558, the hall computer will be unable to monitor the player's play, and even if a fraudulent act is committed against the pachinko machine 1, a problem occurs in which the hall manager at the gaming hall cannot grasp it. It is feared that a fraudster may exploit this characteristic by, for example, applying impact to the pachinko machine 1, intentionally dropping a foreign object such as metal powder from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, causing an electrical problem on the external terminal board 558 and preventing the hall computer from monitoring the game, and then committing some kind of fraud. On the other hand, since the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the performance display device 1600, etc., if an electrical trouble occurs in the peripheral control board 1510, a malfunction occurs in which various performances such as light emission performances, sound performances, and moving performances by various decorative boards, and display performances by the performance display device 1600 cannot be executed, even though the game can proceed on the main control board 1310. In this regard, for example, if foreign matter such as metal powder continues to fall from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, first, an electrical trouble is caused in the peripheral control board 1510, and various performances by the peripheral control board 1510 are not executed, so that the outside is notified that a malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 1. In other words, during the period when an electrical trouble occurs in the peripheral control board 1510, various performances by the peripheral control board 1510 are not executed, making it difficult to commit fraud against the pachinko machine 1. In this way, when an electrical problem occurs, first an electrical problem occurs in the peripheral control board 1510, thereby preventing an electrical problem from occurring in the external terminal board 558, while also preventing a situation in which fraudulent activity is committed against the pachinko machine 1 during the period in which an electrical problem occurs in the external terminal board 558.

The external terminal board 558 is provided in the area A on the side where the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. As described above in detail, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front from the back side, the opening and closing axis of the main body frame 4 (the upper hinge portion 510 of the main body frame and the lower hinge portion 520 of the main body frame) is provided at the right end of the area A. In other words, the area A closer to the opening and closing axis of the main body frame 4 than the area B (area A farther from the open end side than the area B) is an area that is more difficult to access from the outside than the area B when the main body frame 4 is in the open state. In this regard, the external terminal board 558 is provided in the area A that is difficult to access from the outside, making it difficult for a fraudulent person to access the external terminal board 558. This allows a fraudulent person to monitor the game using the hall computer and prevents any fraudulent behavior from being performed. The external terminal board 558 is connected to wiring provided in the island equipment to electrically connect to the hall computer, but when the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the wiring provided in the island equipment hangs down from above toward area A on the side where the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided, and the external terminal board 558 is provided in area A to allow for connection with such wiring.

64, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, the performance display device 1600, peripheral control unit 1500, drive board unit 1700, and main control unit 1300 provided on the game board 5 are provided on the underside of the tank rail 553, while the external terminal board 558 provided on the game board 5 is provided at a position spaced apart by a predetermined distance P2 from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1. The cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided on the lower rear side of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, the external terminal board 558 is provided in area A on the side where the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, but is provided at a position spaced apart by a predetermined distance P2 from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, the external terminal board 558 is positioned a predetermined distance P2 away from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, which prevents foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 from adhering to the external terminal board 558, thereby reducing the risk of failure of the external terminal board 558.

In addition, a terminal cover 551k with a horizontally extending upper surface is provided on the upper side of the external terminal board 558 provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the upper side of the external terminal board 558. Since this terminal cover 551k is located on the upper side of the external terminal board 558, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main induction part 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and attached to the terminal cover 551k not only when the rear cover 640 is closed but also when the rear cover 640 is opened, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main induction part 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be prevented from falling toward the terminal cover 551k located below it. As a result, although the terminal cover 551k is provided in the area A that is susceptible to metal powder and other foreign matter falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 when not stored in the board box, the terminal cover 551k can prevent the adhesion of metal powder and other foreign matter. The terminal cover 551k may be provided integrally with the external terminal board 558, or may be provided on the board holder 1200 to which the external terminal board 558 is attached.

In this example, the external terminal board 558 is provided below the tank rail 553, below the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. However, the position where the external terminal board 558 is provided may be configured to provide a board with exposed wiring connection terminals, such as the panel relay board 1710A described above, that is, a board that requires wiring connection work and is difficult to store in a board box. In such a case, the same effect as when the external terminal board 558 is provided can be achieved.

In addition, in region A, the first eaves portion 551da provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is located above the external terminal board 558. In other words, in region A, the first eaves portion 551da is located between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558. In this way, in the region A, the first eaves portion 551da is located between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, so that not only when the rear cover 640 is closed but also when the rear cover 640 is opened, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and attached to the first eaves portion 551da, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be prevented from falling toward the external terminal board 558 located below. As a result, although the external terminal board 558 is provided in the region A that is susceptible to the influence of foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 when not stored in the board box, the first eaves portion 551da can prevent the adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder.

In the above, the first embodiment has been described as a configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder, in which the first overhanging portion 551da forms the overhanging portion. However, the configuration may be such that the first overhanging portion 551da and the second overhanging portion 640a are connected to jointly form the overhanging portion, as in the configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder, in the second embodiment, in which the first overhanging portion 551da forms the overhanging portion, as in the configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder, in the third embodiment, in which the first overhanging portion 551da forms the overhanging portion, or in which the second overhanging portion 640a forms the overhanging portion alone, without the first overhanging portion 551da, as in the configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder, in the fourth embodiment. That is, in the region A, the eaves portion provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be configured to be positioned above the external terminal board 558, and at least when the rear cover 640 is closed, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and attached to the eaves portion, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be prevented from falling toward the external terminal board 558 located below. As a result, although the external terminal board 558 is provided in the region A that is susceptible to foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 when not stored in the board box, the eaves portion can prevent the adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder.

[4-13. Suppression of metal powder movement when game board is installed]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a protrusion 501z may be provided in front of the discharged ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the base unit 620 of the main body frame 4, so that the movement of foreign matter such as metal powder may be suppressed when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. The following description will be given with reference to Figs. 65 and 66.

As shown in Figure 65, the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 in the main frame 4 comprises a base main body 501a which is formed into a vertically extending rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a game board insertion opening 501b which penetrates the base main body 501a from a position slightly below the upper end to a height of approximately 3/4 of the total height in the front-to-rear direction and through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front, a game board mounting portion 501c which forms the lower edge of the game board insertion opening 501b and on which the game board 5 is placed, and a game board regulation portion 501d which protrudes upward from the left-to-right center of the game board mounting portion 501c and regulates the left-to-right and rearward movement of the lower end of the game board 5. In addition, a cutout portion is formed on the game board 5 side (game panel 1100) in a shape that corresponds to the game board restriction portion 501d. When the game board 5 is inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b in the correct position, there is no restriction by the game board restriction portion 501d. However, when the game board 5 is inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b in an incorrect position (a position shifted to the left or right), it interferes with the game board restriction portion 501d and prevents the game board 5 from being inserted.

The base unit 620b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is provided with a discharged ball receiving section 628 capable of discharging game balls B to the outside. As shown in FIG. 66(B), when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the discharged ball receiving section 628 is located directly below the discharge section 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 of the game board 5. This allows the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1008, and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 to be received, and can be discharged to the outside from the discharge section 1201 formed on the bottom surface via the discharged ball receiving section 628 below.

Also, as shown in Figures 65 and 66 (A), in the main frame 4, the discharged ball receiving portion 628 is located behind the game board mounting portion 501c, but between the discharged ball receiving portion 628 and the game board mounting portion 501c, a flat plate-shaped protruding portion 501z protruding upward from the rear end of the game board mounting portion 501c is provided. In other words, the protruding portion 501z is located in front of the discharged ball receiving portion 628 and protrudes to a position higher than the discharged ball receiving portion 628 and the game board mounting portion 501c. As a result, the protruding portion 501z, together with the game board restricting portion 501d, can restrict the rearward movement of the lower end of the game board 5. Also, as shown in Figure 66 (B), when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the lower surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is attached so that it moves from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c. Therefore, if there is foreign matter such as dirt or metal powder on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, such foreign matter will be pushed from the front to the rear on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, but the pushed-out foreign matter can be prevented from moving toward the discharged ball receiving portion 628 located behind the game board mounting portion 501c. As a result, although the discharged ball receiving portion 628 is located behind the game board mounting portion 501c, the protrusion 501z can prevent foreign matter such as dirt and metal powder from entering.

The above-mentioned protrusion 501z extends in the left-right direction by the same length as the longitudinal direction of the game board mounting part 501c while maintaining the same height relative to the rear end of the game board mounting part 501c. The protrusion 501z is also configured to be higher than the height of the game board regulating part 501d. For example, the height of the protrusion 501z may be set to the height of one or more game balls B. In such a case, even if there is a game ball B on the upper surface of the game board mounting part 501c, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the game ball B can be prevented from entering the side of the discharged ball receiving part 628 located behind the game board mounting part 501c (the back side of the pachinko machine 1).

The protrusion 501z is formed of a resin material of a single color such as black or white. This allows the protrusion 501z to be clearly visually checked for foreign matter such as metal powder before the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and if foreign matter such as metal powder is attached, it can be removed from the protrusion 501z to prevent it from entering the discharged ball receiving part 628 located behind the protrusion 501z when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4. The protrusion 501z is also formed of a resin material that is an insulator. This allows foreign matter such as metal powder, which is a conductor, to easily adhere to the protrusion 501z, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, even if such foreign matter is pushed from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the game board mounting part 501c, it will not scatter, and it can be prevented from entering the side of the discharged ball receiving part 628 located behind the game board mounting part 501c (the back side of the pachinko machine 1).

In this example, the protrusion 501z is provided between the discharged ball receiving portion 628 and the game board mounting portion 501c, protruding upward from the rear end of the game board mounting portion 501c and protruding to a position higher than the discharged ball receiving portion 628 and the game board mounting portion 501c, but this is not limited thereto, and any configuration may be used as long as a step that is a predetermined height higher than the game board mounting portion 501c is provided between the discharged ball receiving portion 628 and the game board mounting portion 501c. For example, the discharged ball receiving portion 628 may be provided at a position above the step. This step also prevents foreign matter such as metal powder that is pushed from the front to the rear on the top surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 from moving toward the discharged ball receiving portion 628, which is located behind the game board mounting portion 501c, and prevents foreign matter such as metal powder from entering the discharged ball receiving portion 628.

Although the game board mounting portion 501c is located forward of the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, it is located below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. Therefore, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, there is no blocking member between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the game board mounting portion 501c, as there is in the case of the game board 5, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 may adhere to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c. In this regard, even if foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is not attached to the main frame 4, the protrusion 501z is provided between the discharged ball receiving portion 628 and the game board mounting portion 501c, so that when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the foreign matter such as metal powder adhered to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c is prevented from moving toward the discharged ball receiving portion 628, and the foreign matter such as metal powder can be prevented from entering the discharged ball receiving portion 628.

The outlet sensor 3032 that detects the game ball B collected from the outlet 1008 is provided on the game board 5 side in a passage from the outlet 1008 to the discharge section 1201 of the board holder 1200, but may be provided on the main frame 4 side in a passage from the outlet 1008 to the discharge ball receiving section 628 after the game ball B is discharged from the discharge section 1201 to the outside. In such a case, if a foreign object such as metal powder enters from the discharge ball receiving section 628, the foreign object such as metal powder may adhere to the outlet sensor 3032, and the game balls B collected from the outlet 1008 may not be counted correctly. In addition, the number of game balls B detected by the outlet sensor 3032 is displayed on the base monitor 1310h, but if the outlet sensor 3032 is not operating normally, it is difficult to correctly display the number of game balls B collected from the outlet 1008. In this regard, even if foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is not attached to the main frame 4, the protrusion 501z is provided between the discharged ball receiving portion 628 and the game board mounting portion 501c. This prevents foreign matter such as metal powder adhered to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c from adhering to the outlet sensor 3032 through the discharged ball receiving portion 628 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, thereby preventing electrical problems such as the outlet sensor 3032 miscounting game balls B.

In addition, in the main body frame 4, a power supply unit 620c having a power supply board 630, a payout control unit 620d having a payout control board 633, and an interface unit 620e having an interface board 635 are provided at a position rearward of the game board mounting portion 501c and further rearward of the discharged ball receiving portion 628. In this regard, even if a foreign object such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the protrusion 501z is provided between the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, the interface unit 620e, and the game board mounting portion 501c, so that when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the foreign object such as metal powder adhered to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c can be prevented from moving toward the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e. As a result, although the power supply unit 620c, payout control unit 620d, and interface unit 620e are located behind the game board mounting portion 501c, the protrusion 501z prevents foreign matter such as metal powder pushed out from the game board mounting portion 501c from adhering to the power supply board 620, payout control board 633, and interface board 635, reducing the risk of failure of these boards.

[4-14. Measures against metal powder on power supply boards]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the power supply board 630 is located below the tank rail 553, and a protrusion 630h may be provided to cover the upper side of the power supply board 630, so that foreign matter such as metal powder that falls from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 does not adhere to the power supply board 630. The following description will be given with reference to Figs. 65 and 66.

As described above, the board unit 620 includes a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear right side of the power supply unit 620c when viewed from the front, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear left side of the power supply unit 620c when viewed from the front. The power supply unit 620c also includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 (not shown) of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630.

As shown in Figures 65 and 66 (B), in the main body frame 4, a power supply unit 620c having a power supply board 630, a payout control unit 620d having a payout control board 633, and an interface unit 620e having an inter-interface board 635 are provided below the tank rail 553. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, these units are such that the payout control unit 620d having the payout control board 633 and the interface unit 620e having the inter-interface board 635 are located directly below the tank rail 553, while the power supply unit 620c having the power supply board 630 is located slightly forward of the tank rail 553.

In addition, the base unit 620b attached to the power supply unit 620c is provided with a protruding portion 630h whose upper surface extends horizontally so as to protrude upward from near its rear end and bend backward from a predetermined height to cover the upper side of the power supply unit 620c. This protruding portion 630h is formed so that the rear end of its upper surface is rearward of the rear end of the power supply unit 620c, and the left and right ends of its upper surface are longer than the longitudinal length of the power supply unit 620c. In addition, the protruding portion 630h is formed to a position where the rear end of its upper surface is rearward of the rear end of the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. The cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided on the lower rear side of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, since the upper side of the power supply unit 620c is covered by the protrusion 620h, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main induction section 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa can be received and attached to the upper surface of the protrusion 630h not only when the rear cover 640 is closed but also when the rear cover 640 is opened, and it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main induction section 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa from falling toward the power supply unit 620c located below the upper surface of the protrusion 630h. Note that the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply unit 620c is provided with a plurality of holes to dissipate heat generated from the power supply board 630. Thus, although the power supply unit 620c has multiple holes in the power supply board cover 631, the protrusion 630h is positioned to cover the upper side of the power supply unit 620c, preventing foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout 553aa of the tank rail 553 from adhering to the power supply board 630, thereby reducing the risk of failure of the power supply board 630.

The above-mentioned protrusion 630h is formed of a resin material of a single color such as black or white. This allows a clear visual check as to whether or not foreign matter such as metal powder is attached to the protrusion 630h before and after mounting the game board 5 to the main frame 4. If foreign matter such as metal powder is attached, it can be removed from the protrusion 630h to prevent it from adhering to the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c located below the protrusion 630h. In addition, the protrusion 630h is formed of a resin material that is an insulator. This allows foreign matter such as metal powder, which is a conductor, to easily adhere to the protrusion 630h, and prevents such foreign matter from scattering toward the power supply unit 620c located below the protrusion 630h and from adhering to the power supply board 630.

As shown in FIG. 66(A), the protrusion 630h is provided on the main frame 4 side, not on the game board 5 side, like the power supply unit 620c. In other words, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main frame 4, there is no game board 5 between the cutout 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the power supply unit 620c, but the protrusion 630h is positioned so as to cover the upper side of the power supply unit 620c. Therefore, not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, but also when the game board 5 is not attached, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout 553aa can be received and attached to the upper surface of the protrusion 630h, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout 553aa can be prevented from falling toward the power supply unit 620c located below the upper surface of the protrusion 630h. As a result, although the power supply unit 620c has multiple holes in the power supply board cover 631, the protrusion 630h can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the power supply board 630.

The protrusion 630h is formed to cover not only the upper side of the power supply unit 620c, but also a part of the upper side of the dispensing control unit 620d and the interface unit 620e located behind the power supply unit 620c, but it may be formed to cover the entire upper side of the dispensing control unit 620d and the interface unit 620e. In such a case, the protrusion 630h formed to cover the upper side of the dispensing control unit 620d and the interface unit 620e can prevent the adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder to the dispensing control board 633 and the interface board 635. The protrusion 630h may be formed to cover only the upper side of the power supply unit 620c, or may be formed to cover only one of the upper sides of the power supply unit 620c, the dispensing control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e.

In addition, above the power supply unit 620c, the first eaves portion 551da is located below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. That is, the first eaves portion 551da is located between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the power supply unit 620c. In this way, since the first eaves portion 551da is located between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the power supply unit 620c, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main induction portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa not only when the rear cover 640 is closed but also when the rear cover 640 is opened can be received and attached by the first eaves portion 551da, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main induction portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be prevented from falling toward the power supply unit 620c located below. As a result, for the power supply unit 620c, although the power supply board cover 631 has multiple holes, the first overhanging portion 551da can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the power supply board 630.

In the above, the first embodiment has been described as a configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder, in which the first overhanging portion 551da forms the overhanging portion. However, the configuration may be such that the first overhanging portion 551da and the second overhanging portion 640a are connected to jointly form the overhanging portion, as in the configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder, in the second embodiment, in which the first overhanging portion 551da forms the overhanging portion, as in the configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder, in the third embodiment, in which the first overhanging portion 551da forms the overhanging portion, or in which the second overhanging portion 640a forms the overhanging portion alone, without the first overhanging portion 551da, as in the configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder, in the fourth embodiment. That is, the eaves portion provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be configured to be located above the power supply unit 620c, and at least when the rear cover 640 is closed, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and attached to the eaves portion, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be prevented from falling toward the power supply unit 620c located below. As a result, although multiple holes are provided in the power supply board cover 631 for the power supply unit 620c, the eaves portion can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the power supply board 630.

When the rear cover 640 is closed, the rear cover 640 and the power supply unit 620c are separated by a predetermined distance in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, but the upper end of the power supply unit 620c is positioned higher than the lower end of the rear cover 640. From this point of view, when the rear cover 640 is closed, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide section 553a to the outside through the cutout section 553aa can be prevented from falling toward the power supply unit 620c, whose upper end is positioned higher than the lower end of the rear cover 640. As a result, for the power supply unit 620c, although multiple holes are provided in the power supply board cover 631, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout section 553aa of the tank rail 553 is prevented from adhering to the power supply board 630, and the risk of failure of the power supply board 630 can be reduced.

Also, the protruding portion 630h is formed to protrude upward from near the rear end of the base unit 620b and have a vertical surface. In other words, in the main body frame 4, a power supply unit 620c having a power supply board 630, a payout control unit 620d having a payout control board 633, and an interface unit 620e having an interface board 635 are provided at a position rearward of the protruding portion 501z protruding from the rear end of the game board mounting portion 501c and further rearward of the vertical surface of the protruding portion 630h. As described above in detail, even if foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the protruding portion 501z protruding from the rear end of the game board mounting portion 501c is provided to prevent such foreign matter from entering the side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 located rearward of the protruding portion 501z (the side of the power supply unit 620c, etc.) when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. At this time, even if a foreign object such as metal powder enters behind the protrusion 501z, the vertical surface of the protrusion 630h, which is a separate member, is provided at a position behind the protrusion 501z, so that when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, such a foreign object can be prevented from moving to the side of the power supply unit 620c, etc., which is located behind the vertical surface of the protrusion 630h. In other words, not only the protrusion 501z but also the vertical surface of the protrusion 630h, which is a separate member, functions as a member that suppresses the movement of foreign objects such as metal powder pushed out from the game board mounting portion 501c toward the side of the power supply unit 620c, etc., when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4. This double prevents foreign objects such as metal powder pushed out from the game board mounting portion 501c from adhering to the power supply board 620, the payout control board 633, and the interface board 635, and reduces the risk of failure of these boards. In the above, a protrusion 501z is provided in front of the discharged ball receiving portion 628, but the protrusion 501z may not be provided, and only the vertical surface of the protrusion 630h may be provided in front of the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall structure of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 67 to 74. Fig. 67 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine with the game panel and the like made opaque. Fig. 68 is a perspective view of the game board in Fig. 67 seen from the right front, Fig. 69 is a perspective view of the game board in Fig. 67 seen from the left front, Fig. 70 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back, and Fig. 71 is a schematic explanatory diagram of the wiring from the function display unit in the main control board. Fig. 72 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and seen from the front, and Fig. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and seen from the back. Fig. 74 is a front view of the game board with the game panel and the like made transparent.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is inserted by a player operating the handle 111 of the handle unit 180. The game area 5a is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005, which give a player a predetermined privilege (e.g., the payment of a predetermined number of game balls B) when the game ball B is accepted or passes through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 in the game area 5a. Therefore, the game board 5 is for playing a game in which the player can enjoy the operation of the handle 111 to insert the game ball B and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a, so that the game ball B is accepted or passes through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 in the game area 5a.

The game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 77, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the part of the front of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and has a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 156, FIG. 111, etc.) that controls the game content that is played by shooting the game ball B into the game area 5a.

The game board 5 further includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, a peripheral control unit 1500 that is disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100, a performance display device 1600 that is disposed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, a drive board unit 1700 that is disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100.

The performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the performance display device 1600. In addition, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000 behind the performance display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is equipped with a transparent, flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see Figure 75, etc.) that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and has a rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The drive board unit 1700 comprises a panel relay board 1710 which relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a panel drive board 1720 which drives the decorative boards and drive motors provided in the front unit 2000 and the rear unit in response to commands from the peripheral control board 1510, and a drive board box 1730 which houses the panel relay board 1710 and the panel drive board 1720. The drive board box 1730 has its left side as viewed from the rear attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 so as to be hinged, and its right side as viewed from the rear attached so as to be detachable from the rear surface of the performance display device 1600.

The front unit 2000 is equipped with a plurality of (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B that is shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in the game area 5a from the general winning openings 2001, a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, a second starting opening 2004 that can receive the game ball B depending on the result of the normal lottery that is drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, and a special winning opening 2005 that can receive the game ball B depending on the result of the first or second special lottery that is drawn when the game ball B is received at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

The front unit 2000 is also provided with a start port unit 2100, which is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and one general winning port 2001; a side unit 2200, which is attached to the left of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front, along the inner rail 1002, and has two general winning ports 2001; an attacca unit 2400, which is attached to the right of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front, which is the lower right corner of the play area 5a as viewed from the front, and has one general winning port 2001, a second start port 2004, and a large winning port 2005; and a frame-shaped center device 2500, which is attached slightly above the center of the play area 5a as viewed from the front, above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and has a gate portion 2003.

The start port unit 2100 is equipped with a first start port sensor 2101 that detects a game ball B received in the first start port 2002. The attacca unit 2400 is equipped with a general winning port sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 provided in the attacca unit 2400, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a large winning port sensor 2403 that detects a game ball B received in the large winning port 2005. The center role 2500 is equipped with a gate sensor 2506 that detects a game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetic fields that act illegally.

The rear unit 3000 is equipped with a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism 3020, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and allows the performance display device 1600 to be detachably attached. The rear unit 3000 also has a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 provided in the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (see FIG. 111).

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear first performance unit 3100 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear second performance unit 3200 attached to the rear box 3010 behind the rear first performance unit 3100, a rear third performance unit 3300 attached to the rear box 3010 behind the rear second performance unit 3200, a rear left ball discharge unit 3030 attached to the front of the rear second performance unit 3200 and receiving and discharging downward the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and a rear right ball discharge unit 3040 receiving and discharging downward the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, the second start port 2004, and the large winning port 2005 of the attacca unit 2400.

[5-1. Previous constituent members]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 75. Fig. 75(a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as seen from the back.

The front component 1000 is formed to be entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has an outer shape of an approximately square in front view, an inner shape of an approximately circular shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the play area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in front view, along the clockwise circumferential direction, passing the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in front view, and extending to the upper right diagonal direction, an inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left diagonal direction in front view, and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the play area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right side of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right side of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inwardly of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and comes into contact with the game ball B that rolls along the outer rail 1001.

The component 1000 is also provided with a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap with the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is provided with an outlet 1008 that penetrates from front to back at the rear end of the out guide section 1003, at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 is discharged through the outlet 1008 to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component 1000 is provided with security recesses 1009 recessed rearward from the front end at the outside of the areas near the bottom ends of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend approximately vertically, the underside of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 on the door frame 3 is inserted into this security recess 1009. As a result, the area between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The component 1000 also has a notch 1010 cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100, and when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 penetrate the notch 1010 and the notch to face forward.

Furthermore, the component 1000 is provided with a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a stamp attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner.

The front component 1000 is also made almost entirely transparent, allowing the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 located at the rear to be viewed from the front.

[5-2. Game Panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 75 etc. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and a front unit 2000 and a rear unit 3000 are attached to it. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and has the rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed from a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is set to the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that is sufficient to hold the obstacle nails N planted on the front side and the front unit 2000 attached. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position within the play area 5a, and has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the bottom end at a position corresponding to the out opening 1008 of the front component 1000. The panel plate 1110 also has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a number of positioning holes formed as round holes and short long holes penetrating from front to back, and a number of engagement steps formed with a thin plate thickness and spaced apart in the left-right direction at the upper and lower edges. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting protruding pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement steps are for removably attaching to the panel holder 1120 by engaging with the engagement claws (not shown) or engagement pieces (not shown) of the panel holder 1120.

As shown in FIG. 75, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center device 2500, which is offset to the upper right and above the center when viewed from the front. This gives the panel plate 1110 a frame shape, and the width perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame) is wide enough to accommodate multiple game balls B on the left and below the center when viewed from the front, and narrow enough to accommodate multiple game balls B on the upper and right sides.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has an external shape that is roughly rectangular and large enough to encompass the panel board 1110, and is thicker than the panel board 1110 (approximately 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (e.g., thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is roughly the same size as the panel board 1110 and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a through hole 1121 that penetrates the holding step in the front-to-rear direction and is roughly the same size as the game area 5a.

The panel holder 1120 also has a notch 1122 cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the previous component 1000, so that when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 penetrate the notch 1010 and the notch to face forward.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are inserted into a plurality of positioning holes in the panel plate 1110, three engagement claws that are disposed outside the holding step and elastically engage with engagement steps at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and a pair of engagement pieces that protrude upward from the lower outer side of the holding step and respectively engage with two engagement steps at the lower edge of the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 can detachably attach the panel plate 1110 in a state where it is housed in the holding step by engaging the engagement steps at the lower edge of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement pieces from the front diagonally above, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 backward to elastically engage the engagement steps at the upper and lower left inclined portions with the engagement claws. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position relative to the panel holder 1120.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 72 and 73. The board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 has an ejection part 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the bottom and rear, and the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge section 1201 is located directly above the discharged ball receiving section 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. This allows it to receive all game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1008, and game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and rear unit 3000, and to discharge them downward from the discharge section 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharged ball receiving section 628.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 72 to 73. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and the payout of game balls B, a setting change board 1311 that can set game performance, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

When the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when the game board 5 is viewed from behind, the main control board 1310, which is rectangular and long in the left-right direction, is positioned to occupy approximately four-fifths of the area surrounded by the left, top, right, and bottom sides of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 from the left side to the right side, and a square-shaped setting change board 1311 is positioned in the remaining area, approximately one-fifth of the area, at the corner where the top and right sides of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

As described above, the outer frame 2 supports the upper hinge part 510 and the lower hinge part 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially and rotatably by the upper hinge assembly 50 and the lower hinge member 60, so that the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward around the left side as viewed from the front. Therefore, the left side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction as viewed from the front, where the upper hinge part 510 and the lower hinge part 520 of the main body frame 4 are arranged, is the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the opposite right side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction as viewed from the front, is the open side of the main body frame 4. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, while the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4.

The rear cover 640, which is attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 of the main frame 4 in an openable and closable manner, covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4, as described above. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the rear cover 640. As described above, the right side of the rear cover 640 in front view is rotatably attached to the right end of the rear surface of the main frame base 501 in front view around an axis extending vertically, and the left side of the rear cover 640 in front view is attached to the rear cover attachment portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the rear cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full-ball path unit 600, so that the right side of the rear cover 640 in front view is the pivot support side (closed side) of the rear cover 640, and the opposite left side of the rear cover 640 in front view is the open side of the rear cover 640. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4, the main control board 1310 is located on the pivot side (closed side) of the rear cover 640, while the setting change board 1311 is located on the open side of the rear cover.

In this embodiment, green is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are solidly painted with green resist except for the various land patterns, whereas white, a different color from the resist for the main control board 1310, is used as the resist for the setting change board 1311, and the entire front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting board 1311 are solidly painted with white resist except for the various land patterns.

Here, a different color is used as the resist for the setting change board 1311 from the color used as the resist for the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are both boards housed in the main control board box 1320. The manager of the game hall, the staff of the game hall, and other staff members are highly aware that the main control board 1310 is a board that controls the progress of the game (controls the game content and the payout of game balls B, etc.) and is therefore of high importance in terms of crime prevention. For this reason, there is no need to distinguish this board from other boards and call attention to the fact that it is the main control board 1310. In contrast, the setting change board 1311 is a board that has a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1, that is, the ability to set game performance, and therefore although it is housed in the main control board box 1320, there is very little awareness that it is a board of high importance in terms of crime prevention. For this reason, it is necessary to distinguish this board from other boards and call attention to the fact that it is the setting change board 1311.

In this embodiment, therefore, green, which is generally used as a resist for boards, is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and white, which is different from the color used as the resist for the main control board 1310, is used as the resist for the setting change board 1311. This makes the setting change board 1311 more noticeable than the main control board 1310 among the boards housed in the main control board box 1320, and can contribute to raising awareness that in addition to the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311 is also a board that is of high importance in terms of crime prevention.

In the above-described embodiment, the resist for the setting change board 1311 is white, which is different from the green used for the resist for the main control board 1310. However, as long as it is possible to distinguish between the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311, the resist may be yellow, red, blue, transparent, or the like.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a white color different from the green color used as the resist for the main control board 1310 is used as the resist for the setting change board 1311. However, instead of the resist for the setting change board 1311, the setting change board 1311 may be silk-screened in white to cover almost the entire front surface (mounting surface) and/or back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, or may be silk-screened in any one of black, blue, yellow, and red.

Next, the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparent. The internal space formed by the cover body and the base body is capable of housing the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311. Because the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, it is possible to check the state of the front and back sides of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not unauthorized tampering has been performed, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is installed) from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Furthermore, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320, and traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be discovered, and the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 is enhanced. In addition, the cover body is formed with a plurality of heat dissipation vents that can release the air inside the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. The main control board 1310 is also connected to the function display unit 1400, the first start port sensor 2101, the gate sensor 2506, the second start port sensor 2402, the large prize port sensor 2403, the start port solenoid 2412, the attacca solenoid 2414, the general prize port sensor 2401, the general prize port sensor 3001, the magnetic sensor 2470, the vibration sensor 3005, and the outlet sensor 3032.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is equipped with a setting key switch 1311a that can change the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and check the setting value. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) (the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness (electrical wiring). The force associated with the operation of the setting key switch 1311a can be absorbed (mitigated) by the harness (electrical wiring) to make it difficult for it to be transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310). By this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. Note that the connector connection, which is an inter-board connection, can be a connection using a normal connector that does not have a floating mechanism, or a connection using a special connector that has a floating mechanism. A normal connector without a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and plug are mated by inserting and pushing the plug into the socket. When the socket and plug are mated, there is no movement at all in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed in (e.g., up and down). In contrast, a special connector with a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and plug are mated by inserting and pushing the socket into the plug. When the socket and plug are mated, there is a movement within a predetermined distance in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the socket is inserted and pushed in (e.g., up and down), which allows the error (mating axis misalignment) that occurs when the socket is pushed in to be absorbed. In this embodiment, a normal connector without a floating mechanism is used as the connector connection that is the board-to-board connection, but a special connector with a floating mechanism may also be used.

The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with the distance dimension of one side being approximately one-fifth the horizontal distance dimension of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and its top side is aligned on the same straight line as the top side of the main control board 1310, while its bottom side is positioned above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 at a position that is the center of the vertical distance dimension, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged on the right side of the main control board 1310 at a position corresponding to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and turned is arranged at the center point where the center lines of the square setting change board 1311 in the vertical and horizontal directions intersect. A setting change permission lamp 1310z that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) is arranged on the main control board 1310 above the horizontal center line of the setting change board 1311 and toward the connector MSCN. A setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is located above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, and a base monitor 1310h consisting of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a row is located below the center line of the main control board 1310 from the center to the right side.

In this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is in the OFF state as the initial position when the setting key is ready to be inserted into the socket formed on the front of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular socket is along the vertical direction). When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the socket and can be removed from the socket. In this embodiment, even if the rear cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason and the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted into the socket, the depth dimension of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that the setting key and the components of other pachinko machines (or components of the island equipment of the game hall) arranged in a row facing each other on the island equipment of the game hall do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it ON, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a can also be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The front of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320, but a wire intrusion prevention section is molded into the cover body for this opening to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gap" formed between the front of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the corresponding opening to tamper with the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310.

The setting key switch 1311a has a metal tubular (or rectangular) housing that houses a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated. The front surface and the opposite surface (rear surface) of the setting key cylinder are formed of a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. The front surface of the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing is arranged almost flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder, which has an insertion port for inserting the setting key, and the opposite surface (rear surface) of the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing is arranged almost flush with the opposite surface (rear surface) of the setting key cylinder from the front surface. When the setting key cylinder is accommodated in the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing, the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder are electrically connected.

The setting key switch 1311a has a circuit in the setting key cylinder that can extract (output) a signal indicating whether the setting key switch 1311a is in an ON or OFF state, and the signal can be extracted (output) from a pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the face (rear face) opposite the front face of the setting key cylinder. The circuit and pair of opposing lead terminals in the setting key cylinder are electrically insulated from the setting key cylinder and are also electrically insulated from the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a.

The rear surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a is formed with a pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder and a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding a predetermined length at a 90 degree rotation angle. The pair of opposing mounting plate pieces pass through elongated mounting holes formed in the setting change board 1311 and are soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, thereby fixing the setting key switch 1311a to the setting change board 1311.

As described above, the front of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is provided with an insertion port for inserting the setting key. When the setting change board 1311 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the front of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is arranged to be flush with the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. In other words, the front of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a does not protrude outward from the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320.

As a result, when a worker attaches the game board 5 to the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island facility of the gaming hall, the worker first temporarily places the game board 5 in front of or around the pachinko machine 1, so that if the worker accidentally hits the temporarily placed game board 5 with his/her leg during work and causes it to fall over, the setting key switch 1311a can be prevented from colliding with the floor and being damaged. Also, when removing the game board 5 from the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed in front of or around the pachinko machine 1, so that if the worker accidentally hits the temporarily placed game board 5 with his/her leg during work and causes it to fall over, the setting key switch 1311a can be prevented from colliding with the floor and being damaged.

The setting display 1310g and base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and base body and cannot be touched at all, but because the cover body is molded transparent as described above, the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be seen through the cover body.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the setting key OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted are formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated. The wiring patterns through which various signals from the switch 1311a are transmitted (i.e., the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the setting key OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the wiring patterns through which signals from the RWM clear button 633z of the dispensing control board 633 are transmitted are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other).

Here, the procedure for operating the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 will be briefly described. When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4, as described above, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main frame 4, while the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the main frame 4. Also, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4, as described above, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640. Also, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640, while the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the open side of the back cover. In other words, when the back cover 640 is opened, the back cover opening side of the back cover 640 is the pivot side (closed side) of the main frame 4, so unless the main frame 4 is opened widely (near about 90 degrees) relative to the outer frame 2, the opening side of the back cover 640 interferes with the outer frame 2 and the back cover 640 cannot be opened to cover the rear side of the game board 5. In other words, a person who wants to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 cannot open the back cover 640 even if he or she opens the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2 by just enough to insert his or her arm and tries to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. In other words, a person who wants to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 must first open the main frame 4 widely (near about 90 degrees) relative to the outer frame 2 in order to secure a space that allows the back cover 640 to cover the rear side of the game board 5.

In this way, because the setting change board 1311 is disposed on the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, compared to when the setting change board 1311 is disposed on the open side of the main body frame 4, if a fraudster uses a fraudulent tool such as piano wire or wire to illegally access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, even if the fraudulent tool is inserted and sent from the open side of the main body frame 4 between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the path from the open side of the main body frame 4 to the setting key switch 1311a becomes longer, so the fraudulent tool must be sent deeper. This lengthens the operating time for sending the fraudulent tool to the setting key switch 1311a, making it easier for game parlor staff and other staff to discover such fraudulent activity.

In addition, because the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640, the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is covered by the back cover 640. As a result, even if an unauthorized person who is attempting to illegally access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 uses an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or wire to insert the unauthorized tool between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the open side of the main body frame 4, the unauthorized tool is blocked by the back cover 640 before it reaches the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, so it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a.

In addition, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 has an insertion port for inserting a setting key, and since the insertion port of this setting key cylinder is covered by the rear cover 640, it is necessary to open the rear cover 640 in order to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. In order to open this rear cover 640, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 largely (approximately 90 degrees) relative to the outer frame 2. By involving multiple operations like these, it is possible to increase the security of access to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, thereby increasing the deterrent effect against fraudulent acts using unauthorized tools.

As described above, the left side of the rear cover 640 in front view is pivotally supported and attached to the rear cover mounting portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the rear cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-ball path unit 600 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the locking screw 642 is screwed into the rear cover mounting portion 601a to fix the rear cover 640. The locking screw 642 is also arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, which is opposite to the open side of the main body frame 4, by being arranged on the open side of the rear cover 640. Therefore, even if a fraudster who tries to illegally access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 inserts and sends an illegal tool between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the open side of the main body frame 4, the path from the open side of the main body frame 4 to the locking screw 642 of the rear cover 640 becomes long, so that the illegal tool needs to be sent deep. In this respect, the operating time during which the unauthorized tool is fed into the locking screw 642 is also increased, making it easier for game parlor staff and other attendants to detect such unauthorized acts, and increasing the security of access to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 can increase the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts using unauthorized tools.

The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged is housed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310, and this main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. In contrast, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged is housed in the payout control board box 632, and this payout control board box 632 is attached to the rear side of the power board cover 631 in the board unit 620 of the main frame 4. In this way, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate boards, and the objects to which the boards are attached are also different, so that the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z can be separated. If the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged together on one board, it is only necessary to make unauthorized modifications to one board, which is not preferable from the perspective of crime prevention. Therefore, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are placed on separate boards, and the boards are configured to be attached to different objects, thereby improving the security of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z.

The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) controls game preparation and game (controls game after controlling game preparation). The control of game preparation is composed of a first process (determination of step S14 in the main control side power-on processing described later, processing of step S16A) in which the setting value can be changed based on a signal from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and a second process (determination of step S216 in the setting change processing described later, processing of step S218) in which the setting value can be selected and changed based on a signal from the RWM clear button 633z (which functions as a setting change button for selecting and changing the setting value here) of the payout control board 633. Following the control of game preparation, the control of game is composed of the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing described later and the main control side timer interrupt processing described later.

Although this improves security, by placing the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z on separate boards and adopting a configuration in which the boards are attached to different objects, the setting key switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, so there is no need to specifically tell people where the setting key switch 1311a is located. However, it may be difficult for the amusement hall manager, amusement hall staff, or other staff to know where the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as a setting switching button, is located, as they may be unfamiliar with this.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a notation serving as location information capable of conveying the location of the RWM clear button 633z is attached to the main control board box 1320. Specifically, a sticker capable of conveying the location of the RWM clear button 633z is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and for example, "The RWM clear button (setting switching button) is located on the payout control board" is printed on this rectangular sheet in red semi-transparent letters (height: 7 mm). This makes it possible to convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switching button) to staff such as the manager of the game hall or staff of the game hall, so that the staff of the game hall can easily find the RWM clear button 633z when operating the RWM clear button 633z, and thus can avoid getting dizzy. Therefore, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Even if this sticker is affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320, it does not impede the visibility of the main control board 1310. Also, instead of the letters printed on the rectangular sheet of this sticker, symbols such as arrows may be used.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. However, instead of this, when molding the cover of the main control board box 1320, concave or convex letters may be molded in at the same time (i.e., the cover and letters may be molded as a single unit). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

In the above embodiment, a sticker was attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Instead of this, the characters (height: 7 mm) "The RWM clear button (settings switching button) is located on the dispensing control board" may be silk-screened in white on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, or the characters (height: 7 mm) "RWM clear button (settings switching button)" may be silk-screened in white on the surface (mounting surface) of the dispensing control board 633. The silk-screening may be of the same color or different colors. Also, instead of silk-screened characters, a symbol such as an arrow may be used. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

In the above embodiment, a sticker was attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Instead of this, the character portion may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 and cut-out characters (height: 7 mm) "The RWM clear button (setting switching button) is located on the dispensing control board" may be formed by resist, or the character portion may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the dispensing control board 633 and cut-out characters (height: 7 mm) "RWM clear button (setting switching button)" may be formed by resist. The color of the resist may be the same, but it is preferable to use different colors so that the boards can be distinguished. Also, instead of cut-out characters, a cut-out symbol with a masked symbol such as an arrow may be used. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

In the above embodiment, a sticker was attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Instead, a similar sticker (this sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and on this rectangular sheet, for example, "The RWM clear button (settings switch button) is located on the dispensing control board" is printed in red semi-transparent letters (height: 7 mm)) may be attached to the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 or the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, or a transparent rectangular sheet with the words "RWM clear button (settings switch button)" in red semi-transparent letters (height: 7 mm) may be attached to the surface (mounting surface) of the dispensing control board 633. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

In the above embodiment, a sticker was attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z, but instead of this, an announcement may be made from various speakers to inform the user of where the RWM clear button 633z is located, or an announcement image may be displayed on the performance display device 1600. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a staff member such as the game hall manager or a game hall clerk operates the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 to display various setting screens on the performance display device 1600 and select an item regarding the location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switching button). As a result, an announcement voice is played from various speakers to inform players of where the RWM clear button 633z is located, saying, "The RWM clear button is located on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also doubles as a setting change button," and an announcement image (which may be a photograph) informing players of the location of the RWM clear button 633z is displayed on the performance display device 1600. After determining the location of the RWM clear button 633z from this announcement voice or announcement image, the game hall manager, game hall staff, or other staff member can turn off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and smoothly change the setting value. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

In the above embodiment, a sticker was attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Instead, when changing the setting value, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to inform the user where the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as a setting change button, is located. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process that can change and determine the setting value, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and an announcement voice is repeatedly played from various speakers to inform the user where the RWM clear button 633z is located under the control of the peripheral control board 1510, saying, "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting change button. Please operate the RWM clear button to change the setting value." When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change process, it sends a specified command to the peripheral control board 1510, which causes the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the audio announcement and proceed with various processes based on the received specified command. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily determined. Following this audio announcement, an audio announcement may be played from various speakers to explain how to operate the setting key after the setting value has been determined. Also, while the audio announcement is being played, an image saying "Setting" may be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In the above embodiment, a sticker was attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. In addition to this, when changing the setting of the setting value, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to inform the user where the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as a setting switching button, is located. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process that can change and determine the setting value, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and an announcement voice that informs the user where the RWM clear button 633z is located by the control of the peripheral control board 1510, "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switching button. Please operate the RWM clear button to change the setting value" is repeatedly played from various speakers. This eliminates the need to search for the sticker attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320. Although such announcements are repeatedly played from various speakers, in case the contents of the announcements are missed, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be known by visually checking the sticker attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320 before the next announcement begins. In addition to "The RWM clear button is on the dispensing control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting change button. Please operate the RWM clear button to change the setting value," the announcement may also include information on where the sticker indicating the location of the RWM clear button is attached. When the RWM clear button is operated, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, which causes the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the announcement. Even if the person who changes the setting value becomes accustomed to changing the setting value and finds it unpleasant to the ear, by operating the RWM clear button immediately after starting the work, the announcement voice can be stopped quickly. Also, in the case where the work needs to be performed after the opening of the game hall, the announcement voice can be stopped quickly by operating the RWM clear button immediately after starting the work so as not to inconvenience the players. Following such announcement voice, an announcement voice informing the player of how to operate the setting key after the setting value is determined may be played from various speakers. Also, while the announcement voice is being played, an image saying "Setting" may be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are each placed on separate boards, and the boards are attached to different objects, thereby separating the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z; however, if it is possible to improve security, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button (in this case, the setting switching button function is removed from the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633) can be placed together on a single board. For example, the setting change board 1311 has a shape in which the vertical distance dimension of its right and left sides is approximately the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, the horizontal distance dimension is shorter than the horizontal distance dimension of the main control board 1310, and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 coincides with the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311. In other words, the setting change board 1311 has a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 with the center position of its vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the right side of the main control board 1310 with the center position of its vertical distance dimension on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is disposed below the center line of the setting change board 1311 and near the bottom edge of the setting change board 1311, and a setting switch button having a pressing operation part is disposed above the center line of the setting change board 1311 and near the top edge of the setting change board 1311. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a is disposed near the bottom edge of the same board, the setting switch button is disposed near the top edge, and they are disposed apart from each other. In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button are disposed separately from each other on the same board, they are consolidated on one board, but compared to when the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button are disposed separately and close to each other, it is possible to make it more difficult to make unauthorized modifications, so that even if the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button are consolidated on one board and disposed separately, it may be possible to improve crime prevention.

Next, we will briefly explain the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311, the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633, and the setting display 1310g on the main control board 1310. Here, we will first briefly explain how to change the setting value, and then how to display and confirm the current setting value. Note that the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as to check the current setting value, so only a limited number of people, including the arcade manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people.

When changing the setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 must be opened relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key must be inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 must be operated, thereby satisfying the "predetermined setting value change permission condition." In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it on by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 1311a, and then operate the power switch 630a while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z to power on the pachinko machine 1.

A person who changes the setting of a setting value must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and turn the setting key switch 1311a on by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. Next, while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. This causes a setting key ON signal to be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1310z from an off state to an on state.

When a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633, a detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z is input from the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Each time a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by one based on the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z. When it reaches the maximum value of 6, it returns to the initial value of 1, increases by one again, and controls the setting value to be displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When a person who changes the setting value decides on a setting value, they turn the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise by rotating it 60 degrees from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to turn it OFF. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value decided by the setting change in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, switches the setting display 1310g from a state in which the setting value is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1310z from a state in which it is lit to a state in which it is turned off.

The person who changes the setting value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, completing the work of changing the setting value.

In order to display and check the currently set setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored following a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 must be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON, and the pressing section of the RWM clear button 633z must not be operated, thereby satisfying the "predetermined setting value display permission condition." In other words, a person who actually checks and displays the currently set setting value must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON, and then operate the power switch 630a to power on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z.

A person who checks and displays the currently set setting value must first check that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise by rotating it 60 degrees to ON, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON. Next, without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. This causes a setting key ON signal to be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1310z remains off, and even if a person who wants to confirm and display the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the setting value is not changed at all in response to this pressing operation, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed either.

When the person who checks and displays the currently set setting values has finished checking the currently set setting values, they turn the setting key switch 1311a OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a state in which the setting value is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed.

The person who wishes to confirm and display the currently set setting value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, completing the confirmation and display of the currently set setting value.

As described above, the predetermined conditions for permission to change the setting value are that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. In contrast, the predetermined conditions for permission to display the setting value are, as described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, and the pressure operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions and the predetermined setting value display permission conditions have a common requirement in that when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned on by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise. However, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions require that "when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated," whereas the predetermined setting value display permission conditions require that "when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated."

There are two types of setting key switches: a lead type and a surface mount type (so-called SMD type). The setting key switch 1311a in this embodiment is basically a lead type. The setting key switch 1311a has an action of inserting a setting key into a socket and removing it from the socket. Therefore, the force associated with this action acts on the board on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, causing the board to bend. In the lead type, each lead of the setting key switch is positioned inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back side (solder surface) of the board. In contrast, in the SMD type, each lead of the setting key switch is positioned protruding outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the front side (mounting surface) of the board.

As a result, with the lead type, if the setting key gets caught inside the socket when being removed from the socket, because the leads of the setting key switch are positioned inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back side (solder side) of the board, a greater load is placed on the parts where the leads of the setting key switch are soldered to the back side (solder side) of the board compared to an SMD type in which the leads of the setting key switch are positioned protruding toward the outer shape and soldered to the front side (mounting surface) of the board, and this load acts strongly from the back side (solder side) to the front side (mounting surface) of the board, causing the board itself to bend significantly. In contrast, with an SMD type, even if the setting key gets caught inside the socket when being removed from the socket, the leads of the setting key switch are positioned to protrude outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch and are soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board, so compared to a lead type in which the leads of the setting key switch are positioned inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back side (solder surface) of the board, the load on the parts where the leads of the setting key switch are soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board is smaller, and even if this load acts from the back side (solder surface) of the board to the front side (mounting surface), the board itself is less likely to bend.

In addition, if an external force is applied to the board and the board itself bends significantly, there is a concern that the soldered parts where SMD type electronic components are soldered will be subjected to a large peeling load of the land pattern and peel off, so when using a lead type setting key switch, it is desirable to mount it on a board that does not have SMD type electronic components mounted on it. Also, the peeling load of the wiring pattern and land pattern in the soldered parts where each lead part of the setting key switch is soldered to the back side (solder side) of the board is smaller than that of the SMD type, making it stronger against peeling of the soldered parts of the setting key switch, so considering the strength of the soldered parts, it is desirable to use a lead type setting key switch.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a lead type is basically used as the setting key switch 1311a. In this embodiment, since the setting change board 1311 is not equipped with SMD type electronic components but with lead type electronic components, even if a lead type setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the setting change board 1311 and the setting key gets caught in the socket when the setting key is removed from the socket and the board itself bends significantly as described above, there is no risk of other lead type electronic components soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 peeling off from the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. As described above, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (the connectors SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness), so signals from the setting key switch 1311a are electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310, which is rectangular and elongated in the left-right direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, is formed and arranged to occupy about four-fifths of the area surrounded by the left, top, right, and bottom sides of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 from the left side to the right side, and a square setting change board 1311 is arranged in the remaining one-fifth of the area, which is the corner area where the top and right sides of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected. The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with the distance dimension of one side being about one-fifth of the horizontal distance dimension of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and is smaller than the rectangular main control board 1310, which is elongated in the left-right direction. In this embodiment, a lead-type setting key switch 1311a is implemented on the square-shaped setting change board 1311 having such a small shape, and even if the board itself bends when a setting key is inserted and pressed into the socket of the setting key switch 1311a, or if the setting key gets caught inside the socket when the setting key is removed from the socket of the setting key switch 1311a and causes the board itself to bend, because the setting change board 1311 is formed as a small board, the amount of bending can be kept small compared to the main control board 1310. This eliminates the need to provide ribs on the cover or base of the main control board box 1320 at positions corresponding to the setting change board 1311 that can abut against the front (mounting surface) or back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 to prevent bending, allowing screw holes to be provided in the setting change board 1311 around the position where the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, and contributes to the visibility of the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 housed in the transparent main control board box 1320.

In this way, in this embodiment, a lead-type setting key switch 1311a is used and placed on the setting change board 1311, which is separate from the main control board 1310. Therefore, even if the setting change board 1311 is deflected when a setting key that can change the setting value is inserted and removed from the socket of the setting key switch 1311a (operation), the main control board 1310 will not bend. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being deflected when the lead-type setting key switch 1311a is operated.

In contrast, if the setting key switch 1311a is placed on one of the boards such as the main control board 1310, the dispensing control board 633, or the power supply board 630 instead of the setting change board 1311, and SMD type electronic components are mounted on these boards, then instead of the lead type, an SMD type is used as the setting key switch 1311a and mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board. Even if the setting key gets caught in the socket when it is removed from the socket, the board itself is not likely to bend as described above, so there is no risk of other SMD type electronic components soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board coming off the surface (mounting surface) of the board.

Here, to briefly explain the setting values, the "setting values" can change the probability for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a small jackpot has been won by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by lottery when transitioning from a special probability mode to a normal mode, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (i.e., the number of game balls that the player can acquire can be increased) is preset. In this embodiment, setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player from setting value 1 to setting value 6 is preset. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects various tables (e.g., a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won is specified, a jackpot pattern determination table in which the ratio of determination values for determining a jackpot pattern is specified, a small jackpot determination table in which the ratio of small jackpot determination values indicating that a small jackpot has been won is specified, a small jackpot pattern determination table in which the ratio of determination values for determining a small jackpot pattern is specified, a normal time transition determination table in which the ratio of determination values for transition determination from a probability change to a normal time is specified, etc.) used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, or selects various tables (e.g., an allocation table in which the allocation time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values. In the various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, various determination values are allocated at a predetermined ratio. In addition, the various tables used in the various lottery judgments are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and some are set so that the values are different based on the relationship between a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of one electric drive source and a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of another electric drive source. In addition, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, but the range may be smaller or larger than this. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the setting value, but also checks the contents of its own built-in RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether there is an abnormality, and if it determines that there is an abnormality and the main control side power cut processing does not end normally when the power is cut off, it displays an error message to inform the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in its own built-in RAM are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h displays the number of game balls that have been collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a, which is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, out of the game balls that have been shot into the game area 5a. Of the game balls that have been shot into the game area 5a, those that have been collected by the outlet 1008 are detected by the outlet sensor 3032, and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 1710.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected through the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and also displays it on the base monitor 1310h.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it ON. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is rotated from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a ON to its original position, which is the initial position (i.e., the setting key that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position of the cylinder), and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a serial output circuit that can serially output information conveying the setting key ON and OFF as serial information to the outside. This improves security against signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or on the dispensing control board 633. When the serial information output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the received serial information whether it conveys setting key ON or OFF (the embodiment of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "setting key variant (1)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to turn it ON, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is rotated from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to the original position, which is the initial position (i.e., the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the set key cylinder rotation position (rotation position of the setting key cylinder), and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but a pulse output circuit that can output information indicating the setting key ON and OFF as a pulse signal to the outside may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. This improves security against signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a to which this pulse output circuit is provided is provided in the setting change board 1311, but instead of this, it may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the dispensing control board 633. For example, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is set to 1 ms when the information is information indicating the setting key ON, and is set to 5 ms when the information is information indicating the OFF. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the input pulse signal whether the information conveys the setting key ON or OFF (the embodiment of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as "variant example (2) of the setting key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it ON. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original position, which is the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF. can be turned OFF, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal and the voltage level of the OFF signal can be set using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V out of a range of 0V to 5V) between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310, and a comparator circuit can be provided in the main control board 1310, and the comparison result by the comparator circuit can be input to the main control MPU 1310a, so that the main control MPU 1310a can determine the ON/OFF of the setting key ON signal and the ON/OFF of the OFF signal. This can improve security for signals from the setting key switch 1311a (the embodiment of the setting key switch that uses an intermediate potential may be described as "variant example (3) of the setting key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 (the aspect of the setting key switch may be described as "variant example of the setting key (4)").

In the above embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320, which is composed of a cover body and a base body. However, the setting change board 1311 may be housed in a separate setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part. This crimping part is a sealing mechanism, and is provided in multiple parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the decision key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each of them, but a wire intrusion prevention part is molded in the cover body so that a wire or the like cannot be intruded through the "gaps" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the openings corresponding to each of them to modify the setting change board 1311. Note that, as the structure of the setting change board box, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, if the cover body is configured to be opened or closed from the base body, a setting change board cover body opening/closing switch that can detect the opening of the cover body may be provided on the base body. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening/closing switch may be configured to be directly input to the main control board 1310, or may be configured to be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. The above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission conditions can include a case where the cover body is opened from the base body based on a detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body (the aspect of the setting change board box may be described as "variant embodiment of the setting key (5)").

Also, any of the above-mentioned modified settings key configurations (1) to (5) may be appropriately selected and combined to adopt the configuration (the selected combination of modified configurations may be referred to as "modified settings key configuration (6)").

In addition, the above-mentioned setting values can change the probability for determining whether or not a big win has been obtained by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a small win has been obtained by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a big win has been obtained by lottery when transitioning from a probability change to a normal time, the allocation rate to an area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (i.e., the number of game balls that the player can obtain can be increased) is preset. In this embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player from setting value 1 to setting value 6 is preset. Incidentally, although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has multiple setting values ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, other pachinko machines have a single setting value in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset. That is, there are game specifications in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as multiple preset values, such as the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, and settings need to be changed, and there are game specifications in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as a single preset value, and settings do not need to be changed at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is redesigned according to such game specifications, and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is redesigned or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will depend on the game specifications, and the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, there is a need for a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 that can be used in common without being dependent on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in game specifications where the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset to a single value and no setting changes are required, there is no need to use the setting value as the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player, so this can be addressed by changing the design of the software to assign setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 as follows:

For example, the main control MPU 1310a can use these as setting values to set multiple actual machine confirmation operation patterns (allowing for variation in the method of starting up the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM) after clearing a specified area (the entire area of the RAM excluding a specific area) of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, for the operation of the movable body (gimmick object) and the lighting of light-emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs that are the objects of control by the main control MPU 1310a, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "all operations (movement of movable body (gimmick object), lighting of light-emitting bodies)" is assigned as setting value 1, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "movement of movable body (gimmick object)" is assigned as setting value 2, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of light-emitting bodies" is assigned as setting value 3, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "detailed operation of movable body (gimmick object) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, movement over other structures and other movable bodies)" is assigned as setting value 4. An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 is assigned which specifies "operations such as checking for interference with moving objects (gimmicks), and operation order with other moving objects (gimmicks)" as a setting value 5, an actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned which specifies "lighting of light-emitting objects by one port unit (lighting of light-emitting objects by a predetermined output port unit (i.e., by one output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" as a setting value 5, and an actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 is assigned which specifies "no operation" as a setting value 6 (the change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be described as "variation example (1) based on a common hardware configuration"). Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing by repeatedly performing a main control side timer interrupt process described later to operate the moving objects (gimmicks) and light-emitting objects such as lamps and LEDs. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command (referred to as a setting change completion command in FIG. 121) from the main control MPU 1310a, can operate the movable body (gimmick) and light the light-emitting body that are the object of control by the peripheral control board 1510 with the contents (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the actual machine confirmation operation is changed after the RAM is cleared, it is possible to provide a variety of methods for starting the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set multiple times from the end of the pattern change to the start of the demonstration (demonstration performance performed in a player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 1, the time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 2, the time setting pattern 3 that specifies "20 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 3, the time setting pattern 4 that specifies "25 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 4, the time setting pattern 5 that specifies "30 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 5, and the time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the manner of changing the time from the end of the pattern change to the player waiting state may be described as "variation example (2) based on the common hardware configuration"). In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at the time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the time setting for the player waiting state after the pattern changes, it is possible to vary the time between when the pattern changes and when the demonstration begins.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows multiple settings of the contents of the demonstration (demo performance performed in a player waiting state) performed after the end of the pattern change. In this case, demo performance setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical performance" is assigned as setting value 1, demo performance setting pattern 2 that specifies "comical performance, movable body (gimmick) operation performance" is assigned as setting value 2, demo performance setting pattern 3 that specifies "serious performance" is assigned as setting value 3, demo performance setting pattern 4 that specifies "serial performance, movable body (gimmick) operation performance" is assigned as setting value 4, demo performance setting pattern 5 that specifies "period drama style performance" is assigned as setting value 5, and demo performance setting pattern 6 that specifies "period drama style performance, movable body (gimmick)" is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner of changing the demo performance contents may be described as "variation example (3) based on common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demo performance (demo performance setting pattern) that corresponds to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the content of the demo performance is changed, it is possible to provide variation in the content of the demo performance that is performed after the pattern change has ended.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set multiple default volumes adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The volume adjustment switch can be rotated to increase or decrease the volume from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" is assigned as setting value 6 (the aspect of changing the default volume may be described as "variant (4) based on the common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a sets the default volume to a volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. The default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 may be muted when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction to decrease the volume (moved in the opposite direction to increase the volume) and is adjusted to the minimum volume by completing the movement to the minimum volume end, or may be a volume that can be recognized when standing in front of the pachinko machine. The default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 may be the maximum volume when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction to increase the volume (moved in the opposite direction to decrease the volume) and is adjusted to the maximum volume by completing the movement to the maximum volume end, or may be a volume that is a predetermined percentage of the maximum volume (e.g., 85%). This aspect of changing the default volume setting allows for variation in the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

It can also be used as a setting value that allows multiple settings for the volume of error notification sounds for various malfunctions, goto, errors, and other error notifications. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (i.e., they are not dependent on it), and while setting them to maximum volume makes it easier for game parlor staff and other attendants to notice the pachinko machine that is emitting the error notification sound, it may be unpleasant to players playing other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is also a demand for something that allows the volume of the various error notification sounds to be adjusted. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 specifying "error notification volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, error notification volume setting pattern 2 specifying "error notification volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, error notification volume setting pattern 3 specifying "error notification volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, error notification volume setting pattern 4 specifying "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, error notification volume setting pattern 5 specifying "error notification volume 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and error notification volume setting pattern 6 specifying "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner of changing the setting of the volume of the error notification sound may be described as "variant example (5) using a common hardware configuration"). The volume of the error alarm is set to increase from setting value 1 (a volume that is not muted and allows the error alarm to be heard when standing in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error alarm) to setting value 6 (maximum volume that allows the error alarm to be fully heard even when several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error alarm). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a controls the error alarm to be emitted at a volume (error alarm volume setting pattern) that corresponds to the setting value included in the setting change command. This change in the volume of the error alarm can provide variation in the volume of the error alarm during error notifications.

It can also be used as a setting value that can set multiple default luminances for light-emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. The luminance of the light-emitting body that is the object of control by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default luminance. In this case, a default luminance setting pattern 1 that specifies "luminance 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, a default luminance setting pattern 2 that specifies "luminance 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, a default luminance setting pattern 3 that specifies "luminance 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, a default luminance setting pattern 4 that specifies "luminance 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, a default luminance setting pattern 5 that specifies "luminance 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, and a default luminance setting pattern 6 that specifies "luminance 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the aspect of the change setting of the default luminance may be described as "variation example (6) based on a common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the light-emitting body by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, thereby lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light-emitting body. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can adjust the brightness of the light-emitting element that is the target of control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, and can turn on, blink, or set a gradation point for the light-emitting element. Depending on the manner in which the content of the default brightness is changed, it is possible to provide variation in the default brightness of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs.

It can also be used as a setting value that allows multiple settings of the brightness of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs in error notifications for various malfunctions, glitches, and errors. For the lamps controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, an error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" is assigned as setting value 1, an error notification brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as setting value 2, an error notification brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as setting value 3, an error notification brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "error notification brightness 4" is assigned as setting value 4, an error notification brightness setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification brightness 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and an error notification brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" is assigned as setting value 6 (the aspect of changing the brightness setting of the light-emitting elements in error notifications may be described as "variation example (7) based on a common hardware configuration"). The lamp brightness is set to increase from setting value 1 (the lamp brightness is low, but does not go out, and an error notification can be recognized when standing in front of the pachinko machine) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light-emitting body in the error notification by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later, and turns on, blinks, or sets a gradation point of the light-emitting body. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can adjust the brightness of the light-emitting body that is the target of control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, and turns on, blinks, or sets a gradation point of the light-emitting body. Depending on the manner of changing the brightness of the light-emitting body in the error notification, it is possible to provide variation in the brightness of the light-emitting body such as a lamp or LED in the error notification.

The various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned common hardware configuration variants (1) to (7) are displayed on the setting display 1310g when a predetermined setting value display permission condition is met in the setting value confirmation display process performed by the main control MPU 1310a (described later), but they may also be displayed on the setting display 1310g at all times from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until it is powered off (the manner of displaying the setting values may be referred to as "common hardware configuration variant (8)").

Furthermore, any one of the above-mentioned common hardware configuration variations (1) to (8) may be appropriately selected and adopted for the above-mentioned setting key variation (6).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, so that the setting key is turned ON. When the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is pressed, In the case of the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control power-on process described later, clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc., whereas when the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process in the main control power-on process described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. By adopting this mode, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the game, the setting value confirmation display process is never performed. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the game by setting interrupt permission, etc., it never displays the currently set setting value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 in the ball counting process of the main control side power-on process described later, and outputs the counted number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on process described later, and displays the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can display the current setting value set using the base monitor 1310h during the period from when power is restored to when the game progress is started by setting interrupt permission, etc., and when the game progress is started by setting interrupt permission, etc., after power is restored, the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 can be displayed, which eliminates the need to provide the setting display 1310g and contributes to cost reduction.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 67, 70, and 71. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (game situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

The function display unit 1400 (detailed illustration omitted) is equipped with a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that display the game status, a normal pattern display consisting of two LEDs that displays the normal lottery result that is drawn when game ball B passes through gate unit 2003, and a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds related to the passage of game ball B through gate unit 2003.

The function display unit 1400 also includes a first special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the first special lottery result drawn by the reception of game ball B into the first starting port 2002, a first special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of game ball B into the first starting port 2002, a second special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game ball B into the second starting port 2004, and a second special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of game ball B into the second starting port 2004.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a round indicator consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of times (number of rounds) that the opening and closing pattern of the big prize opening 2005 is repeated when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot" or the like.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc., by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

Here, as a noise countermeasure when the functional display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the previous component 1000 outside the play area 5a, a detailed explanation will be given of the multiple wirings (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "wirings") that electrically connect the functional display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 and transmit control signals from the main control board 1310 to the functional display unit 1400.

The wiring FCBL, which is electrically connected via the connector 1400a provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400, is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the upper edge of the rear surface of the rear box 3010 as shown in Figures 70 and 71, and then bent downward toward the rear surface of the rear box 3010, and is gathered together by multiple wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the rear box 3010, and is bent before reaching the upper edge of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, or is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 as is.

Then, when the wiring FCBL is routed to the bottom edge of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left edge of the main control board box 1320 and routed along the bottom edge of the main control board box 1320 to below the connector MFCN for the function display unit, and then electrically connected to the connector MFCN for the function display unit.

In this way, the wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is long, and in particular, the wiring FCBL that is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and to the upper edge of the rear surface of the rear box 3010 is bent downward toward the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and is bundled together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the rear box 3010, and is routed to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, along the right side of the main control board box 1320, to the lower edge of the main control board box 1320. When the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed in this way is located in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main frame 4 shown in FIG. 137.

A decorative board 1131 on which multiple decorative LEDs are mounted is disposed behind the functional display unit 1400. When the wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable electrically connected via a connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of the decorative board 1131, is bent toward the upper rear side of the game panel 1100, it is bent toward the rear side of the rear box 3010 at the upper edge of the front side of the rear box 3010, and when it is drawn to the upper edge of the rear side of the rear box 3010 in a state close to (or in contact with) the above-mentioned wiring FCBL, it is bent toward the lower rear side of the rear box 3010, and is gathered by multiple wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear side of the rear box 3010, and is drawn to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. Then, the wiring UPCBL separates from the path of the wiring FCBL described above, and is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500, and routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, and is routed up to above a specified connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, and then electrically connected to the specified connector.

In this way, the wiring UPCBL electrically connecting the decorative board 1131 arranged behind the functional display unit 1400 and the panel drive board 1720 has a long wiring length, and in particular, the wiring FCBL that is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and to the upper edge of the rear of the rear box 3010 is bent downward on the rear of the rear box 3010 and is gathered together by multiple wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear of the rear box 3010 and routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper edge of the drive board unit 1700. In this way, the area where the wiring UPCBL is routed is located in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main frame 4 shown in Figure 153 when the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, just like the above-mentioned wiring FCBL.

As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide passage that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B guided by the single guide passage of the ball guiding unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

As described above, game balls B become charged and emit electromagnetic noise by being polished in the island equipment of the game hall, or by rubbing against each other as they circulate between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, causing static electricity discharge. For this reason, static electricity is likely to accumulate in and around the areas where ball tanks 552 and payout units 560 that can store game balls B are attached.

The main control board 1310, which will be described in detail later, is equipped with the main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data. This main control MPU 1310a includes a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in reset circuit"). Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be disabled by controlling it with a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and the main control side power on processing described later is executed again. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a will be completely erased (cleared). In other words, if a forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, the RAM will be cleared when the main control MPU 1310a starts up again.

In addition, in this embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type package is used for the main control MPU 1310a, and when the main control MPU 1310a is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310, the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protrude from the soldering surface (the surface opposite the mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. In other words, the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

In this way, static electricity easily accumulates in the areas where the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 are attached and the surrounding areas, so when electromagnetic noise is released by electrostatic discharge, it may enter the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310, which are located in front of the dispensing unit 560, or it may enter the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510, which are located behind the function display unit 1400. As a result, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may escape and enter the wiring UPCBL, or conversely, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL may escape and enter the wiring FCBL.

For example, the wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed in a straight line from a predetermined position on the right side of the main control board box 1320 to the left side of the main control board box 1320 within the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (for example, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the upper or lower side of the main control board box 1320 at a position on the right side of the main control board box 1320 that is about one-quarter of the length from the upper side of the main control board box 1320), and then it is bent toward the lower side of the main control board box 1320 when it passes above the connector MFCN for the function display unit, which is located from the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310 toward the left side. When the wiring FCBL is bent and pulled out from the bottom edge of the main control board box 1320 and then electrically connected to the functional display unit connector MFCN, if electromagnetic noise intrudes into this wiring FCBL, and the wiring FCBL is routed through the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, and passes through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (i.e., in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) that corresponds to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a, electromagnetic noise will intrude through the wiring FCBL into the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, and the main control MPU 1310a may be forced to reset by its own built-in reset circuit due to the influence of this intruding electromagnetic noise.

In addition, if a wiring accommodating groove is formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 instead of in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320, the wiring FCBL is accommodated along the wiring accommodating groove instead of in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320, and is pulled out from the bottom edge of the main control substrate box 1320 and then electrically connected to the functional display unit connector MFCN. In this case, if electromagnetic noise invades the FCBL wiring, as described above, when the FCBL wiring is accommodated and routed along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and passes through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (i.e., in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) that corresponds to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a, the electromagnetic noise will invade the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the FCBL wiring, and the main control MPU 1310a may be forced to reset by its own built-in reset circuit due to the influence of this invading electromagnetic noise.

In this embodiment, the positional relationship between the mounting position of the connector MFCN for the functional display unit to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a is such that the connector MFCN for the functional display unit is disposed from the center of the bottom side of the main control board 1310 toward the left side, and the main control MPU 1310a is disposed above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310. In other words, in this embodiment, the connector MFCN for the functional display unit is disposed below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, while the main control MPU 1310a is disposed above this center line, so that the connector MFCN for the functional display unit and the main control MPU 1310a are disposed apart on the main control board 1310.

This allows the main control MPU 1310a to be positioned away from the functional display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, thereby preventing electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space that separates the functional display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL, through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

In addition, by positioning the main control MPU 1310a away from the functional display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, electromagnetic noise entering through this wiring FCBL can be attenuated on the main control board 1310 or in the space separating the functional display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 so that the main control MPU 1310a is not affected even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL. In this respect, too, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is disposed with the right edge of its package spaced at least a predetermined distance (hereinafter referred to as the "first wiring distance dimension") from the right edge of the main control board 1310. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right edge of the main control board box 1320, and this is to prevent electromagnetic noise that has entered this wiring FCBL from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having the first wiring distance dimension from this wiring FCBL.

In addition, as described above, the wiring FCBL electrically connecting the functional display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 cannot be routed within the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (or accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200), and is instead routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. Since the wiring FCBL is bent toward the left side and routed along the bottom side of the main control board box 1320 to below the connector MFCN for the functional display unit, and then electrically connected to the connector MFCN for the functional display unit, a large distance (hereinafter referred to as the "second wiring distance dimension") can be secured between the wiring FCBL routed along the bottom side of the main control board box 1320 and the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. This second wiring distance dimension has a larger distance dimension than the first wiring distance dimension. This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic noise that has entered this wiring FCBL from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having the second wiring distance dimension from this wiring FCBL. In this respect, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

In this embodiment, the functional display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL, but the functional display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 can also be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay board 1710 with an element that can reduce or remove the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL described above (that is, it is preferable to provide an element that can reduce or remove electromagnetic noise for each of the multiple wirings FCBL that transmit control signals from the main control board 1310 to the functional display unit 1400). This makes it possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise that enters via the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Examples of such elements include resistors and filter circuits. Observation of the waveform of electromagnetic noise has shown that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs), and filter circuits are designed to pass signals with a waveform width larger than this waveform width.

In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., such elements can also include EMC countermeasure components (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.). When coils or beads are used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to the multiple wirings FCBL, and when capacitors are used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to the multiple wirings FCBL. When steeper attenuation characteristics are required, a circuit formed by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the multiple wirings FCBL, or a circuit formed by combining beads and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the multiple wirings FCBL.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 70 and 71. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see Fig. 111) that controls the performance presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission performance, sound performance, moving performance, etc., and a performance display control unit 1512 for controlling performance images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the performance display device 1600, etc.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 72 and 73. The effect display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is disposed behind the game panel 1100. The performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear side of the rear unit 3000 via the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The performance display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the rear box 3010 at approximately the center. The display device 1600 can be seen from the front (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center gadget 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. The display device 1600 uses white LEDs as a backlight. The performance display device is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device. The performance display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display specified still images and videos.

The performance display device 1600 is equipped with two upper fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the top surface and a lower fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the bottom surface. With the LCD screen facing forward, the performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 by inserting the two upper fixed pieces 1601 from the diagonal rear of the rear box 3010 into two fixing grooves 3010c opening into the upper inner peripheral surface of the frame-shaped LCD mounting part 3010b of the rear box 3010 described later, and then moving the lower fixed piece 1602 side forward to insert the lower fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020 and sliding the locking mechanism 3020 to the right when viewed from behind.

[5-8. Overall structure of the table unit]
The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 76 to 79. Figure 76(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. Figure 77 is a front view of the game board in a state where the game panel is made opaque and the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area in which the game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. Figure 78 is an enlarged front view of the circulation passage group in the upper right corner of Figure 77, and Figure 79 is an enlarged front view of the attacker unit in the lower right corner of Figure 77.

The front unit 2000 is attached from the front to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, with its front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and part of its rear end penetrating the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 and protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The front unit 2000 is equipped with a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can receive the game ball B that is shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open and can receive the game ball B at a different position in the game area 5a from the general winning openings 2001, a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, a second starting opening 2004 that can receive the game ball B depending on the normal lottery result that is drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, and a special winning opening 2005 that can receive the game ball B depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball B is received at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

The multiple (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 are located below the vertical center in the game area 5a, with three on the left side and one on the right side of the horizontal center. The left general winning opening 2001 is located at the bottom of the game area 5a, and the right general winning opening 2001 is located near the right end of the game area 5a, lower than the vertical center. The first starting opening 2002 is located directly above the outlet 1008, which is at the bottom end in the horizontal center of the game area 5a. The gate section 2003 is located above the right general winning opening 2001 and approximately in the vertical center. The second starting opening 2004 is located below the right general winning opening 2001 and at a higher position than the first starting opening 2002. The large winning opening 2005 is located to the left of the second starting opening 2004, at a height slightly lower than the first starting opening 2002.

The front unit 2000 is equipped with a start port unit 2100, which is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and one general winning port 2001; a side unit 2200, which is attached to the left of the start port unit 2100 as seen from the front, along the inner rail 1002, and has two general winning ports 2001; an attacca unit 2400, which is attached to the right of the start port unit 2100 as seen from the front, which is the lower right corner of the play area 5a as seen from the front, and has one general winning port 2001, a second start port 2004, and a large winning port 2005; and a frame-shaped center device 2500, which is attached slightly above the center of the play area 5a as seen from the front, above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and has a gate portion 2003.

[5-8a. Starting unit]
The start opening unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed directly above the outlet 1008 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The start opening unit 2100 has a first start opening 2002 that is always open upward with a width that can receive only one game ball B, and one general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward with a width that can receive only one game ball B, located at the lower left of the first start opening 2002. The start opening unit 2100 is entirely formed transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be seen (see FIG. 74, etc.).

The start port unit 2100 includes a first start port sensor 2101 (see FIG. 77, etc.) that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a guide path 2102 (see FIG. 76) that guides the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and then discharges it downward (above the board holder 1200).

When the start opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel board 1110, the general winning opening 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110 and is open upward, and the first start opening 2002 is located directly below the center of the stage 2503 of the center gimmick 2500 described below. Therefore, when a game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, there is an extremely high probability that it will be received by the first start opening 2002.

When the start port unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, the first start port 2002 is located directly below the central release section 2503a of the stage 2503 in the center role 2500 described below, and is configured so that the game ball B released from the central release section 2503a of the stage 2503 is received by the first start port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes two general winning ports 2001 that are open to always receive the game ball B, a first shelf 2201 that is inclined to the upper left of the two general winning ports 2001 so that the right end is lower, and a second shelf 2202 that is inclined to the upper part of the two general winning ports 2001 so that the right end is lower. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1002.

The side unit 2200 has two general winning openings 2001 located at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100. The two general winning openings 2001 are arranged back to back, side by side. The left general winning opening 2001 opens toward the upper left, and the right general winning opening 2001 opens toward the right.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the left end of the first shelf 2201 is located near the periphery of the game area 5a, and the game ball B that has flowed down the area to the left of the center device 2500 can be guided to the right. This first shelf 2201 is inclined so that the extension line of its upper surface passes between the first starting hole 2002 and the stage 2503. The second shelf 2202 is inclined so that the extension line of its upper surface passes through the opening of the general winning hole 2001 of the starting hole unit 2100.

The side unit 2200 is entirely transparent, allowing the rear side (rear unit 3000) to be seen (see FIG. 74, etc.). The side unit 2200 is attached to the front of the panel board 1110, so that the two general winning openings 2001, the first shelf 2201, and the second shelf 2202 protrude forward from the front of the panel board 1110. This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the guide path of the rear unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the rear unit 3000 (see FIG. 111).

[5-8c. Attacker Unit]
The attacca unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is located in the game area 5a, to the right of the starting hole unit 2100 as viewed from the front, which is the lower right corner as viewed from the front, and is attached from the front to the front of the panel board 1110. The attacca unit 2400 is formed almost entirely transparent, so that the rear side (back unit 3000) can be seen (see FIG. 74, etc.). This attacca unit 2400 has one of the four general winning holes 2001, a second starting hole 2004, and a large winning hole 2005 (see FIG. 79, etc.).

When viewed from the front, the Attacca unit 2400 has an external shape that is L-shaped, with the upper right end extending upward from approximately the center in the left-right direction. In this Attacca unit 2400, the general prize winning opening 2001 is always open upward in the upper right corner, the second starting opening 2004 can be opened upward at the lower left of the general prize winning opening 2001, and the large prize winning opening 2005 can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004.

The Attacca unit 2400 has a general winning opening 2001 that opens slightly larger than the game ball B. In addition, the Attacca unit 2400 has a second starting opening 2004 that opens upward and is slightly larger than the game ball, and a large winning opening 2005 that opens upward in the left-right direction with a width of about 3 to 5 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

The attacca unit 2400 is equipped with a general prize opening sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001, a second start opening sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a large prize opening sensor 2403 that detects a game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 111, etc.).

The attacca unit 2400 is equipped with a second starting gate door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second starting gate 2004, a starting gate solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the second starting gate door 2411 in response to the result of a normal lottery drawn by the passage of a game ball B through the gate section 2003, a large prize winning gate door 2413 that can open and close the large prize winning gate 2005, and an attacca solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the large prize winning gate door 2413 in response to the result of a first special lottery or a second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of a game ball B through the first starting gate 2002 or the second starting gate 2004.

As shown in FIG. 79 etc., the Attacca unit 2400 is provided with an Attacca left passage 2421 and an Attacca right passage 2422 on either side of the general winning port 2001 located in the upper right corner through which the game ball B can flow downward, a second starting port guide shelf 2423 that slopes downward from directly below the Attacca left passage 2421 to the left and has the second starting port 2004 opening in the middle, and a large winning port guide shelf 2424 that slopes downward from a position spaced to the left from the left end of the second starting port guide shelf 2423 below the second starting port guide shelf 2423 and has the large winning port 2005 opening in the middle.

The attacca unit 2400 also includes a communication port 2425 that communicates with the attacca right passage 2422 on the right end side of the second starting port guide shelf 2423, an attacca lower right passage 2426 that extends from the right end side of the second starting port guide shelf 2423 below the large prize opening 2005 and then extends to the left end of the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 so as to become lower toward the left, and an intermediate passage 2427 that extends from between the second starting port guide shelf 2423 and the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 below the large prize opening 2005 and communicates with the attacca lower right passage 2426.

The attacca unit 2400 further includes a partition 2428 that extends downward from the lower end of the general winning opening 2001 and separates the attacca left passage 2421 from the attacca right passage 2422, and forms a communication opening 2425 between the lower end and the second starting opening guide shelf 2423, and an inclined portion 2429 that is inclined to the left as it moves upward from the lower end of the partition 2428.

The second starting port door 2411, which allows the second starting port 2004 opening in the second starting port guide shelf 2423 to be opened and closed, extends forward and backward and is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lower, and the left end is provided so that it can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. This second starting port door 2411 can close the second starting port 2004 by making it impossible to receive game balls B into the second starting port 2004 by positioning the right end side above the horizontal and slightly lower than the right end of the opening of the second starting port 2004. When the second starting port door 2411 is in a state where the second starting port 2004 is closed, it can guide game balls B that have circulated on the second starting port guide shelf 2423 from the upstream side (right side) to the left.

The second starting port door 2411 can be rotated counterclockwise from a state in which the second starting port 2004 is closed so that the right end moves upward around the left end, thereby allowing the reception of a game ball B into the second starting port 2004 and opening (opening) the second starting port 2004. When the second starting port door 2411 is raised so that the right end side rises to open the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door 2411 rises from the second starting port guide shelf 2423, obstructing the path of the game ball B rolling on the second starting port guide shelf 2423, allowing the game ball B to be received into the second starting port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is ON (when energized).

The large prize opening door 2413, which can open and close the large prize opening 2005 that opens in the large prize opening guide shelf 2424, is formed in a plate shape that extends forward and backward and extends left and right so that the left end is lower, and can open and close the large prize opening 2005 that opens upward by moving forward and backward. The large prize opening door 2413 can close the large prize opening 2005 by moving forward, and when the large prize opening 2005 is closed, it can guide the game ball B that has circulated from the upstream side (right side) of the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 to the left. In addition, the large prize opening door 2413 can open the large prize opening 2005 by moving backward by the drive of the attacca solenoid 2414, and can accept the game ball B that has circulated through the second start opening guide shelf 2423 and the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 of the center role 2500 into the large prize opening 2005. This large prize opening door 2413 closes the large prize opening 2005 when the attacca solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the large prize opening 2005 when the attacca solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the Attacka unit 2400 has a first receiving opening 2007 that can be opened upward inside the large prize opening 2005, and a second receiving opening 2008 that is always open upward to the right of the first receiving opening 2007. The attacca unit 2400 also includes a first receiving port sensor 2404 which detects a game ball B received by the first receiving port 2007, a second receiving port sensor 2405 which detects a game ball B received by the second receiving port 2008, a distribution piece 2415 which opens and closes the first receiving port 2007 (distributing the game ball B received by the large prize port 2005 and circulating inside to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008), and a distribution solenoid 2416 which opens and closes the distribution piece 2415 in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn upon the reception of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The sorting piece 2415 is formed in a plate shape extending back and forth inside the large prize winning opening 2005 and extending left and right so that the right end is lower, and can open and close the first receiving opening 2007 (V winning opening) that opens upward by moving back and forth. The sorting piece 2415 closes the first receiving opening 2007 by moving forward, and can guide the game ball B received in the large prize winning opening 2005 to the right and receive it in the second receiving opening 2008 that is always open upward. In addition, the sorting piece 2415 opens the first receiving opening 2007 by moving backward by the drive of the sorting solenoid 2416, and can receive the game ball B received in the large prize winning opening 2005 in the first receiving opening 2007 with a high probability. This distribution piece 2415 closes the first receiving opening 2007 when the distribution solenoid 2416 is OFF (not energized), and opens the first receiving opening 2007 when the distribution solenoid 2416 is ON (energized). In other words, the distribution piece 2415 can distribute the game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005 so that it can be received in either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008.

When this attacca unit 2400 is attached to the front of the panel board 1110, the general winning opening 2001 is located downstream of the circulation passage group 2520 and the gate section 2003 in the center role 2500 described later and below the gate section 2003 (slightly to the right of directly below), the second starting opening 2004 is located at a height between the stage 2503 of the center role 2500 and the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the large winning opening 2005 is located below the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. In addition, when attached to the panel board 1110, there are multiple obstacle nails N between the lower end of the circulation passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 and the upper end (general winning opening 2001).

Next, the flow of game ball B in the attacca unit 2400 will be explained. When assembled on the game board 5, the general winning opening 2001 and second starting opening 2004 of the attacca unit 2400 are located above the stage 2503 of the center role 2500, so even if game ball B is released from the stage 2503, it will not be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or second starting opening 2004 of the attacca unit 2400. Therefore, only game ball B that flows down the right side of the center role 2500 (distribution passage group 2520) can be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or second starting opening 2004 of the attacca unit 2400. Downstream of the circulation passage group 2520 of the center device 2500, the attacca left passage 2421, the general winning port 2001, and the attacca right passage 2422 open in a line from the left, and the game ball B that flows down the right side of the center device 2500 will enter one of them.

When the game ball B supplied to the upper part of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacca unit 2400 through the circulation passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 is received by the general winning opening 2001, it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401 and then discharged downward (above the board holder 1200) at the rear side of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B is not received by the general winning opening 2001 and enters the attacca left passage 2421 on the left side of the general winning opening 2001, it falls onto the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 and circulates to the second starting opening 2004 side (left side) according to the inclination of the second starting opening guide shelf 2423. When the second starting opening 2004 is closed by the second starting opening door 2411, it circulates to the left on the second starting opening door 2411 and is released to the left from the left end of the second starting opening guide shelf 2423. If the second starting port 2004 is open when the game ball B passes through the second starting port guide shelf 2423, the game ball B will be accepted into the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability.

The game ball B received in the second start opening 2004 is detected by the second start opening sensor 2402 and then discharged downward (above the board holder 1200) at the rear of the game panel 1100. If the game ball B that flows down the right side of the center device 2500 is not received in the second start opening 2004, it is released to the left side of the large prize opening 2005 via the second start opening guide shelf 2423.

Because multiple obstacle nails N are planted to the left of the second start opening guide shelf 2423, the game ball B released to the left from the second start opening guide shelf 2423 will flow down to either the large prize opening 2005 side or the middle passage 2427 side. If the large prize opening 2005 is closed by the large prize opening door 2413 when it flows down to the large prize opening 2005 side, it will be guided to the left by the large prize opening door 2413 and released to the left from the left end of the large prize opening guide shelf 2424. If the large prize opening door 2413 closing the large prize opening 2005 is retracted and the large prize opening 2005 is open, the game ball B that flows down from the second start opening guide shelf 2423 to the large prize opening 2005 side will be accepted by the large prize opening 2005. After being received by the large prize opening 2005, the game ball B is detected by the large prize opening sensor 2403 and then discharged downward (above the board holder 1200) at the rear of the game panel 1100.

The game ball B that enters the middle passage 2427 from the second start port guide shelf 2423 and the game ball B that is released to the left from the big prize port guide shelf 2424 pass through the outlet 1008 and are discharged downward (above the board holder 1200) at the rear of the game panel 1100.

On the other hand, if a game ball B supplied to the upper part of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacca unit 2400 through the circulation passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 is not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and enters the attacca right passage 2422 to the right of the general winning opening 2001, it abuts against the step 1005a of the right rail 1005 and bounces to the left. In this embodiment, the second start opening guide shelf 2423 is provided so that the extension line of the second start opening guide shelf 2423 coincides with the step 1005a of the right rail 1005, so that the game ball B that enters the attacca right passage 2422 and bounces off the step 1005a of the right rail 1005 will fall (circulate) onto the second start opening guide shelf 2423 through the communication opening 2425 with a high probability.

When game ball B that enters the attacca right passage 2422 and hits the step 1005a of the right rail 1005 bounces upward from the communication port 2425, the game ball B will hit the inclined portion 2429 because the lower end of the partition 2428 that forms the upper end side of the communication port 2425 is provided with an inclined portion 2429. Since the inclined portion 2429 is inclined so that the upper end is located to the right of the lower end, the game ball B that hits the inclined portion 2429 will be reflected downward toward the attacca lower right passage 2426 and will hit the attacca lower right passage 2426. Also, when game ball B that hits the step 1005a of the right rail 1005 bounces downward from the communication port 2425, it will hit the attacca lower right passage 2426.

The game ball B that enters the attacker's lower right passage 2426 is discharged from the outlet 1008 outside the game area 5a without having a chance to be received by the second starting port 2004 or the big prize port 2005.

The attacca unit 2400 also has a sub-function display unit 2450 above the second starting port 2004. The sub-function display unit 2450 has multiple (six in this case) full-color LEDs. The sub-function display unit 2450 is linked to the normal pattern display, first special pattern display, and second special pattern display of the function display unit 1400, and displays the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, and the first and second special lottery results drawn when the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, by turning on or blinking the LEDs or by the color of the light emitted.

Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 is equipped with a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetism (see FIG. 111). This magnetic sensor 2470 is for detecting fraudulent activity using magnets.

[5-8d. Center role]
The center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 is located in the game area 5a, above the starting unit 2100, and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center role 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the performance display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and various performance units provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen from the front. In addition, the center role 2500 is formed almost entirely transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be seen.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center device 2500, except for the bottom edge, protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that the game ball B shot into the game area 5a cannot enter the frame.

The center device 2500 is provided with a warp entrance 2501 on the outer periphery on the left side when viewed from the front, which opens to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter, a warp exit 2502 which opens into the frame and allows the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 to be released, and a stage 2503 which allows the game ball B released from the warp exit 2502 to be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in the left-right direction.

The stage 2503 of the center role 2500 is curved with a recessed central side in the left-right direction, and is formed in a wavy (W-shaped) shape such that the position corresponding to directly above the first starting hole 2002 of the starting hole unit 2100, that is, the approximate center position in the left-right direction when the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), is slightly higher than both the left and right sides. This stage 2503 is inclined so that the part (center release part 2503a) that is slightly higher than both the left and right sides in the left-right center and the lowest part on both the left and right sides (side release part 2503b) are lower toward the front, and the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

When the center device 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the elevated portion in the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction (the central release section 2503a) is located directly above the first starting hole 2002 of the starting hole unit 2100. As a result, when a game ball B is released from the central release section 2503a in the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first starting hole 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The center device 2500 has a gate section 2003 that is located lower than the center in the vertical direction and to the right of the right outer peripheral surface. The gate section 2003 is perforated vertically with a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through, and is provided with a gate sensor 2506 that detects the passage of the game ball. The gate section 2003 is provided with a gap between it and the frame-shaped outer peripheral surface of the center device 2500 that allows only one game ball B to pass through.

The center device 2500 also comprises an upper right peripheral wall 2510 that forms part of the upper outer periphery and slopes downward from a position to the left of the center toward the right, and a circulation passage group 2520 located in the upper right corner and consisting of multiple passages through which the game ball B can circulate. The circulation passage group 2520 extends vertically from near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall 2510 to above the gate portion 2003.

As shown in Figures 77 and 78, the circulation passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center device 2500, and is composed of a first circulation passage 2521 and a second circulation passage 2522 provided adjacent to the left side of the first circulation passage 2521. The first circulation passage 2521 extends in an arc shape from the entrance side at the upper end downward along the periphery of the game area 5a (right rail 1005), and is bent in a crank shape to the left near the lower end, with the exit opening downward. The exit at the lower end of the first circulation passage 2521 is located slightly to the right of directly above the gate section 2003.

The second flow passage 2522 has an entrance at the upper end that opens to the left of the entrance of the first flow passage 2521 with a gap therebetween, bends to the right in a crank shape near the upper end, extends downward in an arc adjacent to the first flow passage 2521, bends to the left in a crank shape near the lower end, then bends to the right in a crank shape, and opens downward adjacent to the outlet of the first flow passage 2521. This allows the second flow passage 2522 to reduce the flow speed of the game ball B more than the first flow passage 2521. In addition, the first flow passage 2521 and the second flow passage 2522 each have a plurality of protrusions 2523 spaced apart in the flow direction of the game ball B, and the game ball B comes into contact with the protrusions 2523 to suppress its flow speed.

When the center gadget 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, an upstream space 2511 through which the game ball B can pass is formed between the upper right peripheral wall 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) of the previous component 1000, which is upstream of the flow passage group 2520. In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, the entrance at the upper end of the first flow passage 2521 of the flow passage group 2520 is located directly below the impact stopper 1006, and the first flow passage 2521 extends along the right rail 1005 (periphery of the game area 5a). Furthermore, a gap through which the game ball B can pass is formed between the gate portion 2003 of the center gadget 2500 and the right rail 1005 (periphery of the game area 5a).

[5-8e. Flow of game balls through the distribution passages of the center role]
Next, the flow of the game ball B through the circulation passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a will be described in detail with reference to Figures 77 to 79. In a state where the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the circulation passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 and the gate unit 2003, and between the gate unit 2003 and the general winning port 2001 of the attacca unit 2400. The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the circulation passage group 2520 and the gate unit 2003 are adjusted so that the game ball B that has flowed through the first circulation passage 2521 flows to the right side of the gate unit 2003 (between the gate unit 2003 and the right rail 1005) with a high probability. In addition, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the circulation passage group 2520 and the gate section 2003 are adjusted so that the game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 has a high probability of passing through the gate section 2003. Furthermore, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the circulation passage group 2520 and the gate section 2003 are adjusted so that the game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 has the second highest probability of circulating on the left side of the gate section 2003 after the gate section 2003.

On the other hand, the multiple obstacle nails N planted between the gate section 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacca unit 2400 are adjusted so that the game ball B that has flowed on the right side of the gate section 2003 will enter the attacca right passage 2422 of the attacca unit 2400 with a high probability. Also, the multiple obstacle nails N planted between the gate section 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacca unit 2400 are adjusted so that the game ball B that has flowed on the gate section 2003 or the left side of the gate section 2003 will enter the attacca left passage 2421 to the left of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacca unit 2400 with a high probability, and are adjusted so that the general winning opening 2001 has the second highest probability after the attacca left passage 2421.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 (upstream space portion 2511) of the center role 2500, the game ball B flows through either the first flow passage 2521 or the second flow passage 2522 of the flow passage group 2520. More specifically, when the game ball B is hit with enough strength to abut against the impact stop portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that constitutes a part of the periphery of the play area 5a (so-called right hit), the game ball B that abuts against the impact stop portion 1006 enters the first flow passage 2521. The game ball B that enters this first flow passage 2521 passes through the right side of the gate portion 2003 with a high probability due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the downstream end of the first flow passage 2521 and the gate portion 2003. Then, game ball B that passes through the right side of gate 2003 will enter the attacca right passage 2422 with a high probability due to multiple obstacle nails N planted between gate 2003 and attacca unit 2400. Game ball B that enters the attacca right passage 2422 will circulate through either the second start port guide shelf 2423 or the attacca lower right passage 2426.

As described above, game balls B that have circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 do not pass through the gate section 2003 very often, so the normal lottery result that is implemented when game balls B pass through the gate section 2003 is not often drawn, and the possibility of drawing a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 is open is low. Therefore, even if game balls B that have circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 circulate through the second starting port induction shelf 2423 via the attacca right passage 2422, the second starting port 2004 is often closed and the game balls B are not often accepted by the second starting port 2004, so there are few opportunities for special prizes such as the drawing of the second special lottery result or the payout of game balls B by accepting the game balls B into the second starting port 2004. Therefore, when game balls B circulate through the first circulation passage 2521, the player is given relatively few special prizes.

Note that, although the above describes the case where the ball is hit from the right side, game ball B that is hit with enough force to fly over the entrance to the second flow passage 2522 that opens near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 will also enter the first flow passage 2521, resulting in the same result as above.

On the other hand, when the game ball B that has been shot into the upstream space 2511 enters the second circulation passage 2522 and circulates through the second circulation passage 2522, there is a high probability that it will pass through the gate section 2003 due to the multiple obstacle nails N planted between the downstream end of the second circulation passage 2522 and the gate section 2003, and the normal lottery result will be drawn. The game ball B that has passed through the gate section 2003 enters the attacca left passage 2421 with a high probability due to the multiple obstacle nails N planted between the gate section 2003 and the attacca unit 2400, and circulates from the attacca left passage 2421 to the second starting port guide shelf 2423.

At this time, game ball B passes through gate section 2003 and the normal lottery result is drawn, so if the normal lottery result is a "normal win", second start port 2004 opens in a predetermined pattern, and game ball B may be accepted by second start port 2004. When game ball B is accepted by second start port 2004, a second special lottery result is drawn and a bonus is awarded, such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out. Therefore, when game ball B circulates through second circulation passage 2522, the bonus awarded to the player is relatively high (large).

Because of this, the player can adjust the impact strength of game ball B so that game ball B is shot into the game area 5a with the same impact strength that causes game ball B to enter the upstream space 2511 and the second flow passage 2522, as there is a higher chance of a special bonus being awarded through the second flow passage 2522. This can add variety to the operation of shooting game ball B, making it less likely for the player to become bored, and allowing the player to enjoy the operation of shooting game ball B aimed at the entrance of the second flow passage 2522, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 is a "jackpot" or the like that generates a favorable game state, the large prize opening 2005 will be in a state in which it is possible to accept game ball B in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, and when game ball B is accepted into the large prize opening 2005, a large number of game balls B will be paid out. If a player is required to adjust the strength with which game ball B is hit during such a favorable game state ("jackpot game state"), some players may feel impatient or irritated, which may reduce their interest in the game. However, in this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit to the right and flows through the first flow passage 2521, it flows to the right of the gate portion 2003 and the right attacker passage 2422, then bounces off the step 1005a of the right rail 1005 toward the connecting port 2425, and falls through the connecting port 2425 onto the second starting port guide shelf 2423, allowing the game ball B to flow to the large prize port guide shelf 2424 side (large prize port 2005 side). Therefore, the game ball B can be accepted into the large prize port 2005 with an easy hitting operation without having to make subtle adjustments to the hitting operation, allowing the player to enjoy playing in a favorable game state, and the hitting operation of the game ball B can be made more pronounced depending on the game state, preventing the player's interest from declining.

[5-8f. Another embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory]
Next, the circulation passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 of the embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 to 82. Figure 80(a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of the circulation passage group of the center role different from Figure 78 etc., and (b) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of the circulation passage group of the center role further different from (a). Figure 81(a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of the circulation passage group of the center role further different from Figure 80, and (b) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of the circulation passage group of the center role further different. Figure 82 is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of the circulation passage group of the center role further different from Figures 80 and 81. In Figures 80 and 81, the same reference numerals are used for the same components as those described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 80(a), compared to FIG. 78, the inlet at the upper end of the second flow passage 2522 is spaced a distance to the left from the inlet of the first flow passage 2521. This group of flow passages 2520 can also achieve the same effects as those described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 80(b), the angle of the impact stopper 1006 in the previous component 1000 is changed so that the game ball B that it comes into contact with bounces back toward the entrance of the second flow passage 2522, and the portion of the upper right peripheral wall 2510 between the entrance of the first flow passage 2521 and the entrance of the second flow passage 2522 is inclined so that the second flow passage 2522 side (left side) is lower. This makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the second flow passage 2522 side, and therefore the adjustment range of the impact strength of the game ball B entering the second flow passage 2522 is wider, making it easier to perform the operation of hitting the game ball B aimed at the entrance of the second flow passage 2522.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 81(a), while the inlets of the first flow passage 2521 and the second flow passage 2522 in the flow passage group 2520 in FIG. 78 and FIG. 80 are open upward, the upstream sides of the first flow passage 2521 and the second flow passage 2522 are extended to near the center in the left-right direction above the center role 2500, and the inlets are lined up vertically and open to the left.

In this embodiment, a portion of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the play area 5a) constitutes a portion of the first flow passage 2521, and a portion of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 constitutes a portion of the second flow passage 2522. Also, in this embodiment, the left-right length of the upstream space portion 2511 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the play area 5a) is the length from the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 to the respective entrances of the first flow passage 2521 and the second flow passage 2522, which is narrower than the upstream space portion 2511 shown in Figures 78 and 80.

In this embodiment, in order to make the game ball B enter the entrance of the second flow passage 2522, it is necessary to hit the game ball B with a hitting strength that makes it abut against a narrow portion to the left of the entrance of the second flow passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510, or with a hitting strength that makes it enter directly into the entrance of the second flow passage 2522 that opens to the left, so the adjustment range of the hitting strength of the game ball B is narrower than in the embodiments of Figures 78 and 80. Also, when the game ball B hit into the upstream space portion 2511 to the left of the entrances of the first flow passage 2521 and the second flow passage 2522 abuts against the left end (the portion between the two entrances) of the wall portion that separates the first flow passage 2521 and the second flow passage 2522, depending on the momentum and angle of the rebounded game ball B to the left, it may deviate from the upstream space portion 2511. In other words, even if game ball B is shot with enough strength to enter the upstream space 2511, it may deviate to the left from the upstream space 2511 and circulate to the left of the center device 2500 without entering either the first circulation passage 2521 or the second circulation passage 2522. Because of this, the difficulty of the operation of shooting game ball B increases, which can increase the player's motivation to shoot game ball B and allow the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the game medium, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 81(b) is the embodiment of FIG. 81(a) in which a branching section 2524 is provided in the middle of the first flow passage 2521, which is connected in one direction to the second flow passage 2522. The branching section 2524 is provided directly above the section of the second flow passage 2522 that bends downward from the right end of the section (upper right peripheral wall section 2510) that extends left and right. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the first flow passage 2521, depending on the hitting strength (if the hitting strength is weak), the game ball B will branch off to the second flow passage 2522 side at the branching section 2524, making it easier for the game ball B to circulate through the second flow passage 2522 than in the embodiment of FIG. 81(a).

In order to allow the game ball B to enter the second flow passage 2522, it is necessary to hit the game ball B with a force weaker than that of the game ball B entering the first flow passage 2521. Also, since the branching section 2524, which is connected to the first flow passage 2521, is provided above the part of the second flow passage 2522 that bends downward, the game ball B that has entered the second flow passage 2522 does not bounce upward (towards the branching section 2524) at the part that bends downward, and does not enter the first flow passage 2521 side through the branching section 2524. In other words, the branching section 2524 is connected in one direction from the first flow passage 2521 to the second flow passage 2522.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521, which has a branching section 2524 in the middle, and flows through the first circulation passage 2521, it branches off at the branching section 2524 to either the first circulation passage 2521 side or the second circulation passage 2522 side, making the player nervous and excited depending on which side the game ball B will branch off to at the branching section 2524, and allowing the player to enjoy the flow of the game ball B within the first circulation passage 2521, preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the player shoots game ball B aiming at the second circulation passage 2522, but game ball B enters the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521, there is a possibility that the game ball will branch off to the second circulation passage 2522 at the branching point 2524 of the first circulation passage 2521. Therefore, the player can be kept on edge and excited depending on whether or not the game ball will branch off to the second circulation passage 2522 at the branching point 2524, which can entertain the player. In addition, if the game ball branches off to the second circulation passage 2522 at the branching point 2524, the player's mistake in the shooting operation is covered and game ball B will flow through the desired second circulation passage 2522, which can make the player feel like he has made a gain and can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 82, the second circulation passage 2522 has a bypass section 2525 that crosses the frame of the center device 2500. In this embodiment, the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 opens upward at a position to the left of the left end of the upper right peripheral wall section 2510. Therefore, all game balls B that are hit into the upstream space section 2511 above the upper right peripheral wall section 2510 will circulate through the first circulation passage 2521. According to this embodiment, when game ball B enters the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 and flows through the bypass section 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center device 2500, so that the circulation of game ball B can be made noticeable to the player. Therefore, when game ball B flows through the bypass section 2525, the player can be made to think that something good will happen afterwards. This allows the player to perform an operation to shoot game ball B aimed at the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 having the bypass section 2525, and the player can enjoy the operation of shooting game ball B, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

[5-9. Back unit]
The rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 83 to 86. Fig. 83 is a perspective view of the rear unit of the game board as seen from the front, and Fig. 84 is a perspective view of the rear unit of the game board as seen from the back. Fig. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Fig. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the back. The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the performance display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The rear unit 3000 is equipped with a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism 3020, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and allows the performance display device 1600 to be detachably attached. The rear unit 3000 also has a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 provided in the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (see FIG. 111).

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear first performance unit 3100 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear second performance unit 3200 attached to the rear box 3010 behind the rear first performance unit 3100, a rear third performance unit 3300 attached to the rear box 3010 behind the rear second performance unit 3200, a rear left ball discharge unit 3030 attached to the front of the rear second performance unit 3200 and receiving and discharging downward the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and a rear right ball discharge unit 3040 receiving and discharging downward the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, the second start port 2004, and the large winning port 2005 of the attacca unit 2400.

The rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 is box-shaped with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a flat frame-like LCD mounting section 3010b that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame at the upper edge of the LCD mounting section 3010b into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the performance display device 1600 is inserted, and a cutout 3010d cut from the rear end to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 near the center in the left-right direction of the lower edge of the LCD mounting section 3010b, into which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached (see Figures 85 and 86, etc.).

The opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 is formed to be approximately the same size as the display screen of the performance display device 1600. The LCD mounting section 3010b is also formed to be large enough to fit the performance display device 1600 into the frame. The rear box 3010 has a locking mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the cutout section 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from behind, so that it can slide left and right.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface abutting against the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The rear box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes formed at appropriate positions for mounting each movable performance unit, etc.

Furthermore, the rear box 3010 has an insertion hole 3011 that is cut out from the front end to the rear near the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides. The insertion hole 3011 is configured to communicate the space behind the light guide plate 3110 in the rear first performance unit 3100 described later with the outside of the rear box 3010 when assembled to the game board 5. This insertion hole 3011 can be used to insert a filler between the rotating ornaments 3210 from the side of the rear box 3010 when transporting the game board 5, so that the rotating ornaments 3210 of the rear second performance unit 3200 do not move due to vibrations caused by transportation, etc. Alternatively, when a malfunction occurs in the movement of the rotating ornaments 3210 of the rear second performance unit 3200, a finger or tool can be inserted through the insertion hole 3011 to eliminate the malfunction.

[5-9a. Backstage First Production Unit]
Next, the rear first performance unit 3100 in the rear unit will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 87 and 88. Figure 87(a) is a perspective view of the rear first performance unit of the rear unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rear first performance unit of the rear unit seen from the back. Figure 88 is a front view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative substrate in the rear first performance unit. The rear first performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the rear box 3010 so as to close the opening that is open to the front.

The rear first performance unit 3100 is equipped with a transparent flat light guide plate 3110 that closes the front end opening of the rear box 3010, a rear first upper decorative board 3120 that is arranged above the light guide plate 3110 and is mounted with multiple LEDs 3121 that irradiate light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3110, a rear first left decorative board 3130 that is arranged to the left of the light guide plate 3110 and is mounted with multiple LEDs 3131 that irradiate light toward the left surface of the light guide plate 3110, and a diffusion lens 3140 that is provided between the multiple LEDs 3131 of the rear first left decorative board 3130 and the left surface of the light guide plate 3110 and diffuses the light from the LEDs 3131 to irradiate it toward the left surface of the light guide plate 3110.

The rear first performance unit 3100 also includes a transparent flat-plate-shaped upper base 3151 attached to the front upper edge of the light guide plate 3110, a transparent upper rear cover 3152 attached to the rear side of the upper base 3151 to sandwich the light guide plate 3110 and to which the rear first upper decorative board 3120 is attached, a transparent flat-plate-shaped left base 3153 attached to the front left edge of the light guide plate 3110, a transparent left rear cover 3154 attached to the rear side of the left base 3153 to sandwich the light guide plate 3110 and to which the rear first left decorative board 3130 and diffusion lens 3140 are attached, a transparent flat-plate-shaped right base 3155 attached to the front right edge of the light guide plate 3110, and a transparent right rear cover 3156 attached to the rear side of the right base 3155 to sandwich the light guide plate 3110.

The back first performance unit 3100 also includes a back first upper decorative body 3161 attached to the front of the upper base 3151 and having a relief-like decoration formed thereon, a back first left decorative body 3162 attached to the front of the left base 3153 and having a relief-like decoration formed thereon, a back first right decorative body 3163 attached to the front of the right base 3155 and having a relief-like decoration formed thereon, a back first lower decorative body 3164 attached to the center in the left-right direction of the front lower edge of the light guide plate 3110 and having a relief-like decoration formed thereon, and a back first lower decorative board 3170 attached to the rear side of the back first lower decorative body 3164 and having multiple LEDs 3171 mounted thereon that can irradiate light forward.

The light guide plate 3110 of the rear first performance unit 3100 has a roughly rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a semicircular notch 3111 cut upward in the left-right center of the lower edge. Although not shown, this light guide plate 3110 has a first pattern that emits light when light is irradiated from the top surface, and a second pattern that emits light when light is irradiated from the left surface. The first and second patterns are different from each other. Also, although not shown, the first pattern is formed so that the light emission pattern differs depending on the illuminating LEDs 3121 of the multiple LEDs 3121 of the rear first upper decorative substrate 3120.

The LEDs 3121 and LEDs 3131 mounted on the rear first upper decorative substrate 3120 and the rear first left decorative substrate 3130, respectively, are full-color LEDs. The rear first left decorative substrate 3130 is also divided into three in the vertical direction. As the rear first left decorative substrate 3130 is divided into three, the diffusion lens 3140 is also divided into three in the vertical direction accordingly. By illuminating the LEDs 3121 on the rear first upper decorative substrate 3120, the first pattern on the light guide plate 3110 can be illuminated, and by illuminating the LEDs 3131 on the rear first left decorative substrate 3130, the second pattern on the light guide plate 3110 can be illuminated.

The rear first upper decorative body 3161, the rear first left decorative body 3162, and the rear first right decorative body 3163 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster. The rear first upper decorative body 3161, the rear first left decorative body 3162, and the rear first right decorative body 3163 are formed in a strip shape along the upper edge, left edge, and right edge of the light guide plate 3110.

The first lower back decorative body 3164 has a pair of parts that extend in an arc shape in the vertical direction concentric with the arc of the notch 3111 at the center of the lower edge of the light guide plate 3110, and is formed in a roughly annular shape with the upper and lower open. The first lower back decorative body 3164 has a number of three-leaf clover decorations arranged in an arc shape on the front side. The first lower back decorative body 3164 also has protrusions that extend radially through the parts of each three-leaf clover decoration. These radially extending protrusions are long outward from the three-leaf clover decoration and short toward the center. The first lower back decorative body 3164 is a transparent material with a vapor deposition layer that has a metallic luster of a specified color and is translucent. When the LED 3171 of the first lower back decorative board 3170 is not illuminated, the metallic luster vapor deposition layer allows the front side decoration to be clearly visible from the player's side.

The LEDs 3171 are mounted on the back first lower decorative board 3170 at a position behind the three-seater decorative part on the back first lower decorative body 3164. When the multiple LEDs 3171 on the back first lower decorative board 3170 are illuminated, the entire back first lower decorative body 3164 can be illuminated and decorated, and the three-seater decorative part can be illuminated and decorated more brightly. The multiple LEDs 3171 on the back first lower decorative board 3170 are full-color LEDs.

When the rear first performance unit 3100 is assembled to the game board 5, the light guide plate 3110 can illuminate and display the first and second patterns behind the transparent panel board 1110 and extending to the upper front of the stage 2503 of the center gimmick 2500. Also, when the rear first performance unit 3100 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 74, the rear first upper decorative body 3161, the rear first left decorative body 3162, and the rear first right decorative body 3163 are located near the upper edge, left edge, and right edge, respectively, of the game area 5a.

In addition, the back first lower decorative body 3164 is located directly above the exit 1008, and the center of the approximately circular back first lower decorative body 3164 approximately coincides with the position of the first starting opening 2002. This back first lower decorative body 3164 can decorate the outside of the rotating decorative body 3210 located at the lowest specific position among the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 of the back second performance unit 3200. Therefore, the back first lower decorative body 3164 can give a special feeling (or a premium feeling) to the rotating decorative body 3210 at the specific position.

[5-9b. Second production unit]
Next, the back second performance unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 89 to 96. Figure 89 is a perspective view of the back second performance unit of the back unit seen from the front, and Figure 90 is a perspective view of the back second performance unit of the back unit seen from the back. Figure 91 is an exploded perspective view of the back second performance unit mainly disassembled for each component and seen from the front, and Figure 92 is an exploded perspective view of the back second performance unit mainly disassembled for each component and seen from the back. Figure 93 is a front view showing the mechanism of the drive in the back second performance unit. Figures 94 (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams showing the movement of multiple rotating ornaments in the back second performance unit, and Figures 95 (e) to (g) are explanatory diagrams showing the movement of multiple rotating ornaments in the back second performance unit continued from Figure 94. Figure 96 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs in the back second performance unit.

The back second performance unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached inside the back box 3010 between the back first performance unit 3100 and the back third performance unit 3300. The back second performance unit 3200 is arranged in a row on a predetermined circumference and has multiple (here 12) disk-shaped rotating decorative bodies 3210 that revolve while rotating on their own axis. Each of the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 has a shaft portion 3210a that protrudes cylindrically from the center of the rear surface to the rear. The multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 are translucent. The multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 are provided in front of the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 described below.

The multiple rotating ornaments 3210 are composed of multiple (four in this case) special rotating ornaments 3211 and the remaining (eight in this case) normal rotating ornaments 3212. The special rotating ornaments 3211 are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a certain number (two in this case) of normal rotating ornaments 3212 in between. In this embodiment, the special rotating ornament 3211 is decorated with a three-common comma. The special rotating ornament 3211 is formed in red at the comma and in gold with a metallic luster at the other parts, and is translucent as a whole. The normal rotating ornament 3212 is decorated with petals. The normal rotating ornament 3212 is formed in pink with a metallic luster at the petal parts and in white at the other border parts, and is translucent as a whole.

The second rear performance unit 3200 is equipped with a unit base 3220 having a square outer shape with a polygonal through hole 3220a in the center and a circular fixed gear part 3220b with a diameter larger than that of the through hole 3220a, and a circular drive ring 3221 that is rotatably attached to the front of the unit base 3220 and has a number of shaft holes 3221a that penetrate back and forth at regular intervals in the circumferential direction on the same circumference larger than the fixed gear part 3220b of the unit base 3220, into which the shaft part 3210a of the rotating ornament 3210 is rotatably inserted, and a circular ring gear part 3221b that is located outside the multiple shaft holes 3221a.

The second back performance unit 3200 is attached to the rear surface of the upper right corner of the unit base 3220, and includes a second back drive motor 3222 whose rotation shaft passes through the unit base 3220 and protrudes forward, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3223 attached to the rotation shaft of the second back drive motor 3222, a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3224 that meshes with the drive gear 3223 and with the ring gear portion 3221b of the drive ring 3221 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3220, and a rotating body gear 3225 that is fixed to the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a of each of the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 and meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220.

The second back performance unit 3200 is provided in front of the drive ring 3221 and attached to the unit base 3220. The outer base 3226 has a rectangular outer shape and a through hole 3226a with a diameter slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the drive ring 3221. The inner base 3227 is provided in front of the drive ring 3221 within the through hole 3226a of the outer base 3226 and attached to the unit base 3220. The inner base 3227 has a circular outer shape slightly larger than the inner diameter of the drive ring 3221 and a polygonal through hole 3227a in the center. The inner base 3227 is attached to the front of the outer base 3226. , a second back outer decorative body 3228, which has an outer shape that is roughly the same as the outer shape of the outer base 3226 and has a through hole 3228a with a diameter smaller than the through hole 3226a of the outer base 3226; a second back inner decorative body 3229, which is attached to the front surface of the inner base 3227 within the through hole 3228a of the second back outer decorative body 3228, has an outer shape that is circular and has a polygonal through hole 3229a in the center that is larger than the outer diameter of the inner base 3227; and a ring-shaped second back inner decorative body 3230, which is inserted into the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decorative body 3229 and is attached to the unit base 3220.

Furthermore, the second rear performance unit 3200 is equipped with a rotational position detection sensor 3231 for detecting that the rotating decoration 3210, which revolves while rotating on its axis, is located at the lowest specific position, and a special rotational position detection sensor 3232 for detecting that the special rotating decoration 3211, which revolves while rotating on its axis, is located at the lowest specific position.

The second back performance unit 3200 is attached to the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 between the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 and the second back outer decorative body 3228 and the second back inner decorative body 3229, and is equipped with a second back decorative board 3240 with multiple LEDs 3241 mounted on the front surface. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 3241 on the second back decorative board 3240, the rotating decorative body 3210, the second back outer decorative body 3228 and the second back inner decorative body 3229 can be illuminated and decorated.

The unit base 3220 is transparent and formed in a flat plate. The drive ring 3221 has multiple shaft holes 3221a, the same number as the multiple rotating ornaments 3210. The inner circumference of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 is a shape in which trapezoidal parts protruding toward the center are lined up at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. There are the same number of trapezoidal protruding parts as there are rotating ornaments 3210 (12 in this case). In this embodiment, the 12 trapezoidal protruding parts are arranged at an angle of 30 degrees each in the clockwise direction from the top end position of the circumference.

The driving ring 3221 has a plurality of detection pieces 3221c that protrude from the inner circumference of the portion corresponding to the plurality of shaft holes 3221a toward the center. In addition, the driving ring 3221 has a plurality of special detection pieces 3221d (four in this case) that extend further toward the center from the detection pieces 3221c that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a certain number (two in this case) of detection pieces 3221c in between. In other words, the driving ring 3221 of this embodiment has the same number (12) of detection pieces 3221c as the rotating ornament 3210, and has the same number (four) of special detection pieces 3221d as the special rotating ornament 3211. This driving ring 3221 is rotatably supported by a plurality of rollers provided on the unit base 3220, although not shown in the figure.

The outer shape of the outer base 3226 is formed to be the same size as the outer shape of the unit base 3220. The outer base 3226 is formed as a transparent flat plate. This outer base 3226 is divided into four parts along a vertical line and a horizontal line that pass through the center of the through hole 3226a, and each part is attached to the unit base 3220.

The inner base 3227 is formed so that the inner peripheral shape of the polygonal through hole 3227a is the same shape and size as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220. The inner base 3227 is formed as a transparent flat plate. The inner base 3227 is divided into four parts at a cross line formed by rotating a vertical line and a horizontal line passing through the center by about 20 degrees in a clockwise direction, and each part is attached to the unit base 3220. In this embodiment, the divided parts of the inner base 3227, which is divided into four parts, are different from the divided parts of the outer base 3226, so that the strength and rigidity can be improved when the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 are attached to the unit base 3220, compared to when the divided parts are the same.

The second back outer decorative body 3228 is formed to have the same shape and size as the outer shape of the outer base 3226. The inner diameter of the through hole 3228a of the second back outer decorative body 3228 is formed to be slightly larger than the circumference of the circle on which the multiple shaft holes 3221a of the drive ring 3221 are arranged. The second back outer decorative body 3228 has a red annular decorative part 3228b arranged in a constant width from the through hole 3227a to the outside in a circular shape, and corner decorative parts 3228c arranged at the upper two corners of the four corners outside the annular decorative part 3228b. The annular decorative part 3228b is decorated with stylized plant leaves arranged in a constant pattern in the circumferential direction. The corner decorative part 3228c is decorated to imitate a karahafu. The second back outer decorative body 3228 has a relief-like decoration formed on the surface. This second back outer decorative body 3228 has a vapor deposition layer that has a metallic luster and is translucent. The second back outer decorative body 3228 is divided into four parts, just like the outer base 3226.

The second back inner decorative body 3229 has a circular outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the circumference of the circle on which the multiple shaft holes 3221a in the drive ring 3221 are arranged. The second back inner decorative body 3229 has an inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a that is approximately the same shape and size as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3227a in the inner base 3227. The second back inner decorative body 3229 is decorated in red with stylized plant leaves arranged in a certain pattern in the circumferential direction so as to be paired with the annular decorative portion 3228b of the second back outer decorative body 3228. The second back inner decorative body 3229 has a relief-like decoration formed on its surface. This second back inner decorative body 3229 has a vapor deposition layer that has a metallic luster and is translucent. The second back inner decorative body 3229 is divided into four parts, similar to the inner base 3227.

The second back inner decorative body 3230 is formed to a length in the front-to-rear direction that connects the periphery of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 and the periphery of the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decorative body 3229, and closes the inner side between the unit base 3220 and the second back inner decorative body 3229. This second back inner decorative body 3230 is provided with a vapor deposition layer that has a metallic luster and is translucent.

The rotational position detection sensor 3231 is attached to the rear surface of the rear second decorative substrate 3240. This rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c located at the bottom among the multiple detection pieces 3221c of the drive ring 3221 (see Figure 93).

The special rotational position detection sensor 3232 is attached between the unit base 3220 and the inner base 3227, and is intended to detect the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221. More specifically, the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 is attached to a trapezoidal portion that protrudes from the bottommost portion of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220, one position in the clockwise direction (rotated 30 degrees) from the bottommost portion (see FIG. 93).

The rear second decorative board 3240 has a plurality of full-color LEDs 3241 mounted on the front surface. The rear second decorative board 3240 has a rectangular outer shape with a polygonal through hole 3240a formed in the center. The rear second decorative board 3240 also has an annular through hole 3240b formed on the outer periphery side of the through hole 3240a. The rear second decorative board 3240 has a portion outside the through hole 3240b attached to the outer base 3226, and a portion inside the through hole 3240b attached to the inner base 3227. The rear second decorative board 3240 is divided into eight parts to correspond to the respective divisions of the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227, which are each divided into four parts.

Next, the movement of the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 in the second back performance unit 3200 will be described. First, the shaft portion 3210a protruding rearward from each of the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 of the second back performance unit 3200 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 from the front, passing between the inner circumference of the second back outer decorative body 3228 and the outer circumference of the second back inner decorative body 3229, through the insertion hole 3240b of the second back decorative substrate 3240, and between the inner circumference of the outer base 3226 and the outer circumference of the inner base 3227, and the rear end penetrates the shaft hole 3221a and protrudes rearward from the drive ring 3221. And, a rotating body gear 3225 that meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220 is fixed to the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a of the rotating decorative body 3210.

Of the multiple rotating ornaments 3210, the four special rotating ornaments 3211 have their shafts 3210a inserted into the shaft holes 3221a that are one position counterclockwise from the shaft holes 3221a that correspond to the special detection pieces 3221d in the drive ring 3221 when viewed from the front. The remaining eight ordinary rotating ornaments 3212 have their respective shafts 3210a inserted into the remaining shaft holes into which the shafts 3210a of the special rotating ornaments 3211 are not inserted.

In the normal state of the second performance unit 3200 of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 74 and 93, the four special rotating ornaments 3211 out of the twelve rotating ornaments 3210 are located at both ends of the top and bottom directions and both ends of the left and right directions on the circumference of the orbit. In other words, the four special rotating ornaments 3211 are located at the 3 o'clock, 6 o'clock, 9 o'clock, and 12 o'clock positions on the clock, and the remaining eight normal rotating ornaments 3212 are located at the 1 o'clock, 2 o'clock, 4 o'clock, 5 o'clock, 7 o'clock, 8 o'clock, 10 o'clock, and 11 o'clock positions. In this embodiment, the 6 o'clock position is the specific position of the rotating ornament 3210.

In this normal state, the rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221, and the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 detects the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (see Figure 93).

When the rear second performance unit 3200 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 74 etc., multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 are arranged in a circle along the periphery of the game area 5a, and all rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be clearly seen from the front, except for the left and right ends. In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, the display screen of the performance display device 1600 located at the rear can be clearly seen from the front through the through hole 3229a (rear second inner perimeter decorative body 3230) of the rear second inner decorative body 3229.

In the normal state, the rotating decorative body 3210 located at a specific position at the lowest end, 6 o'clock, is located in the center of the approximately annular rear first lower decorative body 3164 in the rear first performance unit 3100, and the outside is decorated by the rear first lower decorative body 3164. In addition, the rotating decorative body 3210 at the specific position is located behind the first starting opening 2002, and can decorate the rear of the first starting opening 2002.

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3223 is rotated in a clockwise direction by the second rear drive motor 3222, the drive ring 3221 rotates in a clockwise direction via the transmission gear 3224 meshing with the drive gear 3223 and the ring gear portion 3221b meshing with the transmission gear 3224. When the drive ring 3221 rotates, the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 also moves in the circumferential direction, and the rotating ornamental body 3210 also moves in the circumferential direction via the shaft portion 3210a inserted in the shaft hole 3221a.

At this time, the rotating body gear 3225 fixed to the shaft portion 3210a of the rotating decorative body 3210 meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, so that as the shaft portion 3210a moves in the circumferential direction, the rotating body gear 3225 rotates around the shaft portion 3210a in the same direction as the rotation direction of the drive ring 3221 (here, clockwise). As a result, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the second rear drive motor 3222, the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve in the clockwise direction while each rotating in the clockwise direction.

In this embodiment, the gear ratio between the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220 and the rotating body gear 3225 is configured so that when the drive ring 3221 rotates 30 degrees, each rotating decorative body 3210 rotates once on its axis.

As described above, when the driving ring 3221 rotates in a clockwise direction, the multiple rotating ornaments 3210 revolve around their axes while rotating, and the normal rotating ornament 3212 is positioned at a specific position, the rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the driving ring 3221, while the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 does not detect the special detection piece 3221d of the driving ring 3221 (see Figure 94 (a)).

Then, when the driving ring 3221 further rotates in the clockwise direction and the special rotating ornament 3211 approaches a specific position, the special detection piece 3221d corresponding to the shaft hole 3221a into which the shaft portion 3210a of the ordinary rotating ornament 3212 immediately preceding the special rotating ornament 3211 in the rotational direction of the driving ring 3221 is inserted approaches the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 (see Figures 94 (b) to (d) and Figures 95 (e) and (f)).

When the driving ring 3221 continues to rotate in the clockwise direction and the special rotating ornament 3211 reaches a specific position, the detection piece 3221c corresponding to the axial hole 3221a of the driving ring 3221 into which the axial portion 3210a of the special rotating ornament 3211 is inserted is detected by the rotation position detection sensor 3231, and the special detection piece 3221d protruding from the detection piece 3221c corresponding to the axial hole 3221a into which the axial portion 3210a of the normal rotating ornament 3212 one position before the special rotating ornament 3211 is inserted is detected by the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 (see Figure 95 (g)). In other words, the special detection piece 3221d is detected by the special rotation position detection sensor 3232, and it is detected that the special rotating ornament 3211 is located at a specific position.

This second rear performance unit 3200 can also rotate the second rear drive motor 3222 in the opposite direction to the above, causing the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 to rotate on their own axes and revolve in a counterclockwise direction, the opposite of the above.

Next, the light-emitting performance by the multiple LEDs 3241 on the back second decorative board 3240 in the back second performance unit 3200 will be explained mainly with reference to Figure 96 etc. The multiple LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative board 3240 are each a high-brightness full-color LED. These LEDs 3241 can radiate the emitted color towards the player regardless of the decorative color of the rotating decorative body 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 located on the front side. In other words, depending on the light-emitting color of the LED 3241, the rotating decorative body 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 can be illuminated and decorated in an appropriate color.

The multiple LEDs 3241 on the second rear decorative board 3240 are composed of 12 rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 provided at the rear of each rotating decorative body 3210 when the rotating decorative body 3210 is stopped at a specific position (normal state), 12 intermediate LED groups 3255 provided between each rotating decorative body LED group 3250, an upper left corner LED group 3256 and an upper right corner LED group 3257 provided at a position behind the corner decorative part 3228c of the second rear outer decorative body 3228, a lower left corner LED group 3258 provided at the lower left corner behind the side unit 2200, and a winning port LED group 3259 provided at a position behind the general winning port 2001 of each of the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200.

The 12 rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 are arranged in a clockwise direction starting with the first rotating decoration body LED group 3250a at the rear of the lowest specific position, followed by the second rotating decoration body LED group 3250b, the third rotating decoration body LED group 3250c, the fourth rotating decoration body LED group 3250d, the fifth rotating decoration body LED group 3250e, the sixth rotating decoration body LED group 3250f, the seventh rotating decoration body LED group 3250g, the eighth rotating decoration body LED group 3250h, the ninth rotating decoration body LED group 3250i, the tenth rotating decoration body LED group 3250j, the eleventh rotating decoration body LED group 3250k, and the twelfth rotating decoration body LED group 3250l. The 12 rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 are each equipped with an LED 3241 that can emit light independently.

Each of the 12 rotating decoration LED groups 3250 is divided into four parts: a radial line passing from the center of revolution of the rotating decoration 3210 through the center of rotation of the rotating decoration 3210, an arc line passing through the center of rotation of the rotating decoration 3210 around the center of revolution of the rotating decoration 3210, and a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, and a fourth LED group 3254. The four first LED group 3251, second LED group 3252, third LED group 3253, and fourth LED group 3254 that make up one rotating decoration LED group 3250 are each provided with LEDs 3241 that can emit light independently.

The first LED group 3251 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 is located on the side of the center of revolution (inner side) of the center of rotation of the rotating decoration body 3210, and on the counterclockwise orbital direction side of the radial line passing through the center of rotation of the rotating decoration body 3210. The second LED group 3252 is located on the opposite side of the center of revolution (outer side) of the center of rotation of the rotating decoration body 3210 from the first LED group 3251. The third LED group 3253 is located on the opposite side of the radial line passing through the center of rotation of the rotating decoration body 3210 (clockwise direction side) from the first LED group 3251. The fourth LED group 3254 is located on the opposite side of the center of revolution (outer side) of the center of rotation of the rotating decoration body 3210 from the third LED group 3253.

The 12 intermediate LED groups 3255 are arranged in a clockwise direction starting with the first intermediate LED group 3255a, which is adjacent to the lowest specific position, as follows: second intermediate LED group 3255b, third intermediate LED group 3255c, fourth intermediate LED group 3255d, fifth intermediate LED group 3255e, sixth intermediate LED group 3255f, seventh intermediate LED group 3255g, eighth intermediate LED group 3255h, ninth intermediate LED group 3255i, tenth intermediate LED group 3255j, eleventh intermediate LED group 3255k, and twelfth intermediate LED group 3255l.

In the normal state, the rear second performance unit 3200 of this embodiment can illuminate and decorate multiple rotating decorations 3210 by illuminating the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration LED group 3250 among the multiple LEDs 3241 mounted on the rear second decorative board 3240. In other words, the player can see 12 circular illuminated decorations lined up on a circumference. At this time, it is possible to illuminate each rotating decoration 3210 with a different color, or to illuminate the special rotating decoration 3211 with a different color compared to the normal rotating decoration 3212.

Also, by illuminating the 12 rotating decoration LED groups 3250 in a circumferential order, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light rotates in a circumferential direction. At this time, before illuminating the next rotating decoration LED group 3250, the intermediate LED group 3255 located between that rotating decoration LED group 3250 can be illuminated. In this way, the light emission between the rotating decoration LED groups 3250 is supplemented by the light emission of the intermediate LED group 3255, allowing the player to see a more smoothly rotating light-emitting effect.

In addition, each rotating decoration body LED group 3250 is divided into four groups, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254. For example, if the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 are illuminated, then the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are illuminated, and then the intermediate LED group 3255 adjacent to the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 is illuminated, the player can see a more smoothly rotating light-emitting effect or a light-emitting effect that rotates in small increments. When multiple rotating decoration bodies 3210 are revolving while rotating on their own axis, if the above-mentioned light-emitting effect is performed in accordance with the revolution speed of the rotating decoration body 3210, the player can see an effect in which the rotating decoration body 3210 revolves while emitting light, as if the rotating decoration body 3210 itself had an LED attached to it.

Furthermore, by illuminating each rotating decoration LED group 3250 in the order of, for example, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, the fourth LED group 3254, the first LED group 3251, ..., it is possible to present to the player an illumination effect in which the light appears to be rotating in one rotating decoration LED group 3250. In this way, when the rotating decoration 3210 is stopped in the normal state, illuminating the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 in that order gives the player the illusion that the rotating decoration 3210 is rotating (spinning) without revolving.

In addition, in each rotating decorative body LED group 3250, for example, if the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are illuminated, and then the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are illuminated, the player can see a light-emitting effect that moves from the center to the outside and spreads. Alternatively, if the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are illuminated, and then the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are illuminated, the player can see a light-emitting effect that converges from the outside to the center.

In addition, when the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are illuminated simultaneously, a circular illuminated decoration can be seen by the player. In this case, by increasing the brightness of the illuminated decoration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize (make it difficult to see) the shape of the rotating decoration 3210, etc. As a result, for example, the rotating decoration 3210 can be made difficult to see by increasing the brightness and illuminated in a ring shape, and the rotating decoration 3210 can be rotated and revolved to change the position of the special rotating decoration 3211, and then the brightness can be lowered or the light can be turned off to make the rotating decoration 3210 easier to see, allowing the player to see the rotating decoration 3210 moving without realizing it.

In this way, according to the second rear performance unit 3200 of this embodiment, various moving performances can be performed by the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210, and various light-emitting performances can be performed by the multiple LEDs 3241 on the second rear decorative board 3240. Furthermore, by appropriately combining these moving performances and light-emitting performances, a variety of performances can be shown to the player, making it less likely that the player will become bored.

[5-9c. Third production unit]
Next, the third back performance unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 97 to 101. Figure 97 is a perspective view of the third back performance unit of the back unit seen from the front, and Figure 98 is a perspective view of the third back performance unit of the back unit seen from the back. Figure 99 is an exploded perspective view of the third back performance unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and Figure 100 is an exploded perspective view of the third back performance unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the back. Figure 101 is a front view showing the drive mechanism and decorative board in the third back performance unit with the left side ring decoration and the right side ring decoration moved to the appearance position. The third back performance unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached in the back box 3010 behind the second back performance unit 3200.

The rear third performance unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 is attached inside the rear box 3010 and comprises a rectangular, frame-shaped unit base 3301, an upper unit 3310 provided at the upper part of the front surface of the unit base 3301, a lower unit 3330 provided at the lower part of the front surface of the unit base 3301, a left unit 3350 provided at the left part of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and a right unit 3370 provided at the right part of the front surface of the unit base 3301.

The upper unit 3310 of the rear third performance unit 3300 comprises an upper vertical ring decoration 3311 attached to the upper part of the unit base 3301 near the center in the left-right direction so as to be able to be opened and closed, an upper vertical ring decoration board 3315 attached to the rear side of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, a rear third upper drive motor 3320 attached to the upper right corner of the front of the unit base 3301 and whose rotation shaft protrudes to the rear of the unit base 3301, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3321 attached to the rotation shaft of the rear third upper drive motor 3320, a rotating link member 3322 that rotates with the rotation of the drive gear 3321 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a slide link member 3323 that slides left and right with the rotation of the rotating link member 3322 to open and close the upper vertical ring decoration 3311.

The upper unit 3310 also includes an upper detection sensor 3324 that detects the open/closed position of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, a front cover 3325 attached to the front of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a portion of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 from the front side, a gear cover 3326 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3321 from the rear, and an upper spring 3327 that biases the slide link member 3323 in the direction in which the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 closes.

The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is composed of a first decorative body 3312 attached to the unit base 3301 so that its base end side can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward, and a second decorative body 3313 attached to the unit base 3301 to the right of the base end side of the first decorative body 3312 so that its base end side can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are formed symmetrically with respect to a vertical line, with the exception of a part. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 extend in a short straight line from the base end side, and then extend from the tip of the straight part in a roughly semicircular shape away from the base end side so that the extension line of the straight part faces the inside of the antinode of the string, and then are formed in a wavy shape that extends in the same direction as the antinode of the string in a roughly 1/2 semicircular shape away from the base end side.

The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 extend from the base end to the tip end with a substantially constant width. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 have three large diameter decorative parts 3311a and six small diameter decorative parts 3311b along the direction in which they extend.

The first decorative body 3312 has an axial hole 3312a that is rotatably supported on the unit base 3301 at the base end, a first gear portion 3312b that is arranged in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3312a and faces the second decorative body 3313, a link piece 3312c that protrudes from the base end side to the opposite side to the tip end side, and a long hole-shaped link slit 3312d that penetrates the link piece 3312c and extends toward the axial hole 3312a. The transmission pin 3323b of the slide link member 3323 described later is slidably inserted inside the link slit 3312d.

The second decorative body 3313 has an axial hole 3313a that is rotatably supported on the unit base 3301 at the base end, and a second gear portion 3313b that is arranged in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3313a and faces the first decorative body 3312 and meshes with the first gear portion 3312b. When the first decorative body 3312 is rotated, the second decorative body 3313 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3312 due to the meshing of the first gear portion 3312b and the second gear portion 3313b. As a result, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is movable so that the tip side opens and closes with the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 centered on the base end side.

The upper vertical ring decorative substrate 3315 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313, and is equipped with a first LED 3316 that is located behind the large diameter decorative portion 3311a, and a second LED 3317 that is located behind the small diameter decorative portion 3311b. In this embodiment, the first LED 3316 is a full-color LED, and the second LED 3317 is a monochrome LED.

The rear third upper drive motor 3320 uses a motor with high drive torque. The rotating link member 3322 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position at the same height as the rotation shaft of the rear third upper drive motor 3320 to the left of the rear third upper drive motor 3320. The rotating link member 3322 is equipped with a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3322a that meshes with the drive gear 3321, and a crank pin 3322b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from an eccentric position. The crank pin 3322b of the rotating link member 3322 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323 described later.

The slide link member 3323 has a base end located near the rear third upper drive motor 3320, and a tip end extending in the left-right direction to the left-right center of the unit base 3301 (the portion rotatably supported by the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311), and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The slide link member 3323 is provided above the rotation center of the rotating link member 3322. The slide link member 3323 has a transmission slit 3323a that extends up and down at the base end and into which the crank pin 3322b of the rotating link member 3322 is slidably inserted, a transmission pin 3323b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape at the tip end and is slidably inserted into the link slit 3312d of the first decorative body 3312, and a detection piece 3323c that is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324 at the base end.

The transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323 is located to the right of the center of rotation of the rotating link member 3322, and the lower end is located below the center of rotation of the rotating link member 3322 and is bent toward the tip side. The slide link member 3323 also has a hook portion 3323d to which one end side (left end side) of the upper spring 3327 is hooked. The slide link member 3323 is constantly biased to the right by the upper spring 3327 hooked to the hook portion 3323d.

In the normal state, the upper unit 3310 has the slide link member 3323 at the right end of its travel, and the tips of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are at their farthest distance from each other, with the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 in its most open standby position. When the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is in its standby position, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are each located near the upper edge of the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In addition, in the normal state, the crank pin 3322b of the rotating link member 3322 is located at the bent portion of the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a in the slide link member 3323. Furthermore, in the normal state, the detection piece 3323c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324.

In this normal state, the tip sides of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 are away from the vertical line passing through their respective rotation centers, so that a rotational moment acts on each of them to move their respective tips closer to each other due to the gravity acting on each of them, and this rotational moment acts on the slide link member 3323 to the left via the link slit 3312d of the first decorative body 3312 and the transmission pin 3323b of the slide link member 3323. This force trying to move the slide link member 3323 to the left acts on the crank pin 3322b via the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323 to move it to the left.

In the normal state, the crank pin 3322b is located below the center of revolution (center of rotation of the rotating link member 3322), and therefore the crank pin 3322b tries to revolve in a clockwise direction so as to move downward and to the left, but since the crank pin 3322b is located at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crank pin 3322b cannot revolve any further in the clockwise direction, and the crank pin 3322b does not revolve. In other words, in the normal state, even if a force is applied from the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 side, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 does not close (move toward the appearance position), but is locked in the open standby position, and the load from the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 side to the rear third upper drive motor 3320 is cut off.

In this normal state, when the rotating link member 3322 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction by the rear third upper drive motor 3320 via the drive gear 3321, the crank pin 3322b of the rotating link member 3322 revolves so as to slide upward within the transmission slit 3323a, and the slide link member 3323 slides to the left against the biasing force of the upper spring 3327. When this slide link member 3323 moves to the left, the first decorative body 3312 rotates in a counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3312a via the link slit 3312d by the transmission pin 3323b at the tip so that its tip side moves downward, and the second decorative body 3313 rotates in a clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3313a by the second gear portion 3313b meshed with the first gear portion 3312b. In other words, the tip of the first decorative body 3312 and the tip of the second decorative body 3313 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 closes).

In addition, when the slide link member 3323 slides to the left, the detection piece 3323c also moves to the left, causing the upper detection sensor 3324 to enter a non-detecting state.

Then, as the crank pin 3322b of the rotating link member 3322 revolves in a counterclockwise direction, the crank pin 3322b slides upward and then downward within the transmission slit 3323a, and when the crank pin 3322b revolves more than 180 degrees from the normal state and is positioned near the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a (below the center of revolution), the drive of the rear third upper drive motor 3320 stops. In this state, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are in an appearance position where their respective tips are close to each other so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 closes. In this appearance position state, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position state.

In this emergent position, a force is acting to move the slide link member 3323 to the right due to the biasing force of the upper spring 3327, and a force is acting to move the crank pin 3322b to the right via the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323. In this emergent position, the crank pin 3322b is positioned below the center of revolution (center of rotation of the rotating link member 3322), so the crank pin 3322b tries to revolve counterclockwise to move downward and to the right, but because the crank pin 3322b is positioned at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crank pin 3322b cannot revolve any further in the counterclockwise direction, and the crank pin 3322b does not revolve. In other words, when in the appeared position, even if force is applied from the upper spring 3327 etc., the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 does not open (move towards the standby position), but remains locked in the appeared position in a closed state, and the load from the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 to the rear third upper drive motor 3320 is cut off.

In this embodiment, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 do not rotate until their respective tips come into contact with each other, and each stops at a position (appearance position) rotated 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). When the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 (first decorative body 3312 and second decorative body 3313) is positioned within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. When the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, it can be returned to the standby position by driving the rear third upper drive motor 3320 in the opposite direction to the above until the detection piece 3323c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324.

In this way, in the upper unit 3310, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 can be opened and closed between an open standby position and a closed appearance position by the rear third upper drive motor 3320.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rear third upper drive motor 3320 is driven using a constant current drive method, which rotates the drive gear 3321 with high torque, and the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 can be moved (opened and closed) between the standby position and the appearance position in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

The lower unit 3330 of the third rear performance unit 3300 comprises a lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 attached so as to be openable and closable near the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the unit base 3301, a lower vertical ring decorative board 3335 attached to the rear side of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, a third rear lower drive motor 3340 attached to the lower left corner of the front side of the unit base 3301 and whose rotation shaft protrudes to the rear of the unit base 3301, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3341 attached to the rotation shaft of the third rear lower drive motor 3340, a rotating link member 3342 that rotates with the rotation of the drive gear 3341 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a slide link member 3343 that slides left and right with the rotation of the rotating link member 3342 to open and close the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331.

The lower unit 3330 also includes a lower detection sensor 3344 that detects the open/closed position of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, a front cover 3345 attached to the front of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a portion of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 from the front side, a gear cover 3346 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3341 from the rear, and a lower spring 3347 that biases the slide link member 3343 in the direction in which the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 closes.

The lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is composed of a first decorative body 3332, the base end of which is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, and a second decorative body 3333, the base end of which is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward on the left side of the base end side of the first decorative body 3332. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are formed symmetrically with respect to a vertical line, with the exception of a portion. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 extend in a short straight line from the base end side, and then extend from the tip of the straight line in a roughly semicircular shape away from the base end side so that the extension line of the straight line portion faces the inside of the antinode of the string, and then are formed in a wavy shape that extends in the same direction as the antinode of the string in a roughly 1/2 semicircular shape away from the base end side.

The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 extend from the base end to the tip end with a substantially constant width. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 have three large diameter decorative parts 3331a and six small diameter decorative parts 3331b along the direction in which they extend.

The first decorative body 3332 has an axial hole 3332a that is rotatably supported on the unit base 3301 at the base end, a first gear portion 3332b that is arranged in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3332a and faces the second decorative body 3333, a link piece 3332c that protrudes from the base end side to the side opposite the tip end side, and a long hole-shaped link slit 3332d that penetrates the link piece 3332c and extends toward the axial hole 3312a. The transmission pin 3343b of the slide link member 3343 described later is slidably inserted inside the link slit 3332d.

The second decorative body 3333 has an axial hole 3333a that is rotatably supported on the unit base 3301 at the base end side, and a second gear portion 3333b that is arranged in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3333a and faces the first decorative body 3332 side and meshes with the first gear portion 3332b. When the first decorative body 3332 is rotated, the second decorative body 3333 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3332 due to the meshing of the first gear portion 3332b and the second gear portion 3333b. As a result, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is movable so that the tip side opens and closes with the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 as the center.

The lower vertical ring decorative board 3335 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333, and is equipped with a first LED 3336 that is located behind the large diameter decorative part 3331a, and a second LED 3337 that is located behind the small diameter decorative part 3331b. In this embodiment, the first LED 3336 is a full-color LED, and the second LED 3337 is a monochrome LED.

The rear third lower drive motor 3340 uses a motor with high drive torque. The rotating link member 3342 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position at the same height as the rotation shaft of the rear third lower drive motor 3340 to the right of the rear third lower drive motor 3340. The rotating link member 3342 is equipped with a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3342a that meshes with the drive gear 3341, and a crank pin 3342b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from an eccentric position. The crank pin 3342b of the rotating link member 3342 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343 described later.

The slide link member 3343 has a base end located near the rear third lower drive motor 3340, and a tip end extending in the left-right direction to the left-right center of the unit base 3301 (the portion rotatably supported by the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331), and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The slide link member 3343 is provided below the rotation center of the rotating link member 3342. The slide link member 3343 has a transmission slit 3343a that extends up and down at the base end and into which the crank pin 3342b of the rotating link member 3342 is slidably inserted, a transmission pin 3343b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape at the tip end and is slidably inserted into the link slit 3332d of the first decorative body 3332, and a detection piece 3343c that is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344 at the base end.

The transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343 is located to the left of the center of rotation of the rotating link member 3342, and its upper end is located above the center of rotation of the rotating link member 3342 and is bent toward the tip side. The slide link member 3343 also has a hook portion 3343d to which one end side (left end side) of the lower spring 3347 is hooked. The slide link member 3343 is constantly biased to the left by the lower spring 3347 hooked to the hook portion 3343d.

In the normal state, the lower unit 3330 has the slide link member 3343 at the left end of its travel, and the tips of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are the furthest apart, with the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 in the most open standby position. When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are each located near the lower edge of the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In addition, in the normal state, the crank pin 3342b of the rotating link member 3342 is located at the bent portion of the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a in the slide link member 3343. Furthermore, in the normal state, the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344.

In this normal state, the tip sides of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 are away from the vertical line passing through their respective rotation centers, so that a rotational moment acts on each of them, trying to move their respective tips closer to each other due to the gravity acting on each of them, and this rotational moment acts on the slide link member 3343 to the right via the link slit 3332d of the first decorative body 3332 and the transmission pin 3343b of the slide link member 3343. This force trying to move the slide link member 3343 to the right acts on the crank pin 3342b via the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343 to the right.

In the normal state, the crank pin 3342b is located above the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotating link member 3342), and therefore the crank pin 3342b tries to revolve in a clockwise direction so as to move upward and to the right, but since the crank pin 3342b is located at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crank pin 3342b cannot revolve any further in the clockwise direction, and the crank pin 3342b does not revolve. In other words, in the normal state, even if a force is applied from the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 side, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 does not open further, but remains locked in the standby position, and the load from the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 side to the rear third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

In this normal state, when the third lower drive motor 3340 rotates the rotating link member 3342 in a counterclockwise direction via the drive gear 3341, the crank pin 3342b of the rotating link member 3342 revolves so as to slide downward within the transmission slit 3343a, and the slide link member 3343 slides to the right against the biasing force of the lower spring 3347. When this slide link member 3343 moves to the right, the first decorative body 3332 rotates in a counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3332a via the link slit 3332d by the transmission pin 3343b at the tip so that its tip side moves upward, and the second decorative body 3333 rotates in a clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3333a by the second gear part 3333b meshed with the first gear part 3332b. In other words, the tip of the first decorative body 3332 and the tip of the second decorative body 3333 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 closes).

In addition, when the slide link member 3343 slides to the right, the detection piece 3343c also moves to the right, causing the lower detection sensor 3344 to enter a non-detecting state.

Then, as the crank pin 3342b of the rotating link member 3342 revolves in a counterclockwise direction, the crank pin 3342b slides downward and then upward within the transmission slit 3343a, and when the crank pin 3342b revolves more than 180 degrees from the normal state and is positioned near the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a (above the center of revolution), the drive of the rear third lower drive motor 3340 stops. In this state, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are in an appearance position where the tips of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are close to each other so that the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 closes. In this appearance position, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position.

In this emergent position, a force is acting to move the slide link member 3343 to the left due to the biasing force of the lower spring 3347, and a force is acting to move the crank pin 3342b to the left via the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343. In this emergent position, the crank pin 3342b is located above the center of revolution (center of rotation of the rotating link member 3342), so the crank pin 3342b tries to revolve counterclockwise to move upward and to the left, but because the crank pin 3342b is located at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crank pin 3342b cannot revolve any further in the counterclockwise direction, and the crank pin 3342b does not revolve. In other words, when in the appeared position, even if a force is applied from the lower spring 3347 or the like, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 does not open (move toward the standby position), but remains locked in the appeared position in a closed state, and the load from the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 to the rear third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

In this embodiment, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 do not rotate until their respective tips come into contact with each other, and each stops at a position (appearance position) rotated 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 (first decorative body 3332 and second decorative body 3333) is positioned within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, it can be returned to the standby position by driving the third lower drive motor 3340 in the opposite direction to the above until the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344.

In this way, in the lower unit 3330, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331 can be opened and closed between an open standby position and a closed appearance position by the rear third lower drive motor 3340.

In addition, in this embodiment, the third lower drive motor 3340 is driven using a constant current drive method, which rotates the drive gear 3341 with high torque, and the lower vertical ring ornament 3331 can be moved (opened and closed) between the standby position and the appearance position in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

The left unit 3350 of the rear third performance unit 3300 comprises a left side ring ornament 3351 attached so as to be openable and closable near the vertical center of the left part of the unit base 3301, a left side ring ornament base 3355 attached to the rear side of the left side ring ornament 3351, a rear third left drive motor 3360 attached to the upper left corner of the front of the unit base 3301 and whose rotation shaft protrudes to the rear of the unit base 3301, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3361 attached to the rotation shaft of the rear third left drive motor 3360, a rotating link member 3362 that rotates with the rotation of the drive gear 3361 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a slide link member 3363 that slides vertically with the rotation of the rotating link member 3362 to open and close the left side ring ornament 3351.

The left unit 3350 also includes a left detection sensor 3364 that detects the open/closed position of the left side ring ornament 3351, a front cover 3365 attached to the front of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a portion of the left side ring ornament 3351 from the front side, and a gear cover 3366 attached to the rear of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3361 from the rear.

The left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 is composed of a first decorative body 3352, the base end of which is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, and a second decorative body 3353, the base end of which is attached to the unit base 3301 above the base end side of the first decorative body 3352 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are formed symmetrically above and below the horizontal line, with the exception of a portion. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 extend in a short straight line from the base end side, and then extend from the tip of the straight line in a roughly semicircular shape away from the base end side so that the extension line of the straight line portion faces the inside of the antinode of the string, and then are formed in a wavy shape that extends in the same direction as the antinode of the string in a roughly 1/2 semicircular shape away from the base end side.

The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 extend from the base end to the tip end with a substantially constant width. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 have three large diameter decorative parts 3351a and six small diameter decorative parts 3351b along the direction in which they extend.

The first decorative body 3352 has an axial hole 3352a that is rotatably supported on the unit base 3301 at the base end, a first gear portion 3352b that is arranged in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3352a and faces the second decorative body 3353, a link piece 3352c that protrudes from the base end side to the side opposite the tip end side, and a long hole-shaped link slit 3352d that penetrates the link piece 3352c and extends toward the axial hole 3352a. The transmission pin 3363b of the slide link member 3363 described later is slidably inserted inside the link slit 3352d.

The second decorative body 3353 has an axial hole 3353a that is rotatably supported on the unit base 3301 at the base end side, and a second gear portion 3353b that is arranged in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3353a and faces the first decorative body 3352 side and meshes with the first gear portion 3352b. When the first decorative body 3352 is rotated, the second decorative body 3353 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3352 due to the meshing of the first gear portion 3352b and the second gear portion 3353b. As a result, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 is movable so that the tip side opens and closes with the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 centered on the base end side.

The left horizontal ring decorative board 3355 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, and is equipped with a first LED 3356 that is located behind the large diameter decorative part 3351a, and a second LED 3357 that is located behind the small diameter decorative part 3351b. In this embodiment, the first LED 3356 is a full-color LED, and the second LED 3357 is a monochrome LED.

The rear third left drive motor 3360 uses a motor with high drive torque. The rotating link member 3362 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the rear third left drive motor 3360 below the rear third left drive motor 3360. The rotating link member 3362 is equipped with a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3362a that meshes with the drive gear 3361, and a crank pin 3362b that protrudes cylindrically forward from an eccentric position. The crank pin 3362b of the rotating link member 3362 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3363a of the slide link member 3363 described later.

The slide link member 3363 has a base end located near the rear third left drive motor 3360, and a tip end extending vertically to the vertical center of the unit base 3301 (the portion rotatably supported by the left horizontal ring ornament 3351), and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable vertically. The slide link member 3363 is provided to the left of the rotation center of the rotating link member 3362. The slide link member 3363 has a transmission slit 3363a extending left and right at the base end and into which the crank pin 3362b of the rotating link member 3362 is slidably inserted, a transmission pin 3363b protruding forward in a cylindrical shape at the tip end and slidably inserted into the link slit 3352d of the first ornament 3352, and a detection piece 3363c detected by the left detection sensor 3364 at the base end.

The transmission slit 3363a of the slide link member 3363 is located below the center of rotation of the rotating link member 3362, and its right end is located to the right of the center of rotation of the rotating link member 3362 and is bent toward the tip side.

In the normal state, the left unit 3350 has the slide link member 3363 at the upper end of its travel, and the tips of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are the furthest apart, with the left side ring decorative body 3351 in the most open standby position. When the left side ring decorative body 3351 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are each located near the left edge of the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In addition, in the normal state, the crank pin 3362b of the rotating link member 3362 is located at the right end of the transmission slit 3363a in the slide link member 3363. Furthermore, in the normal state, the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364.

In this normal state, the tip side of each of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 of the left side ring decorative body 3351 is close to a vertical line passing through each rotation center, and the center of gravity is located to the right of the rotation center. Therefore, a rotation moment that tries to rotate in a clockwise direction acts on each of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, but since the first gear part 3352b of the first decorative body 3352 and the second gear part 3353b of the second decorative body 3353 are meshed, the rotation moment acting on each is offset and the standby position is maintained. As a result, almost no force acts from the left side ring decorative body 3351 side to slide the slide link member 3323 in the vertical direction through the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b, and almost no load is applied from the left side ring decorative body 3351 side to the rear third left drive motor 3360.

In this normal state, when the third left drive motor 3360 rotates the rotating link member 3362 in a counterclockwise direction via the drive gear 3361, the crank pin 3362b of the rotating link member 3362 revolves so as to slide leftward within the transmission slit 3363a, and the slide link member 3363 slides downward. When this slide link member 3363 moves downward, the first decorative body 3352 rotates in a counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3352a via the link slit 3352d by the transmission pin 3363b at the tip so that its tip side moves upward, and the second decorative body 3353 rotates in a clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3353a by the second gear part 3353b meshed with the first gear part 3352b. In other words, the tip of the first decorative body 3352 and the tip of the second decorative body 3353 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 closes).

In addition, when the slide link member 3363 slides downward, the detection piece 3363c also moves downward, causing the left detection sensor 3364 to enter a non-detecting state.

Then, as the crank pin 3362b of the rotating link member 3362 revolves in a counterclockwise direction, the crank pin 3362b slides left and then right within the transmission slit 3363a, and when the crank pin 3362b revolves more than 180 degrees from the normal state and is positioned near the right end of the transmission slit 3363a (right of the center of revolution), the drive of the rear third left drive motor 3360 stops. In this state, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are in an appearance position where their respective tips are close to each other so that the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 closes. In this appearance position state, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position state.

In this state of the appearance position, the first ornamental body 3352 and the second ornamental body 3353 of the left side ring ornamental body 3351 are in a state of extending to the right from their respective rotation centers, so that a rotational moment that tries to rotate in a clockwise direction acts on each of the first ornamental body 3352 and the second ornamental body 3353. However, since the first gear part 3352b of the first ornamental body 3352 and the second gear part 3353b of the second ornamental body 3353 are meshed, the rotational moment acting on each of them is offset, and they are maintained in the appearance position. As a result, almost no force acts from the left side ring ornamental body 3351 side through the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b to slide the slide link member 3323 in the vertical direction, and almost no load is applied from the left side ring ornamental body 3351 side to the rear third left drive motor 3360.

In this embodiment, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 do not rotate until their respective tips come into contact with each other, and each stops at a position (appearance position) rotated 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). When the left side ring decorative body 3351 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position, the left side ring decorative body 3351 (first decorative body 3352 and second decorative body 3353) is positioned within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. When the left side ring decorative body 3351 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, it can be returned to the standby position by driving the rear third left drive motor 3360 in the opposite direction to the above until the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364.

In this way, in the left unit 3350, the rear third upper drive motor 3320 can open and close the left side ring ornament 3351 between an open standby position and a closed appearance position.

In addition, in this embodiment, the third left rear drive motor 3360 is driven using a constant current drive method, which rotates the drive gear 3361 with high torque, and the left side ring ornament 3351 can be moved (opened or closed) between the standby position and the appearance position in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

The right unit 3370 of the rear third performance unit 3300 comprises a right side ring ornament 3371 attached so as to be openable and closable near the vertical center on the right side of the unit base 3301, a right side ring ornament base 3375 attached to the rear side of the right side ring ornament 3371, a rear third right drive motor 3380 attached to the lower right corner of the front side of the unit base 3301 and whose rotation shaft protrudes to the rear of the unit base 3301, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3381 attached to the rotation shaft of the rear third right drive motor 3380, a rotating link member 3382 that rotates with the rotation of the drive gear 3381 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a slide link member 3383 that slides up and down with the rotation of the rotating link member 3382 to open and close the right side ring ornament 3371.

The right unit 3370 also includes a right detection sensor 3384 that detects the open/closed position of the right side ring ornament 3371, a front cover 3385 attached to the front of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a portion of the right side ring ornament 3371 from the front side, and a gear cover 3386 attached to the rear of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3381 from the rear.

The right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is composed of a first decorative body 3372, the base end of which is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, and a second decorative body 3373, the base end of which is attached to the unit base 3301 above the base end side of the first decorative body 3372 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are formed symmetrically above and below the horizontal line, with the exception of a portion. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 extend in a short straight line from the base end side, and then extend from the tip of the straight line in a roughly semicircular shape away from the base end side so that the extension line of the straight line portion faces the inside of the antinode of the string, and then are formed in a wavy shape that extends in the same direction as the antinode of the string in a roughly 1/2 semicircular shape away from the base end side.

The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 extend from the base end to the tip end with a substantially constant width. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 have three large diameter decorative parts 3371a and six small diameter decorative parts 3371b along the direction in which they extend.

The first decorative body 3372 has an axial hole 3372a that is rotatably supported on the unit base 3301 at the base end, a first gear portion 3372b that is arranged in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3372a and faces the second decorative body 3373, a link piece 3372c that protrudes from the base end side to the side opposite the tip end side, and a long hole-shaped link slit 3372d that penetrates the link piece 3372c and extends toward the axial hole 3372a. The transmission pin 3383b of the slide link member 3383 described later is slidably inserted inside the link slit 3372d.

The second decorative body 3373 has an axial hole 3373a that is rotatably supported on the unit base 3301 at the base end side, and a second gear portion 3373b that is arranged in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3373a and faces the first decorative body 3372 side and meshes with the first gear portion 3372b. When the first decorative body 3372 is rotated, the second decorative body 3373 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3372 due to the meshing of the first gear portion 3372b and the second gear portion 3373b. As a result, the right side ring decorative body 3371 is movable so that the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 open and close at the tip side centered on the base end side.

The right side ring decorative board 3375 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, and is equipped with a first LED 3376 that is located behind the large diameter decorative part 3371a, and a second LED 3377 that is located behind the small diameter decorative part 3371b. In this embodiment, the first LED 3376 is a full-color LED, and the second LED 3377 is a monochrome LED.

The rear third right drive motor 3380 uses a motor with high drive torque. The rotating link member 3382 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the rear third right drive motor 3380 above the rear third right drive motor 3380. The rotating link member 3382 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3382a that meshes with the drive gear 3381, and a crank pin 3382b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from an eccentric position. The crank pin 3382b of the rotating link member 3382 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3383a of the slide link member 3383 described later.

The slide link member 3383 has a base end located near the rear third right drive motor 3380, and a tip end extending vertically to the vertical center of the unit base 3301 (the portion rotatably supported by the right horizontal ring ornament 3371), and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable vertically. The slide link member 3383 is provided to the right of the rotation center of the rotating link member 3382. The slide link member 3383 has a transmission slit 3383a extending left and right at the base end and into which the crank pin 3382b of the rotating link member 3382 is slidably inserted, a transmission pin 3383b protruding forward in a cylindrical shape at the tip end and slidably inserted into the link slit 3372d of the first ornament 3372, and a detection piece 3383c detected by the right detection sensor 3384 at the base end.

The transmission slit 3383a of the slide link member 3383 is located above the center of rotation of the rotating link member 3382, and the left end is located to the left of the center of rotation of the rotating link member 3382 and is bent in the direction opposite to the tip side.

In the normal state, the right unit 3370 has the slide link member 3383 at the upper end of its travel, and the tips of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are the furthest apart, with the right side ring decorative body 3371 in the most open standby position. When the right side ring decorative body 3371 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are each located near the right edge of the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In addition, in the normal state, the crank pin 3382b of the rotating link member 3382 is located at the left end of the transmission slit 3383a in the slide link member 3383. Furthermore, in the normal state, the detection piece 3383c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384.

In this normal state, the tip side of each of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 of the right side ring decorative body 3371 is close to a vertical line passing through each rotation center, and the center of gravity is located to the left of the rotation center. Therefore, a rotation moment that tries to rotate in a counterclockwise direction acts on each of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, but since the first gear part 3372b of the first decorative body 3372 and the second gear part 3373b of the second decorative body 3373 are meshed, the rotation moment acting on each is offset and they are maintained in the standby position. As a result, there is almost no force acting from the right side ring decorative body 3371 side to slide the slide link member 3383 in the vertical direction through the link slit 3382d and the transmission pin 3383b, and almost no load is applied to the back third right drive motor 3380 from the right side ring decorative body 3371 side.

In this normal state, when the third right drive motor 3380 rotates the rotating link member 3382 in a clockwise direction via the drive gear 3381, the crank pin 3382b of the rotating link member 3382 revolves so as to slide to the right within the transmission slit 3383a, and the slide link member 3383 slides downward. When the slide link member 3383 moves downward, the first decorative body 3372 rotates in a clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3372a via the link slit 3372d by the transmission pin 3383b at the tip so that its tip side moves upward, and the second decorative body 3373 rotates in a counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3373a by the second gear part 3373b meshed with the first gear part 3372b. In other words, the tip of the first decorative body 3372 and the tip of the second decorative body 3373 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the right side ring decorative body 3371 closes).

In addition, when the slide link member 3383 slides downward, the detection piece 3383c also moves downward, causing the right detection sensor 3384 to enter a non-detecting state.

Then, as the crank pin 3382b of the rotating link member 3382 revolves in a clockwise direction, the crank pin 3382b slides to the right and then to the left within the transmission slit 3383a, and when the crank pin 3382b revolves more than 180 degrees from the normal state and is positioned near the left end of the transmission slit 3383a (left of the center of revolution), the drive of the rear third right drive motor 3380 stops. In this state, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are in an appearance position where their respective tips are close to each other so that the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 closes. In this appearance position, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position.

In this appearance position, the first ornament 3372 and the second ornament 3373 of the right side ring ornament 3371 are extended leftward from their respective rotation centers, so that a rotational moment acting on each of the first ornament 3372 and the second ornament 3373 to rotate counterclockwise acts on them, but because the first gear portion 3372b of the first ornament 3372 and the second gear portion 3373b of the second ornament 3373 are engaged, the rotational moment acting on each is offset, and the appearance position is maintained. As a result, almost no force acts from the right side ring ornament 3371 side to slide the slide link member 3383 vertically through the link slit 3372d and the transmission pin 3383b, and almost no load is applied from the right side ring ornament 3371 side to the rear third right drive motor 3380.

In this embodiment, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 do not rotate until their respective tips come into contact with each other, and each stops at a position (appearance position) rotated 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). When the right side ring decorative body 3371 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position, the right side ring decorative body 3371 (first decorative body 3372 and second decorative body 3373) is positioned within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. When the right side ring decorative body 3371 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, it can be returned to the standby position by driving the rear third right drive motor 3380 in the opposite direction to the above until the detection piece 3383c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384.

In this way, in the right unit 3370, the rear third right drive motor 3380 can open and close the right side ring ornament 3371 between an open standby position and a closed appearance position.

In addition, in this embodiment, the third right rear drive motor 3380 is driven using a constant current drive method, which rotates the drive gear 3381 with high torque, and the right side ring ornament 3371 can be moved (opened or closed) between the standby position and the appearance position in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

In this embodiment, the back third performance unit 3300 has the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 formed in the same shape. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 of the back third performance unit 3300 are arranged at the same position in the front-to-back direction. Furthermore, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are arranged at the same position in the front-to-back direction. Furthermore, in the back third performance unit 3300, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are arranged further back than the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331.

In this embodiment, two-phase stepping motors are used as the rear third upper drive motor 3320, the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the rear third right drive motor 3380.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are attached, it is designed to operate at 200 pps (the width of one pulse is 5 ms), and furthermore, it can start automatically from a stopped state by exciting it with a 200 pps pulse without slow-up processing.

In addition, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 complete their movement from their waiting positions to their appearance positions in 130 steps, so [130 steps x 5 ms = 650 ms], meaning that they can be made to appear or retreat (appear/retreat) in 650 ms.

Next, we will explain the movable performance using the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 in the back third performance unit 3300. In the normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the back third performance unit 3300 are each in a standby position. When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are in a standby position, they are located outside the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration 3229 of the back second performance unit 3200 located in front, and are not visible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the rear third upper drive motor 3320 and the rear third lower drive motor 3340 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 from the standby position to the appearance position, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are close to each other in the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 when viewed from the front, allowing the player to see a decoration of three rings lined up vertically (up and down) (see Figure 104).

In addition, in the normal state, when the rear third left drive motor 3360 and the rear third right drive motor 3380 are driven to move the left side ring decoration 3351 and the right side ring decoration 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position, the tip of the left side ring decoration 3351 and the tip of the right side ring decoration 3371 are close to each other in the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 when viewed from the front, allowing the player to see a decoration of three rings lined up horizontally (left and right) (see Figure 105).

Furthermore, in the normal state, when the rear third upper drive motor 3320, the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the rear third right drive motor 3380 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from their respective standby positions to their respective appearance positions, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are close to each other in the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 when viewed from the front, and the tip of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are close to each other, allowing the player to see an ornament in which five rings are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross (see Figure 106).

In addition, in the back third performance unit 3300, in the normal state, for example, when the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the waiting position to a position halfway to the appearance position, the tip portion of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 (first decoration 3312 and second decoration 3313) and the tip portion of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (first decoration 3372 and second decoration 3373) are located inside the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration 3229 in the back second performance unit 3200 when viewed from the front, and can be partially seen from the player side (see Figure 107). In this state, the two tips of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 appear in the upper left and right corners of the four corners of the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decorative body 3229, and the two tips of the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 appear in the upper and lower right corners of the four corners of the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decorative body 3229, so that the inner shape of the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decorative body 3229 can be changed.

In this way, according to the third back performance unit 3300 of this embodiment, by moving the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to their appearance positions in an appropriate combination, it is possible to make ring decorations arranged vertically, horizontally, or in a cross shape appear, allowing the player to see a variety of moving performances.

In addition, by appropriately illuminating the first LED 3316 and second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decorative board 3315, the first LED 3336 and second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decorative board 3335, the first LED 3356 and second LED 3357 of the left horizontal ring decorative board 3355, and the first LED 3376 and second LED 3377 of the right horizontal ring decorative board 3375, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can be illuminated, allowing the player to see a variety of illuminated effects.

[5-10. Effects on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 102 to 110. Fig. 102 is a front view of the game board in a state where a plurality of rotating ornaments in the back second performance unit are rotated clockwise from the normal state and revolved 15 degrees. Fig. 103 is a front view showing an enlarged lower part of the game board in a state where the special rotating ornament in the back second performance unit is moved to a specific position. Fig. 104 is a front view of the game board in a state where the upper vertical ring ornament and the lower vertical ring ornament in the back third performance unit are moved to the appearance position. Fig. 105 is a front view of the game board in a state where the left horizontal ring ornament and the right horizontal ring ornament in the back third performance unit are moved to the appearance position. Fig. 106 is a front view of the game board in a state where the upper vertical ring ornament, the lower vertical ring ornament, the left horizontal ring ornament, and the right horizontal ring ornament in the back third performance unit are moved to the appearance position. Figure 107 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration in the rear third performance unit moved halfway to their appearance positions.

Figure 108 is a front view of the game board showing an example of a performance image on the performance display device when a malfunction occurs in the rear upper third performance unit. Figure 109 is a front view of the game board showing an example of a shadow performance executed during a light emission performance in the rear unit. Figure 110 is a front view of the pachinko machine showing the game board as it is viewed through the game window in the door frame.

The game board 5 is made almost entirely transparent, including the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the game area 5a, the starting unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the attacca unit 2400, and the center role 2500. Under normal conditions, as shown in FIG. 74, the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600 located behind the game panel 1100, the back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, the back first right decorative body 3163, and the back first lower decorative body 3164 of the back first performance unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 (special rotating decorative body 3211 and normal rotating decorative body 3212) in the back second performance unit 3200, the back second outer decorative body 3228, the back second inner decorative body 3229, and the back second inner circumference decorative body 3230, etc. can be clearly seen through them.

In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 74, etc., four special rotating ornaments 3211 among the multiple rotating ornaments 3210 in the back second performance unit 3200 are located at both ends of the top and bottom direction and both ends of the left and right direction on the circumference of the revolution orbit. In other words, one special rotating ornament 3211 is located at a specific position (the 6 o'clock position on a clock) that is the lowest on the revolution orbit. The special rotating ornament 3211 located at this specific position is located in the center of the approximately annular back first lower ornament 3164 in the back first performance unit 3100, and the outside is decorated by the back first lower ornament 3164. In addition, the special rotating ornament 3211 (rotating ornament 3210) at the specific position is located behind the first starting opening 2002 and decorates the rear of the first starting opening 2002 (see FIG. 103).

In addition, in the normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the third rear performance unit 3300 are each in a standby position, and are located outside the second rear inner circumference decoration 3230 of the second rear performance unit 3200 when viewed from the front, so that the front is covered by multiple rotating decorations 3210, driving ring 3221, second rear outer decoration 3228, second rear inner decoration 3229, etc., and is not visible to the player.

In this normal state, the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600 located at the rear can be clearly seen from the player's side (front) through the inside of the rear second inner circumference decorative body 3230 of the rear second performance unit 3200.

In the game board 5, the rear first performance unit 3100, rear second performance unit 3200, and rear third performance unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 perform a predetermined movable performance according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game ball B is received in the first start hole 2002 and the second start hole 2004.

First, the performance using the second back performance unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 102 and 103. For example, as shown in Figure 102, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated in a clockwise direction by driving the second back drive motor 3222, a movable performance can be performed in which the multiple (12) rotating decorations 3210 rotate clockwise while revolving in a clockwise direction. As a result, the multiple rotating decorations 3210 revolve (go around) around the performance image visible through the inside of the second back inner circumference decoration 3230 while rotating, so that the multiple rotating decorations 3210 spinning around can make the game area 5a feel lively and entertain the player.

As described above, when the multiple rotating decorations 3210 are rotating and revolving around their axes, for example, by illuminating the LED 3171 on the back first lower decorative board 3170 in the back first performance unit 3100, the approximately annular back first lower decorative body 3164 behind which the rotating decorations 3210 revolve will light up, thereby drawing the player's attention to the back first lower decorative body 3164. In addition, since the back first lower decorative body 3164 is conspicuous, the player can be made to feel anxious and excited depending on whether or not the desired rotating decoration 3210 (special rotating decoration 3211) stops revolving within the circle (specific position) of the back first lower decorative body 3164, which can entertain the player.

At this time, only the first rotating decoration LED group 3250a of the rotating decoration LED group 3250 that corresponds to the specific position may be lit. This allows only the rotating decoration 3210 passing behind the circle of the back first lower decoration 3164 to be clearly visible, while the other rotating decorations 3210 are difficult to see, allowing the player to see a roulette or slot-like presentation with the circle of the back first lower decoration 3164 as a window, further increasing the sense of excitement as to whether the desired rotating decoration 3210 will stop at the specific position.

When the desired rotating decoration 3210 (special rotating decoration 3211) stops within the circle (specific position) of the back first lower decoration 3164, as shown in FIG. 103, the first starting hole 2002 of the starting hole unit 2100 is provided in front of it, so that if the player receives game ball B into the first starting hole 2002, the player can be made to believe that there is an extremely high possibility of winning a "jackpot", which encourages the player to shoot game ball B aimed at the first starting hole 2002 and allows the player to enjoy the operation of shooting game ball B.

In addition, when the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 are rotated and revolved by the drive of the second drive motor 3222, the multiple LEDs 3241 on the second decorative substrate 3240 on the back may be appropriately illuminated according to the moving position of each rotating decorative body 3210. For example, when one rotating decorative body 3210 is located at a specific position, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 of each rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are turned on, and each intermediate LED group 3255 is turned off. Next, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves about 7 degrees in the clockwise direction, the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 are turned off while the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are kept on, and the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned on. Furthermore, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves 15 degrees from its initial position, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are also turned off, turning off the rotating decorative body LED group 3250, while only the middle LED group 3255 remains lit.

Next, when the rotating decoration body 3210 revolves approximately 22 degrees from the initial position, the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 are turned on, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are turned off, and the middle LED group 3255 is turned on. Then, when the rotating decoration body 3210 revolves 30 degrees from the initial position (the next rotating decoration body 3210 is located at a specific position), the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are turned on to turn on the rotating decoration body LED group 3250, and the middle LED group 3255 is turned off. This allows the LEDs 3241 in front of which the rotating ornament 3210 is located to be lit, and the LEDs 3241 in front of which the rotating ornament 3210 is not located to be turned off, allowing the player to see the rotating ornament 3210 revolving while emitting light, just as if the rotating ornament 3210 itself had an LED attached to it, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, in the second back performance unit 3200, all rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 and intermediate LED groups 3255 may be illuminated at high brightness in the normal state, and then the multiple rotating decoration bodies 3210 may be rotated and revolved by the second back drive motor 3222, and the rotation and revolution of the multiple rotating decoration bodies 3210 may be stopped in a state different from the normal state, and the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 and intermediate LED groups 3255 may be turned off or dimmed. As a result, all rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 and intermediate LED groups 3255 may be illuminated at high brightness, making the multiple rotating decoration bodies 3210 difficult for the player to see, and by changing the position of the rotating decoration body 3210 in this state, the player may be shown an effect in which the rotating decoration body 3210 moves without the player's knowledge, surprising and entertaining the player.

In addition, in the rear second performance unit 3200, the multiple LEDs 3241 mounted on the rear second decorative board 3240 can be illuminated appropriately, so that the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 can be illuminated (lit) in order from the first rotating decoration body LED group 3250a, to the second rotating decoration body LED group 3250b, the third rotating decoration body LED group 3250c, the fourth rotating decoration body LED group 3250d, the fifth rotating decoration body LED group 3250e, the sixth rotating decoration body LED group 3250f, the seventh rotating decoration body LED group 3250g, the eighth rotating decoration body LED group 3250h, the ninth rotating decoration body LED group 3250i, the tenth rotating decoration body LED group 3250j, the eleventh rotating decoration body LED group 3250k, and the twelfth rotating decoration body LED group 3250l, creating a light-emitting performance in which light appears to be rotating in a specified direction, entertaining the player. When the rotation of the light is stopped, the position at which the light stops can heighten the player's sense of anticipation and entertain the player.

When the rotation of the light is stopped, the rotation speed of the light can be gradually reduced and the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, the fourth LED group 3254, and even the middle LED group 3255 can be turned on in order in the rotating decorative body LED group 3250, so that the light moves in small increments in the rotation direction and stops slowly. This makes it difficult for the player to predict at which position the light will stop rotating, as the position becomes more precise, providing a sense of suspense for the player and entertaining them.

In addition, as mentioned above, the light can be rotated (circulated), and by turning the lights on and off in sequence in a circumferential direction, it is possible to create light effects that measure time like a clock, or light effects that indicate the remaining time, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, each rotating decoration LED group 3250 may be illuminated in the following order, for example: first LED group 3251, second LED group 3252, third LED group 3253, fourth LED group 3254, first LED group 3251, ... This allows the player to see a light-emitting effect in which the light appears to be rotating in one rotating decoration LED group 3250, and also gives the player the illusion that the rotating decoration 3210 is rotating (spinning) without revolving, entertaining the player.

In addition, in each rotating decorative body LED group 3250, for example, if the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are illuminated, and then the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are illuminated, the player can see a light-emitting effect that moves from the center to the outside and spreads. Alternatively, if the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are illuminated, and then the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are illuminated, the player can see a light-emitting effect that converges from the outside to the center.

Next, the performance using the back third performance unit 3300 will be explained mainly with reference to Figures 104 to 108. First, for example, as shown in Figure 104, from the normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 from the standby position to the appearance position. As a result, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are close to each other in the center of the inside of the back second inner circumference decoration 3230 when viewed from the front, and the player can see a decoration with three rings lined up vertically (up and down).

In addition, as a performance using the back third performance unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 105, from the normal state, the back third left drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to move the left side ring decoration 3351 and the right side ring decoration 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position. As a result, the tip of the left side ring decoration 3351 and the tip of the right side ring decoration 3371 are close to each other in the center of the inside of the back second inner circumference decoration 3230 when viewed from the front, allowing the player to see a decoration of three rings lined up horizontally (left and right).

In this embodiment, the left side ring decoration 3351 and the right side ring decoration 3371 of the rear third performance unit 3300 are moved to the appearance position to form a decoration with three rings lined up horizontally, and then, in the area within each of the three rings on the performance display device 1600, a variable display of three pattern rows can be performed to indicate the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004. As a result, compared to when the three pattern rows are displayed in a variable manner without the left side ring decoration 3351 and the right side ring decoration 3371 being moved to their appearance positions, the top and bottom of the three pattern rows are physically decorated by the left side ring decoration 3351 and the right side ring decoration 3371 at their appearance positions, making the player believe that there is a high possibility that the pattern row being displayed in a variable manner will stop and be displayed in a combination of patterns that will give the player an advantage, such as a "jackpot," and increasing the player's expectations for the game.

Furthermore, as a performance using the back third performance unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 106, from the normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from their respective standby positions to their appearance positions. As a result, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are close to each other at the center of the inside of the back second inner circumference decoration 3230, and the tip of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are close to each other, so that the player can see a decoration in which five rings are arranged vertically and horizontally in a cross.

Also, as shown in FIG. 106, when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are all moved from the waiting position to the appearing position, a decoration of five rings arranged in a cross shape is formed in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, which makes the player believe that a favorable gaming state will occur in which the player will have an advantage, such as a "jackpot," and this increases the player's anticipation for a "jackpot" game, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, in the third back performance unit 3300, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 may be moved from the standby position to the appearance position in an appropriate order or combination. For example, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 may be moved to the appearance position in this order, or the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 may be moved to the appearance position in this order. As a result, the five rings are arranged in a cross shape through multiple stages, so that at each stage, the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether or not to move to the next stage, and the player can be entertained.

In the back third performance unit 3300, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven at high torque using a constant current drive method, so the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be moved from the standby position to the appearance position, or from the appearance position to the standby position, in an extremely short time of less than one second (650 ms in this case). As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 appear and disappear in an instant, making a strong impact on the player and entertaining the player.

Furthermore, in the back third performance unit 3300, for example, as shown in FIG. 107, from the normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the standby position to a position halfway to the appearance position. As a result, the tip portion of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 (first decoration 3312 and second decoration 3313) and the tip portion of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (first decoration 3372 and second decoration 3373) are located inside the back second inner circumference decoration 3230 when viewed from the front, and can be partially seen from the player's side.

In more detail, in the state shown in FIG. 107, the two tips of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 appear in the upper left and right corners of the four corners of the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decoration 3229, and the two tips of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 appear in the upper and lower right corners of the four corners of the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decoration 3229. This changes the shape of the inside of the second back inner circumference decoration 3230, behind which the display screen of the performance display device 1600 faces, making it easier for the player to notice the movement of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, giving the player a premonition that something is about to happen and increasing their anticipation for the game.

When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved from the waiting position to the appearance position, they may first be moved partway so that only the tip portion is visible, and then moved to the appearance position as the next step. This makes it exciting for the player depending on whether or not they will move completely to the appearance position, and entertains the player. When moving them partway to this appearance position, they may be moved back and forth in small increments between the waiting position, and the small changes in the inner shape of the back second inner circumference decoration 3230 can make it easier for the player to notice.

In the third back performance unit 3300, the first LED 3316 and the second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decoration board 3315, the first LED 3336 and the second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decoration board 3335, the first LED 3356 and the second LED 3357 of the left horizontal ring decoration board 3355, and the first LED 3376 and the second LED 3377 of the right horizontal ring decoration board 3375 can be appropriately illuminated, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be appropriately illuminated and decorated. This allows the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 that have moved toward the appearance position to be illuminated and decorated in various illumination modes, entertaining the player.

In this embodiment, when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to their appearance positions in the third rear performance unit 3300, the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600 is a decorative image 3390 similar to those displayed directly behind the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (see Figure 108).

In addition, in this embodiment, if at least one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the back third performance unit 3300 cannot move to the appearance position due to some reason, even if a performance is executed to move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, they are kept in the standby position and are not moved to the appearance position, and the performance display device 1600 is made to display the decorative image 3390 (see FIG. 108). As a result, even if a malfunction occurs in the back third performance unit 3300, the decorative image 3390 can be seen, making it difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of the malfunction, so that the player can avoid having to interrupt the game due to the malfunction and feeling uncomfortable, and the player can continue to enjoy the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a performance using the back unit 3000, it is possible to appropriately combine the performance by the back second performance unit 3200 and the performance by the back third performance unit 3300. This allows the player to see a wider variety of performances, making it less likely for the player to become bored. Also, since it is possible to show the player more multi-stage performances, the player can be made to feel anxious and excited at each stage, increasing the player's sense of anticipation and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, as an effect using the back unit 3000, for example, when performing an appropriate light-emitting effect using the back first effect unit 3100, back second effect unit 3200, and back third effect unit 3300, the LEDs located on a specific line can be turned off and the line can be moved in a short time (less than one second) to cross the play area 5a from one side to the other side in a specified direction (see FIG. 109). As a result, by turning off the LEDs on a specific line, a dark part (shadow part 3050) appears on the line in the play area 5a, and the shadow part 3050 crosses the play area 5a in a short time, making the player "startle" and making him/her feel that something is going to happen, allowing him/her to concentrate on the game. The shadow part 3050 can be moved not only up and down, but also left and right and diagonally.

The above shadow effects can also be executed when moving effects are performed using the rotating ornament 3210, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornament 3371, etc., or when the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is switched, etc. This allows the shadow effects to serve as a dividing point, strongly drawing the player's attention to the next moving effect or effect image, etc., entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the game board 5 of this embodiment is assembled into the pachinko machine 1, as shown in Fig. 110, the inside of the game area 5a can be seen from the player side through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. In the door frame 3, the outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the semi-tubular upper left dish decorative body 271, upper right dish decorative body 276, upper center dish decorative body 312a, left side door frame decorative body 404, right side door frame decorative body 419, and top door frame decorative body 453. In addition, in the door frame 3, the upper left decorative board 273, the upper right decorative board 278, the upper center decorative board 314, the left side decorative board 402, the right side decorative board 418, the top center decorative board 455, the top left decorative board 456, and the top right decorative board 457 are arranged behind the upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276, the top center decorative body 312a, the left side decorative body 404, the right side decorative body 419, and the top decorative body 453. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs of these decorative boards, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a (play area 5a) can be illuminated and decorated, and light can be moved along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

As described above, the game board 5 of this embodiment can perform various light-emitting effects. For example, by illuminating the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 of the rear second performance unit 3200, the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254, and the LEDs of each decorative board of the door frame 3 in that order, the player can see a light-emitting effect that moves from the center to the outside and spreads, and the player's attention can be directed to the outside of the game area 5a. Alternatively, by illuminating the LEDs of each decorative board of the door frame 3, the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 of the rear second performance unit 3200, the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 in that order, the player can see a light-emitting effect that converges from the outside to the center, and the player's attention can be directed to the center of the game area 5a.

In addition, in the second rear performance unit 3200, as described above, when the light is rotated (spinned) in a circumferential direction by the multiple rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255, a light-emitting performance in which light rotates in a circumferential direction of the door window 101a may also be executed on the door frame 3 side. This allows the player to see a light-emitting performance in which light spins around the entire pachinko machine 1, centered on the center of the play area 5a, which can make a strong impact on the player and entertain them, preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the moving effects and light-emitting effects as described above can be appropriately combined, and can also be combined with the effect images (display effects) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. As a result, by appropriately combining light-emitting effects, moving effects, display effects, etc., a variety of patterns of effects can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to become bored, and the player can be entertained by various effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[5-11. Characteristic Effects of the Present Embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 of the upper unit 3310 of the back third performance unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 of the lower unit 3330, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the right unit 3370 are rotated outward from the center of the game area 5a (here, the inner circumference of the back second inner circumference decoration 3230 of the back second performance unit 3200) to a retracted position, so that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 rotate outward from the rotating decoration 3210, the back second outer decoration 3228, and the back second inner decoration of the back second performance unit 3200. 3229, and the rear second inner circumference decoration 3230, and the rotating decoration 3210, the rear second outer decoration 3228, the rear second inner decoration 3229, and the rear second inner circumference decoration 3230 make the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 invisible from the player's side (front), making it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371.The performance images displayed on the performance display device 1600 facing the center of the game area 5a can be clearly seen from the player's side (front), allowing the player to enjoy the performance images.

In this normal state, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the rear third upper drive motor 3320, the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the rear third right drive motor 3380 so that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 rotate (move) from the retreated position to the emergent position within a range of 0.5 to 1.0 seconds (650 ms (0.65 seconds) in this embodiment). When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated using a constant current drive method, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated with a high torque, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, which had stopped due to the high torque, are rotated with a high torque. A large rotational moment acts on the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371, allowing the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to rotate to their appearance positions at an extremely fast speed, making it appear to the player that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371, which the player was not aware of, have suddenly appeared in the center of the game area 5a, making a strong impact on the player, and the sudden and instantaneous appearance of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 makes the player strongly think that something good is going to happen, increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, by driving the rear third upper drive motor 3320, the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the rear third right drive motor 3380 using a constant current drive method by the peripheral control board 1510, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated with high torque, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated (moved) quickly from the retracted position to the emerging position. 1 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 block part of the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600, allowing the player to immediately recognize the movement of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to their appearance positions, greatly surprising the player with the movement of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371.

Furthermore, the areas between the base end and tip end of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are positioned behind the straight line connecting the base end and tip end when they are rotated from the retracted position to the appearing position, so that the area between the base end and tip end is made to extend in a non-linear manner (here, an arc shape). Therefore, when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearing position, the tip sides of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 become visible first. In this case, the portions (tip sides) of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 that are visible from the front have a non-linear shape between the base end side and the tip side, so that the direction in which they protrude inward from the second inner circumference decoration 3230 is different from the direction of the base end side of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. Therefore, when the rotation of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is stopped midway towards the appearance position to create an effect in which only the tip side is visible (see Figure 107), the player is given the illusion that a different decoration has appeared other than the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, so that the player can be shown a more diverse presentation, which makes it less likely for the player to become bored and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are supported so that their base ends can be rotated outside the center of the game area 5a (the second inner circumference decoration 3230 on the back), and are formed into a long, thin frame shape whose tip ends extend to the center of the game area 5a when in the appearing position. Therefore, when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated to the appearing position, Since the tip ends of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are located in the center of the game area 5a, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 at their appearance positions can be made to stand out, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371.

In addition, by driving the rear third upper drive motor 3320, the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the rear third right drive motor 3380 using a constant current drive method with the peripheral control board 1510, the time it takes to rotate the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the retracted position to the emergent position with high torque is within the range of 0.5 to 1.0 seconds, so there is no need to use a large drive motor with higher torque than necessary, and the rear third upper drive motor 3320, the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the rear third right drive motor 338 This can suppress the increase in space required for the 3311, 3331, 3351, 3371, and other components, and makes it easier to secure space for arranging the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, etc., and the secured space can make the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, etc., larger, making it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 more enjoyable for players with the large upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, etc. In addition, since there is no need to use a large drive motor with higher torque than necessary or a complex control circuit for outputting high torque, the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, a performance display device 1600 capable of displaying performance images is provided in the center of the game area 5a, and when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearing position, or from the appearing position to the retracted position, the display screen is temporarily darkened, making it difficult for the player to see the movement of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. Then, by brightening the display screen, the player can be shown an effect in which the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 suddenly appear and disappear from the center, surprising the player and entertaining the player with the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

By driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 using a constant current drive method, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated with high torque. This may cause the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380, as well as the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, to become fatigued early, which may make them more susceptible to malfunctions. However, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 33 Since the decorative image 3390 is displayed on the performance display device 1600 by executing the performance of moving the ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position, even if a malfunction occurs and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot move (rotate) to the appearance position, the decorative image 3390 can give the player the illusion that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 have moved to the appearance position, and the decorative image 3390 can show the player the same performance as the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, under normal conditions, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control unit 1511 and performance display control unit 1512) moves the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 of the upper unit 3310 of the rear third performance unit 3300 in the rear unit 3000, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 of the lower unit 3330, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the right unit 3370 to retracted positions that are not visible from the player's side, so that the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600 can be clearly seen, allowing the player to enjoy the performance image. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 executes a performance in which the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the appearance position, at the timing when an appropriate number of upper vertical ring decorations 3311, lower vertical ring decorations 3331, left horizontal ring decorations 3351, and right horizontal ring decorations 3371 move from the retreat position to the appearance position, the performance display device 1600 displays decorations in the areas behind the upper vertical ring decorations 3311, lower vertical ring decorations 3331, left horizontal ring decorations 3351, and right horizontal ring decorations 3371 at the appearance position. As the image 3390 is displayed, a specific performance image (e.g., a row of multiple patterns suggesting the result of a special lottery drawn) is displayed in the area partitioned by the frame-shaped upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371, so that the specific performance image is clearly partitioned by the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371, making the specific performance image stand out, allowing the player to enjoy the performance created by the specific performance image and preventing a decline in interest.

If the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, or the right detection sensor 3384 detects a malfunction in which any one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, or the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot move to the appearance position for some reason, the peripheral control board 1510 moves all of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration Since only the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is paused, when a performance is executed in which the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move from their retreat positions, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are displayed on the performance display device 1600 as the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 at the appearance position. A decorative image 3390 is displayed in the area behind the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, and a specific performance image is displayed in the area partitioned by the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (decorative image 3390) at the appearance position, so that the player feels as if the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are This creates the illusion that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 have moved to their appearance positions, and the decorative image 3390 similar to the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 allows the player to see the same presentation as that created by the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. Therefore, even if a malfunction occurs with the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 and they cannot move to their appearance positions, the player can be shown a decorative image 3390 similar to the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, and the player can be shown an effect equivalent to that produced by the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 by the decorative image 3390, and the specific effect image can be made to stand out by the decorative image 3390, allowing the player to enjoy the effect produced by the specific effect image and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, if a malfunction occurs in which any one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position, the movement control of all the upper vertical ring decorations 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is paused, so that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are not moved to the appearance position, so that the upper vertical ring decoration 33 11. When a performance is performed in which the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are simultaneously moved to their appearance positions, it is possible to avoid a performance in which any of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 that have moved to their appearance positions appear mixed with the decorative image 3390 that becomes visible because it does not move to its appearance position due to a malfunction, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, when a performance is executed in which the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to their appearance positions, the decorative image 3390 is displayed on the performance display device 1600. Since the decorative image 3390 is displayed regardless of whether or not there is a malfunction in which the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move to their appearance positions, there is no need to provide a separate image for when a malfunction occurs with the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, and the load on the display of the performance image including the decorative image 3390 can be reduced.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 detect a malfunction in which the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move, the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is paused. This prevents the vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from stopping in an intermediate position, resulting in an incomplete performance, and prevents discomfort to the player. In addition, since only the movement control is paused and the decorative image 3390 is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the player can be entertained by the decorative image 3390, and a decline in the player's interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, when a malfunction is detected, the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is paused, so that the rear third upper drive motor 3320, the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the rear third right drive motor 3380 for moving the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are not overloaded, which prevents damage to the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 and other components, and prevents the malfunction from expanding.

In addition, since the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are not visible when in the retracted position, even if a malfunction occurs in which the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot move to the appearance position for some reason, the decorative image 3390 is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as described above, and therefore the decorative image 3390 will not affect the appearance of the ornamental decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. This allows the player to enjoy the presentation, and because the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be seen in their retreated positions, it makes it difficult for the player to notice that a malfunction has occurred in which the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move, preventing the player from feeling anxious and suppressing a decline in interest.

In addition, when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the retracted position (normal state), the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be seen by the player, so it is difficult for the player to notice the presence of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 when they are in the retracted position. Therefore, when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to their appearance positions, the previously invisible upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 appear, greatly surprising the player and entertaining the player, while making the player think that something good is about to happen, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 are configured to detect a malfunction in which the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move to the appearance position, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 in the retreated position are detected by the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384. When the ring decoration 3371 is controlled to move to the appearance position, if the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 continue to detect the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, this means that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 have not moved, and a malfunction in which the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move to the appearance position can be detected, and a gaming machine that achieves the above-mentioned action and effect can be realized.

The decorative image 3390 similar to the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 may be larger or smaller than the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. When the decorative image 3390 is made larger than the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, there is an advantage that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be further decorated by the decorative image 3390 displayed on the performance display device 1600. On the other hand, if the decorative image 3390 is made smaller than the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, when a performance is executed in which the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to their appearance positions, there is an advantage that the player will not be able to recognize the decorative image 3390 unless the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is paused due to the occurrence of a malfunction.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the rear second performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5, in front of the rear second outer decorative body 3228 and the rear second inner decorative body 3229 which has a through hole 3329a penetrating from front to back, in the normal state, 12 flat, translucent rotating decorative bodies 3210 consisting of four special rotating decorative bodies 3211 which are specially decorated and the remaining six ordinary rotating decorative bodies 3212 which are decorated differently from the special rotating decorative bodies 3211 are lined up on an orbital circumference centered on an axis extending from front to back so as to decorate the outer periphery of the through hole 3229a, and the display screen of the performance display device 1600 provided rearward faces the through hole 3229a. In this state, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated by the second rear drive motor 3222, the shaft portion 3210a extending rearward from each rotating ornamental body 3210 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221, and the rotating ornamental body 3210 and the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a move (revolve) together with the shaft portion 3210a on a circumference (on an orbital circumference) whose radius is the distance from the center of rotation of the drive ring 3221 to the shaft hole 3221a. At this time, the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b which is provided closer to the center of revolution than the orbital circle of the unit base 3220. Therefore, when the rotating body gear 3225 revolves, the rotating body gear 3225 rolls on the fixed gear portion 3220b and rotates in the same direction as the orbital direction of the rotating body gear 3225, and the rotating body gear 3225 rotates (spins) together with the shaft portion 3210a and the rotating decorative body 3210 around the axis extending in front of and behind the shaft portion 3210a. Therefore, by rotating the drive ring 3221 with the rear second drive motor 3222, multiple (12) rotating ornamental bodies 3210 rotate on their own axes and revolve in the same direction, making a strong impact on the player and strongly attracting the player's attention, while making the player think that something good is about to happen, increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the multiple rotating decorations 3210 that revolve while rotating on an axis extending forward and backward are flat, the faces of the rotating decorations 3210 face forward, making the entire rotating decorations 3210 easy to see from the player's side. Therefore, when these rotating decorations 3210 revolve while rotating on their axes, the player can see the multiple rotating decorations 3210 spinning around, providing the player with a lively presentation, which not only makes a strong impact on the player and provides great entertainment, but also prevents the player's interest from declining.

In addition, behind the multiple rotating decoration bodies 3210, the second back outer decoration body 3228 and the second back inner decoration body 3229, within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decoration body 3210, there are multiple (12) rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 that are separated in the revolution direction and are located behind the multiple rotating decoration bodies 3210 that are stopped in revolution at a stopping position on the revolution circumference (a position where one rotating decoration body 3210 stops revolving at a specific position), and intermediate LEs located between each rotating decoration body LED group 3250. Since the second decorative substrate 3240 is composed of the D group 3255 and multiple LEDs 3241, when the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 are illuminated when the multiple rotating decoration bodies 3210 are in the stopped position, the rotating decoration body 3210 can be illuminated and decorated, and when the LEDs 3241 of the intermediate LED group 3255 are illuminated when the multiple rotating decoration bodies 3210 are between the stopped positions, the rotating decoration body 3210 can be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, when multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 are rotated and revolved, if the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the LEDs 3241 of the intermediate LED group 3255 are appropriately illuminated in accordance with the revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210, the illuminating LEDs 3241 will move together with the revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210, and the light from the LEDs 3241 will be irradiated forward (toward the player) through the translucent back second outer decorative body 3228 and back second inner decorative body 3229 and the rotating decorative body 3210, so that the rotating decorative body 3210 can be illuminated as if the LEDs 3241 were attached to the rotating decorative body 3210. By showing the player the performance of multiple illuminated rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolving while rotating, the player can be greatly entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In this case, the multiple LEDs 3241 that make up the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 are divided into a first LED group 3251 and a second LED group 3252, and a third LED group 3253 and a fourth LED group 3254 in the direction of revolution of the rotating decoration body 3210. This makes it possible to finely illuminate the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 in accordance with the revolution of the rotating decoration body 3210, making it easier to illuminate only the LEDs 3241 located at the rear of the rotating decoration body 3210. This gives the player a strong illusion that the LEDs 3241 are attached to the rotating decoration body 3210 that revolves while rotating on its own axis, and also makes the movement of the illuminated rotating decoration body 3210 more enjoyable, preventing the player's interest in the game from declining.

Furthermore, since the rotating decoration body 3210 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 3241 consisting of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 within the range of the revolution trajectory, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in a circular ring shape, and when all the LEDs 3241 except for the upper left corner LED group 3256, the upper right corner LED group 3257, the lower left corner LED group 3258, and the winning hole LED group 3259 are illuminated, a circular light-emitting performance can be shown to the player. In addition, since the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately arranged in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decoration body 3210, when the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are illuminated alternately in the circumferential direction, a light-emitting decoration in which light rotates around the circumference can be shown to the player. Furthermore, since the rotating ornament 3210 is provided with multiple LEDs 3241 within the range of its revolution trajectory, the multiple LEDs 3241 are arranged in a ring shape with a predetermined width, so that the multiple LEDs 3241 can be illuminated in sequence from the inside to the outside of the ring to show the player a light-emitting effect in which a ring of light spreads outward, or the multiple LEDs 3241 can be illuminated in sequence from the outside to the inside of the ring to show the player a light-emitting effect in which a ring of light converges inward. In this way, various light-emitting effects can be shown to the player, so that the diverse effects can prevent the player from becoming bored, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, when creating a light-emitting effect in which light rotates in the revolution direction of the rotating decoration 3210, each rotating decoration LED group 3250 is divided into the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252, and the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 in the revolution direction of the rotating decoration 3210, so it is possible to make the movement of light in the revolution direction more fine, allowing the player to see a light-emitting effect in which the light rotates more smoothly.In addition, because the movement of light in the revolution direction of the rotating decoration 3210 is more fine, the rotation speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction can be slowed down, and the diverse light-emitting effects make it less likely for players to become bored and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, by appropriately combining the light-emitting effects of the multiple LEDs 3241 as described above with the movable effects of the rotating decorative body 3210 revolving around its axis while rotating on its axis, it is possible to show the player effects that have not been seen in previous pachinko machines, which can make a strong impact on the player and strongly attract the player's attention, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the multiple LEDs 3241 are grouped together into multiple rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 and multiple intermediate LED groups 3255, each rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and each intermediate LED group 3255 can be controlled to emit light, which reduces the load on control compared to when the multiple LEDs 3241 are controlled to emit light one by one. This prevents malfunctions caused by overload, which reduces the interest of the player, and simplifies the control circuitry on the peripheral control board 1510, etc., thereby reducing costs.

Furthermore, since the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are arranged alternately in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decoration body 3210, for example, when only the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 is illuminated in the circumferential direction in sequence at a fixed time interval, the speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction can be made different from when the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are illuminated alternately in the circumferential direction at the same time interval. This reduces the load on the control of the light emission effect, and allows players to enjoy the light emission effect in which light rotates at different speeds, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the translucent second outer decorative body 3228 and the second inner decorative body 3229 are provided between the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 and the multiple LEDs 3241. This makes it difficult for the player to see the LEDs 3241 on the second decorative board 3240 from the front due to the second outer decorative body 3228 and the second inner decorative body 3229. This makes it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the LEDs 3241 that are provided separately from the rotating decorative body 3210. This makes it easier to create the illusion that the LEDs 3241 are provided on the rotating decorative body 3210. This increases the impact of the luminous decoration of the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves around itself, and also makes the performance by the rotating decorative body 3210 more enjoyable, thereby preventing the player's interest in the game from declining.

In addition, among the multiple rotating decorations 3210, there is a special rotating decoration 3211 that is decorated with a special decoration (a three-striped decoration). As a result, when the multiple rotating decorations 3210 are rotated and revolved, the player can be kept on edge and excited depending on whether or not the special rotating decoration 3211 stops revolving at a specific position, allowing the player to enjoy the moving effects of the multiple rotating decorations 3210 and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since it is equipped with a rotational position detection sensor 3231 that detects when one rotating decoration body 3210 is located at a specific position on the orbital circumference including the stop position, and a special rotational position detection sensor 3232 that detects when one special rotating decoration body 3211 is located at a specific position, when, among the multiple rotating decoration bodies 3210, the normal rotating decoration body 3212 is located at a specific position, only the rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects it, and when the special rotating decoration body 3211 is located at a specific position, both the rotational position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 detect it. Therefore, by combining detection by the rotational position detection sensor 3231 and detection by the special rotational position detection sensor 3232, it is possible to detect whether the normal rotating decoration body 3212 or the special rotating decoration body 3211 is located at a specific position. Therefore, when one of the multiple rotating decorations 3210 is stopped from revolving at a specific position, the rotation position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 can be used to stop the revolution of either the normal rotating decoration 3212 or the special rotating decoration 3211, which revolves while rotating on its axis, at a specific position. This allows the player to see the effect of whether or not the special rotating decoration 3211 will stop revolving at a specific position, making the player excited and entertained, and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the detection piece 3221c for detecting the normal rotating ornament 3212 and the special rotating ornament 3211 located at a specific position, and the special detection piece 3221d for detecting the special rotating ornament 3211 located at a specific position are provided on the drive ring 3221, the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d do not rotate, compared to when the detection piece and the special detection piece are provided on the rotating ornament 3210, so the configuration of the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d can be simplified, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, since the multiple rotating decorations 3210 can be rotated and revolved around their axes by a single rear second drive motor 3222, the configuration of the drive mechanism for the multiple rotating decorations 3210 can be simplified compared to when the rotation and revolution of the rotating decorations 3210 are driven by separate drive motors, and the drive mechanism can be made smaller, and the control load for the movable performance of the multiple rotating decorations 3210 can be reduced. Also, as described above, since the drive mechanism for the multiple rotating decorations 3210 can be made smaller, it is possible to relatively increase the space for arranging the multiple rotating decorations 3210, so the rotating decorations 3210 can be made larger and more noticeable to the player, and the multiple rotating decorations 3210 can strongly attract the player's attention.

Furthermore, because the shaft portion 3210a protrudes rearward beyond the LED 3241, the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end is rearward beyond the LED 3241, and naturally the fixed gear portion 3220b and the drive ring 3221 are also rearward beyond the LED 3241. As a result, the rotating body gear 3225, the fixed gear portion 3220b, the drive ring 3221, etc. do not block the light irradiated forward from the LED 3241, and the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be reliably illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the second rear drive motor 3222 that rotates the drive ring 3221 is provided on the outside of the drive ring 3221, and the inside of the fixed gear part 3220b (inside the through hole 3229a) can be made wider, making it easier to see the display screen of the performance display device 1600 facing the inside, and making it easier to achieve the performance effect of the performance image.

In addition, since the drive ring 3221 is provided on the outside of the fixed gear portion 3220b and the second drive motor 3222 is provided on the outside of the drive ring 3221, the second drive motor 3222 can be provided at approximately the same position as the front-to-rear position of the drive ring 3221, thereby suppressing an increase in the thickness of the drive mechanism applied to the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210. In addition, the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 are flat, so that the thickness of the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 in the front-to-rear direction can be reduced. For these reasons, the thickness in the front-to-back direction can be made thinner, and the space for arranging the multiple rotating decorations 3210 can be made relatively wider, making the diameter of the rotating decorations 3210 larger and more noticeable to the player, strongly attracting the player's attention to the multiple rotating decorations 3210. It is also possible to provide other components in front of or behind the multiple rotating decorations 3210, and by using these other components to perform effects, a more diverse range of effects can be shown to the player, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball B is shot from the left side along the periphery into the upper part of the game area 5a and passes through the gate unit 2003 as a bonus awarding unit provided in the game area 5a, or is received by the general winning port 2001, the second starting port 2004, and the large winning port 2005 of the attacca unit 2400 as bonus awarding units, a predetermined bonus (for example, the drawing of a normal lottery result or a special lottery result that gives the player an advantage, the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, etc.) is awarded, so that the player can play a game in which he or she shoots the game ball B into a bonus awarding unit such as the gate unit 2003.

Within this game area 5a, an upstream space 2511 is provided above the upper right peripheral wall 2510 on the right side in the left-right direction above the frame-shaped center device 2500, and a group of circulation passages 2520 is provided downstream of the upstream space 2511, upstream of the gate section 2003, through which the game ball B circulates via different routes depending on the strength of the hit. Therefore, the probability that the game ball B will pass through the downstream gate section 2003 differs for each of the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 that make up the circulation passage group 2520. Therefore, the player must adjust the strength of the shot of the game ball B so that the game ball B is shot into the game area 5a with a strength that causes the game ball B to enter the upstream space portion 2511 and the entrance to the second flow passage 2522, where there is a high probability that the game ball B will pass through the gate portion 2003. This can add variety to the shooting operation of the game ball B, making it less likely for the player to get bored, and allowing the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the game ball B aimed at the entrance of the desired second flow passage 2522, preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the impact stop portion 1006 protrudes inward from the periphery of the play area 5a near the right end of the upstream space portion 2511, and an entrance to the first flow passage 2521 is provided near the impact stop portion 1006, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that causes it to abut against the impact stop portion 1006 (for example, an impact strength of a specific level or greater that causes the game ball B to flow (roll) along the periphery of the play area 5a), there is a high probability that the game ball B that abuts against the impact stop portion 1006 will enter the entrance to the first flow passage 2521 near the impact stop portion 1006 in the flow passage group 2520. Therefore, when aiming at the first flow passage 2521, the game ball B is shot with enough strength to strike the impact stopper 1006, and when aiming at the other second flow passage 2522, the game ball B is shot with enough strength not to strike the impact stopper 1006, which adds variety to the shooting operation of the game ball B, entertains the player, and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, the probability that game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521, whose entrance is located near the impact stopper 1006, will pass through the downstream gate 2003 is reduced, and the game ball is discharged outside the game area 5a without the opportunity for a special bonus being awarded. This allows the player to adjust the strength of the impact of game ball B so that the game ball B does not enter the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521, thereby adding variety to the impact operation of game ball B, making it less likely for the player to become bored, and allowing the player to enjoy the impact operation of game ball B aimed at the entrance of the remaining second circulation passage 2522, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the circulation passage group 2520 is provided in the direction in which the game ball B is hit, it is possible to reliably realize the circulation passage group 2520 (first circulation passage 2521 and second circulation passage 2522) in which the game ball B is circulated through different routes depending on the strength of the hit, and it is possible to create a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, since an upstream space 2511 is provided upstream of the flow passage group 2520, in order for a player to enter the entrance of the desired first flow passage 2521 or second flow passage 2522, the player needs to shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a with a hitting strength that will allow it to enter the upstream space 2511 and also with a hitting strength that will allow it to enter the desired first flow passage 2521 or second flow passage 2522. This makes it possible to further increase the difficulty of the operation of shooting the game ball B, allowing the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the game ball B and suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, their entrances are adjacent to each other, and therefore even a slight difference in the strength with which game ball B is hit can easily result in game ball B entering a different entrance to the circulation passage. This increases the difficulty of the player's operation of hitting game ball B, allowing the player to enjoy the operation of hitting game ball B and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 are concentrated to a certain extent, so that the play area 5a and the frame of the center device 2500 can be made relatively wider, allowing the player to enjoy the play in the play area 5a and the performance within the frame of the center device 2500, and preventing a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, the distribution passage group 2520 is shown to be composed of two distribution passages, the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522, but this is not limited thereto, and the group may be composed of three distribution passages.

In addition, in the above embodiment, it has been shown that the game ball B that has entered the attacca right passage 2422 of the attacca unit 2400 is guided onto the second starting port guide shelf 2423 with a high probability by abutting against the step 1005a of the right rail 1005, but this is not limited to this, and the game ball B that has entered the attacca right passage 2422 may also be guided to the attacca lower right passage 2426 with a high probability.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the rear second performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 is shown as having multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210 that revolve in the same direction as the rotation direction, but this is not limited to this, and they may also revolve in the opposite direction to the rotation direction.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the decorative image 3390 is displayed when a performance using the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is executed regardless of whether or not there is a malfunction in which they do not move to their appearance position, but this is not limited to this, and when there is no malfunction in them, a performance image without the decorative image 3390 may be displayed, and the decorative image 3390 may be displayed only when a malfunction occurs in them.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the rear third upper drive motor 3320, the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the rear third right drive motor 3380 are driven by a constant current drive method, but this is not limited to this, and since they are stepping motors, they may be driven by a 2-2 phase excitation method, and high torque can be generated.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the rear third upper drive motor 3320, the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the rear third right drive motor 3380 are shown as stepping motors, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be DC motors with large starting torque.

In addition, in the above embodiment, drive motors such as the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are shown as motors for rotating the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, but this is not limited to these and may also be a solenoid, a rotary solenoid, etc.

6. Control Configuration
Next, the control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine in outline. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure, and each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the door frame effect display device 152, the door frame sub display unit 185, and the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. The payout control board 633 is equipped with a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 111.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands and a RAM that temporarily stores data, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit for driving various solenoids, a setting display 1310g for displaying setting values and errors, and a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also includes a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a has built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), as well as a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a as a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) to identify the individual unit. Once this ID code is assigned, it cannot be rewritten even using an external device, as it is stored in the non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU 1310a is capable of retrieving the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and referencing it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a specified register of the main control MPU 1310a, and if the register changes to an inconsistent content, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a as being affected by electrical noise. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be disabled by controlling it with a user program. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and the main control side power on processing described later is executed again. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, as described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared). Furthermore, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the dispensing control board 633, so only the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the dispensing control board 633 remains in an activated state.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit") that uses hardware to update the jackpot determination random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, among various random numbers related to the game. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and is configured so that the predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as the initial value, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the main control MPU 1310a), and when all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts one value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeats such rapid lottery selection, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time when it obtains a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a random number for determining a jackpot.

The main control input circuit does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals, which are detection signals from the various sensors, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown). In other words, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which information based on detection signals from the various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by a main control system reset, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects the first start port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, the general prize port sensor 2401 and the general prize port sensor 3001 that detect the game ball B received in the general prize port 2001, the gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate section 2003, the large prize port sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the large prize port 2005, the game ball B that has been detected by the large prize port sensor 2403 and then received in the first receiving port 2007, Detection signals from the first receiving port sensor 2404 that detects the game ball B, the second receiving port sensor 2405 that detects the game ball B that is received by the second receiving port 2008 after being detected by the large prize opening sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 2470 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, the vibration sensor 3005 that detects illegal vibrations in the game area 5a, and the outlet sensor 3032 that detects the game ball B that is collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, etc. are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, a detection signal from the setting key 1311a on the setting change board 1311 is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. In addition, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 is also input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the RWM clear button 633z has the function of a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a specified area of the RAM built into the dispensing control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310, the function of an error release switch for releasing an error displayed on the error LED indicator, and the function of a setting switch button for selecting and switching a setting value. For this reason, the signals from the RWM clear button 633z input to the main control board 1310 include a signal (RAM clear signal) that acts as a RAM clear switch to clear the RAM, a signal (error clear signal) that acts as an error clear switch to inform the user that an error has been cleared, and a signal (setting value selection switch signal) that acts as a setting switch button to select and switch a setting value. However, while the main control board 1310 monitors the input of the RAM clear signal and the setting value setting change signal, which are important signals related to itself, it does not monitor the input of the error clear signal, which is the subject of control handled by the dispensing control board 633, which is not related to itself.

The detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a and the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b are input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633 (i.e., directly, without passing through the dispensing control input circuit and dispensing control output circuit described below), and are then input to the input terminals of the specified input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the first start port sensor 2101 and the second start port sensor 2402 are input directly to the main control board 1310 without going through other boards, and are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. In contrast, the detection signals from the general prize opening sensor 3001, the general prize opening sensor 2401, the large prize opening sensor 2403, the first receiving port sensor 2404, the second receiving port sensor 2405, the magnetic sensor 2470, the vibration sensor 3005, and the outlet sensor 3032 are input indirectly to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of its specified output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting the respective drive signals from the main control solenoid drive circuit to the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacca solenoid 2414 via the panel relay board 1710, i.e. indirectly, or outputs the respective drive signals from the output terminal of its specified output port to the status indicator, normal pattern indicator, normal hold indicator, first special pattern indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special pattern indicator, second special hold number indicator, round indicator, etc. of the function display unit 1400, directly, i.e. without going through other boards. Also, based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of its specified output port to the setting change permission lamp 1310z.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information related to the game (game information) from the output terminal of the specified output port, outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) to the power failure monitoring circuit by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the specified output port, and outputs a launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch game ball B from the output terminal of the specified output port to the payout control board 633. The logic of this launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to launch permission logic when launch is permitted, and is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. The logic of the firing permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the initial value (default) is set to firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inversion of the firing permission logic from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when power is restored) until the firing permission signal setting process in the main control timer interrupt process described below is started.

In this embodiment, the first start opening sensor 2101, the second start opening sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2506, and the special prize opening sensor 2403 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, whereas the general prize opening sensor 2401 and the general prize opening sensor 3001 use contact type ON/OFF operation mechanical switches. This is because game ball B frequently enters the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate section 2003, so that the first start opening sensor 2101, the second start opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506 frequently detect game ball B. For this reason, the first start opening sensor 2101, the second start opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506 use proximity switches that are highly durable and have a long lifespan.

In addition, when a favorable game state (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs that is advantageous to the player, the large prize opening 2005 is opened and game ball B enters the large prize opening sensor 2403 frequently, so that the detection of game ball B by the large prize opening sensor 2403 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the large prize opening sensor 2403. In addition, since a large amount of game ball B shot into the game area 5a is collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, the detection of game ball B by the outlet sensor 3032 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the outlet sensor 3032. In contrast, the general prize opening 2001, where game ball B does not enter frequently, is not frequently detected by the general prize opening sensor 2401 and the general prize opening sensor 3001. For this reason, mechanical switches, which have a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch, are used for the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001. Note that a highly durable, long-life proximity switch may be used regardless of whether or not game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Note that, when the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, which will be described in detail later, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as the "main control side capacitor") as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This main control side capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The various information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM when a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z of the dispensing control board 633 has been operated is input to the main control MPU 1310a when the power is turned on.

The main control board 1310 is also provided with a power outage monitoring circuit. This power outage monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages fall below the power outage warning voltage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the dispensing control board 633, etc.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game balls B, is equipped with a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 633b that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145, an error LED indicator that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an RWM clear button 633z having a pressing operation unit that combines multiple functions. The RWM clear button 633z has a function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, a function as an error release switch for releasing an error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a function as a setting switch for selecting and switching a setting value.

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch is limited to the RAM clear determination period from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the period from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control side power-on processing described below and makes a determination in step S14 in that processing).

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting change button is limited to the setting change valid period from the time the RAM clear determination period has elapsed to the time the main control MPU 1310a determines in the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process described below that the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 has rotated the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the decision key ON to the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF).

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error release switch is valid from the point when the RAM clear determination period and the setting switch valid period have elapsed. Note that during the RAM clear determination period and the setting switch valid period, even if a signal indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is input to the payout control unit 633a (the payout control MPU described later), it is disabled.

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button is limited to the setting switching valid period after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed, as described above. However, during this setting switching valid period, the main control MPU 1310a continues to monitor the rotation position of the setting key cylinder using the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 in the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process described below after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed. Therefore, the interrupt permission setting (step S52 in the main control side power-on process) for allowing the start of the main control side timer interrupt process described below cannot be performed, and the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt process described below cannot be performed. In other words, the setting switching valid period is a period during which fraud detection is not possible.

During this period when the setting change is valid, i.e., during which fraud cannot be detected, there is a risk that a fraudster may make some kind of fraudulent tampering with the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311.

In this embodiment, when accessing the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 to operate it, as described above, the main frame 4 must first be opened widely (nearly 90 degrees) relative to the outer frame 2 in order to secure space in which the rear cover 640 can be opened to cover the rear side of the game board 5. As a result, during the setting switching valid period, that is, the period during which fraudulent activity cannot be detected, the main frame 4 is opened widely (nearly 90 degrees) relative to the outer frame 2, so that if any fraudulent changes are made to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the fraudulent activity will be extremely noticeable in the game hall, and therefore such fraudulent activity countermeasures can be taken. This can contribute to preventing fraudulent activity.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The dispensing control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to dispensing on the dispensing control board 633, is equipped with a dispensing control MPU, which is a microprocessor that has built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and RAM for temporarily storing data, (detailed illustration is omitted), a dispensing control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the dispensing control MPU is operating normally, a dispensing motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 584 of the dispensing device 580, and a dispensing control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches related to dispensing are input.

In addition to its built-in RAM (hereafter referred to as "built-in payout control RAM") and built-in ROM (hereafter referred to as "built-in payout control ROM"), the payout control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereafter referred to as "built-in payout control WDT") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payouts from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and receives a signal via the payout control I/O port indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated. In addition, the payout control MPU receives detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball out detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590. The signal indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

The detection signals from the ball out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the fall cover unit 150 and the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit. When the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is filled with game balls B and the game balls B are no longer released from the ball release port 150d to the lower tray 202 side, the fall cover unit 150 can store a certain number of game balls B in the storage passage 150e. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 rotates due to the weight of the game balls B so that the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. This makes it possible to determine that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, and when the full-tray detection sensor 154 detects that the tray is full, the payout of further game balls B is stopped, and the player or amusement hall staff is notified of this, urging them to replenish the lower tray 202.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of a specified output port to drive the payout motor 584, outputs a signal to display the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator, serially transmits commands to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310, and outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out to the external terminal board 558. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's play by obtaining the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The error LED display may display and notify the user of the following: For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it notifies that it is "normal", when the number "0" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633), when the number "1" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "ball out" (specifically, that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580 based on a detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574), when the number "2" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "ball stuck" (specifically, that a game ball B is stuck between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 based on a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 59 When the number "5" is displayed, it indicates a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit); when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates a "full" state (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the fault cover unit 150 based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154); when the number "7" is displayed, it indicates a "CR not connected" state (the electrical connection has been cut somewhere between the payout control board 633 and the CR unit); and when the number "9" is displayed, it indicates a "stocking" state (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

The ball loan request signal for game ball B from the ball loan button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be loaned in accordance with the ball loan request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B loaned, and outputs a display signal of the remaining balance to the ball loan operation unit 220, and this signal is input to the ball loan display section of the ball loan operation unit 220 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on this clock signal, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a ball delivery solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball delivery solenoid 145 based on the launch reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched per minute toward the game area 5a and outputs it to the launch solenoid drive circuit, and generates a ball delivery reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the launch reference pulse and outputs it to the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 110, the detection signals from the handle touch sensor 192, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 111, and the single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether the player will forcibly stop shooting the game ball B, are input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the detection signals are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then to the launch timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, which conveys permission to shoot the game ball B, is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. The signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength with which the game ball B is shot toward the play area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 111, is input to the launch solenoid drive circuit.

Unless launch condition 1 is met, that is, the palm or fingers are touching the handle 111 based on a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, launch condition 2 is met, that the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected based on a CR connection signal, and launch condition 3 is met, that the launch of game ball B is permitted based on a launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, the launch timing control circuit will not output a launch reference pulse to launch game ball B toward the play area 5a. For example, the launch solenoid drive circuit will not output a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 and game ball B cannot be launched.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current to the launch solenoid 542 to launch the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 111, triggered by the input of the launch reference pulse. On the other hand, the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball delivery solenoid 145, triggered by the input of the ball delivery reference pulse, to receive one game ball B stored in the upper tray 130 of the door frame 3 into the ball delivery unit 140, and sends the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 by stopping the output of the constant current, triggered by the end of the input of the ball delivery reference pulse. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit to the ball delivery solenoid 145 is controlled to be constant.

The dispensing control board 633 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the dispensing control board 633 is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as the "dispensing control side capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the dispensing control board 633 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This dispensing control side capacitor allows the dispensing control MPU to store various information in the dispensing control built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The various information stored in a predetermined area of the dispensing control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) from the dispensing control built-in RAM when a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is input to the dispensing control MPU when the power is turned on. This signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

In addition, in this embodiment, the launch control unit 633b, which controls launch by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery by the ball delivery solenoid 145, is provided on the payout control board 633, but it may also be configured to be provided on the power supply board 630. In this case, the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board (not shown).

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 111, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control unit 1511.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511, which controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510, is equipped with a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor (not shown in detail), a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that produces high-quality sound, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referenced by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it transmits game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700 to each decorative board of the game board 5, and transmits game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate the various presentation units provided on the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board via the panel drive board 1720 to the drive motors of the game board 5 or It transmits the door side drive light emission data, which is composed of door side drive data for outputting drive signals to the first lift drive motor 175b, second lift drive motor 182, etc. provided on the door frame 3, and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc. provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, to the door frame 3 side from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board, transmits control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600 from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the performance display control unit 1512, and outputs a control signal (sound command) to extract sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the rotational and moving positions of the multiple rotating decorations 3210 of the rear second performance unit 3200 in the rear unit 3000 provided on the game board 5, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the rear third performance unit 3300, etc., are input to the peripheral control MPU via the panel drive board 1720.

The detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 165 of the performance operation unit 160 in the door frame performance device 150 provided on the door frame 3 is input to the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU also receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 indicating that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and monitors the operation of the performance display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU, and controls the output of music, sound effects, and other sounds that match various performances from the lower speaker 153a, the lower front speaker 191, and the upper speaker 241, etc., provided on the door frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box that houses the peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, by sending audio signals (e.g., 2ch stereo signals, 4ch stereo signals, 2.1ch surround signals, or 4.1ch surround signals, etc.) as sound information to the lower speaker 153a, the lower front speaker 191, and the upper speaker 241 of the door frame 3, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU uses the built-in WDT and the external WDT together to diagnose whether its own system is out of control.

The display commands output from this peripheral control MPU to the performance display control unit 1512 are sent via a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (the amount of data that can be sent per unit time) is set to 19.2 kilobits per second (bps). On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side light flashing command, game board side light flashing command, movable body drive command, etc., output from the peripheral control MPU to the panel drive board 1720 of the game board 5 are sent via multiple serial input/output ports different from the display commands, and in this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

The panel drive board 1720 outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting and flashing command to the LEDs of each decorative board provided on the door frame 3 (LED 121a, LED 122a, LED 138a, LED 153c, LED 159a, lattice decoration LED 195, LED 213a, upper outer apex LED 224, upper outer valley LED 225, upper outer edge LED 231, lattice decoration LED 245, etc.), and outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received game board side lighting and flashing command to the LEDs of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

In addition, the panel drive board 1720 outputs drive signals based on the received drive commands to the first lift drive motor 175b and the second lift drive motor 182 provided on the door frame 3, and to each drive motor provided on the game board 5, etc.

[6-3b. Production display control section]
The performance display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the performance display control unit 1512 is a display control MPU as a microprocessor. a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands, and various data; a VDP (short for Video Display Processor) for displaying and controlling the door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600; It is equipped with an image ROM that stores various data for the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the drawing of the door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform the same. The display control MPU also receives an in-progress signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of this in-progress signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores a variety of programs for generating screens to be drawn on the door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600, as well as schedule data corresponding to the control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display commands). The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that specifies the screen configuration, and specifies the order of screens to be drawn on the door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that specifies the order when various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data specifies the order in which various data is transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance, as the screen data to be drawn on the door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600 progresses according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM, starting from the first screen data, and outputs it to the VDP.

When the VDP receives screen data output from the display control MPU, it extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the door frame performance display device 152 or the performance display device 1600, and outputs this generated drawing data to the door frame performance display device 152 or the performance display device 1600. When the door frame performance display device 152 or the performance display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the latter. The VDP uses a line buffer system. This "line buffer system" is a system in which one line of drawing data that draws the left and right directions of the door frame performance display device 152 or the performance display device 1600 is stored in a line buffer, and the one line of drawing data stored in the line buffer is output to the door frame performance display device 152 or the performance display device 1600.

The image ROM stores a large amount of sprite data, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and this affects the speed at which images are drawn on the door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is the base data, which is the data before the sprite is expanded into bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Now, to explain what a "sprite" is, a "sprite" is an image that is displayed as a unit on the door frame performance display device 152 or the performance display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the door frame performance display device 152 or the performance display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying multiple people on the door frame performance display device 152 or the performance display device 1600, multiple sprites are used. In addition to people, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be treated as a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the door frame performance display device 152 or the performance display device 1600 after their positions on the screen and their hierarchical relationship when sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as the "sprite overlap order") are set.

A sprite is made up of multiple rectangular areas of 64 pixels each. The data used to draw these rectangular areas is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be represented using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be represented using a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 x 3. Even larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using even more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be specified arbitrarily for each sprite.

The door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600 are driven by main scanning, which sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front, and sub-scanning, which repeats main scanning in a direction intersecting the one direction. When the door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600 receive one line of drawing data output from the performance display control unit 1512, they output the data to one line of pixels in a main scan from left to right when viewed from the front of the door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600. When the output of one line is completed, the door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600 move to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and when the next line of drawing data is input in the same way, they output the data to one line of pixels in a main scan from left to right when viewed from the front of the door frame performance display device 152 and the performance display device 1600 based on the drawing data of the next line.

[6-4. Mounting of SMD-type electronic components]
Next, measures against discontinued electronic components will be described. First, for various reasons related to the pachinko machine 1, it is necessary to mount lead-type electronic components on the mounting surface, which is the front side, of boards that are treated as main boards, such as the power supply board, main control board, and payout control board, and solder them on the solder surface, which is the back side. However, as mentioned above, lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of gaming machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and fusion gaming machines, but other general electronics manufacturers use surface-mounted types (so-called SMD types) that can be miniaturized. For this reason, there are cases where production of lead-type electronic components is discontinued due to a decrease in the number of lead-type electronic components produced. Therefore, lead-type electronic components that can configure SMD-type electronic components as lead-type electronic components can be mounted on the mounting surface of the board that is treated as the main board.

However, when configured as a lead-type electronic component, the external shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component becomes larger than that of a lead-type electronic component, and a protrusion may be formed on one or more of the components, resulting in a distorted external shape (shape). When a lead-type electronic component having such an external shape (shape) is mounted on the mounting surface of a board treated as a main board, it may be difficult to arrange it on the board relative to other electronic components, making it difficult to configure some SMD-type electronic components as the lead-type electronic components described above. Therefore, in addition to such lead-type electronic components, it may be permitted to mount a limited number of SMD-type electronic components, such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, on the mounting surface of a board treated as a main board.

Here, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to Figs. 112 to 115. Fig. 112 is an enlarged view (a) of a portion of the area where SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and (b) of the enlarged view seen from the right side of the main control board. Fig. 113 is a schematic view (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of a board on which SMD type electronic components that replace lead type electronic components are aggregated in a predetermined area, and (b) of the surface (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of a board that has been downsized by aggregating SMD type electronic components that replace lead type electronic components. Fig. 114 is a view showing the back (solder surface) of the main control board in the enlarged view of Fig. 112, and Fig. 115 is a perspective view of the main control board box of the main control unit. Note that in Figs. 112 and 114, various other electronic components have been omitted except for those necessary for the explanation, for ease of viewing.

The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is a substitute having the same functions as a lead type Schmitt trigger inverter (DIP (Dual Inline Package) type), and is disposed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, which is the area where this lead type Schmitt trigger inverter is mounted. The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is one of the main circuits that make up the main control input circuit to which the detection signals from the various sensors described above are input, and if it is removed from the main control board 1310 by some fraudulent means, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 will always determine that no ball has been entered for those of the various sensors that report the entry of a game ball, and will always determine that fraud is occurring for those that report the approach of a magnet or fraudulent vibration. The main control board 1310 is equipped with multiple types of lead-type electronic components, such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs.

In this embodiment, green is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are solidly painted with green resist, except for the various land patterns.

As shown in Figures 112(a) and 112(b), the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is mounted with an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as the "Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30") and a lead type high frequency bypass capacitor MC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as the "capacitor MC30") that can remove the noise voltage generated by the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 itself, located near the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Note that the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 and capacitor MC30 are omitted from Figure 112(a) for ease of viewing.

The Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is a single SMD package in which six Schmitt trigger inverter circuits are integrated. In this embodiment, a 14-pin SOP (Small Outline Package) is used as the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (hereinafter, the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 may be referred to as "SOP14"). The Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed with seven leads that are bent and protruded outward from two opposing sides of the SMD package body with a lead-to-lead distance dimension (so-called "lead pitch", 1.27 mm in this embodiment), and each lead is placed on a rectangular land pattern formed only on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 corresponding to each lead, and then each lead is soldered to the rectangular land pattern formed only on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The width of each lead is 0.43 mm, and the width of the rectangular land pattern is 0.76 mm, which is larger than the width of each lead (the length of the rectangular land pattern is 1.27 mm). In this embodiment, the size of the SMD package body is 5.3 mm wide, 10.8 mm long, and 1.5 mm high, and the width of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is 7.8 mm, including the length of the leads protruding from the two sides of the SMD package body.

Note that although the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in order to mount lead-type electronic components on the main control board 1310, the rear surface of the main control board 1310 is the solder surface and is referred to as the "rear surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310" (the same applies below).

The capacitor MC30 has two leads protruding from a rectangular body and protruding in parallel straight lines toward the outside with a lead-to-lead distance dimension (so-called "lead pitch", 5 mm in this embodiment). Of the ring-shaped land patterns (also called through holes, the same applies below) formed on both sides (front side (mounting surface) and back side (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the two leads, the two leads are inserted from the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the front side (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back side (solder surface) 1310y, and then the two leads protruding from the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back side (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are soldered to the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back side (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. The diameter of the two leads is 0.5 mm, and the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is larger than the diameter of the two leads, being 0.7 mm (the outer diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 1.3 mm).

In addition, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is formed as a so-called solid earth (board ground) with the rest of the area being ground (GND) except for the wiring pattern that transmits control signals, the wiring pattern that supplies power, and the areas where various land patterns are formed, and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is also formed as a so-called solid earth (board ground) with the rest of the area being ground (GND) except for the wiring pattern that transmits control signals, the wiring pattern that supplies power, and the areas where various land patterns are formed. The solid earth (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid earth (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to each other by a plurality of through holes (holes (copper-plated holes) penetrating both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310) formed on both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310), forming the same ground (GND). The diameter of the through holes is 0.3 mm, which is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern. In addition to the through holes that electrically connect the solid earth (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid earth (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to the same ground (GND), there are also several through holes that are used to route various wiring patterns to both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 112(a), an area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including the orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) solid lines, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) near the area MSLKMIC30 and to the lower left. Specifically, the area MSLKMIC30 indicates that the lead that will be the 1st terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is to be placed on the lower left side, the lead that will be the 7th terminal (ground (GND) terminal) on the lower right side, the lead that will be the 8th terminal on the upper right side, and the lead that will be the 14th terminal (power terminal) on the upper left side, so that the longitudinal direction of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is the left-right direction in FIG. 112(a).

The rectangular land patterns corresponding to the leads that are terminals 1 to 6 and terminals 8 to 13 of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are electrically connected to the wiring patterns that transmit the corresponding control signals, the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that is terminal 7 (ground (GND) terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is electrically connected to a solid earth (board ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that is terminal 14 (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is electrically connected to the wiring pattern that supplies power.

The surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is stamped with the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols, for example, "ABC") and product number (a number listed in a catalog, for example, "74XXYYZZ") or printed in a specific color (which varies depending on the manufacturer). However, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is a small SMD package called SOP14, and because it is small, the surface area of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is small.

The main control board 1310, which will be described in detail later, is an important control board that controls the progress of the game, and so it is necessary to protect the main control board 1310 from those who would make illegal modifications to obtain illegal game balls. Therefore, it is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 that is made up of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body and has multiple ventilation holes for heat dissipation. These ventilation holes for heat dissipation allow the air inside the main control board box 1320 to be released to the outside air.

As a result, when checking the part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) of the various electronic components of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and the front (mounting surface) side of the main control board 1310 is visually inspected through the transparent cover, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) and part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are small and difficult to see.

Therefore, in this embodiment, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 near and to the right of the area MSLKMIC30 in FIG. 112(a), and the part number (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk screen printing in a size that is easily visible compared to the size of the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Therefore, the part number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably seen.

The name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) along with the product number (number listed in the catalog). In this case, it is preferable that the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) is silk-screened in white (or black) at a size that is easily visible compared to the size of the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. This allows the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 to be reliably visible.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an area MSLKMC30 is silk-screened in a white solid line (or a black solid line) to indicate the position (the orientation is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed so that it is located near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that is the 14th terminal (power terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, and a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) near and to the upper right of the area MSLKMC30. Specifically, the area MSLKMC30 indicates that one lead is to be inserted into the upper ring-shaped land pattern that is electrically connected to the wiring pattern that supplies power, and the other lead is to be inserted into the lower ring-shaped land pattern that is paired with the upper ring-shaped land pattern, so that the two leads of the capacitor MC30 are vertically oriented in FIG. 112(a).

The wiring pattern to which the upper ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected is also electrically connected to a rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that serves as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. The lower ring-shaped land pattern is also electrically connected to a solid earth (board ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

Here, we will briefly explain the advantages of mounting SMD-type electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of a board treated as a main board. As described above, SMD-type electronic components can be made smaller than lead-type electronic components, so the electronic component mounting density when SMD-type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a board can be significantly reduced compared to the electronic component mounting density when lead-type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a board. Therefore, when a replacement SMD-type electronic component having the same function as this lead-type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a board on which a lead-type electronic component is mounted, since the SMD-type electronic component is small, the surrounding area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board on which the SMD-type electronic component is mounted can be increased, and the area between the components replaced from the lead-type electronic component to the SMD-type electronic component can also be increased (i.e., the mounting mode of the electronic component can be such that there are many gaps on the surface (mounting surface) of the board due to the replaced components). This allows the SMD-type electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board to be visually inspected from multiple directions, making it possible to check for unauthorized tampering with the SMD-type electronic components, the mounting state (soldering state) between the surface (mounting surface) of the board and the SMD-type electronic components, and the state of various wiring patterns and various land patterns on the SMD-type electronic components. Therefore, using SMD-type electronic components can contribute to making unauthorized tampering easier to detect.

In addition, since the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board on which the SMD type electronic components are mounted can be increased, and the area between the components where the lead type electronic components have been replaced with SMD type electronic components can also be increased, the part number (the number listed in the catalog) of the SMD type electronic component can be silk-screened in white (or black) in these areas (the surface (mounting surface) of the board) in a size that is easily visible compared to the size of the part number (the number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the SMD type electronic component, and the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) can also be silk-screened in white (or black) together with this part number (the number listed in the catalog). This can therefore contribute to the ease of recognition of SMD type electronic components.

When an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a board, the distance between the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board is extremely short (for example, in the case of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, the distance between the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is 0.1 mm to 0.2 mm). This creates the problem that even if someone tries to form some kind of unauthorized circuit in the gap between the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board, it is difficult to discover such an unauthorized circuit.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the following configuration is adopted as a method to prevent any unauthorized circuit from being formed in the gap between the back surface of the body of an SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the board.

A configuration was adopted in which no wiring patterns for transmitting control signals are placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD-type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), a configuration was adopted in which no wiring patterns for transmitting control signals are placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 that corresponds to the back surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the area that passes through the lower part of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30).

A configuration was adopted in which no wiring patterns electrically connected to ground (GND) or wiring patterns for supplying power are arranged in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), a configuration was adopted in which no wiring patterns electrically connected to ground (GND) or wiring patterns for supplying power are arranged in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the area passing through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30).

A configuration was adopted in which no through holes are arranged in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), through holes MTH are arranged in the upper right and upper left of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, and no through holes MTH are arranged in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the area passing through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). As described above, these through holes MTH are electrically connected by holes (copper-plated holes) that penetrate both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310, so that they can be the same ground (GND). In addition to the through holes MTH, the main control board 1310 also has a number of through holes MTH' (not shown) for routing various wiring patterns on both sides (front side (mounting side) and back side (solder side)) of the main control board 1310. However, this configuration does not include any through holes MTH' in the area of the front side (mounting side) of the main control board 1310 that corresponds to the back side of the body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the area that passes through the lower part of the body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30).

A configuration was adopted in which the wiring pattern electrically connected to one of the leads of the SMD type electronic component is formed in an area on the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the body of the SMD type electronic component, and is not drawn out to the outside of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are not placed at all in the area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the area passing through the lower part of the body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30), but are placed from above or below the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

In order to shorten the wiring pattern that electrically connects one lead to another lead of the SMD type electronic component, a configuration is adopted in which no wiring patterns that transmit control signals are placed in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), the various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are not placed at all in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 that corresponds to the back surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the area that passes through the lower part of the body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30), but are placed from above or below the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

A configuration is adopted in which the leads of the SMD type electronic components are soldered to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, so that control signals cannot be taken out without passing through each wiring pattern electrically connected to the land pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), a configuration is adopted in which the leads of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are soldered to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, so that control signals cannot be taken out without passing through each wiring pattern electrically connected to the land pattern. In other words, a configuration is adopted in which control signals cannot be taken out from a location other than the leads of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally form new circuits, such as short-circuit circuits or open-circuit circuits, in the gap between the rear surface of the SMD-type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. In addition, because it is possible to visually inspect various wiring patterns on SMD-type electronic components, it is possible to dissuade fraudsters from attempting to set up illegal circuits in SMD-type electronic components. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against SMD-type electronic components.

In addition, by not arranging any wiring patterns that transmit control signals in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to prevent control signals to SMD type electronic components and control signals to unauthorized other ICs from being combined and used in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component, so that unauthorized other ICs (SMD type electronic components) cannot be mounted between the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component.

In addition, by not placing any wiring patterns that transmit control signals in the area of the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to prevent the selection of an unauthorized other IC (SMD type electronic component) type that is easy to place between the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and that allows easy handling of control signals.

In addition, by forming a wiring pattern that electrically connects to one of the leads of an SMD-type electronic component in an area on the surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD-type electronic component body and not extending outside the SMD-type electronic component, it is possible to prevent unauthorized use of the control signal that transmits this wiring pattern that is extended outside.

In addition, by soldering each lead of the SMD type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the control signal can be extracted without going through each wiring pattern electrically connected to the land pattern. This makes it impossible to extract the control signal from a location other than each lead of the SMD type electronic component, thereby preventing unauthorized use of the control signal transmitted through the wiring pattern.

In addition, in order to shorten the wiring pattern that electrically connects one lead to another lead of each SMD type electronic component, by not arranging any wiring patterns that transmit control signals in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, each wiring pattern that is electrically connected to each lead of the SMD type electronic component can be arranged from above or below the SMD type electronic component, making it impossible to form an illegal circuit around the lead. Note that, for unused leads (also called "empty terminals") of each SMD type electronic component, when they are electrically connected to a wiring pattern that is electrically connected to ground (GND) or to a wiring pattern that supplies power, they can be arranged from above or below the SMD type electronic component to make it impossible to form an illegal circuit around the empty terminal.

In addition, by not arranging any through-holes in the area of the back surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to prevent unauthorized other ICs (SMD type electronic components) from being mounted between the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized other ICs from being fixed (soldered) to the through-holes, and it is possible to prevent the through-holes from being used as holes to extract control signals from the back surface (solder surface) of the board to the front surface (mounting surface).

In addition, by not arranging any wiring patterns that electrically connect to ground (GND) or wiring patterns that supply power in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component body, it is possible to prevent unauthorized ICs (SMD type electronic components) from being mounted between the back surface of the SMD type electronic component body and the surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component body, and to prevent the SMD type electronic component from becoming a driving source for unauthorized ICs.

[6-4a. Measures to improve visibility of part numbers on SMD packages]
Next, a configuration in which SMD-type electronic components are collectively mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a board treated as a main board will be described. Since SMD-type electronic components can be miniaturized as described above, the size of the board itself can also be reduced by collectively mounting them. Here, a main control board 1310 will be described as the main board, and another configuration of the present invention in which measures to improve visibility of the part number by the SMD package are taken when the main control board 1310 is visually observed in a state in which it is housed in the main control board box 1320 (hereinafter, described as "the configuration of the visibility measures of the part number by the SMD package according to the second and third embodiments") will be described. In addition, in Figs. 113(a) and (b), the same reference numerals are used to denote components that have the same functions as those in the embodiment shown in Figs. 112(a) and (b) (hereinafter, described as "the configuration of the visibility measures of the part number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment"), and the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h described above are omitted for ease of viewing.

[Comparison between the configuration of the visibility measure for the part number in the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the visibility measure for the part number in the SMD package according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the visibility measures for the part number using the SMD package in the first embodiment, an area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including the orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the lead-type electronic component, is printed as silk screen printing in a white solid line (or a black solid line) in an area on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmitt trigger inverter, which is a lead-type electronic component, is mounted, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed as silk screen printing in white (or black) near and to the lower left of this area MSLKMIC30.

In addition, in the configuration of the visibility measures for the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 near and to the right of the area MSLKMIC30, and within this information area, the part number (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk screen printing so that it is easily visible compared to the size of the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

In contrast, in the configuration of the part number visibility measures using SMD packages according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113(a), with the exception of the main control MPU 1310a, which is a lead-type electronic component, and various lead-type connectors, alternative SMD-type electronic components having the same functions as various lead-type electronic components such as ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are aggregated and mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'. The external dimensions (length, width, and thickness) of this main control board 1310' are the same as the external dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility measures using SMD packages according to the first embodiment.

The main control board 1310' has a center line that is a straight line passing through the midpoints of its upper and lower sides, and the area on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' to the left of this center line is formed as a component placement area 1310xa' for placing various electronic components and various connectors, while the area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310' to the right of this center line is formed as a parts list area 1310xb', which is an information area presented like a parts list of electronic components, with part numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in a catalog) aligned.

Specifically, the component placement area 1310xa' includes the main control MPU 1310a of the ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type, various connectors MCN1 to MCN4 (other connectors not shown), resistors MR0 to MR4 (other resistors not shown), capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30 (other capacitors not shown), diode D0 (other diodes not shown), and Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (other ICs not shown). In the component placement area 1310xa', an area not shown indicating the position (including the orientation) at which these various electronic components and connectors are to be placed is printed as silk screen printing in white solid lines (or black solid lines), and the corresponding component numbers are printed as silk screen printing in white (or black) near these various electronic components and connectors. Additionally, various connectors are of the lead type, which is to prevent the wiring from peeling off from the board due to stress caused by the wiring when it is connected to the connector (this stress is caused by the reaction force of the wiring acting on the connector as it is routed along the wiring path until it is connected to the connector).

In the parts list area 1310xb', a parts list of electronic parts, in which part numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are aligned, is silk-screened in white (or black). The part numbers and product numbers are printed in white (or black) as silk-screen prints larger (e.g., about three to five times larger) than the part numbers printed in white (or black) as silk-screen prints in the component placement area 1310xa'. A separator ":" is provided between the part number and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) so that the part number and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. This separator allows the part number and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) to be distinguished and identified.

The name of the manufacturer (including its abbreviation or symbol) may be silk-screened in white (or black) along with the product number (the number listed in the catalogue). In addition to listing such information about the parts, notes about the gaming machine may also be listed. For example, a note such as "The main control board is an important board from a security standpoint, so please handle it with care" may be included to draw attention to the issue.

In this way, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310' can be divided into a component placement area 1310xa' and a component list area 1310xb', making it easier to identify the various electronic components and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310'.

In addition, instead of the silk screen printing on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', a foil cut-out area and foil cut-out letters in the configuration of the part number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment described below may be used, or a resist cut-out area using two coats of resist and white resist cut-out letters using two coats of resist in the configuration of the part number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment may be used.

[Comparison between the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of the visibility measures for the part number using the SMD package in the first embodiment, an area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including the orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the lead-type electronic component, is printed as silk screen printing in a white solid line (or a black solid line) in an area on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmitt trigger inverter, which is a lead-type electronic component, is mounted, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed as silk screen printing in white (or black) near and to the lower left of this area MSLKMIC30.

In addition, in the configuration of the visibility measures for the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 near and to the right of the area MSLKMIC30, and within this information area, the part number (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk screen printing so that it is easily visible compared to the size of the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

In contrast, in the configuration of the part number visibility measures using SMD packages according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113(b), except for the main control MPU 1310a, which is a lead-type electronic component, and various lead-type connectors, alternative SMD-type electronic components having the same functions as various lead-type electronic components such as ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are aggregated and mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'. By aggregating SMD-type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', the size of the main control board 1310' can be reduced. The external dimensions (length, width, and thickness) of this main control board 1310' are half the length of the horizontal dimension of the external dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility measures using SMD packages according to the first embodiment (the length and thickness dimensions are the same).

Various electronic components and connectors are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'. The arrangement of these various electronic components and connectors is the same as that in the component arrangement area 1310xa' formed on the main control board 1310' in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above (that is, the areas not shown in the figure indicating the positions (which may also include the designation of the orientation) at which these various electronic components and various connectors are arranged are printed in white (or black) as silk screen printing in the same arrangement), and the part numbers corresponding to each of these various electronic components and various connectors are also printed in white (or black) as silk screen printing in the same arrangement. In addition, the various connectors are of the lead type, but this is to prevent the connector from peeling off from the board due to stress caused by the wiring when the wiring is connected to the connector (this stress is caused by the reaction force of the wiring acting on the connector due to the wiring being routed in the wiring path until the wiring is connected to the connector).

On the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', a parts list of electronic components is printed in white (or black) as silk screen printing in the parts list area 1310xb', which is an information area formed on the main control board 1310' in the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above, in which the part numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are aligned. The size of the part numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) is printed in white (or black) as silk screen printing larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part numbers printed in white (or black) as silk screen printing on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310'. A separator ":" is provided between the part number and the product number (number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the product number (number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. This separator allows the part number and the product number (number listed in the catalog) to be distinguished and identified. The name of the manufacturer (including its abbreviation or symbol) may be silk-screened in white (or black) along with the product number (the number listed in the catalogue). In addition to listing such information about the parts, notes about the gaming machine may also be listed. For example, a note such as "The main control board is an important board from a security standpoint, so please handle it with care" may be included to draw attention to the issue.

In addition, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' has portions (shown as black circles (●) in the figure) where the leads of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a (shown as part number "MIC1" in the figure) and the leads of the capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30, and resistors MR0 to MR4, which are lead-type electronic components, protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' and are soldered to the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310'. However, to avoid overlapping with (avoiding) these portions, the part numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are printed in white (or black) as silk screen printing in the parts list area 1310xb' formed on the main control board 1310'.

In this way, by using the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' as an area for arranging components, and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' as an area for use as a components list of electronic components arranged in an aligned format with component numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in a catalogue), the roles of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' can be differentiated, making it easier to recognize the various electronic components and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'.

In addition, by consolidating SMD-type electronic components and mounting them on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', the size of the main control board 1310' can be reduced, and the number of ring-shaped land patterns required when mounting lead-type electronic components can be determined and reduced. This reduces the number of parts on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' where the various leads of the lead-type electronic components protrude and are soldered, allowing the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' to be formed as a flat surface.

In addition, since the various leads of the lead-type electronic components protruding from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' are soldered, when light from a fluorescent lamp or the like is shone on them, the leads may be reflected and dazzling, making it difficult to see the soldered parts. However, as described above, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' has fewer soldered parts on which the various leads of the lead-type electronic components protrude, making it possible to form the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' as a flat surface. Therefore, even if light from a fluorescent lamp or the like is shone on this flat surface, the parts list of the electronic components, which is configured in an aligned manner with the silk-screened part numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog), does not become difficult to see.

In addition, instead of the silk screen printing on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', a foil cut-out area and foil cut-out characters in the configuration of the part number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment described below may be used, or a resist cut-out area using two coats of resist and white resist cut-out characters using two coats of resist in the configuration of the part number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment may be used.

Meanwhile, general electronics manufacturers use multi-layer boards on which various wiring patterns can be formed on each layer. However, for the main control boards and payout control boards used in gaming machines, two-layer boards (also called "double-sided boards") are used in which various wiring patterns are formed on the front (mounting side) and back (solder side) of the board to enhance security, and various electronic components must be mounted only on the front (mounting side) of the board, regardless of whether they are lead-type electronic components or SMD-type electronic components. For example, to enhance security, the front (mounting side) of the main control board must be mounted with the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a, which is included in the lead type, and for those that would benefit from mounting lead-type electronic components, these lead-type electronic components are mounted instead of SMD-type electronic components.

When SMD type electronic components and lead type electronic components are mounted together on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or the dispensing control board, the number of leads of the lead type electronic components protruding from the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board or the dispensing control board will be fewer than when only lead type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or the dispensing control board. This makes it possible to increase the area on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board or the dispensing control board that can be used as an area for forming various wiring patterns, and also to obtain area that can be used for other functions.

Therefore, for example, in the area with the increased area on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, a mounting land pattern forming area 1310ya' (see FIG. 113(b)) can be provided in which various land patterns for mounting various SMD type ICs and various SMD type connectors, and pad patterns for extracting signals can be formed, although they will not be mounted on a main control board produced as a mass-produced machine. In a main control board produced as a mass-produced machine, SMD type electronic components are not mounted on the various land patterns and pad patterns in the mounting land pattern forming area 1310ya', so the various land patterns and pad patterns in the mounting land pattern forming area 1310ya' become unmounted patterns, and the mounting land pattern forming area 1310ya' becomes an empty area.

When such unmounted patterns are formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, the arrangement of the various electronic components and connectors and the routing of the various wiring patterns on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board are restricted by the area in which the unmounted patterns are formed. In contrast, when such unmounted patterns are formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, there are no restrictions on the arrangement of the various electronic components and connectors and the routing of the various wiring patterns on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and the entire area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board can be effectively used.

In addition, by forming such unmounted patterns on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, they cannot be seen from the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and the presence of the unmounted patterns can be hidden, which is preferable from a security standpoint.

Note that some of these unmounted patterns may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board for convenience. For example, it may be easier to connect a connector (SMD type connector) to wiring if it is located on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board.

Furthermore, some of these unmounted patterns may be formed as lead-type electronic components or lead-type connectors for convenience. For example, this may be the case when soldering strength is required, such as in connectors that are inserted and removed frequently.

Next, we will explain another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as "configuration of part number visibility measures using SMD packages according to the fourth to sixth embodiments") in which measures are taken to improve visibility of part numbers when the main control board 1310 is visually inspected in a state housed in the main control board box 1320, because the surface area of the package body of the small Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an SMD package, is small and difficult to see, making the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) and part number (number listed in a catalog) small. Note that in Figures 114(a) to (c), the same symbols are used to denote parts that perform the same functions as the embodiment shown in Figures 112(a) and (b) (hereinafter referred to as "configuration of part number visibility measures using SMD packages according to the first embodiment").

[Comparison between the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package in the first embodiment, as described above, an area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including the orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in a solid white line (or a solid black line) on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) near and to the lower left of this area MSLKMIC30.

In addition, in the configuration of the visibility measures for the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 near and to the right of the area MSLKMIC30, and within this information area, the part number (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk screen printing so that it is easily visible compared to the size of the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

In addition, in the configuration of the visibility measures for the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an area MSLKMC30 indicating the position (the orientation is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) for placing the capacitor MC30 is printed as a silk screen print in white (or black) solid lines, so that the capacitor MC30 is placed near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that is the 14th terminal (power terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed as a silk screen print in white (or black) near this area MSLKMC30 to the upper right.

In contrast, in the configuration of the visibility measures for part numbers using SMD packages according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114(a), the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further printed with a white chain line (or a black chain line) as silk screen printing an area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including the orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk screen printing near the area MSLKMIC30' in the upper left. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has multiple electronic components mounted thereon, so the part numbers need to be printed small and placed near the corresponding electronic components, whereas the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has no electronic components mounted thereon, so the part numbers can be printed large.

In addition, in the configuration of the visibility measures for part numbers using SMD packages according to the fourth embodiment, instead of the part number MSLKMIC30p printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the visibility measures for part numbers using SMD packages according to the first embodiment, this part number MSLKMIC30p is printed in white (or black) as silk screen printing in an information area provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 near and below the area MSLKMIC30', so that the part number is a size that is easier to see compared to the size of the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Therefore, the part number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably seen.

The part number MSLKMIC30p may be the same size as or larger than the part number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of part number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. This is because the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has multiple electronic components mounted thereon, so the part number MSLKMIC30p needs to be small and printed in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic components, whereas the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has no electronic components mounted thereon, so the part number MSLKMIC30p can be printed large.

The name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) along with the product number (number listed in the catalog). In this case, it is preferable that the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) is silk-screened in white (or black) at a size that is easily visible compared to the size of the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. This allows the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 to be reliably visible.

In addition, in the configuration of the visibility measures for the part number using the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 further includes a region MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (there is no orientation specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) printed in white solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk screen printing at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk screen printing near the region MSLKMC30' in the upper left. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because, since multiple electronic components of various kinds are mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the part number visibility measure configuration using SMD packages in the first embodiment requires the part numbers to be printed small and placed near the corresponding electronic components, whereas, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part numbers can be printed large.

[Comparison between the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the part number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package in the first embodiment, as described above, an area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including the orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in a solid white line (or a solid black line) on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) near and to the lower left of this area MSLKMIC30.

In addition, in the configuration of the visibility measures for the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 near and to the right of the area MSLKMIC30, and within this information area, the part number (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk screen printing so that it is easily visible compared to the size of the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

In addition, in the configuration of the visibility measures for the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an area MSLKMC30 indicating the position (the orientation is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) for placing the capacitor MC30 is printed as a silk screen print in white (or black) solid lines, so that the capacitor MC30 is placed near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that is the 14th terminal (power terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed as a silk screen print in white (or black) near this area MSLKMC30 to the upper right.

In contrast, in the configuration of the fifth embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number using an SMD package, as shown in FIG. 114(b), the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further provided with an area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including the orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is formed as a foil-punched area using a dashed line at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as foil-punched characters in the upper left vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30'.

The foil cut area is an area formed by drawing a dashed line in a copper foil wiring pattern and cutting out the copper foil around it, except for the wiring pattern that transmits control signals, the wiring pattern that supplies power, and various land patterns, in the layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed. The area MSLKMIC30' formed as the foil cut area has a cutout portion 1310yMIC30 in a part of the left side in FIG. 114(b). As a result, the area MSLKMIC30' becomes U-shaped, and the solid earth (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and the inner area of the U-shaped area MSLKMIC30' can be electrically connected through the cutout portion 1310yMIC30. This is because the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and by securing as much ground (GND) area as possible on the back surface (solder surface) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 that corresponds to this mounting area, it is possible to prevent the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from malfunctioning due to noise (to make it more resistant to noise).

The foil-punched characters are formed by creating characters in a wiring pattern, which is copper foil, on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and then punching out the copper foil around the characters. The part numbers formed as foil-punched characters are formed as foil-punched characters larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has multiple electronic components mounted thereon, so the part numbers need to be small in size and printed in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic components, whereas the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has no electronic components mounted thereon, so the part numbers can be large in size and formed as foil-punched characters.

In addition, in the configuration of the part number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, instead of the part number MSLKMIC30p printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the part number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, this part number MSLKMIC30p is formed as a foil cut-out character in an information area provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 near and below the area MSLKMIC30', so that the part number MSLKMIC30p is formed in this information area as a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. The foil cut-out character is formed as a cut-out character formed by creating characters with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and cutting out the copper foil around it. Therefore, the part number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably seen.

The part number MSLKMIC30p formed as a foil-punched character may be the same size as or larger than the part number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of part number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. This is because, since a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in the configuration of part number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the size of the part number MSLKMIC30p needs to be small and placed near the corresponding electronic components for printing, whereas, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the part number MSLKMIC30p can be large and formed as a foil-punched character.

The name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as foil cut letters along with the product number (number listed in the catalog). In this case, it is preferable that the foil cut letters are formed in a size that is easily visible compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. This allows the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 to be reliably visible.

In addition, in the configuration of the part number visibility measures by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further provided with an area MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed (there is no orientation specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) in a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which is formed by a dashed line as a foil punching area, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as a foil punching character in the upper left vicinity of this area MSLKMC30'. The foil punching area is an area formed by drawing dashed lines with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where various wiring patterns are formed, except for the wiring pattern that transmits control signals, the wiring pattern that supplies power, and various land patterns, and punching out the copper foil around it. The foil punching character is formed as a punching character formed by creating a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, and punching out the copper foil around it. The part number formed as foil-punched characters is larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has multiple electronic components mounted thereon, so the part number needs to be small and printed in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic components, whereas the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has no electronic components mounted thereon, so the part number can be large and formed as foil-punched characters.

The wiring patterns that form the foil-punched areas and the foil-punched characters are formed to be electrically insulated from the various electronic components, and are also formed to be electrically insulated from the wiring patterns that transmit control signals, the wiring patterns that supply power, the various land patterns, and the solid earth (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

[Comparison between the configuration of the visibility measure for the part number in the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the visibility measure for the part number in the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment]
In the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package in the first embodiment, as described above, an area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including the orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in a solid white line (or a solid black line) on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) near and to the lower left of this area MSLKMIC30.

In addition, in the configuration of the visibility measures for the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 near and to the right of the area MSLKMIC30, and within this information area, the part number (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk screen printing so that it is easily visible compared to the size of the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

In addition, in the configuration of the visibility measures for the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an area MSLKMC30 indicating the position (the orientation is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) for placing the capacitor MC30 is printed as a silk screen print in white (or black) solid lines, so that the capacitor MC30 is placed near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that is the 14th terminal (power terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed as a silk screen print in white (or black) near this area MSLKMC30 to the upper right.

In addition, in the configuration of the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package, green is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are solidly painted with green resist, except for the various land patterns.

In contrast, in the configuration of the sixth embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package, as shown in FIG. 114(c), the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is formed with a dashed line as a white resist cut-out area using two coats of white resist at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, indicating the position (including the orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as white resist cut-out characters using two coats of white resist near and to the upper left of this area MSLKMIC30'.

In addition, in the configuration of the visibility measures for part numbers using SMD packages according to the sixth embodiment, instead of the part number MSLKMIC30p printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the visibility measures for part numbers using SMD packages according to the first embodiment, this part number MSLKMIC30p is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 near and below the area MSLKMIC30' as a white resist cut-out character using two coats of white resist so that it is of a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

In addition, in the configuration of the visibility measures for the part number using the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further provided with an area MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (there is no orientation specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which is formed by a dashed line as a white resist cut-out area using two coats of white resist, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed in the upper left vicinity of this area MSLKMC30' as white resist cut-out letters using two coats of white resist.

Specifically, the back surface (solder side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is entirely covered with white resist as the first of two coats of white resist (in other words, as the first of two coats of white resist, the back surface (solder side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is entirely covered with a solid coat of white resist except for the various land patterns). Then, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as the second of two coats of white resist, at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) at which the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is to be placed is masked in a dashed line shape as a white resist cut-out area, and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is masked as white resist cut-out characters in the upper left vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30', and An information area is provided below, and within this information area, the part number MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is masked as white resist cut-out characters, and in a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an area MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (there is no orientation specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is masked as a dashed line white resist cut-out area, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is masked as white resist cut-out characters near this area MSLKMC30' to the upper left.

In this masked state, the entire back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is covered with a solid white resist except for the various land patterns. In other words, in the configuration of the part number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly painted with white resist except for the various land patterns, whereas the entire front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly painted with green resist except for the various land patterns.

As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, but the entire surface is covered by the first layer of white resist, and the entire surface is covered except for the masked area by the second layer of white resist, so that the masked area is recessed as a recess, and an area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including orientation specification) for placing the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed by a dashed line as a white resist cut-out area, the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as white resist cut-out letters, the product number (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as white resist cut-out letters, and an area MSLKMC30' indicating the position (orientation is not specified because capacitor MC30 has no polarity) for placing capacitor MC30 is formed by a dashed line, and the part number corresponding to capacitor MC30 is formed as white resist cut-out letters. Therefore, the product number (the number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be clearly seen.

When the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as white resist cut-out characters, it is formed to be larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because, since a number of different electronic components are mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the part number needs to be small and printed in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic components, whereas, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part number can be large and formed as white resist cut-out characters.

When the part number MSLKMIC30p is formed as a white resist cut-out character, it may be the same size as or larger than the part number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of part number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. This is because, since a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in the configuration of part number visibility measures using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the size of the part number MSLKMIC30p needs to be small and placed near the corresponding electronic components for printing, whereas, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the part number MSLKMIC30p can be large and formed as a white resist cut-out character.

The name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as white resist cut-out letters along with the product number (number listed in the catalog). In this case, it is preferable that the white resist cut-out letters are formed in a size that is easily visible compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. This allows the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 to be reliably visible.

When the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as white resist cut-out letters, it is printed larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because, since a number of different electronic components are mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the part number needs to be small and printed in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic components, whereas, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part number can be large and formed as white resist cut-out letters.

In the configuration of the visibility measures for the part number by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly painted with white resist except for various land patterns, whereas the entire front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly painted with green resist except for various land patterns, but the entire front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 may also be solidly painted with white resist except for various land patterns. In this case, an area indicating the position (which may also include the orientation) of the various electronic components mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is silk-screened on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 in solid lines of dark colors such as dark green, black, and gray, and part numbers corresponding to the various electronic components are silk-screened on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 in dark characters such as dark green, black, and gray. By configuring it in this way, the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the other boards are solidly painted with green resist except for the various land patterns, which makes the main control board 1310 stand out from the other boards. In addition, among the various electronic components mounted on the front (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product numbers of SMD type electronic components (when the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) is also written in addition to the product numbers) may be printed as silk screen printing on the front (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

In addition to configuring the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 to be solidly painted with white resist except for the various land patterns, the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 may be configured to be silk-screened using two coats of different color resist, with the first coat (base) and the second coat being different colors. After the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is silk-screened in white as the first coat (base), except for the various land patterns, the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 may be silk-screened in any one of black, blue, yellow, and red as the second coat, except for the various land patterns, with the areas indicating the positions (which may also include the orientation) of the various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and the component numbers corresponding to the various electronic components masked. Even with this configuration, the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the other boards are solidly painted with green resist except for the various land patterns, making the main control board 1310 stand out from the other boards. In addition, the areas indicating the positions (which may also include the orientation) of the various electronic components and the part numbers corresponding to the various electronic components can be visually confirmed.

In addition, in the configuration of the visibility measures for the part number by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly painted with white resist except for various land patterns, whereas the entire front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly painted with green resist except for various land patterns, but the entire front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 may also be solidly painted with white resist except for various land patterns. In this case, an area indicating the position (which may also include the designation of the orientation) of the various electronic components mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is formed as a white resist cut-out area by solid lines on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and the part numbers corresponding to the various electronic components are formed as white resist cut-out characters on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. In addition, among the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product numbers of SMD-type electronic components (including the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) in addition to the product numbers) may be formed as white resist-cut letters on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

[6-4b. Measures to prevent tampering with SMD-type electronic components]
Next, we will explain how miniaturized electronic components known as SMD-type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as replacing electronic components with illegal ones to obtain illegal game balls.

The Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, an SMD type electronic component mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, has an SMD package body with dimensions of 5.3 mm in width, 10.8 mm in length, and 1.5 mm in height, as described above, and including the length of the leads protruding from the two sides of the SMD package body, the width of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is 7.8 mm.

Because the main control board 1310 is an important control board that controls the progress of the game, it is necessary to prevent the main control board 1310 from being accessed by someone who makes illegal modifications to acquire illegal game balls, and the main control board 1310 is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 consisting of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body in which multiple ventilation holes for heat dissipation are formed. As shown in FIG. 115, the main control board box 1320 has a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302 crimped with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part 1303. This crimping part 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and there are multiple crimping parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. In other words, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

However, if the SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is removed from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some fraudulent means, such as using a thin wire to attach to the main control board box 1320, and this SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is replaced with an illegal electronic component, there is a risk that a person who makes such fraudulent modifications will be able to obtain illegal game balls.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, a configuration is adopted in which multiple ventilation holes 1301z having an inner diameter (2 mm in this embodiment) smaller than the size of the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are formed in the transparent cover body 1301. As a result, even if the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some unauthorized means such as a thin wire in the main control board box 1320, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 cannot be removed from the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation holes 1301z. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from being replaced with an unauthorized electronic component.

As described above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is one of the main circuits that constitute the main control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors are input, and if it is removed from the main control board 1310 by some illegal means, the main control MPU 1310a always determines that no ball has been entered for those sensors that report the entry of a game ball, and always determines that illegal acts such as the approach of a magnet or illegal vibrations have been committed for those sensors that report illegal acts. As a result, when the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is removed, the no-ball state is maintained for those who make illegal tampering, so that illegal game balls cannot be obtained, and the fact that illegal tampering has been made is notified to the hall computer of the game board (hall) and can also be communicated to staff such as staff at the game hall. Furthermore, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that fraudulent activity is occurring using the various sensors that detect fraudulent activity such as the approach of a magnet or fraudulent vibrations, as described above, it sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to control the game so that the game ball cannot be shot toward the game area 5a. Therefore, if any fraudulent tampering is performed, the game cannot be played at all.

In the above embodiment, an SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as an SMD-type electronic component. However, if another SMD-type electronic component, such as a resistor, is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the inner diameter of the ventilation hole 1301z must be smaller than the size of the SMD-type resistor so that the SMD-type resistor does not peel off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and protrude from the inside of the main control board box 1320 to the outside through the ventilation hole 1301z.

Because such SMD type resistors are small, even if they peel off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it may be difficult to visually determine whether they are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, if an SMD type resistor that has peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 protrudes from the inside of the main control board box 1320 to the outside through the ventilation hole 1301z, there will be no trace of the peeled off SMD type resistor on the lower inside of the main control board box 1320, making it even more difficult to visually determine whether they are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, for example, if a JIS standard 1/8 watt 2012 type is used as an SMD type resistor, the length dimension of this 2012 type is 2.0 mm and the width dimension is 1.2 mm. In such a small SMD type resistor, even if a defect occurs in which the resistor peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 due to bending of the main control board 1310, the inner diameter of the ventilation hole 1301z is made smaller (here, for example, 1.0 mm) than the smaller of the length dimension and width dimension of the small SMD type resistor (here, the width dimension of 1.2 mm) so that the resistor does not protrude from the inside of the main control board box 1320 to the outside.

As a result, even if a small SMD type resistor falls off the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is possible to reliably prevent it from flying out from inside the main control board box 1320 to the outside through the ventilation hole 1301z, so that it is possible to obtain an opportunity to visually confirm the fallen small SMD type resistor inside the main control board box 1320, and by shaking the main control board box 1320 up and down or left and right, the small SMD type resistor will hit the inner wall of the main control board box 1320 or the main control board 1310, generating a sound, which provides an opportunity to recognize the fallen small SMD type resistor. Note that, in addition to this small SMD type resistor, if an SMD type capacitor, diode, coil, LED, or other electronic component is used instead of a lead type capacitor, diode, coil, LED, or other electronic component, the inner diameter of the ventilation hole 1301z is made smaller than the smallest dimension of these.

In this way, even if a small SMD type electronic component falls off the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is possible to reliably prevent the component from flying out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 to the outside through the ventilation hole 1301z. This increases the likelihood of discovering a defect in which an SMD type electronic component falls off the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 due to bending of the main control board 1310.

In the above-described embodiment (including the configuration of the part number visibility measures using SMD packages according to the first to sixth embodiments), the point that SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 has been described, but SMD type electronic components can also be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of boards that are treated as main boards, such as the power supply board 630 and the dispensing control board 633.

[6-4c. Test connector]
The pachinko machine 1 is tested by a specific testing organization, and cannot be shipped to an arcade unless it is approved by this specific testing organization. The main control board 1310 is provided with a test connector 1310k for extracting various signals related to the game. This test connector 1310k is an SMD type electronic component. The test connector 1310k is a straight SMD type connector (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged vertically and parallel to the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the main control board). When the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing organization, it is usually mounted on the front (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and a test harness cover body side opening 1301k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed in the transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k, whereas when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to an amusement hall, it is not mounted on the main control board 1310, and the test harness cover body side opening 1301k is not formed in the transparent cover body 1301. Therefore, in the main control board 1310 produced as a mass-produced machine, the area for mounting the test connector 1310k is formed as an empty area on the front (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing organization, the test connector 1310k is mounted on the mounting land pattern formation area 1310ya' (see FIG. 113 (b)) on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310, and a test harness base body side opening 1302k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed on the transparent base body 1302 facing the test connector 1310k. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing organization, and even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to a game hall, the area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 where the test connector 1310k is mounted is not formed as a vacant area, so that other SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. This allows for greater freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

Also, by configuring it in this way, in preparation for starting testing of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific testing facility, the test operator first removes the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5, and then electrically connects the test harness electrically connected to the test device installed at the specific testing facility to the test connector 1310k mounted in the mounting land pattern formation area 1310ya' on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 through the test harness base body side opening 1302k formed in the transparent base body 1302. Next, the test operator attaches the main control board box 1320 to the board holder 1200. In this state, the test harness can be clamped and held between the transparent base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 and the board holder 1200, so that by applying a load in the direction in which the test harness is pushed toward the test connector 1310k, it is possible to prevent the electrical connection between the test connector 1310k and the test harness from becoming unstable due to vibrations caused by movable bodies operated by various electrical drive sources equipped in the pachinko machine 1, and it is also possible to prevent the test harness, which extracts various important signals related to play during the testing of the pachinko machine 1, from twisting and breaking.

In this embodiment, a straight SMD type connector (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged parallel to the surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board) is used as the test connector 1310k, but a right-angle SMD type connector (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged parallel to the surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board) may be mounted on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board near one of the left side, bottom side, right side, or top side, and a test harness cover body side opening 1301k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k may be formed in the side wall of the transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k (the side wall facing the test connector 1310k among the left side wall, bottom wall, right side wall, and top wall of the transparent cover body 1301). Even with this configuration, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing organization, and when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to an amusement hall, the area for mounting the test connector 1310k on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is not left as a vacant area, so that other SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 can be increased. In addition, in preparation for starting testing of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific testing facility, a testing operator can first electrically connect a test harness electrically connected to a testing device installed at a specific testing facility to a test connector 1310k mounted on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board through a test harness cover side opening 1301k formed in a transparent cover 1301, without removing the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. 73.

Incidentally, gaming machines have been proposed in the past in which a test firing terminal (test connector) is provided on the gaming control device (gaming control board) to which a cable for transmitting gaming information to a testing device at a specific testing institution is connected (for example, JP 2013-128621 A (paragraph [0054] and FIG. 6)). However, in the gaming machine described in this document, when it is tested at a specific testing institution, the test connector is mounted on the surface of the gaming control board, but when it is used in an amusement hall, the test connector is not mounted on the surface of the gaming control board, leaving an empty space, which causes a problem in that it is not possible to increase the freedom of arrangement of various electronic components on the surface of the gaming control board due to this empty space.

Gaming machines have also been proposed in the past that have surface-mount electronic components mounted on a circuit board (for example, JP 2014-144218 A (paragraph [0042] and Figure 4)). However, the surface-mount electronic components in the gaming machines described in this document may be provided with an identifier such as a product number that corresponds to the surface-mount electronic component, but the surface-mount electronic components are small in size, making the identifier difficult to visually identify, which is a problem.

In addition, gaming machines have been proposed in the past in which surface-mount electronic components are mounted on a board (for example, JP 2014-144218 A (paragraph [0042] and Figure 4)). However, when the surface-mount electronic components in the gaming machines described in this document are mounted on a game control board that can control the progress of the game, there is a risk that the surface-mount electronic components may be peeled off from the game control board by some fraudulent means and replaced with fraudulent electronic components, resulting in the acquisition of fraudulent gaming balls.

In addition, gaming machines have been proposed that have tactile switches or the like on a board, which allow the user to feel the on/off clicking sensation when operating a pressing operation part (for example, JP 2017-023427 A (paragraph [0071] and FIG. 70)). The tactile switches and other electronic components described in this document are lead-type electronic components whose leads are inserted from the front to the back of the board into through holes provided in the board and soldered on the back side of the board. When such lead-type electronic components are mounted on a board, such as a game control board that controls the progress of a game, and the board bends as the lead-type electronic component is operated, this bending could cause the soldered parts of other electronic components mounted on the board to peel off, resulting in electrical malfunctions.

In addition, gaming machines have been proposed in which various control boards are arranged in predetermined positions on the back of the gaming board (for example, JP 2013-128621 A (paragraphs [0032] to [0034] and Figure 3)). However, the game control board that controls the progress of the game is an important board that determines whether or not to award an advantage to the player, so it is housed in a board case with a sealed structure, and measures are required to prevent fraudulent acts such as tampering.

In addition, gaming machines in which surface-mounted components are mounted on a board have been proposed (for example, JP 2014-144218 A (paragraph [0042] and Figure 4)). However, when the surface-mounted components in the gaming machines described in this document are mounted on a gaming control board that can control the progress of the game, if a wiring pattern is routed within the area on the surface of the gaming control board on which the surface-mounted components are mounted, the distance dimension between the back surface of the surface-mounted components and the surface of the gaming control board is small, so even if this wiring pattern is tampered with by some fraudulent means, it will be difficult to see, resulting in a problem that it is not possible to prevent fraudulent acts against surface-mounted electronic components.

Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed in the past in which the main control board that controls the game is placed on the back side while housed in a case (for example, JP 2016-214975 A (paragraphs [0030], [0031], and Figure 2). However, as in the gaming machine described in this document, the main control board is an important component that controls the game, and so as a crime prevention measure it is placed on the back side housed in a sealed case, and there is a demand for increased crime prevention for items that are important from a crime prevention perspective.

[6-5. Countermeasures against electromagnetic noise entering through the metal housing of the setting key switch]
Next, measures against electromagnetic noise that intrudes through the metal housing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 116. Fig. 116 is a diagram (a) showing the front surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, a diagram (b) showing the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, and a diagram (c) showing a part of the lower side of the left side view of the game board 5 with the main control board box 1320 attached to the game board 5.

As described above, the setting key switch 1311a has a metallic tubular (or rectangular) housing that houses a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and turned. The front surface and the opposite surface (rear surface) of the setting key cylinder are formed of a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length, as described above. As described above, the front surface of the metallic tubular (or rectangular) housing is disposed on approximately the same plane as the front surface of the setting key cylinder, which has an insertion port for inserting the setting key, and the front surface and the opposite surface (rear surface) of the metallic tubular (or rectangular) housing are disposed on approximately the same plane as the front surface and the opposite surface (rear surface) of the setting key cylinder, as described above.

As described above, the setting key switch 1311a has a circuit in the setting key cylinder that can extract (output) a signal indicating whether the setting key switch 1311a is in an ON or OFF state, and the signal can be extracted (output) from a pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the face (rear face) opposite the front face of the setting key cylinder. Also, as described above, a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces are formed on the rear face of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a, which protrude a predetermined length at a 90 degree rotation angle from the pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear face of the setting key cylinder.

The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted has a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1, SLH2 that have a long hole shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311, through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted, on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, so that the setting key switch 1311a is located at the center point where the center lines in the vertical and horizontal directions of the setting change board 1311 intersect, as shown in Figures 116 (a) and (b). At the same time, a pair of opposing through holes SLTH1, SLTH2 through which a pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted are formed on the vertical center line of the setting change board 1311 at a rotation angle of 90 degrees from the pair of opposing long through holes SLH1, SLH2.

The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted has three through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, and SSTH3 formed on its front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) through which various pin terminals (first pin terminal to third pin terminal) of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311, which is connector-connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 71, can be inserted.

Of these three through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, and SSTH3, the upper through hole SSTH1, into which the first pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted, is electrically connected to the upper through hole SLTH1 of the pair of opposing through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 through which a pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. The wiring pattern SPTN1 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, and the lower through hole SSTH1, into which the third pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted. The wiring pattern SPTN2 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 so that the hole SSTH3 is electrically connected to the lower through hole SLTH2 of the pair of opposing through holes SLTH1, SLTH2 through which a pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted, and the middle through hole SSTH2 through which the second pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted is electrically connected to a solid earth (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311.

On the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, a foil cut area SINSx is formed in a copper plane that surrounds the long through holes SLH1, SLH2 for the setting key switch 1311a and the through holes SLTH1, SLTH2 for the setting key switch 1311a as a whole, and has a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311. This foil cut area SINSx electrically insulates the long through holes SLH1, SLH2 and the through holes SLTH1, SLTH2 from the solid earth (board ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. In addition, on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, a foil punched area is also formed by punching out the copper foil in the copper plane, except for the areas around the through holes SSTH1 and SSTH3 for the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311, and this foil punched area provides electrical insulation from the solid earth (board ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311.

On the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, a foil punch area SINSy is formed in the copper plane at a position corresponding to the foil punch area SINSx formed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311. The foil punch area SINSy has a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 and is formed by punching out the copper foil, excluding the periphery of the wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2 described above. This foil punch area SINSy is formed along the wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2 up to the periphery of the through holes SSTH1 and SSTH3 for the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. This foil cut area SINSy electrically insulates the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2, the through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2, the wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2, and the through holes SSTH1 and SSTH3 from the solid earth (board ground) formed on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311.

Through holes STH are formed at the four corners of the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. These four through holes STH electrically connect the solid earth (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311 and the solid earth (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311 to form the same ground (GND).

The entire surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 are solid-painted with resist of a predetermined color so as to cover the copper plane except for the various through holes described above. On the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, on top of this resist of a predetermined color, an area SSLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is to be placed is silk-screened in a solid line of a color different from the predetermined color of the resist, and an area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is to be placed is silk-screened in a color different from the predetermined color of the resist, and a solid line of the same color as the area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is to be placed is silk-screened in a color different from the predetermined color of the resist. The size of the area SSLKSW1 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a, and when the setting key switch 1311a is arranged and mounted in the area SSLKSW1 (soldered on the back (solder side) of the setting change board 1311), the boundary line (solid line of a circle) of the area SSLKSW1 is arranged outside the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a. In other words, even if the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, the boundary line (solid line of a circle) of the area SSLKSW1 is not overlapped by the setting key switch 1311a. As with the area SSLKSW1, the area SSLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged is also arranged so that even if this connector SMCN is mounted, the connector SMCN does not overlap the boundary line (solid line of a U-shape) of the area SSLKCN1.

In the area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is placed, a reference mark SSTD is printed indicating the rotation position (initial position) of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch of the setting key switch 1311a is in the OFF state. This reference mark SSTD prevents the setting key switch 1311a from being soldered upside down (by mistake) when the manufacturer's worker mounts the setting key switch 1311a on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311. If this reference mark SSTD is not printed, for example, if the setting key switch 1311a is soldered upside down (by mistake), when a signal is extracted indicating whether the setting key switch 1311a is in the ON state or the OFF state, the content of the signal will be reversed between the ON state and the OFF state of the setting key switch 1311a.

Here, the reason for forming the foil cut areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 in the copper planes on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 will be explained. As described above, the setting key switch 1311a has a metal tubular (or rectangular) housing in which a setting key is inserted and rotated, and the setting key cylinder is housed in the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing. The front surface and the opposite surface (rear surface) of the setting key cylinder are formed of a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length, as described above. As described above, the front surface of the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing is arranged almost in the same plane as the front surface of the setting key cylinder, which has an insertion port for inserting the setting key, and the front surface and the opposite surface (rear surface) of the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing are arranged almost in the same plane as the front surface and the opposite surface (rear surface) of the setting key cylinder, as described above. In addition, when the setting key cylinder is housed in the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, as described above, the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder are electrically connected. In other words, the front of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder, which may be a member through which electromagnetic noise can enter the setting change board 1311, is exposed from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by forming the foil cutout areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 in the copper planes on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a long elongated hole shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted can be electrically insulated from the solid earth (board ground) formed on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. In other words, in this embodiment, the board ground of the setting change board 1311 (main control board 1310) is not exposed through the setting key switch 1311a. As a result, even if electromagnetic noise intrudes from the front surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder when a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the long through holes SLH1, SLH2 and soldered, the electromagnetic noise is prevented from intruding into the solid earth (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 via the foil punch areas SINSx, SINSy formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, and is attenuated by the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder itself. In other words, in this embodiment, the foil punch areas SINSx, SINSy can prevent electromagnetic noise from the front surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder from intruding into the board ground of the setting change board 1311. As a result, in this embodiment, the intrusion of electromagnetic noise from the front of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or setting key cylinder can be blocked on the setting change board 1311 side, so that the intrusion of the electromagnetic noise can be reliably stopped from progressing through the setting change board 1311 to the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board that controls the progress of the game, and there is no fluctuation in the ground line that transmits the board ground (ground). This can therefore contribute to preventing malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 and damage to electronic components.

It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the space between the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder is filled with non-conductive resin (insulating resin) to allow the setting key cylinder to rotate relative to the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, and the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder are not electrically connected but are insulated. Even if electromagnetic noise intrudes from the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, this electromagnetic noise is prevented from intruding into the solid earth (board ground) formed on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 via the foil punching areas SINSx and SINSy formed on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, and is attenuated by the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing itself. In other words, the foil punching areas SINSx and SINSy can prevent electromagnetic noise from the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing from intruding into the board ground of the setting change board 1311. This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering from the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing on the setting change board 1311 side, so that the electromagnetic noise can be reliably stopped from traveling through the setting change board 1311 to the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board that controls the progress of the game, and there is no fluctuation in the ground line that transmits the board ground (ground). This can therefore contribute to preventing malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 and damage to electronic components.

The following describes a state in which electromagnetic noise may enter the setting key switch 1311a. As described above, the setting key is inserted into the socket provided on the front of the setting key cylinder housed in the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as check the current setting value, so only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, are allowed to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people. Therefore, when checking the setting value or changing the setting value, a staff member such as a staff member of the game hall first opens the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then the person who possesses the setting key accesses the setting key switch 1311a. In other words, the person who opens the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 and the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a may be different.

In this way, when an attendant such as a store clerk at the game hall who opens the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 inserts a genuine metal key into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127 and turns it, the electromagnetic noise caused by the static electricity discharge that occurs when the attendant becomes charged with electricity can be transmitted to the cylinder lock 127 via the genuine metal key. As described above, the cylinder lock 127 is attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3, and this metal door frame reinforcement unit is electrically connected to the frame earth board 559 via the door frame metal earth wire. This frame earth board 559 is electrically connected to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment earth wire. In other words, when an attendant such as a store clerk of the game parlor who opens the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 inserts a genuine metal key into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127, the electromagnetic noise caused by static electricity being charged and discharged is transmitted to the cylinder lock 127 via the genuine metal key, and then from the cylinder lock 127 to the door frame reinforcement unit, the door frame metal ground wire, the frame ground board 559, the island equipment ground wire, and the ground of the island equipment of the game parlor, and can be removed from the pachinko machine 1. In contrast, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a does not touch the cylinder lock 127, and therefore the electromagnetic noise caused by static electricity being charged and discharged is transmitted to the setting key switch 1311a via the genuine metal key.

In this embodiment, therefore, by forming foil cut-out areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 in the copper planes on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, electromagnetic noise caused by static electricity discharged from the person accessing the setting key switch 1311a can be attenuated by the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic noise caused by static electricity discharged from the person accessing the setting key switch 1311a from penetrating into the board ground of the setting change board 1311.

As described above, the door frame 3 is equipped with various decorative parts, and electromagnetic noise that penetrates the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), then transmitted to the frame ground board 559 via the door frame metal ground wire, and then transmitted from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, and is removed from the pachinko machine 1. The various decorative parts decorate the entire front of the pachinko machine 1 and are arranged on almost the entire door frame 3, so that if a person accesses the setting key switch 1311a and touches the door frame 3 without being aware of it, they will touch the various decorative parts equipped on the door frame 3, and the electromagnetic noise caused by the static electricity that is charged and discharged will be transmitted to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall, and will be removed from the pachinko machine 1.

In this embodiment, the foil cut areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 are formed in the copper planes on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, and within these foil cut areas SINSx and SINSy, a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a long oblong hole shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 are provided through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. However, either one of the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 may be electrically connected to a solid earth (board ground) formed on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 via a resistor, or each of the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 may be electrically connected to a solid earth (board ground) formed on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 via a corresponding resistor. In this way, electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a can be transmitted to the resistor via the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and can be attenuated by this resistor. This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311.

In this embodiment, a static electricity removing pad capable of removing electromagnetic noise may be provided at a predetermined location on the front surface of the door frame 3, or the left side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction as viewed from the front, where the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the main body frame 4 are located, may be provided on the open side of the main body frame 4, on the right side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction as viewed from the front, which is opposite the pivot support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2. In addition, since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row in a back-to-back manner on the island equipment of the game hall, when the main body frame 4 of one pachinko machine 1 is opened from the outer frame 2, the rear side of the other pachinko machines 1 facing back to back to the one pachinko machine 1 can be reached by the hands of a staff member or other attendant of the game hall. When an attendant such as a store clerk of an amusement hall opens the main frame 4 of one pachinko machine 1 from the outer frame 2 for some reason, he or she may need to access the rear side of another pachinko machine 1 that faces away from the first pachinko machine 1. In this case, it is necessary to remove electromagnetic noise caused by static electricity being charged and discharged from the attendant such as a store clerk of an amusement hall, so for example, a static electricity removal pad may be provided on the rear side of the back cover 640, on the rear side of the interface board cover 636, on the rear side of the cover body of the payout control board box 632, or on the rear side of the payout device 580, as a part that the attendant such as a store clerk of an amusement hall can reach.

In this embodiment, the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 5 may be molded from a conductive resin. A metal main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, so that the main body frame base unit 500 and the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 are electrically connected. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame earth board 559 via a main body frame metal earth wire (not shown). The frame earth board 559 is electrically connected to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall via an island equipment earth wire (not shown). This allows a staff member or other person accessing the setting key switch 1311a at the game hall to support themselves by placing their left hand on the main frame base unit 500 on the open side of the main frame 4 when the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4, and to extend their right hand toward the rear of the main frame 4 or the rear of the game board 5. When the left hand is placed on the main frame base unit 500, the electrostatic charge on the hand is discharged, causing electromagnetic noise to be transmitted to the main frame base unit 500 and then to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. This noise is then transmitted to the frame earth board 559 via the metal door frame earth wire, and then from the frame earth board 559 via the island equipment earth wire to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall, and is removed from the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the cylinder lock 127 is attached to a metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3, and this metal door frame reinforcement unit is electrically connected to the frame earth board 559 via the door frame metal earth wire, and the frame earth board 559 is electrically connected to the earth of the island equipment of the amusement hall via the island equipment earth wire, but the door frame metal earth wire may not be electrically connected to the frame earth board 559, but may be electrically connected to a terminal of the power supply board 630 of the main frame 4, thereby electrically connecting the metal door frame reinforcement unit and the power supply board 630. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1 and includes various decorative parts, some of which are not plated at all and some of which are plated on the entire front and back. The decorative parts that are plated on the entire front and back are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the frame earth board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment earth wire. However, the metal door frame earth wire may not be electrically connected to the frame earth board 559, but may be electrically connected to the terminal of the power supply board 630 of the main frame 4, and the metal door frame reinforcement unit and the power supply board 630 may be electrically connected. The power supply board 630 is supplied with 24V AC from the island equipment of the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board 630 to which L (line) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and the N terminal of the power supply board 630 to which N (neutral) is input is connected to the grounded side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that protects against transient excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board 630. This surge protection element (surge absorber) usually has a high resistance value and hardly passes any current, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, its resistance value instantly decreases and current passes, and when the excessive voltage disappears, it has the ability to return to its original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board 630 to the N terminal of the power supply board 630 by the surge protection element (surge absorber) to the ground side (earth) and is removed from the pachinko machine 1.

As described above, the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. As described above, the drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear surface of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, as shown in FIG. 116(c), the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is positioned toward the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension da from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730.

To explain this arrangement, as described above, the front of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is provided with an insertion port for inserting the setting key. The front of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is arranged to be flush with the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 when the setting change board 1311 is housed in the main control board box 1320, that is, the front of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a does not protrude outward from the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. When an operator attaches the game board 5 to the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the operator first temporarily places the game board 5 in front of or around the pachinko machine 1, and when an operator removes the game board 5 from the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the operator temporarily places the removed game board 5 in front of or around the pachinko machine 1. As a result, while working on this temporarily placed game board 5, the worker's legs may accidentally hit the game board 5 and cause it to fall over.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, a configuration is adopted in which the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is positioned closer to the front side of the game board 5, with a distance dimension da relative to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730. As a result, when an operator temporarily places the game board 5 in front of or around the pachinko machine 1, even if the operator's leg accidentally hits the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 falls toward the floor of the game hall, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is positioned closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension da from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730. Even if the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the lower side of the main control board box 1320 come into contact with the floor of the game hall because the cover body of the drive board box 1730 protrudes compared to the main control board box 1320, a space is reliably formed between the front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the floor of the game hall, so that it is possible to prevent the front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor of the game hall.

As described above, inside the island equipment of the game hall, multiple types of wiring are suspended from the top for electrically connecting to the various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, and depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes unconnected wiring and is suspended from the top inside the island equipment of the game hall. Since the pachinko machines 1 are installed in multiple rows facing each other on the island equipment of the game hall, if this unconnected wiring comes into contact with the various boards provided on the game board 5, the electrical drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, and the light-emitting means such as various LEDs and various lamps, a short circuit may occur, causing damage (which may cause a fire). Although the rear cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, many of the tips of the unconnected wiring are bent at or near the tips, and the tips of the unconnected wiring are caught in the slits 641 and are therefore unlikely to penetrate toward the rear surface of the game board 5, thereby preventing short circuits. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is positioned toward the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension da from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730. Therefore, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring penetrates the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, it is blocked by the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and cannot penetrate toward the main control board box 1320, and the tip of the unconnected wiring can be reliably prevented from coming into contact with the front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311.

Even if the tip of the unconnected wiring comes into contact with the front surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311, in this embodiment, as described above, by forming the foil cut-out areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 in the copper planes on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted into the setting change board 1311. A pair of opposing long through holes SLH1, SLH2 having an elongated hole shape are electrically insulated from the solid earth (board ground) formed on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, and the board ground of the setting change board 1311 (main control board 1310) is not exposed through the setting key switch 1311a, so there is absolutely no effect on the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board that controls the progress of the game through the setting change board 1311, and there is no fluctuation in the ground line that transmits the board ground (ground). This can contribute to preventing malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 and damage to electronic components.

The cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 are molded from non-conductive resin. When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 are arranged approximately parallel to each other in the vertical direction without contacting each other, and the back cover 640 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are arranged approximately parallel to each other in the vertical direction without contacting each other.

The setting key switch 1311a employed in the present embodiment described above has a predetermined number of tumbler pins arranged in the setting key cylinder it houses, but one with even more tumbler pins may be used. This can further increase security, and if it is mass-produced and widely available on the market, the unit price can be reduced, contributing to cost reduction. A case in which a setting key switch 1311a' housing a setting key cylinder with even more tumbler pins arranged compared to the setting key cylinder housed in the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the setting change board 1311 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a modified example 1 (a) showing a lower part of the left side view of the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board, and a modified example 2 (b) showing a lower part of the left side view of the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board. In FIG. 117, the same components as those described above are given the same reference numerals.

When the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 described above, as shown in FIG. 117(a), the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' protrudes from the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, and the front surface of the setting key cylinder of this setting key switch 1311a' is arranged protruding toward the rear of the game board 5 with a distance dimension db from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730. In order to protect the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' protruding from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730, a protective cover 1304 is pivotally supported on the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320 and is provided so as to be freely opened and closed. A locking protrusion (not shown) is formed on the protective cover 1304, and a locking groove (not shown) for locking the locking protrusion is formed on the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320. When the locking protrusion of the protective cover 1304 is released from the locking groove of the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, it is pivoted and the protective cover 1304 can be opened from the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320 to access the setting key switch 1311a'.

By providing such a protective cover 1304 on the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, even if an operator accidentally hits the game board 5 with his/her leg when temporarily placing the game board 5 in front of or around the pachinko machine 1, causing the back side of the game board 5 to tip over toward the floor of the game hall, the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301' of the main control board 1320 will abut against the floor of the game hall, so that a space is reliably formed between the front part of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' and the floor of the game hall, preventing the front part from colliding with the floor of the game hall.

As described above, inside the island equipment of the game hall, multiple types of wiring are suspended from the top for electrically connecting to the various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, and depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes unconnected wiring and is suspended from the top inside the island equipment of the game hall. Since the pachinko machines 1 are installed in multiple rows facing each other on the island equipment of the game hall, if this unconnected wiring comes into contact with the various boards provided on the game board 5, the electrical drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, and the light-emitting means such as various LEDs and various lamps, a short circuit may occur, causing damage (which may cause a fire). Although the rear cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, many of the tips of the unconnected wires are bent at or near the tips, and the tips of the unconnected wires are caught in the slits 641 and are difficult to penetrate toward the back side of the game board 5, thereby preventing a short circuit. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, a protective cover 1304 is provided on the cover body 1301' of the main control board 1320. Therefore, even if the tips of the unconnected wires penetrate through the slits 641 to the back side of the game board 5, they are blocked by the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301' of the main control board 1320, and the tips of the unconnected wires can be reliably prevented from contacting the front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' provided on the setting change board 1311. The cover body of the drive board box 1730, the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320, and the protective cover 1304 are molded from non-conductive resin.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the rear cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 are arranged approximately parallel to each other in the vertical direction without contacting each other, the rear cover 640 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are arranged approximately parallel to each other in the vertical direction without contacting each other, and the rear cover 640 and the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are arranged approximately parallel to each other in the vertical direction without contacting each other.

When the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200', which has a shorter length in the front-to-back direction (i.e., depth direction) when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 compared to the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 described above, as shown in Figure 117 (b), although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' protrudes from the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of this setting key switch 1311a' is positioned closer to the front side of the game board 5, with a distance dimension dc from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730. As a result, when an operator temporarily places the game board 5 in front of or around the pachinko machine 1, even if the operator accidentally hits the game board 5 with his/her leg and the back side of the game board 5 tips over toward the floor of the game hall, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is positioned closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension dc from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730, and since the cover body of the drive board box 1730 protrudes compared to the main control board box 1320, even if the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the lower edge side of the main control board box 1320 come into contact with the floor of the game hall, a space is reliably formed between the front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' and the floor of the game hall, preventing the front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' from colliding with the floor of the game hall. In other words, when an operator temporarily places the game board 5 in front of or around the pachinko machine 1, even if the operator accidentally hits the game board 5 with his/her leg and the back side of the game board 5 falls toward the floor of the amusement hall, the length of the board holder 1200' in the front-to-back direction (i.e., depth direction) when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 is adjusted so that the front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' will not come into contact with the floor of the amusement hall. In addition to the length of the board holder 1200' in the front-to-back direction (i.e., depth direction) as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, a recess may be formed in the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 to which the board holder 1200' is attached, and the depth of this recess (the length of the pachinko machine 1 in the front-to-back direction (i.e., depth direction) as viewed from the front) may be adjusted so that the front part of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' does not come into contact with the floor of the game hall. Alternatively, the length of the pachinko machine 1 in the front-to-back direction (i.e., depth direction) as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 combined with this recess and the board holder 1200' may be adjusted.

As described above, inside the island equipment of the game hall, multiple types of wiring are suspended from the top for electrically connecting to the various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, and depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes unconnected wiring and is suspended from the top inside the island equipment of the game hall. Since the pachinko machines 1 are installed in multiple rows facing each other on the island equipment of the game hall, if this unconnected wiring comes into contact with the various boards provided on the game board 5, the electrical drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, and the light-emitting means such as various LEDs and various lamps, a short circuit may occur, causing damage (which may cause a fire). Although the rear cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, many of the tips of the unconnected wiring are bent at or near the tips, and the tips of the unconnected wiring are caught in the slits 641 and are therefore unlikely to penetrate toward the rear surface of the game board 5, thereby preventing short circuits. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200', the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is disposed near the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension dc from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730. Therefore, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring penetrates the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, it is blocked by the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and cannot penetrate toward the main control board box 1320, and the tip of the unconnected wiring can be reliably prevented from contacting the front part of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' provided on the setting change board 1311. The cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 are molded from non-conductive resin.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the rear cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 are arranged approximately parallel to each other in the vertical direction without contacting each other, and the rear cover 640 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are arranged approximately parallel to each other in the vertical direction without contacting each other.

[7. Game Contents]
The game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 77 to 79. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper tray 130 of the door frame 3 is shot into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 by the player rotating the handle 111 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3, and a game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B shot into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the shooting strength. The shooting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the rotation amount of the handle 111, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be shot, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be shot continuously in one minute, that is, at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball B, allowing the player to enjoy its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails N, a windmill that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided in the game area 5a between the first shelf 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the warp entrance 2501.

When a game ball B is shot into the top of the center device 2500 and enters the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 when viewed from the front (left side of the upper right peripheral wall part 2510), it will flow down the area to the left of the center device 2500 while abutting against multiple obstacle nails N. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area to the left of the center device 2500 enters a warp entrance 2501 that opens into the outer periphery of the center device 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2503 from a warp exit 2502.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls back and forth on the stage 2503 and is released forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release section 2503a in the center of the stage 2503, there is a high probability that it will be accepted by the first starting hole 2002, since the central release section 2503a is located directly above the first starting hole 2002. When the game ball B is accepted by this first starting hole 2002, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 130 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2503 of the center device 2500 may be accepted by the first starting hole 2002 of the starting hole unit 2100 or the general winning hole 2001.

If the game ball B that flows down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it may be pulled toward the center in the left-right direction by the first shelf 2201 of the side unit 2200 or the obstacle nail N, and may be accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, or the first starting opening 2002 or general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100. When the game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 130 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, when a game ball B is shot into the upper part of the center device 2500 in the play area 5a and enters the right side of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 (the upstream space 2511 above the upper right peripheral wall 2510), it passes through either the first circulation passage 2521 or the second circulation passage 2522 of the circulation passage group 2520 of the center device 2500, is released above the gate part 2003 of the center device 2500, comes into contact with multiple obstacle nails N planted above the gate part 2003, and then passes through the gate part 2003 with a certain probability.

The circulation passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 is composed of a first circulation passage 2521 whose entrance opens near the impact stopper 1006, and a second circulation passage 2522 whose entrance opens at a distance to the left of the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521. As a result, if the game ball B is hit with enough strength to hit the impact stopper 1006 (so-called right hit), it will enter the first circulation passage 2521, and if the game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the upstream space 2511 and not hit the impact stopper 1006 (somewhat weaker strength than right hit), it will enter the second circulation passage 2522 with a high probability. In other words, the game ball B hit into the upstream space 2511 will circulate through either the first circulation passage 2521 or the second circulation passage 2522 depending on the hitting strength.

On the other hand, game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 is likely to be guided to the right side of the gate portion 2003 by the multiple obstacle nails N planted above the gate portion 2003, and circulates along the right side of the gate portion 2003 without passing through the gate portion 2003 very often. On the other hand, game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 is likely to be guided to the left of the right side of the gate portion 2003 by the multiple obstacle nails N planted above the gate portion 2003, and there is a high probability that it will pass through the gate portion 2003.

When game ball B passes through this gate section 2003 and is detected by gate sensor 2506, a normal lottery is performed on main control board 1310, and if the result of the normal lottery is a "normal win," the closed second starting port 2004 in the attacca unit 2400 opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing game ball B to be received at second starting port 2004.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery that is conducted when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the normal lottery result (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called the normal fluctuation time). This indication of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 and sub-function display section 2450 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 opens after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If game ball B passes through gate unit 2003 between the time when game ball B passes through gate unit 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot begin, so the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is reserved until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result has ended. Also, the number of reserved normal lottery results is limited to four, and any more than this are discarded rather than reserved, even if game ball B passes through gate unit 2003. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

A game ball B that passes through the right side of the gate section 2003 will enter the attacca right passage 2422 to the right of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacca unit 2400 with an extremely high probability due to the multiple obstacle nails N planted between the gate section 2003 and the attacca unit 2400. On the other hand, a game ball B that passes through the gate section 2003 or a game ball B that passes through the left side of the gate section 2003 will be guided to the left of the attacca right passage 2422 with an extremely high probability due to the multiple obstacle nails N planted between the gate section 2003 and the attacca unit 2400, and will enter the attacca left passage 2421 with a high probability.

The general winning opening 2001 of the attacca unit 2400 is located to the left of the attacca right passage 2422. When a game ball B is received in this general winning opening 2001 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401, a predetermined number (e.g., 10 balls) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 130 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

When the game ball B enters the Attacca right passage 2422, it comes into contact with the step 1005a of the right rail 1005, and there is a high probability that it will pass through the communication port 2425 and enter the second start port guide shelf 2423, and circulate above the closed second start port door 2411. If the game ball B that entered the Attacca right passage 2422 does not enter the second start port guide shelf 2423, it will enter the Attacca lower right passage 2426 and be discharged from the outlet 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without being involved with the second start port 2004 or the big prize port 2005. Also, the game ball B that entered the Attacca left passage 2421 will enter the second start port guide shelf 2423 and circulate above the closed second start port door 2411.

When game ball B enters the second start port induction shelf 2423, if the result of the normal lottery drawn by game ball B passing through the gate section 2003 is a "normal win" and the second start port door 2411 is in the open state, game ball B is received by the second start port 2004. When game ball B is received by this second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 130 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

The game ball B that enters the second start port guide shelf 2423 and is not accepted by the second start port 2004 is released to the large prize port guide shelf 2424 side, rolls on the closed large prize port door 2413, and is released into the game area 5a and discharged from the outlet 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. Note that, since multiple obstacle nails N are planted between the second start port guide shelf 2423 and the large prize port guide shelf 2424, and the middle passage 2427 is open, the game ball B that is released from the second start port guide shelf 2423 to the large prize port guide shelf 2424 side enters the middle passage 2427 with a low probability. The game ball B that enters this middle passage 2427 is discharged from the outlet 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without being involved with the large prize port 2005.

For the reasons described above, game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 does not often pass through the gate section 2003, so a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 is opened by game ball B passing through the gate section 2003 is not often drawn, and game ball B is not often accepted by the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 has a high probability of passing through the gate section 2003, so there is a high possibility that a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 is opened by game ball B passing through the gate section 2003 (a "normal win") is drawn, and there is a high possibility that game ball B is accepted by the second starting port 2004.

Because of this, the player will perform the operation of shooting the game ball B, aiming at the entrance of the second flow passage 2522, and therefore the strength of the shooting of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is shot into the game area 5a with a strength that causes the game ball B to enter the upstream space portion 2511 and the second flow passage 2522. This adds variety to the shooting operation of the game ball B, making it less likely for the player to get bored, and allows the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the game ball B, preventing a decline in interest.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball B is received in the first start hole 2002 and the second start hole 2004, the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result that will generate a favorable game state (e.g., a "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player. The drawn special lottery result is then suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as the special variable time). The special lottery results that are drawn when a game ball B is received in the first start hole 2002 and the second start hole 2004 include "miss," "15R jackpot A," "15R jackpot B," etc.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of game ball B into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is a special lottery result that generates a favorable game state, the large prize opening 2005 becomes capable of receiving game ball B in a predetermined opening and closing pattern after the special variable time has elapsed. When the large prize opening 2005 is in an open state and a game ball B is received into the large prize opening 2005, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 130 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Therefore, when the large prize opening 2005 is capable of receiving game ball B, by having the large prize opening 2005 receive the game ball B, many game balls B can be paid out, which can entertain the player.

If the result of the special lottery is a "jackpot," once either a predetermined time (e.g., about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the large prize opening 2005 has been opened to accept game ball B, or a predetermined number of game balls B (e.g., 10) have been received by the large prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) that closes the large prize opening to not accept game ball B is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, in the case of a "15R jackpot," 15 rounds are repeated to create an advantageous game state that is favorable to the player.

In addition, in the case of a "jackpot", when the big prize opening 2005 is open due to the big prize game state, if the game ball received in the big prize opening 2005 is distributed to the second receiving opening 2008 by the distribution piece 2415, an ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state after the big prize game state ends. This ST maintains a certain number of predetermined fluctuations, such as a probability change that changes the probability of a special lottery result such as a "jackpot" being drawn, or a time-saving state that changes the display time of an effect image suggesting a special lottery result.

In this embodiment, if game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn by the reception of game ball B by the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for any more than this, the special lottery result is not reserved but discarded even if game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

As described above, when the large prize opening 2005 is opened as a result of the special lottery drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, if a player attempts to shoot game ball B aimed at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522, the shooting operation must be finely adjusted, which may cause some players to feel impatient or irritated at the arrival of this wonderful opportunity, which may reduce their interest in the game. However, in this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit to the right and circulated through the first circulation passage 2521, the game ball B can be circulated to the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 side (large prize opening 2005 side) via the right side of the gate portion 2003, the attacker right passage 2422, the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, the communication port 2425, and the second starting port guide shelf 2423. Therefore, the game ball B can be accepted into the large prize opening 2005 with an easy hitting operation without having to make subtle adjustments to the hitting operation, allowing the player to enjoy playing in an advantageous game state, and the hitting operation of the game ball B can be made more pronounced depending on the game state, preventing the player's interest from declining.

The special lottery result, which is determined by the reception of game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004, is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display section 2450 are directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, and then suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 displays three picture rows consisting of multiple pictures lined up in the left-right direction, and changes each picture row, sequentially stops and displays the changing picture rows, and each picture row is stopped and displayed so that the pictures of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed form a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "miss," after the three picture rows stop and each picture is stopped and displayed, a final image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and a favorable game state (for example, 15R jackpot game A, 15R jackpot game B, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

The time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) is different from the time indicating the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 (the time from when the picture row changes until the final image is displayed), and is set to a longer time on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display section 2450.

In addition to displaying a performance image suggesting the result of the special lottery by the performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 can perform a player participation type performance in which the pressing operation unit 161 of the performance operation unit 160 on the door frame 3 is operated according to the special lottery result. In the player participation type performance, the pressing operation unit 161 can be raised and made prominent by the first lifting drive motor 180a and the second lifting drive motor 182, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance by operating the performance operation unit 160.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can appropriately use the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, and the rear first performance unit 3100, rear second performance unit 3200, and rear third performance unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 to perform light-emitting effects, moving effects, etc., allowing players to be entertained by various effects and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition to the display of effect images suggesting the results of the special lottery by the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 can also provide light-emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., by appropriately using the rear first effect unit 3100, rear second effect unit 3200, and rear third effect unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 on the game board 5 depending on the results of the special lottery. This allows players to be entertained by various effects, and prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[8. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 111 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 123. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on process of FIG. 118, FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process, FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process, FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting value confirmation display process, and FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of the error display process. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the movement of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, the main control side timer interrupt process, the setting change process, the error display process, and the setting value confirmation display process. In the following description, the main control MPU 1310a may be simply referred to as the "main control MPU".

[8-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include special random numbers used to determine whether or not a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state will be generated, initial value determination random numbers for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number, reach determination random numbers used to determine whether or not a reach (missed reach) will be generated when a jackpot game state is not generated, variable display pattern random numbers used to determine the variable display pattern of the special patterns that are variably displayed on the first special pattern display device and the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400, pattern random numbers used to determine the jackpot pattern or small jackpot pattern (determine the type of hit) that is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device and the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 when a jackpot game state is generated, and initial value determination random numbers for jackpot pattern used to determine the initial value of this pattern random number. In addition to these random numbers, there are also prepared random numbers for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece that allows the second starting port 2004 to accept a gaming ball, initial value determination random numbers for determining whether or not to open and close the random numbers for determining whether or not to open and close the random numbers, and random numbers for normal pattern variable display patterns for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal pattern that is variably displayed on the normal pattern display device of the function display unit 1400.

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is updated directly by hardware using a main control built-in hard random number circuit built into the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, this main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as the initial value, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. When all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such rapid lottery drawing, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time when it obtains a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the special random number.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated within a predetermined fixed range of values from the minimum to the maximum, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit to the maximum, and then counts up from the minimum to the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit from the minimum to the maximum, the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed range of values of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit.

In this embodiment, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by treating various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU as numerical values and calculating the sum of them during the main control side power-on process (described later) does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off process (when power is turned off), and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area, the main control MPU retrieves an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, executes an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal pattern hit determination random number based on the retrieved ID code, and sets this derived fixed value. In other words, the normal pattern hit determination initial value determination random number is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for determining normal symbol winnings is derived using the ID code, and analysis is prevented by taking two security measures: the first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device when it is stored in non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU, and the second security measure is that an initial value derivation process is executed when clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, thereby deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU and using the extracted ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined will be explained. For example, even if a person who is trying to illegally acquire game balls paid out as prize balls obtains and disassembles the game board 5 in some way, illegally obtains the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU, and is able to grasp the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined matches the normal symbol win determination value, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual, so it will be completely different from the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU' equipped in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined matches the normal symbol win determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1', so even if momentary interruptions are generated at the predetermined intervals obtained by disassembly and analysis, and game balls are allowed to pass through the gate portion 2003 at those predetermined intervals, it is not possible to open and close the movable piece to generate a game state in which game balls can be received by the second starting port 2004.

[8-2. Processing when power is turned on on the main control side]
First, the main control MPU is circuit-configured so that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, a stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer, for example, indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when a subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Under the control of the main control MPU, the main control side power-on processing is performed as shown in Figures 118 and 119. When this main control side power-on processing starts, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). This RAM access permission setting allows updates to be made to the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs a power outage clear process (step S12). In this power outage clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, and in this embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633 has been operated (step S14). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch), and in this case, it functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase the information stored in a specified area of the main control built-in RAM. In this judgment, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated is HI, the main control MPU judges that the RAM clear will not be performed and judges that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, whereas when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is LOW, the main control MPU judges that the RAM will be cleared and judges that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated. Note that, since the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the judgment of step S14 is extremely short, in reality, the person who presses the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z will be pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z while powering on the pachinko machine 1.

In the judgment of step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, in the judgment of step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU makes the RAM clear process, which initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU (i.e., the main control built-in RAM), executable for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, including game information related to the game such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output, etc.), and is set to a value of 1 when various information is erased, and to a value of 0 when various information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S16A or S16B, the main control MPU determines whether the main frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU performs the determination based on a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and a setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder is turned ON by rotating the setting key switch 1311a clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). In addition, since the period from when the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, begins until the judgment of step S18 is extremely short, in reality, the person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a will turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 1311a.

In the judgment of step S18, when the main control MPU judges that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b and judges that the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the judgment of step S18, when the main control MPU judges that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b and/or judges that the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specified area (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area, described later) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU to be changed or a confirmation display be made. It is set to a value of 1 when the setting value is changed or a confirmation display is made, and to a value of 0 when the setting value is not changed or a confirmation display is made. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 waits until it starts (boots). In this embodiment, the standby time until booting (boot timer) is set to 10 seconds (s). When the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, the peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). Note that, when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, the dispensing control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510, so the dispensing control board 633 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU).

Following step S22, the main control MPU judges whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The judgment in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. In the judgment in step S24, if the main control MPU judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it returns to the judgment in step S24 again, and repeats the judgment in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. A detailed explanation of the fact that the judgment in step S24 is made following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When the main control MPU determines in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to the value 1 (step S25). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to the value 1, the main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met.

When the main control MPU determines in step S25 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not equal to 1, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to 0 (step S26). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to 0, the main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not met, but that various information should be erased in the same manner as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met.

When the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not equal to 0, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to 1 (step S27). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to 1, the main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met.

In the judgment of step S27, if the main control MPU judges that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1, and thus judges that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied, it performs a setting value confirmation display process (step S28). This setting value confirmation display process, the details of which will be described later, displays the setting value stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S28, or in the judgment of step S27, if the main control MPU judges that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not equal to the value 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not equal to the value 1 (the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to the value 0), it calculates a checksum (step S29). This checksum is calculated by treating the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values.

Following step S29, the main control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described below (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is a flag indicating whether game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG have been stored and retained in the main control's built-in RAM in the main control side power-off processing described below, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally. A detailed explanation of the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first powered on for inspection after being manufactured during the inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310 will be provided later.

When the main control MPU determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or when the main control MPU determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed, it performs error display processing (step S33) and enters an infinite loop. This infinite loop causes the state in which the error display processing has been completed to be maintained, resulting in a state in which it is completely impossible to proceed with the game, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. In this error display processing, which will be described in detail later, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed when the power was cut off, an error display is performed to inform the user that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or that the contents cannot be trusted). In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

After the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e. the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to turn it ON, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned ON while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633, and this routine, the main control side power-on processing, is started again. The main control MPU determines in the above-mentioned step S14 that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated, and in the above-mentioned step S16A, sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1. Also, in the above-mentioned step S18, it determines that the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and determines that the setting key switch 1311a is set to setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, and in the above-mentioned step S20A, it sets the setting key ON flag C To set the value of S-FLG to 1, in the judgment of step S25 described above, it is judged that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to value 1, and it is judged that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met, and following the setting change processing of step S37 described below, in the processing of step S38 described below, the RAM error is cleared by clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, allowing the game to proceed (hereinafter referred to as the "first RAM error clearing method").

As an alternative to this first RAM error release method, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and with the setting key cylinder in its initial position (i.e. the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a), the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633, and this routine, the main control side power-on processing, is started again. In the judgment of step S14 described above, the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated, and in step S16A described above, sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1. In contrast, in step S18 described above, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 has not been opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and/or determines that the setting key switch 1311a has not been set to setting key ON based on a setting key ON signal, and in step S20B described above, sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0. In order to set this, in the judgment of step S26 described above, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value of 0, meaning that the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are not met, but it is determined that various information should be erased in the same way as when the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are met, and in the processing of step S38 described below, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, thereby canceling the RAM error and allowing the game to proceed (hereinafter referred to as the "second RAM error cancellation method").

In this embodiment, when the main control MPU determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or when the main control MPU determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, that the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, it displays an error in step S33 to inform the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable), and this can be done using two methods, the first RAM error clearing method and the second RAM error clearing method. As a result, when there is no need to change the setting value at all, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RWM clear button 633z.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is a value of 1, that is, when the main control MPU judges that the main control side power failure processing has been normally completed, it sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S34). This setting is done by reading the power recovery information from the ROM (i.e., the main control built-in ROM) built into the main control MPU, and setting this power recovery information in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this various information are stored in a specified memory area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state in which power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and the state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with high frequency waves from unauthorized means (for example, a high frequency output device hidden in the hem of an individual's arm) and the main control MPU itself is reset and then restored.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). This causes various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. to change as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, unless the main control side power failure process described below is normally completed and the backup flag BK-FLG is not set to a value of 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared except for specific areas, as described below.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S25, when the main control MPU judges that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value of 1, that is, when it judges that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, it performs a setting change process (step S37). This setting change process, the details of which will be described later, is performed based on a signal from the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633. As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has three combined functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch), and here it functions as a setting change button for selecting and changing the setting value. Each time the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, a signal (setting value selection switching signal) is input to inform the user of this, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned from ON to OFF, the changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a and stored in a specified area of the RAM built into the main control MPU.

In the process of step S37 or the judgment of step S26, when the main control MPU judges that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 0, that is, when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied but when it judges that various information is to be erased in the same manner as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, it clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU writes the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area). In this embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not value 0 (value 1), that is, when it judges that various information is to be erased, and when the setting change process is terminated, it always clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area). Here, the "specific area" is composed of a setting value dedicated area in which a setting value is stored, and an out ball count dedicated area in which the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 is stored. The setting value dedicated area stores the setting value that is changed in the setting change process described below, and the out ball count dedicated area stores the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 that is counted in the ball counting process described below.

The main control MPU may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as the initial value and set it. When the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch and the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated indicates RAM clear and various information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, the main control MPU retrieves a unique ID code previously stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal pattern hit determination random number based on this retrieved ID code, and sets this fixed value to the normal pattern hit determination initial value determination random number to be used for determining the initial value of the normal pattern hit determination random number described above.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the working area of the main control's built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control's built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM. This initializes the game backup information, and for example, the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball count information is set to the initial value of 0. In addition, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU sets the initial value and starts the WDT built into the main control (step S41). Here, in order to set an initial value in the WDT built into the main control, which monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU is operating normally, a timer setting value is set in the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU, and the WDT built into the main control is started to start timing until the main control MPU is reset. When the WDT built into the main control is started, timing by the WDT built into the main control is started, and if the timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the WDT built into the main control. In contrast, when the main control built-in WDT is started and timing begins, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the timing by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and timing begins again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timing by the main control built-in WDT before it reaches the time set by the timer setting value and then starting timing again, it is possible to monitor whether the main control MPU (system) is operating normally.

Following step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is for setting the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU (for example, the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the dispensing control board 633 and the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510) is set to the communication speed and whether or not parity is enabled, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and enable transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control MPU initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the gaming machine testing facility initializes the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information when the power is turned on (setting it to output OFF data).

Following step S46, the main control MPU performs the activation setting of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the special random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is updated by hardware by latching and acquiring the random number in the hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU, and the activation of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is set in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is activated by these settings, it extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and when all values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts one value in the predetermined numerical range, and extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. When the main control MPU obtains a random number (random number value) from the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, and obtains the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit when this latch signal is input from a hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets this obtained random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU reserves the command to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed explanation of how step S50 schedules the commands to be sent when the power is turned on will be provided later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S52). This setting causes the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S42, i.e., every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When the main control MPU determines in step S54 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). In this non-win/lose random number update process, the random numbers for reach determination, the random numbers for variable display patterns, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot pattern, and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small jackpot pattern, etc., are updated. In this way, in the non-win/lose random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the win/lose determination (jackpot determination) are updated by software. Note that the random numbers for normal pattern hit determination, the random numbers for determining the initial value for normal pattern hit determination, and the random numbers for normal pattern variable display patterns, etc., are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, where the main control MPU determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, the process performs a non-win/lose random number update process in step S56, and repeats steps S54 to S56. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main process on the main control side."

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting disables the main control timer interrupt process described below, prevents writing to the main control's built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned game information and other information from being overwritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process is performed as when the power outage clear signal was started to be output in the power outage clear process in step S12.

Following step S60, the main control MPU stops the drive signals being output to, for example, the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2404, the attacca solenoid 2405, the base monitor 1310h, etc. (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control's built-in RAM, thereby preventing updates to the contents of the main control's built-in RAM.

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT that was started in step S41, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and it becomes impossible to start timekeeping again, so that the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on processing again. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot make the judgment of step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power off processing. For this reason, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without performing the main control side power off processing, and the main control side power on processing is performed again. In other words, since the main control side power off processing is not performed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off processing based on the time immediately before the forcible reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, the checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power off processing is performed at the previous power off and the checksum value (sum value) calculated in step S29 when the built-in reset circuit is forcibly reset and restarted cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the processing of step S38.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when power is subsequently restored, the main control side performs power-on processing.

In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32 it is checked whether the main control's power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

In addition, if it is determined in step S25 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and thus it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met, then the setting change process of step S37 is performed, and in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area; and if it is determined in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, meaning that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not met but various information is to be erased in the same way as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met, then in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. In this way, if the press operation unit is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z), the main control MPU will always clear a specified area of the main control built-in RAM, even if a setting change that can change and determine the setting value is made (when the main control MPU has performed a setting change process). This is because when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a state advantageous to the player (for example, a state in which a probability variable (probability variable) hit has occurred) when the business of the game hall is closed, it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business day begins, so a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall needs to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch. Also, when changing and deciding the setting value, even if the current setting value is maintained as a result when the setting change process is performed, it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as game information obtained by the setting value before the setting change process is performed from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as to check the current setting value, so only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, are allowed to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people. In this embodiment, even if the setting value is not changed, that is, even if there is no setting key that only a limited number of people possess, a staff member such as a staff member of the game hall can erase (clear) the game backup information from the main control built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z when it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch.

Here, we will explain how the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, we will explain the problems that arise when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when proceeding with the processing from step S26 onwards after the wait time standby process in step S22.

As described above, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption. In other words, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary interruption or power outage, the charge stored in the hardware, electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as DC +5V, so that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed within the period of approximately 7 ms after the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off while the player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is being performed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, when power is restored, in the wait time standby process of step S22, the wait time (boot timer: in this embodiment, set to 2.5 seconds) until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) is counted. If an instantaneous interruption or power outage occurs just before the wait time is reached, the charge stored in the hardware, the electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU. However, within a period of about 7 ms, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. This causes the main control side timer interrupt process described later to be performed, and even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off process in the main control side power on process may not be completed. For this reason, the value calculated as the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power on process is started again when power is restored.

In this case, when power is restored, the main control side power-on process is started, and the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without any momentary or power outage. After that, when the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S29 is compared in step S30 with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch when power is restored, and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated by a staff member or other attendant of the game hall, the above-mentioned game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention of the staff member or other attendant of the game hall to clear the RAM.

In this embodiment, therefore, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided in step S24 to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. This prevents the game from progressing. Although a value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as described above, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24. When a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, when it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, preventing the progress of the game, and preventing various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output, etc.) from being updated, and preventing fluctuations in the calculation result of the checksum. As a result, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 are consistent, so that the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs is not initialized. This prevents game information from being initialized immediately before a momentary or power outage occurs when power is restored.

In addition, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has not been input (i.e., when it is determined by the judgment of step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has not been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is progressing a game, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, so that game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output) relating to the progress of the game are output. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is able to complete the main control side power cut process, which is comprised of the processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes for storing various information including information indicating the value of the force determination counter, and an infinite loop, the main control MPU determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (i.e., the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64), when restarted, and therefore does not initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary or power outage occurs. In other words, the game information is restored to the state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurs, and the main control board 1310 can be started.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT, thereby making it possible to start the main control side power outage processing again without updating the contents of the main control's built-in RAM at all. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power outage processing within the "power supply assurance period during momentary power outage or power outage" of approximately 7 ms defined by the hardware, as before. In other words, in this embodiment, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the main control side power-on process when power is restored, and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, and the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU, as DC +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cut process cannot be completed within the "momentary or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2, a determination is made in step S24 immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22 as to whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, preventing the game from proceeding.

This software makes it impossible for the game to progress, thereby preventing progression to steps subsequent to step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which interrupt initial settings are made in step S42, and then interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control side timer interrupt processing described below), thereby preventing the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output)) from being updated. In this way, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power is cut off from the island equipment of the gaming hall, the main control's built-in RAM is divided into two parts: a part that is handled by software so that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) are not changed at all, and a part that is handled by hardware so that the main control's power outage processing is completed reliably and the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) are not changed at all. By configuring it in two parts, it is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) from being changed.

Next, the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to inform the fact that the power has been turned on (restored), a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the start port solenoid 2404 and information indicating the driving state of the attacca solenoid 2405. Here, we will first explain the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2404 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2405; in other words, the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not reserve the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen showing a jackpot game state (e.g., a screen showing a jackpot game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the main control board 1310 is driving the attacca solenoid 2405 and the large prize opening 2005 is open by the opening/closing member, if an instantaneous or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 will start driving the attacca solenoid 2405 and the large prize opening 2005 will transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member to a state in which it is open.

However, when a momentary or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, and therefore when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can restore based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game state as a game state and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can display a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game state it is. In other words, even if, for example, a gaming ball enters the large winning opening 2005 and is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and the main control board 1310 transmits a large winning opening 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510, which transmits the number of gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening 2005, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening 2005 on the screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving status, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game state (i.e., which round).

In such a situation, for example, when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state is ended, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacca solenoid 2405 and transmits a large prize opening 1 closed display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the large prize opening 2005 to transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening/closing member (i.e., the start of closing the large prize opening 2005 between rounds of the attacca unit 2100), and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it transmits a large prize opening 5th open display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the attacca solenoid 2405 to start driving the attacca solenoid 2405 and the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a closed state by the opening/closing member to an open state (i.e., the start of opening the large prize opening 2005 for the fifth round). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the probability and time-saving state described above to a screen indicating the start of five rounds of the jackpot game state in the display area of the performance display device 1600.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen (for example, a screen informing the player that the movable piece is open) on the display area of the performance display device 1600 to inform the player that the game state is favorable to the player because the game ball can be received into the second starting hole 2004, if an instantaneous or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is in a state in which it is driving the starting hole solenoid 2404 to open the movable piece and open the second starting hole 2004, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and transitions to a state in which it starts driving the starting hole solenoid 2404 to close the movable piece and close the second starting hole 2004.

However, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary interruption or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, generating a gaming state advantageous to the player, and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration, but the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display at all in the display area of the performance display device 1600 a screen informing the player that the gaming state has become advantageous to the player, in which a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004. For this reason, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the occurrence of a momentary or power outage and forget that when power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred was one in which game balls could be received into the second starting hole 2004. In such a case, even though the game state at the time of power restoration is restored to one in which game balls can be received into the second starting hole 2004, the screen instructing the player to play (i.e., a screen instructing the player to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 at the time of power restoration, causing the player to become confused about what game to play.

As described above, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem in that the game state immediately before the momentary or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, there was a problem in that a player seated in front of the pachinko machine would mistakenly think that the pachinko machine's system had frozen when power was restored after a momentary or blackout.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in step S50, the power-on state command, which is classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control side timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 can, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, inform the peripheral control board 1510 that, for example, in the above example, when an instantaneous interruption or power outage occurs during the fourth round of a jackpot game state and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 will return to the destination of the main control board 1310 by starting to drive the attacca solenoid 2405 and transitioning the large prize opening 2005 from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member to a state in which it is opened. Therefore, although the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of a jackpot game state (i.e., a screen indicating which round it is), in the display area of the performance display device 1600, it can display a screen indicating that it is a jackpot game state and that the attacca solenoid 2405 has started to be driven and the large prize opening 2005 has been opened by the opening/closing member (for example, a screen indicating "It's a jackpot. The large prize opening is open. Play to have the game ball enter the large prize opening." In the above example, when a game ball is ready to be received by the second start port 2004 and the game is favorable to the player, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is restored, the main control board 1310 may return to the start port socket 2005 as the return destination. The peripheral control board 1510 can display a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 informing the player that the resonator 2404 has started to be driven to open the movable piece and open the second starting hole 2004 (for example, a screen that conveys the message to the player, "The movable piece is open. Please play so that the game ball will enter the second starting hole."), and instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play the game by placing the game ball in the second starting hole 2004 after power is restored.

As a result, when power is restored after a momentary or blackout, the main control board 1310 can give detailed instructions on where to return the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, after power is restored, the game can be quickly restored to the state it was in immediately before the momentary or blackout. In other words, when a momentary or blackout occurs and then power is restored, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine will see that the system of the pachinko machine has frozen, which can prevent the player from mistaking this for a malfunction.

Next, the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, will be described. When the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the backup process of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power off process consisting of an infinite loop, as described above. Therefore, even if a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S29, the checksum values will not match in the comparison judgment in step S30, and all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared in step S38 except for a specific area.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM built in the main control, so that only three commands, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM built in the main control. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, the power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by the power-on main control return destination command, followed by the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is transmitted as the first command from the main control board 1310 to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

The power-on state command is composed of information indicating that the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch when the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), information indicating which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to from the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, we will explain the problem when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is used to determine which copyright of the work it is for and what kind of game specifications it has when creating the so-called max type, mid type, or sweet type of pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310) (for example, in addition to game specifications in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win game state occurs, game specifications in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times (for example, 30 or 70 times) for the special pattern (so-called ST machine)).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for multiple types of copyrights may be mixed. In such a case, the workers on the manufacturing line may not know which of the multiple types of copyrights (e.g., copyrights of works A, B, C, D, E, and F) the main control board 1310 is being sent to manufacture for which copyright of the work, or may mistakenly believe that the main control board 1310 is being sent to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (e.g., copyright of the work F) even though the main control board 1310 is being sent to manufacture the main control board 1310 for one copyright (e.g., copyright of the work D) of the multiple types of copyrights.

For this reason, when main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are manufactured on the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, if the main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed, the workers on the production line will not be able to confirm which work copyright the main control board 1310 manufactured on the production line is for, and even for the same work copyright, they will not be able to confirm which model type it is (max type, middle type, sweet type, or any other type) or what the game specifications are (such as a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or an ST machine).

As a result, if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1, the main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control boards 1310 to the game board 5 while still mixed. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line may attach a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the work copyright. This results in a problem of reduced production efficiency of the game board 5.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on status command including information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and power is restored), in step S50, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control side timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the production line, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, the inspection device 201 determines the model code of the pachinko machine, i.e., the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, including the series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next big win game state occurs, By visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code that specifies the game specification where a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that the special symbol changes, as well as the game specification where a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that the special symbol changes (ST machine), it is possible to determine which copyright of the work the main control board 1310 corresponds to, and even for the same copyright of the work, it is possible to determine which model type (max type, middle type, or sweet type) and what the game specification is (a game specification where when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win game state occurs, or an ST machine).

As a result, even if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the workers in the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type, work copyright, and game specifications of the main control boards 1310, and can separate the main control boards 1310 for each work copyright and send them to the subsequent game board assembly line. Then, the workers on the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control boards 1310 that correspond to the game boards 5 for the work copyrights to the game boards 5, and can prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game boards 5 caused by the work of attaching the main control boards 1310 that do not correspond to the game boards 5 for the work copyrights to the game boards 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game boards 5.

[8-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described. This timer interrupt process on the main control side is repeatedly performed at an interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the power-on process on the main control side shown in Figs. 118 and 119.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing starts, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 120 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks, a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second register bank. Note that in this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, starts, the process of saving each register to a stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric role control processing described later, the time during which the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric role control processing described later, as well as the time of the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal that informs the payout control board 633 that various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) have been input. Specifically, when the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the change time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, thereby accurately measuring the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input judgment time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input judgment time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input judgment time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0. Note that these various times and the ACK signal input judgment time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU receives, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403, a detection signal from the outlet sensor 3032, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470, a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (a signal from this RWM clear button 633z) and stores the signal in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Since the signal is not important in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, it may be masked and not read. ), the detection signal from the door frame open switch 4a, the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633, which informs the payout control board 633 that the payout ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later has been normally received by the payout control board 633, are read, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Also, when the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 2101 and the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2402 are read, the corresponding start hole winning command classified as others is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 2101, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, and when there is a detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2402, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the input states of all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing) are first read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result of the second read is compared with the result of the first read. It is determined whether or not any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. It is determined again whether or not any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. It is determined again whether or not any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, it is treated as if no game balls have entered the game, or the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input process, the input states of all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those for which vacant terminal processing has been applied) are read twice in total, by comparing the first to third readings and the second to fourth readings, thereby making it possible to avoid false detections due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., and therefore the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 2101, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, the detection signal from the large winning port sensor 2403, the out port sensor This can increase the reliability of the detection signal from sensor 3032, the detection signal from magnetic sensor 3005, the detection signal from vibration sensor 3005, the signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (this signal from the RWM clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, so it may be masked and not read), the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633, which informs the payout control board 633 that the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control processing described below has been successfully received by the payout control board 633.

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have been subjected to the vacant terminal processing is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input processing of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to ground (GND) as the vacant terminal processing, so that the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, whether or not the logic state of the input terminals of the various input ports that have been subjected to the vacant terminal processing is LOW is determined based on the information acquired in the switch input processing of step S104. When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal that has been subjected to the vacant terminal processing is not LOW, it stores a malfunction command classified as a notification display that notifies the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU that a malfunction has occurred as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs a win/lose random number update process (step S106). In this win/lose random number update process, the above-mentioned pattern random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the big win pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small win pattern, which are updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 119, are also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big win pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small win pattern are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further increase randomness. In contrast, the pattern random numbers are random numbers related to the win/lose judgment (win judgment), so the respective counters count up only each time this win/lose random number update process is performed. In addition, the random number for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination and the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination are also updated by this winning/losing random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is an initial value update type counter that is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won, from the minimum value to the maximum value, the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is updated by this win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won.

In this embodiment, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols are updated by the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 119, and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. However, if the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs and the main control side main process is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs, causing the number of times the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 is executed to become random, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols may be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs ball counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting processing, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, when a detection signal from the outlet sensor 3032 is input and the outlet sensor 3032 detects a game ball collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, a calculation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of the collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008. The main control MPU stores the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, in an out ball count dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM as the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008, and sets the output of a lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h and stores it in the output information storage area as output information. Furthermore, when the value of the recovered ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, each time the number of game balls recovered at the outlet 1008 reaches 10, the main control MPU creates a ball recovery command to notify this fact and stores it in the output information storage area as transmission information. Note that when the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, a value of 65,535) and the main control MPU further adds (increments) the value of the recovered ball counter by a value of 1, the value of the recovered ball counter overflows and becomes a value of 0, and performs a calculation to add from this value 0.

Following step S107, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls based on this input information is created, and a self-check command for checking the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is created. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then sent to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and since the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify this fact, and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has successfully received this prize ball command is not input within a specified time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize ball number information output command classified as "other" is created to inform the player of this fact, and is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of this counter for determining the main prize ball number information output is calculated by reading input information from the input information memory area described above, and counting the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on this input information, that is, based on the game balls that have entered the various prize openings such as the general prize opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, and the large prize opening 2005 provided on the game board 5 (hereinafter referred to as the ``various prize openings provided on the game board 5''), and is stored and updated in the prize ball planned information memory area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the RAM built in the main control is read, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information read from the input information storage area described above based on the input information read from the input information storage area. When the value indicating the added number of balls exceeds the value of 10 (i.e., when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform the user of this fact and is stored in the output information storage area as transmission information, and the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated as the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the RAM built in the main control described above.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The dispensing control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified as status indications (e.g., frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command). In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information informing the payer control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU reshapes the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified as status indications (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command)) and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, the presence or absence of an abnormal state regarding the prize balls is confirmed, such as the entry of a game ball B into the second start gate 2004 even though the second start gate door 2411 is not open, or the entry of a game ball B into the large prize gate 2005 even though the large prize gate door 2413 is not open. In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormal state regarding the prize balls has occurred in the fraud detection process, the main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, thereby contributing to the ability of staff such as store clerks of the gaming hall to discover an abnormal state regarding the prize balls at an early stage. Note that the security signal output when it is determined that an abnormal state regarding the prize balls has occurred is the same signal as the security signal output when it is determined that a magnet gouge, which will be described later, is being performed, or the security signal output when it is determined that a vibration gouge, which will be described later, is being performed. In addition, the main control MPU outputs the security signal to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall via the payout control board 633 and the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633, but after the main control MPU sends a command to the payout control board 633 to instruct the output of a security signal, the payout control MPU may output the security signal to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall via the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the fraud detection process in step S112, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal is input from the magnetic sensor 2470, it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is occurring, and the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by a value of 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented each time a magnet goto is determined to be occurring in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. When the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to a value of 250 based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt period in which the fraud detection process performs the main control timer interrupt process), a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display that informs the user that a magnet goto is occurring is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the fraud detection process determines that magnet cheating is occurring, the main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, which helps to enable the gaming hall staff or other attendants to discover magnet cheating at an early stage.

In addition, in the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal is input from the vibration sensor 3005, it is determined that a fraudulent act by vibration (hereinafter referred to as "vibration cheat") is occurring, and the value of the vibration cheat counter is incremented by a value of 1. The value of this vibration cheat counter is incremented each time a vibration cheat is determined to be occurring in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. When the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. When the value of the vibration cheat counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to a value of 250 based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt period in which the fraud detection process performs the main control side timer interrupt process), a vibration cheat notification command classified as a notification display that informs the user that a vibration cheat is occurring is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when it is determined in the fraud detection process that vibration cheating is occurring, the main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the gaming parlor side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, which helps to enable staff members such as clerks at the gaming parlor to discover vibration cheating at an early stage.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when an abnormal winning occurs at the large prize opening, such as when a detection signal is input from the large prize opening sensor 2403 when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005), an abnormal winning display command classified as an abnormal condition and a notification display is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a magnet and/or vibration is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 1 to indicate that fraud has been detected, whereas when neither a magnet nor vibration is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 0 to indicate that no fraud has been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. In addition, when an abnormal win at the large prize slot is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG may also be set to a value of 1 to indicate that fraud has been detected.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs a launch permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch the game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is set. Specifically, based on the value of the above-mentioned fraud detection flag FD-FLG, when the main control MPU determines that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is a value of 0, that is, that no fraud has been detected, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch permission logic, and stored as output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area, while when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not a value of 0 (a value of 1), that is, that it has been determined that fraud has been detected, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the launch permission logic, and stored as output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. The logic of the launch permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the initial value (default) is set to a launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic, but after the power is turned on (after power is restored) to the pachinko machine 1, it is set to the launch permission logic.

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric role control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric role control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU, and this obtained random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether the special random number (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU) matches the big win determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (determines whether a big win game state is generated (referred to as a "special lottery")), or the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number is taken out and it is determined whether it matches any of the win type determination values pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM according to the big win type or small win type (determines the win type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are due to the first start hole sensor 2101, various commands related to the special pattern 1 synchronization performance are created, whereas if the judgment result (lottery results) are due to the second start hole sensor 2402, various commands related to the special pattern 2 synchronization performance are created and stored in the transmission information memory area as transmission information. In addition, the special pattern variable display pattern is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above, and the output of a lighting signal to the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light up the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined special pattern variable display pattern, and the output is stored in the output information memory area described above as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, large prize opening 1 open Nth time display command, large prize opening 1 closing display command, large prize opening 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, for example, the output of a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening/closing member is set, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the number of times (rounds) that the large prize opening 2005 changes from a closed state to an open state is set to two. When there are 15 rounds, the output of a lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the 2 round indicator lamp, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information; when there are 15 rounds, the output of a lighting signal to the 15 round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the 15 round indicator lamp, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information; and the output of a lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up a specified color to indicate whether or not a time reduction has occurred, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric device control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and normal winning slot winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning slot winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the result of this determination, when a detection signal has been input to the input terminal of the input port, the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol has been hit is extracted, and stored as normal winning slot winning information in the normal winning slot winning information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

This regular prize slot winning information storage area has sections 0 to 3 (four sections), and regular prize slot winning information is stored in the order of section 0, section 1, section 2, and section 3. For example, if regular prize slot winning information is stored in sections 0 to 2 of the regular prize slot winning information storage, when a detection signal from gate sensor 2506 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the regular prize slot winning information is stored in section 3 of the regular prize slot winning information storage.

The regular prize winning information stored in the 0th section of the regular prize winning information storage is set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. When this regular prize winning information is set, the regular prize winning information in the first section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the regular prize winning information storage, the regular prize winning information in the second section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the regular prize winning information storage, and the regular prize winning information in the third section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the second section of the regular prize winning information storage, and the third section of the regular prize winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when normal prize winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal prize winning information storage, the normal prize winning information in the first section of the normal prize winning information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal prize winning information storage, and the normal prize winning information in the second section of the normal prize winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal prize winning information storage, and the second section of the normal prize winning information storage and the third section of the normal prize winning information storage become free areas. Here, when normal prize winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal prize winning information storage, the output of the lighting signal of the normal reserve display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal prize winning information so that the total number of stored normal prize winning information is set as a reserved ball and the normal reserve display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following the normal winning port winning process, the normal winning port winning information set in the working area of the RAM built in the main control is read out, and the value of the random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol wins is determined from the read normal winning port winning information to determine whether or not it matches the normal symbol winning determination value previously stored in the ROM built in the main control (called the "normal lottery"). This determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery) determines whether or not to open or close the movable piece. If the decision is made to open or close the movable piece, the movable piece will be in an open state, creating a game state in which a game ball can be received by the second starting port 2004, creating a game state that is advantageous to the player. The normal symbol variable display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variable display pattern, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won matches the normal symbol winning judgment value previously stored in the ROM built into the main control, various commands related to the normal electric role performance are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set to open and close the movable piece, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won does not match the normal symbol winning judgment value previously stored in the ROM built into the main control, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In addition, the output of a light-up signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the probability of winning the regular lottery (the probability of winning the regular lottery) is 1 in 2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the above-mentioned output information storage area from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminals of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, the main control MPU outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633, outputs a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the large winning port 2005 when in a jackpot game state, outputs a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the movable piece, and also outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a small jackpot information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, and a special pattern display information output signal. It outputs various information (game information) related to the game, such as a signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, a time-saving information output signal, and a start port winning information output signal, to the payout control board 633, outputs a launch permission signal set to launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633, outputs a display signal to the base monitor 1310h that displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008, and outputs a lighting signal to display the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to jackpots (for example, a large prize port 1 count display command corresponding to a large prize port count command based on a detection signal from the large prize port sensor 2403 when a game ball entering the large prize port 2005 is detected), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test-related, and various other commands (for example, a ball entering various prize ports provided on the game board 5 when the main control board 1310 detects a ball entering the various prize ports). A main prize ball number information output command that instructs the hall computer to transmit a main prize ball number information output signal as main prize ball number information to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls collected reaches 10, and various commands classified as specific history (for example, a ball collection command that notifies the hall computer each time the number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008 reaches 10, a setting change command that notifies the hall computer that a setting value has been changed, an error display command that notifies the hall computer that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable), a setting value confirmation display command that notifies the hall computer that a setting value stored in a setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, which will be described later, should be confirmed, etc.) are stored in the main circuit serial data. One packet of the main circuit serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data is composed of a status indicating the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the performance with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and adding them up; this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data in the following order: status, mode, and sum value. As described above, in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, so that the main serial transmission port built into the main control MPU can at least transfer the command set in its transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption occurs after power is turned on, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 119, in order to inform the user that power has been restored, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.As main serial data, these are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command at power-on, followed by the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on. In addition, in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the main control side power-on processing, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are transmitted.

Whenever the number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008 reaches 10, a ball collection command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the same. The peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008 for each ball collection command received, and updates the ball collection information (information associating the counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008) with the updated date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). If the ball collection command cannot be received and the business hours of the game hall end and the power is cut off to the pachinko machine 1, the ball collection information associating the last counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008) with the updated date and time is stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on to start business at the game hall, the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 creates ball collection information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) again from the day business started, and the ball collection information is stored and stored as ball collection history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The counted value stored and stored as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or it may be both the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day and the sum of the values counted up to that point.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control's built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control's built-in WDT is cleared in step S122 by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU. This clears the timekeeping by the main control's built-in WDT. Then, the main control's built-in WDT restarts counting time, which avoids the main control MPU being forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the above-mentioned backup process for storing game information as the game progresses before power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is in progress, and when power is restored, based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed, the main control board 1310 can output a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 which instructs the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414, which are the electrical drive sources due to the port output process of step S118 in this routine, when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, as the return destination for the game progress by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 119, the main control board 1310 creates a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on, based on the power-recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. 118, in order to inform the user that power has been turned on (power has been restored), and stores these command in the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. This is stored in the transmission information storage area, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on state command, followed by transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, followed by transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return the game when power is restored in the display area of the display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 when power is turned on. This allows the game to be quickly restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage when power is restored while the player is playing, and the destination to which the game will be returned by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600 to notify the player, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 does not appear to be in a frozen state, which is a so-called frozen state, and the player is prevented from mistaking it for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage after power is restored, the game can be prevented from being misunderstood for a malfunction by the player.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, in step S38 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 of the same processing shown in FIG. 119, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that only the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. M's transmission information memory area, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by transmission to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, and then transmission to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process is configured to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which comprises the above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specifications in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that a special pattern can fluctuate (ST machine)).

8-4. Setting change process
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is carried out in step S37 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current setting value, as shown in FIG. 121 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU acquires the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read or extracted, but when extracting the setting value, the extracted setting value is set in a specified area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by treating the various information stored in the main control's built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating their sum, and is the same process as the checksum calculation performed in step S28 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118.

Following step S202, the main control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (when power is off) in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 119 (step S204). If the main control MPU determines in step S204 that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determinations in steps S204 and S206 are the same as the determinations in steps S30 and S32, respectively, in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG has been stored in the main control's built-in RAM during the main control's power-off processing described below, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control's power-off processing has been completed successfully, and to a value of 0 when the main control's power-off processing has not been completed successfully.

In the judgment of step S204, when the main control MPU judges that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the judgment of step S206, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (value 0), that is, when the main control MPU judges that the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, it judges whether the setting value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). Here, the "normal range" is a value that the setting value can be changed to, and in this embodiment, it is preset to values of setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6. When the flowchart proceeds to the judgment of step S208, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or that the main control side power off processing has not ended normally at the time of power off, so that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the judgment of step S208, the main control MPU judges whether the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is any value among setting values 1 to 6, which are within the normal range, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, it uses that setting value as is.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S208, if the main control MPU judges that the set value is not within the normal range, it sets the set value acquired in step S200 to the initial value of set value 1 (step S210). Note that in the judgment of step S208, it is judged whether the set value acquired in step S200 and stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is any value among set values 1 to 6, which are in the normal range. However, without making the judgment of step S208, if the main control MPU judges in the judgment of step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or if the main control MPU judges in the judgment of step S206 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (is the value 0), that is, if the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, it may proceed to the processing of step S210 and set the set value acquired in step S200 to the initial value of set value 1.

When the main control MPU determines in step S206 that the backup flag BK-FLG is equal to 1, i.e., that the processing during power failure on the main control side has been completed normally, or when the main control MPU determines in step S208 that the value is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a turn-on signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214).

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the dispensing control board 633 has been operated (step S216). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch), and here it functions as a setting change button for selecting and changing the setting value. This determination is made by reading a signal (setting value selection change signal) indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the dispensing control board 633 has been operated, and determining whether a detection signal from the setting value setting change signal from the RWM clear button 633z has been input. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated when a setting value selection switching signal is input from the RWM clear button 633z, and determines that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not being operated when a setting value selection switching signal is not input from the RWM clear button 633z.

When the main control MPU determines in step S216 that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated, it performs a calculation to add (increment) the set value by 1, updating it (step S218). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, the set value set in this predetermined area is added (incremented) by 1.

Following step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S220).

Following step S220, or in the judgment of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the setting key has been turned OFF when the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to the initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and performs this determination based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a. When the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, the main control MPU determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, but when the OFF signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the judgment of step S222, if the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been operated to OFF, it returns to the judgment of step S216 and determines whether the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated. In the judgment of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated, it performs the processing of step S218 and step S220 again, and makes the judgment of step S222. If it determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, it returns to the judgment of step S216 again. Each time the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated until the setting key is turned OFF, the setting value is updated by adding one value each time it is operated and displayed on the setting display 1310g. If the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z was operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. In addition, even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and is then restored before step S222 determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, the setting value updated immediately before the power outage or momentary interruption is not stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, so it is discarded and the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S222 that the setting key has been turned OFF, it stores the updated setting value in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, if the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a specific area when the setting value is acquired in step S200, the setting value set in this specific area is updated, and this updated setting value is returned to the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and is then restored after the processing of step S224 is completed, the updated setting value when the enter key was operated before the power outage or momentary interruption occurred is stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S224, the main control MPU stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g, thereby hiding the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit the setting of the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM to be changed or a confirmation display is to be made. When the setting value is changed or a confirmation display is to be made, the flag is set to a value of 1, and when the setting value is changed or a confirmation display is to be made, the flag is set to a value of 0. In the process of step S232, by setting the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0, it is not permitted to change or confirm the setting value from this point on.

Following step S232, the main control MPU judges whether the setting value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that judged in step S208, and as described above, in this embodiment, it is preset to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the judgment of step S233, the main control MPU judges whether the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM in step S224 is any value within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6, in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is not an abnormal value, and uses the setting value as is when it is judged to be within the normal range.

When the main control MPU determines in step S233 that the range is normal, it performs serial communication initial setting (step S234), then creates a setting change command and sets the transmission information (step S236), then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main-circuit serial data (step S238), and ends this routine. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same processing as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 119, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 120. Here, in the serial communication initialization in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238, which is performed before the command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 119. This is to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command that informs the changed setting value and completion of setting value storage. When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S233 that the value is not within the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. This infinite loop causes the state in which the error display process has ended to be maintained, making it impossible to play the game, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's built-in RAM, or if it is determined that the main control's power-off process did not end normally when the power was cut off, it displays an error message to that effect, saying that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control's built-in RAM (or that they cannot be trusted). In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

[8-5. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This setting value confirmation display process is carried out in step S28 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the setting value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current setting value, as shown in FIG. 122 (step S350). Here, the main control MPU acquires the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S350, the main control MPU judges whether the setting value acquired in step S350 is within the normal range (step S352). The "normal range" is the same as that in step S208 and step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 137, and as described above, in this embodiment, it is preset to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the judgment of step S357, the main control MPU judges whether the setting value acquired in step S350 (i.e., the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM) is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6, in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is not abnormal, and uses the setting value as is when it is judged to be within the normal range.

If the main control MPU determines in step S352 that the setting value acquired in step S350 is within the normal range, it outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S354).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S352 that the value is not within the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S356) and enters an infinite loop. This infinite loop causes the state in which the error display process has ended to be maintained, making it impossible to play the game at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's built-in RAM, or if it is determined that the main control's power-off process did not end normally when the power was cut off, it displays an error message to that effect, saying that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control's built-in RAM (or that they cannot be trusted). In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

Following step S354, the main control MPU judges whether the setting key has been turned OFF (step S358). In this judgment, the main control MPU judges whether the setting key has been turned OFF by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, the main control MPU judges that the setting key has been turned OFF, whereas when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, the main control MPU judges that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

If the main control MPU determines in step S358 that the setting key has not been turned OFF, it returns to the determination in step S358 and repeats the determination in step S358 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S358 that the setting key has been turned OFF, it stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S350 on the setting display 1310g, and makes the acquired setting value invisible on the setting display 1310g (step S360).

Following step S360, the main control MPU sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S361). As described above, this setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM to be changed or a confirmation display is to be made. When the setting value is changed or a confirmation display is to be made, the flag is set to a value of 1, and when the setting value is changed or a confirmation display is to be made, the flag is set to a value of 0. In the process of step S232, by setting the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0, it is not permitted to change or confirm the setting value from this point on.

Following step S361, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S362), then creates a setting value confirmation display command to set transmission information (step S364), then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing to transmit the transmission information (setting value confirmation display command) set in step S364 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main-circuit serial data (step S366), and ends this routine. The serial communication initial setting in step S362 is the same processing as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 119, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S366 is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 120. Here, in the serial communication initialization in step S362, the serial communication initialization in step S44 is preceded by the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S366, in which the transmission information (setting value confirmation display command) set in step S364 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This is to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value confirmation has been completed by the setting value confirmation display command, before the command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 119. Note that the setting value confirmation display command is a command that informs the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has been completed (i.e., that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been confirmed).

[8-6. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 118, a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 118 (a process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in Fig. 121), and a process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 118 (a process performed in step S356 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in Fig. 122).

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the launch permission signal as shown in FIG. 123 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal conveys permission to launch the game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, it can convey that the launch is permitted, whereas when the logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it can convey that the launch is stopped (not permitted).

When the error display processing, which is this routine, is started as processing performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118, as one of the processing performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118 (specifically, processing performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 121), or as processing performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118 (specifically, processing performed in step S356 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 122), the main control MPU is unable to perform the interrupt permission setting of step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 119, and therefore is unable to perform the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 120, and is unable to perform the launch permission signal setting processing of step S113 in the same processing. The launch permission signal is output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU via a main control output circuit with a reset function to the launch control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633, so when power is restored, the main control output circuit with a reset function is reset, and its logic becomes launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inversion of the launch permission logic.

Therefore, when the error display processing, which is this routine, is started as a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118, one of the processes performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118 (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 121), or the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118 (specifically, the process performed in step S356 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 122), the main control MPU sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in step S400 to reliably prevent the game ball B from being launched even after the error display processing, which is this routine, is started after power is restored, and outputs it from the output terminal of the specified output port to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication is output to the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various displays of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs initial serial communication settings (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets the transmission information (step S408), and then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing to transmit the transmission information (error display command) set in step S406 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data (step S410), and ends this routine.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 121, the serial communication initial setting in step S362 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 122, and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 119, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 121, the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S366 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 122, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 120. When the error display processing routine, which is the process performed in step S33 in the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 118, the process performed in step S37 in the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 118 (the process performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 121), and the process performed in step S356 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 122, respectively, starts and ends, as described above, it enters an infinite loop, and due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing has ended is maintained, making it impossible to progress in the game at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410.

The error display command is a command that notifies the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable). When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it updates the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time of receipt) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

Furthermore, when the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command, it controls the display of a message image in white text on a blue background in the display area of the performance display device 1600, stating "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant.", and controls the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant" to be forcibly set to maximum volume and played from various speakers, regardless of the volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The process of notifying a RAM error using an error display command has the highest priority, and if the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command after receiving a command to notify another error, it performs the RAM error notification with top priority.

[9. Various control processes of the dispensing control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in Fig. 161 will be described with reference to Figs. 124 to 127. Fig. 124 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, Fig. 125 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process in Fig. 124, Fig. 126 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following Fig. 125, and Fig. 127 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

[9-1. Processing when power is turned on for the dispensing control unit]
First, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control unit power-on process is performed under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in Figures 124 to 126. When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the payout control MPU interrupt. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is performed with priority.

Following step S500, the dispensing control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, the various input ports and various output ports of the dispensing control MPU are set, etc.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer process 1 (step S506) and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, and in this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) are set as the waiting time (wait timer). The determination in step S508 is based on the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated (step S512). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error release switch), and here it functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase information stored in a specified area of the payout control built-in RAM. This determination is made by determining that the RAM clear is not to be performed and determining that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is HI, while determining that the RAM clear is to be performed and determining that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is LOW.

When the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state in which it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the payout control MPU (i.e., the payout control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time from when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S512, when the payout control MPU judges that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to erase payout information related to the payout of, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, the number of prize balls stocked PBS, the actual ball count PB, the number of drive commands DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area) stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs a setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting allows access to the payout control built-in RAM, and allows, for example, writing (storing) or reading payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer, for example, indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when terminating a subroutine and returning to this routine, and the stack pointer advances each time a stack is added. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to an initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are added to the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading the stacks in order from the last stacked to the first stacked.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is equal to 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 1 when the payout information is to be cleared and to 0 when the payout information is not to be cleared.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout control MPU determines not to erase the payout information, it calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (when power is off) described below (step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a value of 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value was stored and retained in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off processing described below, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally.

In the judgment of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a value of 1, that is, when it is judged that the payout control unit power failure processing has been completed normally, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built into the payout control MPU (i.e., the payout control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. This sets information to be used for various processes based on the payout information related to the payout, such as the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas (for example, the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, stored in the CR communication information storage area, and the mismatch counter reset judgment time stored in the time management information storage area). Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value of 0 (is a value of 1), that is, when the payout control MPU judges that the payout information should be erased, or in the judgment of step S526, when the payout control MPU judges that the checksum values do not match, or in the judgment of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value of 1 (is a value of 0), that is, when the payout control unit power off processing has not been completed normally, the payout control MPU clears the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S532). This clears the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S534). This setting is done by reading the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the dispensing control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is for setting the interrupt period when the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the dispensing control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S538). This setting causes the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S536, i.e., every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the dispensing control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting the values A, B, and C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When the dispensing control MPU determines in step S540 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, as described below, and is set to 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and to 0 when 2 ms have not elapsed.

In the judgment of step S542, if the dispensing control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to the value 0, that is, that 2 ms has not elapsed, the dispensing control MPU returns to step S540 and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S542, if the dispensing control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, that 2 ms have elapsed, it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals based on this information are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU. The output information storage area stores various information such as payout master ACK information indicating that various payout-related commands (prize ball commands and self-check commands) from the main control board 1310 have been received normally, drive information for controlling the drive of the payout motor 584, prize ball number information indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED indicator. Based on this output information, when various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been received normally, a payout master ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU, a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584, or the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 outputs a prize ball number information output signal to the external terminal board 558 every time the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls).

Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter is provided to determine whether or not to output prize ball number information. This prize ball number information output determination counter counts the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described below, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown in the figure for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by this payout motor 584, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the value is updated based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described below.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is read from this prize ball information storage area, and when the value of this read counter for determining the output of prize ball number information exceeds a value of 10 (i.e., when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls), a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated as the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM mentioned above), and an indication signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the dispensing control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the dispensing control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM. For example, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z (for example, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error clearing switch, it becomes an error clearing signal to inform the user that the error displayed on the error LED indicator has been cleared), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal from the CR unit, a main pay ACK signal from the main control board 1310 to inform the user that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission processing described later, and the like are each read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball-stuck determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball-stuck state has occurred due to the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the skip determination time, which is set when the payout blade 589 is not in a fixed position, the full determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, the ball of the game ball taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 due to the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574, and the ball-stuck state are determined as a determination condition when the ball-stuck state is determined by the ball-stuck state. In addition to managing the time of the ball run-out determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether the number of game balls received and dispensed by the ball receiving section 589b of the dispensing blade 589 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the time of the mismatch counter reset determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether to reset the mismatch counter INCC, which monitors whether inconsistent game balls are being repeatedly dispensed due to a mismatch between the number of game balls received and dispensed by the ball receiving section 589b of the dispensing blade 589 and the number of balls actually detected by the dispensing detection sensor 591, is managed. For example, when the ball jamming determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so that the ball jamming determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer update process is performed, and the ball jamming determination time is accurately measured by the subtraction result becoming a value of 0. Note that these various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit have been input. Based on the various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the working area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, information used for various processing is set based on payout information related to payout, such as payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in the various information storage area (for example, the number of prize balls stocked PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area).

With this process, for example, even if there is a momentary or power outage, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary or power outage, which are stored as payout backup information. As a result, even if there is a momentary or power outage while the payout device 580 is performing a payout operation of game balls and the payout operation cannot be continued due to the momentary or power outage, the payout operation can be continued when power is restored, so that the game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without excess or shortage. In other words, when the payout control MPU is exchanging various signals with the CR unit during CR communication processing while paying out game balls to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, if there is an instantaneous or power outage that cuts off the exchange of various signals with the CR unit and makes it impossible to continue paying out game balls, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous or power outage that are stored as payout backup information. This makes it possible to continue exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the instantaneous or power outage when power is restored, and to continue paying out game balls.

In this way, even if the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is interrupted or stopped, when power is restored it is restored to the state it was in immediately before the interruption or stoppage, and the various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit are not altered by the effects of the interruption or stoppage. This makes it possible to increase the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit.

In addition, the various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which was set in the process of setting the working area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, and if this read PRDY signal output setting information is set to a logic state of a PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out loaned balls is impossible, for example, the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit. Then, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, a determination is made as to whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH. If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, it is determined that the retry operation is operating abnormally, that is, it is determined that the payout operation of the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1. In the payout ball operation determination setting process, as a setting for outputting an error state to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal, which informs the CR unit that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is impossible when there is no communication with the CR unit, is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

In this way, in the CR communication process, at the next timer interrupt after power is restored, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area, and the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the payout device 580 for game balls was in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power outage, the state is restored when power is restored, so that at an extremely early stage after power is restored, a PRDY signal informing the CR unit that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, and it is possible to inform the CR unit that the payout operation of the payout device 580 for game balls is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting an unnecessary loaned ball request signal, BRDY, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

In the CR communication processing, in the port input processing of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, when its logic is HI, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as HI to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to inform the CR unit that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is possible, whereas when its logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as LOW to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to inform the CR unit that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is not possible. The logic state of the EXS signal, which indicates that a single dispensing operation has started or ended, is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and the CR connection signal, which indicates whether the dispensing control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected or not, is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and ball exhaustion check process (step S556). In this full tank and ball exhaustion check process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether the lower tray 202 described above is full of stored game balls based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, and whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above is a predetermined number or more based on a detection signal from the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574. For example, the determination of whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is performed by using a timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the current full tank and ball out check process and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full tank and ball out check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process of step S552 starts timing the above-mentioned full tank determination time. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes a value of 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time has arrived, it is determined whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and ball out check process. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the lower tray 202 is determined to be full of stored game balls, and full tank information that conveys this is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the status information storage area.

The determination of whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number also uses a timer interrupt period of 2 ms. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is ON in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is OFF in the previous full tank and out-of-ball check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process of step S552 starts timing the above-mentioned out-of-ball determination time. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time has arrived, it is determined whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is ON, ball out information informing the user that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is stored in the status information storage area, whereas when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is OFF, ball out information informing the user that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are received normally, payer ACK information informing that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the various commands are not received normally, connection abnormality information informing that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals) is stored in the status information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the dispensing control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the dispensing control internal RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, it sets the operation of prize balls, loan balls, ball removal, ball jamming, etc., judges the retry operation, and monitors the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls in stock).

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, and display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. For example, the above-mentioned ball out information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this ball out information, when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, corresponding display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands classified as state displays (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) are created based on this various information and sent to the main control board 1310. For example, when ball out information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a frame state 1 command is created and sent to the main control board 1310 based on this ball out information.

Following step S566, the dispensing control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is set to the values A, B and C in that order, clearing the watchdog timer.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539, where the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to a value A, and in step S540 determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, in step S542 it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms have elapsed, in step S544 it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0, in step S546 it sets the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to a value B, and in step S548 Port output processing is performed in step S550, port input processing is performed in step S552, timer update processing is performed in step S554, CR communication processing is performed in step S556, full tank and bulb out check processing is performed in step S558, command reception processing is performed in step S560, command analysis processing is performed in step S562, main operation setting processing is performed in step S564, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S566, command transmission processing is performed in step S568, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing in steps S539 to S568 is referred to as the "dispensing control unit main processing".

The processing contents of the payout control unit main processing vary depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. This causes the time required for processing by the payout control MPU to vary. Therefore, in the port output processing of step S548, the payout control MPU outputs a payout master ACK signal to the main control board 1310 as a priority, which indicates that various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. This ensures that the payout control MPU has enough processing time to perform other variable processing.

On the other hand, when the dispensing control MPU determines in step S540 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition (step S570). This setting disables the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process described below, prevents writing to the dispensing control built-in RAM, and protects the dispensing information described above from being overwritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game balls.

Following step S574, the dispensing control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clearing is performed by sequentially setting values A, B, and C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information in the working area of the payout control internal RAM, excluding the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the storage area for the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value, as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). This setting prohibits access to the payout control built-in RAM, making writing and reading impossible, and protects the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S582, the dispensing control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not sequentially set to values A, B, and C. This causes the dispensing control MPU to be reset, after which the dispensing control unit power-on processing is performed again. The processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as the "dispensing control unit power-off processing."

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when power is subsequently restored, the payout control unit performs power-on processing.

In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528 it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by doubly checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[9-2. Dispense control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This dispensing control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the dispensing control unit power-on process shown in Figures 124 to 126.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is started, the payout control MPU, as shown in FIG. 127, disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, it switches from the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above to an auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and is set to a value of 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and to a value of 0 when 2 ms have not elapsed.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This restoration switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the dispensing control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596) and ends this routine.

[10. Various control processes of peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 161 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 132. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. In this embodiment, the priority order of the interrupt process is set to the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process.

As described above, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 integrates the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip.

[10-1. Processing when peripheral control unit is powered on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 128. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on process is performed under the control of the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. 128. When this peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the peripheral control MPU performs a process of initializing itself, a process of determining whether it is a hot start or a cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU can be initialized in an extremely short time. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state where interrupt permission is set, and is in a state where it can receive various commands, such as commands related to the control of game performances and commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1, output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later.

Following step S1000, the peripheral control MPU performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current calendar information and current time information are set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. After performing this current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset.

Following step S1002, the peripheral control MPU sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed when a V blank signal that indicates that the peripheral control MPU is in a state where it can accept screen data (information that specifies the screen configuration) from the peripheral control MPU is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0. In addition, after the peripheral control MPU sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, it outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset.

Following step S1004, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1 (step S1006). If the peripheral control MPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not equal to the value 1 (is equal to the value 0), the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1006 and repeatedly determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1. By repeating such determinations, the peripheral control unit enters a standby state until it executes regular processing. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset.

When the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1, that is, when it determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is to be executed, it first sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 1 (step S1008). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed.

Following step S1008, the peripheral control MPU performs a 1 ms interrupt timer start process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start process, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started to execute the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described below, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN to count the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

Following step S1010, the peripheral control MPU performs performance operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this presentation operation unit monitoring process, in the presentation operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the presentation operation unit 300 monitors the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation unit 303 based on the RAM of the peripheral control MPU in which various information (for example, rotation (direction of rotation) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 and operation history information of the press operation unit 303 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the presentation operation unit 300, and the like) obtained based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the press detection sensor 381, and the lift detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as the "various sensors provided in the presentation operation unit 300") provided in the presentation operation unit 300 is set, and it is appropriately determined whether or not to reflect the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation state of the press operation unit 303 in the game presentation. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the performance operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the schedule data for light emission mode generation is rewritten according to the adjusted brightness. This allows the volume and brightness adjustments to be reflected in real time, and the performance will proceed with the adjusted volume and brightness.

The peripheral control MPU also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the performance operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp palette setting processing, the luminance of the LEDs used as direct light and the luminance of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of a luminance designation value, a normal palette value, and a special palette value. When the lamp palette setting processing is executed during the performance, and a player (or a staff member of the game hall) operates the performance operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a luminance designation value ranging from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance, the above-mentioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU can be updated to the set luminance designation value.

Here, we will briefly explain the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that make up the lamp palette setting table. The brightness designation value is a value that can set one of 32 brightness designation values ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off), to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness, and the normal palette value and special palette value, which will be described later, are each preset in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value. A player (or a staff member or other attendant at the game hall) can set one brightness designation value ranging from the 1st brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness, by operating the operable performance operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303).

For example, when a player (or a staff member or other attendant at an amusement hall) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise and the current brightness is set to a first brightness designated value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off), the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light are increased in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value, which is the maximum brightness, whereas when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 counterclockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light are decreased in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) from the 31st brightness designated value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness designated value. When the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select the desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) can set the brightness while the performance is in progress, and at this time, the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) operates the rotary operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the performance display device 1600 while the performance is in progress, a bar-shaped indicator indicating the positions from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value is displayed, so that the degree of the desired brightness of the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) can be visually shown as an image. In addition, in this embodiment, the 14th brightness designated value is set as the initial value (default).

Normal palette values are set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards installed on the game board side and various decorative boards installed on the door frame side that are irradiated as direct light. For normal palette values, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value, and the palette value corresponding to one brightness specification is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) within the range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value, which are the brightness specification values described above.

The minimum palette value (20%) is 20% of the maximum palette value (100%) that corresponds to one brightness specification in the 32-step range of the brightness specification values from 0th (zero) to 31st brightness specification values described above. Similarly, for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the values relative to the maximum palette value (100%) that corresponds to one brightness specification in the 32-step range of the brightness specification values from 0th (zero) to 31st brightness specification values described above.

In this embodiment, the normal palette value is the maximum palette value (100%) that is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, and the palette value (50%) is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for a specific decorative board (not shown) (an LED that is dazzling to the player) among the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in light guide plates that are irradiated as indirect light. Unlike normal palette values, the special palette value has only one level, and among the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the above-mentioned brightness designation values, the palette value corresponding to one brightness designation is set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve).

As described above, if the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is the same as that of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate will be darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value, not using the normal palette value set for the luminance of the LED used as direct light, and the first luminance designation value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designation value, which is the minimum luminance (light off), is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th luminance designation value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%) as the minimum luminance at which the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized, and the palette value corresponding to one luminance designation value within the range from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, when setting the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of a brightness specification value, a normal palette value, and a special palette value, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) according to the normal palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value operated by the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, while the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value operated by the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is too dazzling and operates the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set the brightness to a lower level, even if the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness designated value which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value which is the minimum brightness (lights off)) and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness designated value which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value which is the minimum brightness (lights off)) in conjunction with this, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness designated value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), so the lowest brightness at which the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light is set.

Furthermore, without having to individually set the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame for the LEDs used as direct light, the programmer designing the light emission patterns can simply set the light emission patterns in accordance with the flow of the presentation, watch the flow of the presentation based on the light emission patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame, and then set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative board that is too dazzling (or that a slightly darker brightness would produce a better presentation effect), and set the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for other decorative boards, thereby extremely easily changing the balance of the overall light emission patterns. In other words, even if a player (or a staff member of the game hall) operates the operable performance operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a single brightness designated value ranging from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value which is the maximum brightness, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the single brightness designated value is set for a specific decorative board, while the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to the single brightness designated value is set for other decorative boards, so that brightness adjustment can be made very easily without destroying the relationship between the light emission modes (bright or dark) that have been set.

Furthermore, although it is more difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate compared to direct light, it is possible to set the brightness for LEDs used as indirect light using special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (i.e., independent of the normal palette values). As a result, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light is managed by the special palette values, while the brightness of LEDs used as direct light is managed by the normal palette values, making it easy to adjust the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of LEDs used as direct light.

Following step S1014, the peripheral control MPU performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the peripheral control MPU in the display data creation processing described later, and outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600. Note that in the display data output processing, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control MPU, the output of the generated one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data is canceled. This prevents delays in processing time, but although so-called frame drops occur, it is a mechanism that allows priority to be given to performance sounds such as music and sound effects that match various performances from various speakers by the sound data output processing described later.

Following step S1016, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the sound source of the peripheral control MPU reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the peripheral control MPU in the sound data creation processing described below, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channel. As a result, music, sound effects, and other sounds that match the various performances are played from the various speakers.

Following step S1018, the peripheral control MPU performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which light emission data, from the first light emission data, is to be output among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission modes.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source of the peripheral control MPU among the sound command data that indicates sound data for musical effects, sound effects, and other sound effects, and sound data for alerts and announcements, arranged in chronological order to constitute the sound generation schedule data.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which drive data from the first drive data is to be output among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data. The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described below. In this motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated every time its own process is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so even if for some reason the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process changes from the drive data it was originally supposed to point to to other drive data, it is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process to point to the drive data it was originally supposed to point to.

Following step S1020, the peripheral control MPU performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described below, and the received various commands are analyzed, and the random numbers used for various settings of the performance (for example, random numbers used for performances related to reserved read-ahead) are updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and in this received command analysis process, the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are analyzed. Based on the analyzed various commands, the peripheral control MPU reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

The peripheral control MPU also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LEDs used as direct light and the luminance of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the above-mentioned luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. The peripheral control MPU analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, and based on the analyzed various commands, reads (extracts) schedule data for generating light emission modes from the peripheral control ROM, executes the lamp palette setting process, and when a player (or a staff member of the game hall or other attendant) operates the performance operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a luminance designation value ranging from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value that is the maximum luminance, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated to the set luminance designation value and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

The peripheral control MPU also analyzes whether the command received from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command to instruct the start of a start port winning presentation, a normal pattern memory command to identify the number of reserved normal patterns (0 to 4), a variable pattern command to instruct the start of a variable presentation such as the variable display of decorative patterns on the presentation display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special patterns, a pattern memory command output when the start reserved number changes, or a large prize port 1 count display command output each time a game ball is received by the large prize port 2005, and recognizes the current game state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and the received command analysis processing analyzes the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The various commands include various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to jackpots, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, and various commands classified as other. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to notices, etc. based on the received command, and reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and schedule data for electrical drive source, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the lottery result and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to execute a performance based on the lottery results.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the performance display control unit 1511, etc. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating the light emission mode of various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating performance sounds such as music and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating the drive mode of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that specifies the configuration of the screen in chronological order, and specifies the order of the screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data that specifies the light emission mode of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and specifies the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data specifies an output channel number for indicating which of the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU to use, and a track number for indicating which of the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in chronological order, and specifies the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the peripheral control MPU performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, and the schedule data for the electrical drive source, which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications, are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In addition, in the warning process, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and when that abnormality is resolved, it automatically transitions to the remaining abnormality notification. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that a certain abnormality has occurred because another abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality but before the abnormality has been resolved.

Following step S1024, the peripheral control MPU performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are updated. This RTC acquisition information update process updates the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and updates the year, month, and date, which are the calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, based on this updated time information.

Following step S1026, the peripheral control MPU performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and output to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU.

When the VDP of the peripheral control MPU receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU, it reads image data from the SDRAM based on the received screen data and generates one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame's worth) in the built-in VRAM to be drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600.

Following step S1030, the peripheral control MPU performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source of the peripheral control MPU reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs steady-state processing), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is identified based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. The peripheral control MPU controls the sound source of the peripheral control MPU so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the sound data is output to various speakers from the output channel set in this sound data creation process. This allows sounds such as music and sound effects that match the various performances to be played from the various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and then converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, with the volume set to increase from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control MPU is controlled to the volume set at board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from various speakers. In this way, music and sound effects are played from various speakers by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data. In addition to the sound data for music, sound effects, and other sound effects and the sub-volume value for adjusting their volume, the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU also incorporate sound data for notification sounds to alert parlor staff and the like of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 and the sub-volume value for adjusting their volume.

Specifically, for the sound effects, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume control switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value, without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume control switch. The sub-volume value of the sound effects can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the sound effects operation unit 300, except for a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative pattern).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, except for a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative pattern), By operating the rotation operation unit 302 and pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is converted into seven levels of board volume values from 0 to 6, and by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch depending on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the board volume value is increased or decreased to set the board volume, and the sub-volume value of the performance sound can be adjusted.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU combine the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU with a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used, and amplify the volume of this combined effect sound up to the master volume value that is the volume that will actually be played from the various speakers, and serialize this amplified effect sound to output it as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized sound is at its maximum volume, it is amplified up to the master volume value so that the volume coming from the various speakers becomes the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effects, the sound data of the sound effects incorporated into the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU is mixed with the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the sound effects incorporated into the track to be used, the volume of this mixed sound effects is amplified to the master volume value that actually becomes the volume that is played from the various speakers, and this amplified sound effects is serialized and output as audio data. For the alarm sounds, the sound data of the alarm sounds incorporated into the track to be used is mixed with the maximum volume that is not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the alarm sounds incorporated into the track to be used, and the volume of this mixed alarm sounds is amplified to the master volume value that actually becomes the volume that is played from the various speakers, and this amplified alarm sounds is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, when the effect sound is being played from the various speakers, the control of playing the notification sound to notify the hall staff of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 will be briefly explained. First, the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that is actually played from the various speakers, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, the only sound that actually plays from the various speakers is the notification sound at maximum volume. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it is not played from the various speakers, but the effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation described above.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the various speakers for a predetermined period (e.g., 90 seconds), and when this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the performance sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that was previously forcibly set to mute is reset to the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch as the sub-volume value (at this time, if the volume of the performance sound has been adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted performance sound), and is played from the various speakers.

In this way, when the sound effects are being played from the various speakers and an alarm sound is played to notify the hall staff of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the sound effects is muted and the alarm sound is played from the various speakers. However, since this muted sound effects progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alarm sound stops being played from the various speakers after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sound effects do not resume from the point at which the alarm sound began, but rather resume from the point at which it progressed according to the sound generation schedule data up until the point at which the predetermined period of time had elapsed since the alarm sound began.

Also, the notification sounds and announcement sounds are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the peripheral control MPU can control the sound source of the peripheral control MPU by a program to adjust the volume from mute to maximum volume. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a staff member of the game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume low, the music and sound effects played from the various speakers will be low, but the notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is committing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is low, it is possible to prevent the staff member of the game hall from being unable to notice the malfunction or the player's fraudulent act due to the notification sound.

Following step S1032, the peripheral control MPU performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied and backed up in a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied and backed up in a backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM.

Following step S1034, the peripheral control MPU performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset.

Following step S1036, the peripheral control MPU sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0 as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004, sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 to initialize it, and repeats the judgment of step S1006 until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below. In other words, in step S1006, it waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, and if it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1008 to S1038, and returns to step S1004 again. In this way, if it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1008 to S1038. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit regular processing."

In this peripheral control unit regular processing, the routine starts by setting the regular processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1008, indicating that the peripheral control unit regular processing is being executed, and then in step S1010, a 1 ms interrupt timer start process is performed, and then in step S1036, the routine is performed, and finally in step S1038, the routine is completed by setting the regular processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0, indicating that the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. The peripheral control unit regular processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later, which is executed when a V blank signal, which indicates that the peripheral control MPU is ready to accept screen data, is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU to the peripheral control MPU. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeated approximately every 33.3 ms.

[10-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is described, which is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU, which indicates that the peripheral control MPU is ready to accept screen data. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU judges whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0, as shown in Fig. 129 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 128 is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed.

In the judgment of step S1045, if the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, if the peripheral control MPU judges that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, it ends this routine. On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1045, if the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the peripheral control MPU sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 1 (step S1050) and ends this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, and is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is equal to 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, in step S1050, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1. This is because, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, if a V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed as determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 128, and the currently executing peripheral control unit steady-state processing is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is started from the beginning. In order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 128 is turned on. In step S1008 of the power-on process (peripheral control unit steady-state process), the steady-state process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state process is being executed, and in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady-state process) of FIG. 128, the steady-state process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state process has been completed. In other words, this is a procedure for when the peripheral control unit steady-state process cannot be completed by the time the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, resulting in a so-called processing lag.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed within the time of about 33.3 ms and the processing is delayed, the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 128 will result in a standby state until the next V blank signal is input. In other words, the time to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed will be about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. 128, is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit regular processing, but if there is a peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times, not 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit regular processing is delayed, the consistency between the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's normal processing slows down, the progress of the presentation can be reliably maintained.

[10-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing will be described, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 128. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU judges whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times (step S1100), as shown in Fig. 130. As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 128 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed every approximately 33.3 ms, so after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, and the second, ..., and 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts occur in sequence.

In the judgment of step S1100, when the peripheral control MPU judges that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times, that is, when it judges that the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has started, it ends this routine as it is. In the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is set to have a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing as the priority of the interrupt processing, but the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, in the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the V blank signal is generated and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 times, it adds (increments) the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, step S1102. By adding the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 128, and the number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, has been executed, increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motor, solenoid, and other electric drive sources are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is performed. As a result, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the peripheral control MPU (for example, the electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and the electric drive sources provided in various performance units provided on the game board 5) are driven according to the electric drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the peripheral control MPU performs movable object information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition processing, history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (e.g., original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created by determining whether or not detection signals have been input from the various sensors provided in the various presentation units provided on the game board 5, and set this in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control MPU determines the movable positions by setting the original positions (standby positions) of the various movable objects provided in the various presentation units provided on the game board 5 and acquiring the movable positions.

Following step S1106, the peripheral control MPU performs a performance operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals are input from various sensors provided in the performance operation unit 300, history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) is created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. From the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be obtained. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the performance operation unit 301, it is possible to adjust the volume of the performance sounds output from the various speakers and adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted in multiple numbers on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the peripheral control MPU performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM. Note that in this embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU and the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are set to different areas, and the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM and the regular processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set to different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, various processing related to the performance in steps S1104 to S1108 is executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1 ms. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 128, various processing related to the performance in steps S1014 to S1032 is executed as the performance progresses within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as is. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing by the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

As mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the LCD size of the performance display device 1600, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU is implemented. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly, the time lag caused by the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt.

[10-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310. When the peripheral control MPU starts transmitting various commands as serial data from the main control board 1310, this triggers the peripheral control MPU to capture 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main serial data into a reception buffer at the serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU, and when this capture is completed, this triggers an interrupt to be generated and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is performed. One packet of the main serial data is composed of 3 bytes, with the status assigned to the first byte, the mode assigned to the second byte, and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and calculating their sum to the third byte.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200), as shown in FIG. 131. This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the judgment of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, when it is judged that it is within the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU takes in the 1 byte of information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU (step S1202) and adds (increments) the value of the reception counter SRXC by 1, step S1204. This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times information has been taken out from the reception buffer, and takes a value of 1 when the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, takes a value of 2 when the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, and takes a value of 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is equal to the value 3, i.e., whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, it is determined whether the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

When the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1206 that the reception counter SRXC is not equal to the value 3, that is, that the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, has not yet been retrieved from the reception buffer, followed by the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, in that order, it sets a 1-byte reception period timer (step S1208) and ends this routine. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period is set in which the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1206 that the receive counter SRXC is equal to the value 3, that is, that the peripheral control MPU has retrieved from the receive buffer the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, in that order, it sets the receive counter SRXC to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and calculates the sum value (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which were already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, are treated as numerical values, and their sum (sum value) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main loop serial data from the main control board 1310, so it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 receives game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they discharge static electricity and generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is in an environment where it is subject to noise.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the peripheral control MPU to determine whether the main serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to main serial data that is different from the normal data.

When the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, it stores the status assigned to the first byte of the received main loop serial data and the mode assigned to the second byte of the main loop serial data in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU (step S1216), and ends this routine.

On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1200 that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, that the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded, or if the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, the routine ends.

[10-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process will be described, which is executed when a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in Fig. 132, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1302). When the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1302 that a power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1302, when the peripheral control MPU judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it judges whether 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this judgment, it judges whether the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. In the judgment of step S1304, when 2 microseconds have not passed, the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1302 and judges whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If it judges that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine, but if it judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it judges again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in the judgment of step S1304, it judges whether a power outage warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, was started.

In the judgment of step S1304, when the peripheral control MPU judges that the power outage warning signal has been input continuously for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, was started, it performs power saving processing (step S1306). In this power saving processing, the backlight of the performance display device 1600 is turned off, excitation to the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, various LEDs are turned off, etc. are sequentially executed to reduce the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, thereby ensuring stable operation for a period of 20 milliseconds during which the peripheral control MPU can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the peripheral control MPU performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands currently being sent by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that it can receive the command being sent. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

Following step S1308, the peripheral control MPU performs a backup process for the command (step S1310). In this backup process, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is copied and backed up in a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

Following step S1310, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). If the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1312 and determines whether the power outage warning signal has been input. In other words, the peripheral control MPU continues to determine indefinitely whether the power outage warning signal has been input. By continuing to determine indefinitely in this manner, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it is no longer able to output a clear signal to the external WDT, and the peripheral control MPU is reset. On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has been input, the peripheral control MPU performs a WDT clear process in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 128 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power outage warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314 so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset just before the power outage state occurs. On the other hand, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period exceeding 2 microseconds, and the determination of step S1302 is passed, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process of step S1314 is not executed so that the peripheral control MPU is reset, so that it is possible to respond to such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[11. Control process of main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. Fig. 133 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric role control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in the various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 133, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes a first start gate passing process, such as obtaining a first special random number of the first special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM (step S2032), on the condition that the detection signal from the first start gate sensor 2101 is in the ON state (a ball has entered the first start gate 2002) (step S2031). Also, on the condition that the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 2402 is in the ON state (a ball has entered the second start gate 2004) (step S2033), the main control MPU executes a second start gate passing process, such as obtaining a second special random number of the second special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM (step S2034).

Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot execution flag indicating that control is being performed in the jackpot game state is set (step S2035), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, a jackpot control process (step S2039) is executed to control the jackpot game state. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stops is a mode suggesting "15R jackpot A", the large prize winning port 2005 is opened and closed according to the 15R jackpot game state A, the distribution piece 2415 that distributes the game ball B received in the large prize winning port 2005 to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 is driven and controlled, and a process is executed to set the game ball B to the effective state in the 15th round when it is possible to distribute it to the second receiving port 2008. In addition, when a state indicating a "15R jackpot B" occurs, the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to open and close according to the 15R jackpot game state B, the distribution piece 2415 that distributes the game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005 to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008 is driven and controlled, and a process is executed to set the effective state to the 15th round when the game ball B can be distributed to the second receiving opening 2008.

Here, the "valid state" and the "invalid state" will be explained. First, in this embodiment, there is an "valid state" as the state when the game ball B is received by the second receiving opening 2008. Here, the "valid state" is a state in which the game ball B is received by the second receiving opening 2008 in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second receiving opening 2008, and thus the game is allowed (enabled) to be controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, by receiving the game ball B by the second receiving opening 2008 in the "valid state", the game is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, in this embodiment, there is an "invalid state" different from the "valid state" as a state in which the game ball B is not received by the second receiving opening 2008. Here, the "invalid state" is a state in which the game ball B is not received by the second receiving port 2008 in principle, such as the 1st to 14th rounds in which the game ball B is distributed to the first receiving port 2007, and even if the game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008, it is not permitted (invalidated) to control the game ball B to a high probability state after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, even if the game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008 in the "invalid state", it is not controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big win game state. Also, the "invalid state" is a period during which it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008, so that when the game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008 due to an abnormality such as fraud, information regarding the occurrence of such an abnormality can be notified to the hall management side. In this embodiment, the "valid state" is set in a predetermined round (15th round) in which game ball B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008, and whenever game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008, the state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. Also, the "invalid state" is set in the predetermined rounds (1st to 14th rounds) in which game ball B is not distributed to the second receiving port 2008, but it may be set to the "valid state". Even if the "valid state" is set in all rounds during the jackpot game state, game ball B will not be received by the second receiving port 2008 in the 1st to 14th rounds in principle, so whether or not game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round in which the "valid state" is set is important, just as in the case of setting the "invalid state" in the 1st to 14th rounds.

In addition, in the jackpot control process (step S2041), after controlling the opening of the large prize opening 2005, each of the set processes of the high probability flag, the time-saving flag, and the time-saving count counter is executed. The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state. During the execution of a jackpot game state based on a jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B), if the game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008 among the 1st to 15th rounds in which the large prize opening 2005 is opened, the high probability flag is set because the game state is controlled to a high probability state (high probability time-saving state) after the end of the jackpot game state, but if the game ball B is not received by the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, the game state is not controlled to a high probability state (high probability time-saving state) after the end of the jackpot game state, so the high probability flag is not set. If the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag will be reset the next time a jackpot occurs or when the time-saving counter reaches "0", either by the first special symbol stopping process shown in FIG. 144 (described below) or the second special symbol stopping process (not shown).

The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the game is in the time-saving state, and is set when the jackpot game state based on a jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B) that controls the game state to the time-saving state (high probability time-saving state, low probability time-saving state) ends after the jackpot game state ends. The time-saving flag is reset when the next jackpot occurs, or when the counter value of the time-saving count counter becomes "0", by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown.

The time-saving counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) will continue as the number of times the time-saving state will continue. When the jackpot game state based on a jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B) that controls the time-saving state (high probability time-saving state, low probability time-saving state) ends after the jackpot game state ends, the number of times the time-saving state will continue is set. The time-saving counter counts down each time the variable display of the special symbols is executed until the counter value becomes "0". However, if the next jackpot occurs before the counter value becomes "0", it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown (the counter value is returned to "0").

Furthermore, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, a first special pattern process including a lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops is executed (step S2037) on the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area is "0" (step S2036), and a second special pattern process including a lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops is executed (step S2038) on the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area is not "0" (step S2036). Thus, in this example, it is configured so that when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special pattern is executed preferentially.

Figure 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S2032).

Now, assuming that in the processing of step S2031, the first start hole sensor 2101 is in the ON state and it is determined that game ball B has entered the first start hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 134, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as processing of step S2041.

Then, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area, from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the first reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S2042). If it is determined in the processing of this step S2042 that the first reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S2043 to S2045 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into a reserved state. That is, first, as the processing of the above step S2043, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S2044, each random number obtained in the above step S2041 is stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter in the memory area of the above main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a performance pre-determination process to determine, based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first pattern random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S2041, whether the display result of the variable display of the first special pattern is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach performance as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600, the type of mode (type of variable pattern) of the game performance to be executed, before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S2045), and then terminates the processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of step S2042 that the first reserved memory number is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S2043 to S2045, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved.

In addition, when the first reserved memory number changes based on game ball B entering the first starting hole 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the first reserved memory number, and a command indicating the first reserved memory number (first reserved number designation command 0-4) is set in the above-mentioned storage process (step S20) and sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to display the first reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600 based on receiving the first reserved number designation command 0-4.

Figure 135 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned performance pre-determination process (step S2045). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the performance pre-determination process, it compares the random numbers acquired in the above-mentioned step S2041, specifically the first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, and variable random number, with a pre-determination table (not shown) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached, and if so, the type of jackpot, and if not, whether or not a reach performance will be executed as the game performance executed by the performance display device 1600, and the type of game performance to be executed (step S2061).

Then, a pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information (whether or not a jackpot will be reached, and if so, the type of jackpot; if not, whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and the type of game effect to be executed, etc.), the type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and the reserved memory number stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (the value of the reserved number counter). For example, in the effect pre-determination process for the first special symbol executed in step S2045 of the first start port passing process, a first special symbol pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information, the fact that the first special random number has been obtained, and the first reserved memory number (the value of the first special reserved number counter) (step S2062).

Then, in the special pattern command control process (step S16), a pre-determination command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp pre-determination information such as the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the first start port 2002 where the start winning occurred, whether the display result of the special pattern variable display based on the start winning that occurred is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a jackpot, and the type of game effect to be executed before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning.

When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reserved memory area that stores pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the first special pattern.

The first reserved memory area has 1 to 4 memory areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command in order starting from the first (earliest) memory area. When the pre-determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area, if the peripheral control MPU receives a pre-determination command, the notified pre-determination information is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area, and when the peripheral control MPU receives a first variation pattern command notifying the start of the variable display of the first special pattern, the pre-determination information stored in the first memory area of the first reserved memory area is discarded according to the received first variation pattern command, and the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area is moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area (the pre-determination information stored in the reserved memory area is shifted). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special pattern is stored in a manner that allows the order in which the reservation of the start of the variable display occurred to be specified, and is discarded in order starting from the earliest pre-determination information.

In this way, when the variable display control is put on hold, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (on hold), the jackpot expectancy (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, such as when the on-hold display is newly output or when the on-hold display is shifted in response to the on-hold consumption.

Figure 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S2034).

Now, assuming that in the processing of step S2033, the second start hole sensor 2402 is in the ON state and it is determined that game ball B has entered the second start hole 2004, as shown in FIG. 136, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as processing of step S2051.

Then, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the second reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S2052). If it is determined in the processing of this step S2052 that the second reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S2053 to S2054 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into a reserved state. That is, first, as the processing of the above step S2053, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S2054, each random number obtained in the above step S2051 is stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the memory area of the above main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of step S2052 that the second reserved memory count is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S2053 to S2054, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly placed on hold.

In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on game ball B entering the second starting hole 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the second reserved memory number, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number (second reserved number designation command 0-1) is set in the above-mentioned storage process (step S20) and sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to display the second reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600 based on receiving the second reserved number designation command 0-4.

Figure 137 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S2037). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special electric device control process and the second special symbol process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric device control process are similar program modules, and only the random numbers and tables used for judgment are different. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special electric device control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed depending on the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special symbol normal process (step S2080) in which a first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the read first special random number.
2. A first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081) in which a process of determining the display mode when the first special symbol's variable control is stopped is performed based on the result of a lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped.
3. A first variation pattern setting process (step S2082) in which a lottery process is performed for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number and the variation mode of the performance display executed in response to the special symbol on the performance display device 1600.
4. A first special symbol variation process (step S2083) in which the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 waits until the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped.
5. A first special symbol stop process (step S2084) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so that the mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400.

The first special symbol process flag is manipulated in the processing of step S40 described above (see FIG. 118) to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S2080) should be performed.

Figure 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of the first special pattern (step S2080).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 138, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first determines whether there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a reserved state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter as the processing of step S2101. If it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a reserved state, then, as the processing of step S2102, the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (e.g., first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU is read from the same RAM. Next, in the processing of steps S2103 and S2104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the random numbers (first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the first special pattern reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU, are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start winning are stored in the first (earliest) memory area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n=1 to 3) memory area, and when the start condition for variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the reservation of variable display control of the first special symbol occurred to be stored in a specific order, and the reservation of variable display control is released in order starting from the earliest reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Then, in step S2105, a jackpot determination process is performed, which is a lottery process for determining whether or not the jackpot will be won, based on the first special random number of the first special symbol that has been read out. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S2106) so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081), this process ends.

Figure 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S2105).

If the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S2111), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects the high probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 140 (A) (step S2112), and if the current game state is a low probability state (step S2111), it selects the low probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 140 (A) (step S2113), and compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special pattern normal processing (step S2114).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 140(A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and includes a low-probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is low probability (normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state) and time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state)), and a high-probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is high probability (high-probability time-saving state). In the low-probability jackpot determination table, the first special random number is associated with the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot with a jackpot probability of 1/319 when the set value is 1, 1/309 when the set value is 2, 1/299 when the set value is 3, 1/289 when the set value is 4, 1/279 when the set value is 5, and 1/269 when the set value is 6, and other first special random numbers are associated with the miss determination value indicating a miss. In addition, in the second special pattern process executed in step S2038 of the special pattern and special electric device control process, the low probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second special random number is associated with the second special random number so that, like the low probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first special random number, the second special random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot with a jackpot probability of 1/319 when the set value is 1, 1/309 when the set value is 2, 1/299 when the set value is 3, 1/289 when the set value is 4, 1/279 when the set value is 5, and 1/269 when the set value is 6, and other second special random numbers match the loss determination value indicating a loss.

In addition, in the high probability jackpot determination table, the first special random number (including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the low probability jackpot determination table) is associated with the jackpot determination value at a jackpot probability of 1/31.9 for setting value 1, 1/30.9 for setting value 2, 1/29.9 for setting value 3, 1/28.9 for setting value 4, 1/27.9 for setting value 5, and 1/26.9 for setting value 6, and the other first special random numbers are associated with the miss determination value. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability time-saving state), the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win is increased to 10 times that of the low probability state (normal state (low probability non-time-saving state) and time-saving state (low probability time-saving state)) for each setting value. In addition, in the second special symbol process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric device control process, in the high probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second special random number, the second special random numbers (including the same second special random numbers as the second special random numbers set in the low probability jackpot determination table) are associated with the jackpot determination value with a jackpot probability of 1/31.9 when the set value is 1, 1/30.9 when the set value is 2, 1/29.9 when the set value is 3, 1/28.9 when the set value is 4, 1/27.9 when the set value is 5, and 1/26.9 when the set value is 6, just like the high probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first special random number, and the other second special random numbers are associated with the miss determination value.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the variation is a jackpot as a result of comparing the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S2115), it sets a jackpot flag indicating that the variation has won a jackpot and ends the processing (step S2116). When the main control MPU determines that the variation is a miss as a result of comparing the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing, it compares the reach determination table (not shown) with the reach random number read in step S2102 (step S2117). Then, when the main control MPU determines that the variation is a reach miss as a result of comparing the reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S2102, it sets a reach flag indicating that the variation is a reach and ends the processing (step S2119).

Figure 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 141, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S2105). The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S2121).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S2121, the main control MPU compares the first pattern random number read in step S2102 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the pattern determination table shown in FIG. 140(B) (step S2122) to determine the type of jackpot, and determines the mode when the control of the first special pattern fluctuation stops (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (step S2123). On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S2121, the mode when the control of the first special pattern fluctuation stops is determined to be a losing pattern (step S2124).

As shown in FIG. 140(B), the pattern determination table stores pattern random numbers (first pattern random number, second pattern random number) associated with each judgment result (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the judgment result associated with the acquired pattern random number. Note that in the pattern determination table of this example, the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the first pattern random number is set to be different from the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the second pattern random number.

in particular,
1. The large prize opening 2005 is controlled to open and close in accordance with the 15R jackpot game state A, and is set to an effective state (a state in which game ball B is received by the second receiving opening 2008, thereby controlling the state to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state) when the large prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (an opening in which game ball B has difficulty entering, e.g., 0.5 seconds) and for a long time (an opening in which game ball B can (easily) enter, e.g., 20 seconds) in the 15th round, and during the effective state in the 15th round When the game ball B is received by the second receiving opening 2008, the game is controlled to a high probability time-saving state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 100 times after the end of the big win game state, whereas when the game ball B is not received by the second receiving opening 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, the game is controlled to a low probability time-saving state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 100 times after the end of the big win game state. 15R big win A
2. The large prize winning port 2005 is controlled to open and close in response to the 15R jackpot game state B. When the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a short time in the 15th round (an opening in which it is difficult for game ball B to enter, for example, 0.5 seconds), it is set to an effective state (a state in which game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008, and the state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state). When game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, a jackpot is set. a 15R jackpot B in which a high probability time-saving state is established until the varying display of special patterns (first special pattern and second special pattern) is executed 100 times after the game state ends, and a 15R jackpot B in which a low probability time-saving state is established until the varying display of special patterns (first special pattern and second special pattern) is executed 100 times after the jackpot game state ends if game ball B is not received by the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round.

In this example, in the 15R jackpot game state A, the operation schedule of the large prize opening 2005 in the 15th round is set to open the large prize opening 2005 for a short time (0.5 seconds), and open the large prize opening 2005 for a long time (20 seconds) after a predetermined time (4.5 seconds) has elapsed as an interval time within the round. Also, the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 in the 15th round is set to start the short-time opening (0.5 seconds) of the large prize opening 2005, start the short-time operation (0.2 seconds) of the distribution piece 2415, start the long-time operation (10 seconds) of the distribution piece 2415, and make the game ball B available to the second receiving port 2008 during the operation period of the distribution piece 2415. In addition, the state setting schedule for the second receiving opening 2008 in the 15th round is set to an effective state (a state in which the game ball B is received by the second receiving opening 2008, and the game is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state).

On the other hand, in the 15R jackpot game state B of this example, the operation schedule of the large prize winning port 2005 in the 15th round is set to open the large prize winning port 2005 for a short time (0.5 seconds). Also, the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 in the 15th round is set to start the short-time operation (0.2 seconds) of the distribution piece 2415 when the short-time opening (0.5 seconds) of the large prize winning port 2005 starts, and during the operation period of the distribution piece 2415, game ball B can be received by the second receiving port 2008. Also, the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round is set to an effective state (a state in which game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008 and the state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state).

As described above, both the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B are set to a valid state in the 15th round (a state in which game ball B is accepted by the second receiving port 2008, thereby controlling the state to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state), but in the 15R jackpot game state A, the large prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) when it is opened for the second time in the 15th round, so that it is extremely easy for game ball B to be accepted by the large prize opening 2005, and further, since the distribution piece 2415 is operated for a long time (10 seconds) during the period in which the large prize opening 2005 is open for a long time (20 seconds), it is extremely easy for game ball B accepted by the large prize opening 2005 to be allocated (accepted) by the second receiving port 2008. In this way, in the 15R jackpot game state A, the probability that the game ball B will be received by the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely high, so the probability of controlling to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state is also extremely high. On the other hand, in the 15R jackpot game state B, since the large prize winning port 2005 is only opened for a short time (0.5 seconds) in the 15th round, it is extremely difficult for the game ball B to be received by the large prize winning port 2005, and further, since the distribution piece 2415 is only operated for a short time (0.2 seconds) during the period when the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), it is extremely difficult for the game ball B received by the large prize winning port 2005 to be distributed (received) by the second receiving port 2008. In this way, in the 15R jackpot game state B, the probability that game ball B will be received by the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round, which is set to the valid state, is extremely low, so the probability of control to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends is also extremely low.

The operation schedule of the allocation piece 2415 has a single operation schedule that is set to activate the allocation piece 2415 for a short time (0.2 seconds) and then release the allocation piece 2415 for a long time (10 seconds) after a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) has elapsed, and this operation schedule of the allocation piece 2415 is started when the 15th round in the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B begins. In this way, by making the operation schedule of the allocation piece 2415 a single operation schedule, the amount of data related to the operation schedule of the allocation piece 2415 is minimized.

In the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B of this example, the operation schedule of the large prize winning port 2005 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds is set to open the large prize winning port 2005 for a long time (20 seconds). Also, the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds is set to not operate the distribution piece 2415, and during that period, game ball B is received by the first receiving port 2007 instead of the second receiving port 2008. Also, the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds is set to an invalid state (a state in which game ball B is not received by the second receiving port 2008 in principle, and control to a high probability state is not performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state). In this way, in both the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B, in the 1st to 14th rounds, there is no game played to see whether game ball B will be allocated (accepted) by the second receiving opening 2008 when the large prize winning opening 2005 opens, as in the 15th round, but rather, the game is played to see whether game ball B will be accepted when the large prize winning opening 2005 opens.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to a first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to a second special symbol are provided. The symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol is set to allocate judgment values differently compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratios of each jackpot are set to be different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), in the pattern determination table corresponding to the first special pattern, of the 15R jackpot A and 15R jackpot B, an allocation of 50 judgment values is set for the 15R jackpot A, which is relatively advantageous to the player (a jackpot in which the probability that game ball B will be accepted by the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round is high and the probability of being controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends), while an allocation of 50 judgment values is set for the 15R jackpot B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player (a jackpot in which the probability that game ball B will be accepted by the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round is low and the probability of being controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends). On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, 65 judgment values are set for the 15R jackpot A, which is relatively advantageous to the player, and 35 judgment values are set for the 15R jackpot B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. In this way, when the first special symbol side jackpot is hit, either the 15R jackpot A or the 15R jackpot B, which have different degrees of advantage to the player, is determined, so that attention can be paid to what type of jackpot is determined at the time of the first jackpot. In addition, in the time-saving state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, a game on the second special symbol side (a game that allows the game ball B to enter the second starting hole 2004) is played, but when the second special symbol side jackpot is hit, the 15R jackpot game A is determined with a higher probability than when the first special symbol side jackpot is hit, so attention can be paid to how much prize balls can be obtained during consecutive wins. Therefore, the gameplay changes depending on whether you get your first big win or a series of big wins, so the gameplay doesn't become monotonous.

In addition, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stopping pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the manner in which the first special pattern stops. Specifically, if a 15R jackpot A is determined, the 15R jackpot A pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern, and if a 15R jackpot B is determined, the 15R jackpot B pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern. Note that in the second special pattern stopping pattern setting process (not shown), if a 15R jackpot A is determined, the 15R jackpot A pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern.

After the determination process for the stop symbols has been performed in this way, in step S2125, a judgment result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results is set so that these lottery results (indicating the type of big win, reach miss, or miss (which may also indicate the type of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, in step S2126, the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S2082), and this process ends. The peripheral control MPU starts the variation display of the left, center, and right decorative symbols based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command, and controls the display of the performance display device 1600 so that the decorative symbols are displayed in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → center decorative symbol.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU determines the state (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600 when the fluctuation stops to be a 15R jackpot A pattern (a combination of the same decorative patterns) if it identifies a 15R jackpot A among the jackpots related to the first special pattern from the received determination result notification command, and determines the 15R jackpot B pattern (common to the 15R jackpot A pattern) if it identifies a 15R jackpot B, and controls the display of the determined stop pattern on the performance display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the reach performance). In this way, when the decorative pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600 stops changing to either the 15R jackpot A pattern or the 15R jackpot B pattern, it is possible to determine that a jackpot has occurred from the decorative pattern that has stopped, but because the same pattern is used for the 15R jackpot A pattern and the 15R jackpot B pattern, it is not possible to determine whether it is a 15R jackpot A or a 15R jackpot B.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU determines the state (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600 when the fluctuation stops to be a miss pattern with a reach (a combination of decorative patterns that are not the same, provided that the decorative patterns on the left and right are the same) if a reach miss is identified from the received judgment result notification command, and determines a miss pattern without a reach (a combination of decorative patterns that are not the same, provided that the decorative patterns on the left and right are not the same) if a miss is identified, and controls the display of the determined stopping pattern on the performance display device 1600 when the fluctuation time identified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game presentation).

Figure 142 is a flowchart showing the steps of the first variation pattern setting process (step S2082).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 142, if the jackpot flag is set (step S2141), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the jackpot according to the type of jackpot determined in step S2123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the current game state (step S2142); if the reach flag is set (step S2143), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the reach according to the current game state (step S2144); if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, if it is a normal miss (a miss where the reach performance is not executed), the variation pattern table at the time of the miss (not shown) is selected (step S2145).

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the variation random number read in step S2102 of the normal processing of the first special symbol to determine the variation pattern to be executed (step S2146), and a variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern is to be started, to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (step S2147). In addition, the main control MPU sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S2148). As a result, the performance control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variation time thus determined.

In this example, multiple types of variation pattern tables are provided for each judgment result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the pattern random number (first pattern random number, second pattern random number). In addition, multiple variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variable display control of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) is stored in a form associated with the variable random number, respectively, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table. Thus, the main control MPU compares the selected variation pattern table among multiple types of variation pattern tables according to the judgment result based on the special random number and the pattern random number with the variable random number read in step S2102 of the normal processing of the first special pattern, and obtains the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). As a result, a lottery process is performed for the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

In addition, in this example, the variable pattern table during a reach is set to determine the type of reach performance to be executed by comparing a judgment value indicating which reach performance to execute with a variable random number. For example, among the reach performances, the super reach performance has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal reach performance, and when the super reach performance is executed, the player's expectation of a jackpot game state increases.

In addition, when the control of the first special pattern change display is started, the next step S2149 is to update the first special pattern process flag so that the process transitions to the first special pattern change processing (step S2083), at which point this processing ends.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table when a loss occurs, the fluctuation time information of the special pattern, which is set to about 1 second during time-saving, is associated with the special pattern random numbers (first special pattern, second special pattern), while the fluctuation time information of the special pattern, which is set to about 12 seconds during non-time-saving, is associated with the special pattern random numbers (first special pattern, second special pattern), so that the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern is set. In other words, the fluctuation time information of the special pattern is set so that the time required for the fluctuation display control of the special pattern is extremely short for the fluctuation pattern selected during time-saving, compared to the fluctuation pattern selected during non-time-saving.

Figure 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change process (step S2083).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 143, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern (step S2082) is set as the process of step S2171. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery-selected fluctuation time has elapsed (step S2172), the process proceeds to step S2173. That is, in the process of step S2173, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S2084), this process ends.

Figure 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern stopping process (step S2084).

When the first special pattern process flag indicates that the first special pattern stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 144, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs display control to display the stop pattern determined in the first special pattern stop pattern setting process on the first special pattern display of the functional display unit 1400 as the process of step S2181, and sets a stop display command to instruct the performance display device 1600 to derive and display the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2182).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 judges whether the time-saving flag is set and the counter value of the time-saving counter in which the number of times the time-saving state continues is set is "0" (step S2183). If the counter value is not "0", the time-saving counter is counted down (step S2184), and then it is judged whether the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S2185). If the counter value is "0", the time-saving flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S2186). If the time-saving counter is judged to be "0" in the process of step S2183, or if the time-saving counter is judged to be not "0" in the process of step S2185, the process proceeds to step S2187 at that point.

When the jackpot flag is set (step S2187), a jackpot start command is set (step S2189) to indicate that the jackpot game state is to start, and the waiting time (period during which a display indicating that the jackpot game state is to start is displayed, etc.) until the jackpot game state is started (the jackpot round start command is set) is set in the interval timer (step S2190). Next, if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, if the time-saving flag is set, the time-saving flag is reset, and if the counter value of the time-saving counter is not "0", the counter value is reset (returned to "0"), and then a jackpot execution flag is set (step S2191) to indicate that the jackpot game state is being executed, and the first special symbol process flag is updated to be the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing (step S2192), at which point this processing ends.

The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). In step S2189, the jackpot start command (15R jackpot A start command, 15R jackpot B start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. As a result, the performance corresponding to the type of jackpot specified by the jackpot start command is executed by the performance display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, etc.

Figure 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S2039).

In step S2189, the waiting time until the big win game state starts is set in the interval timer. In the process of step S2401, after the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 145, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes the following processes in sequence: opening and closing the big win opening 2005, and setting the big win opening to a valid state in the 15th round (a state in which the big win game state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big win game state by receiving game ball B in the second receiving opening 2008) (step S2402); and driving and controlling the distribution piece 2415 so that the game ball B received in the big win opening 2005 in the 15th round can be distributed to the second receiving opening 2008, and monitoring whether or not the game ball B has been received in the second receiving opening 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round (step S2403).

Figure 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the large prize opening and closing process (step S2402).

Now, if it is determined in the processing of step S2411 that the large prize opening 2005 is in an open state, as shown in FIG. 146, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the open large prize opening 2005 to a closed state (step S2414) in accordance with the operation schedule of the large prize opening 2005 when a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds for a long time opening, 0.5 seconds for a short time opening) has elapsed since the large prize opening 2005 was in an open state (step S2412), or when the maximum number of game balls B (e.g., 9 balls) have entered the open large prize opening 2005 (step S2413). Then, if it is determined that the current round will end by controlling the jackpot opening 2005 to a closed state (step S2415), a jackpot round end command according to the type of jackpot and the current number of rounds is set as a command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2416), and the process proceeds to step S2428.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of step S2411 that the large prize opening 2005 is closed, as shown in FIG. 146, when it is time to open the large prize opening 2005 according to the operation schedule of the large prize opening 2005 (step S2417), if it is determined that a new round will be started by controlling the large prize opening 2005 to the open state (step S2418), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a large prize round start command according to the type of large prize and the new number of rounds as a command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2419). Then, if it is determined that it is time to set the valid state flag according to the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008, that is, when it is the start of the 15th round of the 1st to 15th rounds in which the large prize opening 2005 is opened (step S2420), the valid state flag is set (step S2421). If the valid state flag is set at the start of the 15th round in step S2420, the valid state flag must be reset at the end of the 15th round. Then, the closed large prize opening 2005 or the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to an open state (step S2422), and the process proceeds to step S2428. If it is determined that controlling the large prize opening 2005 to an open state will not result in the start of a new round (such as a second opening in the same round) (step S2418), or if it is determined that it is not the timing to set the valid state flag (if it is not the start of the 15th round) (step S2420), the closed large prize opening 2005 is controlled to an open state (step S2422), and the process proceeds to step S2428. This allows the performance according to the type of jackpot and the current round number instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command to be executed by the performance display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc.

The valid state flag is a flag indicating that the state is set to the valid state (a state in which the high probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game state due to game ball B being received by the second receiving opening 2008). In the 15th round among the 1st to 15th rounds in which the large prize winning opening 2005 is opened, the second receiving opening opening opening process (step S2403) described below drives and controls the distribution piece 2415 which distributes the game ball B received by the large prize winning opening 2005 to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008, thereby making it possible for the second receiving opening 2008 to receive the game ball B and setting it to the valid state.

Furthermore, if it is determined in the processing of step S2428 that game ball B has been received by the large prize opening 2005, then as shown in FIG. 146, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a large prize opening ball entry command as a command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2429), and ends this processing. As a result, when the large prize opening ball entry command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, a performance corresponding to the reception of game ball B by the large prize opening 2005 can be executed by the performance display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, etc.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of step S2417 that it is not the time to open the large prize opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 146, when all rounds have been completed by repeating the opening and closing of the large prize opening 2005 (step S2423), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the large prize execution flag (step S2424). Then, if it is determined that the second receiving entrance passing flag described later is set (step S2425), the high probability flag is set (step S2426), and the time-saving flag is set and the time-saving count counter is set to an initial value (e.g., 100 times) as the number of times the time-saving state continues (step S2427), at which point this process ends. If it is determined that the second receiving entrance passage flag is not set (step S2425), the high probability flag is not set, and the time-saving flag is set and the time-saving count counter is set to an initial value (e.g., 100 times) as the number of times the time-saving state continues (step S2427), at which point this processing ends. In this way, if it is determined that the second receiving entrance passage flag is set (game ball B was received by the second receiving entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round), the high probability flag and the time-saving flag are set, and control is performed to the high probability time-saving state, but if it is determined that the second receiving entrance passage flag is not set (game ball B was not received by the second receiving entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round), only the time-saving flag is set, and control is performed to the low probability time-saving state.

Figure 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second receiving entrance opening and closing process (step S2403).

Now, if it is determined in the processing of step S2431 that the second receiving opening 2008 is in an open state (a state in which game ball B is distributed to the second receiving opening 2008 side by the distribution piece 2415), then, as shown in FIG. 147, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the second receiving opening 2008 in an open state to a closed state (a state in which game ball B is distributed to the first receiving opening 2007 side by the distribution piece 2415) (step S2434) when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds for a long time opening, 0.2 seconds for a short time opening) has elapsed since the second receiving opening 2008 was in an open state (step S2432), or when the current round (the 15th round) is ended by controlling the large prize opening 2005 to a closed state (step S2433), according to the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415.

Furthermore, if it is determined in the processing of step S2431 that the second receiving opening 2008 is in a closed state, as shown in FIG. 147, when the timing to open the second receiving opening 2008 arrives (step S2435) in accordance with the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the second receiving opening 2008 from a closed state to an open state (step S2436).

Next, if it is determined in the process of step S2437 that the game ball B has been received by the second receiving port 2008 in the open state, as shown in FIG. 147, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the game ball B has been received by the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round while the valid state flag is set (step S2438). If it is determined that the game ball B has been received by the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round (step S2438), if the second receiving port passing flag indicating that the game ball B has been received by the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round is not set (step S2439), the second receiving port passing flag is set (step S2440), and the process is terminated when the second receiving port passing command is set as a command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2441). In this way, unless game ball B is received by the second receiving opening 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the second receiving opening passing flag is not set, and the high probability flag is not set in step S2426, so that the high probability state is not controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. Also, when the second receiving opening passing command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, a performance corresponding to the reception of game ball B by the second receiving opening 2008 can be executed by the performance display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, etc.

Figure 148 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric device control process (step S116).

Now, in the processing of step S2801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the ON state and that game ball B has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 148, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs gate section passing processing as the processing of step S2802, such as first obtaining the normal random number of the normal pattern from the random number counter and storing it in the normal pattern reserved memory area of the RAM.

Next, in the normal symbol and normal electric device control process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed depending on the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number (step S2803).
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S2804) in which a lottery process is performed on the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. A normal symbol variation process (step S2805) that waits until the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. A normal pattern stop process (step S2806) for stopping the variable display of the normal pattern so that the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the normal pattern determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the normal pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display device of the function display unit 1400.
5. When the result of the lottery process for the state when the variable control of the normal pattern is stopped indicates a state that suggests a "normal pattern hit", the second start opening door 2411 rotates to control the reception of the game ball B into the second start opening 2004. A normal electric role opening process (step S2807)

The normal symbol process flag is manipulated in the processing of step S40 described above (see FIG. 118) to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S2803) should be performed.

Figure 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate section passing process (step S2802).

Now, in the processing of step S2801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the ON state and that game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 149, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the normal random number and the normal variable random number from the random number counter as the processing of step S2811.

Then, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the normal reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, and judges whether the reserved number of normal symbols is the maximum value of "4" based on this counter value (step S2812). If it is determined in the processing of this step S2812 that the reserved number of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the processing of the following steps S2813 to S2814 is performed to newly put the variable display control of the normal symbols into a reserved state. That is, first, as the processing of the above step S2813, the above normal reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S2814, each random number obtained in the above step S2811 is stored in the normal reserved symbol memory area corresponding to the counter value of the above normal reserved number counter in the memory area of the RAM of the above main control MPU.

However, if it is determined in the processing of step S2812 that the number of reserved normal symbols is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly reserved. In other words, by not executing the processing of steps S2813 to S2814, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly placed on hold.

Figure 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of normal symbols (step S2803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 150, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first determines whether there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the reserved state based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter as the processing of step S2821. If it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the reserved state, then, as the processing of step S2822, the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the normal symbol (e.g., normal random number, normal variable random number) stored in the normal symbol reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU is read from the same RAM. Next, in steps S2823 and S2824, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and the random numbers (normal random numbers, normal pattern variable random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the normal pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the normal reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU, are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in response to the passage of game ball B through the gate unit 2003 are stored in the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area when game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, and when the start condition for variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control of the normal symbols was reserved is stored in a specific order, and the reservations of the variable display control are released in order starting from the first reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Next, if the current game state is a time-saving state (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state) (step S2826), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects a normal winning judgment table (not shown) during time-saving (step S2826), and if the current game state is a non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state) (step S2825), it selects a normal winning judgment table (not shown) during non-time-saving (step S2827), and compares the selected normal winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S2822 of the normal processing of the normal pattern (step S2828).

The normal winning judgment table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and includes a time-saving normal winning judgment table used when the game state is in time-saving (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state), and a non-time-saving normal winning judgment table used when the game state is not in time-saving (low probability non-time-saving state). In the time-saving normal winning judgment table, which is referenced for comparison with the normal random number, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so that all 251 types of normal random numbers match the normal winning judgment value indicating a normal winning, and do not match the normal losing judgment value indicating a normal losing. In this way, when the time-saving is in effect, when the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, a normal winning is always won, and the second starting gate 2411 rotates to allow the game ball B to be received by the second starting gate 2004.

In addition, in the normal winning judgment table during non-time-saving, which is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all of the 251 types of normal random numbers are associated with the normal winning judgment value, which indicates that a normal winning has occurred, and the normal random numbers are each associated with a normal losing judgment value, which indicates that a normal winning has occurred. In this way, during non-time-saving, even if game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, it will not win a normal winning, and therefore the second starting port door 2411 will not rotate to allow game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 judges that the normal symbol is a winning symbol as a result of comparing the selected normal symbol winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S2822 of the normal symbol normal processing, it sets a normal symbol winning flag indicating that the corresponding variation is a winning normal symbol (step S2830), and then determines the normal symbol winning symbol as the mode (stopping symbol of the normal symbol) when the normal symbol variation control is stopped (step S2831). On the other hand, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 judges that the normal symbol is a losing symbol as a mode (stopping symbol of the normal symbol) when the normal symbol variation control is stopped as a result of comparing the selected normal symbol winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S2822 of the normal symbol normal processing, it determines the normal symbol losing symbol as the mode (stopping symbol of the normal symbol) when the normal symbol variation control is stopped (step S2832). Then, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation time determination process (step S2804) (step S2833), this process ends.

In this example, in the control of the time-saving state, the winning probability of the normal pattern is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal pattern is always a winning one, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal pattern is shortened to an extremely short predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds). Then, when the lottery result of the normal pattern is a winning one, the second start hole 2004 is controlled in an open/close pattern to be closed in an open state for an extremely long predetermined time (e.g., 5.5 seconds). In other words, during the control of the time-saving state, the lottery result of the normal pattern is extremely likely to be a winning one, the time required for the variable display control of the normal pattern is constant and short, and the time of the second start hole 2004 in the open state is long, making it much easier to make the game ball B enter the second start hole 2004, and it is more efficient to make the game ball B enter the second start hole 2004 than the first start hole 2002. In addition, in the control of the non-time-saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result for the normal symbol is not always a winning one, so even if the second starting hole 2004 is aimed at, game ball B cannot enter the second starting hole 2004.

As described above, during the control of the non-time-saving state, even if the second starting hole 2004 is aimed at, the game ball B cannot enter the second starting hole 2004, so the game ball B must be shot (so-called "left shot") aiming at the left side of the center device 2500 so that the game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002. In addition, within the game area 5a on the left side of the center device 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front side of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, various movements are imparted to the game ball B and it flows down. Therefore, even if game ball B is shot into the left side of the center device 2500 aiming at the first starting hole 2002, it does not necessarily enter the first starting hole 2002. Game ball B that does not enter the first starting hole 2002 is discharged to the outside from the outlet 1008 located at the bottom end of the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, during the control of the time-saving state, it is more efficient to aim game ball B at the second start hole 2004 rather than the first start hole 2002, so game ball B must be shot (so-called "right shot") aiming at the right side of the center device 2500 so that game ball B will enter the second start hole 2004. In addition, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second start hole 2004 is opened, if game ball B is shot to the right side of the center device 2500 aiming at the second start hole 2004, game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 will enter the second start hole 2004 with an extremely high probability. For this reason, during control of the time-saving state, game ball B shot into the right side of the center device 2500 is almost never wasted (discharged to the outside from the outlet 1008), and game ball B enters the second start hole 2004 extremely efficiently compared to the first start hole 2002 during control of the non-time-saving state.

Furthermore, during control of the time-saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, when passing through the gate portion 2003, there is an extremely high probability that the lottery result for the ordinary pattern will be a winning one, the time required for controlling the variable display of the ordinary pattern is constant and short, and the second starting hole 2004 is open for a long time, etc., so that game ball B is likely to enter the second starting hole 2004, and further, when game ball B enters the second starting hole 2004, the time required for controlling the variable display of the special pattern is approximately 1 second, which is extremely short compared to the range of 10 to 120 seconds during control of the non-time-saving state, so that the variable display control of the special pattern (the reservation of the variable display control of the special pattern) can be completed in a short time. That is, when the time-saving state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state, a jackpot is entered again in a short time by shooting a game ball B into the right side of the center device 2500, aiming at the second start hole 2004, and the game state is entered again in a jackpot game, and the player can expect to win many game balls B. As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls B paid out when a game ball B enters the second start hole 2004 is set to one. Therefore, even if game balls B frequently enter the second start hole 2004, the player's interest can be increased while the burden on the game hall can be reduced.

[12. Behavior of Pachinko Machines When Powered On]
In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a function for changing the setting value and a function for displaying the confirmation of the setting value. Specifically, the setting value can be changed by executing the setting change process of step S37 described above, and the setting value can be displayed for confirmation by executing the setting value display process of step S28 described above. When changing the setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it is necessary to operate the power switch 630a and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 and the setting key switch 1311a, and when the setting value is displayed for confirmation, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it is necessary to operate the power switch 630a and the setting key switch 1311a without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has the functions of a RAM clear switch, a setting switching button, and an error release switch.

First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power is turned on will be described with reference to Figure 151. Figure 151 (A) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control built-in RAM is initialized when the power is turned on, Figure 151 (B) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the setting value is changed when the power is turned on, and Figure 151 (C) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when a confirmation display of the setting value is performed when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 151, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10), and then performs power outage clear processing (step S12). In this power outage clear processing, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. As described above, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power outage warning voltage after power is turned on and stabilizes, and in this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms).

At timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, which functions as a RAM clear switch, has been operated (step S14). In the determination of step S14, if the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S14, if the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S16B). Then, following step S16A or step S16B, it determines whether the main body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). In the judgment of step S18, when the main control MPU judges based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and judges based on the setting key ON signal that the setting key switch 1311a is set to setting key ON, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the judgment of step S18, when the main control MPU judges based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2 and/or judges based on the setting key ON signal that the setting key switch 1311a is not set to setting key ON, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20B). In other words, at the time of timing tx, it is determined whether the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated, and whether the main body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON, and these determination results are stored as operation information in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Note that since the period from timing t3 to timing tx is extremely short, the person who presses the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z must turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, and the person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a must turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 1311a.

After the operation information is stored at timing tx, following step S20A or S20B, the main control MPU performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 waits until it starts (boots). In this embodiment, the standby time until booting (boot timer) is set to 10 seconds (s). The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) completes the initialization process for starting (booting) the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before timing ty, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, and is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU).

At the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24), and if it determines that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it determines which combination of values of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is (steps S25 to S27). In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 1, the setting change process (step S37) is performed by establishing a predetermined setting value change permission condition. In addition, in the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 0, it initializes the main control built-in RAM (step S38). In addition, when the main control MPU determines in step S27 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the preset setting value display permission condition is met, and the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. In other words, at the time of timing tx, it determines whether the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and also determines whether the main body frame 4 is released and the setting key is turned ON, and these determination results are stored as operation information in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU, but the storage of the operation information is maintained until the arrival of timing ty, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. Then, at the time of timing ty, it is determined based on the storage of the operation information whether to initialize the main control internal RAM (step S38), perform the setting change process (step S37), or perform the setting value confirmation display process (step S28).

As shown in FIG. 151(A), when initializing the main control built-in RAM, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z must be operated at timing tx after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, but the setting key switch 1311a does not need to be turned ON. In this way, if the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information, and if the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 0 as the second operation information, and these operation information are stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at timing ty, it is determined to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38) based on the storage of these operation information, and the main control built-in RAM is initialized (step S38) from the timing ty.

When initializing the main control built-in RAM, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z needs to be operated at timing tx, but it does not need to be operated at timing ty. In other words, after the operation information is stored at timing tx, the operation information stored at timing tx is maintained until timing ty arrives, so that even before timing ty arrives, it is possible to change the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z from a state in which it is operated to a state in which it is not operated.

In addition, in this example, at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information, and at timing ty, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to a value of 0; however, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to a value of 0 between timing ty and the completion of initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38).

As shown in FIG. 151(B), when changing the setting value, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z must be operated at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, and the setting key switch 1311a must be turned ON. In this way, when the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information, and when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the second operation information, and these operation information are stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at timing ty, it is determined to perform the setting change process (step S37) based on the storage of these operation information, and the setting change process (step S37) is performed from the timing ty. Furthermore, after the setting change process (step S37) is started at timing ty, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from an ON state to an OFF state, the setting change process (step S37) is completed (timing t4).

When changing the setting value, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z must be operated and the setting key switch 1311a must be turned ON at the time of timing tx, but the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z does not need to be operated and the setting key switch 1311a does not need to be turned ON at the time of timing ty. In other words, after the operation information is stored at timing tx, the operation information stored at timing tx is maintained until timing ty arrives. Therefore, even before timing ty arrives, it is possible to change the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z from an operated state to an unoperated state, and similarly, it is possible to change the setting key switch 1311a from an ON state to an OFF state. However, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from ON to OFF before the timing ty arrives, after the setting change process (step S37) is started at the timing ty, the setting key switch 1311a must be changed from ON to OFF again, and then from ON to OFF. This is because in the determination of step S222 of the setting change process, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF, and in this determination, when the setting key switch 1311a is changed from ON to OFF, an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a.

In this example, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information at timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to a value of 0 at timing ty. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to a value of 0 between timing ty and the completion of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) after the setting change process (step S37). In this example, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the second operation information at timing tx, and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to a value of 0 at timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed. However, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG may be reset to a value of 0 between timing ty and the completion of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) after the setting change process (step S37).

As shown in FIG. 151(C), when the setting value confirmation display is performed, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z does not need to be operated at the timing tx after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, but the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned ON. In this way, if the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 0 as the first operation information, and if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at the timing ty, it is determined to perform the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) based on the storage of the operation information, and the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed from the timing ty. Furthermore, after the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at timing ty, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from an ON state to an OFF state, the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed (timing t4).

When the setting value confirmation display is performed, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be ON at the time of timing tx, but it is not necessary for the setting key switch 1311a to be ON at the time of timing ty. In other words, after the operation information is stored at timing tx, the operation information stored at timing tx is maintained until timing ty arrives, so that even before timing ty arrives, it is possible to change the setting key switch 1311a from ON to OFF. However, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from ON to OFF before timing ty arrives, it is necessary to change the setting key switch 1311a from ON to OFF again after starting the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) at timing ty, and then change the setting key switch 1311a from ON to OFF. This is because in step S358 of the setting value confirmation display process, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF. In this determination, an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key switch 1311a is changed from an ON state to an OFF state.

In this example, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the second operation information at timing tx, and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to a value of 0 at timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed; however, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG may be reset to a value of 0 between timing ty and timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed.

In this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the second operation information on the condition that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON while the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and Figures 151 (B) and (C) are based on the premise that the situation in which the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 continues. In this regard, in a situation in which the main frame 4 has never been opened relative to the outer frame 2 until timing tx arrives, or in a situation in which the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 between timing t3 and timing tx, even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is restricted from being set to a value of 1 as the second operation information (so that it is set to a value of 0). This is to prevent unauthorized setting changes or unauthorized setting confirmations when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 during the business hours of the game hall, etc. (when the game hall manager is unlikely to notice). On the other hand, in this example, in step S14 of the main control side power-on processing, the condition for setting the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to value 1 does not require that the main frame 4 be open to the outer frame 2, and even in a situation where the main frame 4 has never been opened to the outer frame 2 until the arrival of timing tx, or in a situation where the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 between timing t3 and timing tx, when it is determined that the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to value 1. This makes it possible to set the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 and prevent the main control built-in RAM from being unable to be initialized (step S38) even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main frame opening switch 4b and it becomes impossible to determine whether the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2. And even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main frame opening switch 4b, it is possible to at least prevent any hindrance to the start of the game itself.

In this embodiment, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as the first operation information, and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set as the second operation information, and these operation information are stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. After the operation information is stored at timing tx, the operation information stored at timing tx is maintained until timing ty arrives, and at timing ty, based on the storage of the operation information, it is determined whether to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38), perform a setting change process (step S37), or perform a setting value confirmation display process (step S28), and the determined process is performed. In other words, even if the operation mode of the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z and the operation mode of the setting key switch 1311a are changed between the time when the operation information is stored at the timing tx and the time when the timing ty arrives, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained without being changed. As a result, even if the hall manager accidentally changes the operation mode of the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z or the operation mode of the setting key switch 1311a after the operation information is stored at the timing tx after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained without being changed, so that there is no need to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 again, and the process intended by the hall manager after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (either initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change process (step S37), or setting value confirmation display process (step S28)) can be quickly executed.

In addition, when powering on the pachinko machine 1, in order to initialize the main control built-in RAM, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z without operating the setting key switch 1311a; in order to change the setting value, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a; and in order to display and confirm the setting value, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z. Then, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as the first operation information, and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set as the second operation information, and these operation information are stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. At timing ty, depending on the combination of these operation information, the processing intended by the hall manager (either initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), or setting value confirmation display processing (step S28)) is executed. For example, if operation sections were provided for initializing the main control built-in RAM, changing the setting values, and displaying the setting values for confirmation, three operation sections would be required in addition to the power switch 630a. However, by varying the processing executed after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on depending on the combination of operation information, it is possible to provide only two operation sections, a pressing operation section for the RWM clear button 633z and a setting key switch 1311a, in addition to the power switch 630a, thereby reducing the number of parts required for the operation sections.

In this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the second operation information on the condition that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON while the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and as shown in Figures 151 (B) and (C), the set state of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is maintained as the second operation information during the period from timing tx to timing ty, so that it is not necessary to open the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, during the period from timing tx to timing ty, it is possible to repeatedly open and close the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 any number of times. On the other hand, after setting the value 1 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing tx, if the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 within the period until the timing ty arrives, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at the timing tx may be reset so that the setting change process (step S37) or the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is not performed at the time of the timing ty, or the setting change process (step S37) or the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is not determined to be performed at the time of the timing ty without resetting the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at the timing tx. In other words, even if the main body frame 4 is open against the outer frame 2 at the timing tx, if the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 within the period until the timing ty arrives, it may be restricted so that the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display cannot be performed. As described above, this makes it possible to prevent unauthorized changes to settings or unauthorized confirmation of settings when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 during the opening hours of the amusement hall (a situation that would be difficult for the amusement hall manager to notice).

In this example, in step S14 of the main control side power-on processing, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information on the condition that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated even temporarily, but the condition may be that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 to 3 seconds), i.e., that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed and held. Similarly, in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the second operation information on the condition that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON even temporarily, but the condition may be that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 to 3 seconds). This prevents the execution of processing that is not intended by the hall manager, even if the hall manager accidentally touches the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the magnetic sensor 2470 is not used to monitor for fraudulent behavior, and the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor for fraudulent behavior. In other words, during the period from timing t3 to timing ty, the hall manager can change the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z from a pressed state to a not pressed state, or the setting key switch 1311a from an ON state to an OFF state, but the magnetic sensor 2470 is not used to monitor for fraudulent behavior, and the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor for fraudulent behavior. This prevents fraudulent behavior from being detected as fraudulent behavior, even if the hall manager holds something that can generate magnetism or applies vibrations when operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a, and prevents interference with normal work.

[12-1. Modifications of the behavior of a pachinko machine when powered on]
In the above embodiment, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, when the setting value is changed, and when the setting value is displayed for confirmation, the timing for determining whether the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated is the same as the timing for determining whether the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON. However, the timing for determining whether the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON may be different from the timing for determining whether the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. Such a modified behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to Figs. 152 and 153. Fig. 152 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the main control side power-on processing. 153(A) is a time chart showing a modified behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control built-in RAM is initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, Fig. 153(B) is a time chart showing a modified behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the setting of the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and Fig. 153(C) is a time chart showing a modified behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when a confirmation display of the setting value is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. As described above, the RWM clear button 633z functions as a RAM clear switch, a setting change button, and an error release switch.

As shown in FIG. 153, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 152. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10), and then performs power outage clear processing (step S12). In this power outage clear processing, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. As described above, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes greater than the power outage warning voltage after power is turned on and stabilizes, and in this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms).

At the time of timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, following step S12, the main control MPU judges whether or not the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated (step S14). In the judgment of step S14, when the main control MPU judges that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the judgment of step S14, when the main control MPU judges that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). In other words, at the time of timing tx, it judges whether or not the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and the judgment result is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as the first operation information. In addition, because the period from timing t3 to timing tx is extremely short, the person who presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z must turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z.

After the first operation information is stored at timing tx, following step S16A or step S16B, the main control MPU performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 waits until it starts (boots). In this embodiment, the standby time until booting (boot timer) is set to 10 seconds (s). The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) completes the initialization process for starting (booting) the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before timing ty, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, and is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU).

At timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24), and if it determines that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it determines whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). In the determination of step S18, when the main control MPU determines that the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, and determines that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned ON based on the setting key ON signal, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the judgment of step S18, when the main control MPU judges that the main frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, and/or judges that the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20B). In other words, at the time of timing ty1, it judges whether the main frame 4 is opened and the setting key is ON, and the judgment result is stored as the second operation information in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. In this way, in the modified example, the first operation information is stored at the time tx before the main control MPU starts the wait time standby process, whereas the second operation information is stored at the time ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. Note that the period from timing t3 to timing ty1 is set to at least 10 seconds (s), which is the waiting time (boot timer) until booting in the wait time standby process (step S22). Therefore, the person who turns ON the setting key switch 1311a may turn ON the setting key switch 1311a before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned ON at timing t3, but may also turn ON the setting key switch 1311a after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned ON at timing t3 and before timing ty1 arrives when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process.

At timing ty2 after the second operation information is stored at timing ty1, following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU determines which combination of the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is (steps S25 to S27). In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 1, a predetermined setting value change permission condition is met, and the setting change process (step S37) is performed. In addition, in the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 0, the main control MPU initializes the main control built-in RAM (step S38). Furthermore, when the main control MPU determines in step S27 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, a predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, and the main control MPU performs a setting value confirmation display process (step S28). That is, at the time of timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and the determination result is stored as first operation information in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU, but the storage of the first operation information is maintained until the arrival of timing ty2, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. On the other hand, at the time ty1, it is determined whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON, and the result of this determination is stored as second operation information in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU, but the storage of the second operation information is maintained until the time ty2 arrives, at which point the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. Then, at the time ty2, based on the storage of the operation information, it is determined whether to initialize the main control internal RAM (step S38), perform a setting change process (step S37), or perform a setting value confirmation display process (step S28).

As shown in Fig. 153 (A), when initializing the main control built-in RAM, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z must be operated at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3. In this way, when the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information, and the first operation information is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when initializing the main control built-in RAM, the setting key switch 1311a must not be turned ON at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process after timing tx. In this way, if the setting key switch 1311a has not been turned ON at timing ty1, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 0 as second operation information, and the second operation information is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at timing ty2, based on the storage of the operation information, it is decided to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38), and initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is performed from timing ty2.

When initializing the main control built-in RAM, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z needs to be operated at timing tx, but it does not need to be operated at timing ty1 or timing ty2. In other words, after the first operation information is stored at timing tx, the first operation information stored at timing tx is maintained until timing ty2 arrives, so that even before timing ty2 arrives, it is possible to change the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z from an operated state to an unoperated state.

When initializing the main control built-in RAM, the setting key switch 1311a must not be turned ON at timing ty1, but may be turned ON at timing tx or timing ty2. In other words, after the second operation information is stored at timing ty1, the second operation information stored at timing ty1 is maintained until timing ty2 arrives, but since the second operation information is stored at timing ty1, during the period from timing tx to timing ty1, it is possible to freely change the setting key switch 1311a between being turned ON and being turned OFF.

In addition, in this example, at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information, and at timing ty2, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to a value of 0; however, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to a value of 0 between timing ty2 and the completion of initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38).

As shown in FIG. 153(B), when changing the setting value, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z must be operated at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3. In this way, when the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information, and the first operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when changing the setting value, the setting key switch 1311a must be turned ON at the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process after the timing tx. In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at the timing ty1, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the second operation information, and the second operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at timing ty2, it is decided to perform the setting change process (step S37) based on the stored operation information, and the setting change process (step S37) is performed from timing ty2. After the setting change process (step S37) is started at timing ty2, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from ON to OFF, the setting change process (step S37) is completed (timing t4).

When changing the setting value, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z needs to be operated at the time tx, but it does not need to be operated at the time ty1 or ty2. In other words, after the first operation information is stored at the time tx, the first operation information stored at the time tx is maintained until the arrival of the time ty2, so that even before the arrival of the time ty2, it is possible to change the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z from an operated state to an unoperated state.

When changing the setting value, the setting key switch 1311a must be turned ON at timing ty1, but it is not necessary for the setting key switch 1311a to be turned ON at timing tx or timing ty2. In other words, after the second operation information is stored at timing ty1, the second operation information stored at timing ty1 is maintained until timing ty2 arrives, but since the second operation information is stored at timing ty1, during the period from timing tx to timing ty1, it is possible to freely switch between a state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and a state in which it is turned OFF.

In this example, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information at timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to a value of 0 at timing ty2. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to a value of 0 between timing ty2 and the completion of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38). In this example, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the second operation information at timing ty1, and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to a value of 0 at timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed. However, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG may be reset to a value of 0 between timing ty2 and the completion of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) after the setting change process (step S37).

As shown in FIG. 153(C), when the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z must not be operated at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3. In this way, when the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 0 as the first operation information, and the first operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the setting key switch 1311a must be turned ON at the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process after the timing tx. In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at the timing ty1, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the second operation information, and the second operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at timing ty2, it is decided to perform the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) based on the stored operation information, and the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed from timing ty2. After the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at timing ty2, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from ON to OFF, the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed (timing t4).

When displaying the setting value, the setting key switch 1311a must be turned ON at timing ty1, but it is not necessary for the setting key switch 1311a to be turned ON at timing tx or timing ty2. In other words, after the second operation information is stored at timing ty1, the second operation information stored at timing ty1 is maintained until timing ty2 arrives, but since the second operation information is stored at timing ty1, during the period from timing tx to timing ty1, it is possible to freely switch the setting key switch 1311a between being turned ON and being turned OFF.

In this example, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the second operation information at timing ty1, and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to a value of 0 at timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed; however, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG may be reset to a value of 0 between timing ty2 and the completion of the setting value confirmation display process (step S28).

In this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the second operation information on the condition that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON while the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and Figures 153 (B) and (C) are based on the premise that the situation in which the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 continues. In this regard, in a situation in which the main frame 4 has never been opened relative to the outer frame 2 until timing ty1 arrives, or in a situation in which the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 between timing t3 and timing ty1, even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is restricted from being set to a value of 1 as the second operation information (so that it is set to a value of 0). This is to prevent unauthorized setting changes or unauthorized setting confirmations when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 during the business hours of the game hall, etc. (when the game hall manager is unlikely to notice). On the other hand, in this example, in step S14 of the main control side power-on processing, the condition for setting the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to value 1 does not require that the main frame 4 be open to the outer frame 2, and even in a situation where the main frame 4 has never been opened to the outer frame 2 until the arrival of timing tx, or in a situation where the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 between timing t3 and timing tx, when it is determined that the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to value 1. This makes it possible to set the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 and prevent the main control built-in RAM from being unable to be initialized (step S38) even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main frame opening switch 4b and it becomes impossible to determine whether the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2. And even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main frame opening switch 4b, it is possible to prevent, to a minimum extent, any disruption to the start of play itself.

In this embodiment, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as the first operation information, the first operation information is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU, and the first operation information stored at timing tx is maintained until timing ty2 arrives. Also, at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process after timing tx, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set as the second operation information, the second operation information is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU, and the second operation information stored at timing ty1 is maintained until timing ty2 arrives. Then, at the time of timing ty2, it is determined based on the storage of the operation information whether to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38), perform a setting change process (step S37), or perform a setting value confirmation display process (step S28), and the determined process is performed. In other words, after the first operation information is stored at timing tx, during the period until the arrival of timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored, it is possible to freely change the setting key switch 1311a between an ON state and an OFF state. Then, at timing ty1, the second operation information is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU so as to reflect the operation state of the setting key switch 1311a that was changed during the period from timing tx to timing ty1, and then, at timing ty2, based on the stored operation information, a decision is made as to whether to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38), to perform a setting change process (step S37), or to perform a setting value confirmation display process (step S28), and the decided process is carried out. As a result, when changing the setting value or displaying a setting value confirmation, even if the hall manager accidentally forgets to turn on the setting key switch 1311a at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, by changing the setting key switch 1311a to a state in which it is turned on during the period until timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored arrives, there is no need to power the pachinko machine 1 on again, and the process intended by the hall manager (any of initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change process (step S37), or setting value confirmation display process (step S28)) can be quickly executed after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Furthermore, when initializing the main control built-in RAM, even if the hall manager mistakenly turns ON the setting key switch 1311a at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the setting key switch 1311a can be changed to an OFF state during the period until timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored arrives, eliminating the need to re-set the setting value, and allowing the hall manager to quickly execute the process intended by the hall manager after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change process (step S37), or setting value confirmation display process (step S28)).

As described above, the period from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at time t3 until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored is configured to be longer than the period from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at time t3 until the timing tx at which the first operation information is stored. This eliminates the need to simultaneously operate the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and it is possible to operate the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z and then turn on the setting key switch 1311a, making it easier for the hall manager to operate multiple operation parts.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z must be operated to initialize the main control built-in RAM or change the settings of the settings, but the timing for operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is set to timing tx immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, not timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. This is because the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is configured as a push-type switch whose operated state is not maintained, and even if one tries to continue to operate the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 until timing ty1 arrives, there is a possibility that the hall manager will stop operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z because it is unclear whether timing ty1 has arrived. Therefore, by setting the timing for operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z to the timing tx immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, there is no need to continue to operate the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z for a long period of time, and the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) and the setting change process (step S37) can be reliably executed as intended by the hall manager.

Also, as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) completes the initialization process for starting (booting) the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before timing ty, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, and is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). At the time when such initialization process of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed, a command is received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) that specifies that it is waiting for a determination of whether or not the setting key is turned ON at timing ty1. During the period from the completion of the initialization process of the peripheral control board 1510 until the arrival of timing ty1, a setting key operation possible notification is executed by the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600 to notify that the setting key switch 1311a can be changed to the ON operation state. This notification that the setting keys are operable is performed by repeating the voice "Setting keys are operable," displaying the message "Setting keys are operable!", and lighting up the lamp in a color corresponding to whether the setting value setting key switches 1311a 1 to 6 during the selection operation are turned on or not.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the magnetic sensor 2470 is restricted from monitoring for fraudulent behavior, and the vibration sensor 3005 is restricted from monitoring for fraudulent behavior. In other words, during the period from timing t3 to timing ty2, the hall manager can change the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z from an operated state to an unoperated state, or change the setting key switch 1311a from an ON state to an OFF state, or from an OFF state to an ON state, but the magnetic sensor 2470 is restricted from monitoring for fraudulent behavior, and the vibration sensor 3005 is restricted from monitoring for fraudulent behavior. As a result, even if the hall manager has something that can generate magnetism or applies vibration when operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a, it is possible to prevent it from being detected as fraudulent behavior and to suppress the disruption of normal work.

[13. Behavior of Pachinko Machine in Change Allowed State and Confirmation Display State]
Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in a state where the setting value change permission and the setting value confirmation display are being performed will be described with reference to Figs. 154 to 156. Fig. 154 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the setting value change, and Figs. 155 and 156 are time charts showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the setting value confirmation display. In such a state where the setting value change and the setting value confirmation display are being performed, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is different from that in a state where the setting value change and the setting value confirmation display are not performed. In addition, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the setting value confirmation display is approximately the same as the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the setting value change, but since the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, various information at the time of powering off is held even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

154, when changing the setting value, first it is confirmed whether the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or not, and if the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it is necessary to cut off the power to the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). Then, when the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off) and the main body frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 (timing t1), and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise to set the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a while operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, which functions as a RAM clear switch, to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), the setting value can be changed (change permitted state). In such a change permitted state, the setting value (setting value 1 to 6) can be changed every time the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, which functions as a setting switching button, is pressed, and then the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to its original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON (timing t4). In other words, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be changed (change permitted state), but after timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value cannot be changed (unchangeable state). Then, by removing the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the player is able to play.

When changing the setting value, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, but the setting change process of step S37 is not terminated until the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 (step S222 of the setting change process does not determine that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off), and the interrupt permission setting of the subsequent step S52 is prohibited from being performed during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is delayed compared to normal power-on. And, since the main control side timer interrupt process is not started until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed, the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process, the special symbol and special electric role control process of step S114, and the normal symbol and normal electric role control process of step S116 are left unexecuted and in a standby state. In other words, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be changed (change permitted state), but when game ball B enters various winning ports such as first start port 2002, second start port 2004, and large winning port 2005, or gate section 2003, the input of a detection signal is not valid, and this is a special period during which no special pattern change display, no normal pattern change display, no opening operation of second start port door 2411, no opening operation of large winning port door 2413, no distribution operation of distribution piece 2415, etc. are performed.

As shown in FIG. 155, when the currently set setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, first, it is checked whether the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or not, and if the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it is necessary to cut off the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). Then, when the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off) and the main body frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 (timing t1), and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise (timing t2), so that the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON state. Then, the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z (timing t3), and the state in which the setting value can be displayed for confirmation (confirmation display state) is reached. In this confirmation display state, the setting display 1310g displays the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON), and then the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original position (timing t4), switching the setting display 1310g from a state in which the setting value is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed. In other words, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be displayed for confirmation (confirmation display state), and after timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value cannot be displayed for confirmation (unconfirmable state). Then, by removing the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the player can play the game.

When the currently set setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, but the setting value confirmation display process of step S28 is not terminated until the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 (step S358 of the setting value confirmation display process does not determine that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off), and the interrupt permission setting of the subsequent step S52 is prohibited from being performed during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is delayed compared to normal power-on. And, since the main control side timer interrupt process is not started until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed, the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process, the special symbol and special electric role control process of step S114, and the normal symbol and normal electric role control process of step S116 are left unexecuted and in a standby state. In other words, the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a state in which it is possible to display confirmation of the set value (confirmation display state), but when game ball B enters various winning ports such as first start port 2002, second start port 2004, and large winning port 2005, or gate section 2003, the input of a detection signal is not made valid, and it is a special period in which no special pattern change display, no normal pattern change display, no opening operation of second start port door 2411, no opening operation of large winning port door 2413, no distribution operation of distribution piece 2415, etc. are performed.

[13-1. Special symbols, ball detection, and payout devices]
As shown in Fig. 154, in the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric role control process in step S114) has not been started, so the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) of the function display unit 1400 is in a state (non-changeable state A) in which it is not possible to perform variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric role control process in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the state becomes a state (changeable state) in which it is possible to perform variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400.

In addition, after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, when the jackpot game is started at timing t6, the input of the detection signal is made valid when the game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, but the special symbol cannot be displayed on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (unchangeable state B). In this way, the unchangeable state A and the unchangeable state B are the same in that the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 cannot display the special symbol, but are different in that the input of the detection signal is not made valid when the game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 in the unchangeable state A, whereas the input of the detection signal is made valid when the game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 in the unchangeable state B.

In addition, if the special symbol variable display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is being performed or the special symbol variable display is stored as pending when the power is cut off at timing t0, the setting change process of step S37 of the main control power-on process is terminated when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, and then in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, so information related to the special symbol variable display is lost. Therefore, after the end of the change-permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the variable state is entered, but the variable display of the special symbol that was suspended when the power was cut off is not resumed, and the variable display of the special symbol that was stored as pending when the power was cut off is not performed.

Furthermore, in the change-allowed state, if a fraud-related error occurs (for example, a severe error when magnetism or vibration is detected) in which some kind of fraudulent activity is committed and it becomes impossible to play games such as displaying the changing special patterns, the peripheral control MPU performs a fraud-related error output process in which a specified display device (for example, the performance display device 1600) displays fraud-related error information to notify the player of this, a specified light-emitting device (for example, multiple LEDs 121a or multiple LEDs 213a, etc.) emits a fraud-related error signal to notify the player of this, and a specified sound output device (for example, the lower speaker 153a, etc.) outputs a fraud-related error sound to notify the player of this. However, during the change-allowed state from timing t3 to timing t4, although it is impossible to display the changing special patterns (non-changeable state A), the fraud-related error output process described above is not performed. This is because, during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, it is assumed that the hall staff is changing the setting value by opening the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and the priority is placed on the efficiency of the hall staff's work rather than on the necessity of the fraud-related error output process intended to give a hint to those around them, and the occurrence of events that would impede their work is suppressed. With regard to not performing the fraud-related error output process, it is possible to not perform all of the above-mentioned fraud-related error information display process, fraud-related error mode light emission process, and fraud-related error sound output process, but in consideration of suppressing the occurrence of events that would impede the work of the hall staff, it is also possible to not perform at least some of the fraud-related error output processes. For example, it is possible to not perform the fraud-related error sound output process, which is loud and may reduce the work efficiency of the staff, while allowing the other processes to be performed normally.

In addition, during the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control timer interrupt process (switch input process of step S104) has not been started, so when game ball B enters various winning ports such as the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the large winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, or the gate section 2003, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors, and the detection of game ball B is treated as invalid. Note that it is also possible to prevent the detection of game ball B by the detection sensors, or to input detection signals from the detection sensors but treat them as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is disabled, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, neither the lottery, the pattern change (display of the change of the special pattern), nor the payout of the game ball B will be performed. As a result, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for some reason during the regular work of changing the setting value, the game progress due to this can be suppressed. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is disabled, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big prize opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, or the second receiving port 2008, neither the payout of the game ball B nor the granting of the high probability state will be performed. As a result, even if the game ball B enters the big prize opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, or the second receiving port 2008 for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the setting value, the game progress due to this can be suppressed.

In the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes and gates (gates), and at the same time, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the outlet 1008, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the outlet 1008 is invalid, for example, it is possible to exclude the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change permission state from the measurement target (target of addition to the out number counter) by the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a sling (ball jam) or the like is detected in the change permission state and measured by the base monitor 1310h (added to the out number counter).

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process of step S104) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, and when the game ball B enters various winning holes such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, the first receiving hole 2007, the second receiving hole 2008, and the gate section 2003, the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor and treats the detection of the game ball B as valid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is valid, it is possible to perform a lottery, a pattern change (display of a special pattern change), and a payout of the game ball B when the game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004. Similarly, if detection of game ball B is enabled, when game ball B enters the large prize opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, or the second receiving opening 2008, it is possible to pay out game ball B and provide a high probability state (if the state when game ball B is received by the second receiving opening 2008 is set to "enabled state" as described above).

In this example, the detection of game ball B is treated as valid when game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, and the second receiving opening 2008 or the gate section 2003 from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, the end of the change permission state. However, the detection of game ball B may be treated as valid when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 at timing t5 or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned OFF at timing t4. This is because it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to launch game ball B before the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and it is difficult to actually start playing.

In this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the payout control MPU starts the payout control power-on process, enabling a drive signal to be output to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580, and enabling the payout device 580 to pay out game ball B. In other words, in the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, the payout device 580 can pay out game ball B. However, in the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, as described above, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of the various winning holes and gate sections (gates), so that, for example, even if game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, or the large winning hole 2005 in the change permission state, the payout of game ball B will not be performed.

If game balls B have entered the various winning holes and are being paid out from the payout device 580 at the time the power is cut off at timing t0, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3 while the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, an operation signal (detection signal) of the RWM clear button 633z is input from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633, and the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared, so that information regarding the payout of game balls B is lost. Therefore, after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, it becomes possible to pay out game balls B from the payout device 580, but the payout of game balls B that were not paid out at the time the power was cut off is not resumed.

As shown in FIG. 155, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, the main control side timer interrupt process (special pattern and special electric role control process of step S114) has not been started, so the special pattern display device (first special pattern display device, second special pattern display device) of the function display unit 1400 cannot display the change of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (change-prohibited state A). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (special pattern and special electric role control process of step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, and the state becomes a changeable state (changeable state) in which the special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 can display the change of the special pattern.

In addition, after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, when the jackpot game is started at timing t6, the input of the detection signal is made valid when the game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, but the state becomes a state in which the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 cannot display the special symbol variable (non-variable state B). In this way, the non-variable state A and the non-variable state B are the same in that the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 cannot display the special symbol variable. However, the non-variable state A does not make the input of the detection signal valid when the game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, whereas the non-variable state B makes the input of the detection signal valid when the game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004.

In addition, if the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is displaying a variable special symbol or the variable special symbol display is stored as pending at the time when the power is cut off at timing t0, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 while the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated (when changing the setting value), the setting change process of step S37 of the main control power-on process is terminated when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, and then in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. Since the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, information regarding the variable display of the special symbols is lost. However, if the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3 without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z (when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed), the setting value confirmation display process of step S28 of the main control power-on process is terminated when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, but the process of step S38, which clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area as after the setting change process of step S37, is not executed, so information regarding the variable display of the special symbols is retained. Therefore, after the end of the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the variable display of the special symbols that was interrupted when the power was cut off is resumed, triggered by the changeable state, and the variable display of the special symbols that was stored as pending when the power was cut off is performed.

Furthermore, as described above, in the change-allowed state, if a fraud-related error occurs (for example, a severe error upon magnetic detection or vibration detection) in which some kind of fraudulent activity is committed and play such as the variable display of special symbols is made impossible, the peripheral control MPU performs a fraud-related error output process in which a specified display device (for example, the performance display device 1600) displays fraud-related error information to notify the player of the occurrence, a specified light-emitting device (for example, multiple LEDs 121a or multiple LEDs 213a, etc.) emits a fraud-related error signal to notify the player of the occurrence, and a specified sound output device (for example, the lower speaker 153a, etc.) outputs a fraud-related error sound to notify the player of the occurrence. However, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change-allowed state, although it is impossible to make a variable display of special symbols (non-variable state A), the fraud-related error output process described above is not performed. This is because, during the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, it is assumed that the hall staff opens the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2 to display the setting value, and the work efficiency of the hall staff is emphasized over the necessity of the fraud-related error output process intended to give a hint to the surroundings, and the occurrence of an event that hinders the work is suppressed. Regarding the point of not performing the fraud-related error output process, it is possible to not perform all of the above-mentioned fraud-related error information display process, fraud-related error mode light emission process, and fraud-related error sound output process, but in consideration of suppressing the occurrence of an event that hinders the work of the hall staff, it is also possible to not perform at least a part of the fraud-related error output process. For example, it is possible to not perform the output process of the fraud-related error sound, which is loud and may reduce the work efficiency of the worker, while performing other processes as usual. In addition, when not performing the fraud-related error output process, the type and number of prohibited processes may be different from the control performed in the above-mentioned change permission state, depending on the difference in the event that hinders the work of the hall staff. For example, in the change permission state, if any fraud-related error occurs, none of the fraud-related error output processing is performed, while in the confirmation display state, if any fraud-related error occurs, only part of the fraud-related error output processing is not performed; alternatively, in the change permission state, if any fraud-related error occurs, all of the fraud-related error output processing is not performed, while in the confirmation display state, if any fraud-related error occurs, part of the fraud-related error output processing is not performed.

In addition, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process of step S104) has not been started, so when game ball B enters various winning ports such as the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the large winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, or the gate section 2003, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors, and the detection of game ball B is treated as invalid. Note that it is also possible to prevent the detection of game ball B by the detection sensors, or to input detection signals from the detection sensors but treat them as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is disabled, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, neither the lottery, the pattern change (display of the change of the special pattern), nor the payout of the game ball B will be performed. As a result, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for some reason during the regular operation of checking and displaying the set value, the game progress due to this can be suppressed. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is disabled, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big prize port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, or the second receiving port 2008, neither the payout of the game ball B nor the granting of the high probability state will be performed. As a result, even if the game ball B enters the big prize port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, or the second receiving port 2008 for some reason during the regular operation of checking and displaying the set value, the game progress due to this can be suppressed.

In the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes and gates (gates), and at the same time, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the outlet 1008, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the outlet 1008 is invalid, for example, it is possible to exclude the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state from the measurement target (target of addition to the out number counter) by the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a sling (ball jam) or the like is detected in the confirmation display state and measured by the base monitor 1310h (added to the out number counter).

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control timer interrupt process (switch input process of step S104) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, and when the game ball B enters various winning holes such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, the first receiving hole 2007, the second receiving hole 2008, and the gate section 2003, the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor and treats the detection of the game ball B as valid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is valid, it is possible to perform a lottery, a pattern change (display of a special pattern change), and a payout of the game ball B when the game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004. Similarly, if detection of game ball B is enabled, when game ball B enters the large prize opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, or the second receiving opening 2008, it is possible to pay out game ball B and provide a high probability state (if the state when game ball B is received by the second receiving opening 2008 is set to "enabled state" as described above).

In this example, the detection of game ball B is treated as valid from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, i.e., the end of the confirmation display state, when game ball B enters various winning openings such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, and the second receiving opening 2008, or the gate section 2003. However, the detection of game ball B may be treated as valid when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 at timing t5, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned OFF at timing t4. This is because it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to launch game ball B before the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and it is difficult to actually start playing.

In this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the payout control MPU starts the payout control power-on process, enabling a drive signal to be output to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580, and enabling the payout device 580 to pay out the game ball B. In other words, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, the payout device 580 can pay out the game ball B, as in the change permission state. However, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of the various winning holes and gate sections (gates), as described above, so that, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, or the large winning hole 2005 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B will not be paid out.

In addition, if game ball B has entered the various winning ports and is being paid out from the payout device 580 at the time the power is cut off at timing t0, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 while the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated (to change the setting value), at that time an operation signal (detection signal) of the RWM clear button 633z is input from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633, and the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared, so information regarding the payout of game ball B is lost, whereas if the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z (to display a confirmation of the setting value), the process of clearing the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is not executed at that time, so information regarding the payout of game ball B is retained. Therefore, after the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the payout device 580 is enabled to pay out game balls B, and the payout of game balls B that were not paid out at the time the power supply was cut off is resumed.

In addition, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting display 1310g displays the current setting value (the value that is set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON). However, as described above, in the confirmation display state in which game balls B that had not been paid out at the time the power was cut off are being paid out, if a payout-related error such as a ball running out occurs, the payout control MPU performs a display process for displaying payout-related error information to notify the user of this on a display device other than the setting display 1310g (for example, a 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board 633), or performs a payout-related error output process for performing light emission processing of a payout-related error mode to notify the user of this on a specified light-emitting device (for example, multiple LEDs 121a or multiple LEDs 213a, etc.). This makes it possible to determine whether the payout of game balls B that were not paid out at the time the power was cut off has been completed in the confirmation display state, or whether a payout-related error such as a ball running out has occurred and game balls B have not been paid out, thereby preventing losses to the player. Note that payout-related error processing is an important event for smooth gameplay in the future, so the emphasis is on payout maintenance regardless of the work efficiency of the hall staff, and no restrictions are placed on the processing as in normal times, as with the fraud-related error processing described above, and no restrictions are imposed whatsoever.

As described above, if game balls B have entered the various winning ports and are being paid out from the payout device 580 when the power is cut off at timing t0, then if the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 (when a confirmation display of the setting values is performed) without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the payout of game balls B that had not been paid out at the time the power was cut off can be resumed at that time. On the other hand, during the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, it is a state (non-changeable state A) in which it is not possible to display the changing special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) on the special pattern display device (first special pattern display device, second special pattern display device) of the function display unit 1400. Therefore, if the changing special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 is displaying the changing special pattern at the time when the power is cut off at timing t0, or if the changing special pattern display is stored as pending, then if the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 (when performing a confirmation display of the setting value) without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, then at that time, the changing special pattern display that was suspended at the time when the power was cut off will not be resumed, and the changing special pattern display that was stored as pending at the time when the power was cut off will not be displayed. In other words, during the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, the display of the special symbols that was interrupted when the power was cut off is not resumed, and the display of the special symbols that was stored as reserved when the power was cut off is not performed, and while the game progress is prevented, only the game balls B that were not paid out when the power was cut off can be paid out. For example, when the hall is closed, if the power is cut off even though game balls B have entered various winning holes and are being paid out from the payout device 580, a loss will occur to the player for the game balls B that were not paid out when the power was cut off. However, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 afterwards and putting it into the confirmation display state, the game progress after the power was cut off can be prevented, and only the game balls B that were not paid out when the power was cut off can be paid out, preventing the player from suffering a loss.

As a variation of the above, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the special symbol variation display may be disabled until the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF, and the game progress after the power is cut off may be prevented, and only the game balls B that have not been paid out at the time the power is cut off may be paid out during this period, while the confirmation display of the setting value may not be performed. Also, an operation part other than the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a may be provided, and when the hall clerk operates the other operation part ON, the special symbol variation display may be disabled until the operation is OFF, and the game progress after the hall clerk operates the other operation part ON may be prevented, and only the game balls B that have not been paid out at the time the hall clerk operates the other operation part ON may be paid out during this period. Even in such a case, for example, when the hall is closed, the progress of the game can be prevented during the period when the hall staff turned the operation ON, and only the game balls B that have not been paid out at the time the hall staff turned the operation ON can be paid out, preventing the player from incurring losses.

As described above, after the end of the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, the function display unit 1400 enters a changeable state in which the special symbol display can display a change in the special symbol, but the special symbol stored as reserved at the time the power was cut off is not displayed, whereas after the end of the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, the changeable state is triggered to display the special symbol stored as reserved at the time the power was cut off. More specifically, if a ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 during the display of the special symbol, a special random number is stored as reserved in the main control built-in RAM, but if a special random number is stored as reserved in the main control built-in RAM at the time the power is cut off at timing t0, the special random number is stored and held as game backup information in the main control power cut processing. Then, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 and then transitions to a change permission state, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, and when the change permission state ends, the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is cleared, and the special random number stored as reserved is also lost.

In addition, during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, the special random number stored as a hold before the power is cut off is erased, so that the hold display on the performance display device 1600 and the hold display on the hold number display of the function display unit 1400 are not displayed. Also, during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, even if a game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid, so no special random number is stored as a new hold.

However, if the special random numbers stored as reserved before the power cut are not erased at the end of the change permission state, the following problems will occur. In this example, the number of jackpot determination values set in the jackpot determination table increases so that the probability of a jackpot increases as the setting value increases among the setting values 1 to 6. For example, when changing the setting value in the change permission state, if the setting value is changed from a low setting value (e.g., setting value 1) to a high setting value (e.g., setting value 6), the number of special random numbers that are judged to be jackpots as a result of the jackpot determination increases and the probability of a jackpot increases, so that a special random number that was a miss with the setting value before the power cut may become a miss with the setting value after the change permission state ends. On the other hand, when changing the setting value in the change permission state, if the setting value is changed from a high setting value (e.g., setting value 6) to a low setting value (e.g., setting value 1), the number of special random numbers that are judged to be jackpots as a result of the jackpot determination decreases and the probability of a jackpot decreases, so that a special random number that was a jackpot with the setting value before the power cut may become a miss with the setting value after the change permission state ends. In this regard, in this example, by erasing the special random numbers stored as reserved when the change permission state ends, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an unfair situation in which the result of the jackpot determination is changed between before the power was cut off and after the change permission state ends. In particular, when a person other than the hall manager changes the setting value in the change permission state by fraudulent conduct, they may try to change the setting value to a high setting value (e.g., setting value 6). However, even if the setting value is changed to a high setting value (e.g., setting value 6), the result of the jackpot determination is not changed to a jackpot, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent conduct by persons other than the hall manager. Note that when the hall manager changes the setting value in the change permission state, the special random numbers stored as reserved before the power was cut off are erased, so it is preferable to cut off the power when there are no reserved numbers and then change the setting value in the change permission state so as not to cause any disadvantage to the player.

When changing the setting value in the change-permitted state, the special random number stored as reserved is erased not only when the setting value is changed from a low setting value (e.g., setting value 1) before the power cut to a high setting value (e.g., setting value 6) but also when the setting value before the power cut is maintained. For example, if a person other than the hall manager changes the setting value in the change-permitted state through fraudulent activity, they may try to change it to a high setting value (e.g., setting value 6), but the setting value before the power cut was already high, and there is a possibility that there is no need to change the high setting value. Even in such a case, by erasing the special random number stored as reserved before the power cut at the end of the change-permitted state, the opportunity to determine whether or not there is a jackpot based on the special random number that was likely to result in a jackpot with the high setting value before the power cut is lost, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity by persons other than the hall manager.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is switched on at timing t3 and then shifted to the confirmation display state, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, and the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is not cleared at the time of ending the confirmation display state, so the special random number stored as reserved before the power cut is retained. Note that in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, even if a ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid, so no new special random number is stored as reserved. In this confirmation display state, only the setting of the setting value is confirmed, and the setting value is not changed as in the change permission state. In other words, even if a person other than the hall manager confirms the setting of the setting value in the confirmation display state by fraudulent conduct, the result of the jackpot judgment for the special random number stored as reserved before the power cut is not changed between before the power cut and after the end of the confirmation display state, and no profit is gained by fraudulent conduct, so the special random number stored as reserved before the power cut is retained even at the end of the confirmation display state.

In addition, if a person other than the hall manager fraudulently checks the settings in the confirmation display state, it is expected that the person will access the back of the pachinko machine 1 in some way while pretending to play normally and perform a fraudulent setting check. If the setting value that is fraudulently checked is an unfavorable setting (for example, setting value 1, which has the lowest probability of winning), the person may immediately leave the seat in search of a pachinko machine 1 with an advantageous setting (for example, setting value 6, which has the highest probability of winning). In this respect, in this example, when checking the settings in the confirmation display state, the reserved values are retained without being erased, making it difficult for the person to take the strange action of "leaving the seat even though reserved values remain" after a fraudulent setting check. Also, by monitoring such strange behavior, it is easier to catch a person who is performing a fraudulent setting check. As a result, it is possible to deter people other than the hall manager from performing fraudulent setting checks.

In addition, to further deter fraudulent behavior, in the confirmation display state, while the special random numbers stored as reserved before the power was cut off are maintained, the reserved display on the performance display device 1600 as well as the reserved display on the reserved number display of the function display unit 1400 are temporarily hidden, and the special random numbers stored as reserved are displayed as if they no longer exist, as in the change permitted state. This allows a fraudster to mistakenly believe that the reserved numbers have disappeared, and to give up on continuing to play after fraudulently checking the settings. In order to effectively deter fraudulent behavior, the reserved display may be hidden not only during the confirmation display state, but also for a period of time after the confirmation display state ends until a specified return timing arrives (for example, when the main body frame 4 is closed or a specified time has passed).

[13-2. About jackpot games and launching devices]
As shown in Fig. 154, in the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric device control process of step S114) has not been started, so it is impossible to operate the large prize opening door 2413 that can open and close the large prize opening 2005, or the distribution piece 2415 that distributes the game ball B received by the large prize opening 2005 to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric device control process of step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, and it becomes possible to operate the large prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415. As a result, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 and then a jackpot game is started at timing t6, it is possible to operate the large prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 as part of the jackpot game, so that the game ball B can be inserted into the large prize opening 2005, or the game ball B received by the large prize opening 2005 can be distributed to the second receiving opening 2008.

If the big win game is being played and the big win opening door 2413 or the allocation piece 2415 is operating when the power is cut off at timing t0, the setting change process of step S37 of the main control power-on process is terminated when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, and then in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, so information regarding the big win game being played (the big win opening door 2413 and the allocation piece 2415 are operating) is lost. Therefore, after the end of the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the big win opening door 2413 and the allocation piece 2415 are able to operate, but the big win game that was interrupted when the power was cut off is not resumed, and the big win opening door 2413 and the allocation piece 2415 are not operated.

As described above, during the change-permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing of step S104) has not been started, so when game ball B enters various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, and the gate section 2003, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors, and the detection of game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of game ball B is disabled, for example, even if game ball B enters the large prize opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, or the second receiving opening 2008, neither the payout of game ball B nor the granting of a high probability state will occur. As a result, even if game ball B enters the large prize opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, or the second receiving opening 2008 for some reason during the normal work of changing the setting value, the progress of the game as a result of this can be suppressed.

In this example, the large prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are operable from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, i.e., from the time when the change permission state ends. However, the large prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 may also be operable from the time when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 at timing t5, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned OFF at timing t4. This is because it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to launch the game ball B before the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 at timing t5, making it difficult to actually start playing.

In addition, during the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (launch permission signal setting process in step S113) is not started, but in consideration of inspecting the launch operation by the handle 182 in the change permission state, the logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch the game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 during that period is set, so that the game ball B can be launched when the handle 182 is operated. In addition, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (launch permission signal setting process in step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, so that the state in which the game ball B can be launched when the handle 182 is operated continues even after the change permission state ends. In this way, it is possible to prepare for the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182 even before the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and the game can begin immediately after the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2.

As shown in FIG. 155, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, the main control side timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric device control process of step S114) has not been started, so the large prize opening door 2413 that can open and close the large prize opening 2005, and the distribution piece 2415 that distributes the game ball B received by the large prize opening 2005 to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008 cannot be operated. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric device control process of step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, and the large prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated. As a result, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 and then the jackpot game starts at timing t6, the large prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated as part of the jackpot game, and game ball B can be inserted into the large prize opening 2005, or game ball B received by the large prize opening 2005 can be distributed to the second receiving opening 2008.

In addition, if the big win game is being played and the big win opening door 2413 or the distribution piece 2415 is operating at the time when the power is cut off at timing t0, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 while the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated (when changing the setting value), the setting change process of step S37 of the main control power-on processing is terminated when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, and then in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. Therefore, during the big win game (while the big win opening door 2413 or the distribution piece 2415 is operating), ) is lost, whereas if the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 (when the setting value confirmation display is performed) without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the setting value confirmation display process of step S28 of the main control power-on process is terminated when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, but the process of step S38, which clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area as after the setting change process of step S37, is not executed, so information regarding the execution of the jackpot game (the operation of the large prize opening door 2413 and the allocation piece 2415) is retained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 156, after the end of the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the large prize opening door 2413 and the allocation piece 2415 become operable, and the jackpot game that was interrupted at the time the power was cut off is resumed, and the large prize opening door 2413 and the allocation piece 2415 are operated. In addition, as described below, when the power is cut off at timing t5, it is possible to operate the handle 182 to prepare for the launch of game ball B before resuming the jackpot game that was interrupted, and game ball B can be efficiently placed into the big prize opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008 immediately after the jackpot game is resumed.

As described above, during the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing of step S104) has not been started, so when game ball B enters various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, and the gate section 2003, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors, and the detection of game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of game ball B is disabled, for example, even if game ball B enters the large prize opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, or the second receiving opening 2008, neither the payout of game ball B nor the granting of a high probability state will be performed. As a result, even if game ball B enters the large prize opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, or the second receiving opening 2008 for some reason during the normal operation of confirming and displaying the setting value, the progress of the game as a result of this can be suppressed.

In this example, the large prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are operable from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, i.e., from the time when the confirmation display state ends, but the large prize opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 may also be operable from the time when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 at timing t5, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned OFF at timing t4. This is because it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to launch the game ball B before the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 at timing t5, making it difficult to actually start playing. Furthermore, if the jackpot game that was interrupted when the power was cut off is resumed from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, from the time when the confirmation display state ends, it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to prepare for the launch of the game ball B before the jackpot game is resumed. However, by delaying the resumption of the jackpot game that was interrupted when the power was cut off, it becomes easier to operate the handle 182 to prepare for the launch of the game ball B before the jackpot game is resumed, and the game ball B can be efficiently placed in the big prize opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008 immediately after the jackpot game is resumed.

In addition, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (launch permission signal setting process in step S113) is not started, as in the change permission state, but in consideration of inspecting the launch operation by the handle 182 in the confirmation display state, the logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch the game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is set during that period, and the game ball B can be launched when the handle 182 is operated. In addition, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (launch permission signal setting process in step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the state in which the game ball B can be launched when the handle 182 is operated is continued even after the end of the change permission state. In this way, it is possible to prepare for the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182 even before the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 at timing t5, and the game can begin immediately after the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2.

[13-3. About production equipment and production materials]
As shown in FIG. 154, in this example, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts peripheral control power-on processing, and a predetermined image can be displayed on the screen of the performance display device 1600. Then, during the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the pattern display (decorative pattern display) on the screen of the performance display device 1600 is erased, and a setting change notification is executed to notify that the setting value is being changed by the image, lamp, and output from the performance display device 1600. As the setting change notification, a voice repeating "setting change in progress", a message display of "setting change in progress!", and lamp illumination in a color corresponding to the setting value 1 to 6 in the selection operation process are executed. In addition, the setting change notification is a notification (performance) that is executed only in the change permission state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame open notification that is executed in a state in which the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. That is, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, a main frame open notification (such as a display or sound of "The frame is open") is normally made, but in the change permission state, the setting change notification is executed as the top priority without making the main frame open notification. Note that the main frame open notification and the setting change notification may be executed in parallel, with the setting change notification being given priority over the main frame open notification, and the main frame open notification may be executed after the setting change notification has ended. After the change permission state ends at timing t4, a game start notification is executed by the image, lamp, and speaker output of the performance display device 1600, notifying that it is now possible to start a game such as a pattern change or a big win game, until a predetermined period (for example, about 20 seconds) has elapsed.

In addition, in the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, in addition to the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600, the notification by the function display unit 1400 is also executed as the setting change notification described above. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permission state) and a confirmation display indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being confirmed (confirmation display state), in addition to the status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special hold number indicator, and round indicator. In the change permission state, only the LED of the setting change indicator in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the LEDs of the other indicators are turned off. As a result, in the change permission state, it is possible to know that the game is not progressing by the notification by the function display unit 1400.

In addition, during the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, when a game ball B enters various winning ports such as the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the large winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, or the gate section 2003, even if the main control MPU inputs a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, a warning effect A is executed by outputting an image, a lamp, or a speaker of the effect display device 1600, notifying that a game ball B has entered various winning ports or gate sections, even though it is not a period in which play should be performed in the change permission state. This warning effect A is executed with priority over a setting change notification or a main frame opening notification. In other words, when the warning effect A is executed, the warning effect A is executed with the highest priority without a setting change notification or a main frame opening notification.

In addition, during normal times when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is not in a state where the setting key is turned ON. However, when the setting key is turned ON, the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600 output warning effects B and C to notify that the setting key is turned ON illegally. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state where the setting key is turned ON while the pattern is changing during normal times, the warning effect B is executed until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state where the setting key is turned ON while the pattern is not changing during normal times, the warning effect C is executed until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. In addition, the warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the currently executed effects. In other words, when the warning effects B and C are executed, the currently executed effects are stopped regardless of whether the pattern is changing or not, and the warning effects B and C are executed with the highest priority. Note that warning effects B and C are performed in the same manner, but they may be performed in different manners so that it is possible to determine whether or not a pattern change is occurring.

In this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts peripheral control power-on processing, making it possible to detect the operation of the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) and gradually adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as the lamp and the screen of the performance display device 1600. In other words, during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, the operation of the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is detectable and gradually adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as the lamp and the screen of the performance display device 1600. Specifically, by pressing and holding the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), an adjustment image (either a volume gauge image showing five levels of adjustment status or a light intensity gauge image depending on the length of time the performance operation unit 160 is pressed) is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and then the volume and light intensity are adjusted stepwise (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 → 2 ...) each time the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is pressed briefly, and the volume and light intensity can be confirmed by not operating the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) for a predetermined period of time. However, during the period when a performance using the performance operation unit 160 is being performed during the pattern change, the performance operation unit 160 is in a waiting state for operation for that performance, so even if the performance operation unit 160 is operated, this is a prohibited period during which the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted.

In this example, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts peripheral control power-on processing, and the initial operation of the performance members (e.g., the performance operation unit 160 and the multiple rotating decorations 3210) mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. In other words, during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, the special pattern display of the function display unit 1400 is in a state where it is not possible to perform a variable display of the special pattern (non-variable state A), and the initial operation of the performance members (e.g., the performance operation unit 160 and the multiple rotating decorations 3210) mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. Each of these performance members is a member that can operate between an initial position and an operating position, and the initial operation of the performance members checks whether the performance members operate normally from the initial position toward the operating position, and accurately aligns the performance members so that they wait at the initial position. Then, after the end of the change permission state at timing t4, it is possible to execute a performance using the performance members. For example, if a variation pattern (variation pattern command) that is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is a variation pattern that is set to use a performance element during pattern variation, the performance element is caused to move from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the pattern variation.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, if the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on and the setting value is not changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed, the timing of executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is not delayed as in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the main control side timer interrupt processing is started by executing the interrupt permission setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 is immediately in a state (changeable state) in which the special pattern display of the function display unit 1400 can display the change of the special pattern. However, in such a case, since the changeable state is entered without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the performance member mounted on the main frame 4 or the game board 5, for example, during the initial operation of the performance member after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, if a change pattern in which a performance using the performance member is set during the pattern change is transmitted, the performance member cannot be operated from the initial position to the operating position based on the change pattern, and the opportunity to operate the performance member may be lost. In contrast, in this example, during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is in a state where it is not possible to perform a variable display of the special symbol (non-variable state A), but the initial operation of the performance members mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is being performed, so that when the change permission state ends and the game transitions to a variable state, it is highly likely that the initial operation of the performance members will have been completed. As a result, even if a variation pattern in which a performance using the performance members is set during pattern variation is transmitted after the change permission state ends, the performance members can be operated from their initial position to their operating position based on that variation pattern without being affected by the initial operation of the performance members, so that information obtained from the performance content is not missed.

However, the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 requires a certain amount of time (e.g., 30 seconds) to complete. For this reason, in the change-permitted state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 before the initial operation of the effect members is completed, it will be possible to execute the effect using the effect members after waiting for the initial operation of the effect members to be completed. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned OFF at timing t4 either before or after the initial operation of the effect members is completed, and in either case, the pattern can be changed at the point in time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4.

As shown in FIG. 155, in this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts peripheral control power-on processing, making it possible to display a predetermined image on the screen of the performance display device 1600. Then, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the pattern display (decorative pattern display) on the screen of the performance display device 1600 is erased, and a confirmation display notification is executed to notify that the confirmation display of the setting value is being executed by outputting the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600, as in the change permission state. As the confirmation display notification, a voice repeating "Confirmation display in progress", a message display of "Confirmation display in progress!", and lamp illumination in a color corresponding to the set setting value 1 to 6 are executed. In addition, the confirmation display notification is an announcement (performance) that is executed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame open notification that is executed in a state in which the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. That is, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, a main frame open notification (such as a display or sound of "The frame is open") is normally made, but in the confirmation display state, the confirmation display notification is executed as the top priority without making the main frame open notification. Note that an example is where the main frame open notification and the confirmation display notification are executed in parallel, with the confirmation display notification being given priority over the main frame open notification, and the main frame open notification is executed after the confirmation display notification has ended. Then, after the confirmation display state ends at timing t4, a game start notification is executed by the image, lamp, and speaker output of the performance display device 1600, notifying the player that it is now possible to start playing games such as pattern variation and jackpot play, until a predetermined period of time (for example, about 20 seconds) has elapsed.

After the confirmation display state at timing t4 ends, the jackpot game that was interrupted when the power was cut off is resumed, and the jackpot game door 2413 and the allocation piece 2415 can be operated, which is a trigger. As shown in FIG. 156, when the jackpot game is resumed, a jackpot game restart notification is executed by the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600, which notifies the user that the jackpot game that was interrupted when the power was cut off is resumed and the jackpot game door 2413 and the allocation piece 2415 are operated. Before the jackpot game is resumed, a jackpot game standby notification may be executed by the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600, which notifies the user that the jackpot game that was interrupted when the power was cut off is waiting to be executed, that is, the jackpot game door 2413 and the allocation piece 2415 are waiting to be operated. This allows the handle 182 to be operated before the big win game is restarted to prepare for the launch of the game ball B, and the game ball B can be efficiently placed into the big win opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008 immediately after the big win game is restarted.

In addition, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, in addition to the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600, the notification by the function display unit 1400 is also executed as the confirmation display notification described above. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permission state) and a confirmation display indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being confirmed (confirmation display state). In the confirmation display state, only the LED of the confirmation display indicator in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the LEDs of the other indicators are turned off. As a result, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to know that the game will not proceed by the notification from the function display unit 1400.

In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, when the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, and the second receiving opening 2008, or the gate section 2003, even if the main control MPU inputs a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, a warning effect A is executed by outputting an image, a lamp, or a speaker of the effect display device 1600, notifying that the game ball B has entered the various winning openings or the gate section, even though it is not a period in which play should be performed in the confirmation display state. This warning effect A is executed with priority over a confirmation display in progress notification or a main frame open notification. In other words, when the warning effect A is executed, the warning effect A is executed with the highest priority without a confirmation display in progress notification or a main frame open notification.

In addition, during normal times when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is not in a state where the setting key is turned ON. However, when the setting key is turned ON, the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600 output warning effects B and C to notify that the setting key is turned ON illegally. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state where the setting key is turned ON while the pattern is changing during normal times, the warning effect B is executed until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state where the setting key is turned ON while the pattern is not changing during normal times, the warning effect C is executed until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. In addition, the warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the currently executed effects. In other words, when the warning effects B and C are executed, the currently executed effects are stopped regardless of whether the pattern is changing or not, and the warning effects B and C are executed with the highest priority. Note that warning effects B and C are performed in the same manner, but they may be performed in different manners so that it is possible to determine whether or not a pattern change is occurring.

In this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts peripheral control power-on processing, making it possible to detect the operation of the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) and gradually adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as the lamp and the screen of the performance display device 1600. In other words, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, the operation of the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) can be detected and gradually adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as the lamp and the screen of the performance display device 1600. Specifically, by pressing and holding the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), an adjustment image (either a volume gauge image showing five levels of adjustment status or a light intensity gauge image depending on the length of time the performance operation unit 160 is pressed) is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and then the volume and light intensity are adjusted stepwise (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 → 2 ...) each time the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is pressed briefly, and the volume and light intensity can be confirmed by not operating the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) for a predetermined period of time. However, during the period when a performance using the performance operation unit 160 is being performed during the pattern change, the performance operation unit 160 is in a waiting state for operation for that performance, so even if the performance operation unit 160 is operated, this is a prohibited period during which the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted.

In this example, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts peripheral control power-on processing, and the initial operation of the performance members (e.g., the performance operation unit 160 and the multiple rotating decorations 3210) mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. In other words, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, similar to the change permission state, the special pattern display of the function display unit 1400 is in a state where it is not possible to perform a variable display of the special pattern (non-variable state A), and the initial operation of the performance members (e.g., the performance operation unit 160 and the multiple rotating decorations 3210) mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. Each of these performance members is a member that can operate between an initial position and an operating position, and in the initial operation of the performance members, each of the performance members is operated sequentially or simultaneously in a predetermined operating pattern to check whether the performance members operate normally from the initial position to the operating position, and to accurately align the performance members so that they wait in the initial position. After the confirmation display state ends at timing t4, it is possible to execute a performance using the performance member. For example, if a change pattern (change pattern command) in which a performance using the performance member is set during pattern change is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the performance member is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the pattern change.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, if the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on and the setting value is not changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed, the timing of executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is not delayed as in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the main control side timer interrupt processing is started by executing the interrupt permission setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 is immediately in a state (changeable state) in which the special pattern display of the function display unit 1400 can display the change of the special pattern. However, in such a case, since the changeable state is entered without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the performance member mounted on the main frame 4 or the game board 5, for example, during the initial operation of the performance member after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, if a change pattern in which a performance using the performance member is set during the pattern change is transmitted, the performance member cannot be operated from the initial position to the operating position based on the change pattern, and the opportunity to operate the performance member may be lost. In contrast, in this example, during the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is in a state where it is not possible to perform a variable display of the special symbol (non-variable state A), but the initial operation of the performance members mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is being performed, so that when the changeable state is entered after the confirmation display state ends, the initial operation of the performance members is likely to be completed. As a result, even if a change pattern in which a performance using the performance member is set during pattern change is transmitted after the confirmation display state ends, the performance member can be moved from the initial position to the operating position based on the change pattern without being affected by the initial operation of the performance member, so that information obtained from the performance content is not missed.

However, the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 requires a certain amount of time (e.g., 30 seconds) to complete. Therefore, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 before the initial operation of the effect members is completed, it will be possible to execute the effect using the effect members after waiting for the initial operation of the effect members to be completed. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned OFF at timing t4 either before or after the initial operation of the effect members is completed, and in either case, it is possible to perform the pattern change at the point in time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4.

In addition, when the main frame 4 and the game board 5 are each equipped with a performance member, the initial operation of at least the performance member mounted on the game board 5 may be executed first, and the initial operation of the performance member mounted on the main frame 4 may be delayed until "after the main frame 4 is closed at timing t5". This means that the main frame 4 is in an open state while the setting value is being changed or while the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, and an impact is generated on the main frame 4 by the closing operation of the main frame 4 after the setting value is changed or the setting value display for confirmation is completed. For this reason, when the main frame 4 is closed, there is a possibility that the performance member mounted on the main frame 4 may not operate normally or may be displaced from its initial position. However, by starting the initial operation of the performance member mounted on the main frame 4 after the main frame 4 is closed, it becomes possible to deal with such a situation.

In addition, if the initial operation of each of the performance members mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is not completed normally after the initial operation of each of the performance members is performed sequentially or simultaneously (when there is a performance member that is not detected at the initial position at the specified time by the origin detection sensor that detects the initial position of each performance member, or when there is a performance member that is not detected at the initial position at the specified time even after the initial operation or retry operation that is performed when there is a performance member that is not detected at the initial position at the specified time), the performance using the performance member that was not completed normally is restricted not to be executed during the pattern change. Here, as described above, if the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1 and the setting value is not changed or the setting value is not displayed for confirmation, the pachinko machine 1 will be in a state where the special pattern display of the function display unit 1400 can display the change of the special pattern (changeable state) immediately after the power is turned on, and the initial operation of the performance member will be performed. In this example, if the initial operation of the effect members is not completed normally under such circumstances, it may cause the player to feel uncomfortable as the effect members remain stopped in a position different from the initial position while the special pattern is being displayed, which may reduce the interest of the player. Therefore, if the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON position when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1 and the setting value is not changed or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, at a predetermined time after the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1 (the time when the initial operation of each effect member is assumed to be completed and they are located in their initial positions), if any of the effect members are not detected in their initial positions, an initial position error is notified to the outside by an image, lamp, or output from the speaker of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, when the performance member is not detected in the initial position by the initial operation during the setting change of the setting value (change permission state) or during the confirmation display of the setting value (confirmation display state), in order to avoid the obstruction of the normal setting change or confirmation display work, the initial position error notification is suppressed so as not to be performed even if the performance member remains stopped in a position different from the initial position. After the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, the initial position error notification is performed to the outside by the output from the image, lamp, or speaker of the performance display device 1600. Note that the initial position error notification is started after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, but it may be specified to start in advance from the point when the performance member is not detected in the initial position by the initial operation. Also, when the performance member is not detected in the initial position by the initial operation, it may be specified to execute in advance only the notification (for example, lamp) of the image, lamp, or speaker output of the performance display device 1600 that does not obstruct the normal setting change or confirmation display work.

As a modified example of the above, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on regardless of whether the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the special symbol variable display is disabled, and the initial operation of the performance members (e.g., the performance operation part 160 and the multiple rotating ornaments 3210) mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed while preventing the game from proceeding, while the setting value setting change and the confirmation display of the setting value are not performed. Also, an operation part other than the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a may be provided, and when the hall clerk operates the other operation part ON, the special symbol variable display is disabled until the operation is turned OFF, and the game progress after the hall clerk operates the other operation part ON is prevented, while the initial operation of the performance members mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. Even in such a case, if a change pattern is transmitted that sets a performance using the performance element during the pattern change after the hall staff turns off the operation, the performance element can be moved from its initial position to its operating position based on the change pattern without being affected by the initial operation of the performance element, and information obtained from the performance content can be avoided.

As described above, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the performance display device 1600. More specifically, when changing the setting value or checking the setting value, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on processing, but before starting the setting change processing of step S37 or the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28, the wait time standby processing of step S22 is performed. In this wait time standby processing, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 waits until it starts (boots). In this embodiment, the waiting time until booting (boot timer) is set to 10 seconds (s). The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) completes the initialization process for starting (booting) the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, and is in a state in which it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). In this way, at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the peripheral control MPU has already completed the initialization process for starting (booting) the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510, so it is possible to detect the operation of the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), and it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the performance display device 1600.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting elements such as lamps and the screen of the performance display device 1600 are returned to their initial state (for example, a state in which the volume and light amount are at their median values) because the information regarding the volume and light amount before the power was cut off is not retained. Therefore, the volume and light amount after power is turned on will change to a state different from the volume and light amount that were adjusted before the power was cut off.

When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the change permission state and confirmation display state are ended, and after the change permission state and confirmation display state are ended, a changeable state is entered in which the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can display a changeable special symbol. In other words, before the player can start playing in the changeable state, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting elements such as the lamps and the screen of the performance display device 1600. For example, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, if a change pattern (change pattern command) in which a predetermined effect is set during the pattern change is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, sound (game sound) is output from the speaker based on the information set in the effect during the pattern change, or light is output from a light-emitting member such as a lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600. However, if such an effect is started before the light amount or volume is adjusted, the volume and light amount will be output in the initial state, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. In this respect, in this example, by making it possible to adjust the volume and light amount prior to the player being able to start playing in the changeable state, the volume and light amount can be changed from the initial state before the player starts playing, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the volume and light amount in the initial state after the player starts playing.

In this example, by pressing and holding the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), an image for adjustment (either a volume gauge image showing five levels of adjustment status or a light intensity gauge image depending on the time of pressing and holding) is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and then the volume and light intensity are adjusted stepwise (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 → 2 ...) by pressing the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) for a short time, and the volume and light intensity can be confirmed by not operating the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) for a predetermined time. In the changeable state, when the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is operated, a predetermined change sound is output from the speaker as the volume and light intensity are changed. In contrast, before the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, when the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is operated, it is possible to change the volume and light intensity, but the predetermined change sound is not output from the speaker. This is because it is assumed that the hall manager will be changing the settings or displaying confirmation of the settings during the change permission state or confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, and the hall manager's work efficiency is prioritized over the need to output a change sound to inform players that the volume or light intensity has been changed, and the occurrence of events that would impede the work of the hall manager is suppressed. Note that when the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is operated to change the light intensity, light is output from light-emitting elements such as lamps and the screen of the performance display device 1600 at the changed light intensity, but this is not an event that would impede the work of the hall manager, and is therefore not prohibited even in the change permission state or confirmation display state.

In addition, in this example, when an operation to change the volume or light intensity is performed using the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) in the variable display state, the adjusted volume and light intensity are immediately reflected at that time to be output. In contrast, before the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform an operation to change the volume or light intensity using the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), but at that time, the adjusted volume and light intensity is not reflected to be output, and the adjusted volume and light intensity is reflected to be output after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. In other words, during the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as will be described in detail later, an alarm is issued to the outside to prevent unauthorized acts by anyone other than the hall manager, but the image, lamp, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600 during such an alarm cannot be adjusted to the adjusted volume or light intensity, and are set to fixed volume and light intensity. This prevents situations from occurring in which it becomes difficult to notice an ongoing alarm even if an operation to change the volume or light intensity is performed using the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) in the change permission state or confirmation display state, and prevents the fraud monitoring system from being weakened.

As described above, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, an alarm is issued to the outside to prevent unauthorized conduct by anyone other than the hall manager, but as will be described in detail later, it is possible to extend the alarm even after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends. When the alarm is extended after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, it is possible to use the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) to change the volume or light intensity during the execution of the extended alarm, but at that point, the adjusted volume or light intensity is not reflected as the output, and the adjusted volume or light intensity is reflected after the extended alarm ends. In other words, the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600 during the extended alarm is not adjusted to the adjusted volume or light intensity, but is set to a fixed volume and light intensity. As a result, in the same way as in the change permission state or confirmation display state, when the alarm is extended and executed after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, even if an operation to change the volume or light intensity is performed using the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which it becomes difficult to notice the extended alarm being executed, and to prevent the fraud monitoring system from being weakened.

In addition, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform an operation to change the volume or light intensity using the performance operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), and after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, the adjusted volume and light intensity are reflected as being output, but for some of the multiple lamps, the adjusted volume and light intensity may be reflected as being output when the operation to change the volume or light intensity is performed. For example, for lamps used for warning alerts among the multiple lamps, the adjusted volume and light intensity may not be reflected as being output when the operation to change the volume or light intensity is performed in order to maintain the fraud monitoring system, and for all or some of the lamps not used for warning alerts, the adjusted volume and light intensity may be reflected as being output when the operation to change the volume or light intensity is performed.

[13-4. Fraud monitoring]
In this embodiment, various types of fraudulent acts are monitored in the fraudulent act detection process in step S112 described above. Specifically, a magnetic sensor 2470 is provided to detect fraudulent acts such as bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 to make the ball enter various winning holes and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5, and the main control MPU determines whether or not there is fraudulent act based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470, monitors the fraudulent act caused by the magnet, transmits the monitoring result to the peripheral control MPU, and causes the peripheral control MPU to perform fraud-related error processing. In addition, a vibration sensor is provided to detect fraudulent acts such as shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 to cause the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 to change its course and enter various winning holes and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5, so that the main control MPU determines whether or not there is fraudulent act based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, monitors the fraudulent act caused by vibration, transmits the monitoring result to the peripheral control MPU, and causes the peripheral control MPU to perform fraud-related error processing. Regarding the monitoring of such fraudulent acts, the monitoring mode is different between normal times (when the setting value is not changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed) and when the setting value is changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is performed.

In this example, a single magnetic sensor 2470 is provided to detect fraudulent activity using magnets, and is capable of identifying the location where the magnetism is generated (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the game board 5, or in front of the game area 5a located at the front of the game board 5). Under normal circumstances, the magnetic sensor 2470 monitors whether a magnetic field that should not normally occur (magnetic field due to unauthorized access) has occurred (whether a magnet is approaching) in the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a are located, and monitors for fraudulent activity such as someone other than the person changing the setting value or attempting to change the setting or display a confirmation message, and also monitors whether a magnetic field that should not normally occur (magnetic field due to unauthorized access) has occurred (whether a magnet is approaching) in the area in front of the game area 5a, and monitors for fraudulent activity such as changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a to cause the ball to enter the various winning holes and gate sections (gates) provided on the game board 5. An example of fraudulent conduct using magnets on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 would be to install a metal fraudulent device and a magnet that indirectly operates the metal fraudulent device inside the island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed), and then operate the magnet and metal fraudulent device through a small gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment or through an opening created by destroying part of the pachinko machine 1, thereby fraudulently accessing the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

When a detection signal is input from the magnetic sensor 2470 in the fraud detection process of step S112, it is determined that fraudulent activity using a magnet is occurring. If it is determined that fraudulent activity using a magnet is occurring, the main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, so that the hall staff can become aware that fraudulent activity is occurring.

In addition, the magnetic sensor 2470 in this example, although not shown, is composed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and is capable of performing magnetic detection in a first magnetic detection area having a directivity with strong sensitivity in the vertical direction relative to one side surface, and magnetic detection in a second magnetic detection area having a directivity with strong sensitivity in the vertical direction relative to the other side surface on the opposite side. Note that "strong sensitivity in the vertical direction" means that the sensitivity is stronger in the vertical direction relative to each side surface compared to the horizontal direction, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction at all. In other words, the magnetic detection areas emitted from each side surface are wide areas surrounded by a sphere. The magnetic sensor 2470 is arranged so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emanating from the side of the sensor body extend in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, with one magnetic detection area encompassing the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and allowing the magnetic detection area to monitor multiple locations on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the large winning opening 2005, as well as other major parts of the ball flow path, and the other magnetic detection area encompassing the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and allowing the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided to be monitored. With this configuration, it is possible to monitor whether a magnet is approaching the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, or whether a magnet is approaching the area in front of the play area 5a.

In this example, a vibration sensor 3004 capable of detecting the occurrence of vibrations around the distribution piece 2415 inside the large prize opening 2005 provided on the game board 5 is provided as a vibration sensor 3005 for detecting fraudulent behavior due to vibration. The vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor fraudulent behavior only during a jackpot game during normal play, and is not used to monitor fraudulent behavior during other than a jackpot game. This is because, during a jackpot game, the distribution piece 2415 distributes the game ball B that is received by the large prize opening 2005 and circulates inside to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008, but when vibration is applied to the distribution piece 2415, it becomes possible to change the course of the game ball B inside the large prize opening 2005 and cause the game ball B to enter the second receiving opening 2008, and this is to prevent such fraudulent behavior. In other words, during normal play when a jackpot is being played, the vibration sensor 3005 monitors whether vibrations that should not occur (vibrations caused by unauthorized access) have been applied to the area around the distribution piece 2415 inside the large prize opening 2005, and monitors for fraudulent behavior such as changing the course of game ball B inside the large prize opening 2005 to cause game ball B to enter the second receiving opening 2008.

When a detection signal is input from the vibration sensor 3005 in the fraud detection process of step S112, it is determined that fraudulent activity using vibration is occurring around the distribution pieces 2415 inside the large prize opening 2005. If it is determined that fraudulent activity using vibration is occurring around the distribution pieces 2415 inside the large prize opening 2005, the main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, so that the hall staff can become aware that fraudulent activity is occurring.

The security signal output when it is determined that a fraudulent act using vibration has occurred is the same as the security signal output when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet has occurred. However, when it is determined that a fraudulent act using vibration has occurred and a security signal is output, the notification manner when an external notification is made by the fraud-related error processing controlled by the peripheral control MPU is different between when it is determined that a fraudulent act using vibration has occurred and a security signal is output and when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet has occurred. That is, when it is determined that a fraudulent act using vibration has occurred and a security signal is output, a notification is made by an image, a lamp, or an output from a speaker of the performance display device 1600 in a manner corresponding to the fraudulent act using a magnet, whereas when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet has occurred and a security signal is output, a notification is made by an image, a lamp, or an output from a speaker of the performance display device 1600 in a manner corresponding to the fraudulent act using a magnet, so that it is possible to distinguish which type of fraudulent act has occurred.

Next, the monitoring of fraudulent activity while changing the setting value or while the setting value is being displayed for confirmation will be described with reference to Figs. 157 and 158. Fig. 157 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity while changing the setting value, and Fig. 158 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity while the setting value is being displayed for confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 157, during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 is not performed. This is because, during the change permission state, the authorized worker who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the RWM clear button 633z of the dispensing control board 633, which functions as a setting switch button, and there is no room for anyone other than the authorized worker who changes the setting value to commit fraudulent activity using a magnet. Furthermore, even if the authorized worker who changes the setting value has something that can generate magnetism when changing the setting value, this prevents the unauthorized activity from being detected as fraudulent activity using a magnet, and inhibits disruption of authorized setting change work.

In addition, during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring for fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. This is because, during the change permission state, the authorized worker who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the RWM clear button 633z of the dispensing control board 633, which functions as a setting switch button, and there is no room for anyone other than the authorized worker who changes the setting to commit fraudulent activity through vibration. Also, even if the authorized worker who changes the setting applies vibration when changing the setting value, this prevents it from being detected as fraudulent activity through vibration, and inhibits disruption of authorized setting change work.

In this example, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON position, and the power switch 630a is operated while the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1, thereby making it possible to change the setting value (change permission state). At the time when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, that is, when the change permission state is started, the main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, at the time when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF position at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state is ended, the main control MPU also outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, when changing the setting value, a security signal is output to the hall computer twice after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. This security signal is the same as the signal output to the hall computer when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input in a state where the magnetic sensor 2470 is used to monitor for fraudulent acts by magnets, and it is determined that fraudulent acts by vibration are occurring, or when a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input in a state where the vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor for fraudulent acts by vibration, and it is determined that fraudulent acts by vibration are occurring. However, during the change permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraudulent acts by the magnetic sensor 2470 and monitoring of fraudulent acts by the vibration sensor 3005 are not performed, and even in such a state where monitoring of fraudulent acts is not performed, a security signal is output to the hall computer to warn the monitoring of the pachinko machine 1 through the hall computer, and the hall staff can be made aware through the hall computer that the setting values are being changed legitimately. In other words, the hall staff can monitor through the hall computer that the setting values are not being changed by a person committing fraud. In addition, at the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned to the setting key OFF at timing t4, the main control MPU outputs a second security signal, and this second security signal allows the hall staff to know through the hall computer that the setting change of the setting value has been completed.

Note that the security signal may be output to the hall computer for a period of time that the hall computer can recognize, and the period from timing t3 to timing t3' may be short (e.g., 1 second or less) or long (e.g., 10 seconds or more). However, if the security signal output period is long, the first security signal output at timing t3 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, i.e., when the change permission state is started, may not have ended at the time when the setting key switch 1311a is set to setting key OFF at timing t4, i.e., when the change permission state is ended. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a may be set to setting key OFF at timing t4 before the arrival of timing t3' when the output of the first security signal ends. In this way, if the output of the first security signal has not ended at the time when the setting key switch 1311a is set to setting key OFF at timing t4, i.e., when the change permission state is ended, the second security signal is output after a predetermined interval time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed after the output of the first security signal has ended. In other words, the output of the second security signal is delayed until the output of the first security signal is completed. This ensures that the security signal is output twice to the hall computer even if the output of the first security signal has not yet finished when the setting key switch 1311a is set to setting key OFF at timing t4, i.e., when the change permission state is terminated.

As another example of the case where the above-mentioned predetermined interval period is not provided, the following may be used. That is, if the output of the first security signal has not ended at the time when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF at timing t4, that is, at the time when the change permission state is ended, the timing of the security signal may be started anew from that time (the timer that counts the signal output time may be set again), and the first security signal and the second security signal may be output in a continuous manner. In this case, the security signal is output for a long period of time that exceeds the predetermined maximum output time (the output time of the first security signal), and the hall staff can be informed that the setting change of the setting value has been completed through the output of the security signal for a long period of time, as when the second security signal is output. Note that, if it is not necessary to inform the hall staff that the setting change has been completed through the hall computer using the output mode of the security signal due to the environment of the game hall, the second security signal itself may be canceled without being output based on the operation of a predetermined switch or the like.

As shown in FIG. 158, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 is not performed, as in the change permitted state. This is because in the confirmation display state, the authorized worker performing the confirmation display of the set value is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and there is no room for anyone other than the authorized worker performing the confirmation display of the set value to perform fraudulent activity using a magnet. Also, even if the authorized worker performing the confirmation display of the set value has something that can generate magnetism when performing the confirmation display of the set value, this prevents detection of fraudulent activity using a magnet, and inhibits disruption of authorized confirmation display work.

In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring for fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed, as in the change permitted state. This is because in the confirmation display state, the authorized worker performing the confirmation display of the set value is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and there is no room for anyone other than the authorized worker performing the confirmation display to perform fraudulent activity using vibration. Also, even if the authorized worker performing the confirmation display applies vibration when performing the confirmation display of the set value, this prevents detection of fraudulent activity using vibration, and inhibits disruption of authorized confirmation display work.

In addition, in this example, by turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON and operating the power switch 630a to power on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the state becomes one in which it is possible to display a confirmation of the setting value (confirmation display state), but when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, that is, when the confirmation display state begins, the main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, at the end of the change permitted state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned to setting key OFF at timing t4, the main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, whereas at the end of the confirmation display state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned to setting key OFF at timing t4, the main control MPU does not output a security signal to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, when changing the setting value, the security signal is output to the hall computer twice, whereas when performing a confirmation display of the setting value, the security signal is output to the hall computer only once. As a result, during the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 are not being used to monitor for fraudulent activities. Even when such fraudulent activity monitoring is not being performed, a security signal is output to the hall computer to warn the pachinko machine 1 through the hall computer, and the hall staff can be made aware through the hall computer that the setting value confirmation display is being performed properly. In other words, the hall staff can monitor through the hall computer that the setting value confirmation display is not being performed by a person committing fraud. Note that when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF at timing t4, the main control MPU does not output a second security signal as in the change permission state, making it possible to distinguish whether a setting value change or a setting value confirmation display has been performed.

In addition, when a security signal is output to the hall computer after it is determined that fraudulent activity using magnets or vibrations is occurring, a notification is sent from the image, lamps, and speaker of the performance display device 1600 as an external notification in the error-related processing controlled by the peripheral control MPU based on the monitoring results sent from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU, whereas when a security signal is output to the hall computer when a setting value is changed (change permitted state) or when a setting value is confirmed (confirmation display state), no information regarding the monitoring results is sent to the peripheral control MPU, and no notification is sent from the image, lamps, or speaker of the performance display device 1600 as an external notification in the error-related processing controlled by the peripheral control MPU. This also makes it possible to avoid impeding the work of legitimate setting changes and confirmation displays.

As a modification of the above, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on regardless of whether the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the period during which the monitoring of fraudulent activities using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed until the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF may be set, while the setting value may not be changed or the confirmation display of the setting value may not be performed. Also, an operation part other than the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a may be provided, and when the hall staff operates the other operation part to ON, the period during which the monitoring of fraudulent activities using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed may be set. Even in such a case, even if a regular worker who is inspecting the pachinko machine 1 approaches the machine or applies vibrations, it is possible to prevent the magnet or vibration from being detected as fraudulent activities, and to suppress the obstruction of regular inspection work. Furthermore, at least at the start of the period in which monitoring for fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed, a security signal is output to the hall computer, just as at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, so that the hall computer can warn the pachinko machine 1 of monitoring, and hall staff can be made aware through the hall computer that inspection work is being performed legitimately.

In this example, one magnetic sensor capable of identifying the location where magnetism is generated (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the game board 5, or in front of the game area 5a located at the front of the game board 5) is provided as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent behavior using magnets. However, multiple magnetic sensors may be provided so that each magnetic sensor can detect the generation of magnetism, for example, in front of the game area 5a located at the front of the game board 5, or around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the game board 5. In this configuration, similar to the configuration with one magnetic sensor 2470 described above, multiple magnetic sensors are used to monitor for fraudulent activity under normal circumstances, but in the change permission state or confirmation display state, multiple magnetic sensors may not be used to monitor for fraudulent activity. However, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, only some of the multiple magnetic sensors (for example, magnetic sensors provided around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a) may be used to monitor for fraudulent activity.

Similarly, in this example, one vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibrations around the distribution piece 2415 inside the large prize opening 2005 provided in the game board 5 is provided as the vibration sensor 3005 for detecting fraudulent activity due to vibration, but multiple vibration sensors may be provided so that, for example, in addition to the vicinity of the distribution piece 2415 inside the large prize opening 2005, each vibration sensor can also detect the occurrence of vibrations around ball entry openings other than the large prize opening 2005 located on the front side of the game board 5, and around the setting change board 13111 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. In this configuration, under normal circumstances, multiple vibration sensors are used to monitor for fraudulent activity (however, the vibration sensors installed around the distribution piece 2415 inside the large prize opening 2005 are only used during jackpot play), whereas in the change permission state or confirmation display state, multiple vibration sensors may not be used to monitor for fraudulent activity, or in the change permission state or confirmation display state, only some of the multiple vibration sensors (for example, the vibration sensors installed around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a) may be used to monitor for fraudulent activity.

In addition, fraudulent activity caused by magnets or vibrations may be detected during security signal transmission immediately after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state (immediately after the monitoring of fraudulent activity has started). In such a case, it is feared that an important security signal based on the detection of fraudulent activity cannot be output, and the fraud monitoring system may be weakened. In order to prevent such a situation, the following may be done. That is, the output timing of the security signal based on the detection of fraudulent activity may be delayed until the output period of the second security signal in the change permission state or the output period of the first security signal in the confirmation display state has elapsed, so that the output timing of the security signal based on the detection of fraudulent activity does not overlap. Specifically, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the monitoring of fraudulent activity is immediately started, but if an opportunity to output a new security signal (detection of fraudulent activity) occurs during the output period of the second security signal in the change permission state or the output period of the first security signal in the confirmation display state, the output of the new security signal may not be discarded, but the output information of the new security signal may be stored and held until the output of the security signal output earlier is completed, and the new security signal may be output later than the original output timing. According to such an embodiment, the output of a security signal based on the detection of actual fraudulent activity is not discarded, and the occurrence of a situation in which the fraud monitoring system is weakened can be suppressed. As another example, the start time of fraud monitoring itself can be extended until the end of the output period of the second security signal in the change permission state or the output period of the first security signal in the confirmation display state. According to such an embodiment, the output of a security signal based on the detection of actual fraudulent activity is not discarded, and the occurrence of a situation in which the fraud monitoring system is weakened can be suppressed.

[14. Command transmission process]
As described above, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and the payout control board 633 attached to the main frame 4, and each of them is responsible for control. Of these, the main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game), while the peripheral control board 1510 controls various presentations during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310. Specifically, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets information on the control of the game presentation and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in a predetermined memory area (exclusive area for storing commands, command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM at a predetermined timing, and sequentially transmits the set commands to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can also grasp information on the control of the game presentation and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the setting values are changed or the installation values are displayed for confirmation, information regarding the control of the game presentation and information regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1 are set as various commands in a specified memory area of the main control built-in RAM, but only a portion of the commands are sent immediately to the peripheral control board 1510 while the change permission state or confirmation display state is in progress, and the remaining commands are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends.

First, the timing of sending commands when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. 159(A) is a time chart showing the timing of sending commands when the pachinko machine 1 is normally powered on (when no changes are made to the setting values or no confirmation display of the setting values is made), and FIG. 159(B) is a time chart showing the timing of sending commands when the setting values are changed or a confirmation display is made when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Note that in this example, at least the switch input process of step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process is started at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and when the game ball B enters the various winning holes or gate section 2003, the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors.

As shown in FIG. 159, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 111. Then, during the period from timing t3 to timing ty, as explained in the above-mentioned [Behavior of the pachinko machine when power is turned on], the processing of steps S10 to S24 of the main control side power-on processing is executed, and when timing ty arrives, it determines which combination of the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is (steps S25 to S27). In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value 1, a predetermined setting value change permission condition is met, and the process proceeds to the setting change processing of step S37 to set the setting permission state. Also, when the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 0, it initializes the main control built-in RAM in step S38 and then sets it to a variable state. Also, when the main control MPU determines in step S27 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 1, a predetermined setting value display permission condition is established, and the main control MPU proceeds to a setting value confirmation display process in step S28 and sets it to a confirmation display state. Also, when the main control MPU determines in step S27 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 0, it sets it to a variable state without initializing the main control built-in RAM in step S38. As described above, the variable state is a state in which the special symbol can be displayed variably on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 by starting the main control timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric role control process of step S114) by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52.

As mentioned above, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) completes the initialization process for starting up (booting) the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before timing ty, which is the point at which the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, and is therefore in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) from timing ty onwards.

As shown in FIG. 159(A), if the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on at the time of timing t3, and it is assumed that the power is turned on normally, and the setting value is not changed or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, if the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the time of timing t3, the main control built-in RAM is initialized in step S38 from the time of timing ty and then made variable, whereas if the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the time of timing t3, the main control built-in RAM is made variable without being initialized in step S38 from the time of timing ty. In such a variable state, the main control MPU can set information regarding the control of game performances and information regarding the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the command buffer of the main control built-in RAM, and when these commands are set, they are immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

For example, if the main frame 4 is open at timing ty, the main control MPU sets a door-opening command that specifies that the main frame 4 is open in the command buffer, and immediately sends the door-opening command to the peripheral control board 1510 after setting it. The peripheral control MPU then receives the door-opening command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) and executes a door-opening notification that notifies the user that the main frame 4 is open by using images, lamps, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600 until timing t5, which is the time when the main frame 4 is closed, arrives. This door-opening notification is executed by repeating the sound "Door is open", displaying the message "Door is open!", and emitting a lamp with a brightness higher than normal. In this way, by executing the door-opening notification to the outside while the main frame 4 is open, the hall manager can immediately know that the main frame 4 is open, and the monitoring system can be strengthened to prevent unauthorized acts by anyone other than the hall manager while the main frame 4 is open.

As shown in FIG. 159(B), when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at timing t3 and the setting value is changed or the setting value is displayed for confirmation, if the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is also operated at timing t3, the setting value is changed from timing ty, allowing the setting value to be changed. On the other hand, if the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at timing t3, the setting value is displayed for confirmation from timing ty. Then, in the change-permitted state, the change-permitted state ends at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and from timing t4, the main control built-in RAM is initialized in step S38 and then the change-permitted state is set. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, the confirmation display state ends at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and from that timing t4, the main control internal RAM is made variable without being initialized in step S38.

In the above-mentioned change permission state and confirmation display state, the main control MPU sets information on the control of game performance and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM, but the storage area of the main control built-in RAM to which the commands are set is different depending on the type of command. Specifically, at least in the change permission state and confirmation display state, a first storage area (first command buffer) and a second storage area (second command buffer) are provided as storage areas (command buffers) of the main control built-in RAM, and when a command is set in the first command buffer, the command is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510, while when a command is set in the second command buffer, the command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF arrives, and the command set in the second command buffer is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t4. That is, at least in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, commands that need to be sent immediately to the peripheral control board 1510 are set in the first command buffer, while commands that need to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends at timing t4 are set in the second command buffer.

Except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the main control MPU sets information related to the control of the game presentation and information related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the first command buffer, and when a command is set in the first command buffer, the command is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the command is set in either the first command buffer or the second command buffer, but except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the command is set only in the first command buffer so that all commands are immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. However, except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the first command buffer and the second command buffer may not be differentiated, and when a command is set in the undifferentiated command buffer, the command may be immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

First, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the commands set in the second command buffer include commands related to fraud monitoring, such as a door opening command that identifies that the main frame 4 is open, and an abnormal ball entry command that identifies that a detection itself (abnormal ball entry) occurred when a game ball B enters various winning ports (first start port 2002, second start port 2004, large winning port 2005, etc.) or the gate section 2003 while making the input of a detection signal invalid for a period. Specifically, the door opening command is set in the second command buffer when the main frame 4 is open at timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and when the door opening command is set in the second command buffer, the door opening command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 arrives when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the door opening command set in the second command buffer is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t4. In addition, the abnormal ball entry command is set in the second command buffer when a game ball B is detected (abnormal ball entry) in the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4. When an abnormal ball entry command is set in the second command buffer, the abnormal ball entry command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 arrives, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and at timing t4, the abnormal ball entry command set in the second command buffer is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control MPU receives a door-opening command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, and during the period until timing t5, when the main frame 4 is closed, executes a door-opening notification that notifies the user that the main frame 4 is open, using the images, lamps, and speaker output of the performance display device 1600. This door-opening notification is executed by repeating the sound "Door is open," displaying the message "Door is open!", and illuminating the lamp with a higher brightness than normal. The peripheral control MPU also receives an abnormal ball-entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, and executes an abnormal ball-entry notification that notifies the user that an abnormal ball has been entered into the various winning holes and gate section 2003, using the images, lamps, and speaker output of the performance display device 1600, for a predetermined period from timing t4. The abnormal ball entry notification is performed by repeating the sound "abnormal ball entry," displaying the message "abnormal ball entry!", and lighting up the lamp at a higher brightness than normal. In this way, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, it is monitored whether the main frame 4 is open or not, and whether there has been an abnormal ball entry at the various winning openings or gate section 2003, and after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, a door open notification or an abnormal ball entry notification is sent to the outside, so that the hall manager can know that the main frame 4 is open and that there has been an abnormal ball entry at the various winning openings or gate section 2003. Note that after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, it is possible to simultaneously execute the door open notification and the abnormal ball entry notification, but it is also possible to execute notifications that are suspected of serious fraud (for example, the abnormal ball entry notification) first.

As described above, commands related to fraud monitoring, such as the door open command and the abnormal winning command, are set in the second command buffer in the change permission state or confirmation display state, and the set command is not immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Instead, the command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 arrives when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and at timing t4, the command set in the second command buffer is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. This prevents the hall manager from unintentionally detecting fraud when changing the setting value or displaying the confirmation of the setting value, thereby preventing interference with regular work.

On the other hand, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, commands set in the first command buffer include, as setting-related commands, a setting change command that identifies the start of the change permission state, a setting confirmation command that identifies the start of the confirmation display state, a setting change completion command that identifies the end of the change permission state, and a setting value confirmation display completion command that identifies the end of the confirmation display state. Specifically, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state, and the setting confirmation command is set in the first command buffer at timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, and both commands are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. Similarly, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer at timing t4, which is the end of the change permission state, and the setting value confirmation display completion command is set in the first command buffer at timing t4, which is the end of the confirmation display state, and both commands are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set.

The peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command or a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, and during the period until timing t4 arrives when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the peripheral control MPU issues an alert corresponding to the type of command by using the image, lamp, and speaker output of the performance display device 1600. In other words, during the change permission state and confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, the peripheral control MPU issues an alert corresponding to the type of command by using the image, lamp, and speaker output of the performance display device 1600. As an alert corresponding to a setting change command, a voice repeating "Settings are being changed", a message display of "Settings are being changed!", and a lamp illumination in a color corresponding to the setting value being changed are executed. As an alert corresponding to a setting confirmation command, a voice saying "Settings are being confirmed", a message display of "Settings are being confirmed!", and a lamp illumination in a color corresponding to the setting value being confirmed (a different illumination mode from the lamp illumination in a color corresponding to the setting value being changed). In this way, when in the change permission state or confirmation display state, an external alarm is sent to let the hall manager know right away that it is possible to change the setting value or display a confirmation of the setting value, and the monitoring system can be strengthened to prevent unauthorized acts by anyone other than the hall manager in the change permission state or confirmation display state.

As described above, commands related to settings such as setting change commands and setting confirmation commands are set in the first command buffer at timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state or confirmation display state, and the set commands are immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. In the change permission state or confirmation display state, even if the main frame 4 is open or there is an abnormal ball entry into the various winning openings or gate section 2003, the door open notification and abnormal ball entry notification are delayed until the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, so that it is not a normal fraud monitoring system. However, by sending commands related to settings such as setting change commands and setting confirmation commands (specific commands for warning) to the peripheral control board 1510 prior to the commands set in the second command buffer, the monitoring system can be strengthened to prevent fraudulent acts by anyone other than the hall manager, even in the change permission state or confirmation display state.

When the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command or a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, it issues an alert corresponding to the type of command. In the change permission state, it is possible to change the setting value, and compared to the confirmation display state, it is necessary to strengthen the monitoring system in particular to prevent unauthorized changes to the setting value by anyone other than the hall manager. However, by issuing an alert corresponding to the type of command, the hall manager can accurately determine whether or not it is necessary to strengthen the monitoring system.

In addition, when the peripheral control MPU receives a door-open command or an abnormal ball-entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, it issues a door-open alert or an abnormal ball-entry alert. In these alerts, the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600 is used to notify the user of a specific message, but the speaker also outputs a warning sound such as "beep beep beep" in addition to the sound (such as "The door is open, beep beep beep, the door is open, ..."), and the alert is executed as a combination of "message + warning sound." In contrast, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command or setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, it issues a warning alert corresponding to the type of command. In these alerts, the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600 is used to notify the user of a specific message, but the sound output from the speaker is executed as a voice only, without any warning sound. This means that even if a warning display corresponding to the type of command is executed when changing the setting value or displaying a confirmation of the setting value, the appeal to the outside world can be suppressed compared to the door opening alarm or abnormal ball entry alarm, and the disruption of normal work can be suppressed.

[14-1. Regarding the timing of transmitting game information commands]
In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, in the case where the setting value confirmation display is performed, the process of steps S29 to S36 is performed after the setting value confirmation display process of step S28. In other words, at the end of the confirmation display state (timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), in step S34, various information is read from the game backup information, and game information commands corresponding to the various information are set in a predetermined memory area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM, and the set game information commands are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can also grasp the information on the game before the power was cut off. As a result, after the confirmation display state ends, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 grasps the current game status, the varying display of the special patterns that was suspended at the time the power was cut off, the number of reserved balls stored at the time the power was cut off, etc., and the peripheral control MPU can restore the presentation using images, lamps, and output from the speaker of the presentation display device 1600, and can, for example, resume the varying display of the decorative patterns that was suspended at the time the power was cut off, or resume the display of the number of reserved balls stored at the time the power was cut off.

In this regard, the game information command is set in the second command buffer not at the end of the confirmation display state (at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), but at the start of the confirmation display state (at timing ty), and when the game information command is set in the second command buffer, the game information command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF arrives, and at timing t4, the game information command set in the second command buffer may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The set timing and transmission timing of the game information command when such game backup information is transmitted as the game information command will be described with reference to FIG. 160 and FIG. 161. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the main control side power-on processing. Also, FIG. 161(A) is a time chart showing the timing of sending game information commands when the pachinko machine 1 is normally powered on (when the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated), and FIG. 161(B) is a time chart showing the timing of sending game information commands when a confirmation display of the setting value is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

In this example, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the game backup information is sent as a game information command. However, if the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control built-in RAM is initialized or the setting value is changed, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for specific areas in step S38, so the game backup information is lost and the game backup information is not sent as a game information command.

As shown in FIG. 160, in the main control power-on processing of this example, when the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not equal to 0, it first performs the processing of steps S29 to S36. Of the processing of steps S29 to S36, in step 32, various information is read from the game backup information and game information commands corresponding to this information are set in a specified memory area (command buffer) of the main control's built-in RAM. Then, following the processing of steps S29 to S36, it is determined whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to 1 (step S27). In the judgment of step S27, when the main control MPU judges that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, and thus the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established, it performs the setting value confirmation display process (step S28). That is, before performing the setting value confirmation display process of step S28, it performs the process of step S32, reads out various information from the game backup information, and sets game information commands corresponding to the various information in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM. Furthermore, if steps S29 to S36 are performed after the setting value confirmation display process of step S28, the resumption of play will be delayed by the time it takes to calculate the checksum in step S29 and the time it takes to determine in step S30 whether the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off process (when power is off). However, by performing steps S29 to S36 before performing the setting value confirmation display process of step S28, the time until play is resumed after the setting value confirmation display process of step S28 is performed can be shortened.

As shown in FIG. 161(A), when the power is turned on normally, that is, when the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated at the time of timing t3, the variable state is established from the time of timing ty without initializing the main control built-in RAM in step S38. At the time of timing ty, which is the start of such a variable state, the main control MPU sets the game backup information as a game information command in a specified memory area of the main control built-in RAM, and when the game information command is set, it is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU can quickly restore the performance (images, lamps, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600) at the time when the power was cut off at the time of timing ty, which is the start of the variable state.

When the peripheral control MPU receives a game information command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the initial operation of the performance components (e.g., the performance operation unit 160 and the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210) mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. In other words, from the timing ty, which is the start of the variable state, the initial operation of the performance components (e.g., the performance operation unit 160 and the multiple rotating decorative bodies 3210) mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. Each of these performance components is capable of operating between an initial position and an operating position, and the initial operation of the performance components involves checking whether the performance components operate normally from the initial position toward the operating position and accurately aligning the performance components so that they wait in the initial position. As a result, even if the performance member is in a position displaced from the initial position at timing ty, which is the start of the variable state, the performance member can be returned to its initial position by performing an initial operation. If the performance member does not return to its initial position with one initial operation, control for returning the performance member to its initial position is repeated several times, thereby preventing the performance member from waiting in a position displaced from its initial position. After the initial operation of the performance member is completed, a performance using the performance member can be executed. For example, if a variation pattern in which a performance using the performance member is set during pattern variation is transmitted as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the performance member is operated from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the pattern variation.

As shown in Fig. 161 (B), when a confirmation display of the set value is performed, that is, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at timing t3 and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, a confirmation display state in which a confirmation display of the set value can be performed is entered from timing ty. Then, in the confirmation display state, at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the confirmation display state ends, and from that timing t4, the main control built-in RAM is made variable without being initialized in step S38. In such a case, at the timing ty at the start of the confirmation display state, the main control MPU sets the game backup information as a game information command in the second command buffer, and when the game information command is set in the second command buffer, the main control MPU does not immediately send the set game information command to the peripheral control board 1510, but holds the game information command set in the second command buffer until the timing t4 at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF arrives, and at the timing t4, sends the game information command set in the second command buffer to the peripheral control board 1510. This allows the peripheral control MPU to restore the performance (images, lamps, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600) at the time the power was cut off at the timing ty at the start of the variable state.

As described above, the game information command is set in the second command buffer at the timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, and the set game information command is not immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Instead, the game information command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, arrives, and the game information command set in the second command buffer is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t4. This prevents the performance (images, lamps, and output from the performance display device 1600 and speaker) from returning when the power is cut off when the setting value is displayed for confirmation, and suppresses interference with normal work. In addition, since the game backup information has already been set in the second command buffer as a game information command at the timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, the game information command can be reliably sent to the peripheral control board 1510 even if noise occurs during the confirmation display state from the timing ty to the timing t4 and the game backup information is destroyed.

In addition, the setting confirmation command is set in the first command buffer at the timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, and the set setting confirmation command is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control MPU receives the setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, the initial operation of the performance members (e.g., the performance operation unit 160 and the multiple rotating decorations 3210) mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. In other words, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the initial operation of the performance members (e.g., the performance operation unit 160 and the multiple rotating decorations 3210) mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. Each of these performance members is a member that can operate between an initial position and an operating position, and the initial operation of the performance members checks whether the performance members operate normally from the initial position toward the operating position, and performs accurate positioning so that the performance members wait in the initial position. As a result, even if the performance member is in a position displaced from the initial position at the time ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, the performance member can be returned to the initial position by performing an initial operation, and if the performance member does not return to the initial position with one initial operation, the control for returning the performance member to the initial position is repeated several times, thereby preventing the performance member from waiting in a position displaced from the initial position. After the confirmation display state ends at time t4, it is possible to execute a performance using the performance member. For example, if a change pattern command sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is a change pattern in which a performance using the performance member is set during the pattern change, the performance member is operated from the initial position to the operating position at a specified timing during the pattern change.

As described above, after the confirmation display state at timing t4 ends, it is possible to send a change pattern command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, but the change pattern is not sent during the confirmation display state from timing ty to timing t4. Therefore, during the confirmation display state from timing ty to timing t4, the change pattern set with the performance using the performance member during the pattern change is sent, so the performance member does not operate, and it is not possible to determine whether the performance member is not operating due to a malfunction. In this regard, during the confirmation display state from timing ty to timing t4, the initial operation of the performance member (for example, the performance operation unit 160 and multiple rotating ornaments 3210) mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed, so that it is possible to inform the outside that "the performance member is normal but not associated with the game," and it is possible to determine that there is no malfunction of the performance member. In this example, the initial operation of the performance member is performed during the confirmation display state from timing ty to timing t4, but it is sufficient that the operation is performed to inform the user that the performance member is not broken. For example, during the confirmation display state from timing ty to timing t4, only a provisional operation of the performance member is performed in addition to the initial operation, and the initial operation of the performance member may be performed after the confirmation display state at timing t4 ends. The provisional operation of the performance member may be an operation different from the initial operation, or may be the same as the initial operation.

When changing the setting value, a setting change command is set in the first command buffer at timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state, and the set setting change command is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control MPU receives the setting change command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the initial operation of the performance members (e.g., the performance operation unit 160 and the multiple rotating ornaments 3210) mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed, just as when the setting confirmation command is received. In this way, even in the change permission state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the initial operation of the performance members (e.g., the performance operation unit 160 and the multiple rotating ornaments 3210) mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed, just like in the confirmation display state, so that it is possible to inform the outside that "the performance members are normal but not associated with play," and it is possible to determine that there is no malfunction of the performance members.

[14-2. Extension of warning alert after change permission state or confirmation display state ends]
In the above embodiment, during the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, an alert corresponding to the type of command is issued by the image, lamp, or output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600, but the alert may be extended and executed even after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state. A case in which an alert is extended and executed after the end of such a change permission state or confirmation display state will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a time chart showing a case in which an alert is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state.

As shown in FIG. 162, the details of which are described above, when the change permission state at timing ty begins, a setting change command is set in the first command buffer, and when the confirmation display state at timing ty ends, a setting confirmation command is set in the first command buffer, and both commands are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. Then, by receiving the setting change command or setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the peripheral control MPU issues an alert corresponding to the type of command through images, lamps, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600 during the period until timing t4 arrives when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF.

At the end of the change permission state at timing t4, a setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer, and at the start of the confirmation display state at timing t4, a setting value confirmation display completion command is set in the first command buffer, and both commands are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. At this time, the peripheral control MPU receives the setting change completion command or the setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, and during the period from timing t4 to timing t4', when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, the warning alert that has been running since timing ty is continued by the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600. In other words, during the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, a warning alert corresponding to the type of command is executed, but even after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, the warning alert is extended and executed for the predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) from timing t4 to timing t4'. The extension of the warning alert is terminated when an extension end condition for the warning alert is set and the extension end condition is satisfied. Specifically, if the extension period of the warning alert is to end after a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds), the predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) is set in a specific timer unit, and the timer unit starts counting the predetermined time and ends when the time expires. As another example, if the extension period of the warning alert is to end after a predetermined number of audio notifications (e.g., five loops of a message audio), the predetermined number may be set in a specific count unit, and the count unit starts counting the predetermined number and ends when the number expires.

As described above, when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is executed, the warning alert is extended not only for the period from timing ty to timing t4, but also for the period from timing t4 to timing t4', which is a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after timing t4. For example, if the warning alert is executed only when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is executed, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned off in a short time (e.g., 1 to 2 seconds) from timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the time for executing the warning alert, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, is shortened, so if someone other than the hall manager illegally changes the setting value or displays the confirmation of the setting value in a short period of time, the hall manager may not notice. In particular, when the confirmation display of the setting value is executed, since there is no need to change the setting value, it is possible for someone other than the hall manager to illegally display the confirmation of the setting value in a short period of time, and the hall manager may not notice. In contrast, if the warning alert is extended even after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, the period from time t4 to time t4' is secured as the time to issue the warning alert, even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF a short time (e.g., 1 to 2 seconds) after timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state or confirmation display state. Therefore, even if someone other than the hall manager illegally changes the setting value or displays the confirmation of the setting value in a short period of time, it is easy for the hall manager to notice, and the monitoring system can be strengthened to prevent unauthorized acts by people other than the hall manager.

As described above in detail, during the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, an alert corresponding to the type of command is issued by the image, lamp, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600. The alert corresponding to the setting change command is executed by repeating the voice "Settings are being changed", displaying the message "Settings are being changed!", and lighting the lamp in a color corresponding to the setting value being changed. The alert corresponding to the setting confirmation command is executed by executing the voice "Settings are being confirmed", displaying the message "Settings are being confirmed!", and lighting the lamp in a color corresponding to the setting value being confirmed. When the alert is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the message content of the alert during the change permission state or the confirmation display state may be maintained, or the message content may be different from that of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. For example, in the alert after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, a message such as "The setting change has been completed" or "The setting confirmation has been completed" may be output in a loop, which is different from the message content during the change permission state or the confirmation display state. This not only serves as a countermeasure against fraudulent acts as described above, but also makes it easier for the hall manager to notice when the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends legitimately. In addition, when maintaining the message content of the alert during the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to prevent a temporary interruption of the alert at t4, which is the timing of switching to the extension of the alert. For example, at least the audio output from the speaker of the alert executed in response to the type of command in the change permission state or the confirmation display state is controlled to continue to be output until the audio is completed so as not to end halfway, and the audio in the extended alert can be executed again from the beginning of the audio after the audio of the continuously output alert is completed.

In addition, for warning alerts, a predetermined message content is notified by the image, lamp, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600, but the sound output from the speaker is not a warning sound such as "beep beep beep" output as an alert when the door is opened or an alert when an abnormal ball is scored, and is executed by voice only. In addition, during the change permission state and confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, the special pattern display of the function display unit 1400 is in an unchangeable state in which it is not possible to perform a variable display of the special pattern, whereas after the end of the change permission state and confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, the function display unit 1400 enters a variable state in which it is possible to perform a variable display of the special pattern on the special pattern display, and for example, various performance sounds are output from the speaker by transmitting a variable pattern command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. In this regard, even if the warning alert is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, because a warning sound is not output from the speaker as a warning alert, it is possible to provide leeway in the limited number of channels provided for outputting sound, and when allocating the limited number of channels for outputting various sound effects, it is possible to avoid, as much as possible, a situation in which there are no vacant (unused) channels in the limited number of channels.

In addition, when the warning alert is extended after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, the peripheral control MPU receives the door open command or the abnormal ball entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, but does not execute the door open command or the abnormal ball entry command at timing t4, and executes the door open command or the abnormal ball entry command from timing t4', which is the end of the extended warning alert. In other words, when the warning alert is extended after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, the extended warning alert is executed in priority over the door open command or the abnormal ball entry command. As a result, even if someone other than the hall manager illegally changes the setting value or displays the confirmation of the setting value in a short period of time, the extended warning alert is executed with priority, making it easier for the hall manager to notice, and the monitoring system can be strengthened to prevent unauthorized acts by people other than the hall manager. In addition, for alerts suspected of serious misconduct (for example, alerts for abnormal ball entry), the alerts may be issued at time t4 while the extended warning alert is in progress, rather than at time t4', which is the end of the extended alert alert.

In addition, the door-opening alert and the abnormal ball-scoring alert are not only notified of a predetermined message content by the image, lamp, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600, but also output a warning sound such as "beep beep beep" from the speaker, and are executed as a combination of "message + warning sound". The door-opening alert and the abnormal ball-scoring alert are output continuously while the door-opening alert and the abnormal ball-scoring alert are being executed, but they may also be configured to be output for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). However, in this example, the door-opening alert and the abnormal ball-scoring alert are executed from the point of time t4', which is the end of the extended warning alert, so that, for example, if the extended warning alert time (the period from timing t4 to timing t4') is longer than or the same as the output time (e.g., 10 seconds) of the door-opening alert and the abnormal ball-scoring alert, the door-opening alert and the abnormal ball-scoring alert will not be output. In consideration of the problem caused by this decrease in the frequency of notifications, if the extension time of the alert (the period from timing t4 to timing t4') is longer than or equal to the output time of the warning sound (for example, 10 seconds), the system may be configured to output the door open alert or abnormal ball scoring alert for only the remaining time after the extension time of the alert. Also, the system may be configured to start a new door open alert or abnormal ball scoring alert after the extension time of the alert.

In addition, when the alarm is extended after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, the door open alarm is executed from timing t4', which is the end of the extended alarm, but if timing t5, when the main frame 4 is closed, arrives before timing t4', the door open alarm is not executed. In other words, if the main frame 4 is closed while the extended alarm is being executed, the door open alarm is not executed. However, if the main frame 4 is closed while the extended alarm is being executed and then opened again before timing t4', the extended warning alarm is terminated and the door open alarm is executed. Normally, after changing the settings or displaying a confirmation of the settings, the main frame 4 is simply closed and not opened again. However, if an inexplicable situation occurs in which the main frame 4 is opened again immediately after changing the settings or displaying a confirmation of the settings, the door open notification consisting of a combination of a "message + warning sound" is executed in priority over the warning alarm, making it easier for the hall manager to notice that an inexplicable situation suspected of fraud has occurred and that the main frame 4 is open, and the monitoring system can be strengthened to prevent the situation in which the main frame 4 is open from continuing.

As described above in detail, during the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 are not used to monitor for fraudulent behavior, whereas after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 are used to monitor for fraudulent behavior (however, monitoring for fraudulent behavior using the vibration sensor 3005 is only performed during a jackpot game). If it is determined that fraudulent behavior using magnets or vibrations is occurring, a fraudulent notification is issued as an external notification using an image, lamp, or output from a speaker of the performance display device 1600. At this time, even if the alert notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, the fraudulent notification is executed in priority to the extended alert notification. In this way, by prioritizing fraudulent notifications suspected of serious fraud such as magnets and vibrations over the extended alert notification, it is easier for the hall manager to notice, and the monitoring system can be strengthened to prevent fraudulent behavior by people other than the hall manager.

In addition, in the alert, a predetermined message content is notified by the image of the performance display device 1600, a lamp, and an output from a speaker. However, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined message content is notified by the output from a lamp and a speaker, and the image of the performance display device 1600 is not output. In such a configuration in which an alert is issued using some of the multiple alert members (the performance display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker), when an alert is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, an extended alert is not output from the image of the performance display device 1600, but if it is determined that fraudulent activity using magnets or vibrations is occurring, a fraud alert may be executed only by the image of the performance display device 1600 that is not output as an extended alert (by an alert using only the unused alert members among the multiple alert members). In this way, when an alert is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the hall manager can be made aware of a fraudulent alert that is suspected to be fraudulent without stopping the extended alert. Similarly, for notifications when a door is opened or when an abnormal prize is won, notifications when a door is opened or when an abnormal prize is won may be issued only using the image of the performance display device 1600 that is not being output as a warning notification during the extension (by using only the unused notification members out of the multiple notification members).

In this example, the warning alert is extended regardless of whether the change permission state or the confirmation display state has ended, but the warning alert may be extended only after the confirmation display state has ended. For example, when changing the setting value, the main control built-in RAM is initialized after the change permission state has ended (in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area). However, the peripheral control MPU may receive a setting change completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, and during the period from timing t4 to timing t4', which is a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after timing t4, a RAM clear alert is issued by the image, lamp, or speaker of the performance display device 1600, notifying that the RAM has been cleared, rather than extending the warning alert. This allows the hall manager to know that the RAM has been cleared after the change permission state has ended.

[14-3. When the initial operation of the performance component is performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state]
In the above embodiment, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the initial operation of the performance member (for example, the performance operation unit 160 or the multiple rotating decorations 3210) mounted on the main frame 4 or the game board 5 is performed, but the initial operation of the performance member may be performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. A case in which the initial operation of the performance member is performed after the end of such a change permission state or the confirmation display state will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a time chart showing a case in which the initial operation of the performance member is performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

As shown in FIG. 163, when the change permission state at timing t4 ends, a setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer, and when the confirmation display state at timing t4 ends, a setting value confirmation display completion command is set in the first command buffer. Both commands are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. At this time, the peripheral control MPU starts the initial operation of the performance members (e.g., the performance operation unit 160 and multiple rotating ornaments 3210) mounted on the main frame 4 and the game board 5 by receiving the setting change completion command or the setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4. In other words, the initial operation of the performance members is not performed during the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, but is performed after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends at timing t4.

The above-mentioned performance members include the performance operation unit 160 and multiple rotating ornaments 3210, each of which can operate between an initial position and an operating position. In the initial operation of such a performance member, a return process for accurately aligning the performance member so that it waits at the initial position, and a confirmation process for confirming whether the performance member operates normally from the initial position to the operating position are executed in sequence. For example, if the performance member is in operation at the time when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the performance member stops at a position shifted from the initial position, and even when the power supply is turned on thereafter, the performance member is in a position shifted from the initial position. In this regard, even if the performance member is in a position shifted from the initial position at the time of timing t4, which is the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the performance member can be returned to the initial position by performing the return process, and if the performance member does not return to the initial position by one return process, the return process for returning the performance member to the initial position can be repeated several times to prevent the performance member from waiting at a position shifted from the initial position. In addition, in the confirmation process, the performance member moves from the initial position to the operating position, and then moves from the operating position back to the initial position, so that it can be confirmed whether the performance member is operating normally. If the performance member does not return to the initial position even after the return process is repeated several times, or if the performance member does not operate normally to the operating position or initial position in the confirmation process, an external notification is issued that an abnormality has occurred in the performance member. After the initial operation of the performance member is completed, it is possible to execute a performance using the performance member. For example, if a change pattern command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in which a change pattern is set in which a performance using the performance member is set during the pattern change, the performance member is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the pattern change.

The performance member also includes a light guide plate 3110 capable of illuminating and decorating the first and second patterns by irradiation of light. In the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110, a confirmation process is performed to confirm whether the light guide plate 3110 is normally illuminated and decorated. In other words, in the confirmation process, the process of irradiating the light guide plate 3110 with light to illuminate and decorate the first pattern and the process of irradiating the light guide plate 3110 with light to illuminate and decorate the second pattern are repeated several times to confirm whether the light guide plate 3110 is normally illuminated and decorated. Note that the initial operation of the performance operation unit 160 and the multiple rotating ornaments 3210 and the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110 are performed in parallel from the time of timing t4, which is the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. After the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110 is completed, it is possible to perform a performance using the light guide plate 3110. For example, if a change pattern command sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is a change pattern set to use the light guide plate 3110 while the pattern is changing, the first pattern and the second pattern are illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3110 at a predetermined timing during the pattern change.

As described above, in this example, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in the change permission state or confirmation display state that is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the initial operation of the performance member is not performed, and only the setting value is changed and the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, and after the change permission state or confirmation display state at timing t4 ends, the initial operation of the performance member is performed. For example, if the initial operation of the performance member is performed in the change permission state or confirmation display state that is the period from timing ty to timing t4, when checking work is performed at the factory, it is necessary to check whether the setting value change and the confirmation display of the setting value function normally, and at the same time, to check whether the performance member operates normally due to the initial operation of the performance member, which is difficult for the person performing the check work at the factory. However, by performing an initial operation of the performance member after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state at timing t4, only setting changes to the setting value or confirmation display of the setting value are performed during the change permission state or confirmation display state from timing ty to timing t4, and after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state at timing t4, the initial operation of the performance member can be used to simply check whether the performance member is operating normally, which increases the reliability of the confirmation since there is no need for the person performing the confirmation work at the factory to check at the same time.

In the above, the peripheral control MPU performs the initial operation of the performance member when it receives a setting change completion command or a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, but it may also perform the initial operation of the performance member when it receives an initial operation command for performing the initial operation of the performance member from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4 separately from the setting change completion command or setting value confirmation display completion command. Such an initial operation command is set in the first command buffer at timing t4, which is the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. In contrast, the initial operation command may be set in the second command buffer at timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the set initial operation command may be held in the second command buffer until timing t4, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, without immediately being sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the initial operation command set in the second command buffer may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t4. In such a case, while the initial operation command is set at timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the performance member may be delayed until timing t4, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the initial operation of the performance member may be performed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends.

In addition, when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is executed, the extension time of the alert is set so that the extension time is longer than the time for the initial operation of the performance member when the alert is extended and executed, not only from timing ty to timing t4, but also from timing t4 to timing t4', which is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the time t4. In other words, the initial operation of the performance member performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state is terminated before the alert that is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state is terminated. As described above, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the function display unit 1400 transitions to a variable state in which the special pattern display device can display a variable special pattern, and the player can play the game. However, during the period in which the alert is extended, an alert is executed by the image, lamp, or output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600, and the external alert is heightened. Therefore, the period during which the alert is extended makes the player hesitate to start playing, and is not a period during which the player actually tries to start playing. In this regard, by ending the initial operation of the performance member during the period during which the alert is extended, the extended alert is ended, and the initial operation of the performance member has already ended at the time when the player tries to start playing. Therefore, after the end of the alert that is extended after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to execute a performance using the performance member without being influenced by the initial operation of the performance member, and it is possible to avoid missing information obtained from the performance content. Note that, in order to encourage the player not to start playing during the period during which the alert is extended, the content of the extended alert may be executed in a manner that includes a special message such as "Please wait a little longer before starting the game" to encourage the player to wait for the game to start.

When performing the initial operation of the performance member after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, if the performance member does not return to its initial position even after the return process is repeated several times, or if the performance member does not operate normally to the operating position or initial position during the confirmation process, a reel abnormality alarm is issued by the performance display device 1600 using images, lamps, and output from speakers to notify the outside world that an abnormality has occurred in the performance member. At this time, even if an alert alarm is extended after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the reel abnormality alarm is issued in priority over the extended alert alarm. In this way, by prioritizing the reel abnormality alarm over the extended alert alarm, it is easier for the hall manager to notice and to easily check whether the performance member is operating normally.

In addition, in the warning alert, a predetermined message content is notified by the image of the performance display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. However, for example, the predetermined message content may be notified by the output from the lamp and the speaker, and the image of the performance display device 1600 may not be output. In such a configuration in which a warning alert is issued using some of the multiple notification members (the performance display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker), when the warning alert is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the image of the performance display device 1600 is not output as the extended warning alert, but if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the performance member, the reel abnormality notification may be executed only by the image of the performance display device 1600 that is not output as the extended warning alert (by a notification using only the unused notification members among the multiple notification members). In this way, when the warning alert is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the hall manager can be made aware of the reel abnormality notification without stopping the extended warning alert.

In this example, the initial operation of the performance member after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state is a return process in which the performance member is accurately aligned so that it waits at the initial position, and a confirmation process in which the performance member is confirmed to operate normally from the initial position toward the operating position. However, the return process may be performed in advance in the change permission state or the confirmation display state. In other words, only the return process among the initial operations of the performance member may be performed from the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state at timing ty, and the confirmation process among the initial operations of the performance member may be performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state at timing t4. Here, for the return process, if the performance member does not return to the initial position in one return process, the return process for the performance member to return to the initial position may be repeated several times, which may require a long time. In this regard, by performing the return process in advance in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, even if the return process requires a long time, the time until the confirmation process as the initial operation of the performance member is completed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state is not affected. Therefore, after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, the initial operation of the performance element can be completed relatively quickly, and then a performance can be performed using the performance element based on the change pattern.

In this example, when the state transitions to either the change permission state or the confirmation display state at the time of timing ty, the initial operation of the performance member is performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state at timing t4. However, when the state transitions to the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the performance member may be performed in advance in the confirmation display state. In other words, when the state transitions to the change permission state, the initial operation of the performance member is performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state at timing t4, whereas when the state transitions to the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the performance member may be performed from the start of the confirmation display state at timing ty. Here, in the confirmation display state, unlike the change permission state, the setting value is not changed, and only the setting value is confirmed, so that the confirmation display state can be ended in a relatively short time. In this regard, when the state transitions to the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the performance member is performed in advance in the confirmation display state, so that the initial operation of the performance member can be completed before the confirmation display state ends. Therefore, after the confirmation display state ends, a performance can be performed using a performance element based on the variation pattern, and while the confirmation display state can be ended in a relatively short time, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player has difficulty starting play because the initial operation of the performance element has not been completed.

[14-4. Modifications of fraud monitoring]
In the above embodiment, one magnetic sensor capable of identifying the location where magnetism is generated (whether it is the vicinity of the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the game board 5, or the front of the play area 5a located at the front of the game board 5) is provided as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting the fraudulent behavior using a magnet. However, a plurality of magnetic sensors may be provided, and each magnetic sensor may be capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the play area 5a located at the front of the game board 5, or in the vicinity of the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the game board 5. In the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the fraudulent behavior may be monitored using only some of the plurality of magnetic sensors (for example, the magnetic sensors provided around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a). A modified example of the monitoring of the fraudulent behavior during the setting change of the setting value or the confirmation display of the setting value will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a time chart showing a modified example of the monitoring state for fraudulent activity while a setting value is being changed or while a setting value is being displayed for confirmation.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent behavior using magnets, a setting operation magnetic sensor 2470a capable of detecting the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, and a play area magnetic sensor 2470b capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the play area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. In addition, during normal times, the setting operation magnetic sensor 2470a is used to monitor fraudulent behavior in a specified area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, during normal times, the setting operation magnetic sensor 2470a monitors whether a magnetism that should not be generated (magneticism due to fraudulent access) has occurred (whether a magnet has approached) in the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and monitors fraudulent behavior such as someone other than the person who changes the setting value or displays the confirmation. One example of fraudulent conduct using a magnet on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is to place a metal fraudulent device and a magnet that indirectly operates the metal fraudulent device inside the island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed), and then operate the magnet and the metal fraudulent device through a small gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment or through an opening created by destroying part of the pachinko machine 1 to illegally access the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. When a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a in the fraud detection process in step S112, it is determined that a fraudulent conduct using a magnet has been conducted in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided.

Similarly, during normal operation, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor for fraudulent activity in a specified area on the surface of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, during normal operation, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b monitors whether a magnetic field that should not occur (magnetic field due to fraudulent access) has occurred (whether a magnet has approached) in the area in front of the game area 5a, and monitors for fraudulent activity such as changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a to enter various winning holes and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5. Note that when a detection signal is input from the game area magnetic sensor 2470b in the fraud detection process of step S112, it is determined that fraudulent activity using a magnet has occurred in the area in front of the game area 5a.

In this example, two magnetic sensors, a setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a and a play area section magnetic sensor 2470b, are provided as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent behavior using magnets, but these two magnetic sensors 2470a and 2470b may have the same performance. That is, although not shown, these two magnetic sensors 2470a and 2470b are configured as rectangular box-shaped sensor bodies, and are capable of magnetic detection in a first magnetic detection area having a directivity with strong sensitivity in the vertical direction to one side surface, and magnetic detection in a second magnetic detection area having a directivity with strong sensitivity in the vertical direction to the other side surface, which is the opposite side. Note that "high sensitivity in the vertical direction" means that the sensitivity is stronger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction to each side surface, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction at all. In other words, the magnetic detection areas emitted from each side surface are wide areas surrounded by a sphere. The game area magnetic sensor 2470b is arranged so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emanating from the side of the sensor body spread in the left-right or up-down direction when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, allowing it to monitor a wide area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, multiple locations among the winning holes such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the normal winning hole 2003, the large winning hole 2005, and other main parts of the ball flow path). On the other hand, the setting operation magnetic sensor 2470a is arranged so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emanating from the side of the sensor body spread in the front-back direction when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, and one of the magnetic detection areas encompasses the back side of the pachinko machine 1, allowing it to monitor the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided.

As shown in FIG. 164, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a is not used to monitor for fraudulent activities in a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the game area section magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor for fraudulent activities in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. This is because, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, a regular worker who changes the settings of the setting values or displays the confirmation of the setting values operates the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, leaving no room for anyone other than such a regular worker to commit fraudulent activities using a magnet, whereas the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is in a position that cannot be seen by a regular worker, and so there is a possibility that anyone other than such a regular worker may commit fraudulent activities using a magnet. In addition, if a legitimate worker who changes the settings or displays the confirmation of the settings has something that can generate magnetism, the play area magnetic sensor 2470b is unlikely to detect the generation of magnetism, while the setting operation magnetic sensor 2470a is likely to detect the generation of magnetism. However, the setting operation magnetic sensor 2470a can be prevented from detecting the generation of magnetism, which would be considered fraudulent activity using a magnet, and interference with legitimate setting changes and confirmation display operations can be suppressed.

In addition, during the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. This is because, when a legitimate operator who changes the setting value or displays the confirmation of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a during the change permission state or confirmation display state, although the setting key switch 1311a is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there is a possibility that vibrations are transmitted to the vibration sensor 3005 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, even if a legitimate operator who changes the setting value or displays the confirmation of the setting value applies vibration, the vibration sensor 3005 is prevented from detecting the occurrence of vibration as a fraudulent activity due to vibration, and interference with legitimate setting change and confirmation display operations can be suppressed. In this example, the vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor for fraudulent activity only during a jackpot game during normal play, but similar to the magnetic sensor 2470 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, the vibration sensor 3005 may be used to monitor for fraudulent activity not only during a jackpot game but also in a changeable state. Even when the vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor for fraudulent activity during a changeable state or a jackpot game, the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor for fraudulent activity in a changeable state or a confirmation display state before the changeable state is entered. In other words, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor for magnetic fraudulent activity in the changeable state or the confirmation display state from timing ty to timing t4, whereas the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor for fraudulent activity related to vibration.

In this example, two magnetic sensors, the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a and the play area section magnetic sensor 2470b, are provided, but only the play area section magnetic sensor 2470b may be provided, and only the generation of magnetism in front of the play area 5a located on the front side of the play board 5 may be detected. In this configuration, similar to the configuration with two magnetic sensors described above, the play area section magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor fraudulent acts in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 not only in normal times but also in the change permission state and confirmation display state. In addition, multiple magnetic sensors may be provided as the play area section magnetic sensor 2470b instead of one magnetic sensor, and the multiple magnetic sensors may be used to monitor the entire area in front of the play area 5a located on the front side of the play board 5. For example, the magnetic field is detected by a plurality of magnetic sensors corresponding to the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, and other main parts of the ball passage on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and fraudulent activities are monitored. In this configuration, not only in normal times but also in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, all of the magnetic sensors as the play area magnetic sensor 2470b are used to monitor fraudulent activities in the entire area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. However, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, only some of the magnetic sensors as the play area magnetic sensor 2470b may be used to monitor only fraudulent activities in important areas on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the areas of the winning openings such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the big winning opening 2005).

In addition, when the play area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism in the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, it is determined that fraudulent activity is being performed in a specified area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, when the play area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism in the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, a magnetic field generation command specifying that the play area magnetic sensor 2470b has detected the generation of magnetism is set in the second command buffer at that time, and when the magnetic field generation command is set in the second command buffer, the magnetic field generation command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 arrives when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and at timing t4, the magnetic field generation command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a magnetic field generation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time of timing t4, and executes a magnetic field generation notification for notifying that a magnetic field has been generated in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 by outputting from the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600 for a predetermined period from timing t4. This magnetic field generation notification is executed by repeating a voice saying "magnetic field detection abnormality", displaying a message saying "magnetic field detection abnormality!", and emitting a lamp with a brightness higher than normal. In this way, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it monitors whether or not a magnetic field has been generated in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, it executes a magnetic field detection notification to the outside, so that the hall manager can know that the main frame 4 is open and that a magnetic field has been generated in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. After the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, it is possible to simultaneously issue the above-mentioned door opening notification and abnormal ball entry notification, but if the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism, it is possible to give priority to the magnetic generation notification, as this may indicate serious fraud.

As described above, commands related to fraud monitoring, such as the magnetic field generation command, are set in the second command buffer in the change permission state or confirmation display state, similar to the door opening command and abnormal winning command described above, and the set command is not immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Instead, the command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 arrives when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and at timing t4, the command set in the second command buffer is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. This prevents the magnetic field generation notification from being executed, and suppresses interference with normal work, even if the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a detects the generation of a magnet as a fraudulent act using a magnet when changing the setting value or displaying the setting value for confirmation.

In the above, when the play area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the magnetic generation notification is not executed at that time, but is executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends. However, if the notification is not to the extent that it interferes with normal work, it may be executed in advance during the change permission state or the confirmation display state. For example, when the play area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the notification by the image, lamp, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600 is delayed on the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU), such as suppressing the notification by loud output from the speaker, whereas the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) executes a simple notification in advance without delay, such as not outputting from the speaker but only displaying an error on the 7-segment display provided on the payout control board 633.

In this example, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the play area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor for fraudulent activities in the specified area on the surface of the pachinko machine 1, but the play area magnetic sensor 2470b may be used to monitor for fraudulent activities in the specified area on the surface of the pachinko machine 1 only in the confirmation display state. In other words, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform a confirmation display of the setting value by short-term work, so the play area magnetic sensor 2470b is unlikely to detect the generation of magnetism due to a regular worker, and the play area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to strengthen monitoring for fraudulent activities in the specified area on the surface of the pachinko machine 1, whereas in the change permission state, the setting value is changed by long-term work, so the play area magnetic sensor 2470b is likely to detect the generation of magnetism due to a regular worker, and monitoring for fraudulent activities in the specified area on the surface of the pachinko machine 1 may not be performed using the play area magnetic sensor 2470b, with an emphasis on the workability of regular workers.

[15. About the setting value hinting effect]
In this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect such as a variable display of a decorative pattern based on a variable pattern determined using a predetermined variable pattern table, and as the variable effect, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that can suggest the current setting value. As for the suggestive effect, when the setting value is changed when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the effect is executed every 100 times of the variable display of the special pattern (variable display of the decorative pattern) in the subsequent game, and it is possible to suggest the current setting value. Specifically, when the setting value is changed when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a specific variable pattern table is used every 100 times of the variable display of the special pattern (variable display of the decorative pattern) in the subsequent game, and the variable pattern in which the execution of the suggestive effect is set is determined from the specific variable pattern table. The transition of the variable pattern table after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to Figs. 165 to 169. Fig. 165 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the first variable pattern setting process. In addition, Figure 166 is a table showing the changes in the fluctuation pattern table after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, Figure 167 is a time chart showing the timing of execution of various effects based on the fluctuation pattern, Figure 168 is a fluctuation pattern table C used when the number of times the special pattern changes after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on is 500, and Figure 169 is a specific example of a roulette effect as a suggestion effect A2.

As shown in FIG. 165, in this example, in the first variation pattern setting process (and the second variation pattern setting process), the processes of steps S2144 and S2145 are different from the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 96. Specifically, when selecting a variation pattern table at the time of reach (when the reach is missed) in step S2144, a table is selected according to the number of times the special symbol changes after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z in addition to the current game state. Similarly, when selecting a variation pattern table at the time of miss in step S2145, a table is selected according to the number of times the special symbol changes after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z in addition to the current game state. Note that "powering on the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z" includes the cases where the RWM clear button 633z is operated but the setting key switch 1311a is not operated, and only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings (when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized, the setting value before the power was cut off is maintained), and the cases where the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are operated, and the setting value is changed.

In addition to the above, when selecting a variation pattern table according to the number of times the special symbol changes after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z, the variation pattern table selected when the number of times the special symbol changes after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is 500 differs depending on whether the setting value was changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, or whether only the main control built-in RAM was initialized without changing the setting. Also, if the setting value was changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, the variation pattern table selected when the number of times the special symbol changes after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is 500 differs depending on whether the setting value is 1 to 6.

After "powering on the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z", the number of times the special symbol changes after the power is turned on is known using the change count counter stored in the main control built-in RAM. In other words, after powering on the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z, the change count counter is incremented (counted up) by one each time a special symbol change is displayed, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z, the change count counter is cleared. On the other hand, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 without the operation of the RWM clear button 633z, the change count counter is not cleared. Also, after "powering on the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z", information on whether the setting value was changed when the power was turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or only the main control built-in RAM was initialized without changing the setting is also stored in the main control built-in RAM.

As shown in FIG. 166, if the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the following order is selected for the fluctuation pattern table when in reach (when the reach is missed) and the fluctuation pattern table when missing: when the number of times the special pattern has changed after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on is 1 to 99 times, fluctuation pattern table A when it is 100 times, fluctuation pattern table B when it is 101 to 199 times, fluctuation pattern table A when it is 200 times, fluctuation pattern table B when it is 201 to 299 times, fluctuation pattern table A when it is 300 times, fluctuation pattern table B when it is 301 to 399 times, fluctuation pattern table A when it is 400 times, fluctuation pattern table B when it is 401 to 499 times, and fluctuation pattern table C according to the setting value when it is 500 times. In addition, as the fluctuation pattern table C according to the setting value, if the setting value is 1, then fluctuation pattern table C1 is selected; if the setting value is 2, then fluctuation pattern table C2; if the setting value is 3, then fluctuation pattern table C3; if the setting value is 4, then fluctuation pattern table C4; if the setting value is 5, then fluctuation pattern table C5; and if the setting value is 6, then fluctuation pattern table C6 is selected.

Each of the above-mentioned variation pattern tables has multiple types of variation patterns set, and each variation pattern has a variation time of the special symbol and a variation performance such as a variation display of the decorative symbol on the performance display device 1600 executed within the variation time of the special symbol. In such a variation performance, a performance is executed to see whether the lottery result is a win or not between the start and end of the variation display of the decorative symbol. In addition, the variation pattern table has variation pattern tables A to C at the time of reach (when the reach is missed) and variation pattern tables A to C at the time of miss, and the variation pattern tables A to C at the time of reach (when the reach is missed) have a variation pattern set to form a reach in the variation display of the decorative symbol and execute a reach performance, while the variation pattern tables A to C at the time of miss have a variation pattern set to not form a reach in the variation display of the decorative symbol. In other words, the fluctuation pattern tables A to C at the time of reach (when the reach is missed) are set with a different fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern tables A to C at the time of miss in terms of whether or not a reach is formed in the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern (whether or not a reach performance is executed). However, for the fluctuation pattern table C at the time of reach (when the reach is missed), a fluctuation pattern table C common to the fluctuation pattern table C at the time of miss may be used. As will be described in detail later, when the fluctuation pattern table C is selected, whether at the time of reach (when the reach is missed) or when it is missed, a performance (such as a reach performance) for whether the lottery result is a hit or not is not executed, and a suggestion performance A2 (roulette performance) is executed based on the fluctuation pattern, so that the common fluctuation pattern table C can be used to determine the fluctuation pattern in which the execution of such a suggestion performance A2 is set.

As shown in FIG. 167(A), the fluctuation pattern table A is set with a fluctuation pattern in which the execution of the suggestive effects is not set as a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. In other words, the fluctuation pattern table A is a "variation pattern table independent of the setting value" that can be used in common with any setting value, and during the game period in which this fluctuation pattern table A is used, the suggestive effects A1 and A2 are not executed. In addition, the game period in which the fluctuation pattern table A is used is set longer than the game period in which other fluctuation pattern tables are used, thereby limiting the frequency of the suggestive effects A1 and A2 during the game progress and increasing the rarity of the suggestive effects A1 and A2. In addition, the fluctuation pattern table A is provided as a table that can be used in common with any setting value, and this also makes it possible to suppress the pressure on the memory capacity of the pachinko machine 1 due to the increase in the fluctuation pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 167(B), the fluctuation pattern table B is set with a fluctuation pattern in which the execution of the suggestive performance A1 is set as one of the multiple types of fluctuation patterns. In addition, the fluctuation pattern table B is set with a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is increased by 3 seconds compared to the multiple types of fluctuation patterns set in the fluctuation pattern table A, and the suggestive performance A1 is executed during the additional 3 seconds. In the suggestive performance A1, the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light (1 to 3 times) suggests whether the current setting is a high or low setting. However, in the fluctuation pattern in which the execution of the suggestive performance A1 is set, the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light, which is the performance content of the suggestive performance A1, is not set. Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestion performance A1 is set, it determines whether the number of times the light guide plate 3110 will emit light is 1 to 3 based on the current setting value, and when determining the number of times the light guide plate 3110 will emit light, the higher the current setting value is set, the more times the light guide plate 3110 will emit light. At the time when the variation pattern is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as a change pattern command, the current setting value is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can also determine which of the setting values 1 to 6 the current setting value is. As a result, in the suggestion performance A1, when the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light is high, it can be expected that the current setting value is set high.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B, it starts displaying the variation of the decorative patterns, executes the performance of whether the lottery result will be a win or not, temporarily stops the display of the variation of the decorative patterns, and then stops the display of the variation of the decorative patterns. However, the suggestive performance A1 is executed between the temporary halt of the display of the variation of the decorative patterns and the time when it is stopped. In this way, the suggestive performance A1 is executed after the performance of whether the lottery result will be a win or not is executed, so that the visibility of the performance of whether the lottery result will be a win or not is not obstructed.

Fluctuation pattern table B, like fluctuation pattern table A, is a "fluctuation pattern table that is independent of the setting value" that can be used in common for any setting value. This makes it possible to suppress the pressure on the memory capacity of the pachinko machine 1 caused by an increase in the fluctuation pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 167(C), the fluctuation pattern table C is set with a fluctuation pattern in which the execution of the suggestive effect A2 is set as one of the multiple types of fluctuation patterns. The fluctuation pattern in which the execution of the suggestive effect A2 is set is a fluctuation pattern that is not set in the fluctuation pattern table A or the fluctuation pattern table B, and is set to execute the suggestive effect A2 instead of the effect of determining whether the lottery result is a win or not. In the suggestive effect A2, a roulette effect is executed, and the current setting value is suggested depending on whether the roulette effect stops on "even number", "odd number", "high setting", "setting value 6", or "?" as a result.

As shown in FIG. 168, the fluctuation pattern table C has a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, including a fluctuation pattern 1 in which the roulette effect results in stopping at an "even number", a fluctuation pattern 2 in which the roulette effect results in stopping at an "odd number", a fluctuation pattern 3 in which the roulette effect results in stopping at a "high setting", a fluctuation pattern 4 in which the roulette effect results in stopping at a "setting value 6", and a fluctuation pattern 5 in which the roulette effect results in stopping at a "?". Specifically, the fluctuation pattern table C1 has a fluctuation pattern 2 in which the roulette effect results in stopping at an "odd number" because the current setting value is 1. The fluctuation pattern table C2 has a fluctuation pattern 1 in which the roulette effect results in stopping at an "even number" because the current setting value is 2. The fluctuation pattern table C3 has a fluctuation pattern 2 in which the roulette effect results in stopping at an "odd number" because the current setting value is 3. The fluctuation pattern table C4 has a fluctuation pattern 1 in which the roulette effect results in stopping at an "even number", and a fluctuation pattern 3 in which the roulette effect results in stopping at a "high setting", because the current setting value is 4. In addition, in the variation pattern table C5, since the current setting value is 5, a variation pattern 2 is set so that the roulette effect stops at an "odd number", a variation pattern 3 is set so that the roulette effect stops at a "high setting". In addition, in the variation pattern table C6, since the current setting value is 6, a variation pattern 1 is set so that the roulette effect stops at an "even number", a variation pattern 3 is set so that the roulette effect stops at a "high setting", a variation pattern 4 is set so that the roulette effect stops at a "setting value 6". In this way, since the suggestion effect A2 includes a mode that specifically indicates the setting value such as "high setting" or "setting value 6" more than the suggestion effect A1, attention is paid to the result of the roulette effect, and in the suggestion effect A2, when the roulette effect stops at a "high setting" or "setting value 6", the probability of the lottery result being a hit is high, so the game can be played with anticipation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6, it starts displaying the variation of the decorative patterns, temporarily stops the display of the variation of the decorative patterns, and then stops the display of the variation of the decorative patterns. However, between the start and the temporary stop of the display of the variation of the decorative patterns, the display of the variation of the decorative patterns is displayed small in the corner of the display device 1600 without executing the performance of whether the lottery result will be a hit or not, and a roulette performance is executed as the suggestive performance A2. In this way, since the suggestive performance A2 is executed in a situation where the performance of whether the lottery result will be a hit or not is not executed, the visibility of the suggestive performance A2 is not hindered by the display of the variation of the decorative patterns or the performance of whether the lottery result will be a hit or not, and the suggestive performance A2 can be made more popular.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the roulette performance, a roulette display divided into five parts, "even", "odd", "high setting", "setting value 6", and "?", appears on the performance display device 1600, and the lighted part moves clockwise with the signal "Start roulette performance!". After a predetermined time has passed, the movement of the lighted part of the roulette display slowly decelerates, and the lighted part stops at the result of the roulette performance based on the fluctuation pattern (either "even", "odd", "high setting", "setting value 6", or "?"). At this time, if it stops at "even" as a result of the roulette performance based on the fluctuation pattern, the player is made to recognize that the current setting value is either 2, 4, or 6; if it stops at "odd", the player is made to recognize that the current setting value is either 1, 3, or 5; if it stops at "high setting", the player is made to recognize that the current setting value is either 4 to 5; if it stops at "setting value 6", the player is made to recognize that the current setting value is 6; and if it stops at "?", the player is made to recognize that the current setting value is either 1 to 6. For variation patterns 1 to 5, the time it takes for the special symbols to change is different, and the time it takes for the roulette effect to stop during the time the special symbols change is different.

Fluctuation pattern table C differs from fluctuation pattern table A and fluctuation pattern table B in that it varies depending on the setting value, and is referred to as a "fluctuation pattern table that depends on the setting value." This allows the execution time of suggestive performance A2 (roulette performance) to differ depending on the setting value, increasing the degree of freedom in designing the performance that suggests the setting value.

As described above, if the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the suggestive performance A1 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B every 100 times the special symbol is displayed in the subsequent game, and the suggestive performance A2 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6 when the special symbol is displayed 500 times. Also, if the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the variation pattern tables C1 to C6 corresponding to the setting value are used when the special symbol is displayed 500 times, and the suggestive performance A2 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6 corresponding to the setting value. In this way, if the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the suggestive performance A1 and the suggestive performance A2 suggest the current setting value every 100 times the special symbol is displayed in the subsequent game, so that the player can play with anticipation until the suggestive performance A1 and the suggestive performance A2 are executed.

As shown in FIG. 166, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and only the internal RAM of the main control is initialized without changing the settings, the following order is selected for the fluctuation pattern table when the reach (missed reach) and the fluctuation pattern table when the miss occurs: when the number of times the special symbol changes after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is 1 to 99 times, fluctuation pattern table A when it is 100 times, fluctuation pattern table B when it is 101 to 199 times, fluctuation pattern table A when it is 200 times, fluctuation pattern table B when it is 201 to 299 times, fluctuation pattern table B when it is 300 times, fluctuation pattern table A when it is 301 to 399 times, fluctuation pattern table B when it is 400 times, fluctuation pattern table A when it is 401 to 499 times, and fluctuation pattern table C0 when it is 500 times.

As described above, the variation pattern table B is set to have a variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestion performance A1 is set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. After the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the light guide plate 3110 is caused to emit the first pattern by the light from the LED 3121 when the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated 1 to 3 times in the suggestion performance A1, whereas after the main control built-in RAM is only initialized without a setting change when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the light from the LED 3131 is used to illuminate the second pattern, not the first pattern, in the suggestion performance A1. Therefore, when the suggestion performance A1 is executed, it is possible to know whether the setting value was changed when the pachinko machine 1 was powered on or whether the main control built-in RAM was only initialized without a setting change, depending on whether the light guide plate 3110 emits the first pattern or the second pattern. In other words, in suggestion performance A1, when the second image is illuminated on the light guide plate 3110, it is not possible to grasp information about the current setting value, such as the number of times the first image is illuminated (1 to 3 times), but it is possible to grasp that the setting value has not changed since before the power was cut off, and that the previous setting value is being maintained.

As described above, the variation pattern table C is set with a variation pattern in which the suggestion performance A2 is set as one of the multiple types of variation patterns. Of these, the variation pattern table C0 is selected when the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. However, the variation pattern table C0 is set with a variation pattern 5 in which the roulette performance stops at "?" regardless of whether the current setting value is 1 to 6. In this regard, after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the suggestion performance A2 does not stop at "?" as a result of the roulette performance, so that it is possible to know that the main control built-in RAM was initialized when the pachinko machine 1 was powered on by stopping at "?" as a result of the roulette performance. In other words, when the suggestion performance A2 stops at "?" as a result of the roulette performance, although it is not possible to know information about the current setting value such as "even number", "odd number", "high setting", or "setting value 6", it is possible to know that the setting value has not changed since before the power was turned off and the previous setting value is maintained.

166, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and a confirmation display of the setting value is performed, or when the power is turned on normally (when the power is turned on without operating the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a), the number of times the special symbol has changed at the time of power off is carried over, and a change pattern table is selected according to the number of times the special symbol has changed since the pachinko machine 1 was last powered on with the RWM clear button 633z being operated. In other words, when the power is turned off, the change count counter stored in the main control built-in RAM is held (backed up), and when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on without operating the RWM clear button 633z, the change count counter is used continuously without being cleared, and thereafter, the change count counter is incremented (counted up) by one each time a special symbol change is displayed. In this way, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without operating the RWM clear button 633z, the variation counter is not cleared, so suggestive performance A1 or suggestive performance A2 will not necessarily be executed when the number of times the special symbol has changed after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is 100, 200, 300, 400, or 500. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention with anticipation to whether suggestive performance A1 or suggestive performance A2 will be executed even when the number of times the special symbol has changed after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not 100, 200, 300, 400, or 500.

The variation counter is incremented (counted up) by one each time a special symbol is displayed, but when the number of times the special symbol has changed after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on reaches 500, the variation counter is cleared and then incremented (counted up) by one again each time a special symbol is displayed. In other words, if the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the variation pattern table A (1st to 99th times) → B (100th time) → A (101st to 199th times) → B (200th time) → A (201st to 299th times) → B (300th time) → A (301st to 399th times) → B (400th time) → A (401st to 499th times) → C1 to C6 (500th time) is repeated, whereas When the main control RAM is initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the following variation pattern table is repeated: A (1st to 99th times) → B (100th time) → A (101st to 199th times) → B (200th time) → A (201st to 299th times) → B (300th time) → A (301st to 399th times) → B (400th time) → A (401st to 499th times) → C0 (500th time).

In addition, even before the number of times the special symbol changes after the power of the pachinko machine 1 reaches 500, if the lottery result is a win, the change count counter is cleared and then incremented (counted up) by one each time the special symbol changes. In other words, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the lottery result is a loss 100, 200, 300, 400, or 500 times in a row, suggestive performance A1 or suggestive performance A2 is executed. This allows players to expect suggestive performance A1 or suggestive performance A2 to be executed even if the number of times the special symbol changes after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the lottery result is not a win 100, 200, 300, 400, or 500 times.

Also, as described above, if the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the suggestion performance A1 notifies information about the current setting value by the number of times (1 to 3 times) that the first pattern on the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated, whereas if the main control built-in RAM is only initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on without any setting changes, the suggestion performance A1 causes the light guide plate 3110 to emit the second pattern but does not notify information about the current setting value. Also, if the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the suggestion performance A2 notifies information about the current setting value by stopping the roulette performance result at either "even number", "odd number", "high setting", or "setting value 6", whereas if the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without any setting changes, the suggestion performance A2 does not notify information about the current setting value by stopping the roulette performance result at either "?". Therefore, if the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the hall manager does not want to notify the player of information regarding the current setting value, the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on again after being powered off, and when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, only the main control internal RAM is initialized without changing the settings, so that information regarding the current setting value is not notified to the player.

In addition, in the normal state (non-time-saving state), the variation pattern tables A to C are used in the above order each time the variation display of the special symbol is performed, whereas when the time-saving state is entered after the lottery result is a hit, the variation pattern table for the time-saving state is used as a table different from the variation pattern tables A to C. In this variation pattern table for the time-saving state, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is shorter than that in the normal state is set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. And even when the time-saving state is entered after the lottery result is a hit, a specific variation pattern table is selected when the number of times the special symbol changes after the start of the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number, and a variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestive performance is set is determined from the specific variation pattern table, and the suggestive performance is executed based on the variation pattern. At this time, for example, in the time-saving state, the suggestive performance is executed more frequently than in the normal state, so that the player can pay attention with anticipation not only to whether the lottery result is a hit, but also to whether the suggestive performance is executed. When the time-saving mode ends, the variation counter is cleared, and then it is incremented (counted up) by one again each time a special symbol variation is displayed.

In addition, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or when the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings, the variation pattern table B or the variation pattern table C is used when the number of times the special symbol changes after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on is 100, 200, 300, 400, or 500, but a specific variation pattern table may also be used for other numbers of times the special symbol changes. For example, a specific variation pattern table may be used when the special symbol changes for the first time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. In this way, by selecting a specific variation pattern table when the special symbol changes for the first time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the variation pattern for which the suggestive performance is set is determined from the specific variation pattern table, and the suggestive performance can be executed based on the variation pattern. In this regard, changes to the settings of the settings values and initialization of the main control built-in RAM that does not involve setting changes are mostly performed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the hall opens, but by executing a suggestive performance the first time the special pattern is displayed after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is possible to create an incentive for players to actively start playing immediately after the hall opens.

In addition, if the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or if the main control RAM is initialized without a setting change, when the number of times the special pattern has changed after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on is 100, 200, 300, 400 or 500, suggestive performance A1 or A2 is executed using change pattern table B or change pattern table C. However, for example, using the performance display device 1600, the number of times the special pattern has changed after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on may be notified by adding to the change count counter (increasing the change count display by "+1" each time, from 1 change → 2 changes → 3 changes → ...), or the remaining number of times the special pattern will change until suggestive performance A1 or A2 is executed may be notified by subtracting from the change count counter (decreasing the change count display by "-1" each time, from 500 changes remaining → 499 changes → 497 changes → ...). Furthermore, such a notification may be given when the timing for executing the suggestive performance A1 or the suggestive performance A2 approaches, for example, when the number of times the special pattern changes until the suggestive performance A1 or the suggestive performance A2 is executed reaches 10. This allows the player to know whether the timing for executing the suggestive performance A1 or the suggestive performance A2 is approaching, and allows the player to continue playing in anticipation of obtaining information about the current setting value until the suggestive performance A1 or the suggestive performance A2 is executed.

In addition, when the timing for executing the suggestive performance A1 or the suggestive performance A2 is approaching, a special premonition performance may be executed as a performance separate from the notification of the number of times the special symbol changes, to inform the player that the execution of the suggestive performance A1 or the suggestive performance A2 is imminent. For example, when the remaining number of times the special symbol changes until the execution of the suggestive performance A1 or the suggestive performance A2 is 10, the performance display device 1600 may be used to display "10 more times to suggest the setting!" or the like to encourage the player to continue playing, giving the player the expectation of obtaining information on the current setting value and allowing the player to continue playing. In addition, the notification of the number of times the special symbol changes may be reset to the initial state together with the initialization of the number of changes counter when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value. This eliminates any discrepancy between the number of fluctuations notified to the player and the timing of executing suggestive performance A1 or A2 using fluctuation pattern table B or fluctuation pattern table C, thereby increasing the reliability of the execution of suggestive performance A1 or A2.

[15-1. Modification of the transition of the fluctuation pattern table when the main control RAM is initialized]
In the above embodiment, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the variation pattern table for when the player is in reach (when the player is not in reach) and the variation pattern table for when the player is not in reach are selected in a different order from when the setting values are changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the suggestion performance A1 and the suggestion performance A2 when the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table B or the variation pattern table C0 are not notified of information about the current setting value. As another embodiment, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the variation pattern table is selected in the same order as when the setting values are changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, based on the already set setting value, and the suggestion performance A1 and the suggestion performance A2 when the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table B or the variation pattern tables C1 to C6 are not notified of information about the current setting value. In the following, the transition of the special variation pattern table when the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on will be described with reference to Fig. 170. Fig. 170 is a table showing a modified example of the transition of the variation pattern table after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 170, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without any changes to the settings, the setting values that have already been set are referenced, and the fluctuation pattern table for when the reach is reached (when the reach is missed) and the fluctuation pattern table for when the reach is missed are respectively set based on the referenced setting values. Specifically, just as when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the following order is selected for the fluctuation pattern table when the reach is reached (when the reach is missed) and the fluctuation pattern table when the reach is missed: fluctuation pattern table A when the number of times the special pattern changes after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on is 1 to 99, fluctuation pattern table B when it is 100, fluctuation pattern table A when it is 101 to 199, fluctuation pattern table B when it is 200, fluctuation pattern table A when it is 201 to 299, fluctuation pattern table B when it is 300, fluctuation pattern table A when it is 301 to 399, fluctuation pattern table B when it is 400, fluctuation pattern table A when it is 401 to 499, and fluctuation pattern table C according to the setting value when it is 500. In addition, as the fluctuation pattern table C according to the setting value, if the setting value is 1, then fluctuation pattern table C1 is selected; if the setting value is 2, then fluctuation pattern table C2; if the setting value is 3, then fluctuation pattern table C3; if the setting value is 4, then fluctuation pattern table C4; if the setting value is 5, then fluctuation pattern table C5; and if the setting value is 6, then fluctuation pattern table C6 is selected.

In addition, after the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the light from the LED 3121 is used to emit the first pattern when the light guide plate 3110 emits light 1 to 3 times in the suggestion performance A1 when the variation pattern table B is selected, just like after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. In other words, in the suggestion performance A1, the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light (1 to 3 times) suggests whether the current setting value is a high setting or a low setting. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestion performance A1 is set, it is determined based on the current setting value whether the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light is 1 to 3 times, and when determining the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light, it is determined that the higher the current setting value is, the more times the light guide plate 3110 emits light. As a result, even after the main control internal RAM is initialized without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the suggestion performance A1 can grasp information about the current setting value in the same way as after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and when the light guide plate 3110 emits light a large number of times, it can be expected that the current setting value is set high.

Furthermore, after the main control internal RAM is initialized without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the variation pattern table C corresponding to the setting value is selected when the number of times the special symbol changes after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on is 500, just like after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. In other words, as the variation pattern table C corresponding to the setting value, the variation pattern table C1 is selected when the setting value is 1, the variation pattern table C2 is selected when the setting value is 2, the variation pattern table C3 is selected when the setting value is 3, the variation pattern table C4 is selected when the setting value is 4, the variation pattern table C5 is selected when the setting value is 5, and the variation pattern table C6 is selected when the setting value is 6. The variation pattern tables C1 to C6 are set with variation patterns 1 to 4 that execute a roulette performance as the suggestion performance A2 and stop at any of "even numbers", "odd numbers", "high setting", and "setting value 6" as the result of the roulette performance, and the suggestion performance A2 suggests the current setting value based on the result of the roulette performance based on the variation pattern. As a result, even after the main control internal RAM is initialized without changing the settings when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the suggestion performance A2 can grasp information about the current settings in the same way as after the settings are changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and when the roulette performance stops at "high setting" or "setting value 6," there is a high probability that the lottery result will be a winning one, so players can play with anticipation.

As described above, if the main control built-in RAM is only initialized without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, just as if the setting value was changed when the pachinko machine 1 was powered on, suggestive performance A1 is executed based on a variation pattern selected from variation pattern table B every 100 times the special symbol is displayed in the subsequent game, and suggestive performance A2 is executed based on a variation pattern selected from variation pattern tables C1 to C6 when the special symbol is displayed 500 times, so there is no difference in the performance between suggestive performance A1 and suggestive performance A2. Therefore, depending on the execution of suggestive performance A1 and suggestive performance A2, it is not possible to know whether the setting value was changed when the pachinko machine 1 was powered on, or whether only the main control built-in RAM was initialized without changing the setting value.

In this modified example, when the setting value is changed when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a setting completion notification is executed by the image, lamp, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600, and the setting change is notified. Similarly, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, an initialization completion notification is executed by the image, lamp, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600, and the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is notified. As a result, by executing the setting completion notification and the initialization completion notification, it is possible to know whether the setting value was changed when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, or whether the main control built-in RAM was initialized without changing the setting value. In addition, as the setting completion notification and the initialization completion notification, for example, the initial display mode of the decorative pattern in the performance display device 1600 (initial pattern combination before the first fluctuation starts, etc.) is set to a display mode different from that when the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value. These notifications end when the display of the special symbols starts changing after the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1, or when the power is turned off and on again for the pachinko machine 1 (when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1 without the operation of the RWM clear button 633z), and the end of the notifications makes it impossible to know whether the setting value was changed when the power was turned on for the pachinko machine 1, or whether the main control built-in RAM was only initialized without changing the setting value. As a result, if the player does not want to be notified of whether the setting value was changed when the power was turned on for the pachinko machine 1, or whether the main control built-in RAM was only initialized without changing the setting value, for example, the hall manager can arbitrarily create a state in which the setting completion notification or the initialization completion notification is not executed by turning off the power to the pachinko machine 1 again and turning it on (when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1 without the operation of the RWM clear button 633z).

In addition, in this modified example, if the main control built-in RAM is only initialized without changing the settings when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the setting value before the power was cut off is maintained, but the variation count counter is reset to the value before the power was cut off, so that when the variation pattern table corresponding to the variation count counter is selected thereafter, it starts from the beginning (the variation pattern table corresponding to the first variation). In other words, if the main control built-in RAM is only initialized without changing the settings when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the hall manager can reset only the variation count counter while maintaining the same setting value as before the power was cut off, and when the number of times the special pattern has changed since the pachinko machine 1 was powered on is 100, 200, 300, 400, or 500, information regarding the current setting value can be notified by suggestion performance A1 or suggestion performance A2. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned embodiment, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the hall manager resets the variation counter while maintaining the same setting value as before the power was cut off, but when the number of times the special symbol has changed since the power was turned on for the pachinko machine 1 is 100, 200, 300, 400, or 500, information regarding the current setting value is not notified by the suggestive performance A1 or the suggestive performance A2. Therefore, in order to notify information regarding the current setting value by the suggestive performance A1 or the suggestive performance A2 when the number of times the special symbol has changed since the power was turned on for the pachinko machine 1 is 100, 200, 300, 400, or 500 while maintaining the same setting value as before the power was cut off, the hall manager must operate the pachinko machine 1 to change the setting value when it is powered on, and reset the setting value to the same as before the power was cut off. In this regard, in this modified example, there is no need to change the settings when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and it is sufficient to initialize the main control built-in RAM without changing the settings, eliminating the need to "reset the same settings as before the power was cut off."

In addition, in this modified example, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, when the timing for executing the suggestive performance A1 or the suggestive performance A2 is approaching, a special premonition performance may be executed to inform the player that the execution of the suggestive performance A1 or the suggestive performance A2 is imminent, as a performance separate from the notification of the number of times the special pattern changes. For example, when the remaining number of times the special pattern changes until the suggestive performance A1 or the suggestive performance A2 is executed reaches 10 times, the performance display device 1600 may be used to display "10 more times to suggest the setting!" or the like to encourage the player to continue playing, thereby giving the player the expectation of obtaining information on the current setting value and allowing the player to continue playing. In addition, the notification of the number of times the special pattern changes may be reset to the initial state when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value. This eliminates any discrepancy between the number of fluctuations notified to the player and the timing of executing suggestive performance A1 or A2 using fluctuation pattern table B or fluctuation pattern table C, thereby increasing the reliability of the execution of suggestive performance A1 or A2.

[15-2. Regarding the suggestion performance B, which is executed at a different timing from the suggestion performance A1 and the suggestion performance A2]
In the above embodiment, a case was described in which suggestive performance A1 or suggestive performance A2 is executed according to the elapsed time of the decorative pattern change in the change performance such as the change display of the decorative pattern in the performance display device 1600, but it is possible to execute suggestive performance B, which can suggest the current setting value, at a timing separate from the execution of suggestive performance A1 or suggestive performance A2, regardless of the elapsed time of the decorative pattern change. The execution of such suggestive performance B will be described with reference to FIG. 167.

First, regarding the suggestion performance B, when the handle 111 is operated without any operation instruction of the handle 111, a lottery is performed with a predetermined probability as to whether or not to execute the suggestion performance B. Specifically, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the operation of the handle 111 and a detection signal is input to the payout control board 633, the fact that the detection signal has been input is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 performs a lottery with a predetermined probability (a lottery with a winning rate of 1/50 in this embodiment) as to whether or not to execute the suggestion performance B. This lottery is set to have a higher probability of winning than the big win lottery at least, and by making it frequent, it is easier for multiple players to experience the suggestion performance B, and one player can experience the suggestion performance B multiple times, improving their motivation to continue playing. Then, in the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestion performance B, if it is decided to execute the suggestion performance B (if it is won), one of the suggestion patterns is determined according to the current setting value from among the multiple types of suggestion patterns, and the suggestion performance B is executed based on the determined suggestion pattern. In addition, in the suggestion performance B, regardless of which suggestion pattern is based on, the current setting value is suggested by output from the lamp and speaker provided on the main body frame 4. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (when the setting value is changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is terminated), the current setting value is transmitted as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 side holds information on the current setting value, making it possible to grasp which of the setting values 1 to 6 the current setting value is. However, as described above in detail, the current setting value is also transmitted as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing when the variation pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a change pattern command, and the peripheral control board 1510 side can also grasp which of the setting values 1 to 6 the current setting value is by the command. As a result, when the peripheral control board 1510 decides to execute suggestion performance B (when a winner is won), it can select one of the multiple suggestion patterns based on the current setting value.

More specifically, in suggestion performance B, the current setting value is suggested by outputting one of the following voices from the speaker: "Maybe setting value 1," "Maybe setting value 2," "Maybe setting value 3," "Maybe setting value 4," "Maybe setting value 5," or "Maybe setting value 6." When "Maybe setting value 1" is output as a voice from the speaker, the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 is illuminated once; when "Maybe setting value 2" is output, the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 is illuminated twice at a predetermined interval; when "Maybe setting value 3" is output, the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 is illuminated three times at a predetermined interval; when "Maybe setting value 4" is output, the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 is illuminated four times at a predetermined interval; when "Maybe setting value 5" is output, the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 is illuminated five times at a predetermined interval; and when "Maybe setting value 6" is output, the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 is illuminated six times at a predetermined interval. In this way, the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 is illuminated a number of times according to the suggestion of the setting value. Also, for example, "Setting value may be 6" can be output when the current setting is not 6, i.e., any of 1 to 5, and even if "Setting value may be 6" is output in suggestive performance B, it may be a false indication that the current setting is not 6. In addition to these, suggestive performance B may also suggest that the current setting is an "even number" of 2, 4, or 6, an "odd number" of 1, 3, or 5, or a "high setting" of 4 to 6.

In addition, with regard to the suggestion performance B, it is possible to execute it regardless of whether it is within a variable performance such as the variable display of the decorative pattern on the performance display device 1600, except for the execution period of the suggestion performance A1 or the suggestion performance A2. As shown in FIG. 167 (A), when executing a variable pattern selected from the variable pattern table A, the execution of the suggestion performance A1 or the suggestion performance A2 is not set, so it is possible to execute the suggestion performance B within the variable time of the special pattern (variation time of the decorative pattern) based on such a variable pattern. However, in this embodiment, if the suggestion performance B, whose execution condition was met earlier, is still being executed, the execution condition of the new suggestion performance B is not met, and duplicate execution of the suggestion performance B is prohibited (restricted). Specifically, while suggested performance B is being performed, the handle touch sensor 192 detects the operation of the handle 111 and a detection signal is input to the payout control board 633, and even if the fact that the detection signal has been input is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that suggested performance B is being performed and prohibits (restricts) it from holding a lottery to determine whether or not suggested performance B will be performed.

As described above, the suggestion performance B of this embodiment is executed by combining the sound from the speaker and the illumination of the lamp provided on the main body frame 4, and the illumination of the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 may continue at a predetermined interval even after the sound from the speaker has ended (for example, when the process of illuminating the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 at a predetermined interval remains even after the sound of "The setting value may be 6" has ended), or the sound from the speaker may continue even after the illumination of the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 has ended (for example, when the process of illuminating the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 has ended even though the sound of "The setting value may be 1" has not ended). For this reason, the period to be determined as the execution of the suggestion performance B corresponds to the longer period of the sound output period from the speaker and the illumination period of the lamp provided on the main body frame 4. As a result, the period to be prohibited from drawing during the suggestion performance B is to reliably prohibit (limit) the overlapping execution of the suggestion performance B.

Even with the above prohibition, if the execution interval between the first and second suggested effects B is short, the first and second suggested effects B will be consecutive, and for example, the lights of the lamps on the main frame 4 will be mixed, which may cause the player to misinterpret the suggested content. In this embodiment, taking this into consideration, a predetermined limited extension period (e.g., 5 seconds) is generated after the execution of the suggested effect B, and regardless of which execution pattern the suggested effect B is executed in, it is prohibited (restricted) not to hold a lottery to decide whether or not to execute the suggested effect B for the period of the execution period of the suggested effect B plus the limited extension period. This makes it possible to prevent the first and second suggested effects B from being executed in a mixed manner, causing the player to misinterpret the suggested content.

Also, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), when a fluctuation pattern selected from fluctuation pattern table B is executed, the execution of suggested performance A1 is set for the 3 seconds added to the fluctuation pattern selected from fluctuation pattern table A. Therefore, within the fluctuation time of the special pattern based on such a fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time of the decorative pattern), the execution of suggested performance B is prohibited during the execution period of suggested performance A1, whereas it is possible to execute suggested performance B except for the execution period of suggested performance A1.

Also, as shown in FIG. 167(C), when a fluctuation pattern selected from the fluctuation pattern table C is executed, the execution of a roulette effect is set as suggested effect A2 using almost the entire fluctuation time of the special pattern (fluctuation time of the decorative pattern), so it is prohibited to execute suggested effect B within the fluctuation time of the special pattern (fluctuation time of the decorative pattern) based on such a fluctuation pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 167(D), when the special pattern changing display (decorative pattern changing display) based on the changing pattern is not being performed, suggestive performance A1 and suggestive performance A2 are not executed, so it is possible to execute suggestive performance B during the period when such special pattern changing display (decorative pattern changing display) is not being performed.

As described above, suggestive effect B, unlike suggestive effect A1 and suggestive effect A2, suddenly suggests the current setting value when the handle 111 is operated, providing a sense of surprise to the player. Furthermore, by prohibiting the execution of suggestive effect B during the execution period of suggestive effect A1 and suggestive effect A2 and prioritizing the execution of suggestive effect A1 and suggestive effect A2 over suggestive effect B, it is possible to prevent the visibility of suggestive effect A1 and suggestive effect A2 from being obstructed and to actively draw attention to suggestive effect A1 and suggestive effect A2. In this regard, it is preferable to make suggestive effect A1 and suggestive effect A2 more reliable than suggestive effect B, for example by eliminating false rumours such as suggestive effect B.

As described above, the suggestion effect B can be executed even during a variable effect such as the variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 1600, except during the execution period of the suggestion effect A1 and suggestion effect A2. In this regard, the suggestion effect B suggests the current setting value by the output from the lamp and speaker provided on the main frame 4, so that it is possible to prevent the visibility of the variable effect from being hindered. Also, outside of variable effects such as the variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 1600, the variable display of special symbols (variable display of decorative symbols) is not performed, which can be boring, but when the handle 111 is operated, the suggestion effect B can suddenly be executed, and the current setting value can be suggested, which can generate the desire to operate the handle 111 and start playing.

In this example, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the suggestion effect B can be executed by operating the handle 111 after a predetermined condition such as closing the main frame 4 is met. However, if the operation of the handle 111 is continued from before the predetermined condition is met until after the predetermined condition is met, the suggestion effect B will not be executed even after the predetermined condition is met. Therefore, in order to execute the suggestion effect B, if the operation of the handle 111 is continued from before the predetermined condition is met until after the predetermined condition is met, it is necessary to release the hand from the handle 111 once after the predetermined condition is met and then operate the handle 111 again. Note that this also applies not only when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, but also when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, when the main control RAM is initialized, and when the power is turned on normally (when the power is turned on without operating the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a).

In this example, although it is possible to execute the suggestion performance B when the handle 111 is operated, it is possible for the player to choose not to notify the suggestion of the current setting value when executing the suggestion performance B. In other words, if the player chooses not to be notified of the suggestion of the current setting value, the current setting value is not suggested by the output from the lamp and speaker provided on the main frame 4 at the timing when the suggestion performance B is executed thereafter. In this way, for players who do not need a suggestion about the current setting value, by choosing not to be notified of the suggestion, they will not be confused by the suggestion about the current setting value and can concentrate on the performance of whether the lottery result will be a win or not. In addition, it is also possible to configure the player to choose not to notify only a part of the output from the lamp and speaker provided on the main frame 4 in the suggestion performance B, for example, to notify depending on the output from the lamp provided on the main frame 4 but not depending on the output from the speaker. In addition, with regard to the suggestion performance A1 and suggestion performance A2 that are executed within a variable performance such as the display of a changing decorative pattern on the performance display device 1600, the player cannot select at his discretion not to be notified of the suggestion of the current setting value when the suggestion performance A1 or suggestion performance A2 is executed.

As described above in detail, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the warning alert can be extended by the image of the performance display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. During the period in which the warning alert is extended, when the suggestion performance B is executed in response to the operation of the handle 111, the output from the lamp and the speaker provided on the main frame 4 may be configured to be different from that during other periods (after the end of the extended warning alert). For example, it may be configured not to notify only a part of the output from the lamp and the speaker provided on the main frame 4 in the suggestion performance B, for example, it may be configured to notify depending on the output from the lamp provided on the main frame 4, but not depending on the output from the speaker. In this way, during the period in which the warning alert is extended, the warning alert is prioritized over the suggestion performance B, thereby preventing the recognition of the warning alert from being hindered, and a situation in which the monitoring system is strengthened so that no one other than the hall manager can commit fraud can be maintained.

In this example, the suggestion performance B can be executed when the handle 111 is operated, but the suggestion performance B executed when the handle 111 is operated for the first time after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on is configured to have a different performance from the suggestion performance B executed when the handle 111 is operated for the second or subsequent times. For example, the suggestion performance B executed when the handle 111 is operated for the first time after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on is configured to have a higher reliability of the suggestion than the second or subsequent times, such as by reducing falsehoods. In addition, the suggestion performance B can be executed with a predetermined probability when the handle 111 is operated, but the probability of executing the suggestion performance B is lowered as time passes (or the number of times the special pattern changes increases), so that the suggestion performance B becomes more difficult to execute even when the handle 111 is operated. In this regard, the setting value is often changed by the hall manager when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on before the hall opens, so that it is possible to generate a desire to operate the handle 111 and start playing immediately after the hall opens. This applies not only when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, but also when the setting value is displayed for confirmation, when the main control RAM is initialized, and when the power is turned on normally (when the power is turned on without operating the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a).

Also, in this example, it is possible to execute suggested performance B when the handle 111 is operated, but it may be configured so that suggested performance B is executed when the performance operation unit 160 is operated instead of the operation of the handle 111. Also, when the performance operation unit 160 is used as a trigger for executing suggested performance B, for example, it may be configured so that the performance operation unit 160 is also used as a trigger for executing suggested performance A1 and suggested performance A2, and when the performance operation unit 160 is operated, it may be configured so that the execution of suggested performance A1 and suggested performance A2 is started while enabling the execution of suggested performance B. Also, instead of operating the handle 111, the trigger for executing suggestion performance B may be when the ball first enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (a ball entry port involved in the lottery for determining whether or not there is a win) after the setting value is changed when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (this may be after the confirmation display of the setting value, after the initialization of the main control RAM, or after normal power-on), when the ball enters a ball entry port that is not involved in the lottery for determining whether or not there is a win, such as the general winning port 2001, or when a specific date and time is reached using a real-time clock IC, etc. Even with this configuration, at the timing when there is a possibility of executing suggestion performance B, it is possible to create an interest in obtaining information about the setting value through suggestion performance B.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 111 is provided as a game control board having a main control MPU of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 111 as a game control central processing unit capable of controlling the progress of the game. This main control board 1310 can be provided with a test connector 1310k of FIG. 115 that can be electrically connected to a test harness as wiring for extracting an output signal from the main control MPU 1310a and transmitting it to a test device that tests the pachinko machine 1.

When the pachinko machine 1 is tested by a test device, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is mounted on the front side (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, while the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back side (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

In this way, because the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing organization, and even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to an amusement hall, the area on the front side of the main control board 1310 where the test connector 1310k is mounted will not be left as empty space. This allows for greater freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of the main control board 1310.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, multiple electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310' in FIG. 113(a) as a game control board that can control the progress of the game. These multiple electronic components are composed of a ZIP-type main control MPU (indicated as part number "MIC1" in the figure) included in the lead type in FIG. 113(a) as a lead type electronic component, and an SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 in FIG. 113(a) as a surface mount type electronic component, and are each mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'.

The main control board 1310' has a parts list area 1310xb' in FIG. 113(a) as an information area. This parts list area 1310xb' can display information corresponding to the identifiers of surface mount type electronic components. Information displayed in the parts list area 1310xb' can include the name of the manufacturer of the surface mount type electronic component (including abbreviations and symbols), the product number of the surface mount type electronic component, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113(a), in the parts list area 1310xb', a parts list of electronic parts, in which part numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are aligned, is silk-screened in white (or black). The size of the part numbers and product numbers is larger (e.g., about three to five times larger) than the part numbers printed in white (or black) as silk-screened in the parts placement area 1310xa'. A separator ":" is provided between the part number and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) so that the part number and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) are not identified as being consecutive. This separator allows the part number and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) to be distinguished and identified. The name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) along with the product number (numbers listed in the catalog).

In this way, even if the display mode of the identifier attached to the surface mount type electronic component mounted on the main control board 1310' is difficult to visually recognize, the information corresponding to this identifier (manufacturing company name, product number, etc.) is displayed in the parts list area 1310xb' provided on the main control board 1310'. Therefore, the identifier of the surface mount type electronic component can be reliably visually recognized.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 in FIG. 111 as a game control board that can control the progress of the game, and this main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 in FIG. 115 as a sealed board box having a sealing means.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with multiple ventilation holes 1301z formed in the transparent cover body 1301 in FIG. 115 as holes having a shape smaller than the shape of the surface-mount type electronic components among the multiple electronic components.

In this way, the main control board box 1320 is provided with multiple ventilation holes 1301z, which are holes that are smaller than the shape of surface-mounted electronic components, so that even if an attempt is made to remove a surface-mounted electronic component from the main control board 1310 by some fraudulent means and replace it with an unauthorized electronic component, the surface-mounted electronic component cannot be removed through the ventilation holes 1301z, which are multiple holes provided in the main control board box 1320. This makes it possible to prevent surface-mounted electronic components from being replaced with unauthorized electronic components.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above is equipped with a main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71 as a winning probability control circuit, and a setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 as a setting device. The main control MPU 1310a can set multiple types of winning probabilities, and the setting key switch 1311a can set multiple types of winning probabilities by external operation.

Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a selects various tables used in various lottery judgments associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot judgment table that specifies the percentage of jackpot judgment values indicating that a jackpot has been won, a jackpot pattern determination table that specifies the percentage of judgment values for determining a jackpot pattern, a small jackpot judgment table that specifies the percentage of judgment values for determining a small jackpot pattern, a small jackpot pattern determination table that specifies the percentage of judgment values for determining a small jackpot pattern, a normal time transition judgment table that specifies the percentage of judgment values for determining a transition from a special probability period to a normal time, etc.) or selects various tables used in various allocation rates associated with the set values (for example, an allocation table that specifies the allocation time, a block that manages the operation of an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid, etc.). The setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated, allowing the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 to be changed, and when the setting key is ready to be inserted into the socket formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position in which the length of the rectangular socket runs along the up-down direction), the setting key switch 1311a is in the OFF state as the initial position, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, which allows the setting key switch 1311a to be set to the setting key ON state.

The main control MPU 1310a and the setting key switch 1311a are mounted on different boards and are electrically connected.

In this way, by mounting the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 on different boards, it is possible to make it difficult for the force associated with an external operation on the setting key switch 1311a to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted via the main control board 1310 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, thereby contributing to preventing deflection of the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted due to the force associated with an external operation on the setting key switch 1311a. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing deflection of the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 on which the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 71 is mounted as a winning probability control circuit is a surface mount component mountable board on which surface mount components, which are SMD type electronic components, can be mounted, and the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 on which the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 is mounted as a setting device is an insertion mount component mounting board on which only insertion mount components, which are lead type electronic components, can be mounted. In this way, the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted can be a surface mount component mountable board on which surface mount components (SMD type) can be mounted, and the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted can be an insertion mount component mounting board on which only insertion mount components (SMD type) can be mounted. This makes it possible to reduce the peeling load of the wiring pattern and land pattern in the soldered portion of an insertion mounted component (lead type) soldered to the solder surface of a board compared to surface mounted components (SMD type), making the solder portion more resistant to peeling.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 as a surface mount component mountable board and the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 as an insertion mount component mountable board are housed in the transparent main control board box 1320 of FIG. 115 as a transparent board case. The transparent main control board box 1320 has its exterior sealed by the crimping part 1303 of FIG. 115 as a sealing device. The main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 as a surface mount component mountable board is provided with the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 as a connector electrically connected to the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 71 as a winning probability control circuit, and the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 as an insertion mount component mountable board is provided with the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 as a connector electrically connected to the setting key switch 1311a of FIG. 71 as a setting device. The connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 are electrically connected. This allows the main control board 1310, which is a board capable of mounting surface mount components, and the setting change board 1311, which is a board mounted with insertion mount components, to be housed in the transparent main control board box 1320 sealed by the crimping portion 1303, thereby enhancing the deterrent effect against fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310, which is a board capable of mounting surface mount components, and the setting change board 1311, which is a board mounted with insertion mount components.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 as a connector provided on the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 as a surface mount component mountable board, and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 as a connector provided on the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 as an insertion mount component mounting board are electrically connected by a connector connection equipped with a floating mechanism that can absorb the mating axis misalignment. Specifically, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 are electrically connected by a special connector equipped with a floating mechanism. This special connector equipped with a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are mated by inserting the socket into the plug and pushing it in, and when the socket is mated with the plug, it moves a predetermined distance range in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the socket is inserted and pushed in (for example, up and down), thereby absorbing the error (mating axis misalignment) that occurs when pushing in.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above is equipped with the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71 as the game control board, and the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 as the setting change board. The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. The setting change board 1311 is provided separately from the main control board 1310 and is electrically connected to the main control board 1310, and is provided with the setting key switch 1311a in FIG. 71 as a lead-type electronic component that can change the setting value that sets the probability that is advantageous to the player.

The lead-type setting key switch 1311a is a switch into which a setting key that can change the setting value is inserted and removed. When a setting key is inserted and removed from the lead-type setting key switch 1311a, the setting change board 1311 may bend, but the main control board 1310 is designed not to bend.

In this way, because the lead-type setting key switch 1311a is provided on the setting change board 1311, which is separate from the main control board 1310, even if the setting change board 1311 is deflected when a setting key that can change a setting value is inserted or removed, the main control board 1310 will not bend. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being deflected when the lead-type setting key switch 1311a is operated.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above has a front frame made up of a door frame 3 and a main frame 4, which is pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed by the outer frame 2 in Fig. 2 and to which the game board 5 in Fig. 70 is attached. This pachinko machine 1 further has a setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 in Fig. 70 as a setting device. The setting key switch 1311a can set multiple types of winning probabilities by external operation. Specifically, the setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated, allowing the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 to be changed, and when the setting key is ready to be inserted into the socket formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the length of the rectangular socket runs along the up-down direction), the setting key switch 1311a is in the OFF state as the initial position, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, which allows the setting key switch 1311a to be set to the setting key ON state.

The setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is located on the pivot side of the front frame at the rear of the game board 5.

Specifically, the outer frame 2 supports the upper hinge part 510 and the lower hinge part 520 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame coaxially and rotatably by the upper hinge assembly 50 and the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame, so that the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward around the left side as viewed from the front. Therefore, the left side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction as viewed from the front, where the upper hinge part 510 and the lower hinge assembly 52 of the main body frame 4 are arranged, is the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the opposite right side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction as viewed from the front, is the open side of the main body frame 4. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, while the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame.

In this way, since the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is located on the pivot side of the front frame consisting of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 at the rear of the game board 5, if any unauthorized tampering is attempted with the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300, the front frame must be opened, and such unauthorized activity will be noticeable in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. This can therefore contribute to preventing unauthorized activity.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the rear side of the game board 5 is covered by the rear cover 640 in FIG. 3 as a cover body pivoted so as to be freely opened and closed on the open side opposite the pivot side of the front frame, and the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is arranged on the pivot side of the front frame on the rear side of the game board 5 and covered by the rear cover 640, so that the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated unless the rear cover 640 is opened after the front frame is opened. In this way, the rear side of the game board 5 is covered by the rear cover 640 pivoted so as to be freely opened and closed on the open side opposite the pivot side of the front frame. The setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is located on the pivot side of the front frame at the rear of the game board 5 and is covered by the back cover 640, so that the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated unless the back cover 640 is opened after the front frame is opened.

Specifically, the outer frame 2 supports the upper hinge part 510 and the lower hinge part 520 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame coaxially and rotatably by the upper hinge assembly 50 and the lower hinge member 60, so that the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward around the left side as viewed from the front. Therefore, the left side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction as viewed from the front, where the upper hinge part 510 and the lower hinge assembly 52 of the main body frame 4 are arranged, is the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the opposite right side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction as viewed from the front, is the open side of the main body frame 4. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, while the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. In addition, the back cover 640, which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame in an openable and closable manner, covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640. In addition, the right side of the back cover 640 as viewed from the front is rotatably attached to the rear end extending up and down of the rear extension part 501j of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending up and down, and the left side is attached to the back cover attachment part 551i of the payout base 551 and the back cover attachment part 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600, so that the right side as viewed from the front is the pivot support side (closed side) of the back cover 640, and the opposite left side as viewed from the front is the open side of the back cover 640. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4 that constitutes the front frame, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640, while the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the open side of the back cover. In addition, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 has an insertion port for inserting a setting key, and since the insertion port of this setting key cylinder is covered by the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 in order to access the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. In order to open this back cover 640, it is necessary to open the main frame 4 largely (near about 90 degrees) relative to the outer frame 2.

As a result, the rear cover 640 must be opened so that the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated, and the front frame must be opened to be able to open this rear cover 640. Therefore, if any unauthorized modification is attempted to the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300, the front frame must be opened to be able to open the rear cover 640, making such unauthorized behavior conspicuous in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 112(a) is provided as a game control board that controls the progress of the game. The surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be mounted with the capacitor MC30 shown in FIG. 112(a) as an insertion mounting component (lead type electronic component) and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 shown in FIG. 112(a) as a surface mounting component (surface mounting type electronic component), and the area in which the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted is configured as a non-circuit forming area, with no wiring patterns or through holes for transmitting control signals being arranged in the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component (surface mounting type electronic component) shown in FIG. 112(a).

In this way, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be mounted with a mixture of the capacitor MC30, which is an insertion mounting component, and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface mounting component, and the area in which the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface mounting component, is mounted can be configured as a non-circuit forming area in which no circuit such as wiring patterns or through holes is formed. As a result, even if the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface mounting component, is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the circuit to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface mounting component, is formed except for the non-circuit forming area, so that the circuit to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface mounting component, can be visually observed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against surface mounting components.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played, and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 is a first operation unit capable of receiving a predetermined operation, and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3 is a second operation unit, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71 is a setting change means that can change the setting value that sets the probability that is advantageous to the player by operating the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 after the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is operated. The RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is provided separately from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. This pachinko machine 1 further includes a guide means for providing information regarding the operation of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633, and is further equipped with notation or the like that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z.

In this way, information regarding the operation of the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633 is provided, so even if the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the dispensing control board 633 are provided separately, a person operating the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the dispensing control board 633 will not be confused by the operating procedures. By providing the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the dispensing control board 633 separately, it is possible to improve crime prevention. Therefore, crime prevention can be improved.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played using game balls as a game medium, and the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71, the setting change board 1311, and the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3 are provided as game control means having a setting control unit related to preparation settings for starting a game and a progress control unit related to progress control of the game. The setting control unit is composed of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3, the judgment of step S14 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 118, the processing of step S16A, etc. The progress control unit is composed of a main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in Figure 71, main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing in Figure 118, and main control side timer interrupt processing in Figure 120. As game control means, the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311, and the payout control board 633 are composed of multiple electronic components such as the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 and capacitor MC30 in FIGS. 112(a) and (b), the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71, and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3, and electronic components related to setting control such as the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3 are provided separately on multiple boards such as the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 and the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3.

In this way, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z, which are electronic components related to setting control, are provided separately on multiple boards such as the setting change board 1311 and the payout control board 633, respectively, thereby improving crime prevention. Therefore, crime prevention can be improved.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, a game can be played using a game ball as a game medium, and the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71 is provided as a game control unit that controls game preparation and game. The game control is composed of the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 118 and the main control side timer interrupt processing in FIG. 120. The game preparation control includes the judgment of step S14 and processing of step S16A in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 118 as the first game preparation control, and the judgment of step S216 and processing of step S218 in the setting change processing in FIG. 121 as the second game preparation control. The first game preparation control can set a setting change state in which a setting value in which a probability advantageous to a player is set can be changed based on the operation of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in Figure 71 as the first operation unit (when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage) as described above, the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a into the setting key ON state as a "predetermined setting value change permission condition," and if the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to input an operation signal, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in Figure 3 is further included as a condition). The second game preparation control is a control that can switch to one of a number of setting values based on the operation of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3 as the second operation unit following the first game preparation control. The RWM clear button 633z is located on the payout control board 633, which is a different board from the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is located.

In this way, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are placed on different boards, thereby improving security.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is located and the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is located are housed as separate board cases in the main control board box 1320 in FIG. 115 and the payout control board box 632 in FIG. 3, respectively. Therefore, by separating the main control board box 1320 that houses the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is located and the payout control board box 632 that houses the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is located, crime prevention can be further improved.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, the main control board box 1320 in FIG. 115 and the payout control board box 632 in FIG. 3 are separate board cases, and therefore, in order to modify the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 housed in the main control board box 1320, or the payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632, these crimped parts must be destroyed, which can leave traces of the modification.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game, which is located on the back side of the game board 5 in FIG. 70, and the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is located is housed in the main control board box 1320 as a crimped case together with the main control board 1310, and the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z in FIG. 3 is located controls the payout, which is located on the main body frame 4 in FIG. 4 as the frame side on which the game board 5 is attached, and is housed in the payout control board box 632 as a crimped case. The setting change board 1311, which is to be mounted on the game board 5, can be placed on the back side of the game board 5 while being housed together with the main control board 1310 in a main control board box 1320 as a crimped case, and the payout control board 633, on which the RWM clear button 633z is mounted, can be placed on the main frame 4 as the frame side while being housed in a payout control board box 632 as a crimped case. Therefore, by separately placing the setting key switch 1311a on the game board 5 side and the RWM clear button 633z on the main frame 4 side as the frame side, the crime prevention of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z can be further improved.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, the machine is equipped with a door frame 3 in FIG. 4 on the front side as a door that can be opened and closed, a main control board 1310 housed in a main control board box 1320 in FIG. 70 as a board on which electronic components are mounted, a cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 in FIG. 1 and a locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 in FIG. 4 as a first device that can perform a first operation (when opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, when opening the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 3) by operating a first key (a regular metal key carried by a staff member or other attendant at an amusement hall), and a setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed in the main control board box 1320 in FIG. 70 together with the main control board 1310 as a second device that can perform a second operation (when changing a setting value, when checking the currently set setting value) by operating a second key (setting key) different from the first key, and in which a signal line by operating the second key is electrically connected to electronic components. The setting key switch 1311a allows multiple types of winning probabilities to be set (when changing the setting value) and also allows the current setting value to be checked (when checking the current setting value). The cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 is provided on the front side of the door frame 3, and the housing of the cylinder lock 127 is electrically connected to the ground side. The setting key switch 1311a is provided behind the door frame 3, and the housing of the setting key switch 1311a is electrically insulated and not connected to the ground side.

Specifically, the metallic cylindrical cylinder body, which is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3, is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side or the ground side, which is the N (neutral) of 24V AC. In addition, by forming the foil cut-out areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 in the copper planes on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a long elongated hole shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted can be electrically insulated from the solid earth (board ground) formed on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. For this reason, the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a is electrically insulated from the solid earth (board ground) formed on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311.

In this way, since the cylindrical metal cylinder body, which is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 installed in front of the door frame 3, is electrically connected to the ground side, even if noise (electromagnetic noise) enters the cylindrical metal cylinder body, this entered noise (electromagnetic noise) is released to the ground side, so that the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is the board on which electronic components are mounted, is not changed. Furthermore, since the cylindrical metal (or rectangular) housing, which is the housing of the setting key switch 1311a installed behind the door frame 3, is electrically insulated and not connected to the ground side, even if noise (electromagnetic noise) enters the cylindrical metal (or rectangular) housing, the entered noise (electromagnetic noise) is attenuated by the cylindrical metal (or rectangular) housing itself, so that the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is the board on which electronic components are mounted, is not changed. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and damage to electronic components.

The cylindrical metal cylinder body, which is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3, is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or the ground side which is the N (neutral) of the 24V AC supplied to the pachinko machine 1, while the cylindrical metal (or rectangular) housing, which is the housing of the setting key switch 1311a, is not electrically connected to and insulated from the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or the ground side which is the N (neutral) of the 24V AC supplied to the pachinko machine 1. This allows the cylindrical metal cylinder body to be electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or the ground side which is the N (neutral) of the 24V AC supplied to the pachinko machine 1, while the cylindrical metal (or rectangular) housing can be electrically connected to and insulated from the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 and the ground side which is the N (neutral) of the 24V AC supplied to the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, after the door frame 3 is opened by the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 (i.e., after the front frame consisting of the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2), multiple types of winning probabilities can be made settable (when changing the setting value) and the current setting value that has been set can be made checkable (when checking the current setting value that has been set). This makes it possible to access the setting key switch 1311a in an attempt to operate it and set it to a state in which the setting value can be set (when changing the setting value) or a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (when confirming the current setting value) only after the door frame 3 has been opened by the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 (i.e., after the front frame consisting of the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 has been opened from the outer frame 2), thereby improving security for the setting key switch 1311a.

[16. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in Fig. 36 will be described with reference to Figs. 171 to 175. Fig. 171 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, Fig. 172 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, Fig. 173 is a view taken along the line B in Fig. 172, Fig. 174 is a silk screen print (part 1) of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board, and Fig. 175 is a silk screen print (part 2) of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. Here, the circuit configuration of the power supply board will be described first, followed by a method of identifying electronic components of the same shape and confirmation of fuse blowout.

As mentioned above, the island equipment of the amusement hall has a transformer (not shown) that steps down the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100V to the power supply voltage of AC 24V for the gaming machines. When the plug of the power wiring (not shown) is inserted into a power outlet of AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines of the island equipment of the amusement hall, AC 24V is supplied to the power supply board 630. The power supply board 630 creates various power sources (various DC voltages such as DC +35V, DC +12V, DC +5V, etc.) from the AC 24V supplied from the island equipment of the amusement hall, and supplies them from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[16-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 171, the circuit of the power supply board 630 is mainly composed of a power switch 630a, a noise reduction circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply creation circuit 630f, and a power supply destruction circuit 630g.

AC 24V from the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power line (not shown). When AC 24V from the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power line (not shown), it is input to the input terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a via fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, transparent glass tubes with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), type B fuse as stipulated in the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). Specifically, AC 24V line 1 (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V1") is input to the input terminal 3 of the power switch 630a, and AC 24V line 2 (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V2") is input to the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. The output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b.

When a staff member of the game hall or other such staff turns on the power switch 630a, the input terminal 3 and the output terminal 4 are electrically connected, and AC24V1 starts to be supplied to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the input terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 are electrically connected, and AC24V2 starts to be supplied to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. This allows the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 to be turned on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member of the game hall or other such staff turns off the power switch 630a, the input terminal 3 and the output terminal 4 are electrically disconnected, and the supply of AC24V1 to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 is cut off, and the input terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 are electrically disconnected, and the supply of AC24V2 to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 is cut off. This allows the power to the pachinko machine 1 to be cut off by turning the power switch 630a OFF.

In addition, while the power switches of the pachinko machines installed in the amusement hall are left in the ON position, an amusement hall staff member or other attendant may turn on the breaker of the amusement hall to simultaneously power on all the pachinko machines installed in the amusement hall, or may turn off the breaker of the amusement hall to simultaneously power off all the pachinko machines installed in the amusement hall.

[16-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise reduction circuit 630b is composed of a common mode noise reduction circuit CMC, which is a circuit for reducing common mode noise, a normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC, which is a circuit for reducing normal mode noise, and a choke coil L1, and output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise reduction circuit CMC, the normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC is composed of capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. Capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacitance and are used to remove common mode noise. On the other hand, varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers) and have the same varistor voltage. Varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are used to remove noise that could not be reduced by capacitors C1 and C2.

One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. In addition, one end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the earth connection terminal DCN5 as the frame ground FG2. This earth connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the earth terminal ECN5 of the frame earth board 559 via a power supply earth line (not shown).

The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC consists of capacitor C3 and varistor ZNR3. Capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. Varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) that removes noise that could not be removed by capacitor C3.

One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. In addition, one end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a.

The AC24V1 output from the output terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC24VA, and the AC24V2 output from the output terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC24V. The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure component for the common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise interference. The power line connector DCN2 is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via a power line for an interface board (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 37, and a power line for a CR unit (not shown), and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to the CR unit (not shown).

AC24V1 and AC24V2, whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[16-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c is composed of N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter, referred to as "FETs") Q1 and Q2 and a peripheral circuit 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit for the FETs Q1 and Q2, and mainly comprises It is composed of multiple electronic components such as resistors, diodes, and Zener diodes.

AC24V1, whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1, is input to the anode terminal 1 and anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1, and is also input to the gate terminal of FETQ1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca, while it is input directly to the drain terminal of FETQ2 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. AC24V2, whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1, is input to the anode terminal 1 and anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and is also input to the gate terminal of FETQ2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca, while it is input directly to the drain terminal of FETQ1 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of FETQ1 and Q2 are each input to the CAI terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

AC24V1 and AC24V2, in which common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are rectified to direct current by switching with FETQ1, Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and are output from the cathode terminal 2 of Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal 2 of Schottky barrier diode D2, respectively. The package type of FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1, and Schottky barrier diode D2 is the same type, so-called TO-220F, and is fixed to the heat dissipation fin HS1 (see Figure 172). This heat dissipation fin HS1 is soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630, so that it is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630.

As described above, AC24V1 and AC24V2, whose common mode noise has been reduced by choke coil L1, are input to the rectifier circuit 630c, as well as to the anode terminals of diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and output from the cathode terminals of diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power supply circuit 630f.

The rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 is input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[16-1-3. Power factor correction circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630d is composed of N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter, referred to as "FETs") Q3 and Q4, and a peripheral circuit 630da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q3 and Q4, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes, and inductors.

The direct current with common mode noise reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and is also input directly to the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4, respectively, without passing through the peripheral circuit 630da. The gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 receive a gate signal for the power factor correction circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power supply circuit via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminals and drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

The direct current with the common mode noise reduced by the choke coil L2 is output from the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 with the power factor improved by suppressing the generation of harmonics through switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da. The package type of the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 is the same type as the package type of the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (the above-mentioned TO-220F), and is fixed to the heat dissipation fin HS2 (see FIG. 172). The heat dissipation fin HS2 is arranged in parallel with the above-mentioned heat dissipation fin HS1 at a predetermined distance, and is soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630, thereby being grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630.

The DC whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improvement circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[16-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminals of the plurality of electrolytic capacitors are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and the positive terminals of the electrolytic capacitors are The DC whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improvement circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e, which smoothes (smooths) the pulsating current from the DC whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improvement circuit 630d to generate a power supply. The circuit 630f outputs a signal to the PFC-OUT terminal, and fuse FUSE3 (in this embodiment, the fuse FUSE3 has the same shape as fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and is a transparent glass tube with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are The power is supplied as +35V DC from power supply board 630 to each board inside pachinko machine 1 via a fuse (made of metal) or type B fuse as stipulated in the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law).

[16-1-5. Power supply circuit]
When the DC from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power supply generating circuit 630f generates DC +12V and DC +5V from this input DC. The power supply generating circuit 630f outputs the generated DC +12V from the +12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and outputs the generated DC +5V from the +5V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

The power supply creation circuit 630f controls the output of a power factor correction gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor correction circuit 630d, thereby controlling the switching of FETs Q3 and Q4 in the power factor correction circuit 630d and the peripheral circuit 630da to suppress the generation of harmonics.

In the power supply generating circuit 630f, AC24V1 and AC24V2, in which common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are input to the AC-DET terminal via diodes D5 and D6. The power supply generating circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to this AC-DET terminal and determines whether or not to output a gate signal for the power supply breakdown circuit from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g.

If the plug of the power wiring (not shown) is not inserted into a power outlet of AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines in the island equipment of the amusement hall, but is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V power supply voltage for the gaming machines, then a power supply voltage higher than DC +35V will be input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

The power supply creation circuit 630f is capable of outputting a gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit to the power supply destruction circuit 630g when the magnitude of the power supply voltage, in which common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 and input to the AC-DET terminal, reaches a predetermined value (threshold value: in this embodiment, set to approximately 50 V).

When the power supply creation circuit 630f outputs a gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit 630g, the power supply destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g enters short mode, and the power switch 630a is turned on, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 flows through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g toward the CGND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f all at once, causing a large current to flow through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, causing one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to melt.

The GND terminal of the power supply circuit 630f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630.

[16-1-6. Power supply breakdown circuit]
The power supply destruction circuit 630g is composed of an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter, referred to as "FET") Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. The other end of resistor R24 and the other end of capacitor C22 are electrically connected to one end of resistor R25, one end of which is electrically connected to the gate terminal of FET Q5, and therefore, in addition to the other end of resistor R25, the other end of resistor R24 and the other end of capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

When the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of FET Q5 via resistor R25, FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of FET Q5 (the drain terminal and source terminal of FET Q5 become an overcurrent), destroying FET Q5 and maintaining a short mode state in which the drain terminal and source terminal of FET Q5 are conductive. Note that although the package type of FET Q5 is the same type (the above-mentioned TO-220F) as the package type of FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, unlike FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, it is located in a position that does not contact the heat sink fins HS1 and HS2. Specifically, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are respectively fixed to the heat dissipation fins HS1, HS2 arranged in parallel at a predetermined distance apart, so that the back sides of the packages of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 fixed to the heat dissipation fins HS1, HS2 are parallel to each other, whereas the FET Q5 is arranged between the heat dissipation fins HS1, HS2 and the back side of the package of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 fixed to the heat dissipation fins HS1, HS2 are perpendicular to each other, and is not fixed to the heat dissipation fins HS1, HS2 at all (see Figures 172 and 173). This is because the purpose of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 is to absorb the heat and cool them through the heat dissipation fins HS1, HS2 so that they are not destroyed by heat generation, whereas the FET Q5 contributes to being destroyed in a short time by heat generation when the FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and source terminal of the FET Q5 become an overcurrent).

In other words, if the plug of the power wiring is not inserted into a power outlet of AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines in the island equipment of an amusement hall, but is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V power supply voltage for the gaming machines, the power supply creation circuit 630f outputs a gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit to the power supply destruction circuit 630g to control FET Q5 to self-destruct when the magnitude of the power supply voltage, from which common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal, reaches a predetermined value (threshold value: in this embodiment, set to approximately 50V). As a result, the drain terminal and source terminal of FET Q5 are maintained in a short mode state in which they are conductive, and the source terminal of FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply circuit 630f. Therefore, when the power switch 630a is turned on, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 flows through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FET Q5 in the short mode state in the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and then flows in one go toward the CGND terminal of the power supply circuit 630f. This causes a large current to flow through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, causing one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to melt, destroying only the power supply board 630. Even if the power supply wiring plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet with a commercial power supply voltage of AC 100V, it is possible to reliably prevent the destruction of each board inside the pachinko machine 1, except for the power supply board 630.

In addition, if the power cord plug is not inserted into a power outlet of AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines in the island equipment of the amusement hall, but is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage of AC 24V for the gaming machines, and FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is destroyed, even if fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are replaced and the power cord plug is inserted into a power outlet of AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines in the island equipment of the amusement hall, the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g will not be destroyed. Since FETQ5 has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained, a large current flows through fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, power switch 630a, noise countermeasure circuit 630b, rectifier circuit 630c, and FETQ5 in the power supply destruction circuit 630g, which is in the short mode, toward the CGND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f, causing a large current to flow through fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, causing one or both of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 to blow again. In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is not destroyed, even if the power cord plug is inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines of the pachinko island equipment, it is not possible to start playing.

[16-2. Method for identifying electronic components having the same shape]
Next, a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 are the FETs Q1, Q2 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, the FETs Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D9, D10 of the power factor correction circuit 630d, and the FET Q5 of the power supply breakdown circuit 630g, which are packaged in the same type (TO-220F) and the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are also packaged in the same shape (transparent glass tubes with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal)).

Although FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are completely different types of electronic components, FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are electronic components that will not be destroyed, and FET Q5 is the only electronic component that will be destroyed. Therefore, in this embodiment, among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, which are electronic components having the same shape and mounted on the power supply board 630, and which are the only electronic component that will be destroyed, a silk screen print with different characteristics from the others is used, which is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630.

Specifically, for the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, which are electronic components that cannot be destroyed, white outlines and thick white lines indicating the orientation of the electronic components are silk-printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, as shown in Fig. 174(a), with silk-prints TSLK1-4 for the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 and TSLK5-8 for the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4. The thick white lines are the sides that are fixed to the heat dissipation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 172, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 must be placed adjacent to each other in order to be fixed to the heat dissipation fins HS1 and HS2, and are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 so that the white outline silkscreen print where the heat dissipation fins HS1 and HS2 are placed is connected to the thick white lines of the silkscreen prints TSLK1 to 8.

In contrast, for the FETQ5, which is the only electronic component that is destroyed, as shown in FIG. 174(b), a white outline, multiple white diagonal lines ad1 arranged at equal intervals within the outline, and thick white lines indicating the orientation of the electronic component are silk-screened in the silk-screen print TSLK9 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. In other words, the white diagonal lines ad1 are displayed as a distinctive pattern.

Thus, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are electronic components having the same shape, by visually checking the white diagonal lines ad1, which are represented as a characteristic pattern in the silk screen prints TSLK1-9 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, it is possible to identify which electronic component, among different types of electronic components having the same shape, is the electronic component that should be paid more attention to than the other electronic components. This makes it extremely easy to identify which electronic component is the only one that will be destroyed among different types of electronic components having the same shape.

In addition, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a store clerk or other staff member at the game hall to look for FETQ5 over the phone, the person in charge can instruct the store clerk or other staff member at the game hall to look for the silk screen print TSLK9 that has the white diagonal lines ad1 that are shown as a distinctive pattern, allowing the store clerk or other staff member at the game hall to accurately grasp the location of FETQ5, making it easier for the service center person in charge to communicate with the store clerk or other staff member at the game hall.

As a result, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member or other clerk at the game hall over the phone about the FET Q5, the staff member or other clerk at the game hall can identify the FET Q5 that should be noted among the multiple electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, as instructed by the person in charge of the service center. Therefore, of the multiple electronic components, the FET Q5 that should be noted can be distinguished from the other electronic components, FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4, and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10.

In the above example, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are electronic components having the same shape, and among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, only the outline of the FET Q5 is silk-printed with a characteristic pattern, and the outlines of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are not silk-printed, but the only electronic component that is destroyed is the FET Q5, which is shown by the arrangement method. In other words, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are fixed to the heat dissipation fins HS1 and HS2 that are arranged in parallel at a predetermined distance, so that the back side of the package is parallel to the heat dissipation fins HS1 and HS2. On the other hand, the rear side of the package of the FET Q5 is perpendicular to the rear side of the package of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 fixed to the heat sink fins HS1, HS2. In this way, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components having the same shape, the FET Q5, which is the only electronic component that is destroyed, is the only one that is perpendicular to the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, so that it is possible to identify which electronic component is the electronic component that should be paid attention to compared to the other electronic components among different types of electronic components that have the same shape. This makes it extremely easy to identify which electronic component is the only electronic component that is destroyed among different types of electronic components that have the same shape. Furthermore, since FET Q5, which is the only electronic component that will be destroyed, is the only one that is arranged at right angles to FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, even if FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components having the same shape, when a staff member at the service center of the manufacturer of pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member or other attendant at the game hall to look for FET Q5 over the phone, the staff member or other attendant at the game hall can instruct the staff member or other attendant at the game hall to look for the only package that is arranged at right angles, thereby enabling the staff member or other attendant at the game hall to accurately grasp the position of FET Q5, thereby facilitating communication between the service center staff and the staff member or other attendant at the game hall. As a result, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member or other clerk at the game hall over the phone about the FET Q5, the staff member or other clerk at the game hall can identify the FET Q5 that should be noted among the multiple electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, as instructed by the person in charge of the service center. Therefore, the FET Q5 that should be noted among the multiple electronic components can be distinguished from the other electronic components, FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4, and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10.

In the above example, among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5, which are electronic components having the same shape, silkscreen printing of a distinctive pattern was performed only within the outline of FET Q5, and silkscreen printing was not performed within the outlines of FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, but the only electronic component that will be destroyed, FET Q5, was displayed by the layout method. Therefore, for example, another method of displaying a specific electronic component by the layout method among multiple electronic components having the same shape is shown. Figure 176 is a diagram showing a specific electronic component by the layout method among multiple electronic components having the same shape. As a method of arranging specific electronic components, for example, as shown in FIG. 176, when arranging FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 as electronic components having the same shape on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, TQ1 is arranged so that the heat sink mounting surface of TQ1 (the rear surface of TQ1) is parallel to the top-to-bottom direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, which has a rectangular shape, and TQ2 is arranged to the right of this TQ1 so that the heat sink mounting surface of TQ2 (the rear surface of TQ2) is parallel to the top-to-bottom direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and TQ3 is arranged diagonally to the right of this TQ2 by rotating the heat sink mounting surface of TQ3 (the rear surface of TQ3) by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) counterclockwise with respect to the straight line in the left-to-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. The heat sink mounting surface of TQ1 (rear surface of TQ1) and the heat sink mounting surface of TQ2 (rear surface of TQ2) are arranged parallel to each other. The part numbers of FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 may be arranged near TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 along their respective heat sink mounting surfaces (rear surface of TQ1, rear surface of TQ2, rear surface of TQ3) when silk screened (for example, the part number of TQ1 may be rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise along the heat sink mounting surface of TQ1 (rear surface of TQ1)). The part number of TQ2 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise along the heat sink mounting surface of TQ2 (rear surface of TQ2) and placed near TQ2 in the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. The part number of TQ3 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise along the heat sink mounting surface of TQ3 (rear surface of TQ3). 3. The component numbers TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 are rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise to a straight line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and placed near TQ3. Alternatively, the component numbers TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 may all be placed in the same direction near TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 (the component numbers of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 are all in the same direction, and the component numbers of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 may be placed in the left-right direction near TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 without being rotated at all in the counterclockwise direction, or the component numbers of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 may be rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise to be placed near TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 in the up-down direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630). In this way, even if the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 are electronic components having the same shape, TQ3 is arranged diagonally with respect to TQ1 and TQ2, and by making this diagonally arranged TQ3 a specific electronic component, it is possible to identify which electronic component is the electronic component that should be paid attention to compared to other electronic components among electronic components of the same type having the same shape. This makes it extremely easy to identify which electronic component is the specific electronic component among electronic components of the same type having the same shape. Also, since TQ3 is arranged diagonally with respect to TQ1 and TQ2, by making this diagonally arranged TQ3 a specific electronic component, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member of the game hall or other clerk to look for the FET TQ3 by instructing the staff member to look for the FET arranged diagonally, the staff member of the game hall or other clerk can accurately grasp the position of the FET TQ3, and this makes it easier for the staff member of the service center and the staff member of the game hall to communicate with each other. As a result, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member or other clerk of a game hall over the phone about the FET TQ3, the staff member or other clerk of the game hall can specify the FET TQ3 that is of note among the multiple electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, as instructed by the person in charge of the service center. Therefore, the FET TQ3 that is of note among the multiple electronic components can be distinguished from the FETs TQ1 and TQ2 of the other electronic components. For the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, the white outline and thick white lines shown in FIG. 174(a) may be silk-screened on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and for the FETs TQ1 and TQ2, the white outline shown in FIG. 174(a) may be silk-screened on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, while for the FET TQ3, the white outline shown in FIG. 174(b), multiple equally-spaced white diagonal lines ad1 within the outline, and thick white lines indicating the orientation of the electronic components may be silk-screened on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630.

For the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, the white outline shown in FIG. 174(b), the white diagonal lines ad1 arranged at equal intervals within the outline, and the thick white lines indicating the orientation of the electronic components may be printed as silk screen printing on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. The white diagonal lines ad1 shown in FIG. 174(b) are straight lines inclined 45 degrees downward to the right, so TQ1 is placed so that the heat sink mounting surface of TQ1 (the rear surface of TQ1) is parallel to the top-to-bottom direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and TQ2 is placed to the right of TQ1 so that the heat sink mounting surface of TQ2 (the rear surface of TQ2) is parallel to the top-to-bottom direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and TQ3 is placed to the right of TQ2 so that the heat sink mounting surface of TQ3 (the rear surface of TQ3) is parallel to the top-to-bottom direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. When TQ3 is disposed obliquely by rotating the white diagonal line ad1 silkscreened on TQ1 by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) counterclockwise with respect to a straight line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, the white diagonal line ad1 silkscreened on TQ1 becomes a straight line inclined at 45 degrees to the right, the white diagonal line ad1 silkscreened on TQ2 becomes a straight line inclined at 45 degrees to the right, and the white diagonal line ad1 silkscreened on TQ3 becomes a straight line in the left-right direction (horizontal line). As a result, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member or other attendant of the game hall to find the FET TQ3 by telephone, the staff member or other attendant of the game hall can identify the noteworthy FET TQ3 among the multiple electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630 according to the instructions of the person in charge of the service center, who says, "Find an electronic component with a white diagonal line silkscreened as a straight line in the left-right direction (horizontal line)." Therefore, among multiple electronic components, the FET of interest, TQ3, can be distinguished from the FETs TQ1 and TQ2 of other electronic components.

For the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, when the white outline shown in FIG. 174(b), the white diagonal lines ad1 arranged at equal intervals within this outline, and the thick white lines indicating the orientation of the electronic components are printed as silk screen printing on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, TQ1 is arranged so that the heat sink mounting surface of TQ1 (the rear surface of TQ1) is parallel to the top-to-bottom direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and the heat sink mounting surface of TQ2 (the rear surface of TQ2) is parallel to the top-to-bottom direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 to the right of this TQ1. When TQ2 is arranged so that it is parallel to the surface of the power supply board 630, and the heat sink mounting surface of TQ3 (the rear surface of TQ3) is arranged to the right of TQ2 so that it is parallel to the top-to-bottom direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, in other words, when the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 are arranged parallel to each other in the top-to-bottom direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, the white diagonal line ad1 silkscreened on TQ1 and TQ2 can both be straight lines inclined at 45 degrees to the right, while the white diagonal line ad1 silkscreened on TQ3 can be a straight line (horizontal line) in the left-to-right direction. Even in this case where electronic components of the same type and having the same shape are arranged parallel to each other, if a service center staff member of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 calls a game hall staff member or other attendant to instruct them to select FET TQ3, the game hall staff member or other attendant will be able to identify TQ3, which is a noteworthy FET, among the multiple electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, as instructed by the service center staff member to "find an electronic component with a silk-screened white diagonal line that runs straight (horizontal) from the left and right." Therefore, even in the case where electronic components of the same type and having the same shape are arranged parallel to each other, TQ3, which is a noteworthy FET, among the multiple electronic components, can be identified from TQ1 and TQ2, which are FETs of the other electronic components.

In addition to FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 as multiple electronic components having the same shape, when multiple ICs having the same shape, each integrating circuits such as AND circuits, OR circuits, and Schmitt trigger inverter circuits, are arranged on a substrate, IC1, IC2, and IC3 are arranged with the longitudinal directions of IC1 and IC2 aligned along the top-to-bottom direction of the substrate and parallel to each other, while the longitudinal direction of IC3 is rotated a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) counterclockwise relative to a straight line in the left-to-right direction of the substrate and arranged at an angle, thereby making it extremely easy to identify which electronic component is a specific electronic component among electronic components of the same type and having the same shape. In addition, since IC3 is disposed diagonally with respect to IC1 and IC2, by making this diagonally disposed IC3 a specific electronic component, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a clerk or other staff member of the game hall to look for IC3 by telephone, the clerk or other staff member of the game hall can accurately grasp the position of IC3 by instructing the clerk or other staff member to look for an IC disposed diagonally, so that communication between the person in charge of the service center and the staff or other staff member of the game hall can be facilitated. As a result, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a clerk or other staff member of the game hall to look for IC3 by telephone, the staff or other staff member of the game hall can specify IC3, which is an IC to be noted, among the multiple electronic components mounted on the board, as instructed by the person in charge of the service center. By using IC1 and IC2, the IC3, which is an IC to be noted, among the multiple electronic components, can be identified from IC1 and IC2, which are the ICs of the other electronic components. For IC1, IC2, and IC3, white outlines may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board as silk screen printing, or for IC1 and IC2, white outlines and white diagonal lines formed along the outer periphery of the outlines may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board as silk screen printing to indicate that IC3 is a specific electronic component. Also, IC1 and IC2 are arranged parallel to each other with their longitudinal directions aligned along the vertical direction of the board, while IC3 is rotated at a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) counterclockwise with respect to a straight line in the horizontal direction of the board and arranged diagonally, but IC3 may also be arranged along the vertical direction of the board. In this case, IC3's longitudinal direction is perpendicular to IC1 and IC2's longitudinal directions.

As described above, FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different electronic components, whereas fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are the same type of electronic component. However, if the power cord plug is not inserted into a power outlet of AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines in the island equipment of an amusement hall, but is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage of AC 24V for the gaming machines, then, as described above, FET Q5 of power supply destruction circuit 630g will self-destruct and the short mode will be maintained, and a large current will flow through fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, causing one or both of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 to melt. In other words, as a trace of the power cord being mistakenly plugged into a 100V AC power outlet, fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are the electronic components that will be destroyed, and then one or both of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are the electronic components that will be destroyed. Therefore, in this embodiment, among fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, which are electronic components having the same shape and mounted on the power supply board 630, a fuse that has different characteristics from the others is used for silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, in order to make it easier to identify the electronic component that will be destroyed.

Specifically, for fuse FUSE3, an electronic component that will not be destroyed even if the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet with a commercial power supply voltage of AC 100V, a white outline is silk-screened as silk-screen print FSLK1 on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, as shown in FIG. 175(a).

In contrast, for fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components that are destroyed as a trace of a power cord plug being mistakenly inserted into a 100V AC power outlet, as shown in Fig. 175(b), a white outline and a solid white area ad2 within the outline are silk-screened, and silk-screen prints FSLK2 and FSLK3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. In other words, the solid white area ad2 is displayed as a distinctive pattern. Although both ends of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are soldered to the power supply board 630 with support brackets (not shown), the area inside the white outline and the area around the support brackets is designed to be visible as a solid white area ad2, and the area inside the white outline that corresponds to the transparent glass tubes excluding both ends of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is designed to be clearly visible through the transparent glass tubes.

In this way, even if fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components with the same shape, by visually checking the solid white area ad2, which is represented as a distinctive pattern among the silk screen prints FSLK1-3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, it is possible to identify which electronic components of the same type and shape should be noted more than the other electronic components. This makes it extremely easy to identify which electronic components of the same type and shape show signs of a power cord plug being mistakenly inserted into a 100V AC commercial power outlet.

In addition, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member or other clerk at the game hall to locate fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 over the phone, the person in charge can instruct the clerk or other clerk at the game hall to look for the silk screen prints FSLK2 and 3 that have the solid white area ad2, which is shown as a distinctive pattern, and the clerk or other clerk at the game hall can accurately determine the location of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, making it easier for the service center person to communicate with the clerk or other clerk at the game hall.

As a result, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs an attendant such as a staff member of an amusement parlor over the phone regarding fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the attendant such as a staff member of the amusement parlor can identify fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 that require attention among the multiple electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630 as instructed by the person in charge of the service center. Therefore, among the multiple electronic components, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 that require attention can be distinguished from fuse FUSE3, which is another electronic component.

As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are detachably attached to the support metal fittings (also called fuse holders) soldered to the power supply board 630, so that they can be replaced if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 melt. In the above example, the white diagonal lines ad1 and the solid white area ad2, which are shown as characteristic patterns, are silk-screened in the area inside the white outline and the area around the support metal fittings. In another example 1, at least the area inside the white outline that corresponds to the transparent glass tube, excluding the area around the support metal fittings, may be silk-screened with a characteristic pattern. Alternatively, the area inside the white outline that corresponds to the support metal fittings may not be silk-screened with a characteristic pattern, or only the outline of the area corresponding to the glass tube of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 (not limited to the area that matches the shape of the glass tube, but may be the area that overlaps with part of the glass tube) may be silk-screened without silk-screening the outline of the support metal fittings. For example, the area corresponding to the glass tubes of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may be silk-screened with an elliptical outline different from the normal outline and the area inside this outline painted solid white, and the area corresponding to the glass tube of fuse FUSE3 may be silk-screened with a normal rectangular outline and the area inside this outline painted solid white. In this case, the outline shape of the silk-screen prints makes it possible to distinguish noteworthy fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 from another electronic component, fuse FUSE3.

In the above example, the outline of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 is silk-screened with a distinctive pattern only, and the outline of fuse FUSE3 is not silk-screened. As another example 2, if fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape and mounted on the power supply board 630, and the electronic component to be destroyed is easily identifiable, silk-screening may be performed on all of the outlines of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3. In this case, the shape of the outline of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 as the electronic components to be destroyed may be made different from the shape of the outline of fuse FUSE3, and the outline may be silk-screened in a solid white color.

In the above example, the characteristic pattern is silk-screened only within the outline of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and not within the outline of fuse FUSE3. However, it is also possible to silk-screen only the outlines for placing the support brackets (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, and to use the melting confirmation area formed in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 instead of silk-screening. Figure 177 shows examples (a) and (b) where it is difficult to use the melting confirmation area, examples (part 1) (c) and (d) where the melting confirmation area can be used, and examples (part 2) (e) and (f) where the melting confirmation area can be used.

As described above, if the power cord plug is accidentally inserted into a power outlet with a commercial power voltage of AC 100V, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 will blow but fuse FUSE3 will not blow. Therefore, for the fuse FUSE3 that does not melt when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, the copper foil surface 630xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 has one fixed terminal and one connection terminal on each of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuse FUSE3, as shown in Fig. 177 (a), four through holes 630xs having land patterns into which a total of four terminals are inserted and soldered, and one wiring pattern 630xn in an area corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, and a foil-punched area is formed around the four through holes 630xs and the wiring pattern 630xn. Also, a board ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "solid ground") is formed on the copper foil surface 630xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. The area of the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is the melting confirmation area 630xc. Of the four through holes 630xs, two through holes 630xs into which the connection terminals are inserted are connected by wiring patterns (not shown) formed on the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the power supply board 630. When a dark colored (e.g., green or black) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, as shown in FIG. 177(b), a silk screen print FSLK1' is printed on the dark colored resist as a silk screen print of a white rectangular outline line indicating the arrangement position of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3. The reason for adopting this dark color resist liquid is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse is generally silver compared to the color of the material, so a color with a different contrast from the color of the metal element (fuse wire) makes it easier to check the fuse blowing. Note that the silk screen print FSLK1', which is a rectangular outline line, may surround the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, may surround a part of the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, or may not show the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 at all and may not be silk screen printed at all. In this way, for the fuse FUSE3 that does not blow when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, the wiring pattern 630xn can be routed in the blow confirmation area 630xc in the area of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3. The wiring pattern 630xn is not limited to one wiring pattern, but may be a plurality of wiring patterns. Even if a light-colored (e.g., white) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 instead of a dark-colored (e.g., green or black) resist liquid, the blowing of the fuse can be confirmed by the contrast between the light-colored resist liquid and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, a silk screen print FSLK1' is printed on the light-colored resist as a silk screen print of a rectangular outline having a dark color (e.g., green or black) indicating the arrangement position of the support metal (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 (this silk screen print FSLK1' may surround the outline of the support metal (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, may surround a part of the outline of the support metal (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, or may not show the outline of the support metal (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 at all and may not be silk screen printed at all). Also, after a resist liquid of a predetermined color (e.g., green) is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, the resist may be entirely covered by silk-screen printing in a light color (e.g., white). Even with this configuration, the blown fuse can be confirmed by the contrast between the light-colored silk-screen printing and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, a silk-screen print FSLK1' is printed as a silk-screen print on the back surface (solder surface) of the power supply board 630, with a rectangular outline represented by a light-colored (e.g., white) dashed line indicating the position of the support metal (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 (this silk-screen print FSLK1' may surround the outline of the support metal (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, may surround a part of the outline of the support metal (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, or may not show the outline of the support metal (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 at all and may not be silk-screened at all).

In contrast, for fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which melt when the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet with a commercial power supply voltage of AC 100V, the copper foil surface 630xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 has one fixed terminal and one connection terminal on the support metal fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, as shown in Figure 177 (c). Two through holes 630xs1 having a land pattern in which two terminals are inserted and soldered to a support metal fitting (fuse holder) at one end, and two through holes 630xs2 having a land pattern in which two terminals are inserted and soldered to a support metal fitting (fuse holder) at the other end are formed, and a foil punching area 630xa1 having a rectangular shape is formed so as to surround the two through holes 630xs1, and a foil punching area 630xa2 having a rectangular shape is formed so as to surround the two through holes 630xs2. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 630x on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. The area of the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is a melting confirmation area 630xc, and the melting confirmation area 630xc is formed between the foil punch area 630xa1 and the foil punch area 630xa2, forming a solid ground. Note that the through hole 630xs1 of the two through holes 630xs1 through which the connection terminal is inserted, and the through hole 630xs2 of the two through holes 630xs2 through which the connection terminal is inserted are connected by wiring patterns (not shown) formed on the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the power supply board 630. When a dark colored (e.g., green or black) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, as shown in FIG. 177(d), the silk screen prints FSLK2' and FSLK3' are printed on the dark colored resist as white rectangular outlines indicating the positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. The reason for using the dark colored resist liquid is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material, so a color that contrasts with the color of the metal element (fuse wire) makes it easier to check the blown fuse. The silk screen prints FSLK2' and FSLK3' as rectangular outlines may have the same size as the silk screen print FSLK1' described above, or may have a different size. Furthermore, these silk screen prints FSLK2', FSLK3' may surround the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, respectively, or may surround part of the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, respectively, or may not show the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 at all and may not be silk screen printed at all. In this way, for fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 that melt when the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, no wiring pattern is laid around the melting confirmation area 630xc of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 that corresponds to the transparent glass tubes of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, so that a flat surface can be formed for this melting confirmation area 630xc without forming any unevenness due to the wiring pattern and the foil cut-out area around this wiring pattern. This makes it possible to easily visually confirm the fuse wires (metal elements) housed in the transparent glass tubes of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 against the background of the melting confirmation area 630xc, which is a flat surface. Therefore, it is possible to easily check whether or not the fuse wires (metal elements) housed in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are broken (this embodiment may be referred to as "variant (1) in which the melting confirmation region of the power supply board does not have a wiring pattern"). Even if a light-colored (e.g., white) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630 instead of a dark-colored (e.g., green or black) resist liquid, the melting of the fuse can be checked by the contrast between the light color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, silk screen prints FSLK2', FSLK3' are printed on the light-colored resist as dark rectangular outlines indicating the positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 (these silk screen prints FSLK2', FSLK3' may surround the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, respectively, or may surround part of the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, respectively, or may not show the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 at all and may not be silk screen printed at all) (this form may be referred to as "variant (2) having no wiring pattern in the blowout confirmation area of the power supply board"). Also, a resist liquid of a predetermined color (e.g., green) may be applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and then the entire resist may be covered with silk screen printing in a light color (e.g., white). Even with this configuration, it is possible to check whether the fuse has blown by checking the contrast between the light color silk screen printing and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, silk screen prints FSLK2' and FSLK3' are printed as rectangular outlines represented by dashed lines in a light color (e.g., white) that indicate the placement positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (these silk screen prints FSLK2' and FSLK3' may surround the outlines of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, may surround part of the outlines of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or may not show the outlines of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 at all and may not be silk screen printed at all) (this aspect may be described as "variant (3) that does not have a wiring pattern in the meltdown confirmation area of the power supply board").

For fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which melt when the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a 100V AC power outlet, the power supply voltage is commercial. As shown in Fig. 177(e), the copper foil surface 630xp on the front (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630 has one fixed terminal and one connection terminal on the support brackets (fuse holders) at both ends of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and has four through holes 630xs with land patterns through which a total of four terminals are inserted and soldered, and a rectangular foil cut area 630xa surrounding the four through holes 630xs. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 630x on the front (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630. Of the foil cut area 630xa, the area of the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is the melting confirmation area 630xc. Of the four through holes 630xs, two through holes 630xs into which the connection terminals are inserted are connected by wiring patterns (not shown) formed on the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the power supply board 630. When a dark colored (e.g., green or black) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, as shown in FIG. 177(f), the silk screen prints FSLK2' and FSLK3' are printed on the dark colored resist as silk screen prints of outline lines having a white rectangular shape indicating the arrangement positions of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. The reason for adopting this dark color resist liquid is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse is generally silver compared to the color of the material, so a color with a contrast different from the color of the metal element (fuse wire) makes it easier to check the fuse blowing. Note that the silk screen prints FSLK2' and FSLK3', which are rectangular outline lines, may have the same size as the silk screen print FSLK1' described above, or may have a different size. In addition, these silk screen prints FSLK2' and FSLK3' may surround the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, or may surround a part of the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, or may not show the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 at all and may not be silk screen printed at all. In this way, for fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 that melt when the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, a foil punching area 630xa is formed to form a recess, but since no wiring pattern is laid out in the blowout confirmation area 630xc of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 in this foil punching area 630xa, a flat surface can be formed without forming any unevenness due to the wiring pattern and the foil punching area around this wiring pattern for this blowout confirmation area 630xc. This makes it possible to easily visually confirm the fuse wires (metal elements) housed in the transparent glass tubes of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 against the background of the blowout confirmation area 630xc, which is a flat surface. Therefore, it is possible to easily check whether or not the fuse wires (metal elements) housed in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are broken (this embodiment may be referred to as "variation example (4) in which the melting confirmation area of the power supply board does not have a wiring pattern"). Even if a light-colored (e.g., white) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630 instead of a dark-colored (e.g., green or black) resist liquid, the melting of the fuse can be checked by the contrast between the light color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, silk screen prints FSLK2', FSLK3' are printed on the light-colored resist as dark rectangular outlines indicating the positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 (these silk screen prints FSLK2', FSLK3' may surround the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, respectively, or may surround part of the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, respectively, or may not show the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 at all and may not be silk screen printed at all) (this form may be referred to as "variant (5) having no wiring pattern in the blowout confirmation area of the power supply board"). Also, a resist liquid of a predetermined color (e.g., green or yellow) may be applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and then the entire resist may be covered with a light color (e.g., white) silk screen printing. Even with this configuration, it is possible to check whether the fuse has blown by checking the contrast between the light color silk screen printing and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, silk screen prints FSLK2' and FSLK3' are printed as rectangular outlines represented by dashed lines in a light color (e.g., white) that indicate the placement positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (these silk screen prints FSLK2' and FSLK3' may surround the outlines of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, may surround part of the outlines of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or may not show the outlines of the support fittings (fuse holders) of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 at all and may not be silk screen printed at all) (this aspect may be described as "variant (6) that does not have a wiring pattern in the meltdown confirmation area of the power supply board").

In the above example, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are silk-printed with a distinctive pattern only within the outline of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and the fuse FUSE3 is not silk-printed within the outline. However, the fuse that is most likely to blow out of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 may be indicated by its layout. Figure 179 shows the fuse that is most likely to blow out of the three fuses by its layout. A method of arranging fuses that are most likely to melt is, for example, as shown in FIG. 179, when arranging fuses F1, F2, and F3 on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, the fuse F1 is arranged with its longitudinal direction aligned along the top-to-bottom direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 having a rectangular shape (i.e., the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 faces the top-to-bottom direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630), the fuse F2 is arranged with its longitudinal direction aligned along the left-to-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 (i.e., the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 faces the left-to-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630), and the fuse F3 is arranged diagonally by rotating its longitudinal direction by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) counterclockwise with respect to a straight line in the left-to-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630x. The fuses F1 and F2 are disposed at right angles to each other. Note that, when silk-screen printing is performed, the part numbers of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 may be disposed near the fuses F1, F2, and F3 along the longitudinal direction of each of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 (for example, the part number of the fuse F1 is disposed near the fuse F1 along the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1, with the part number of the fuse F1 rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, facing the top-bottom direction of the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, the part number of the fuse F2 is disposed near the fuse F2 along the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2, facing the left-right direction of the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 without rotating the part number of the fuse F2 at all in the counterclockwise direction, and the part number of the fuse F3 is disposed near the fuse F3 along the longitudinal direction of the fuse F3, with the part number of the fuse F3 rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, facing the top-bottom direction of the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 ... 5 degrees) and rotated a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) counterclockwise with respect to a straight line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630), or may be arranged near the fuses F1, F2, F3, respectively, facing the same direction (the part numbers of the fuses F1, F2, F3 are all facing the same direction, and the part numbers of the fuses F1, F2, F3 may be arranged near the fuses F1, F2, F3, respectively, facing the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 without being rotated at all in the counterclockwise direction, or the part numbers of the fuses F1, F2, F3 may be rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise and arranged near the fuses F1, F2, F3, respectively, facing the up-down direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630). In this way, even if fuses F1, F2, and F3 are electronic components having the same shape, fuse F3 is disposed at an angle to fuses F1 and F2, and by making this obliquely disposed fuse F3 the fuse that is most likely to blow, it is possible to identify which electronic components of the same type and having the same shape should be paid more attention to than the other electronic components. This makes it extremely easy to identify which electronic components of the same type and having the same shape show signs of a power cord plug being mistakenly inserted into a 100V AC commercial power outlet. In addition, since the fuse F3 is disposed diagonally with respect to the fuses F1 and F2, the diagonally disposed fuse F3 is the fuse most likely to melt, and when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a clerk or other staff member of the game hall to look for the fuse F3 by telephone, the clerk or other staff member of the game hall can accurately grasp the location of the fuse F3 by instructing the clerk or other staff member of the game hall to look for the fuse disposed diagonally, and this facilitates communication between the person in charge of the service center and the staff or other staff member of the game hall. As a result, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a clerk or other staff member of the game hall to look for the fuse F3 by telephone, the staff or other staff member of the game hall can identify the fuse F3 that is of interest among the multiple electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630 as instructed by the person in charge of the service center. Therefore, the fuse F3 that is of interest among the multiple electronic components can be identified from the other electronic components, fuses F1 and F2. For fuses F1 and F2, the white outline shown in FIG. 175(a) may be printed as silk screen printing on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 (in this case, the above-mentioned other example 1 or other example 2 may be adopted), or the wiring pattern 630xn may be routed without forming any meltdown confirmation area shown in FIG. 177(a) and (b). For fuse F3, the white outline shown in FIG. 175(b) and the area ad2 in which the outline is solid white may be printed as silk screen printing on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, or the meltdown confirmation area 630xc, which is a flat surface shown in FIG. 177(c), (d) or FIG. 177(e), (f), may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630.

For fuses F1, F2, and F3, the white outline shown in FIG. 175(b) and the area ad2 within the outline, which is solidly painted white, may be printed as silk screen printing on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. The fuse F1 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 (i.e., the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 faces the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630), the fuse F2 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is along the horizontal direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 (i.e., the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 faces the horizontal direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630), and the fuse F3 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 (i.e., the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 faces the horizontal direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630). When the fuse F3 is disposed obliquely by rotating the fuse F1 by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) counterclockwise with respect to the horizontal straight line of the power supply board 630x, the silkscreened white solid area ad2 for the fuse F1 faces 90 degrees in the vertical direction, the silkscreened white solid area ad2 for the fuse F2 faces 0 degrees (zero degrees) in the horizontal direction, and the silkscreened white solid area ad2 for the fuse F3 faces 45 degrees. As a result, when a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member or other attendant of the game hall to select the FET TQ3 by telephone, the staff member or other attendant of the game hall can identify the fuse F3 to be noted among the multiple electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630 according to the instruction of the person in charge of the service center, "Find an electronic component with a silkscreened white solid area facing 45 degrees." Therefore, among the multiple electronic components, the fuse F3 of interest can be identified from the other electronic components, fuses F1 and F2.

In addition, for fuses F1, F2, and F3, when the white outline shown in FIG. 175(b) and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 as silk screen printing, the fuse F1 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is parallel to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and to the right of the fuse F1, the fuse F2 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is parallel to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. In the case where the fuse F2 is arranged in such a manner that the fuse F3 is arranged on the right side of the fuse F2 so that the longitudinal direction of the fuse F3 is parallel to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, that is, when the fuses F1, F2, and F3 are arranged in parallel to each other along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, the white solid area ad2 is all oriented at 90 degrees in the vertical direction, making it difficult to identify the electronic component only by the white solid area ad2. Therefore, in such a case, instead of the white solid area ad2, a plurality of white diagonal lines ad1' arranged at equal intervals within the outline may be silk-screened. In this case, for example, the white diagonal lines ad1' silk-screened on the fuses F1 and F2 may both be straight lines inclined at 45 degrees upward to the right, while the white diagonal line ad1' silk-screened on the fuses F3 may be straight lines (horizontal lines) in the horizontal direction. Even in this case where electronic components of the same type and having the same shape are arranged parallel to one another, if a person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 calls a staff member or other clerk at the game hall to instruct them on fuse F3, the staff member or other clerk at the game hall can identify fuse F3, which is of particular importance among the multiple electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, as instructed by the service center staff member to "find an electronic component where the silk-screened white diagonal line is a straight line (horizontal line) from left to right." Therefore, even in the case where electronic components of the same type and having the same shape are arranged parallel to one another, fuse F3, which is of particular importance among the multiple electronic components, can be identified from fuses F1 and F2, which are the other electronic components.

[16-3. Checking for fuse meltdown]
Next, confirmation of meltdown of the same type of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and when they melt down, the fuse wire (metal element) housed in the transparent glass tube breaks and soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube. Among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components that can show traces of the power cord plug being mistakenly inserted into a power outlet with a commercial power supply voltage of AC 100V, as described above, and melt down when the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet with a commercial power supply voltage of AC 100V. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to easily check the state of the blown fuse wire (metal element), the above-mentioned silk screen prints FSLK2 and 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as silk screen prints for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. As described above, the silk screen prints FSLK2 and 3 are designed to have the white solid area ad2 represented as a characteristic pattern, so that the presence or absence of a blown fuse wire (metal element) housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be easily checked by visually checking, through the transparent glass tube, the white solid area ad2 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2.

As a result, if an attendant such as a game parlor clerk or a worker who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5) mistakenly plugs the power cord plug that supplies power to the pachinko machine 1 into a power outlet with a commercial power voltage of AC 100V instead of a power outlet with a power voltage of AC 24V for game machines, and turns on the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630 to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1, the traces left by the fuse wire (metal element) housed in the transparent glass tube of one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 will be broken, and soot will adhere to the inside of the transparent glass tube. Therefore, even if an attendant such as a game parlor clerk or a worker claims that "I can't turn on the power even if I plug the power cord plug into the power outlet, so it must be a manufacturing defect," they will not be able to cover up (make excuses for) their own operational mistake (wiring mistake).

On the other hand, as described above, the silk screen print FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as the silk screen print for the fuse FUSE3. In this embodiment, green is used as the resist for the power supply board 630. In addition, in this embodiment, the area of the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the silk screen print FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3 is solidly painted with green resist. In the area of the solidly painted green resistor corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, no wiring pattern is laid out at all (that is, since the wiring pattern is formed to avoid the area of the solidly painted green resistor corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This improves the visibility of the state of the fuse wire (metal element) housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 by visually observing the area of the solidly painted green resistor corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 through the transparent glass tube, and makes it possible to check whether the fuse wire (metal element) is broken.

As described above, the power line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via the power line for the interface board (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 37, and the power line for the CR unit (not shown), and supplies AC 24VA and AC 24V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, the interface board 635 has a function as a means for relaying various signals, as well as a function as a means for supplying power to the CR unit (not shown). As a trace of the power cord being accidentally plugged into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, the interface board 635 is provided with only one fuse FUSE (not shown in the present embodiment, a transparent glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal) with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm, which is a type B fuse as stipulated in the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law), and the silk screen print shown in FIG. 175(a) for the fuse FUSE3 of the power supply board 630 described above is printed on its mounting surface. The area of the mounting surface of the interface board 635 corresponding to the silk printing for the fuse FUSE (not shown) is solidly coated with green resist. No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the solidly coated green resistor corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) (that is, the wiring pattern is formed to avoid the area of the solidly coated green resistor corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown), so that no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is to improve the visibility of the state of the fuse wire (metal element) housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE by visually checking the area of the solidly coated green resistor corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) through the transparent glass tube, and to check whether the fuse wire (metal element) is broken. The fuse FUSE (not shown) provided in the interface board 635 is provided on one of the AC24VA and AC24V supplied from the power line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630.

In addition, instead of silk printing, a fuse confirmation area may be used, which is formed in an area of the surface (mounting surface) of the interface board 635 corresponding to a transparent glass tube of a fuse (not shown) provided in the interface board 635 that fuses when the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet with a commercial power voltage of AC 100V. Figure 178 shows an example (part 1) (a) and (b) where the fuse confirmation area can be used, and an example (part 2) (c) and (d) where the fuse confirmation area can be used.

The fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 melts when the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet with a commercial power supply voltage of AC 100V (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "fuse (not shown)"), as shown in FIG. 178(a), is provided on the copper foil surface 635xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635. As a result, the support brackets (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuse (not shown) each have one fixed terminal and one connection terminal, as shown in FIG. 178(a). ) two through holes 635xs1 having a land pattern in which two terminals are inserted and soldered to a support metal fitting (fuse holder) at one end, and two through holes 635xs2 having a land pattern in which two terminals are inserted and soldered to a support metal fitting (fuse holder) at the other end are formed, and a foil punch area 635xa1 having a rectangular shape is formed so as to surround the two through holes 635xs1, and a foil punch area 635xa2 having a rectangular shape is formed so as to surround the two through holes 635xs2. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 635x on the front surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635. The region of the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) is a melting confirmation region 635xc, and the melting confirmation region 635xc is formed between the foil punching region 635xa1 and the foil punching region 635xa2, forming a solid ground. Note that the through hole 635xs1 of the two through holes 635xs1 through which the connection terminal is inserted, and the through hole 635xs2 of the two through holes 635xs2 through which the connection terminal is inserted are connected by wiring patterns (not shown) formed on the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the interface board 635. When a resist liquid of a dark color (e.g., green or black) is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635, as shown in FIG. 178(b), a silk screen print IFSLK is printed on the dark resist as a silk screen print of a white rectangular outline indicating the arrangement position of a fuse support metal (fuse holder) (not shown). The reason for adopting this dark resist liquid is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material, so a color that contrasts with the color of the metal element (fuse wire) makes it easier to check the blown fuse. The silk screen print IFSLK as a silk screen print of an outline having a rectangular shape may have the same size as the silk screen print FSLK1' of the power supply board 630 described above, or may have a different size. In addition, the silk screen print IFS LK may surround the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown), may surround a part of the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown), or may not show the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown) at all and may not be silk screen printed at all. In this way, for the fuse (not shown) provided in the interface board 635 that melts when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, no wiring pattern is laid around the melting confirmation area 635xc of the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown), so that a flat surface can be formed for the melting confirmation area 635xc without forming any unevenness due to the wiring pattern and the foil cut area around the wiring pattern. As a result, with the flat melting confirmation region 635xc as the background, it is possible to easily check for the presence or absence of a blown wire (metal element) housed in a transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) (this form may be described as "variation example (1) in which the melting confirmation region of the interface board does not have a wiring pattern"). Even if a light-colored (e.g., white) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635 instead of a dark-colored (e.g., green or black) resist liquid, the contrast between the light color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse allows the blown fuse to be confirmed. In this case, a silk screen print IFSLK is printed on the light-colored resist as a silk screen print of a dark rectangular outline showing the position of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown) (this silk screen print IFSLK may surround the outline of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown), may surround a part of the outline of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown), or may not show the outline of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown) at all and may not be silk screen printed at all) (this embodiment may be described as "Modification (2) in which the meltdown confirmation area of the interface board does not have a wiring pattern"). Also, a resist liquid of a predetermined color (e.g., green) may be applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635, and then the resist may be silk screen printed in a light color (e.g., white) so as to cover the entire resist. Even with this configuration, the meltdown of the fuse can be confirmed by the contrast between the light-colored silk screen print and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, the silk screen print IFS LK is printed as a silk screen print of a rectangular outline represented by a light-colored (e.g., white) dashed line indicating the position of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown) (this silk screen print IFS LK may surround the outline of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown), may surround part of the outline of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown), or may not show the outline of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown) at all and may not be silk screen printed at all) (this embodiment may be described as "variant (3) that does not have a wiring pattern in the meltdown confirmation area of the interface board").

In addition, for the fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 that melts when the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a 100V AC power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635 has one fixed terminal and one connection terminal on each of the support brackets (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuse (not shown), as shown in FIG. 178(c), four through holes 635xs having land patterns through which a total of four terminals are inserted and soldered, and a foil cut area 635xa having a rectangular shape surrounding the four through holes 635xs are formed. In addition, a solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 635x on the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635. Of the foil cut area 635xa, the area of the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) is the melting confirmation area 635xc. Of the four through holes 635xs, two through holes 635xs into which the connection terminals are inserted are connected by wiring patterns (not shown) formed on the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the interface board 635. When a dark colored (e.g., green or black) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635, as shown in FIG. 178(d), a silk screen print IFSLK is printed on the dark colored resist as a silk screen print of a white rectangular outline showing the position of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown). The reason for adopting this dark color resist liquid is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material, so a color with a different contrast to the color of the metal element (fuse wire) makes it easier to check the fuse blowing. Note that the silk screen print IFSLK, which is a rectangular outline line, may have the same size as the silk screen print FSLK1' of the power supply board 630 described above, or may have a different size. In addition, this silk screen print IFSLK may surround the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown), may surround a part of the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown), or may not show the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown) at all and may not be silk screen printed at all. In this way, for the fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635, which melts when the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, a foil punching area 635xa is formed to form a recess, but since no wiring pattern is routed around the fuse confirmation area 635xc of the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) in the foil punching area 635xa, a flat surface can be formed without forming any unevenness due to the wiring pattern and the foil punching area around the wiring pattern. As a result, with the fuse confirmation area 635xc, which is a flat surface, as a background, it is easy to check whether or not the fuse wire (metal element) housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) is broken (this embodiment may be described as "Modification (4) in which the fuse confirmation area of the interface board does not have a wiring pattern"). Even if a light-colored (e.g., white) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635 instead of a dark-colored (e.g., green or black) resist liquid, the blowing of the fuse can be confirmed by the contrast between the light-colored resist and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, a silk screen print IFSLK is printed on the light-colored resist as a silk screen print of a dark rectangular outline indicating the arrangement position of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown) (this silk screen print IFSLK may surround the outline of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown), may surround a part of the outline of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown), or may not show the outline of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown) at all and may not be silk screen printed at all) (this embodiment may be described as "Modification (5) in which the interface board does not have a wiring pattern in the blowing confirmation area"). Also, a resist liquid of a predetermined color (e.g., green) may be applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface board 635, and then the resist may be silk-screened in a light color (e.g., white) to cover the entire resist. Even with this configuration, the blown fuse can be confirmed by the contrast between the light-colored silk-screening and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, the silk-screening IFSLK is printed as a silk-screening of a rectangular outline represented by a light-colored (e.g., white) dashed line indicating the position of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown) (this silk-screening IFSLK may surround the outline of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown), may surround a part of the outline of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown), or may not show the outline of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse (not shown) at all and may not be silk-screened at all) (this embodiment may be described as "Modification (6) in which the interface board does not have a wiring pattern in the blown confirmation area").

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply creation circuit 630f, the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and various electronic components are provided on one board called the power supply board 630, but it is also possible to configure it so that it is provided separately on two boards. For example, the power supply board 630 is composed of a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B, and the first power supply board 630A and the second power supply board 630B can be configured to be provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 36. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A is mainly composed of the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the earth connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in Fig. 171, and the circuit of the second power supply board 630B is mainly composed of the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor improvement circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply creating circuit 630f, the power supply breakdown circuit 630g, the choke coils L2, L3, and L4, the fuse FUSE3, and the wiring connector B shown in Fig. 171. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. The AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply board 630A are input to the wiring connector B in the second power supply board 630B via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring, and are input to the rectifier circuit 630c, as well as to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and are output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6 and input to the power supply generation circuit 630f. Note that various DC voltages such as DC +35V, DC +12V, and DC +5V generated in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A.

Incidentally, gaming machines have been proposed that include boards such as power supply boards that can generate various power sources required for the gaming device based on an external power source supplied from outside the gaming machine (for example, JP 2014-008221 A (Figure 2)). However, when a person in charge of the service center of the gaming machine manufacturer instructs a staff member or other clerk at the gaming parlor over the phone about a specific electronic component on the board, there has been a problem in that it is difficult to identify the electronic component that requires attention among the multiple electronic components mounted on the board, as instructed by the service center staff member.

In addition, gaming machines have been proposed that include boards such as power supply boards that can generate various power sources required for the gaming device based on an external power source supplied from outside the gaming machine (for example, JP 2014-008221 A (Figure 2)). However, even if a person in charge at the service center of the gaming machine manufacturer calls a staff member or other clerk at the gaming hall to instruct them to check whether the fuse wire of the fuse installed on the board has melted and broken, it has been difficult to easily check whether the fuse wire has been blown.

The present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

For example, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine was used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as mahjong ball machines and arrange ball machines, and can also be applied to slot machines that use gaming medals to spin multiple drums (cylinders or reels). Here, a slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 180, the slot machine 6000 is configured with a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). The front door (front frame) 6002 can be opened from the main body (box) 6004 by inserting a key into the keyhole 6005 of a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turning it clockwise, with the hinge as the center of rotation.

The metal locking device is attached to a cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and is used to lock and open the main body (box) 6004 and the front door (front frame) 6002 in cooperation with a locking unit (not shown). The metal locking device includes a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending forward and backward, a metal keyhole 6005 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body, and a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) attached to the rear side of the cylinder body, which is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular metal key. The cylinder body of the metal locking device penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcement unit from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear, and has a pair of notches cut from the rear end toward the front at positions opposite each other across the central axis. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed relative to the main body (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder 654 of a metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear, and a pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into a pair of notches, so that the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted in the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate it. When the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit are in contact with each other when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed relative to the main body (box) 6004, the metal locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

The door frame reinforcement unit not only reinforces the front door (front frame) 6002 to provide it with rigidity, but also functions as a door frame metal earth and is electrically connected to an earth board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 via a door frame metal earth wire (not shown). In other words, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This earth board (not shown) is capable of temporarily collecting electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding (earthing) it to the island equipment of the amusement hall, and is electrically connected to the earth of the island equipment of the amusement hall via an island equipment earth wire (not shown).

An opening switch (not shown) capable of detecting the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 relative to the main body part (box) 6004 is disposed on the main body part (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. This opening switch does not detect the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 relative to the main body part (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal due to the opening/closing operation of the metal locking device, but detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 relative to the main body part (box) 6004 separately from the opening/closing operation of the metal locking device. In addition, the opening switch is not disposed near the metal locking device, but is disposed on the main body part (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002 at a position below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the metal locking device. In this way, even if electromagnetic noise penetrates into a metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the opening switch is not affected by this electromagnetic noise.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front of the slot machine 6000 and is provided with various decorative parts. Some of these decorative parts are not decorated at all, while others are decorated on the entire front and back. This decorative plating is a precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has electrical conductivity, so electromagnetic noise may enter. Among the various decorative parts, those that are decorated on the entire front and back are electrically connected to a metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit that constitutes the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown) (some of the various decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and some are electrically connected by attaching a conductive member directly to the metal door frame reinforcement unit). This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative parts from entering the board ground of the various decorative boards provided in the various decorative parts by transmitting it to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. Furthermore, electromagnetic noise that penetrates into those decorative parts that have decorative plating on the entire front and back is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), then to the earth board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 via the door frame metal earth wire, and then from the earth board to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment earth wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. In other words, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

An electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static removal section at a specified location on the front of the front door (front frame) 6002, or, when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body (box) 6004, an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static removal section on the opening side opposite the side where the hinges are located (closing side). The electrostatic removal pad can remove noise (electromagnetic noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front of the slot machine 6000 and includes various decorative parts. Some of these decorative parts are not plated at all, while others are plated on the entire front and back. The decorative parts that are plated on the entire front and back are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). The earth board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 is electrically connected to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment earth wire. However, the metal door frame earth wire may not be electrically connected to the earth board, but may be electrically connected to the terminal of the power board of the power supply unit 620c provided inside the main body (box) 6004, to electrically connect the metal door frame reinforcement unit and the power board. The power board is supplied with 24V AC from the island equipment of the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (line) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and the N terminal of the power supply board to which N (neutral) is input is connected to the grounded side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that protects against transient excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) usually has a high resistance value and hardly passes any current, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, its resistance value instantly decreases and current passes, and when the excessive voltage disappears, it has the ability to return to its original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board to the N terminal of the power supply board by the surge protection element (surge absorber) to the ground side (earth) and is removed from the slot machine 6000.

The upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is formed with a protruding portion that protrudes forward from the game panel 6006. On this protruding portion, a medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010, 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a center stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, etc. are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. In addition, a savings settlement button 6022 and a decorative panel 6024 are arranged on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative panel 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, center stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, and accumulated settlement button 6022 are electrically connected to a main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. The main control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004.

In addition to the main control board 1310, the main control board box 1320 also contains a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a capable of changing the setting value is mounted. In other words, as described above, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004, so that the setting key switch 1311a is arranged inside the main body part (box) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004, or may be attached and fixed to the housing of the power supply unit 620c provided inside the main body part (box) 6004. In addition to the above-mentioned setting key switch 1311a, the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 may also be equipped with a setting switch button for selecting and switching the setting value, a setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot), and the above-mentioned setting change permission lamp 1310z.

The setting key switch 1311a has a configuration substantially identical to that of the one provided in the pachinko machine 1 described above, and the setting key cylinder into which the setting key is inserted and rotated is housed in its metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing. The front surface and the opposite surface (rear surface) of the setting key cylinder are formed of a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. The front surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is disposed substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder, which has an insertion port for inserting the setting key, and the opposite surface (rear surface) of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is disposed substantially flush with the opposite surface (rear surface) of the setting key cylinder from the front surface. When the setting key cylinder is housed in the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder are electrically connected.

The configurations of the main control board 1310, setting change board 1311, setting key switch 1311a, main control board box 1320, etc. (including other configurations (variations)) are substantially the same as those provided in the pachinko machine 1 described above, and have the same effects, so a description thereof will be omitted. However, to give an example, even if electromagnetic noise caused by static electricity being charged and discharged by a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a enters from the front of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided in the setting change board 1311, as described above, the foil punching of the setting change board 1311 will be prevented in the copper planes on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. By forming the recessed areas SINSx and SINSy, a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1, SLH2 having a long oblong hole shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311, through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted, are electrically insulated from the solid earth (board ground) formed on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. Therefore, electromagnetic noise caused by static electricity being charged and discharged by a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a can be attenuated by the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. This prevents electromagnetic noise caused by static electricity discharge from the person accessing the setting key switch 1311a from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311, so there is absolutely no effect on the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board that controls the progress of the game, via the setting change board 1311, and there is no fluctuation in the ground line that transmits the board ground (ground). This contributes to preventing malfunctions of the slot machine 6000 and damage to electronic components.

It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the space between the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder is filled with non-conductive resin (insulating resin) to allow the setting key cylinder to rotate relative to the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, and the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder are not electrically connected but are insulated. Even if electromagnetic noise intrudes from the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, this electromagnetic noise is prevented from intruding into the solid earth (board ground) formed on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 via the foil punching areas SINSx and SINSy formed on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, and is attenuated by the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing itself. In other words, the foil punching areas SINSx and SINSy can prevent electromagnetic noise from the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing from intruding into the board ground of the setting change board 1311. This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering from the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing on the setting change board 1311 side, so that the electromagnetic noise can be reliably prevented from traveling through the setting change board 1311 to the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board that controls the progress of the game, and there is no fluctuation in the ground line that transmits the board ground (ground). This can therefore contribute to preventing malfunctions of the slot machine 6000 and damage to electronic components.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed in approximately the center of the game panel 6006, and through this display window, three variable rotors (not shown) and a performance device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 can be seen. The three variable rotors (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004. In contrast, the performance device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

Each of these variable rotors has a translucent pattern band with multiple types of patterns (e.g., bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) printed on it as pattern information, affixed to the cylindrical framework. Such cylindrical variable rotors are called reels or drums in gaming machines such as slot machines, and each variable rotor is connected to the output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown). These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and as the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, multiple types of patterns appear to change continuously from top to bottom through the display window mentioned above.

The performance device comprises multiple movable performance bodies (not shown), the performance display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which multiple LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls the progress of the performance by performing various controls such as operation control of the multiple movable performance bodies, drawing control of the performance display device 1600, and light emission control of the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards. The peripheral control unit 1500 comprises the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

When a predetermined number of medals are inserted as game media into the medal slot 6008, the main control board 1310 starts the varying display of the pattern information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and stops the varying display of the pattern information based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the center stop button 6018, or the right stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-awarding state (jackpot game state) on the condition that the pattern information takes on a predetermined specific display form, and pays out a large amount of medals as game media into the receiving tray 6026.

According to this slot machine 6000, the slot machine is provided with a front door 6002 on the front side as a door that can be opened and closed, a main control board 1310 housed in a main control board box 1320 as a board on which electronic components are mounted, a metal locking device provided on the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 as a first device that can perform a first operation (when opening the front door (front frame) 6002 to the main body part (box) 6004) by operating a first key (a regular metal key carried by a staff member or other attendant at the game hall), and a setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310 as a second device that can perform a second operation (when changing a setting value or checking the current setting value) by operating a second key (setting key) different from the first key, and in which a signal line by operating the second key is electrically connected to electronic components. The setting key switch 1311a can set multiple types of winning probabilities (when changing the setting value) and can also check the current setting value (when checking the current setting value). The metal locking device installed on the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 is installed in front of the front door (front frame) 6002, and the housing of the metal locking device is electrically connected to the ground side. The setting key switch 1311a is installed behind the front door (front frame) 6002, and the housing of the setting key switch 1311a is electrically insulated and not connected to the ground side.

Specifically, the metal cylindrical cylinder body, which is the housing of the metal locking device of the front door 6002, is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side or the ground side, which is the N (neutral) of 24V AC. In addition, by forming the foil cut-out areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 in the copper planes on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a long elongated hole shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted can be electrically insulated from the solid earth (board ground) formed on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. For this reason, the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a is electrically insulated from the solid earth (board ground) formed on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311.

In this way, since the housing of the metal locking device provided in front of the front door (front frame) 6002 is electrically connected to the ground side, even if noise (electromagnetic noise) enters the metal locking device, this entered noise (electromagnetic noise) is released to the ground side, so that the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is the board on which electronic components are mounted, is not changed. Furthermore, since the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing which is the housing of the setting key switch 1311a provided behind the front door (front frame) 6002 is electrically insulated and not connected to the ground side, even if noise (electromagnetic noise) enters the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, this entered noise (electromagnetic noise) is attenuated by the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing itself, so that the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is the board on which electronic components are mounted, is not changed. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and damage to electronic components.

In addition, the cylindrical metal cylinder body which is the housing of the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 or the ground side which is the N (neutral) of the 24V AC supplied to the slot machine 6000, while the cylindrical metal (or rectangular) housing which is the housing of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to and is insulated from the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 or the ground side which is the N (neutral) of the 24V AC supplied to the slot machine 6000. This allows the metallic cylindrical cylinder body to be electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 or the ground side, which is the N (neutral) of the 24V AC supplied to the slot machine 6000, while the metallic tubular (or rectangular) housing can be electrically isolated from the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 and the ground side, which is the N (neutral) of the 24V AC supplied to the slot machine 6000.

In addition, after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened by the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 and the locking unit not shown (i.e., after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body portion (box) 6004), multiple types of winning probabilities can be made settable (when changing the setting value) and the current setting value that has been set can be made checkable (when checking the current setting value that has been set). This makes it possible to prevent access to the setting key switch 1311a to operate it and set it to a state in which the setting value can be set (when changing the setting value) or the setting value can be confirmed (when checking the current setting value) unless the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened by the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 and the locking unit (not shown) (i.e., after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body part (box) 6004), thereby improving security for the setting key switch 1311a.

In the fusion gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 starts the varying display of the pattern information based on the operation of the start lever 6014 when a predetermined number of game balls are inserted into the ball slot 6008' as game media, and stops the varying display of the pattern information based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the center stop button 6018, or the right stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-granting state (jackpot game state) on the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as game media into the tray 6026.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 100 Door frame lower unit 120 Bulging portion 123 Device arrangement portion 130 Upper tray (storage tray)
131 Storage area 131a Front area 131b Side area 132 Bottom wall 133 Rear peripheral wall (peripheral wall)
134 Front peripheral wall 135 Supply port 136 Delivery port 137 Alignment section 138 Storage light-emitting decoration section (light-emitting decoration section)
138a LED
150 Door frame production device (production device)
1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel plate 1120 Panel holder 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board (performance control means)
1511 Peripheral control unit (performance control means)
1512: Performance display control unit (performance control means)
1600 Effect display device (effect display means)
3000 Back unit 3200 Back second performance unit (front decoration)
3210 Rotating ornament (front ornament)
3228 Second outer back decoration (front decoration)
3229 Second inner back decoration (front decoration)
3230 Second inner circumference decoration on the back (front decoration)
3300 Back third performance unit 3310 Upper unit 3311 Upper vertical ring decoration (movable decoration)
3312 First decorative body 3313 Second decorative body 3320 Back third upper drive motor (drive motor)
3330 Lower unit 3331 Lower vertical ring decoration (movable decoration)
3332 First decorative body 3333 Second decorative body 3340 Back third lower drive motor (drive motor)
3350 Left unit 3351 Left side ring decoration (movable decoration)
3352 First decorative body 3353 Second decorative body 3360 Back third left drive motor (drive motor)
3370 Right unit 3371 Right side ring decoration (movable decoration)
3372 First decorative body 3373 Second decorative body 3380 Back third right drive motor (drive motor)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of holding a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and awarding a predetermined benefit based on the result of the lottery,
A specific mode generating means for generating a specific mode in which progress of a game is disabled;
A specific abnormality detection means for detecting a specific abnormality;
A specific abnormality notification means for performing a specific abnormality notification corresponding to the specific abnormality,
The specific mode can be canceled by a specific administrator operation,
The specific abnormality detection means is capable of detecting the specific abnormality not only during normal play but also during the specific mode,
The specific abnormality notification can be performed using a plurality of notification units,
the plurality of notification units include a specific notification unit provided at a position that is difficult or impossible for a player to see, and a special notification unit provided at a position that is easy for a player to see,
The specific abnormality notification performed during normal play can be recognized by both the specific notification unit and the special notification unit, but the specific abnormality notification performed during the specific mode cannot be recognized by the special notification unit and can be recognized by the specific notification unit,
A special light-emitting unit that can emit light in connection with the execution of the lottery and is provided at a position that is easily visible to a player but is different from the special notification unit;
The special light-emitting unit is composed of a plurality of special light-emitting bodies,
In the specific mode, all of the plurality of special light emitters in the special light emitter are turned off,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specific mode is cancelled by the specific administrator operation, among the gaming information before the specific mode was generated, predetermined gaming information is initialized, but the specific gaming information is not initialized and is retained, and the specific mode cannot be cancelled without initializing the predetermined gaming information.

Images